1,'"-Vji il! iWD m SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. III! in^- - . ^ .. . 5 h; ;!'i!l;')5>5 ]i''H#"rr ', I I /^t^-l^^**^.^-^ :^^ / ^' /^J %^^/cz^f^ '^'^cTT^C^c/^ O^^^-^'^ '^^ PUBLISHEK'S PKEFACE. \ In issuing a book Almanac annually, the Publisher became aware of the want of a thoroughly revised Pilot for New Zealand and the South Seas. The last edition of the " New Zealand Pilot" was published in 1875. Since then, extensive harbour works have been canied out and new dangers dis- covered on the coast. ' To prepare a work of this character, however, so as to make it of any value tt)* mariners, it must be undertaken by a first-class navigator, and carried out with a care and at a length that is impossible in YMTy xjrcnnary Almanac. The Publisher, therefore, was highly gratified upon finding that Capt. Tilly, Examining Officer for Masters' and Mates' certificates under the Ncav Zealand Government, and whose surveyi..g work in the South Seas is well-known in Admiralty works, would be prepared to carry out the revision. The care and attention which Capt. Tilly has be- stowed on the work, not only in its preparation, but in revising every line afterwards before permitting the sheets to go to press, is worthy of all praise. Capt. Tilly has produced a book of colonial importance — one that might properly have occupied the attention of the New Zealand Government. To make the work a complete text-book for mariners sailing, from New Zealand ports, the nautical information from the English Official Nautical Almanacs for 1881, 1882, 1883 has been embodied. This has undergone a very careful revision, and may be accepted as thoroughly reliable. The whole book is offered at a lower price than is charged at the Customs for the "New Zealand Pilot." Some information with reference to the South Sea Islands, which it might have been desirable to include, has been omitted, but it is the inten- tion of the Publisher, should public appreciation warrant, to issue supple- ments embodying new and additional information as required. HENRY BRETT, W Publisher. c^i^ ^,.^'.^ EDITOR'S PREFACE. ■' The object of this work is to give, in as shortyB compass as is com- patible with accurate information and intelHgent description, sailing directions for the coast of New Zealand, the Pacific Islands, with which our trade is chiefly connected, and one or two of the principal ports in Australia and Tasmania. The tables of positions, and of courses and distances, will, it is hoped prove useful ; with regard to the former it should be borne in mind that the state of hydrography is still such in some of these regions, that many discrepancies still exist, and many dangers marked 'doubtful,' still remain so. The introductory chapter is meant to convey a general impression of the resources of the different parts of New Zealand to any one looking out for a port, for a cargo. The works mainly followed are the latest editions of the ' New Zealand Pilot,' and Findlay's '"North and South Pacific Directories,' combined with all the latest alterations, and hydrographical know- ledge. A very brief notice of winds, hurricanes, and currents, is all that the size of the work permits. The table of Declinations, etc., at the end, will be found useful to those who may not have a Nautical Almanac ; rendering them in fact independent of one, for their island voyages. The Editor avails himself of this opportunity for stating that he has received most ready and cordial assistance from every one to whom he has applied for information ; and that, wherever practica- ble, the name of the contributor has been inserted, both as a suitabel means of recognition, and as a guarantee for accuracy. One gentle- man — ^whose name does not otherwise appear, must be mentioned here — Capt. L J. Burgess, Chief Harbour Master, who was actively engaged in the first survey of New Zealand, over thirty years ago, and who has now fittingly supervised this last attempt ; to his care and practical knowledge, is due whatever merits this work may possess of accurate technical arrangement. With a view to render a future edition (should one be required) more valuable, the Editor will thanldully receive all further infor- mation that may be entrusted to him. T. C. Tilly, Navg. -Lieut., R.N Auckland, November, 1880. Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/brettsnewzealandOOtillrich CONTENTS, PAGE Table of Positions — New Zealand, South Sea Islands, Australia, Tasmania 9 Light Houses — Coasts of New Zealand, Australia, etc. - - - - 22 Bearings and Distances— Coast of New Zealand 23 Courses and Distances — from New Zealand ------ 26 Introduction - Provincial Districts, and Principal Ports of New Zealand - 27 Sailing Directions : General Signals for all New Zealand Ports 38 North Island New Zealand : East Coast — Three Kings to Cape Brett 39 ,, Cape Brett to Auckland 50 ,, Auckland to the Thames - - - . - - 64 ,, Great Barrier : Coast from Cape Colville to East Cape, including Islands and Rocks in Bay of Plenty - 69 ,, East Cape to Mahia Peninsula ----- 83 „ Mahia Peninsula to Cape Palliser - - - - 87 North Side Cook Strait — Cape Palliser to New Plymouth - - 91 South Side of Cook Strait — Cape Campell to Cape Farewell, including Blind and Massacre Bays 106 North Island — West Coast — Cape Maria Van Diemen to New Plymouth 124 South Island — East Coast — Cape Campbell to eastern entrance Foveaux Strait 138 Foveaux Strait, Stewart Island, Traps and Snares - - - - 154 South Island — West Coast — West entrance Foveaux Strait to Cape Farewell - - - 169 Auckland, Campbell, Antipodes, Bounty, and Chatham Islands - - 192 Islands between 20° and 40° S. — Detached, Tubuai Group, Cook's Islands 199 Tongan Islands, etc. - - . - 203 New Caledonia 211 Loyalty Islands 221 Society Islands 223 Islands between 10" and 20° S. — Detached ------ 226 Saraoan Islands 228 Fiji Islands - . - . . 232 Detached Islands and Shoals, North of Fiji, and East of New Hebrides 253 Detached Islands and Shoals between the Equator and io° S. - - 254 Tokolau or Union Group 255 Ellice Group - 255 Gilbert Archipelago - - - - - - -. - - -257 Marshall Archipelago . - - 260 Caroline Archipelago 265 Coral Sea --:--------- 271 Australia, New South Wales 275 Bass Strait 277 Tasmania 278 Australia — Victoria 279 Winds Hurricanes, Currents ...... . . 282 I ^Si brTe^t t^s NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC IP I L O T. The information contained in these preliminary chapters will not— for the sake of brevity — he repeated in the Sailing Directions therefore requested to refer to them as occasion requires. TABLE OF POSITIONS. j;^to Ecahtnb. the reader is Name of Place. Tides. H.W. F.&C. Rise. North Island. Three Kings island, N.E. island, N.E. extreme „ „ „ S.W. island, West extreme ■ Cape Maria Van Diemen, Cape islet - North cape. Cape islet - - . . . Parenga-renga harbour, Kohau or Coal point Cape Kara Kara, Cape extreme Monganui harbour. White's point Stephenson island, N.W. extreme Wangaroa harbour. Peach island Cavalli islands. Great island, N.E. extreme - Bay of islands, Motu Mea islet Cape Brett (Piercy island) - Wangaruru harbour. Grove point Poor Knights island, North island, North point Tutukaka harbour. North head Bream head, extreme - - - - . Wangari harbour, Lort point - - - . Moko-Hinou islands. North- West islet Great Barrier island, Aiguilles, or Needles point - „ „ „ Nagle cove , „ „ Cape Barrier, extreme Rodney point, extreme - - - - . Kawau island, Bon Accord harbour, Momono jetty Auckland harbour. Depot point Coromandel harbour, Tuhuia island - Cape Colville, North point . . . . Cuvier island, highest peak. . - - . Mercury islands. East island {Wakahau), North cliff ------- Mercury bay, Huki-huki pah, entrance of Man- grove river ------ Alderman islands. East island - - . . Kati-Kati river. North head - - . . Mayor island, highest peak (110 feet) - Tauranga harbour, Monganui Mt. (apex 860 feet) - Astrolabe reef, Centre (dries 4 feet L.W.) Motiti island. North point - - . . Maketu, Town point - - . . . Whale I. or Motu Hora, highest peak (1,167 feet) - Opotiki river. Mission house - . - . White island Summit (863 feet) - - - - Te Kaha point. Outer extreme - - - . Runaway cape, extreme . . . . Hick's bay, Motakawa, or Long point - - - East cape. East cape islet (120 feei) Open bay. North point - . . - - Tolago bay, Motu-Heka islet - - . - Gable-end Foreland, the AVhile Gable - Ariel rocks. Centre of reef - . . . Poverty bay. Young Nick's head Mahia peninsula Table cape (extreme) 34 6 31 10 31 29 34 25 34 31 34 47 35 34 58 35 2 34 59 35 17 35 10 35 24 35 29 35 28 35 52 35 51 35 55 36 1 36 9 36 22 36 17 36 26 36 50 36 49 36 28 36 36 36 49 36 56 37 27 37 16 37 37 37 31 37 35 37 43 37 50 37 58 37 30 37 43 37 31 37 32 37 40 37 58 38 21 38 32 38 44 38 45 39 6 172 10 172 2 172 39 173 5 173 2 173 25 173 34 173 48 173 47 173 59 174 7 174 21 174 22 174 45 174 34 174 37 174 32 175 5 175 26 175 21 175 33 174 51 174 50 174 49 175 26 175 22 175 48 175 58 375 45 176 8 176 1 176 15 176 11 176 27 176 26 176 29 176 59 177 18 177 12 177 42 178 1 178 21 178 36 178 23 178 21 178 18 178 19 177 59 178 1 h. m. 8 8 7 7 54 8 15 8 15 8 7 15 7 10 7 7 6 25 6 30 7 5 7^ 7 21 7 45 7 10 7 30 7 7 30 6 30 9 16 9 8 55 8 50 8 8 6 5 feet. 7 springs 7 springs 7 6-9 7-9 7-9 7-9 7—10 7—10 9 -11 5-7 4^-6 7 springs 9 „ 7 7 7 „ 5-7 10 BRKITS NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Lat. South. Long. East. Tides. Name of Place. H.W. F.&C. Rise. o / ' h. m. feet. Mahia peninsula, Portland island, S'thern extreme 39 18 177 53 7 45 Ilawke's bay, Ahuriri harbour, Maori pa 39 29 176 55 750 3 springs „ Long point anchorage, Moemoto head - - - - - - - 39 8 177 51 6 5-4 Cape Kidnappers, extreme . . . - 39 38 177 8 Cape Turnagain, East extreme - . . - 40 29 176 40 7 Castle point, extreme - . . . - 40 55 176 14 Flat point, extreme . . . . - 41 15 175 58 Cape Palliser, extreme ..... 41 37 175 17 6 Taourakira head, extreme .... 41 26 174 56 Port Nicholson, Pencarrow light 41 22 174 52 „ ,. Observatory .... 41 17 174 47 4 30 2-5 Cape Terawiti, extreme ..... 41 17 174 38 Mana island. Anchorage point .... Kapiti islaud, Long pomt .... 41 6 174 48 7 S-8 40 50 174 58 Mayhew islet .... Manawatu river. North entrance point 40 54 174 55 9 6 springs 40 27 175 15 10 Rangitiki river. North entrance 40 18 175 15 Wanganui river. North head . . . - 39 57 175 1 10 15 6-8 Waimate pa, summit ..... 39 36 174 10 Cape Egmont, extreme ..... Mount Egmont, summit (8.270 feet) 39 17 173 46 930 39 18 174 5 New Plymouth, Flagstaff .... 39 4 174 5 930 9.. 12 Mokau river, entrance ..... 38 43 174 39 Albatross point. North extreme ... 38 6 174 43 Kavi^hia harbour, South head .... 38 5 174 49 930 12 springs Gannet island, summit (80 feet) 37 57 174 35 Aotea harbour. South head .... 37 ^d 174 51 10 12—9* Whaingaroa harbour. South entrance point - 37 47 174 53 9 50 12-9i 9-12 Waikato river, Maraitai villave 37 24 174 47 9 30 Manukau harbour, Paratutai (North head) flagstaff 37 3 174 32 9 30 10-13 Onehunga (South point) - Kaipara harbour. South head (Okaka) 36 56 174 48 10 50 9-14 36 25 174 15 10 65 8-10 „ North entrance head 36 24 174 7 „ „ Watering place, Wairoa branch 36 20 174 12 10 50 8-11 Monganui bluff, the Bluff (2,046 feet) - 35 46 173 35 9 45 Hokianga river, flagstaff at entrance - 35 32 J 73 23 9 45 10 springs „ „ Upper Mission station 35 22 173 33 9 58 Wangape, North head ..... Herekino. South point ..... 35 22 173 14 9 35 18 173 11 9 Reef point, extreme ..... 35 11 173 5 8 45 ,, Middle Island. Cape Campbell, extreme of cape 41 43 174 18 6 Wttipapa point, extreme ..... 42 10 173 58 Kaikoura peninsula. East head .... 42 26 173 44 5 4-6 Amuri bluff", extreme of bluff .... 42 34 173 32 Waiaua river, entrance ..... 42 47 173 23 Sail rock, centre ...... 42 58 173 14 Pegasus bay, Motunau or Table island 43 4 174 6 4 „ Double Corner (landing place) - 43 8 172 50 Port Cooper or Victoria, Lyttelton Custom-House - 43 37 172 44 4 20 4-7J Pigeon bay, settlement cove .... 43 41 172 54 Bank's peninsula. East head .... 43 46 173 9 3 45 Akaroa harbour, Observation head 43 50 172 58 3 24 6—8 Hakatere, or Ashburton river. North entrance point Timaru, flagstaff, landing-place 44 5 171 49 44 23 171 17 Waihao river, entrance ..... 44 47 171 13 Waitangi river. North entrance head - 44 55 171 12 Cape Wan brow, extreme cape . . . - Moerangi bay. Look-out bluff .... 45 7 171 1 45 16 170 54 „ Whaler's Home point - 45 22 170 54 3 Waikouaiti bay, Jones' head .... 45 37 170 43 Otago harbour, Tairoa head .... 45 47 170 45 250 5—7 „ Koputai bay, South pent 45 49 170 39 330 Cape Saunders, extreme of cape Taieri island. East point ..... 45 53 170 46 2 45 46 4 170 15 Quoin point, extreme ..... 46 9 170 13 Molyneux bay, landing place .... 46 24 169 49 3 &-8 Nugget point, extreme of rocks .... 46 27 169 51 Long point, extreme of cliffs (275 feet) - 46 35 169 36 Chaslands Mistake, extreme of point - 46 39 169 21 Brothers point, outer islet .... 46 40 169 14 Slope point, extreme - . . . . 46 41 169 2 Ruapuke island, observation bluff (N.E. head) 46 47 168 3i 1 6-8 Awarua, or Bluff harbour, point near anchorage - 46 36 168 22 1 18 6-8 New River (Oretc), Bombay rock 46 31 168 18 12 10 4-8 Centre island. South end - . . . . 46 29 167 53 12 15 Tewaewae bay, Pahia point .... 46 21 167 43 „ Mid-bay reef . . . . 46 17 167 29 „ Sandhill point - . . . 46 16 167 22 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 11 Name of Place, Lat. South. Long. East. Tides. H. W, F.&C. Rise. Solander island, summit (1,100 feet) Green islets, outer islet .... Windsor point, extreme . - - - Preservation inlet. Cuttle cove - Chalky inlet, North port. Little island - Cape Providence, extreme . - - West cape, extreme .... Dusky bay, or sound. Five Fingers point „ „ Duck cove, observation rock - Break sea island. North east point Daggs' sound. Observatory head. North arm Doubtful inlet, Febrero point Thompson sound, Deas cove Nancy sound. Heel cove. First reach - Caswell sound, Green Point islet George sound. Anchorage cove, on the north shore Bligh sound. Bounty cove .... Milford sound, Anita bay .... „ ,. Freshwater basin Awarua river, entrance ..... Cascade point, north extreme .... Jackson bay, huts in S.W. corner Open-Bay islets, S.W. islet, centre Arnott point, extreme ..... Bruce bay, anchorage - - . . . Mount Cook, highest peak (13,200) Okarito. lagoon and river .... Abut head, extreme . . . . - Bold head, extreme ..... Hokitika, entrance ..... Grey river, entrance ..... Perpendicular point, centre cliff Cape Foulwind, extreme - ... - „ „ Three steeples (northern) - Buller river (Kawatira), entrance ... Rocks' point, extreme ..... Wanganui inlet, entrance .... Cape Farewell, extreme .... Farewell spit, Bush end, extreme of spit Massacre bay, Tasman corner, a bel head - „ „ Motu Pipi river, west entrance Astrolabe road, A dele island, N.E. point Nelson haven. Magazine on Boulder bank - Croisilles harbour, Shingle point on N. shore Current basin, Sandy bay. Cross point Stephens island. North end .... D'Urville island, Port Hardy : East arm. Wooding point ...... D'Urville island. Beach, Rangitoto road Pelorus sound, Sentinel rock, off entrance - „ „ Ohingaroa bay— beach „ „ Kopi bay, central head, on south side Guards bay, Titirangi bay, cliff at head Cape Lambert, extreme - - . - Port Gore, Head of Melville cove Cape Jackson, extreme .... Queen Charlotte sound, Motuara, South summit Tory channel. White rocks, Jackson's bay - Brothers islets. North islet (235 feet) - Wellington head summit (2,190 feet) - Port Underwood, Bell's cove. Flag point Wairau river, entrance, north side W hite bluff, summit of noi-th extreme (890 feet) South, or Stewart Island. Black Rock point, extreme Port William, Howell's house ... Paterson's inlet. Glory cove - - - Port Adventure, White beach. South end - Lord's river. First cove within entrance Port Pegasus, Cove abreast Anchorage island S.W. cape, S.W. extreme, Stewart's island - Traps rocks. North reef, N. W. rock (5 ft.) - „ „ South reef, centre - Wedge island, centre .... Mason bay, North Ernest island. South cove Codfish island, N.W. extreme, high rocks - Snares Island. Snares Islands, S. W, island o / ' h. m. 46 36 166 55 46 15 166 49 46 13 166 40 46 4 166 41 11 20 45 59 166 36 11 5 46 1 166 28 11 15 45 54 166 26 45 44 166 28 11 15 45 44 166 40 10 50 45 35 166 39 11 15 45 23 166 52 11 30 45 17 166 50 45 12 166 58 11 30 45 11 167 6 45 2 167 18 44 55 167 27 44 53 167 32 10 45 44 35 167 47 44 40 167 56 11 15 44 18 168 4 bychrt. 44 168 22 43 59 168 38 43 52 168 54 43 45 169 10 43 36 169 37 43 36 170 12 43 14 170 11 11 40 43 7 170 17 42 58 170 41 42 45 170 57 939 42 28 171 11 10 15 42 8 171 19 41 45 171 34 11 15 41 43 171 35 41 46 171 45 40 58 172 6 40 35 172 33 9 20 40 30 172 42 9 40 33 173 2 40 32 172 45 8 45 40 50 172 52 950 40 59 173 5 9 10 41 16 173 17 9 50 41 3 173 43 9 40 56 173 52 10 40 40 174 1 40 47 173 55 955 40 48 173 58 40 53 174 10 935 41 14 173 52 10 40 55 173 58 935 41 1 174 9 40 59 174 15 41 2 174 12 9 41 174 20 41 6 174 17 850 41 13 174 18 8 15 41 6 174 27 41 11 174 23 41 20 174 9 6 10 41 30 174 5 6 41 33 174 10 46 41 167 54 46 50 168 6 12 45 46 58 168 11 1 10 47 4 168 12 12 20 47 7 108 10 1 20 47 12 167 42 11 50 47 17 167 30 12 47 22 167 55 47 33 167 53 12 47 13 167 21 12 46 57 167 42 11 10 46 46 167 38 48_ 7 106 29 feet. 6-10 6—10 8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 9 6-8 7 10—14 9-13^ 10-14 14—10 10-14 12-8 5—12 12 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 4-6 6—8 6-8 6-8 6-8 7 springs 6-8 12 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Lat. Long. Tides. Name of Place. FI.W. Rise. Chatham Islands* c , , h. m. feet. Ware-kauri, Point Allison . . * . 43 17S 177 7W (B Wangaroabay ...... 43 49 176 53 I Waitangi harbour, village .... Waka Kaiwa Hills 43 58 176 32 o 44 6 176 48 O . Cape Eveque, or Beaufort .... 44 7 176 49 jf" CO Cape Young ----.-. Rangi Tutahi, or Two Sistei'S I. - 43 41 176 47 ^% 43 33 177 sJ 1 Western reef, VV^est point .... 43 55 177 13 9^ Sentry point, or SoUtaire reef .... 44 12 176 47 i C goutit J orth cay .... 16 56 149 12 Herald's surprise . - 17 21 148 29 Flinder's reefs, S. end . . . . - 17 53 148 28 9 15 8-12 Malay reef ...... 17 58 1.49 20 Holmes reef, W. extreme .... Coringa, or Willis islets, E. one ... Madelaine cays, S. one ..... 16 30 147 48 16 53 149 55 16 36 150 20 Willis's islets, S one 16 17 150 1 8 6 Osprey reef, N.E. extreme .... 13 51 146 36 8 36 6 Diana bank (?) p.d. ..... Eastern fields, N.E. extreme - ; - - 15 41 150 30 10 2 145 45 Grimes shoal ...... 23 53 161 10 Hamond island (?) ..... 22 30 162 51 A rock (doubtful) 24 160 15 Tamarreef . - 21 21 161 36 Fairway reef ...... 21 161 45 Nereous shoal ...... 20 5 160 30 La Brillante shoal ..... 23 14 169 55 Middleton reef, W, end .... 29 29 159 4 Elizabeth reef, centre - - - - 29 55 159 4 9 8 30 9spring3 Lord Howe's island, mount Gower 31 36 159 5 6 N.E. bay ...;.. 31 32 159 5 Ball pyramid ..;... 31 45 159 15 Coast of Queensland. Cape Melville, N.E. extreme - - - 14 10 141 33 lAzavd island, summit : . . . 14 40 145 30 9 15 7—10 Cape Grafton, Northern summit 16 53 145 57 Fil/Roy isle, summit .... 16 56 146 1 Rockingham bay, Goold isle peak Cape Cleveland, N.W. extreme 18 9 146 12 19 10 147 1 7 30 10-12 Cape Bowling Green, lighthouse 19 19 147 27 Cape Upstart, Sandy bay .... 19 43 147 47 Port Denison, Observatory point Northumberland isles, S.E. peak Mackay, or Pioneer rock, lighthouse 20 1 148 18 9 30 6 21 57 150 44 21 10 149 12 11 7 10— 16sp. Port Bowen, Round islet .... 22 31 150 50 10 25 11—15 FitzRoy river, light vessel .... Cape Capricorn, lighthouse - ... 23 32 160 17 23 28 151 15 Capricorn group, Masthead islet, W. point Bunker group, No. 1 island .... Trfi,dy Elliott islet, lighthouse Port Curtis, Gatcombe lighthouse 23 33 151 44 9 10 23 54 152 24 24 7 152 45 23 53 151 24 9 30 10—12 Bustard head, lighthouse .... 24 151 43 Burnett river, lighthouse .... 24 45 152 25 930 8-9 Sandy cape, lighthouse ..... Breaksea spit, N.E. extreme .... 24 43 153 14 8 50 6-8 24 24 153 13 Wide bay, outer edge of bar - ; - - 25 49 153 10 8 30 6 Cape Moreton, lighthouse .... 27 2 153 29 930 3-7 Coast of New South Wales. Shoal bay, entrance ..... 29 25 153 22 Port Macquarie, entrance .... 31 25 152 54 9 15 5-3 Port Stephens, Stephens point lighthouse - Newcastle harbour. Nobby head, lighthouse Cape Three Points, second point 32 45 152 13 8 30 6-4 32 55 151 49 9 3—5 33 30 151 27 Broken bay, Bai'anjo head .... 33 35 151 20 8 30 5-7 Port Jackson, outer S. head lighthouse 33 51 151 18 8 15 5 and 4 Fort Macquarie ..... 33 52 151 14 Cape Banks, extreme . . . . - Bellambi bay, centre ..... 34 151 16 34 22 150 57 WoUongong head 34 25 150 56 Jervis bay, Bowen island, N. point ... 35 7 150 47 Jervis bay lighthouse ..... UUadiilla lighthouse 35 9 150 47 830 5 36 12 150 30 8 30 6 Batemen bay, S.W. Tollgate island 35 45 150 16 8 4-6 Cape Dromedary, extreme .... 36 18 150 9 Twofold bay, Look-out point lighthouse 37 4 149 55 ■ 8 15 517 Cape Howe, Gabo island lighthousej 37 34 149 56 850 6 Bass Straits. King island, cape Wickham lighthouse • • 39 35 143 57 48 3 Kent group. Deal island lighthouse Banks stream, Swan island lighthouse 39 30 147 21 11 10 8 40 43 148 8 22 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Lat. Long. Tides. Name of Place. ?.k^: ''i- " ' o ; h. m. feet. Tasmania. Eddjrstonc point (?) lighthouse 40 59S 148 22 E 9 39 7 Port Dalryraple, Low head light Hobartown, Fort Mulgrave .... 41 3 146 49 5 10-7 42 54 147 21 8 15 3i-4i Coast of Victoria. Port Albert lighthouse .... 38 46 146 41 Cape Schank lighthouse .... 38 29 144 53 Port PhiUip point. Lonsdale lighthouse 38 18 144 37 9 42 7-5 „ ^chnapper light .... 38 13 145 2 2 14 24 „ Geelong, customhouse 38 9 144 22 2 30 3i-24 „ Melbourne Observatory 37 50 144 59 2 48 Cape Otway lighthouse .... 38 52 143 31 Warrnambool. upper light .... Port Fairy, lighthouse .... Portland bay, Observatory hill 38 26 142 32 37 3 38 43 142 19 31 3 38 22 14138 Coast of South Australia. Cape Northumberland light .... 38 3 140 38 Cape Jaffa light --..-. 36 55 139 36 6 5 Kangaroo island, cape Willoughby lighthouse St. Vincent gulf, cape Jervis lighthouse 35 51 138 10 35 38 138 9 Glenelg flagstaff .... 34 59 138 33 „ Port Adelaide lighthouse 34 48 138 30 5 25 5-8 pghts— -doasts oi ^t\)) Zuhinb, ^^ustvalia, ^tc. New Zealand— Cape Maria Van Dieman, white, revolving every minute, visible 24^. Red, fixed to shew over Colombia reef. Tiritiri, white, fixed, visible 23i\ Ponui, Passage (Sandspit), wh itc, fixed, visible 12'. Portland Island, xohitc, revolving every 30 seconds, visible 24". „ Red, fixed, over Bull Rock. Napier, white, fixed, visible 18\ Pencarrow Head, white, fixed, visible 30'. Manukau Head, white, fixed, visible 26'. Brothers, Cook's Straits, wh ite, fiashing every 10 seconds, visible every 22". „ F'ixed, red, over Cook Rock. Cape Campbell, white, revolving every minute, visible 19'. Godley Head, white, fixed, visible 27'. Akaroa, white, flashing every 10 seconds, visible 22". Timaru, white, fixed, visible lU". Moeraki, white, fixed, visible 19". Taiaroa Head, red, fixed, visible 20'. Cape Saunders, tvhite, revolving every minute, visible 20". Nugget Point, white, fixed, A'isible 23". Dog Island, white, revolving every 30 seconds, visible 18". Centre Island, white fixed, visible 22^', with red arcs over inshore dangers, Puysegur Point, white, flashing every 10 seconds, visible 19". Hokitika, white, fixed, visible 16". Cape Fouhvind, white, revolving every 30 seconds, visible 19.V. Farewell Spit, white, revolving everyminute, visible 17", with red arc over Spit end. Nelson, white, fixed, visible 12i' with red arc to mark limit of anchorage. Australia— Cape Melville light vessel, off Channel Rock, in 14 fathoms, light visible 10". Lady Elliott Island,"'t(/7M7c,/as//mfl' every half minute, visible 10". Sandy Cape, white, revolving every 2 minutes, visible 22". Great Sandy Strait, North Bluff light, white, fixed, red between S. W. 5 W. and W. i S. Great Sandy Strait, Middle Bluff light, white, fixed, red between SS.W. i W., and S.i E., and obscured between N.N.W. ^ W., and N. by W. \ W. Cape Moreton light, white, revolving every minute, bright for 15 seconds and eclipsed 45 seconds, visible 26'. Shoal Bay, a red light, visible 6', shewn from pilot station. Sugar Loaf Poin"- light, to/tjYe, re i-oZtf?/ifir, greatest brilliancy every half minute, visible 22", and lixed green, visible 3" from S. to S E. by E. ^ E. Stephen's Point, white and red a,ltevna,te, flashing every minute, visible 17'. Newcastle, light, white, fixed, visible 18' from N. by E. i E. to S.W. by W. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 23 Broken Bay, Barango Head, Two bright, fixed (temporary), visible 8\ Sydney, Outer South Head, white, revolving every li minutes, visible 25*. ., Inner South Head, white, fixed, visible 15\ between N. W, by N. and S.W. i W. Woollongong Harbour, red. fixed, from S.S.W to W. by N. i N. Cape St. George, white, j'cd and green, alternate every i minute; white visible 18', red and green, 14\ Ulladulla Harbour, green, fixed, visible 7'. Twofold Bay, red, fixed, visible from N.W. by W. J W. to S.W. i S., 9\ Gabo Island, white, fixed, visible 20'. Bass Strait- Wilson's Promontory, fixed. Kent Group, lohite, revolving every minute, visible 35'. N. extreme King Island, white, fixed. Goose Island, fixed. Swan Island, lohite, revolving every minute, visible li\ Port Albert, red, flashing, visible 9' ; flashes every 3 minutes, but continuous within 3'. Cape Shanck, white, fixed, with a flash every 2 minutes, visible 25'. Port Phillip. Lonsdale Point, fixed, green, from N. by W, to N. W. i W., red, N.W. \ W. to W. by S., visible 10'. Port Phillip. Shortland Bluff, High light, white, fixed, between E. and N , visible i7'. Port Phillip, Shortland Bluff, Low light, red and white fixed, white from N.E. by E. to N.E., red from N.E. to N.N.E , and ichitc from N.N.E. to W. by N.: white light visible 14', red light 10'. Cape Otway, white, revolving with flash every minute, visible 2-1'. Warnambool Harbour, white, fixed, visible IJ:', and a lower fixed red. Port Fairy, red, fixed with flash every 3 minutes from N.E. i E to S. by E, i E., visible 9'. Portland Bay, fixed red (seaward), between N.W. \ W. and S. by E., and (in shore) white, visible 13'. Cape Northumberland, revolving, white, red and green, alternately 1 minute ; white light visible 18'. Cape Jaffa, xchite, revolving every half minute, visible 16'. Sturt Light, white, revolving every li minutes, visible 21'. Cape Jervis, white, fixed, from S.S.W. J W. to N, i W., visible 13'. Tasmania- Iron Pot, Derwent River, fixed light, visible U'. Cape Bruny, revolving every 1^ minutes, visible 22'. Port Dalrymple, revolving every 1% minutes, visible 15'. Currie Harbour, W. Coast. King Island, flashes every 12 seconds, visible 17'. Islands— New Caledonia. Bulari Passage, white, fixed, visible 20'. Suwaroff, an occasional light when traders are in the neighbourhood, Tahiti, Point Venus, white, fixed, visible 15'. Fiji, Levuka Harbour, two fixed ; upper white, visible 10' : lower red, visible 5'. in one E. J N. and W. i S. BEARINGS AND DISTANCES. Coast 0f ^eto Eeaknb. The following Bearings are magnetic, and the Bearings and Distances given are (except where otherwise stated) tlie actual ones from place to place :^ Northglsland (East Coast). Three Kings, Western Island, to Cape Mai*ia Van Dieman light— E. by S. S S., 36'. ,, Cape Morton Jones, N.E. extreme, to North Cape— E. \ »., 47'. North Cape to Stephenson's Island— S.E. by E. \ E., 48'. North Cape to Cape Brett— E.S.E., 78'. Cape Brett to N. extreme Poor Knights-S.E. by E. § E., 26'. to Sugar Loaf Rock— S.E. \ E., 30'. N. extreme Poor Knights, to W. extreme Moko-Hinou Islets— S.E. \ E., 31', „ „ to E. extreme Chickens— S.S.E., 26'. Sugar Loaf Rock to W. „ „ — S. by E \ E., 18'. to Bream Head— S. \ W., 18'. Bream Head to Bream Tail— S, by E. iJ E., lOi'. Bream Tail to McGregor Rock— N.E. \ E., 2f W. extreme Moko-Hinou to N.W. extreme Littje Barrier — S. by E. \ E., 16^'. West extreme Littie Barrier to Shearer Rock— South, 25'. E. extreme Chickens to E. extreme Kawau— S.S.E. J E., 32i'. Bream Tail to Cape Rodney— S.E. J E., 17*'. Cape Rodney to Takatau Point— S.E. J S., 5V. Takatau Point to E. extreme Kawau— S. E. hj S. \ S., 4?r'. E. extreme Kawau to Nelson Rock— E. by N. \ N„ V Nelson Rock to Flat Rock— E. I S., \\\ to Rangitoto Reef— S. \ E., 21', 24 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Flat Rock to Shearer Rock— S. by E. | E., 9^'. Shearer Rock to Rangitoto Reef— S. I W., 12\ Rangitoto Reef to N. Otanto Islet— N.E. § N. 8i*. „ to N. side Channel Island-N.E. by N., 32^. N. side Channel Island to N. extren^e Cuvier Island— E. by N. \ N. 21i\ to N. side Richard's Rock— E. J S.. 3r. Richard's Rock to E. extreme Red Mercury— S.E. | S., 2V. E. extreme Red Mercury to Tauranga— S.S.E.. 60*. to W. Alderman— S.E. by S. f S., 20i'. W. Alderman to W. extreme Mayor Island- S.E. f S., 2U\ W. extreme Mayor Island to Tauranga— S. f E., 19^'. Tauranga to Astrolabe Reef, N.E. § E., 13^'. Astrolabe Reef to N. extreme White Island— E. by N. i N., 35'. N. extreme Mayor Island to N. extreme White Island— E. i S., 47i'. N. extreme White Island to Cape Runaway— E. by N. i N., 38'. Cape Runaway to Midway Point— E. by N . | N. lOi'. Midway Point to Cape Matakawa (Hicks' Bay)— East, 6V. Red Mercury to ,. „ — E. by S., 127". Cape Matakawa to East Cape Islet— E. by S., f S., H\ East Cape Islet to Open Bay, S. Head— S. | W., 25\ East Cape Islet to Tokamapuhia Reef— South. 39'. Tokamapuhia Reef to S. Head Tologa Bay— S. f W., 5'. East Cape Islet to Ariel Rocks— S. i E., 65i'. Ariel Rocks to Gable-end Foreland-N. by'W. | W.. 12'. to Young Nick's Head— W. by S. | S., 15'. to Table Cape-S. by W. J W., 26'. to Bull Rook-S. by W. 36'. Bull Rock to Portland Light-S.W., 4i'. Portland Light to Ahuriri Bluff-S.W. by W. ^ W., U\\ to Cape Turnagain— S.S.W. J W., 91'. „ to Cape Kidnappers— S.W. westerly, iO\ Ahuriri Bluff to Cape Kidnappers— S.E. i E. 12|'. Cape Kidnappei*8 to Motu Kura— S. J W., 13J'. Motu Kura to Black Hand Reef— S. f W.. 24^'. Black Hand Reef to Cape Turnagain-S. | W., 18'. Cape Turnagain to Castle Point— S. by W. J W., 3U'. Castle Point to N.E. (Eclipse) Reef— 8. by W. 22'. N.E. (Eclipse) Reef to Kahau-S.S.W. i VV., lU'. Kahau to Ono Point— S.W. h S., 21f Ono Point to Cape Palllser-S.W. § W., 8'. Black Rocks (or from 1' S. of C. PaUiser) to Taurakira Head Reef— W. by N. 3 N 18' or (19i'). Taurakira Head Reef to Baring Head Reef— W.N. W., 3i'. Baring Head Reef to S. end Barrett's Reef— N.W. } N., 4'. Cape Terawhiti to Cape Campbell (Middle Island)— S. by W. } W.. 30*'. Nancarrow Head to „ „ —S.W. by S., 33*'. North Island ("West Coast). Cape Maria Van Dieman to N.W, extreme Columbia Reef— North, 3'. to Reef Point— S.E. i S., 48'. Reef Point to Wangape— S.E. i E., 13'. Wangape to North Head Hokianga— S.E. h E., 11'. N. Head Hokianga to N. Head Kaipara— S.E. i E., 64'. N. Head Kaipara to N. Head Manukau-S.K. i S., 44'. S. Head Manukau (along land) to Waikato River— S E. I- S., 23'. Waikato River to Whamgaroa Head— S.E. by S., 22'. Manukau to Kawhia N. Head, off entrance— S.S.E. i E., 62'. „ to Albatross Point— S. by E. | E., 63' to Piritoki Reef- S. by E. f E., 77'. „ to Mokau River, off entrance— S. by E. i E., 98'. to Waitara River— S. f E.. 116'. „ to Sugar Loaves, New Plymouth— S. i E., 122'. Sugar Loaves to N.W. point land near C. Egmont— S. W. i S.. 15'. Cape Egmont to Stephen's Island (Middle Island)— S.S.E., easterly, 84', to Codar Rock— S.E. by S. i S., 110'. Cape Egmont to Cape Terawhiti- S.E. by S. easterly, 126'. ,, to Opunake (along land)— S.Easterly, 11^'. Opunakc to Otumutua— S.E by E., 5'. Otumutua to Patea— E. by S. i S., 31' Patea to Wa totara Passage (along land)— 12' Waitotara Passage to Wanganui River— E. i S., 13'. Wanganui River to Manawatu River-S.E. bv S.. 33'. Manawatu River to S W. extreme Kapiti— S. by W. ^ W., 29'. S.W. point Kapiti to Mana Island— S. i W., 14'. to Cape Terawhiti-S.S.W. From 1' W.S.W. of Cape Terawhiti to 1' S. of Toms Rock— S.E., 6'. From 1' S. of Toms Rock to Pencarrow Light— E.N.E., 8A'. Cape Egmont to Farewell Spit Light (Middle Island)-S.'j W., 83'. „ to Nelson „ — S. i E., 121'. to Brothers Li^ht-S,E. by S. i S., 113'. Middle Island (East Coast and Cook's Straits). Farewell Spit Light to extreme of Spit (along Spit) -S.E. by E. easterly, 4i'- Extreme of Spit to Nelson— S.E. by S. i S., 40'. Nelson ofting (along land) to Pepin Point— N.E. by N. i N., 10'. Pepin Point to Cape Soucis N.E. i N., 10'. Cape Soucis to Piege Rocks Current Basin— N.E. i N., 9i*. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 25 N.E. point Stephen's Island to Cook's Rock— S.E. by E., 29i\ Cook's Rock to Brothers Light— S. S.E. \ E., 3 and 5-6th miles. to Cape Terawhiti (North Island) -S.E. ^ E., 17'. Brothers Light to Rocks Awash— S. i E., 3i\ to Cape Campbell— S. ^ E., 38\ West Head Tory Channel to 1^ S. of Toms Rock (North Island)— E. by S. | S., ISJ'. Wairau Light to Pencarrow Li^iht (North Island)— N.E. by E. i E., 3oi\ Cape Campbell (outer edge reef) to Waipapa Point>— S. by W. i W., 36^\ Waipapa Point to Kaikoura Peninsula— S. by W. i^ W., 19\ Kaikoura to Four-fathom Shoal— S. by W., 21\ Four-fathom Shoal to Sail Rock Point- S.S.W. i W., 15^'. Sail Rock Point to E. extreme Motunau Bank— S. W, by S. § S., 10'. Kaikoura to Godley Light, Port Lyttelton-S. by W. i W., 80\ „ to N.E. extreme Banks' Peninsula— S. i W., 84'. Cape Campbell to E. extreme ., — S. f W., lSi\ S.E extreme Banks' Peninsula to Otago Heads— S.W. by S. J S., 152'. K. extreme Banks' Peninsula to Akaroa Light (along land)— 10'. Akaroa to Timaru— S. W. J W., 77'. „ to Oamaru— S.W. by S.. 111'. C. Wanbrow to S.E. extreme Fish Reef— S. h E., 18'. Middle Island (East Coast and Foveaux Straits). S.E extreme Fish Reef to Tairoa Head, Otago Light— S. i W., 23^'. Tairoa Head Light to Cape Saunders Light— 7'. Cape Saunders to Nugget Point Light— S.W. by S. | S., 51'. Nugget Point to White Head-S. W. by S. i S., 7'. White Head to Long Point-S.W. i S., 6k\ Long Point to Chaslaud's Mistake- S.W. f W., 10*'. Chasland's Mistake to Brothers Point-S.W. by W. i W., 6'. Brothers Point to Slope Point Reefs— W.S.W. southerly, 7'. Slope Point Reefs to Waipapa Point Reefs— W. by S., 7'. to Dog Island Light- W. by S. i S., 21^'. Waipapa Point Reefs to The Blutf— VV. | S., 22'. The Bluff to Hapuka Reef- W. J N., 42'. Hapuka Reef to Windsor Point— West, 51'. Windsor Point to Table Rock— N.W. by W., 8^'. Table Rock to reef ofT Cape Providence— N.W. i W., 5i'. Middle Island ("West Coast). Farewell Spit Light, along Spit W. by N., 6.V, and W. by S. 9^' to Cape Farewell. Cape Farewell to Hitch Point-S.W. by W."^ W., 1^'. N. vV. extreme Middle Island (Hitch Point) to Wanganui Inlet— S.W. 5 S., 6.f . to Stewart's Reef— S.W. J S. 25i'. Stewart's Reef to Rocks Point^S. i W., 15'. Rocks Point to BuUer River— S. f W„ 65'. Stewart/s Reef to Cape Foul wind (Three Steeples N.W. extreme)— S. i W., 66j, Cape Foul wind (Three Steeples) to Perpendicular Point— S. by W., 26'. Perpendicular Point to Elizabeth Point— S. ^ W., 16'. Elizabeth Point to Grey River— S.E. by S., 4^'. Grey River to Hokitika— S. by W. ^ W., 20'. Hokitikato Abut Head— S.W. g S., 38'. Abut Head (along land) to Okarita Light- 8'. to Taumaki Island— S.W. f S., 73'. to N.W. point Jackson's Bay— S.W. i S., 88'. N.W. point Jackson's Bay to Cascade Point-S.W. by W., ^ W., 11^'. Cascade Point to Reef, Awarua Point— S.S.W. i W.. 22^'. Reef, Awarua Point, to Brig Rock, Milford Sound (along the land S. by westerly), 17^' Brig Kock, Milford Sound, to entrance off Bligh Sound— S.W. by S. J S., 18'. Entrance off Bligh Sound to George's Sound-S. W. by S. i S , 6'. George's Sound (along shoi-e) to entrance off Doubtful Sound— S.S.W., 17^'. Doubtful Sound to Daggs Soxmd— S. by W., 8'. Daggs Sound to W. extreme Break sea Island— S. J W., 13'. E. extreme Breaksea Island to Rocks off S.W. extreme Five Fingered Point— S.8.W, w., ir. Five Fingered Point to West Point— S. by E. J E., 12'. West Point to Cape Providence— S.S.E. 4', and 2^-' to S. eastward. South Island and Foveaux Straits. [ White Rocks, N. extreme, to The Bluff (Middle Island)— E.N. E., 21'. Port William entrance to Dog Island Light— N.E. by N. i N., 17'. Wreck Reef to „ „ -N. ^2Wm26'. „ to Bruce Reef— E.S.E., 3' N.W. extreme North Trap-S.W. | S., 22^'. S.W. Cape Reef to N.W. extreme North Trap-E. i N., 16f . „ „ to N. extreme South Trap— S.E. by E. fE., 21'. N.E. extreme South Trap to N.W, extreme North Trap -N. by W.. 10^'. N. extreme South Trap to Boomerang Breakers, p.d.— N.W. t N", 3i'. S.W. Cape to Snares Peak— S.S W., 62'. N.W. extreme Big Snares to N.E. of S.W. Rocks— S.W. i W., 2|'. N.W. extreme fc^nai'es to S. extreme South Trap— N.E., 70'. N. extreme Solander Island to Windsor Point— N.W. J N., 25'. S. extreme „ to Centre Island Light— N.E. by E. § E., 39^'. , „ to Dog Island Light— E. by N. i N., 61'. 26l BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT f earing^ vttti) §xistmxttB from <|lelD Ecitlanb. The following table gives the /r?(e bearings and distances of some of the islands, reefs, &c., in the different Gronps, from different points in New Zealand. It is more intended to giA-e an idea of actual distance than as an aid to navigation, as a glance at the chart will shew ; and is not, except in a primary way, intended to point out the course to be followed ; for which se& paragraph on Passages. Auckland to Cape Colville— iO\ Cape Colville to Opara— N. 75" E., 2120'. to Rimitara— N. 63" E., 1850'. to Haymet U.eef— N. 66" E., 1360\ „ to Rarotonga— N. 55° E., 1595\ to Tahiti— N. 59" E., 2195\ „ to Hiva Oa, Marquesas— N. 59" E., 3080'. to Suwarotf— N. 39" E., 1810\ to Manahika— N. 40° E., 2030'. to Penrhyn Island— X. 42" E., 2210\ to Starbuck Island— N. 43" E., 2530'. to Maiden Island— X. 41° E., 2570'. to Fanning Island— X"^. 30" E., 2790'. to Danger Island— X. 34" E., 1845'. ., to Kermadec Group — Esperance liock— X. 43" E., 415\ Raoul, or Sundar Island— X. 37" E., 542'. to Ranee Bank- N . 31" E., 860'. to X^. Minerva Reef— X. 21" E., 830', to Acis Reef— X. 40" E., 1060'. to Eoa Island, Tonga— X. 30" E., 1045'. to Savage Island— X. 37" E. 1300'. „ to Samoan Group— Tutuila. Pago-pago— X. 30° E., 1535' Upolu, E. end— N. 28" E., 1530'. Savaii, W. end— X. 26' E., 1510'. to Keppel Island— X. 25° E., 1365'. Auckland to Moko-Hinou Islands— 63'. Moko-Hiuou to Phoenix Island— X. 22" E.. 2130'. „ to Fakaafo. Union Group— X. 25' E., 1775'. „ to Gente Henuosa— X. 26° E., 1695'. to Rotumah— X. 4° E., 1410'. „ to Xetherland Island, near centre of Ellice Group— X. 4' E , 1740'. • „ to Xanouki Island, near centre of Gilbert Group— X. 2" W.. 2165'. ., to Bonham Islands, near centre of Marshall Group— X' 7° W., 2450 . „ to Pouynipit6, eastern part of Caroline Islands— X. 21° W., 2740'. „ to Gouapp, at western part of Caroline Islands— X. 36° W., 3420'. „ to Fiji Group, Simonoff Island— X. 19° E., 1005'. „ „ Kandavu, Xgaloa Bay— X. 8° E., 1085'. Ovalau, Lifuka-X". 10" E., 1170', to Conway Reef— X. 2" W., 850'. to Brillante Reef— X. 36° W., 810'. to Xorfolk Island-X. 42° W., 540'. to Xew Caledonia, S.E. extreme Reef-X^ 27° W., 890'. „ „ Xouniea— X. 28" W., 950'. „ to Loyalty Islands, Mare E. extreme— X. 23° W., 950'. to New Hebrides, Aneiteum. Port Inyang— X. 16° W., 990'. Tanna, Port Resolution— X. 16" W.. 1040. Vate, Havannah Harbour- X. 18" W., 1165'. S.W. extreme MallicoUo— N, 19" W., 1230'. " „ Espiritu Santo, C. Cumberland— X. 19° W., 1370'. to Banks Islands, Mota— N. 16" W., 1390'. to Torres Islands, N. extreme— X. 18" W., 1460'. to Ticopia— X. 13" W., 1450'. „ to Santa Cruz Group— Xitendi, X.E. extreme-N. 17° W., 1600'. Vanikoro-X. 16" W., 1525'. Duff Island, S.E. extreme-N. 15° W., 1610'. ,, to Solomon Islands— S.E. extreme Santa Cantalina-N. 24° W., 1660'. S.E. extreme Eddystone, or Simba— N. 31° W., 1940, Auckland to North Cape— 196'. North Cape to Rossell Island, S.E. extreme New Guinea— N. 36° W., 1855, to Duke of York Island, Xew Britain— JS, 33° W., 2280'. to Capel Bank— N . 52" W., 940'. to S. Bellona Reef— NT. 44" W., 1060'. to Fairway Reef- X. 36" \V., 1035'. to Bamptons, N.W. part— X. 40" W., 1235'. to Kenn's Reef— X. 49" W., 1230', to Lord Howe's Island— N. 77" W., 725', to Middleton Reef-N. 60° W., 760'. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 27 North Cape to Coast of Australia- Sandy Cape-N. 59° W., 1140\ (Sandy Cape to Port Curtis, 115% Cape Morcton Light-N. 66° W., 1092'. Shoal Bay— N. 7i° W., 1020^ Port Macquarie— N. 80° W., 1015\ Port Hunter, Newcastle— N. 85° W., 1065'. Port Jackson, Sydney— N. 88° W., 1086'. Capk Makia Van Diemen from Auckland— 220'. Cape Maria Van Diemen to Coast Australia, Jervis Bay— S. 88° W., 1076'. C. Howe, GaboLight-S. 80 W., 1117'. Manukau Heads „ Sydney— N. 85° VV. 1165'. Kent Group, Bass Strait— S. 83° W., 1310'. to S.E. extreme Tasmania— S. 73° W., 1290'. CapeFareweU „ „ -S. 81° W., 1115'. to Kent GroxTp, Bass Straits-N. 87° W., 1167'. to Sydney-N . 69° W., 1100'. The Bluff to S.E. extreme Tasmania— N. 77° W , 900'. Cape Palliser to Bounty Islands, p.d.— S. 20° E., 400'. to Chatham Islands, Petre Bay— S. 67° E., 360'. East Cape „ „ -S. 27° E., 420'. ^Ite j;eto Scatenti f ibt INTRODUCTION. The Islands of New Zealand — viz., North, Soutli (or, as it was formerly called, "Middle"), and Stewart's Island — form an extensive cnrve facing tlie W.N.W., and are together about 930 miles in length, extending over more than 18° of lat. from the parallel of 34|° to that of 474° S., and between the meridians of IGGi" and 178^° E. The extent of coast line amounts to nearly 3,000 miles, and the area of the country to about 102,000 square miles. The North and South Islands are divided by Cook's Straits, the South and Stewart's Islands by ^o^'eaux Straits. To Stewart's Island, which is a comparatively small, rugged, barren, and almost uninha)>ited territory, it is not necessary to make further reference. The North Island is divided into four and the South Island into five Provincial Districts ; and the object of this introductory chapter is to give a short slvctch of the Colony and of each Provincial District, with the principal cities, harbours, and productions, so as to give in small compass the information necessary for anyone intending to call at any part of the Islands. COLONIAL STATISTICS. The last census of New Zealand, in March, 1878, gave a total European population of 414,216, of which 158,208 were resident in the North Island and 256,008 in the South or Middle Island. By the natural increase and immigration the population at the end of 1880 will probably be abouo 450,000. The jiublic revenue for the year 1880-81 is estimated by the Colonial Treasurer at £3,240,000. Since 1.870_the. Gpveniment havejntro- duced ai tlip..public cost 84,41)0 iinniigiants, and Kave spSfrr'£9i$07^0*80 on 'lEir^^onstmction"oT''imTwiW^^^ £i,2io,o20' on roads, £857,141 on public buildings, £409,013 on telegraphs, besides other public works. The public debt at the end of 1880 Avas £27,409,113, subject to an annual charge of £1,535,000. On the 31st March, 1880, there were 1,172 miles of railway open for traffic— 361 miles in the North Island and 811 miles in the South. The telegraphs, which, like the railways, are all Government property, repre- sented 3,638 miles of circuit and 9,333 miles of wire, and 234 telegraph stations were open to the public. The post offices in 1879 received and posted 20,957,818 letters, 499,477 post cards, 1,395,616 book packets and 10,057,944 newspapers. The deposits in the Government savings banks at the end of 1879 amounted to £787,005, and money orders for £428,673 were issued. On the 1st of January, 1880, there were open in the colony 817 public schools, at which a purely secular education is given free to 58,738 children in average attendance. The total expenditure on education in 1879 (including £150,581 for new school buildings) was £467,198. The average cc 28 BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. cost for nicaintenance (school buildings excluded) was £4 7s. 8d, per scholar in average daily attendance. The total imports into New Zealand for the year ending 31st December, 1879, amounted to £8,373,233, and the exports to £5,742,916. During the same period 883 vessels of 469,862 tons entered inwards at the various ports with cargoes, and 11 vessels of 4,078 tons in ballast. Of the vessels with cargoes 161 were from the United Kingdom, 621 from British possessions, and 100 from foreign countries or whale fisheries. The total imports into the colony for the six months ending 30th June, 1880, amounted to £2,928,732, of which the imports of the United Kingdom represented £1,722,861 ; Victoria, £477,573 ; New South Wales, £369,673 ; United States, £103,907; Mauritius, £88,023 ; Pacific Islands, £32,.324. The exports from the colony for the six months ending 31st June, 1880, amounted to £3,673,775. Of the total exports £2,841,157 went to the United Kingdom. The principal articles of exports were : Wool, £2,010,258 ; gold, £599,200 ; agricultural products — wheat, oats, &c., £639,113; kauri gum, £152,326. The gold yield of the colony in 1879 was valued at £1,148,108. THE NORTH ISLAND is divided into four Provincial Districts, viz., Auckland, Hawke's Bay, Wellington, and Taranaki. Auckland, the most northern and extensive Province in the North Island, extends from the North Cape to the parallel of 39° S. on the East Coast, and the Mokau River on the West Coast. It is l)ounded on three sides by the sea, and on its South side by the otlier three Districts. It has a greater number of harbours than any other part of New Zealand. It contains 17,000,000 acres, and, stretching as it does through three degrees of latitude, has a climate varying from almost intertropical at the North to the sharp frosts of the Southern part. It produces maize, wheat, potatoes, etc., of excellent quality, and with a high per centage to the acre. Fruit-trees thrive and bear exceedingly well. The orange grows well out of doors, as does the grape. The propriety of introducing a class of men used to their culture and to Avine making has been frequently discussed. In fact this Province contains within itself all those natural productions whicli determine the particular industries of nations, and which are usually only found in widely distant countries, as timber, kauri gum, coal, limestone, marble, gold, copper, iron, silver, chrome, lead, antimony, zinc, cadmium, plumbago, soapstone, mica, asbestos, sulphur, alum, manganese, and other minerals. Its medicinal hot springs are most valuable for many diseases, such as rheumatism, etc. Those at Rotomahana are very wonderful and beautiful, Its shores abound with fish. The timber of its forests is exceedingly valuable, and the numerous sawmills round its coasts are almost constantly in full work, employing a number of people and a fieet of coasters. In the first six months of 1880 timber to the value of £22,055 was exported. The^coal mines are rapidly developing, the coal improving as the mines extend, ^aii3 taking the place of imported coal. Its gold mines have in some instances proved wonderfully rich. Export for the six months ending 30th June, 1880, 26,447ozs., value £106,997. Stock breeding is receiving considerable attention. There are sheep-runs from its extreme North part, at the North Cape, to Poverty Bay, at its South extremity. There are numerous manu- facturing industries,'^ such as ship and boat building, engineering, iron foundries, potteries, tanneries, door and sash works, biscuits, bricks, soap, sauces, etc. The total imports for the district for 1879 are given at £1,526,425 ; exports, £622,597. Population in 1878 estimated at 84,200. A railway runs Southward 98 miles, opening a fine country, and Northwards sections of 16 and seven miles are open and a connecting section is under construction. There are also coal railways at Bay of Islands and Whangarei. Hawke's Bay is situated on the East Coast, between Wellington and Auckland, and has an area of about 2,500,000 acres. A large proportion of the district is composed of land of great natural fertility, well suited for agricultural and pastoral purposes, but at present by far the most important industry is that of sheep-farming ; and although such agriculture as is pursued gives a very high percentage to the acre, yet the returns from grazing are so profitable, and the climate seems so adapted to the rearing of pure-bred flocks, that as yet, while the country is thinly populated, it forms BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 29 the staple of the district. The value of wool exported for the first six months of 1880 was £204,176. The Ahuriri Plains of some 80,000 acres in extent is an exceedingly productive district ; as many as five sheep to the acre can he carried all the year round, and abundant crops of all descriptions can be produced on them. It is Well watered. This district has also an enormous extent of bush, containing an unlimited supply of some of the most valuable timber in New Zealand. Napier (its chief to^vn) is the only harbour, and is not fit for large vessels. Tourists to the Lake District often visit Napier either to or from. The imports for 1879 were £168,561 ; exports, £370,362. The population of the district in 1878 was estimated at 15,300. A railway runs 65 miles South, forming part of main trunk to Wellington. Wellington occupies a central position, contains about 8^ million acres of land, and is bounded on the north by Auckland, on the east by Hawke's Baj and the sea, on the south and south-west by Cook's Straits, and on the north-west by Taranaki. It possesses many advantages incident to its position, and the possession of the excellent and spacious harbour of Port Nicholson, making it the commercial depot of a wide extent of country. It has however the disadvantage of being subject to shocks of earthquakes, but of late years these do not seem to have been violent in character or to have done any damage. There is a considerable extent of fertile plains and valleys, but much intersected by ranges of hills. Sheep-farming is carried on to a considerable extent — the export of wool for the first six months of 1880 amounted to £403,434. The imports for the district in 1879 were £1,593,026, and the exports £838,901. The cliief articles of export are given in the notice of the city of Wellington. There are immense forests in the district of valuable timber. Port Nicholson and W^anganui River are the only noteworthy liarbours in this district, and Patea Eiver, which forms a portion of the l)Oundary line between the Provincial Districts of Wellington and Taranaki. Tlie popiilation of Wellington in 1878 was estimated at 52,600. Taranaki, situated at the S.W. part of North Island, is the smallest, but one of the most fertile districts in New Zealand ; it contains nearly three million acres of land, most of which is still in j)Ossession of the natives. The climate is exceedingly healthy. It is essentially an agricultural district, and all kinds of produce flourish in the greatest luxuriance. The magnificent mountain of Mount Egmont is its great topographical feature, and round its base lie some splendid plains, but the great drawback to this district is the want of a harbour. An artificial harbour upon plans approved by Sir John Coode is however in process of construction at a cost of probably £250,000. On its beaches there is practically an unlimited supply of iron sand from which the finest steel can be made ; as yet, however, it has not been found profitable to work. The only other anchorage in the district is at Opunake Bay, and for small craft at Waitara and Patea and Mokau rivers — the two latter being part of the Provincial boundary line. Population of district in 1878 Avas estimated at 9,640. Imports in 1879, £32,230. A short account of the chief ports and towns in the North Island now follows, beginning at the North : — MONGONUI, once the resort of whalers, but the harbour is noAV more used by small than large vessels. There is steam communication weekly with Auckland, with which it is connected by telegraph. Its chief export is timber. In 1878 75 vessels entered inwards, of which only 2 were foreign. The population of the town was 123 in 1878. Wangaroa, an excellent harbour when inside, but the entrance is narrow. There is a very large export of timber, as much as 100,000 feet per week being cut by the Auckland Timber Company. Coal has also been found in the district. The shipping returns for 1878 give 201 vessels coast- wise and one foreign. Population, 201. Weekly steam communication with Auckland. Russell (Bay of Islands) is the port of entry of the magnificent harbour of Bay of Islands. It stands on the site of Kororareka, the original capital of New Zealand. There are manganese mines here which produce about 1500 tons annually. But coal is its chief export. The returns for 1878 give 1840 tons coal, lUOO gallons of sperm oil, and 8000 lbs. wool, 495 vessels coastwise and 8 foreign. It is still the resort of whalers to refit, etc., and besides the numerous steamers which call here a number of small vessels are 30 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. regularly in the coal trade. The quality of coal is now very superior hoth for steaming and household purposes. Wlien the railroad wliich is now heing constructed is completed to deep water a great impetus will be given to this trade. The latest returns give the quantity of coal exported at about 5000 tons per month. Wangarei Harbour has two anchorages suitable for shelter (see Sailing Directions) near the Heads. The township at the head of navigable part of the river is 15 miles from the Heads. Lime and coal abound in the district. There are also niineral sprhigs in the neighbourhood. The Kamo coal mines are now being connected with the loading ground l^y railroad, when the export is expected to be very large, as the coal is of a superior description ; at present it is made as far as the wharf at the township. Good marble has lately been found near the mines, and tlie hydraulic lime is noted in the Colony for its excellent quality. Frequent steam communi- cation with Auckland. Kawajj. — There is excellent shelter and anchorage here in Bon Accord Harbour, etc. The island of Kawau is now owned by Sir George Grey, who resides here, and has stocked it with rare j)lants, shrubs, and a variety of animals, such as elk, deer, etc. Formerly a copper mine was worked here. Mahurangi— to the south of Kawau Bay— has ancliorage suitable for large vessels, and has regular steam communication with Auckland. Its shipbuilding and hydraulic lime are important industries. Auckland City — formerly the capital and seat of Government — is situated on the South shore of tlie Waitemata waters. Witli its suburbs — which are rapidly increasing — it covers a large area, and presents an imposing spectacle, for so young a Colony, to a stranger on rounding the North Head. The harbour may be said to be unrivalled in tliese seas as regards its capacity, the slielter and safety which it affords, combined with moderate depth and good holding ground. There are two principal wharves — viz.. Queen-street Wharf, which projects 1680 feet from Custom-house-street into the harbour, with a depth at its end of 20 to 18 feet water at lowest springs. It can berth alongside probably some 30 vessels of from 100 to 2,000 tons burthen. The reclamations, which are being extensively carried out, extend nearly a third of the way down. The Railway wharf — so called from its being close to and connected with the terminus — is an extension of the solid breakwater, which Avas run out from what was formerly Britomart Point. It is 1,050 feet long, with from 12 to 10 feet water at its end at lowest springs, and can berth probably some 12 to 15 vessels of suital)le draught. The deposit of silt lately, owing in part to the reclamation Avorks, has much lessened the depth at these wharves. Dredging will no doubt be applied. The railway trucks go right alongside the vessels at tlie latter wharf. Between the two wharves is good shelter for small vessels and others lying at the different T's- On the east side of the Breakwater there are swimming baths. Eastward across Mechanics' Bay, from the inner part of the Railway Pier, the Breakwater is continued to the opposite cliff, with an entrance near the east end, forming a sort of wet dock for small vessels. Dries at low water. The land on the eastern side is occu]ued by Messrs. Fraser and Tinne's boiler-making establishment, l)y shipl)uilding yards, and by the Union Sash and Door Company ; and westward to the Railway Pier is occupied by the railway workshops, terminus, etc. A short distance west- ward of Queen-street Wharf is the Graving Dock, a substantial stone structxu-e, forming part of the reclamations. It is 300 feet long on the floor, 65 feet wide above, and 42 feet wide below ; the width at caisson, 44 feet. It has 15 feet water on the sill at high springs, 13 feet at average springs, and 11 feet at neap tides. Vessels are docked under the personal superm- tendence of the Chief Harbourmaster. Westward of the Dock, towards Freeman's Bay, on the reclaimed land — which is in fact one long wharf — are the large mills of the Auckland Timber Company, shipbuilding yards, Gas Company's works, Cocoanut Oil Company, etc. Opposite the entrance to the harbour is the Naval Training Scliool, occupying the old Mission build- ings. The small vessel for teaching the boys practical seamanship is anchored oft' the beach. The Hospital is a magnificent building, on a com- manding site. The Lunatic Asylum, more inland, is also a very extensive building, and generally speaking the banks and warehouses are handsome buildings, and the principal thoroughfare — Queen-street — i)resents an BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 31 animated scene in business honrs. The railroad now extends 98 miles into the interior sonthward, and also connects the Kaipara waters with the Waitemata, Telegraphic conmiunication is established from NortJi to South of the Islands, and through Australia with the rest of the world. Auckland is the port of call for tlie San Francisco mail steamers, which come and go with remarkable punctuality^ every four weeks. The fine fleet of steamers of the Union Company are continually running, connecting Auck- land with the rest of New Zealand and the Australian Colonies. A steam mail service to Fiji is now established, and numerous small steamers are continually running to tlie different ports of the district. Its fleet of trading vessels is too well known to call for further mention. Auckland- built schooners are to be found trading in every part of the Pacific, and the Island trade forms no inconsiderable item in the industries of the Colony. On the north side of Auckland harbour are the siiburbs of Devonport and Wood- side, to which ferry steamers run every half -hour. There are several ship and yacht building yards here, among them the well-known one of Mr. Niccol, who formerly had a patent slip. The Pilot Station is here. The schooner cruises in the offing to put pilots on board inward-bound vessels, when the wind is from West, roimd by North to East by North ; Avitli wind from other quarters, a boat goes out on signal being given. The Signal-station is on Mount Victoria, from whence vessels can be seen far out to seaward. Devonport may be called the Auckland Brighton, and is much resorted to in summer time. The returns for 1878 give 3944 vessels entered coastwise and 192 foreign. Its imports amounted to £1,409,000, and the exports to £544,000, among which were biscuits, £5,000 ; kauri gum, £133,000 ; leather, £16,300 ; flax, £6,400 ; potatoes, £5,500 ; soap, £2,500 ; tallow, £8,800 ; timber, £6,500 ; wool, £84,100. The above also includes— gold, £150,000, and silver, £5,800, from the Thames mines. The exports for the six months ending 30th June, 1880, amounted to £375,963, of which gold represented £106,997 ; kauri gum, £152,.326 ; and wool, £43,591. The population in 1878, including suburbs, Avas 29,360. The Auckland district is Avell known for its valuable timber forests, suitable for ship or housebuilding, such as kauri, red and white pine, pohutakawa, etc. Borough of the Thames, which includes the townships of Grahamstown and Shortland, is the principal centre of the goldfields district, and is built on the shore fronting the eastern head of the Frith. It is a port of entry. The shallowness of the water and exposed nature of anchorage to the north-west winds have together probably prevented its being used by large vessels, and it derives its supplies from Auckland, to whose Banks the gold is sent for export. The wonderfully rich yields of gold in the ranges close at hand have caused an equally wonderful development in the place. Probably ie^v goldfields are so favourably situated, so close to the sea ; and the miners can leave their houses to go to their work like ordinary tradesfolks in ordinary towns. By this it is meant that the goldfields town is, at the same time, an ordinary seaport, and no difficulty is experienced in getting to or from it, and all the expense and delays incident to most new " rushes " avoided. The following is taken from "Brett's Provincial Handbook" for 1880 : — '* The goldfields of the Thames and Coromandel districts are in the ranges which extend for 130 miles on the peninsula forming the eastern shore of the Hauraki Gulf, the Thames being the centre one at the head of the Gulf, Coromandel bein^^ about 25 miles further north along the peninsula, and Ohinemuri about 30 miles inland up the Thames river. All the points are easily accessible from Auckland, and connected with it by regular steam communication. The greatest impetus was given to gold mining in 1867, since when the yield has amounted to four and a-half millions sterling — the most productive year being in 1871, viz., £1,188,700. This return has never been approached since, though there is still a steady and profitable yield from many mines. The yield for 1878 was 55,982 ounces ; value, £220,500. The yield per ton of quartz is higher on the Thames than on any other goldfield in New Zealand, and nmch larger than the average rates in the Australian Colonies. " As might be expected from the vicinity of the forests there are several Sawmill Companies here, from which the output has been given at about 150,000 feet weekly. Southward in the fertile Thames valley there is a fine field for settlement. Harbour works to make the port more ;82 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. accessible were spoken of. The shipping returns for 1878 give 1319 vessels coastwise and 2 foreign. The River Thames is navigable for liglit draught steamers for 70 or 80 miles. There are saw mills some eight miles np the river at Orere. Vessels drawing np to 14 feet can cross the bar at high water. (See remarks on Provincial Districts.) CoROMANDEL has already been incidentally mentioned in connection with the Thames Goldfields. It has the advantage of being a secure and easily accessible harbour, but there is only shelter for a limited number of vessels in from about 5 to 3^ fathoms of water. The entrance is wide, and a heavy sea comes in with westerly gales. Kapanga is tlie principal town of the county, which by the last census had a population of 2,056. There are saw mills at Cabbage Bay on west side of the Peninsula, and at Port Charles, Waikawau, and Kennedy's Bay on eastern side. Mercury Bay, a large inlet 30 miles from Cape Colville, affording anchorage for vessels of all sizes during westerly winds, and a snug anchorage secure from all winds in Mangrove River at its soutli-west end, where the lower saw mills are situated on reclaimed ground, and the coasters load timber, Avith which an extensive trade is done. Some eight miles up the river are the upper saw mills, also on reclaimed land. Vessels drawing 3ix to eight feet can load here. Tauranga, in the Bay of Plenty, is the only harbour that affords shelter for vessels of burthen between Mercury Bay and Wellington. When once inside there is room for a fleet, but the entrance being somewhat difficult it is best adapted for steamers. (See Sailing Directions. ) The town is built on a peninsula at the south-east end of the harbour, and is prettily situated. There are two wharves with berthage for vessels drawing up to 16 and 12 feet respectively. The land in the district is good, and the port has become the entrepot for the whole of the Bay of Plenty. The liarbour extends nortliward to Katikati, which settlement contributes materially to the trade of Tauranga. Coaches run regularly to the Lake District, this being the favourite and most accessible route to that wonderful region. The returns for 1878 give jjopulation of Town, 793; of County, 1,550. Vessels entered inwards, 457. Gis BORNE, the port of entry for Poverty Bay, a thriving town situated on the right bank of the Turanganui River, near the entrance. The land in the district is of a superior description. The stock of sheep and cattle is large and increasing. Coasting vessels and small steamers go into the river to the town, but vessels of any size, such as the Union Company's steamers, which call once a week, lay at anchor outside, and are tendered by a steam launch. The wool ships lie at anchor a little further out. The holding gi'ound is good. Vessels have ridden out in bad weather, and no accidents have occurred. The population in 1878 is given at 1,204. Vessels entered inwards coastwise, 321. The exports in 1879 amounted to £37,507 ; in 1878 they were higher, viz. : Wool, £51,100; tallow, £700. Large quantities of grass seed of a very pure description are exported annually from here. Napier (Port Ahuriri), the cai)ital and principal shipping port of the Provincial District of Hawke's Bay, Like most other New Zealand port towns, it is rapidly increasing in size and importance. The harbour is very confined, and only adapted to vessels draAving 10 or 11 feet of water. The entrance is uncertain, owing to what is known as the travelling shingle, to attempt to remedy which an outer breakwater is proposed. The Union Company's steamers call weekly, and are tendered as at Gisborne. The wool and other large vessels lie in the roadstead, which is variously stated as being "safe" and "anything but safe" in South and South-west winds, which "send a heavy swell into the bay. " It is of course sheltered during AVest and Northwest winds, and is open to seaward from the North by East round to the South, but with ordinary summer sea-breezes is safe. (See Sailing Directions.) The returns for 1878 give a population of 8,376 for Napier city ; 429 vessels coastwise and 21 foreign. The imports in 1879 were £168,561 ;* exports, £385,004. Wellington (Port Nicholson), the capital and seat of Government of New Zealand. Its harbour is the most central and one of the most com- modious in New Zealand. Port Nicholson is a very extensive sheet of Avater, free from dangers, Avith an average depth of 10 to 15 fathoms. There is a patent slip, and buoys for SAvinging ships in Evans' Bay. The Queen's BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 33 Wharf, in Lambton Harbour, has from 23 to 27 feet at low water at its outer T, and on it are warehouses for wool, etc. A time-ball is dropped at noon. Since the removal of the seat of Government to Wellington its popu- lation and importance have greatly increased, and extensive reclamations from the edge of the harbour have been found necessary. It has many fine buildings — viz.. Government House, the Houses of Assembly, the General Government Offices, etc., and Museum. * It has two Cathedral Churches, one of which — the Roman Catholic — is a handsome and imposing edifice. Being the port for an extensive district, it naturally follows that railroads should radiate to the interior, and accordingly we find 45 miles completed on the main trunk Northwards towards Napier on the East Coast and 92 miles open for traffic centring at present at Wanganui in the Provincial District, but which will ultimately be joined to the Wellington line. Sections to effect this are now under construction. The industries for the whole of the Provincial District will be found in the district summary already given. The following are the returns for Wellington for 1878 : — Popu- lation : City, 18,953. Vessels : Inwards coastwise, 1,487 ; foreign, 132. Imports, £1,440,382. Exports, £783,047, of which the following are some of the chief, viz.:— Grain, £811 ; gold, £35,310 ; hides, £1,976 ; hides and leather, £3,474 ; preserved meats, £6,469 ; fiax, £3,311 ; rabbitskins, £1,194 ; sheepskins, £9,174; tallow, £61,014; wool, £648,190. Imports 1879, £1,517,713; exports, £838,901. HoKiANGA — the northernmost port on the West Coast accessible to ships of large tonnage — is a bar harbour. The river is navigable for 15 miles from the heads, and has but few obstructions. There are several tributary streams falling into it, but not navigable for vessels drawing over 6 feet. It was one of the earliest settled districts in the Province, and was frequented by vessels for spars. The greatest number of shipping at one time was seven, eacli averaging 500 tons. There is a large area of rich land along the banks of the river, chiefly in the hands of the natives, and magnificent kauri forests among the ranges. The returns for 1878 give the European population of the country at 419. There were 37 vessels inwards coastwise and 2 foreign. It exported logs and spars to the value of £3,082. It is a port of entry, and has a Resident Magistrate. At present there is steam commiinication with Onehunga. Kaipara, a bar harbour, one of the most extensive inlets in New Zealand, and will probably become hereafter one of the most important. There is perfect security in it for any number of vessels of the largest size. There is 700 miles of water frontage. The principal river, the Wairoa, takes a direction parallel to tlie coast for 30 miles ; navigable for vessels of large burthen. On its banks are several important sawmill establishments, which are rapidly becoming so many townships, from which it will be seen that timber is at present the principal industry. Nearly half a million feet has been cut weekly. There is a large extent of country of varied character — heavy bush land, rich flats, poor gum belts, etc. Like most of the northern parts of the district, it is an excellent fruit-growing country ; produces splendid grapes, from Avhich an excellent rough wine has been made. It is in regular communication with Auckland by steamer to Helensville (the head of the Kaipara, or Southern branch), and thence by train to Auckland. The returns for 1878 give — Population, 1,437. Vessels : Inwards coastwise, 185 ; foreign, 8. Exports : Tinil)er, £28,090. Manukau, also a bar harbour, is an extensive inlet opposite Auckland harbour, from which its town, Onehunga, is only distant six miles. Trains run to and fro frequently during the day. It is a place of considerable importance, as by its means Auckland enjoys rapid communication with Taranaki, Wellington, Nelsoii, and all the ports on the western seaboard. Sydney chu be reached in less time from the Manukau than from any other port in New Zealand. The railroad runs to the wharf, and thus the coal from the Waikato mines can be delivered in any quantity. The Union steamers trade regularly from Onehunga. New Plymouth (or Taranaki), at the base of the slopes of Mount Egmont, and on the shores of the bight east of the Sugar Loaves, has a very- inviting appearance, and is situated on some of the best land for agricultural purposes. The appearance to a stranger on nearing the coast is most decidedly English. Its great disadvantage is the want of a harbour or ^ BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. shelter for shipping during westerly or on-shore winds. There are moorings laid down, and a regular system of surf -boats for landing passengers and cargo. Steps are now being taken to construct an artificial harbour at the Sugar Loaves of concrete, at an estimated cost approaching to £250,000. Ironsand, from whicli tlie best steel is produced, lies in inexhaustible quantities on the beach. Smelting-works are erected, but from the latest reports it lias been found to be too difficult and expensive to work. Taranaki is in constant communication by sea Avith the rest of New Zealand. A rail- way runs to Waitara, and southward 22 miles, being one section of the main trunk through Wanganui to Wellington. The returns for 1878 give a popula- tion of 2,680. Sliips entered inward coastwise, 191 ; foreign, 1. SOUTH OR MIDDLE ISLAND Provincial Districts. Nelson, at the north-western part of South Island, is boimded by the Sea to the north and west, by the districts of Westland and Canterbury to the south, and Marlborougli to the east. A large proportion of the Pro- vincial District is mountainous, rugged, and unfit for agriculture. The portion at present devoted to agriculture is of an excellent description, though somewhat limited in extent. It possesses fine plains for pastoral purposes ; but its mineral productions are its chief sources of wealth. Its ranges contain gold, silver, iron, copper, lead, etc. Its coal is of an excellent description, and the mines attbrd employment to a number of miners. Nelson is tlie capital and chief port. It has also two others, viz., CoUingwood and Westport, and there is also an excellent harbour in D'Urville Island, Port Hardy. For returns see Nelson and Westport. The population of the whole district in 1878 was estimated at 25,630. Marlborough, situated on the north-east part of the South Island, is bounded on the north and east by the sea, and on the west and south by Nelson. It has an area of about 3,000,000 acres. Wool, timber, and flax are its principal productions, and the district is rapidly increasing in impor- tance. The imports in 1879 were £11,848. Its chief towns are Blenheim (the capital) on the river Wairau, Picton and Havelock at the head of Queen Charlotte and Pelorus Sounds — extensive sheets of water penetrating a considerable distance into the interior. Blenheim and Picton are connected by rail, the latter being the port of call for the Union Company's steamers. Gold, coal, and antimony have been found in the district. The climate is very equable. In 1878 the estimated population for the district was 7,700. Canterbury is bounded on the north by the district of Nelson, on the -east by the sea, on the south by Otago, and on the west by Westland. It includes an area of nearly 9,000,000 acres. Its rich plains are estimated to •contain upwards of two million acres, a large proportion of which is good amcultural land, and all occupied. Inland from the plains the great range of Southern Alps, with peaks from 10,000 to 14,000 feet high, bar the way of the husbandman. Canterbury is noted for its grain, potatoes, etc. In February, 1880, there were in four of the principal counties no less than 133,569 acres in wheat, estimated to yield 3,681,955 bushels of grain ; and 4,723 acres in potatoes, estimated to produce 33,114 tons. Large areas were also under oats, barley, grass and other crops. The pastoral system however up to the present far predominates, and from its extensive runs in 1878 nearly 16,000,000 lbs. of avooI wei'e exported. For the first six months of 1880 the exports were : Wool, £466,529 ; wiieat, £453.955 ; flour, £19,787; barley, £30,166; oats, £22,289 ; potatoes, £7,396. Extensive seams of coal exist along the foot of the ranges. Limestone (marble) and building stone of different sorts are found in several places, also manganese, copper, fireclays, quartz sands and clay iron ore. Flax is also exported. This district has rapidly increased in prosperity, its facilities for transport being naturally easy, and its railroads now run from north to south, and extend in radiating branches through all the chief agricultural areas. The journey from Christchurch through Canterbury and Otago to the extreme southern point of the island may be made by rail. The capital is Christ- church, some nine miles by rail from Lyttelton, the port of the district. {See Lyttelton). Timaru further south is also a port of considerable importance. In 1878 the estimated population of Canterbury was about BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. ' 35 94,000. The imports in 1879 amounted to £1,697,843 and the exports to £1,389,230. Otago, the most southern district, contains about 16,360,000 acres, of which upwards of 12,000,000 is estimated as agricultural and pastoral land. There are several large lakes inland, and extensive forests. It is the most populous of the Provincial Districts, having in 1878 an estimated popu- lation of 117,200. Its total imports were £2,970,050, and exports £2,112,890. In 1879 the imports were £2,896,885 and the exports £2,016,812. During the first six months of 1880 Otago exports included £107,059 gold ; £724,041 wool; £70,256 wheat; £5422 flour; and £19,424 oats. It has every description of scenery, snow-clad mountains with lakes at their feet, wooded hills and cultivated vales. The climate is healthy and bracing, and may be said to be very equable. The soil, both as regards fertility and adaptability to culture, will compare favourably with that of any other country. As might be expected, its industries are numerous. It is rich in minerals, gold being first in value. " Otago Diggings " is a familiar phrase. Coal, ironsand and stone, copper, plimibago, cinnabar, and antimony. Its clays produce bricks and pottery. The building-stone of Oamaru — soft and easily worked, but said to harden with exposure— is being extensively used. Bluestone and granite are plentiful, as well as limestone. Fish is abundant on the coast. (iSalmon, trout, etc., are being introduced all over New Zealand.) Port Chalmers (now called *' the Port of Dunedin ") is the chief port, and the city of Dunedin (the capital) is about 11 miles from the entrance. Its other ports are Oamaru, the Bluff, and In vercargill. A trunk railway, with several important • branches, runs from end to end of the Provincial District, and Northwards to Christchurch. Westland, as its name implies, lies along the western side of the South Island. Extends from the Grey River at the North to Awarua on the Soutli. Is bounded West by the sea, North by Nelson, East by Canterbury, South by Otago. Contains over 3,000,000 acres of land, the greater part of which is forest. In 1878 it had an estimated population of 16,965. Its chief ports are Hokitika, the capital and head-quarters of the goldfields, and Greymouth, its port for coal. The returns for 1879 give imports, £172,750 ; exports, £434,820. The district abounds with gold and other minerals, and has timber in illimitable quantities. The only real drawback to the district is the shifting bar entrances to each port. There are two anchorages — at Bruce 's and Jackson's Bays. The following is a short account of the chief ports and towns in the South Island :— Nelson is the capital of the Provincial District of the same name. It is said to have one of the finest and most equable climates of any part of New Zealand. The city is built inside the Boulder Bank at the South-east end of Blind Bay, on a piece of land said to be between 70 and 80 acres, which slopes gently towards the harbour. It is partly surrounded by hills, and its scenery is very beautiful. The town is well laid out, and possesses some substantial buildings, such as the Provincial Government Buihlings, the College, etc. The port is about H i^iiles from the city, with which it is connected by a tramway. The railway, which extends 20 miles into the country, also runs down to the wharves. It is one of the regular places of call for the coastal and intercolonial steam services. There are several important industries here. The returns for 1878 give— Vessels : Inwards coastwise, 1,370; foreign, 20. Its imports amounted to £233,065; its exports to £15,632, among which are—Gold, £9,540 ; hides, £375 ; flax, £680 ; plants, £415; potatoes, £1,806; grass seed, £640; wool, £680. The imports for 1879 were £242,203 ; exports, £69,518. Picton is tlie principal port for the Marlborough District, and is con- nected with Blenheim — the chief town — by rail. It is situated at the head of Queen Charlotte Sound, and is the port of call for the steamers. The population in 1878 was about 3,000. Lyttelton, the principal port for the Canterbury District, is situated at the north-west end of Bank's Peninsula. It runs about seven miles in a south-westerly direction, and is about a mile wide. The town of Lyttelton is situated on the north shore about four miles from the heads, and is con- nected with the city of Christchurch by rail, over which the exports of the 36 • BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. greater part of the district are conveyed to the port. The retiTrns for 1878 give the poj^ulation of Lyttelton at 3,476. The entries inwards coastwise, 1,505; foreign, 190. The exports — which represent the main part of the district — were £1,712,874, ot which some of the principal were — Wool, £910,068 ; tallow, £58,654 ; bacon and hams, £12,000 ; potatoes, £28,500 ; preserved meats, £21,600 ; grain, £305,350 ; gold, £228,220 ; flonr, £28,500. The imports for 1879 were £1,579,061 ; exports, £1,279,622. Since the Harbonr Board was constituted in the beginning of 1877 extensive improvements have been in progress. The harbour being somewhat exposed to east winds, a secure inner harbour has been formed by the construction of Uvo breakwaters, with an entrance between, formed of rubble, faced seaward with huge blocks of stone. The eastern, or Officers' Point breakwater, is some 2,010 feet in length.. 40 feet wide on top, and 6 feet above high-water mark. A timber breastwork is built nearly along its entire length on inner side, called Gladstone Pier. The western, or Naval Point breakwater, is 1,400 feet in length. The area of water thus enclosed is 110 acres. Dredging operations (see Sailing Directions) have been carried on for the past four years. The depth of water inside the breakwater and at the wharves varies from 23 to 16 feet at low tides. The rise is 7 feet, and vessels up to 2,700 tons can be safely berthed at the wharves. The following is the berthage space : — Glad- stone Pier, 1,740 feet; timber breastwork from Gladstone Pier westward to Naval Point, 3,850 feet; Screw-pile Jetty, 1,030 feet; No. 1 Intermediate do., 800 feet; No. 2 do. do., 800 feet;' No. 3 do. do., 800 feet; Tunnel Mouth Jetty, 440 feet ; Peacock Jetty, 800 feet ; making a total of 10,260 feet, capable of berthing 20 ocean ships and steamers, 20 barques and brigs, 6 intercolonial steamers, and 20 coasters, etc. This berthage is capable of very considerable extension by construction of additional jetties. The Avhole have lines of rails laid doM'n on them, and are worked by the railway. No charge is made for wharfage on ships, but on all goods it is 2s. per ton. The Graving Dock is to be capable of taking in a first-class ironclad. Its dimensions are — Length on floor, 400 feet ; width on floor, 46 feet ; Avidth on top, 82 feet ; at entrance, 62 feet ; depth on sill at high water, 23 feet. A cable is laid across the harbour a quarter of a mile Avithin the heads to the Pilot Station at Adderly Heads (for Avhich see Sailing Directions). There is a tug- boat, belonging to the Harbour Board, by Avhich toAvage is very reasonable. A time-ball is dropped daily, except AA'hen bloAving hard. Akaroa, at south-east end of Banks' Peninsula, is a magnificent port, affording secure and knd-locked anchorage to any number of vessels, and easy of access in moderate Aveather. (Sec Sailing Directions ) It Avas for many years the faA^ourite resort of AA^halers. The town is divided into tAvo portions, upper and loAver. A railAvay to connect it A\-itli the main line is in contemplation. TiAiARU, at the south-Avest extreme of the Ninety-mile Beach, about 100 miles from Christchurch, is an important shipping port for the southern part of the Canterbury District. In 1878 it had a population of 7,222. Its entries iuAvards coastAAdse Avere 144; foreign, 27. Its exports Avere £41,580, of AA'hich Avheat amounted to £40,066. The imports in 1879 Avere £117,932; exports, £109,616. The trade and importance of the district are rapidly increasing and the raihvays connect it Avith Christchurch and Dunedin. It is a port of call for the coastal and intercolonial steamers. Cargo hitherto has been taken off in large surf-boats, but a breakAvater is noAV being constructed Avhich is to extend for 1,000 feet out to the eastAvard, thence 1,000 feet at right angles to the north AA'ard. Some 1,200 feet is expected to be finished by the middle of 1881, 700 feet being already com- pleted, Avith 18 feet at the end. There Avill be 20 feet at loAv-Avater springs inside the last 1,000 feet. A Avharf is building AA'here vessels can lie and discharge (in moderate Aveather), and mooring-bupys (for steamers only at present) placed inside the breakAvater. Lights Avill be placed on the east and north points Avhen completed. A pilot can ahvays be obtained, and there is an efficient rocket-brigade ahvays in attendance near the lighthouse on the approach of and during bad Aveather. The lighthouse, 30 feet high, is situated in the toAvn. Timani possesses se\'eral fine public buildings, churches, etc. , a salubrious climate, and some beautiful scenery. Oamaru, at the extreme north of the Otago District, is rapidly rising into importance. Its population is about 6,000. Its entries inAA^ards in 1878 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 37 were 351 coastwise and 18 foreign, and its exports amounted to £101,000, chiefly wool and grain — viz., £50,800 of the former and £42,200 of the latter — as Avell as £7,150 flour. In 1879 ihe value of the imports was £84,300 ; exports, £73,566. Oamaru is the shipping port of the largest pastoral and agricultural districts of the Provincial District of Otago. Its building-stone is unrivalled, and can be had in any quantity. Liniestone, cement, pipeclay, and coal also exist. It has many handsome buildings, and the line of railroad passes through it. A substantial concrete break- water is being earned out to a distance of 1,800 feet in a northerly direction from the Bluff ; 1,200 feet is already completed. A mole of 1,700 feet, to run in an easterly direction, is also to be constructed, which with the break- water will enclose a basin of 60 acres in extent, forming a safe harbour, which it is proposed to deepen to 20 or 24 feet, so as to admit a large class of vessel. Wharves have been built and moorings laid down, and vessels of 600 tons register have loaded for home ports. At present vessels drawing over 13 feet have to lie at the outer anchorage, one mile oft' the breakwater, in 5 or 5^ fathoms, till lightened sufticiently to be brought in to the wharves, where they discharge into and load from the railway trucks with steam cranes. There is 4^ and 4^ fathoms from half to quarter of a mile outside the break- water. Dredging Avill probably be necessary for the port within this if A^essels of large tonnage are to load in the basin. The lighthouse is on the Bluff, and a green light is shown at the end of the breakwater works. The port of Dunedin (formerly Port Chalmers) is a bar harbour, with 16i feet on it at low water, and extends within the entrance to the south-westward for some 11 miles, forming a sj^acious sheet of water, at the head of which stands the city of Dunedin, the most important commercial city in New Zealand. The town Port Chalmers is at the head of Koputai Bay, one mile eastwardof the middle islands, which lie seven miles within the heads, and is connected with the city of Dunedin by rail. Here there is good anchorage for large vessels in 5 fathoms, their cargoes being conveyed to Dunedin by rail or lighter. A channel has lately been cut with 18 feet in it so as to enable the largest vessels to reach the Dunedin wharves, for which a steam tug is necessary, and is always obtainable. The railway wharf is 1,000 long, and vessels of 2,500 tons have been discharf^ed at it. There is a substantial graving-dock at Port Chalmers, 328 feet in length, 50 feet wide at the gates, Avith a deptJi of 19 feet water on the sill at high water spring tides. In connection with the dock is a workshop, fitted for repairing machinery and boilers of large ocean-going steamers, and a steam hammer capable of welding a 15-incli shaft. There is also a floating-dock and a patent slip, both capable of taking vessels of 600 tons. An extensive system of harbour works is in contemplation at Dunedin, which includes wet-docks, etc. There is a time-ball at noon. The city is well laid out, and possesses many handsome buildings, such as Government Offices, Custom-house, Hospital, etc., and, as might be expected, there are many important industries here. Its railroads are extending in every direction, connecting it with Christchurch on the north ; the Bluff, Invercargill, and Riverton to the south. From Invercargill a line is carried inland to Kingston, on the Wakatipu Lake. The city is the central point of 417 miles of railway open for traftic in Otago, and is connected with the Canterbury system of 316 miles. Dunedin is the head-quarters of the New Zealand Shipping Company, and of the Union Company's fleet of steamers, and is one of their principal ports of call. It has a large trade Avith Melbourne. The population of city and suburbs is 35,000 ; of Port Chalmers, about 5,000. The number of vessels inwards coastwise in 1878 wa,s 951 ; foreigii, 161. The exports were £1,619,954, of which the following were the principal, viz. : — Wool, £902,280; gold, £464,265; grain, £99,680; preserved meats, £35,344; tallow, £26,135. The imports in 1879 Avere £2,598,2.38 ; exports, £1,600,449. Bluff Harbour, at the southern extremity of the island, in Foveaux Straits, was formerly a large whaling station. Is now the first port of arrival and last of departure of the steamers which connect at Melbourne with the »Suez mail steamers. Campbelltown stands at the foot of the Bluff, on the south side of the harbour. It is the port for Invercargill, with which it is connected by railroad, 20 miles. The returns forl878 give the popula- tion of the Invercargill district at 3,761. The number of shipping coast- wise, 234; foreign, 76. Its exports at £391,970, wool being the principal 88 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. one, viz., £277,254; gold, £43,770; grain, £20,000; rabbit skins, £30,179; preserved meats, £10,224. In 1879 the imports were £206,539 ; exports, £342,347. The anchorage is narrow and confined, and the tides rnn very strongly. (See Sailing Directions.) Westport, on the BuUer Kiver, which has a bar entrance, with an average depth of 14 feet on it at highwater springs, and 12 feet at neaps, is easily entered when the weather is snitable, also at night time ; but during the heavy freshes to which the river is subject, from October to February inclusive, only steam vessels of good power should attempt it. The bar is liable to change with the freshes and Avith westerly gales. There is anchor- age in the roadstead, with good holding ground in any suitable depth. (See Sailing Directions.) Westport has a population of about 1,000. Its principal export is gold, of which in 1879 the export was £78,501. The numl3er of vessels entered inwards coastwise in 1878 was 294 ; foreign, 3. The imports in 1879 Avere £31,450 ; exports, £639. Greymouth, on the Grey Kiver, is the centre of considerable business. Coaches leave daily for the inland towns, and there is constant steam com- munication with adjacent ports and Nelson. The Melbourne steamers call off this port. Its chief wealth lies in its coal. There is a short line of rail from the port to Brunnerton. The Grey coal is estimated to be about the best in New Zealand. The population of the Greymouth Valley in 1878 was estimated at 10,244. The slapping inwards were 401 coastvrise ; foreign, 14. The exports were £169,923, chiefly gold, £161,960; also coal, £3,287. The imports in 1879 were £105,054; exports, £223,364. The drawback to the district is the bar entrance. As the channel often changes, particular attention must be paid to the semaphore, beacons, etc. (for which see Sailing Directions.) A stone breakwater is in course of erection on the south side of river, and when completed in accordance with Sir J. Coode's plan it is estimated that there will be 12 or 13 feet on the bar at low water. Anchorage in offing in from 10 to 15 fathoms good holding gi-ound. Hokitika, the capital of the Westland Provincial District, had in 1878 a population of 8,984. Its shipping returns give 193 vessels coastwise, and 13 foreign. Its exports amounted to £159,527, of which £151,420 Avas gold ; its other productions were wool, hides, and tallow. Imports in 1879, £67,696 ; exports. £211,456. It is a large town, and essentially a mining one, and steadily increasing in importance. Extensive works, as recommended by Sir J. Coode, are in proears N.W. by N., at that distance, steer as a'bove directed, W. by 8., and observe the same marks for clearing the shoal oft" Kawiti Point and entering Bon Accord harbour. ^ Martello Rock lies S.W. f W., nearly half a mile from Momona Point— th • southern head of Bon Accord harbour— surrounded by a reef, extendiu": lorth and south 1^ cables, with a good passage between it and Kawau Island of more than a quarter of a mile. Mayne Islands lie li miles westward, directly off the mouth of Bon Accord Harbour ; are two small islands in a N.N. W." and S.S.E. direction, half a mile apart, with a reef lying between. Eclipse Shoal lies between north Mayne Island and Bon Accord Point. It is nearly circular, about three-quarters of a cable in extent, with 21 fathoms water on it. The Middle of north Mayne Island bears W. by S. J S., distant about four cables from it, and Pish Point is just shut in with south Mayne Island. North Cove is half a mile to the northward of Bon Accord Harbour ; a reef of rocks awasli lies 1^ cables north of its southern entrance point. Much sea sets into this cove with westerly winds. The eastern part of Kawau will now be given. It is steep and bold, and may be approached within a quarter of a mile. The only danger is the Nelson Rock, with nine feet on it at low springs, and live to ten fathoms close to ; it lies between the island and Flat Rock, four cables off tlie shore, with S.E. point of Kawau S. bv W. a W., Flat Rock E. | S., Tiritiri light- house S. by E. ^ E., and Takatau Point N.W. by N. Plat Rock is four feet out Avater at high water, and can be seen four miles from a vessel's deck ; is steep to and may be passed on cither side. It bears from the S.E. point of Kawau E. by N. ^ N. 2 miles, from Takatau Point S.E. 5i miles, from S.W. extreme of Little Barrier S. by W. 14^ miles, and from N.W. extreme of Tiritiri N. ^ E. 9 miles. It has a d/ac/: beacon, surmounted with a cage and diamond, on it. The southern side of Kawau may be passed within half a mile in 14 fathoms; two small islets lie one cable to the southward of the S.E. point of the island (Kawau Point.) Tides. — The flood tide runs to the westward through the north channel, sweeping round Kawau Bay, and down to the southward; on the east side of Kawau island the flood runs to the southward, and with consider- able strength near the south-east extreme. The ebb runs to the northward on both sides of the island, and out to the eastward through the north channel, at the rate of 3^ knots during springs. In the southern and inshore channels their velocity is from 1^ to 2^ knots. Kaitu-kala, two small bare moderately high islands, Avith a clear passage (Blanche Passage) between them of 1^ cables (which is sometimes used with a fair wind in preference to the south channel, Avhich has the Passage Reef and Beehive Islet in it). From their N. E. end the nearest or S.W. point of KaAvau bears N. by E. f E. 1^ miles. Passage Reef is half a mile in extent, and dries at low water ; it bears from N. E. end of Kaitu-kala N. by E. ^ E. over half a mile, and from the Beehive S. by E. ^ E. 3^ cables. The Albert Shoal is two cables in extent, with nine feet on its shoalest part at low Avater, and is in the Avay of vessels entering by the south or the Avestern channels. It is in a direct line betAveen the Beehive and Fish Point, bearing from the former W. by N. 9-lOths of a mile, and from the Martello Rock S. | E. 9-lOths of a mile. An excellent BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH rxVCIFIC PILOT. 59 mark for clearing it to the westward is the Martello Rock in line w^ith a remarkable drop in the coast to the northward, a little to the eastAvard of north, which leads nearly a quarter of a mile to the westward of the shoal. The passage between Passage lieef and Kaitu-kala has eight and nine fathoms in it, is half a mile wide, and is to be preferred for large vessels. After passing the S.E. point of Kawau steer for the north end of Kaitu-kala until within half a mile from it, or until the summit of Fish Point (the southern point of Kawau Bay) bears W. by N. ^ N. ; steer for it, passing about three cables to the northward of Kaitu-kala until the mark for clearing the Albert Shoal is passed, when haul up towards the Martello Kock (but on no account before) ; when the Beehive bears E. S. E. the Albert shoal will be j)assed, and vessel may proceed either side of the Martello Rock into Bon Accord Harbour as before. The Beehive is a cone-shaped islet with a wliite sandy beach round its base, surrounded by a reef three cables from east to west, and one cable from north to south, bearing N. | E. one mile from Kaitu-kala, and S.W. 5 W. G-lOths of a mile from south point of Kawau. The passage between Passage Reef and the Beehive should not be taken unless the reef is seen awash, when steer to pass midway between them in four fathoms, and then west, until the mark for clearing the Albert Shoal is on, then as above. If the passage between the Beehive and Kawau be taken, keep in midchannel (with 3^ fathoms least water), as a reef extends one cable from the point of Kawau. As soon as the Beehive is passed the water deepens to six fathoms, haul up to pass either side of Mar- tello Rock, and as before. The projecting point (abreast Martello Rock), two cables south of Momona Point, has two peaked rocks close off it, making it a good mark from the southward. Ora Island lies S.S.W. one mile from the south Kaitu-kala. Its south-west point bears from Wanga Point N.AV. ^ N. 5^ miles, and from the entrance of Mahurangi Harbour E. J N. 2^ miles ; it is 1| miles lon<,^, about 300 feet high, and lies in a north-west and south-east direction, with some rocky patclies extending oft' its north-cast and east points nearly a cable. Inner Channel. — Between Ora and the Kaitu-kala Islands and the mainland is the inshore channel to Bon Accord Harbour and Kawau Bay ; for vessels coming from the southward through the AVangaparoa channel it is the easiest and most convenient, ])articularly with a working wind, as from the south point of Ora Island to Fish Point there is a clear working channel of 1^ miles wide, with from seven to nine fathoms. In working from the southward vessels may pass between Ora Island and the south Kaitu-kala, if convenient, there being deep water, and a channel of nearly a mile in width. In the bay immediately to the westward of Fish Point there is snug anchorage in four and five fathoms, Avith southerly winds. Coasters alone may pass between the Mayne Islands ; there is a reef in the centre of the passage, and another nearly joining it, extending from the north end of the south island, leaving a passage between of half a cable broad, with two fathoms. There is a wider passage between the middle reef and the north island ; these reefs and the deepest channels will be seen at low water. Mahurangi Harbour (See Plan) and River.— The next harbour southward is Mjuiurangi, on the main land. The entrance may be known by the small saddle-shaped island Whora, which lies a little more than half a mile distant from it ; this, and Ora Island, afford good protection to the harbour from easterly winds. Whora Island lies N.W. by W. 6i miles from the extreme of the Wangaparoa Peninsula, and W. by S. If miles from the south end of Ora Island. Vessels bound to Mahurangi should steer to the southward of both these islands, and passing the south end of Whora, within a quarter of a mile, a course should be steered direct in between the heads. A reef, dry at low water, extends nearly a quarter of a mile north from the island, with 3^ fathoms close to its edge. The south head is wooded, and has a small conical islet {.Kiahoii) lying two cables north of it, connected by a reef ; shoal water extends half a cable oft' this islet. The north head, Sadler Point, a steep green point without trees, should not be approached nearer than one cable, as a shallow sandy spit extends from it ; the clear channel between the heads is little more than half a mile in width, with from five to eight fathoms water. EE ^ BKETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Caution. — Strangers entering Mahurangi Harbour are liable to mistake the arm which runs immediately north from Sadler Point for the main harbonr ; tliere is shoal water, however, in this arm a short distance within the line of the points. Directions.— The direct conrse up is N.W. ^ W. for the peninsula of Manganui, which is high, and makes as an island ; it bears N. W. A W. from the north head, distant 1^ miles ; between this peninsula and the south shore is an anchorage for large A^essels, with the centre of Manganui bearing N. by E. in seven fatlioms muddy bottom ; the channel here is scarcely half a mile wide. Westward of Manganui is another arm, running to the N.N. W., with shoal water a short distance within its entrance points. Anchorage. — There is more sheltered anchorage in five fathoms three- quarters of a mile above Manganui ; immediately above this anchorage it snoals, with flats drying at low water ; boats can ascend the river several miles with the tide. There is a narrow passage into Mahurangi Harbour from the northward between the rocks north of Wliora Island and the main ; it is not desirable for anything but coasters. Tides. — It is high water F. & C. at Mahurangi at 7h. Om., and the tides rise from seven to ten feet. Rock, one mile S. by E. of Kiahou islet, is a rocky patch uncovered six feet at low Avater, and four cables off shore, within which lies the Puhoi River, where there is a German settlement. To the southward of Mahurangi Harbour the coast trends S. by AV. five miles into the bight which lies to the westward of "Wangaparoa Peninsula ; it has several rocky ledges and detached reefs lying off it, and should not be approached within half a mile, at which distance six fathoms will be found ; these dangers can be seen in the day time. Waiwera — noted for its hot springs — lies some three miles southward of Mahurangi, and may easily be knoAvn by a small islet about half a mile off the beach in the small Imy, and a quarter of a mile off its point ; a spit which nearly dries at low water extends to it from the beach, with rocks inside. Anchorage with offshore winds abreast the islet — which should not be opened of the land northward of it— in four to five fathoms. Sunken rocks extend nearly a cable off the S.E. point of the islet, which break heavily in easterly weather. The holding ground is good, but the anchorage is exposed to winds from about N.N.E. to south, east about. The best landing is across the spit into the river j it can be crossed at from two hours from low water by boats. Caution. — Vessels may anchor in this bight, in from eight to fourteen fathoms, with westerly or southerly Avinds, but its head should not be approached within one mile, as the water shoals to four fathoms, and flats extend a long distance off ; AWtli strong north-east winds vessels should not get embayed here, as a heavy sea sets in. "Wang'aparoa Peninsula extends from the mainland in a N.E. by E. direction for five miles, and is nearly separated in two places by deep bays running in on both sides. Its eastern face and Tiritiri island form the "Wangaparoa channel. Off Wanga Point— its N.E. extreme — shelving tidal rocks extend to the N.E. ^ of a mile, steep to ; and also along shore to the westward for about 1^ miles. A sunken rock Avith nine feet on it, and six fathoms close to, lies N.W. by W. f W. one mile from Wanga Point, AAdth a narrow passage of 3| fathoms Avater betAveen it and the shore reef ; the high rock off north end of Tiritiri bears E. f N. 3| miles from it. Wang'aparoa Passage Avill be found safe and easy, Avith a clear Avorking Avidth of 1| miles, Avith from 9 to 15 fathoms Avater. There is a rock nearly aAvash at Ioav Avater, 3 cables W. by S. from the north-Avest point of Tiritiri island, and some rocky ledges extend for a cable off the points of Wangaparoa peninsula ; the shores therefore should not be approached too near on either side. There is also a reef aAvasli tAvo cables off the southern side of Tiritiri island. Anchorage. — On the southern side of Wangaparoa peninsula is good anchorage in six fathoms, Avith northerly Avinds, off a double bay — from BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 61 whose middle point a rocky ledge extends from one to two cables off shore — about a mile from the south-east extreme. Immediately westward is another bay, oft' whose western extreme is a small islet (Frenchman's Cap), lying a quarter of a mile from the shore. Tofino Bay is the western bight. Here there is anchorage in five to six fathoms with northerly and Avesterly winds. At the head of the bay are two small rivers. The northern, the Weiti, has three feet water on its bar at low water, and two fathoms inside. It is navigable some miles for small coasters. The southern river, the Okura, is dry at low water at the entrance, with deep water above. Two and a half miles soutlnvard of the Okura River is Gull Point, a projecting headland, with a rocky patch a cable off it. Dries at low springs. About half a mile to the south-eastward of the point, and three-quarters of a mile offshore, is a ledge of rocks, which dries at half tide, extending some two cables to the south-eastward, parallel with the shore. Caution. — Vessels working along the shore should be careful to avoid this ledge, observing that the dividing line of white and red lights of Bean Rock Light S. E. f S. cuts close to it. Tiritiri Island is one and a half miles long in a noi-th-west and south- east direction, and bears S. by E. from the south-east end of Kawau 8^ miles. Light. — The iron lighthouse, 48 feet high, painted red, on the south- east point of Tiritiri island, is 300 feet above high water. It exhibits s^, fixed white light of the second order, that in clear weather is visible 23 miles. Shearer Rock, with only two feet on it at low water, and steep-to, lies from the east point of Tiritiri island E. by N. nearly one mile distant. Buoy. — A red buoy marks the position of the Shearer Rock, but as it is moored in 14 fathoms water it is liable to be washed away. Vessels from this circumstance have struck on the rock. From the buoy the lighthouse bears W.S. W., distant about one mile ; the north extreme of Tiritiri island W. by N. g N., and its south extreme S.W. g W. Directions. — After passing Kawau island, tlie passage to Auckland may either be made eastward of Tiritiri island or through the Wangaparoa passage. If the former, Tiritiri island should not be approached on its eastern or outer side within two miles to avoid the Shearer Rock. From a berth two miles eastward of the Shearer Rock 10^ miles on a S.S.W. course, or from the centre of the Wanoaparoa passage the same distance on a S. ^ E. course, will take a vessel into the Rangitoto channel, Avhich latter is 1| miles Avide ; and when in it, the mid-channel course is S.E. 2h miles to abreast the North Head of Auckland harbour. From Tiritiri island, and generally from some miles to the northward of it, Rangitoto and the adjacent islands eastward will be plainly seen. Rangitoto Island cannot fail to be immediately recognised. It is circular in shape, about 3^ miles in diameter, and rises gradually to a height of 920 feet, with a crater-like summit, composed almost entirely of masses of scoria, on which are clearly to be distinguished at a distance of seven or eight miles three nipples, and has this peculiar feature : that, taken from every point of view, it presents the same appearance. It is connected with Motutapu, the island next to the eastward, by a narrow sandy neck, dry at low water. Rangitoto, Motutapu, Rakino, and Otatou form a chain of islands extending some eight miles in a N.E. by N. direction from the N.W. part of Rangitoto to the northern extreme of Otatou. There is a passage of half a mile wide, with a depth of 11 to 8 fathoms, between Motutapu and Rakino, with an islet one cable off the S.W. end of the latter, and a rocky patch over one-third of a mile S.S.E. of the islet, and nearly in mid-channel. This passage is rarely used except by small vessels. The Otatou islands are about one mile from Rakino, with the islet of Orarapa in the channel between them. There are no dangers off the North Otatou ; but to the south- eastward and eastward of them lie the David Rocks and Ahaaha Shoal. (See Hieh Channel.) Auckland Harbour. — The North Head of this harbour and INIount Victoria — 280 feet high, with the signal-station on its summit — half a mile farther Avestward, are two remarkable round hills, easily distinguished at a distance of two or three leaicues. 62 BEETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Dangers. — Several rocky ledges extend off the western shores of Kangi- toto Island, which latter sliould not he approached in consequence within three cables. A pinnacle rock with fonr feet on it a low water, and 3^ fathoms close to, lies about six cables S. Eastward of Kangitoto Reef, with the beacon on the reef N. by W. f W., the N. peak of Kangitoto N.E. by E. ^ E., and the Bean Kock lighthouse and green light S.S.E. ; a diac/c hixoyh placed westward of it in 3^ fathoms. Do not anchor or pass inshore of this buoy, as rocky ledges extend some distance off shore. The opposite shore on nearing Auckland should also be ajiproached with caution, as an outlying sunken rock, with only one foot on it at low water, lies half a mile N.W. by N. from Takapuna Head, the first point of land northward of the north head of Auckland Harbour, and distant from it three-quarters of a mile. A dlach cask buoy has been placed on tlie north side of this rock, which is steep, with three fathoms close to. From it the flagstaff on ^Mount Victoria bears S. i E. ; buoy on Rough Rock, S.E. by E. f E. ; Rangitoto Peak, N.E. ^ E. Rough Rock, on the Avestern side of Rangitoto Channel, with six to eight feet at low water, lies N. by E. three-quarters of a mile from the north head of Auckland Harbour, and has a buoy chequered red and 7i'Me on its shoal part ; it may be passed one cable's length on either side. A rocky {)atch, about one-third of a cable in extent, having only eight feet on it at ow water springs, with 2^ and 3 fathoms on its edges, lies between Takapuna Head and Rough Rock. A red buoy is placed on its eastern side in 2^ fathoms at low water springs, Avith Takapuna Head W.S.W. 2^ cables. Rough Rock east 3J cables, and the extreme of North Head S. by E. h E. 6^ cables. S.S.E. ^ E. 2^^ cables from Rough Rock is a sand bank with 12 feet on it at low water, on the S.E. edge of which a striped red and Mac A buoy is placed in three fathoms, with Mount Eden just open of the North Head S.S. W. i W., and Takapuna Head W. by N. i N. 7i cables. Soundings. — The water shoals very gi-adually in approaching Rangitoto Channel, from 10 fathoms mud, abreast Gull Point and three miles off it, to seven and eight fathoms when nearing and abreast the reef ; thence eight to six fathoms to the entrance to the harbour, between the North Head and the Bean Rocks, when it deepens to from nine to sixteen fathoms. After passing the North Head it gradually shoals to eight, seven and six fathoms in mid- channel to the anchorage abreast the Queen-street Avharf for about 2^ miles, with a width of channel of three-quarters of a mile. Caution. — In passing through the Rangitoto Channel its western shore should not be approached Avithin three or four cables, as foul ground extends tAvo to three cables oft' it ; neither is it prudent for large A-essels to pass inside the Rough Rock buoy, or the striped one on the 12-foot sand bank. The North Head (pilot station here — see introduction) should not be approached nearer than a quarter of a mile, as a sandy spit extends off it. Buoy. — A r^r^/ buoy is placed in three fathoms (to mark the spit Avhich extends off' Depot Point on the North Shore) some four cables above the North Head ; a Avhite — NaA'al — storehouse is built on this point. Caution. — The south shore of the harbour is flat, and mud flats and rocky patches dry at some distance oft' ; this shore should not be approached within a third of a mile ; or in beating up, tack at the first shoal cast. Bean Rocks, Lig'ht. — Bean Rocks Avhich uncover at Ioav Avater, bear E. by S. from north head nearly one mile distant, on Avhich, at an elevation of 50 feet above high Avater, ajixedlight is exhibited that in clear Aveather should be seen from a distance of about ten miles ; tlie red, Avhite, and green colours are respectively seen as follows : J^ed.— Between the Ijearings (Avhich are toAvards the light) W. 4 S. and S.W. by W. f W. in Tamaki Strait, and on south side of Korelio CJiannel, including the reef north of Korelio Island. White.— Between the bearings of S.W. by W. f W. and S.W. i W. in the fairway of Korelio Channel, and the south-east side of Hieli Channel. 6';r^«.— Between the bearings S.W. ^ W. and S.S.E. ^ E. on the north- Avest of Korelio and Hieli channels, including the east side of Rangitoto Channel and the Rangitoto Reef. Wliite.— Between the bearings S.S.E. ^ E. and S. E. | S. in the fainvay of Rangitoto Channel. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 63 i^^^/.— Between tlie bearings S.E. f S. and E. by N. | N. on the west side of Ilangitoto Cliannel, including Rough Rock and the north shore of the harbour, with the JSandspit buoy and Depot Point. White.— Between the bearings E. by N. ^ N. and N.E. i E. in the fair- way of the harbour. In-shore the light is eclipsed between the bearings N.E. h E. round by north to W. ^ S. Directions. — Vessels entering Auckland harbour at night by the north or Ran^itoto Channel should when nearing the entrance of the channel bring Tiritiri light to bear from N. | E. to N. by E. , and steer in keeping the light on this bearing till the white or fairway light of the Bean Rock liglithouse opens, bearing about S.E. by S., when the nearest part of Rangitoto should l>e from 1^ to 2 miles distant, the Rangitoto reef about the same distance S.E. by S., and the peak about E.S.E.; then steer in on this line of white fairway light until the summit of the North Head bears S.W.; then keep away south across the rec^ into the white {/lar/four) fairway light, bringing the three white lights (in a triangle) on Queen-street wharf to bear S.W. by W. I W., which will lead up the harbour to the usual anchorage ground below the wharf in six and seven fathoms. These lights appear as one at three miles distance, at which distance they are not easily distinguished from the lights of the town point. Vessels having to work in should not enter on the greai light when near Rangitoto reef — that is, when tlie peak of Rangi- toto bears E. ^ N. ; nor on the rec^ when the summit of Mount Victoria bears S.W. I W., as they will on this latter bearing be in the vicinity of the Rough Rock. Tiiey must also keep well in the Avhite light wlien passing the Sandspit buoy and Depot Point. Vessels entering by tlie Tamaki strait will see the red light over the low southern part of Koreho island, and taking care not to approach within one mile of tlie island, pass through the red into the white fairway light of Koreho channel ; then steer so as to pass about two cables N.W. of the lighthouse (observing that Rangitoto peak north and the intersecting line of white and green lights S.W. ^ W. mark the position of the nine-foot patch in this channel, the white light should there- fore be kept in until the peak bears to the eastward of north), crossing the coloured lights of the Rangitoto channel, into the white harbour fairway light, and for the anchorage as before described. Vessels entering by the Hieh channel will keep on the line (S.W. | W.) intersecting the grtrn and white lights, edging away into the white in passing the north-west extreme of Hieh island, and thence up the Koreho channel and into the harbour as before described. Beacon. — The beacon that formerly stood on the Bean Rocks is now erected on the north-east extreme of Bastion reef, and from it the lighthouse bears N.W., distant three cables. Anchorage. — Merchant shipping are generally 'berthed by the pilot opposite the wharves in from five to eight fathoms. Men-of-war should berth east of Railway Pier, which lias two red lights (vertical) on its N.E. angle, not opening Onepolo of Stanley Pohit. Vessels with powder on board should anchor between a line from eastern head of Judge's Bay to Depot Point, and a line due north from the Avestern point of Judge's Bay to the opposite shore. The limits of A uckland Harbour may be said to be Ijetween a line drawn from the North Head to the Bastion Rock to the eastward, and one from Stokes' Point to the Watchman to the westward, a distance of about four miles. At and above Stokes' Point the navigable channel narrows to from four to two and a half cables at and above Kauri Point, whence the Waite- mata River trends to the northward and westward for a distance of some eight miles to the falls at the head of the river, a little below which is the landing-place, at Harkness' Point, where the Auckland river steamers connect with the Kaipara railway daily. The Whau — a narrow creek opposite Kauri Point, and trending to the southward — is navigable for some distance for small vessels, and has 15 feet at low water at the entrance, drying at the head, which is separated from the waters of the Manukau by a portage of 1^ miles. Immediately above this creek is another, also branching off to the southward for some distance to Henderson's Mill. Outside Anchoragp:. — Should it be necessary to wait for daylight, or any other cause, to enter Auckland harbour, anchorage with southerly or westerly winds may be obtained in the bight north of Wangaparoa peninsula 64; BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. in from 12 to 16 fatlioms ; or if advanced to the southward of that peninsula, anywhere between it and Rangitoto island, in from 8 to 10 fathoms. When sufficiently far south to be protected by the islands of Rangitoto, Motutapu, etc., safe anchorage in six and seven fathoms may be had in almost any weather. Stran*^ers are recommended to adopt this course rather than attempt to enter the harbour at night, unless the light on Bean Rock or the Rangitoto shore and the North Head of Auckland are plainly made out. From Auckland to the N.E.— Vessels bound to the northward or eastward from Auckland will find the Rangitoto channel the safest and easiest, as well as the most direct, and the directions already given will be found sufficient. Koreho Channel, to the north-eastward of Auckland harbour, leads into the Hieh and Waiheki channels, and lies between Rangitoto island and the mainland. With a north-west wind, which blows directly through the Rangitoto passage, it may be sometimes convenient to pass to sea through the Hieh channel, which lies between Hieh and Motutapu islands. It is three-quarters of a mile in Avidth, and has from 8 to 15 fathoms depth of ■water. Directions. — Leaving Auckland harbour, and passing between its north head and the Bean Rocks, when in mid-channel between the two steer N.N.E., or for the peak of Rangitoto island for about half a mile, until the flagstaii" on Mount Victoria is in a line with the south end of the white sandy beach immediately to the northward of the north head of Auckland. Keeping these marks on Avill carry a vessel to the southward of a shoal two cables in extent, with nine feet mud on it at low water in the centre of the channel, Avith Rangitoto Peak north one and eight-tenths of a mile, north head of Auckland JS.W. by W. | W". two miles. Bean Rock lighthouse S.W. by S. one and four-tenths of a mile ; — and through tlie channel in three fathoms at low water. When the peak of Rangitoto Island bears N.N. W., a course may be steered N.E. ^ E. for Hieh Channel, passing the small island Koreho at the distance of little more than half a mile. On the port hand, about three cables from the Rangitoto shore, is a patch of five feet, with a red and white buoy on it. A reef Avhich dries at Ioav water extends two cables off the black sandy bay at the north-east part of Koreho Island, with ii beacon near its north end, from Avhich the east end of Koreho is on with the east part of Taniaki Head S.S.E., and the north-west end of Koreho on with Mount Eden S.W. \ W. Westward of the beacon the ground is clear, with 1^ fathoms at low Avater. Directions. — In passing through the Hieli Channel, neither the north- west head of Hieh Island nor the south-east point of ]Motu Tapu should be approached Avithin tAvo cables, as there are some rocks lying oft" both. When Hieh Island is passed, the channel betAveen Motutapu and Waiheki Island increases to a Avidth of two miles, Avith deep Avater all over, and a N. E. by N. course for seven miles Avill take a vessel mid-channel l>etAveen DaA^d and D'Urville Rocks, at a distance of 1\ miles from either. The folloAving is chiefly taken from the chart, viz. : — The outer or south-eastern David Rock — Avell out of Avater — lies E. by S. 1^ miles from the south part of East Otatou Island, Avith foul ground extending parallel Avith the channel (in a N.E. by N. direction) for lialf a mile. Three-quarters of a mile N.N.E. of this ledge is the Aliaaha shoal, aAvash at high Avater, one-third of a mile long north and south, Avith its north end bearing E. by N. three miles from the north-Avestern extreme of Otatou Islands. D'Urville Rocks lie E. \ N. three miles from the outer David Rock, Avith three feet on them at high Abater, and are dangerous for vessels using this channel. The north-Avest extreme of Hieh and Waiheki Islands in line S.W. \ S. just clears them to the south- eastAvard, and the north-Avest extreme of Waiheki S.W". by S. \ S. (or a little south-eastAvard of the neck of Hieh Island) clears to the north-AvestAvard of them. When clear of them haul up N.N.E. , or Avith a north- Avest Avind as high as a vessel Avill lie for Cape Colville passage. Tamaki Strait and Waiheki Channel.— The latter channel, between the islands Waiheki and Ponoui, is convenient for vessels bound to Coromandel or the Thames from Auckland. Vessels Avorking up for Auck- land from the eastAvard Avill by using it have the adA'antage of smooth Avater and anchorage in the Tamaki Strait, Avhich is formed by Waiheki on the BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 65-' north and the mailand to the sonth, with excellent anchorage in eveiy part in from four to six fathoms, muddy bottom. The only deviation from these uniform soimdings is a shell bank, nearly in mid-channel, with tliree fathoms at low water, bearing from the nortli point of Clarke Island (Motu Karaka) N.E. ^ E. 3;^ miles, and from Maraitai Point, on the mainland N. by W. l| miles. A rocky ledge extends some distance off the latter point. The Tamaki River is immediately opposite Koreho Island, and extends southwards some seven or eight miles to within a little over ^ mile of the head waters of the Manukau. The heads are over one mile apart. A ledge of rocks, with a beacon on the outer end, extends a quarter of a mile off the western head. A bank which dries at low- water springs is in the line of the heads, a little more than one-third of the way across from the western head. It is about 3^ cables long, nearly parallel with the shore, and about one cable wide. The entrance of the channel is between this bank and the beacon off the western head, a quarter of a mile in width, with the beacon on a point on the eastern bank, some 1-^- miles from the head, on with McLean's house (conspicuous inland) S.E. ^ E., passing about half a cable outside the outer beacon on the ledge off the west head, in from 15 to 18 feet water. About five-eigliths of a mile from the outer beacon, and abreast the inner end of the bank above mentioned, a shoal belt nearly two cables across with six and seven feet on it at low Avater, has to be crossed, after which the water deepens up to 27 and 30 feet, al)reast the inner beacon point, Avhich is bold- to. Buckland's wharf and landing-place for cattle is in the bay, a third of a mile below Beacon Point. Off it is the usual anchorage, with 24 feet at low water. Vessels lyin^ here any time should moor, as the tide runs strongly, and the channel is narrow. Above Beacon Point — which should be kept on board to avoid the spit which stretches out from the opposite projecting point — the river turns to the westward. At Panmure, some three miles further up, there is from 12 to 15 feet at low Avater. A substantial bridge crosses the river here, opening near the eastern side for vessels to pass through. Another bridge crosses the river at Otahuhu, near its head. The Tamaki River is much used by the local steamers and small coasters. The Wairoa River is in the south-eastern extreme of the Tamaki Strait. The entrance is in the depth of the deep bay betAveen the WakakaiAvharu and Koherunui Points, Avith shallow Avater in it. The mouth of the riA'er is about 160 yards Avide, Avhere it nearly dries at Ioav A\\ater, deepening Avithin to six and four feet, Avitli a channel 120 yards Avide. There is steam connnunication W'itli Auckland. The district is noted for its dairy produce. After having cleared the nine-feet shoal in Koreho passage as before directed, and passed the island of Koreho on its north side at half a mile distance, keep to the soutlnvard of Hieh Island, and Avhen about the same distance from it steer E. ^ N. for the Passage Rock, Avliich Avill then be nine miles distant. Passage and Sunday Rocks.— The former is 40 feet high, and may be passed close on either side. In a direct line betAveen it and the northern or outer extreme of Ponoiii Head, nearly 1^ miles from each, and about 3^ cables off the nearest part of Waiheki, lies the Sunday Rock, with -eight feet at Ioav Avater. It bears from the south point of Waiheki E. by N. 5 N. nine-tenths of a mile, and from Thames Point (Avest point of Ponoui) N. by W. I West three-quarters of a mile, Avith nine and ten fathoms in the channel on either side of it. Directions. — If Passage Rock is passed on the north side, the Waiheki shore should be kept on board Avithin tAA'^o cables for 1^ miles after passing it (keeping Ponoui Head on the starboard boAv), until the bay south of Einy vessels of 250 or 300 tons, but the entrance is narrow, and the tides strong ; a connnanding breeze is wanted, and a local pilot should be obtained ; Harris' saw mills are liere, and there is a large export of timber. The south point of tliis river is sandy, and a a sandy beach extends for two miles to the eastward of it. From Wangapoa River the coast trends E.N.E. eight miles to Tepaki Point, which is nearly four miles to the north-westward of the north entrance point of Mercury Bay ; off this point lie the Mercury Islands. Mercury Islands (or D'Haussez Group) occupy a space of nearly ten miles in a north-westerly and south-easterly direction, and about the same east and west ; there are four principal and several smaller islands, also low reefs and rocks interspersed among them. Great Mercury (Ahou Ahou), the largest, is four miles long in a N.W. and 8.E. direction, and three miles Inroad at its southern part ; it is steep and cliffy on the north and eastern sides, with the highest sunmiit toAvards the S.E. end. Its southern face is three miles from Tepaki Point. On its west side is a deep bay with anchoruge at its N.E. end in five fathoms in fine weather. There is a sunken rock* with four feet on it at low Avater in the fairway of tlie entrance to the cove, which is in the N.W. angle of the bay, Avhere small coasters lie, from which the S.W. point of the island bears S. by E. ^ E., and two rocks out of water Avhich lie off tlie north-western part of the bay nearh^ in line, bearing W. S. W. A rock twenty feet high lies N.E. by N., half-a-mile from the N.E, point of the island. Red Mercury ( Wakahn), three miles round, is the outer or eastern- most of the group ; it lies four miles to the eastward of the JS. E. part of the Great Mercury. N. ])y W. I W., 1^ miles from its north cliffy point, and E. by N., .seven miles from the N.E. end of the Great Mercury, lies Richards Rock, a dangerous rock Avhich uncovers only at low springs, with deep water round it ; it breaks occasionally. Between the Great and Red Mercurys are the islands of Kawhituhu and EZora-puki, with several smaller islets and low reefs. The passages between all these islands should be avoided. Nearly one mile south of Kora-puki are two rocks awash. Ohena, the southernmost island, lies E. by N. 2.^ miles from i\\Q north entrance point of Mercury Bay. Two low reefs bearing from N. by E. to N.E. extend from 1 to 2^ miles off its nortli extreme ; and north-west of it .are two small low islands, twenty feet high, one and a-half miles distant respectively. Korueng-a Islets.— Half a mile from the north entrance point of Mercury Bay are the steep gray islets, named Koruenga, 150 feet high, the ^uter islet being known as the'Needle. Mercury Bay (see Plan).— This large inlet, 30 miles south-east of Cape Colvillc, is five miles Avide at its entrance, and affords anchorage during westerly AA'inds in sandy bays on its north and south shores. Cook's Bay, on the south side, at the mouth of the Oyster River, is the preferable anchorage. ^ At the head of Mercury Bay, in the south-Avest angle, is Mangrove River, a snug anchorage, and secure from all Avinds. * Captain McGillivray Avhen anchored here in the s.s. Go-ahead sounded over this bay, and found a detached reef with about tAVO feet on it at low Avater springs (on which his boat biuuped) one cable off *t he western entrance point of the cove; he •does not know of the existence of the rock in the entrance nieutioned above; his vessel Avas anchored at the entrance, and he found nothing of it. F 74 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Directions.— Mercury Bay may be approached from the northward, either by i)assing outside the Mercury Islands, or by hugging the coast ; the latter is always done by coasters and steamers. If the outer passage is taken, there are no dangers which are not visible, except Richards Rock before described, which must be carefully avoided, lying as it does in the track from Cape Colville ; between the Mercury and Alderman groups there are 40 fathoms water, decreasing gradually to 20 fathoms across the entrance of Mercury Bay. The approach to Mercury Bay by the inner passage is between Great Mercury Island and Tepaki Point, which has some small islets off it, and is the north-west point of a sandy bay (Opito), where there is good anchorage with winds from N.W. to S.E. by the west. Vessels unable to get round Cape Colville will find shelter in the north-west part of the bay, observing that there is foul ground a short distance soutlnvard of Tepaki Point. Pass midway betAveen the Mercury and Tepaki Point, keeping Opena half a point eastward of the Man Rock, and steer for the Man Rock, a small round islet over a mile to the eastward of the south-east point of Opito Bay, passing it to the southward ; it is bold on its S.W. side. Half a cable south-eastward is a rock awash at low water. Between the Man Rock and the S.E. point of Opito Bay, which has some small islets off it, and nearly midway is a sunken rock ; to pass to the eastward of which the hole in the Needle should be kept closed, as open it leads on to the rock. Having passed this danger a course must now be steered midAvay between Oliena and the Needle, passing the latter about two cables off, as it has some rocks adjoining. Twins. —Having passed Koruenga Islets the Twins, a double conical islet one and a-half miles Avithin, will be seen ; it is steep-to. About half a mile to the south-westward of the Needles is Koranga Island, stretching at right angles off" the land for about four cables, with an islet off its extreme. Matapana Bay lies nearly three-quarters of a mile to the westward of the islet, with five fathoms sandy bottom ; off its west point a ledge of rocks extends one-third of a mile towards the Twins ; after this the north shore is clear to Buffalo Bay. The middle island in Mercury Bay {Moht Korure) has foul ground off its north-east and south-east extreme for two cables, but is bold to the west- ward. Tower Rock {Motnrod) rises abmptly to a height of 188 feet, within one of the southern entrance point, and has also foul ground two cables round it. A sunken rock exists about a quarter of a mile northward of the outer islet in approaching Mercury Bay from the southward, seldom showing, but breaks occasionally ; there are from nine to thirteen fathoms round it ; it bears N.N.W. three-quarters of a mile from Te-Tui or Mahurangi, the island forming the southern entrance point of the bay, and E. by N. one and a-half miles from Tower Rock. When the coast line to the southward of Mahurangi is opened out you Avill be clear of this rock to the eastward. The passages among these islands about the southern entrance should be avoided. There are no other dangers in Mercury Bay than those Avhicli have been mentioned until Shakespeare Cliff' is passed ; the soundings decrease gradually, there being ten fathoms on either side of Middle Island, and three and a-half to four fathoms up to Shakespeare Cliff, off which a vessel may anchor, with the cliff" bearing from S. to S.S.E., but should not proceed higher — unless intending to enter Mangrove River — to avoid the Pandora Rock of eight feet and some detached banks of nine and twelve feet, which extend nearly half-a-mile off" the east entrance point of the river and off the bay between it and Shakespeare Cliff. Mangrove River. — To enter Mangrove River steer midway for Buffalo beach, at the head of the bay ; by keeping the Twins just open of Koranga Islet, bearing N.E. f N. Fly Bank is avoided (the north-Avestern- most of the shoal banks just noticed), and Avlien the eastern entrance point of river bears about S. by E. you will be past the banks, and may haul gradually up towards the mouth, till a distant round red hill is on with high BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 75 Pall Point (within the entrance on the eastern side), which leads clear of the spit off the western beach before reaching low Pah Point ; then keep the eastern point on board in passing, and anchor three cables inside it in mid- channel. It is desirable to moor a little above the saw mills. The river above high Pah Point is navigable for vessels drawing eight or nine feet to the npper saw mills, some six miles above. Water. — Fresh Avater can be procured round the high Pah Point, and there is a carpenter's yard near the anchorage, where ships have been repaired. There is a good pier available for vessels of light draught. Gum Town is situated about nine miles iip Mangrove River. The tides m.ust be considered in entering Mangrove River, and vessels should go in at last quarter flood : it would be better to be there about slack water, for there is no room to round-to, and the tides run from three to four knots. The least water in the channel going into the river at low-water springs is 14 feet, at high water 21 feet. The tides in Mercury Bay are scarcely perceptible on the south shore ; but on the north shore, at springs, they run 1^ knots ; this can be taken advantage of in working in or out. Pilot. — If on the approach of an easterly gale it is required to run for Mangrove River it should be taken as soon as possible, for the sea rolling into the bay would break across the shoaler parts of Buffalo Bay ; one of the builder's men at the entrance of the river might act as pilot if required. The northern shores of Mercury Bay are wooded ; the treble peak rising above Mahunganape is 1,026 feet high ; the south shore is barren and uncultivated. BAY OF PLENTY (See Chart 2,527.) The Bay of Plenty is the name given to the long extent of coast coni- f)rised between Mercury Bay and Cape Runaway, near the East Cape : a ine drawn betAveen these two points measures 120 miles, and the greatest depth of the bay from such a line is about 40 miles. There are a number of islands and detached rocks in this extensive bay ; the only anchorage in it of importance is Tauranga harbour ; the coast trends from Mercury Bay S.S.E. h E. towards this harbour, a distance of about 55 miles. Castle Island {JVgatutic), a small steep islet, lies S.E. by E. | E. four miles from the N. E. point of Mahurangi Island ; it is 50 feet high, white in colour, and steep-to ; 39 fathoms will be found three cables distant. A heavy break was observed by Capt. McGillivray some two miles eastvv^ard of Castle Rock during a N.E. gale, but has not been seen since. Aldermen Islands are a gi-oup of basaltic islets, with some outlying rocks like the stumps of trees, and — including off-lying rocks — occupy a space of over four miles north and south, and three miles east and west. They may be seen 10 or 15 miles off. The largest is on the southern side of the group, and is about 150 feet high. Half a mile eastward of it is a rock out of Avater. One mile north of it four islets extend E.N.E. and W.S.W. for about three miles. 2^ miles N. W. by N. from the eastern islet are two rocks above water and one awash, and 1^ miles W.N.W. of it are two more. These islets are nine miles from Tairua Head (the nearest mainland), Avitli a depth of 25 fathoms in mid-channel. To seaward they are steep-to, there being 100 fathoms less than two miles off. The eastern islet when seen from a distance makes like a sharp pinnacle rock. Tairua River. — Ten miles southward of Mercury Bay is Tairua River, available only for coasters ; the intermediate coast is broken into sandy bays and cliffy points, with from 20 to 14 fathoms w^ater one mile off shore. Shoe Island, Avhen seen from the north-west, exactly represents its name, even to the tie ; it lies E. N. E. from the north cliffy head of Tairua (which is easily recognised by having two nipples on it), IJ miles distant, and is about one mile in circuit'; half a mile eastward of it are some black rocks above water : it has a small coasters' harbour, with six feet at the entrance. Slipper Island, so called from its shape, lies S.E. four miles from Tairua Head, and two miles off shore ; it is nearly two miles long north-east and south-west ; there are two islets off its south end, connected with each FF 76 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. other .111(1 the island by a reef awash at hi^h water. The outer islet is near the extreme of the reef, Avhich is about U miles from the island. A rock about 15 feet high lies nenrly a quarter of a mile to the southward of the reef, and may be passed within a cable's length to the southward Ijy vessels taking- the in-shore passage, when — if coming from the southward— as soon as this rock is passed and the Shoe Island begins to open of the rocks which bear S.W. 1| miles from the north end of the island, and oft" which is a sunken rock M-liich In-eaks heavily, steer midway between it and Tairua Head. Vessels can ride out a north-easter by anchoring to the Avestward of the south end of the Slipper in not less than five fathoms, as under this depth the water shoals suddenly. For shelter from a south-easter anchor in the bay farther north, abreast the house in six fathoms. S.S.W. 2^ miles from Slipper Island is the Warekawa Stream, at the southern termination of a sandy beach, 2^ miles long. Whang-amata River is five miles southward of Warekawa Stream ; its north entrance point is clifly, the south is a sandy point, with a round cliffy islet (Clarke Islet) projecting from it. ^nth-east of this islet, at dis- tances of half a mile and one mile, are two smaller islands, the Wedge and Sugar Loaf. The two entrance points of the river project so as to form a bay outside, where a vessel may anchor with off-shore winds in four fathoms, half a mile from the shore, %vith the entrance open. Vessels entering or leaving require a commanding breeze, as the wind generally dies away between the heads, and should always use the Hood tivith not less than one fathom at low Avatcr and deep inside. No definite information can be given oAving to the shifting nature of the bar.* The Katikati RiAcr expands to a considerable Avitlth Avithin, and is connected l)y one of its arms Avitli Tauranga harbour, aflbrding a channel Avhich is used by small steamers of light draught at high Avater, thus forming a long sandy island betAvcen Te-Ho and Mount Monganui ; at low Avater this channel is nearly dry. Karewha. — W. by S. ^ S. 7^ miles from Te-Ho Head is the small nigged island KareAvha, 350 feet high ; it lies three miles oft' the sandy * Captain Carey, of the steamship Keera, reports that in 1872 the bar, on Avhich Avas a depth of 18 feet at hi^h Avater neap tides. Avas U miles seaAvard of Te-Ho Head ; to enter Te-Ho Head should be brought to bear W.S. W., then steer directly for it, keeping that course until Avithin a quarter to half a cable of the head, then follow the land about the same distance until inside, where there is plenty of room, with seA' en or eight fathoms Avater. BliETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 77 beach, Avitli a channel between of from ten to thirteen fatlioms, sand and shell<. Mannganni Hill at the entrance to Tanranga lies S.E. by S., six miles from it. Tauranga Harbour* is the only harl)onr on the east coast between Mercury Bay and Port Nicholson tliat alFords shelter in all winds for vessels of bnrthen ; its entrance lies sonth 19 miles from the sonth end of Mayor Island, and W. ^ 8. 11 miles from the south end of Motiti Island. The difficulty of entering this harbour through the dee])est channel is its somewhat tortuous course, and the liability to eddy winds on rounding Mount Maunganui, the channel in one place being only half a cable wide ; but with those winds winch would make the Bay of Plenty a lee shore, Tauranga harbour is the most accessible. The entrance to the harbour lies nearly north and south ; the eastern head is the remarkable hat-topped hill Maunganui, rising abru])tly from the sandy shore to the height of 860 feet, which makes like an island from seaward; the western entrance is formed by low undulating sandhills ; one mile north- westward of Maunganui a ^pit with nine feet extends eastward from the western sandy shore for one mile, and generally breaks ; occasionally in heavy weatlier there is a break in the entrance. The approach to Tauranga Harbour is remarkably distinct. Vessels bound to it from tlie northward should bring the south end of Mayor Island to bear north, steering a south course ; on this course Karewha will be passed on the outside about three miles, in twenty-three fatlioms, when the islet Motu-otnu, and a hummocky projection from the sand, both witliin one mile eastward of Mount Maunganui, will be seen ; the soundings decrease gradually after passing Karewha Island, from fifteen to six fathoms within one mile of the heads. Vessels bound for Tauranga harbour must bring the summit of INIaunga- nui to bear south and not eastward of S. byE., and then steer for it until within two cables of the north rocks (or steer the course till you open out the pilot's house on S.E. side of tlie mount) thereby avoiding the bank extending from the west sliore ; the channel is one-third of a mile wide and deejiens from 3^ to 7 fathoms ; as Maunganui is steep-to keep not more than a cable from it till you open out the red buoy which is on the north end of inner middle bank^which runs north and south quarter of a mile Avith two fathoms at low water — in 5^ fathoms ; steer for it till you get the black buoy — which is in 3;^ fathoms— well open, when sliape a course midway between the buoys ; if Hood, till tlie north end of Motn-Otau is open clear of Mau- nganui, when haul round towards the beacon on Stoney Point ; if ebb tide, keep midway between the buoys till you get Motu-Otau well open, and you are well up to the second red Imoy — ^^Avliich is at the beginning of the inner waters leading to Katikati— in 4i fathoms, before hauling round for Stoney Point. After Stoney Point is passed Maunganui is again steep-to, and a good anchorage will be founle, the depth on it varies from 9 to 14 feet ; between the heads the tides run A'ery strong. Half a mile eastAvard of OluAva River is a Avooded cliff about 500 feet high, Avhich, as it stands alone on the coast, is a good guide to this river ; 2^ miles eastward of Ohiwa Kiver is the entrance to the Wai-otahi stream, Opotiki River is six miles eastAvard of Ohiwa ; the entrance is not more than a cable across ; both heads are sand, Avitli no natural niarks to lead in. The bar changes Avitli freshes, and north-east gales also affect it, the depth varying, Init the river is navigable for ordinary coasters for one mile inside. Opotiki divides into tAvo branches, half a mile Avithin the points both running soutliAvard, and about tAVO miles apart ; the Church mission is on the Avestern branch, three miles from the mouth ; this riA'er is in the depth of the Bay of Plenty ; and seven miles eastAvard of it, the long extent of almost straight sandy coast may be said to terminate at Opape Point. iVo/e. — Generally speaking, none of these bar entrances should be taken Avithout good local knoAvledge, in consequence of their shifting nature. Soundings off Coast.— The general depth of Avater from Kaituna EiA-er to this part of the coast, at 10 miles off shore, is 30 fathoms, mud, and at five miles, from 18 to 21 fathoms, sand. The flood tide runs to the Avest- Avard along the coast. Featuees of Coast.— From Opape Point the coast trends about N.N.E. 22 miles to Waikaua Point, and its features are strikingly changed, being noAV broken. into numerous small sandy or shingly bays Avith rugged cliffy points betAveen. Three miles from Opape Point is Pehetaire Point, 800 feet high. The ground here shelves very gradually, having 18 fathoms, mud, five miles from the beach. Nearly eight miles further north-eastAvard — Avith three bays betAveen — is Koronohina Point, 240 feet high, and rotind it is built the large Aillage of Tokata. One mile south of Koronoliina Point is the small river IMaraenui, expanding during freshes to half-a-mile in Avidth, but in dry weather fordable half-a-mile from the mouth ; its bar is 30 feet Avide, and close to the shore ; it is a tolerable boat harbour, having eight feet Avater Avithin. From Koronoliina Point to Opokohino Point and the village of Omaio is 2h miles, Avitli a rugged coast betAveen. The peak over Opokohino Point rises to 600 feet. Te Kaha Point is five miles further to the north-east ; there are tAvo bays betAveen, and extending ofl" the middle point Avliich separates them is the small peninsula of INIotu-nui, Avhere coasters haul into five fathoms and ride out north-east Avinds. The bay to the south-Avest of it is shing-le, and tAVO small rivers empty themselves into it ; the larger one is the Omaio. AAA'anui River is nearly three miles north-eastward of Motunui Point, Avith a rocky shore betAveen ; it is visited by small coasters. From this river the coast turns sharply to the north-AvestAvard to Te Kaha Point for about 1^ miles, Avith a rocky shore. Te Kaha Point has outlying rocks half-a-mile round it ; hence to Waikaua Point, an old Avhaling station, is four miles ; midway betAveen them and a-lialf mile ofl' shore is a reef aAvasli, to keep clear of Avliich steer BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 81 outside the line of the points. There are high wooded ranges a short distance inland; Mount Hardy, S.E. by E. nine miles from Te Kaha, rises to a height of 3, 700 feet ; also a coast hill immediately east of Point Waikaua, 860 feet high. From Waikaua Point to Orete, the soutliern point of Wangaparawa roads, is N.E. nine miles ; the first half of the distance, as far as Kotiki Point, the coast is steep and rugged, with 35 fathoms mud two miles off shore, decreasing to twenty fathoms at the same distance towards Orete Point ; for the remaining distance there are shingle beaches and rocky points. Immediately west of Orete Point there are sunken rocks tln-ee-quarters of a mile off shore, and the ground is everywhere foul within half-a-mile of the coast. Cape Runaway, the eastern termination of the Bay of Plenty (easily known ])y its dark colour and oval shape, almost like an island) is nearly six miles north-eastward of Orete Point, and forms the north-east point of Wangaparawa roadstead ; detached rocks lie a quarter of a mile northAvard of the cape, with twenty fathoms water near to, and six fathoms between them and the land. E.S.E. from these rocks is another awash at low water ; it is recommended to give this cape a good berth as the tide runs strong in its vicinity, and generally a swell, "Wangaparawa Roadstead. — With south-east winds there is anchorage in this roadstead ott" what was a whaling station at two miles S.S.W. of Cape Runaway. Large vessels should not approach the shore within a depth of twelve fathoms, anchoring about one mile west of the conical hill over the station, south of which one mile distant is Wangaparawa, a fordable stream, up to which the coast is rocky, and landing 1)ad ; beyond it there is a shingle beach H miles long, and then about the same extent of white clilfs, 80 feet high ; a ledge of rocks extends nearly half a mile oft" the south end of these cliffs, thence a sandy bay to the long low point Orete. Caution. — Upon the slightest appearance of a westerly wind a vessel should not remain at anchor off the whaling station, as, although well sheltered from a north-cast wind, it. would be dangerous to attempt to ride a breeze out from that direction, these winds ahvays shifting to the north- ward and westward, bringing in such a heavy sea as renders it very difficult to gain an offing. The anchorage under Orete Point, about half a mile Avithin it, affords excellent shelter in south-west and westerly winds, by bringing the outer extreme of the rocks extending off' it to bear W. by N., and anclioring in from 10 to 7 fathoms, line sand ; a great objection, however, to the anchorage in Wanga]iaraAva roads is, that between the changes from south-east to westerly winds there is frequently a calm, the westerly Avind being preceded by a SAvell, and coming in fiaAvs. From Cape Runaway the coast trends to the eastward 17 miles to MatakaAva Point, the north point of Hicks Bay. Lottin and Midway Points form a projectig^i— 1^ miles long — half Avay between, Avitli small sandy bights (l)ut no anchorage) on each side. The hills bordering the coast are steep and clothed Avith thick brush-Avood, and A^ary from 1,000 to 1,500 feet in height ; they arc higher to the Avestward of Lottin than towards Hicks Bay. Caution. —Should the Avind fall there is no anchorage on this part of the coast, and a constant savcU sets toAvards it. Soundings in 20 fathoms will be had tAA'o cables off shore, and 40 to 50 fathoms Avithin one mile. Hicks Bay is nearly tAvo miles deep by one and a half miles Avide, and is open to the eastAvard. The north point, Matakawa, is a long Ioav rocky tongue ; the rocks off' it are all A' isible, and there is 25 fathoms AA'ater Avithin one cable of the entrance. The south point, Ko-hau or Iron Pot, is almost inaccesi^ible. Anchorage. — Hicks Bay affords secure anchorage in allAvesterly Avinds from north to south ; from north Avinds also, Avhich are not uncommon, it is sheltered ; but vessels must get Avell Avithin Matakawa Point, the Iwttom is greenish mud and good holding ground, shoaling suddenly toAvards the 82 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. sandy beach at the head. The north and south shores are steep, generally faced by jierpendicular cliffs and outlying rocks ; the latter within half a cable of high-water mark. North-east gales, which generally spring up from the eastward and gradually freshen, give sufficient Avarning to weigh. No vessel should lie here with north-east or south-east winds ; from south-east winds, which are much more constant on this part of the coast than in the Hauraki Gulf, vessels may be sheltered by standing doAvn towards the white clitts, which are five miles south-eastward of Hicks Bay, anchoring in from 9 to 12 fathoms in the Kawakawa roadstead, one and a half miles westward of the Awatere River, and within one mile of the beach, when a vessel will be in a better position to fetch out on a change to the eastward coming on than if in Hicks •Bay. Awatere River is three miles E. S. E. from the south point of Hicks Bay at the eastern extreme of the sandy bay of Panaruku. Nearly a mile to the south-west of it is a table hill 900 feet high, and about the same distance to the south-east is a hill 1,100 feet high. Water. — Fresh water can be obtained in Hicks Bay from a gully within half-a-mile of Mota-kawa point ; difficulty will be experienced in. landing if the winds blows fresh outside, from a swell roUing into the bay ; there is also a considerable stream of fresh water five or six feet deep in the north-west corner. Supplies may be obtained from a native village (Wharekahika) in the soiith-west nook of the bay. The natives catch the hapuka fish off Ko-liau Point ; just within this point is a very small but deep cove, used by the natives as their best landing-place, except the whaling station one mile from Motakawa Point, where the isolated rocks form a boat harbour. From Hicks Bay to the Bast Cape. — From the north point of Hicks Bay to the East Cape Islet is E. by S. f !S. 14 miles. Soundings. — The soundings five miles off this part of the coast are from 40 to 50 fathoms sand, which decrease rather gradually to 14 and 10 fathoms within one mile. Across the entrance of Hicks Bay and Kawakawa roadstead there are from 14 to 17 fathoms, and no dangers but what are visible. The land about the East Cape has a very mountainous appearance ; the summit of five distinct ranges may be seen backed by the snow-capped Ikaurangi, a conspicuous mountain, rising to the height of 5,535 feet, 28 miles south-west of the cape. The cape itself is of a remarkable white clayish sand, and this barren feature is continuous to Hicks Bay in steep clills to the westward, and in broken cliffs with valleys intervening to the southward. East Cape Islet.— This islet is half-a-mile in circuit ; it is steep, almost inaccessible, and bounded by rocks, with a ledge extending from its northern extreme, N.N.E. half-a-mile. There is a channel nearly one mile wide between it and the cape, at the northern entrance of which is a shoal patch of 2^ fathoms ; nearly one mile from this patch, and N.E, J N. two-thirds of a mile from the north-eastern point of the cape, lies another patch with 3^ fathoms on it, which breaks in heavy weather. As the winds are liable to die away suddenly this channel is not to be recommended, especially as there is generally a swell, and the tides run two and three knots. Within one mile of the islet the water shoals suddenly to twelve and nine fathoms, which latter depth will be carried to within one cable of it. Winds. — The winds on either side of the East Cape are frequently very different, although it may be blowing fresh. The strong westerly sea breezes which blow through the Bay of Plenty are suddenly lost when passing south of East Cape Islet, the distinct line of breezes being curiously depicted on the water, and a vessel may be becalmed here for hours in sight of strong breezes, and as there is usually more or less swell a vessel should be guarded on approaching- the shore. There is good anchorage on either side of the cape, according to the direction of the wind, with regular soundings on a sandy bottom. This is very advantageous for vessels bound either way meeting a foul wind on rounding the cape, for, as the wind Brett's new zExVland and south pacific pilot. 83 usually blows along the land, smooth water can he found on one side or the other. Northward of the East Cape the flood tide sets to the westward, and southward of the cape it sets in a northerly direction. There are strong races extending some eight or ten miles off the Cape. FROM EAST CAPE TO MAHIA, OR TERA-KAKO PENINSULA. From the East Cape to Open Bay ( IVaipiro), a distance of twenty miles, the coast trends S. by W., varied by white streaked cliffs, with sandy beaches intervening, the country being more or less cultivated ; the soundings four miles off the land are from 25 to 30 fathoms mud, and there are several rocks scattered along the shore within a mile off it. Three miles south of East Cape is the Wakori Bluff, a cliffy projection, the laud over it being from 500 to 600 feet high. Waiapu River is six miles from East Cape, flowing through a sandy beach ; it is a considerable stream at high water, but the freshes come down with great violence, so as to render it unsafe as an anchorage even for the smallest vessels. Rock. — Between Waiapu River and Wharariki Point, about one mile from the shore is a rock which bears N.N.E. ^ E. 2^ miles from Wharariki. "Wharariki Point is nearly four miles south of Waiapu River. It is the south point of the Awanui stream, the land over it is 950 feet high. Rocks extend for half a mile round this point. There is landing on the north side of the point behind the rocks, which is used when the Waiapu bar is unapproachable, but as there are several sunken rocks which only break in a heavy swell, it is not reconmiended for strangers. 3^ miles southward of Wharariki Point at the south end of a sandy bay is Repoura Village ; clitts extend for two miles southward of the village ; and a little below the south point of the bay, and one mile off shore, are sunken rocks, with foul ground for half a mile outside them. Between the rocks and the shore are eight fathoms of Avater ; two miles from the beacli there is only ten fathoms. Kaimohu, a round head 670 feet high, three miles northward of Open Bay, is the next headland. Sunken rocks extend off it for one mile to the eastward, and the same distance in a north and south direction ; there are four fathoms close to them, and 17 fathoms two cables to the eastward. Open Bay ( Waipiro) will be known by Tawhiti hill, the highest on the coast, which rises two miles south of the southern head, and is 1,670 feet above the sea ; its width is four miles from north to south, and depth little more than one mile. Waikawa stream is in the south-western corner of the bay ; the landing there is generally difficult. Off' the north point [Matahaii) is a reef which extends northerly for nearly one mile parallel with the beach, and a quarter of a mile ott' shore ; within this reef boats can eftect a landing, and whence produce is shipped ; there are nine fathoms in the middle of the bay in a line between the heads ; a rocky patch with two fathoms is said to exist m its north-west corner ; another rock {Tokamanga) is said to exist one mile N.E. of Matahau Point. Close oft" the southern head is a small islet and some rocks. This bay can only be considered as a temporaiy anchorage, with ofl-shore winds. From Open Bay the coast trends S. by E. for twenty miles to Tolago Bay (^-aw«), the bays of Tokomarua and Waipara lying between. Some reefs lie off this part of the coast distant more than one mile. Soundings. — The soundings are regular, in 30 fathoms mud, five miles off the coast, decreasing to 20 fathoms sand witliin two miles of it, Tokomarua Bay is 3^ miles from the south head of Open Bay ; the coast between is composed of precipitous clifl's, backed by the hill Tawhiti, east of which, and half a mile from the clifi's, is the islet Mowhiauru, about 30 feet high, encircled by rocks. KOATUNUI is the north cliffy head of Tokomarua Bay and Mawai — a sharp barren projection 400 feet high, with rocks extending a quarter of a mile off it— is the south point ; they are four miles apart, and the bay is two miles in depth ; two small rocks close together {Hikutu) awash at low water only, lie in the centre of it, one and a quarter miles from the beach and 84 BRETT'S NEAV ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. N.W. by N. 2 J miles from INIawai Point ; there is also a reef on the sonth side of the hay half a mile in extent, and one-third of a mile oil" shore, which is visible. Soundings. — There are 16 fathoms Avater across the entrance, and six fathoms inside the Hikntn rocks, which have 14 fathoms all ronnd them ; no vessels, except such coasters as know the channels among- the rocks, slionld attempt this bay ; it is moreover a very open anchorage. St. Patrick's Cove. — On the south side of Mawai Point, taking its name from a curious pinnacle, which, seen from seaward, appears like the gigantic figure of a man with Ids arms folded. "Waipari Bay. — 3:^ miles from JNIawai Point is jNIorahai Head, the north point of Waipari Bay, one and a half miles wide, and the same distance in depth, with sandy shores. The north point, and the wliole of this bay, is rocky ; three-qiiarters of a mile north-eastward of the north .head is the small rocky islet of Motu-Kipa, with a narrow channel of five fathoms between it and the shore. Anaura Island forms the south head ; it lies a (j^uarter of a mile from the shore Avith a l)oat channel between, and extends tln-ee-quarters of a mile in an easterly direction ; it is sterile and precipitous. Marau Bluff is nearly seven miles southward of JNIawai Point, and 4i miles northward of Tolago Bay ; a reef of rocks awash— always breaking — (Tokamapuhia) lies rather more than a mile eastward of this bluii', and extends in a N.N.W. and S.S.E. direction for more than half a mile. Tolag"0 Bay [U-aiva] is one and one-third miles across, N.N.W. and S.S.E. from head to head, and about the same distance in depth, with anchorage in all westerly winds from north to south. The north head rises to 400 feet, and the south to 890 feet, both of white marl. Sporing" Island, three-quarters of a mile long in a north and sonth direction, lies immediately oft' the sonth head of Tolago Bay, surrounded by rocks, which extend a-third of a mile oU". Off the north head of the bay is an island (Motu Heka) surrounded by rocks ; and again north-east of the latter is a reef (Tatara) always breaking, its outer limit being one and a-half miles from the north head. There is a passage of a quarter of a mile between the reef and Motu Heka, with a depth of eleven fathoms. Tolago Bay is clear of dangers ; there are ten fathoms sand between the heads, shoaling everywhere gradually, and five fathoms within half-a-mile of the sandy beach. On the setting in of easterly winds, vessels should leave in good time, for the outer reef renders the beating out somewhat tedious. Water may be had in Cook's Cove within the south head, but is difficult to get in the dry season. Tolago Bay is in steam communication with Gisl)orne. Uawa River is at the head of Tolago Bay, Avitli a bar of live feet, which is said to be constantly shifting ; coasters have occasionally entered it ; the principal branch has its rise to the northward. The river is navigable, when inside the bar, and has been ascended for sixteen miles by a steam vessel of six feet draught. Motara Bluff and Islet. — ^lotara l^lutf, a cliffy point with an islet and some rocks extending a third of a mile from it, is 2^ miles S.S.E. of the sonth head of Tolago Bay ; from it Gable-end Foreland {Pari-nui-te-ra) ])ears S. \ W. 7 miles ; rocks extend at low water half a mile off the coast Ijetween. Cape Gable, or Gable-end Foreland, appears from the eastward like the white-washed gal)le-end of a house ; there are two patches of detached rocks one and a half miles north of the cape, about three-quarters of a mile from the beach ; and a small islet one-third of a mile south-east of it, with a reef extending half a mile in the same direction. A reef also extends south of the cape a distance of two miles. Rock. — The steam vessel Star of the Sonth, in March, 1865, is reported to have struck on a rock about three miles S.S.E. of Gable-end Foreland; from the rock Whangara Islet bears W^.S.W. about three miles. F\om Gable-end Foreland the coast trends S.W. by S. for 15 miles to Tua-hini Point, the north head of Poverty Bay {Turanga) ; the shore between is rugged, with sterile hills GOO feet high. Rocks extend a mile from the projecting points, having sandy bays within them, faced also by rocks. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 85 Poverty Bay (7>/;-rt;/<^^) is five miles ill breadth from head to head, wliich lie north-east a,iid south-west of each other, and are the southernmost white coloured projections on the coast, until Tahle Cape (24 miles further to the southward) is reached; the bay is four miles in depth.* Caution.— The South, or Youn^- Nick's Head, is 520 feet high, and has anchorage one and a half miles within it in 3^ fathoms, half a mile oft' shore, but it is advisable not to approach the shore nearer than half a mile in entering, as the ground is very foul, changing from eight fathoms to nine feet. The North Head [Tna-hini), 260 feet high, has also a foul rocky ground, extending to the south-east for two miles ; at this distance it shoals suddenly from 16 to 8 fathoms. Anchorage. — On the north side of Poverty Bay, one mile inside the outer ]3oint, is Tua-Motu, which appears an island, but is joined to the main at low water ; oti' this peninsula a reef extends two cables to the southward, and between it and Turanganui River are rocks half a mile from the shore, the outer ones of Avhich are covered or awash at low water ; the bottom is sand, and the soundings decrease gradually from 12 fathoms across the entrance to 5 fathoms, half a mile from the beach. It is recommended to weigh on any appearance of a breeze from the south-east, for from this quarter it freshens suddenly, and several vessels have been lost by waiting too long. Capt. Kennedy, s.s. Hawea, reports having struck with the following bearings, viz., Tua-Motu (outer extreme) E. ^ S., and Pah Hill (a peaked hill half way between the island and Turanganui River) N.E. ^ N. A buoy is moored in the vicinity of the Luna, or Pinnacle Rock, outside the beacons, in 2h, fathoms. The best anchorage for ships is about three -quarters of a mile to the S.W. of it. Extract from "Gazette," 1879: — "A rock with only six feet at low water exists about 100 feet E.N.E. of Pinnacle Rock; vessels should not anchor within a cables' Icn^^th of the Pinnacle Rock buoy, wliich marks the position of both rocks, and if bound for the river they should bring it to bear well to the eastward before hauling up." Rivers in Poverty Bay.— There are two small rivers in the bay, Turanganui and Koputctea. Turanganui River is two miles westward of Tua-Motu Peninsula, and is the northern termination of a sandy beach extending eight miles from the south head. HARBOUR master's DIRECTIONS. * ' Turanganui bar is very uncertain. Sometimes after long continuance " of southerl}'^ winds it is close in to the outer stake, and after a heavy flood " nearly out to the Luna (or Pinnacle) Rock buoy. The stakes are placed to *'shew the channel past the rocks up the river. The present leading marks *' over the bar to the outer stake are the inner (sloping) stake on with a *' yelloAv house on the river bank near the galvanized iron store. Follow the " stakes keeping them on starl)oard hand, and when abreast of inner one, keep "a verandah house on starboard side of river (entering) on with end of "galvanized store until abreast of Waikanae River, then keep about mid " river until abreast of iron store, and haul in to the wharf. There is a " shoal point just outside tlie store. After a heavy fresh the bar nearly "allies at low water, but a channel breaks out along the beach to the " westward with deep water ; this gradually closes in with the beach, and "the bar deepens a few days after the tiood has subsided. At present there " is seven feet at high water springs on the bar. The best anchorage " for steamers and coasters is in six fathoms ^\\i\\ the flagstaft' N.N.E. The " bottom to westward of this is rocky. A red light is exhibited at the flagstaff* " 38 feet above high water, showing all round to seaward, and visible six "miles." Water can be had in abundance. * The master of the ship Excelsior in 1873 states that the anchorage at Poverty Bay is good, the gi-ouiid being stilt" clay, there is no fear of dragging, and from strong south-cast winds, which are rare in summer, a sliip loading "in the baj* could find shelter under Young Nick's Head. 86 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Gisborne. — The risinj? toAvn of Gisbome is situated on the rif^ht "bank of the Tiiranganui River, near the entrance (see introduction). The depth in the river varies from three to six feet at low water up to the Avharf. Koputetea River has about the same water on the bar as Turanga- nui, but it is less easy to define ; its entrance is N.W. 2f miles from Young Nick's Head; it is a much larger river than Turanganui, and a fine sheet of water when the tide is in, and flows through one of the richest valleys in New Zealand. It is much exposed to the surf, which at low water breaks across the bar, and even during still weather it does not appear safe for a boat, except at high water or half tide. The flood tide outside sets to the northward, and ebb to the southward, and their influence extends ten miles from the shore ; within Poverty Bay the tide is scarcely i)erceptible. Soundings.— From Young Nick's Head, Poverty Bay, to the neck of the Mahia Peninsula, a distance of nineteen miles, the coast is bold, and may be approached as near as convenient ; 24 fathoms will be found at two miles distant from the shore, and ten fathoms at one mile. Ariel Rocks, a very dangerous outlying reef, which breaks only in heavy seas, bears E. ^ N. , ten miles from Tua-hini Point, the north head of Poverty Bay. E. by S. ^ S. 8| miles from False Gable, the nearest land, and S. by E. ^ E. 10 miles from Cape Gable end Foreland ; the shoalest f)art is about half a mile in extent north and south, with twelve feet on it at ow water springs ; they are steep-to, shoaling at one cast from twenty- three to six fathoms, within half a cable of the shoalest part ; there are 31 fathoms, green mud, between it and the shore, and 20 fathoms one mile to the northward, where it shoals more gradually than from the other sides. The vicinity of this reef may be known by the bottom being composed of coarse gravel and stones within a radius of two miles ; if the soundings exceed 35 fathoms a vessel is to the eastward of the reef. Clearing Marks. — Tlie distance from the shore will render clearing marks available only in clear weather. When Tua-Motu just opens like an island a vessel will be only half a mile north of it ; also the top of the white Gable is nearly on a level with the land behind it, when at the reef. Mahia, or Terakakp Peninsula, 12 miles long in a north and south direction, and nearly nine miles north-east and south-west in its widest part, forms the northern liead of Hawke Bay. It is connected with the main by a sandy neck two miles long and three-quarters of a mile broad ; a river flows through this neck and runs into the sea on the eastern side, which, when it is swollen, gives Mahia the appearance of an island. "Wanga"Wai Road. — On the north coast of the peninsula, three miles Avest of Table Cape, there is a good roadstead ofl' the Wangawai River, aflbrding shelter in south and west winds ; the anchorage is in 10 fathoms mud. Table Cape bearing E. ^ S., and one mile north of the river ; it is safe during the ordinary sea breeze, but care must be taken to leave on the approach of easterly winds. Small coasters can enter Wangawai, as it attbrds anchorage in six feet ; from thence to Table Cape the ground is foul, and rocks awash extend from the south shore north of the cape nearly one mile. Table Cape, the N.E. extreme of Mahia Peninsula, is 21 miles S. by E. J E. from Young Nick's Head, from it tlie east coast of the peninsula trends S.S.W. 12 miles to its extreme point, and is studded Avith ofl'-lying dangers, the first being a reef three miles S.S.W. ^ W. of the Table Cape, extending three-quarters of a mile from the shore, off Taiporutu. One mile farther south is a detached reef (Hawini) three and a half miles long ; the outer ledge two miles from the shore, and leaving a channel within, half a mile broad, sometimes taken by coasters, but not recommended ; the northern extremes of the Hawini Rocks are six feet above water, the rest covered and only occasionally break. Three miles S.E. by S. of this ledge is the Bull Rock •with eight feet on it at low water, which breaks with strong winds, it bears E. by N. northerly from the south point of the Mahia Peninsula 3f miles, and N.E. 4^ miles from the south extreme of Portland Island. The red light on Portland Island lighthouse shews over this reef, and should not therefore be opened out. 20 fathoms will be found within J of a mile round the rock. Another reef exists midway between this danger and the extreme of Mahia ; BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 87 it appears to be a narrow ledge extending one cable north and sonth, and a channel within ; its centre is two miles E. by N. f N. from the sonth extreme of Mahia ; there is abont eight feet of water on it, it breaks with a swell. In a heavy S. E. sea a very heavy break was observed between the lighthonse and Bull Rock, abont three-fifths of the distance from the island to the rock. Portland Island. — Sonth of Mahia Peninsnla extreme one mile is Portland Ishmd ( Te Houra), nearly two miles in length in a N. by E. and S. by W. direction, of moderate height, with a flat snmmit and a few bnslies on it. A channel, one qnarter of a mile wide, with six fathoms, exists between the peninsula extreme and Portland Island ; it borrows on the Mahia shore, but the rocks extending oft* either coast sliow ; if a vessel i» caught in a southerly gale and cannot weather PortLand Ishmd this channel is available, but as it leads among the rocks previously described it cannot be recommended. The tide sets through with a force of two knots. The south extreme of Portland Island is foul half a mile from the shore. The lighthouse on Portland Island is on its southern extremity ; the tower is 28 feet high, painted white, shewing a ivhiterevolvingYx^^xX, attaining its greatest brilliancy every thirty seconds, 300 feet above the sea level, and visible 24 miles in clear weather. From the lower part of the tower Vi fixed r^/ light is shewn, with an arc of six degrees over the Bnll Rock, which bears N. E. four miles from the lighthouse. Coast Navigation. — The east coast of the North Island from the East Cape to Hawke Bay, a distance of nearly 100 miles, has only two roadsteads for ships of burthen, viz., Poverty and Tolago Bays, and ha* many dangers within a league of it, so that even in fine weather and with westerly winds there are few spots where cargo can be shipped by vessels- anchoring cautiously oft* it. There are indeed few places, if any, where even coasting vessels would be safe in a gale, for the rivers are only accessible in fine weather at the proper time of tide. Soundings. — Besides carefully avoiding the Ariel Rocks, and the off*- lying dangers from the Mahia Peninsula, a stranger should not approach this, part of tiie coast nearer than a league ; the soundings will be found to decrease from about 40 fathoms at two leagues off shore to 24 fathoms at one league ; the bottom being green mud outside 24 fathoms, and fine sand within that depth. Tides. — Advantage can be taken by standing off* or in shore according to the tide, Avhich is felt to a distance of 15 miles off ; within four miles of the shore the springs run two knots and the neaps one knot an hour ; near the projecting headlands they are more rapid, and either tide, striking against a point, has a tendency to set oft" it. FROM MAHIA PENINSULA TO CAPE PALLISER. With the exception of the anchorages in Hawke Bay there may be said to be none between Mahia Peninsula and Cape Palliser, a distance of 180 miles. Hawke Bay from Mahia Peninsula, its northern limit, to Cape Kidnappers, its south extreme, is 42 miles in a north-east and south-west direction ; the depth of the bay is 22 miles ; it is entirely open to south-east winds. The principal anchorages are oft' Long Point, at Ahuriri, and at Cape Kidnappers. Long Point aft'ords shelter during north-east and south- east gales, and Cape Kidnappers in south-westerly. Long Point Roadstead (see plan on Port Napier plan) on the north- east extreme of HaAvke Bay is sheltered from all winds but westerly. The holding ground is not always good, but by anchoring a mile N.N.E. from Long Point there is good protection from the black north-easter,* and amj)le room to weigh, taking care to avoid (if necessary) the shoal patch of 2f fathoms which lies three cables S.W. by W. from Moemoto Head, and N.N.E. 1^ miles from Long Point. To ride out a south Avind get well and close inside Long Point, until an opening or cleft shows itself ; with the * It frequently blows from the north-west in Hawke Bay, while it is north-east at Long Point ; the neck of low land causing the in-draught. The black north-easter is so called as distinguished from the summer sea breeze from the same quarter. 88 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. point Routli-west, in seven fathoms bine clay, this is the Lest holding ground. The cliff within the point is a steep-to, but vessels should be in-ei)ared to take an outer berth when the gale abates, and if a south-west wind sets in to proceed to Wangawai road. Water. — Long Point affords an excellent supply of Avater. Anchorages for small vessels accustomed to the place Avill also be found under Black Keef Point, which lies nearly midway between Long Point and Portland Island, and under Waikokupu, near the \vestcrn shore of the sandy neck of the peninsula. Rivers Wairoa and Mohaka — Twenty miles westward of Long Point, on the north shore of Hawke Bay, is the entrance to the river Wairoa,"* and II miles farther to the south-westward is the small river Mohaka, but the entrances are difficult ; the mouths also shift, and a south swell detains vessels inside with the chance of being blocked up. " The depth on the bar of the Wairoa varies from four to eight feet, it is -always shifting. Vessels drawing seven feet may enter with smooth Avater, but in all cases strangers should Avait for a pilot. Several small steamers trade between this place and Na]uer. " The Mohaka can be entered by vessels drawing not over four feet Avater. 'Great care should be taken in landing, as there is a bar at its mouth, also a heavy surf on the beach, unless after a continuance of strong land breezes. A sniall steamer runs regularly to Mohaka. " — Napier Almanac. Tides. — It is high Avater, full and change, at Wairoa River at Ch. 45m.; .springs rise seven feet, neaps four feet. The anchorages of these rivers are aA^ailable in fine Aveather, but a heaA^y .ground SAvell sets into the bight of the bay. On the approach of a south Avind it has appeared ready to break in 12 fathoms. Eleven miles south-AvestAvard of INIohaka, and under the highest bluff, is the small boat harbour of Waipapa, and scA'en mile^ farther, the small head- land Whakaari, Avhicli affords partial shelter for small coasters. Whakaari forms the north extreme of a sandy bay, eight miles in extent in a southerly trend, terminating at Ahuriri, Port Napier. Ahuriri, or Port Napier (See plan.)— This port is adapted to vessels draAving 10 or II feet Avater ; it is the only harbour between Tauranga •and Port Nicholson. The south head is a cliffy bluff", Avhich, rising out of the loAV land, appears like an island ; the entrance is narioAV. Ahuriri Poads. — The anchorage is in six fathoms good holding ground, .about one mile off' the harbour entrance, Aviththe bluff" just described, bearing S.E. by E., Cape Kidnappers being shut in. These roads are safe in south, south-Avest, and north-Avest Avinds, and during the ordinary summer north- east sea breezes ; the black north-easters give ample Avarning of approach. Commander Sullivan, H.M.S. Harrier, remarks: "We found the .anchorage anything but safe Avith southerly or south-Avest Avinds, a tremendous sAvell setting into the bay, causing ship to roll 33°. On the 23rd April best boAver cable iiarted abaft the bitts ; force of Avind at the time, 4, S.S.W\" Lights. — A fixed xvhite light, 160 feet above the level of the sea, is shoAvn from a toAver 20 feet high on the eastern side of Napier I>hiff", half a mile south of the extreme point, and should be seen from a distance of 18 miles in clear Aveather. There is a fixed red and Avhite light on the Eastern Spit, shoAvingred betAveenS.W. ^ S. to S.W. by S. ^ S., Avhite between S.W. by S. I S. to S. by E. ^ E., red between S. by E. | E. to S E. by S. The bearings are toAvards the light. The light is 27 feet above high Avater, and visible in clear Aveather aljout 7i miles. The Pania Keef is in the centre of south-Avestern red light, Avhich is seen a quarter of a mile on each side of the rock. The Bluff' bears from this rock S. by W. i" W- 2^ miles. — Harbour- master's Remarks. * We found the Wairoa, a considerable river, had changed its niouih Avithin the last three years, liaA'ing shifted I^ miles to the eastward. The entrance is very difliciilt, but within it has a depth of 12 to U feet, and navigable for boats 12 miles. —Commander Drury, in New Zealand Government Gazette, July 5, 1855. The entrance of the river is narrow, and has a con.siderable bar; the tides run six or seven knots, there is consequently great difficulty in entering with boats. It is a fine rivex inside.— Kemarks : Commander Freemantle, H.M.S. Eclipse, 1866. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 89 Caution. — Vessels must be careful not to mistake the white sector of the light on the spit at the entrance of the port for the light on the blutt*. Pania Reef. — In approaching Ahuriri roads care must be taken to avoid this reef which has only seven to eight feet on its shoalest part, bearing N. by E. f E. from the bold white cliff on the bluff, two miles distant ; the bottom is uneven to the north of this reef, which is of small extent, and marked in the chart as a rock. Buoy. — A white conical buoy lies in nine fathoms Water at about a cable S. by W. from this reef, with the bluff bearing S.S.W. nearly, distant two miles. Auckland Rock lies nearly half a mile N. by W. f W. from the bluff extreme, with Cape Kidnappers S.E. \ E. and the west point of the bluff S.W. by AV.; there is eighteen feet on it at low water. Mooring Buoys. — There are two mooring buoys in six and seven fathoms Avater, in the south-west part of the roads W. N. W. from the bluff, and about a mile from the shore. The moorings are placed in the best holding ground, and are sufficiently strong for a vessel of 1,000 tons. They are used by ships loading wool ; when more than (two are here at the same time the anchorage given in Harbour Master's directions appended is used. Several small steamers, etc. , take out the cargo to the vessels loading, which generally make all snug by sending down all top hamper, top-gallant masts, etc. Water. — The only fresh water available for ships within three miles of the entrance to Port Napier is from a tank which holds about sixteen tons of rain water. The surf on the bar renders watering a precarious operation. The proper time to approach the harbour is when it is high water by the beach ; there will then be sufficient stream to enter. Vessels drawing six to seven feet water should anchor off M'Kain's hotel, as there is less tide there. The following information is furnished by Captain Kraift, Harbour Master, viz. : — "The Port of Napier consists of the Ahuriri roadstead which has good * ' anchorage, but is exposed to the easterly winds, and of the inner harbour, "which is perfectly land-locked. Works have been recently completed at *' the entrance which have had a very beneficial effect in increasing the depth "of water upon the bar, and when the contemplated improvements for " accommodation are completed inside, the inner harbour will be available "for vessels of fair burthen. • " Tides. — The flood sets into the bay from the south-east ; the ebb sets " to the north and east. The ebb tide from the inner harbour sets N.W.; " in the entrance the strength of the current is from six to seven knots. It " is high water at 6h. Om. full and change, rise five to four feet ; in the bay " the tides are slack. The tide rims into the inner harbour for Ih. 30m. "after high water, and flows out for Ih. 50m. after low water. " The best anchorage in bad weather in the roadstead is near the mooring " buoys, where there is seven fathoms, the Bluff bearing S.E. by E. \ E. Ves- " sels on entering should keep well off the Bluff' to avoid the Auckland Bock. " Vessels at night should cross the first red and the white light, and drop " anchor on entering the second red light. At present a small green light is " shewn on each of the pier heads, but a fixed white light is to be placed on " the head of the eastern pier, when the green and red and white lights will " be dispensed with." The following information is from the Marine Department, viz. : — " A rock with only nine feet of water exists with the extreme of the "Bluff bearing West, and Cape Kidnappers S.E. Vessels should not "endeavour to pass inshore of this rock or the Pania Reef. The "ordinary anchorage is about three-quarters of a mile from the flagstaff', " with the bluff bearing S. by E. in three or four fathoms. It is not safe " for vessels to enter the harbour Avithout a pilot. Vessels approaching " from the north should keep in the white liglit (on eastern spit)." Winds and Climate. — The winds in Hawke Bay are very uncertain, the sudden south-easters make it necessary to be cautious when trading off Wairoa and Mohaka ; the southers give more warning, by an overcast sky, but are violent, especially in the winter. The westerly winds occur chiefly G 90 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. in October and November, bloAving very strong with a low barometer, but generally line weather. The black north-easter may be expected about once a month ; this gale conies on very gradually, but blows very hard towards the end, accompanied hj rain, veering to north-west and south-west. The ordinary summer wind is a fine north-easter, with hazy weather, setting in at 10 a.m., and dying away at sunset, succeeded by a land-wind. The barometer rises to north-east, south-east, and south win^s, and falls to north, north-west, and westerly winds. Rain may be expected with north winds and the black nortli-easters, and often with south-east winds ; some- times dry south-easters last for many days. Note. — The works recently constructed are a pier or breastwork from the bluff point within the harbour on the south-eastern side to within a short distance of the eastern si)it point, inside which, on the fiat now reclaimed, is the railway terminus site. Along the outer end of this pier vessels lie, grounding in the mud at low water. Between the end of tins pier and the inner part of the eastern spit there is still a narrow channel leading into what was formerly known as the Iron Pot, and which is still used by the small local steamers and coasters going to the wharves which lie inside. From both the entrance spit points breastworks have been carried out seawards to near the bar, for fully two cables, a full half-cable apart ; the western one ends a little south-eastward of the Rangatira bank. The bar, which is about a cable beyond the ends of these breastworks, usually shifts with every gale ; and on these occasions is invariably re-sounded by the Harbour Master before attempting to take vessels over it. These works — as pointed out by the Harbour Master — have necessarily the effect of scouring and deepening the channel. From Ahuriri Bluff a sandy beach extends ten miles to the southward ; the' rivers Ngararuro and Tuki-Tuki disembogue respectively five and eight miles from the bluff. Cape ESldnappers is a high point with white cliffs on either side ; and two remarkable A\-liite rocks off the extreme. Cape Kidnappers anchorage is the shelter afforded by a reef extending from a point one mile westward of the cape. Here a vessel can ride out soutli-east and south winds — the anchorage has otherwise little to recommend it ; the landing is bad, and no water or stock can be procured. Vessels should be ready to weigh when the wind veers eastward of south, as a heavy swell then sets in. Vessels from the southward bound to Napier should not approach the Cape within two nmes, on account of the foul ground extending around it. The steamer ** Lord Ashley " is reported to have struck on a sunken rock with the Cape bearing S.E. by S., one mile, and half a mile from Black Reef. There are from 40 to 70 fathoms across the entrance of Hawkc Bajr, a general depth of 20 to 30 ^inside, and 7 to 12 fathoms one and a half nules from the shore. Cape Kidnappers to Cape Turnagain.— From Cape Kidnappers to Cape Turnagain, 56 miles, the trend of the coast is S. ^ W., offering no remarkable feature ; there is a sandy beach for the first nine miles ; the small island Motu-Kura (or Bare Island), one and a quarter miles from the coast, is thirteen miles from it ; the Capstan rock, above water, lies three- quarters of a mile S.W. of Bare Island. Southward of Bare Island the coast is rocky, with some detached patches lying nearly a mile off shore ; nine miles distant from it is the Manawarakau River and Pah ; a reef above water lies immediately off the mouth of this river, extending north and south for one mile ; eight miles south o f Mana- warakau is Tungara Cove, with anchorage for coasters, but considered dangerous ; a reef extends off each point of this cove ; it is rocky within. Black Head (a cliffy point) is seven miles southward of Tungara Cove. * * It affords shelter during northerly and all off-shore winds under the reef extending to the S.E. from it. In fine weather handy vessels may anchor in four fathoms, with extreme of Black Head N.N.E. one mile, just open of a flat top rock nearing landing-place." — Wellington Almanac. Oputu or Shoal Bay, a slight indentation of the coast, is nearly half way between ; on each side of which to the Cove and to Black Head fringing rocks extend half a mile off shore. Immediately southward of BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Ql Black Head is a small islet half a mile off shore. Paran^ahau River is four miles south-westward of this ; and fourteen miles beyond is Cape Turnagain. Cape Turnagain (Te-poro-poro) is a well-marked cliffy projection, making as a white blutf from the northward, and as table-land from the southward (in the old charts its position was marked 8| miles N. by E. of the one at present assigned to it). Another hill, the chalk Nipple, so caUed from its white appearance, rises immediately over the coast three miles to the northward of the cape ; there is a mile of beach close to the north of the cape, where boats may land in moderate weather. From Cape Turnagain the direction of the coast is S.S.W. for 30 miles to Castle Point, with sloping grassy hiUs from 500 to 1,200 feet high ; the shore is frequently faced with rocks. No stranger should approach the coast within a league between it and Cape Palliser. Soundings in 30 fathoms mud three miles from the shore. (NOTE. — The sheet chart shews the 100 fathoms line at six mUes off the Cape). Castle Point from the north presents the appearance of a square tower at the extreme of a low point ; there is a sandy bay two miles long to the northward of it "affording anchorage with winds from N.N.W. round by W. to S.S.W. in 2^ to 3 fathoms water, about two cables from the exteme of the point in line with the northernmost house in the village. Vessels should be ready to weigh if the wind veers east of south.— Wellington Almanac. Soimdings. — Ten miles from the shore there is 60 to 70 fathoms. Plat Point is 24 miles S.S.W. of Castle Point, a low projection with a sandy tongue running a short distance out, and a rocky ledge extending one mile northward. Flat Point and the coast for the distance of 12 miles south-west of it is fronted with outlying sunken rocks. H.M.S. "Eclipse," in December, 1864, found one awash at one and a half miles E. by S. \ S. from Flat Point ; also a reef 2| miles from this rock running in a north-east and south- west direction, nearly 2^ miles, Flat Point bearing from it S. W. ^ S. 2 miles. The Kahou Rocks, a small cluster above water, lie fully one mile off shore, with a depth of 49 fathoms one and a half miles to seaward ; they are distant nine miles from Flat Point, and 29 from Cape Palliser. They should be approached with caution at night. The s.s. "Rangitira" is reported to have grazed (in thick weather) a rock or shoal not marked on tlie chart, lying it was supposed E.N.E. some two miles from the Kahau Rocks. The caution to keep one league off the coast is therefore peculiarly applicable to this part. — See Sheet Chart. From Flat Point to Cape Palliser is S.W. ^ S. 40 miles ; the coast line is itself low, formed of sand and shingle beaches Avitli rocky points, and ledges extending in places one mile off shore ; the depth of water being 48 and 50 fathoms, 2 J miles from the land ; the seaboard presents a succession of level table steppes, and the ranges increase in elevation as Cape Palliser is approached, where a high steep and sterile mountain range attains an elevation of 2,850 feet within two miles of the Cape. Cape Palliser, the south extreme of the North Island of New Zealand^ and the south-east entrance point to Cook Strait, is a remarkable bold- looking promontory from a distance ; two low shelving points extend from it to the southward ; a reef, partly above water and awash, extends half a mile from the eastern of these two points, and the Black Rocks, 15 feet above water, one mile from the western ; strong tide ripplings also extend one and a half miles from the cape, and vessels should not round it within two miles even in fine weather ; at this distance there are 35 fathoms, sand and shells. The 100 fathoms line is here, only three miles off. COOK STRAIT. (See Chart of Straits). Variation in 1875. Port Nicholson, 15° 25' E. ] New Plymouth, 14° 55' E. CAPE PALLISER TO NEW PLYMOUTH (Taranaki). The navigation of Cook Strait — separating the two principal islands of New Zealand — and which is daily increasing in importance, being the high- GG d3 BKETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. way of the fleet of intercolonial steamers and coasters, and also occasionally- used by such homeward-hound vessels from Australia as prefer this direct route to passing either north or south of New Zealand, is rendered difficult by the strong winds and at times furious gales, and the strong tides and races, to which the configuration of its shores renders it liable. There are but few actual dangers ; its south shores abound in secure harbours, easy of access either in N.W. or S.E. gales, which are the prevailing and indeed the only winds that blow with any violence. The latest Admiralty Charts are excellent ; with them, and exercising due caution and vigilance, the straits may be navigated with confidence. A description, beginning at Cape Palliser, and taking first its northern shores, now follows. When abreast of and two miles off the Black Rocks off Cape Palliser a W.N.W. course for 24 miles will take a vessel to the entrance of Port Nicholson, passing Taourakira and Baring Heads at the same distance. Barret Eeef will then bear N. by E. four miles, and the entrance of the port will be open. Palliser Bay is a deep indentation of the coast between Cape Palliser and Taourakira Head ; its distance across is nearly eighteen miles, and its depth eight miles. Caution. — This bay is perfectly open to southerly and south-east winds, and vessels should be very careful not tp get embayed, as sudden shifts of wind to these quarters are not uncommon when it would be a dead lee-shore, with no shelter ; there are from 10 to 14 fathoms within two miles of the beach, but the holding ground is bad, and a heavy sea soon gets up. t Taourakira Head, a bold headland, with the Rimutaka mountains extending from it in a north-easterly direction along the west side of Palliser Bay ; the Hump, 3,400 feet high, is three miles from the head ; and Mount Francis, 3,800 feet, lies over the north-west angle of the bay. A low point extends from the head, giving it the appearance of the snout of a porpoise ; but, approaching from the eastward, at a distance it appears to end in an abrupt convexity. Low detached straggling rocks extend oif Taourakira Head, one-third of ^ a mile, and continue almost the same distance from the coast as far as Baring Head ; the Orong-orong river flows into the sea between these two heads. Baring Head is nearly three miles W.N.W. from Taourakira Head, and is a flat table point, at the extremity of terrace laud, extending towards Pencarrow Head ; detached rocks above and below Avater extend from it about one -third of a mile. "A shoal, about one cable wide by three in length, with from 7 to 4^ fathoms on it at low water, running parallel with the shore, lies N. 53 W. 2J cables from Baring Head ; it breaks in heavy weather. To clear it keep Pencarrow light northward of N. by W. till Baring Head is one point open of Taourakira Head. " — Harbour Master. Fitzroy Bay and Anchorage. — Between Baring and Pencarrow Heads is a slight indentation of the coast only. "The best anchorage at the heads is one mile south of Barret reef, keeping the reef in a line. Jitzroy Bay has a foul bottom, and as the wind chops round to S.S.W. and South (not S.E. as stated in " Pilot ") it puts vessels there on a lee shore. In the night anchor as nearly as may be on the line dividing the red and and white lights of Somes Island light and Pencarrow light N.E. by E. in twelve fathoms." — Harbour Master. PORT NICHOLSON (see Plan). Pencarrow Head.— N.W. by N., three miles from Baring Head, is the eastern entrance point of Port Nicholson ; it is a bold clift", with a lighthouse on its summit. Low straggling rocks above water extend off the head nearly two cables. Light. — The light is fixed white, 420 feet above high water, and in ordinaiy weather visible 30 miles. From the lighthouse (an iron tower painted Avhite) Baring Head bears S.E. by S. 3| miles, and Sinclair Head W. by S. \ S. 6i miles. The western side of entrance to Port Nicholson is formed by a high peninsula almost separated from the main land by Evans Bay on the harbour BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 93 side and Lyall Bay to seaward, the low sandy neck separating these bays being scarcely half a mile across. Approaching Port Nicholson from the southward or eastward this peninsula from a distance appears like an island, and in consequence LyaU Bay has frequently been mistaken by strangers for the true entrance. Palmer Head, the south-eastern extreme of the peninsula just described, is the western entrance point of the port ; the land over it is moderately high ; it bears from Pencarrow Head W.N.W. one and a half miles, with a reef of rocks called the West ledge extending off it to the southward nearly three-quarters of a mile ; these rocks are all above water, or awash, and may be approached with perfect safety within a quarter of a mile carrying 10 and 12 fathoms. Pilot. — The pilot station is within the entrance, and pilots only board outside in moderate weather. Between Palmer Head and Dorset Point, the next projection, distant one mile N.E. by N., stands the Barrel Beacon on an elevation of land. Barret Reef, the chief impediment to the entrance of the harbour, is a cluster of rocks principally standing well out of water, lying nearly in the •centre of the passage, and extending a little more than half a mile in a N. by W. and S. by E. direction, with an average width of about one cable. There are seven fathoms Avithin half a cable of them ; their southern extreme is a black rock ten feet out of water, which may be rounded within a cable in nine fathoms ; there are two sunken rocks, one lying about 100 feet to the eastward, and the other about the same distance to the westward of the outer rock, the tlu-ee lying in a nearly east and west direction ; there are 12 feet on them at low water, deep all round ; from the outer rock Pencarrow Light bears S.E. by E. ^ E. one mile. Chaffers Passage. — To the westward of Barret Reef is three cables wide, with a depth of from seven to ten fathoms, but being tortuous in its direction is only used by small vessels with a leading wind.* The Main Channel, or that between Pencarrow Head and Barret Reef, is the broadest and usual passage, with a clear breadth of not less than f six cables for a distance of 1^ miles : that is, from the southern end of Barret Reef to abreast the Steeple Rock, on the western shore off the north- ern extremity of Dorset Point. Caution. — All the points of the coast on the eastern side of the entrance have straggling rocks awash extending a cable off them ; vessels working in should be cautious in approaching close to this shore, as in the event of missing stays they are in great danger from these out-lying rocks, and are liable to get into eddy tides. From Dorset Point a reef similar in feature to BaiTct Reef extends to the south-east nearly three cables ; from the northern end of the point another reef — of which the remarkable Steeple Rock is the extreme — extends to the north-east for two cables ; off Steeple Rock one cable in a north-easterly direction, is a rock with nine feet on it at low water springs ; the distance between the extremes of these two reefs is nearly three-quarters of a mile ; vessels working up may stand on until in a line between them, having then 21 feet at low water. Worser Bay is on the western shore, half a mile above the Steeple Rock, where a vessel may anchor if necessary in live fathoms, a quarter of a mile from the beach. After passing Steeple Rock there is a clear working channel of more than a mile, with from 6 to 12 fathoms between the western shore and Ward Island ; the points on the western shore may be approached within a cable. "Ward Island, a small yellow coloured cliffy island, lying on the eastern side of the channel, one mile oft' the eastern shore, 2^ miles above Dorset Point, and 1^ miles from the western shore, has shoal water extending from it to the south-westward nearly half a mile, at which distance the water suddenly shoals from 8 fathoms to 16, and in one spot 10 feet at the * Chaffers Passage is not used even by steam coasters, as several sunken rocks are said to exist in it, the positions of which are not known.— Remarks by Nav. Lieut. J. E. Petley, H.M.S. " Dido," 1872. 94 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Hope shoal. A red buoy is placed in 16 feet on its western edge. In working in the western side of Ward's Island should not be approached in daylight (for night time see below light on Somes Island) Avithin a long half mile. With a leading wind, after passing the Steeple Kock and its outlying danger, steer to keep the western extreme of Somes Island a little on starboard bow, which leads well clear of the Hope Shoal. When the north end of Ward Island bears East the shoal will be passed. This part of the channel is reported to have shoaled to 5^ and 6 fathoms. There is a passage between Ward Island and the eastern shore available for small vessels ; the least depth of water is 10 feet. The main passage from Hope Shoal to tlie western shore is three-quarters of a mile wide, at Gordon Point, off which rocks extend, for one cable. Halswell Point, the north extreme of the peninsula on the western shore, is three miles northward of Dorset Point. Rocks extend one cable off it, marked by a red buoy in 5^ fathoms. On rounding it the town of Wel- lington will be opened out. Pipitea Point, a low sandy point (the north- west limit of Lambton Harbour), bearing west two miles. Somes Island is cliffy, 250 feet high, half a mile in length north and south, and quarter of a mile in width. It lies in about the centre of the port, opposite the entrance. Detached rocks extend a quarter of a mile off" its north end ; otherwise it may be approached within one cable, carrying seven fathoms. On its south point is a white iron lighthouse, 75 feet above the sea, shewing 2^ fixed light as follows, viz. : zvhite in midchannel, red on the western and green on the eastern shore of the main entrance. Strangers arriving off' Pencarrow should be careful after bringing that light to bear E.N.E. to keep in the -white light on Somes Island, ("especially when beating in on the eastern shore as the light cuts very fine on Pencarrow Point," Harbour Master)^ which should be seen ten miles off", or four miles without Pencarrow light, steering N. \ E. After passing the Pinnacle Rock within the entrance cross into the red light, and keep the port hand on board till the three red triangular lights at the end of the wharf are made out bearing W.S.W., when a course may be steered to the anchorage in Lambton Harbour, which is safe in any part, and with 20 feet J of a mile from the breastwork at low water ; outside that six to eight fathoms ; inside the four fathoms line the water shoals rather suddenly. Evans' Bay, between Halswell and Jerningham Points, runs 2| miles to the southward, is half a mile in width ; deep water all over, and 20 feet at low water three cables from the beach at its head. A patent slip is constructed, and buoys laid down for swinging ships, in this bay. Off Jerningham Point, nearly one cable in a north-east direction, is a rocky patch with nine feet on it, marked by a black buoy in 5| fathoms. Lambton Harbour. — After passing Halswell Point, a vessel may steer W. by S. for the Government House flagstaff' (about two miles distant), anchoring in the^iarbour as convenient. (See above). Pipitea Point must not be approached within a quarter of a mile, as a sand and shingle shoal with six feet water extends from it one and a half cables. Water.— The jetty abreast of Government House has been considerably lengthened, and water may be obtained from a pipe led under it. (See in- troduction for further remarks on harbour). The Time-ball at the Custom-house is in lat. 41° 17' 1" S., long. 174° 49' 16" East, or, according to Capt. Nares, 174° 46' 50". It is dropped every day but Sunday, at noon New Zealand meantime (to reduce which to Wel- lington time add 9min. ll.Ssecs.) or at 12h. 30m. Osec. Greenwich mean- time. The Surveyor-General gives the long, in time of the Survey Observa- tory as lib. 39min. 9.92sec. The extensive sheet of water in the northern part of Port Nicholson is free from dangers, with an average depth of from 10 to 15 fathoms. Hutt River, in the N.E. head of the port, and two miles north-east- ward of Somes Island, is navigable for large cargo boats about two miles to the bridge ; the sandy beach may be approached within three cables in four fathoms water, within this the soundings are irregular. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 95 Soundings. — The soundings in Port Nicholson have altered considerably since the last survey was made, but not sufficiently to interfere with the general navigation of the harbours. •' Tides.— It is H.W. F. & C. at Barret's Reef at 4h. 40m., and at Wellington Wharf at 5h. 0)n. The tides are very much influenced by the winds, and after much rain a considerable fresh from the Hutt River sets out of the harbour. Ordinary springs run 1^ to 2^ knots ; neaps about one knot between Barrett's Reef and the eastern shore. " — Harbourmaster. The flood stream outside the entrance sets to the northward and the ebb to the southward, and runs six hours each way. It is high water by the shore at the southern entrance of Cook Strait at 6h. Om. ; but the flood or northerly stream commences at 3h. Om., or three hours before, and runs until three hours after high water by the shore. ~""""^ Prevailing Winds.—" Fresh N. to N.N.W. are the prevailing winds \ during the months from December to March and April, often accompanied / by a clear sky and high barometer, but seldom lasting over forty-eight hours. S.S.W. to S.S.E. are the prevailing winds during the winter^months, gene- rally lasting from two to three days, with much raim 3" rapidly falling barometer and a sultry atmosphere are almost sure indications of a shift of wind to the southward, particularly during the summer months, when the wind often shifts very suddenly, and blows fresh for a few hours and then gradually subsides. In winter the southerly gales often come in gradually with small rain, and last longer. As a rule there is less wind in the vicinity of Port Nicholson during the winter than the summer." — Harbourmaster. .. Gales in Cook Strait.— Strong gales are so frequent in Cook Strait, J and changes of wind from the north-west to south-east, and the contrary, are ^ often so sudden that it seems desirable to offer a few remarks as to the most prudent course to be pursued by vessels under such circumstances both in entering Port Nicholson and in passing through the Strait. Vessels arriving oft' the entrance of Port Nicholson with a moderate north-west wind may work in by day or night, provided the weather is sufficiently clear to see the dangers, which are all above Avater, excepting the rock with nine feet water on it, a cable north-east of Steeple Rock ; but should the weather be thick, or the light on Somes Island not clearly dis- tinguished, they ought not to attempt to enter at night, but stand oft" and on for daylight, or anchor according to circumstances outside Barret Reef. (See p. 92). It frequently happens, however, that a strong north-west wind is met at the entrance, when most well-found vessels, with daylight, may work in against a double reef topsail breeze, but with a stronger wind few vessels would be able to work through the narrows ; it then becomes a question whether to stand off under easy sail or to anchor outside. If a vessel can fetch in above Pencarrow Head she might anchor with advantage in 10 or 11 fathoms and ride out the gale, but the entrance should be kept open, as sudden shifts from north-west to south-east often occur, and vessels have found themselves awkwardly placed by anchoring under the lee of Barret Reef with a north-west wind. With a south east wind, however strong, and clear weather, the port may be entered with perfect safety by foUowin;^- the directions already given. Under such circumstances a vessel should run in under easy sail, and anchor immediately six fathoms is obtained. A vessel leaving Port Nicholson, bound to any of the ports on the eastern side of the North Island, north of the East Cape, and meeting a south-east gale before she is clear of Cook Strait, had better bear up and run to the north-Avest, making the passage round the north end of the island. If bound southward, provided the weather be sufficiently clear to make the land, good shelter will be found in Cloudy Bay or Port Underwood, according to circumstances. * '^ A steam vessel bound to Port Nicliolson through Cook Strait and meeting a south-easter might make a good passage bv anchoring first in Current Basin, from there steaming through French Pass and Admiralty Bay before the first of the southerly stream commences, enabling her to have the whole of that stream after rounding Francis Head ; passing betvveen the Chetwode Islands and Harding Pointy 96 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. To a vessel entering Cook Strait from the westward and meeting a south-east gale, Port Gore or Guards' Bay ofier good shelter if she is far enough advanced to fetch them. If not she may run for Port Hardy, or to the westward of D'Urville Island for Croisilles Harbour. With time and daylight permitting, this latter anchorage is to be preferred, for the heavy swell raised by the tides across the narrow entrance of Port Hardy renders it more a steamer's than a sailing vessel's harbour. Coast Westward of Port Nicholson.— Three-quarters of a mile westward of Palmer Head is Lyall Bay. It is totally unfit for an anchorage, on account of the reefs which project off either point, and its exposure to the full force of southerly or south-east gales. A sunken rock, witli 17 feet at low water, lies 1^ cables E. by S. from the end of the reef running out from the western point of the bay. Immediately westward of the head of Lyall bay is Mount Albert, 590 feet high, on which is a signal-staff, from whence the approach of vessels is telegraphed to the town. The telegraph cable crosses Cook Strait from Lyall Bay to Blenheim, on the Wairoa River. Reef Islet lies three-quarters of a mile westward of Lyall Bay, surrounded by rocks, with a boat channel of 20 feet between it and the shore. Sinclair Head, a high bold cliff, lies five miles W.S.W. from Palmer Head. Off" it — and off all the intervening points — foul rocky ground extends nearly half a mile ; the land increases in elevation to tlie westward ; the Happy Valley Peaks, one mile to two miles inland of it, rise to a height of 1,700 feet. From Sinclair Head the coast trends to the W. N. W. 6^ miles to Cape TeraAvhiti ; between these two headlands, 2^ miles westward of the former, is Tongue Point, low and projecting, between which and Sinclair Head lie the folloAving dangers to be avoided in approaching Port Nicholson from the westward : Karori, or Seal Rock, high out of the water, bears from Tongue Point S. W. half a mile, and is not connected with it, although a reef runs off that point for a considerable distance. Toms Rock, awash at low springs, lies E.S.E. one mile from the Karori Rock, and a quarter of a mile outside a line drawn from that rock to the extreme of the reef off Sinclair Head, being a short mile from the shore, and immediately off the Karori Stream. Caution. — A rock has been reported lying S. ^ W. two-thirds of a mile from Toms Rock ; therefore Cape Terawhiti should be kept well open west- ward of Karori Rock, and Pencarrow Lighthouse open to the soutliward of Sinclair Head, when passing the coast between Cape Terawhiti and Sinclair Head. [" A half mile seaward is a bank with from 10 to 6 fathoms at low water springs, over which the tides set strongly, causing heavy rijiplings, like a shoal reef : the shallowest part is with Karori Stream N. | E., and Karori Rock on with Cape Terawhiti." — Harbourmaster.] RiPPLiNGS. — There are 10 and 12 fathoms a short distance outside the Karori and Toms Rock, but heavy tide ripplings with irregular rocky bottom extend two and three miles off them, eastward of Sinclair Head these ripplings cease. * ' Luna Rock — a dangerous sunken rock with six feet water on it at low springs — is small in size, with deep water all round ; Ijang If cables ouhide a line from Karori Rock to Terawhiti and half a mile from tiie nearest beach ; it bears N. 57° W., five-sixths of a mile from Karori Rock." — Har- bourmaster. Cape Terawhiti. — From Tongue Point the coast is bold and cliffy to Cape Terawhiti, which is a remarkable bold headland, rising immediately from the coast into an almost semicircular hill ; its well-marked convex out- steering close by Motu Ngara Island and Capes Lambert and Jackson. If after passing the latter cape there is a possibility of reaching Port Nicholson during that tide, she should stand over for the east shore of Cook Strait, as there the tide runs stronger. If there is no chance of saving the tide, she had better go up Queen Charlotte Sound for Tory Channel, anchoring, if necessary, in Oyster Bay, from thence she would easily reach Port Nicholson the next favourable tide.— Remarks y Navigating Lieutenant T. H. Tizard, H.M.S. GhalUng&r, 1874. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 97 line, as seen from the northward or southward, renders it difficult to be mistaken ; it is also remarkable as being the salient point on this northern side of Cook Strait. Directions for making Port Nicholson from the West- ward. — Having described the dangers which exist immediately to the westward of Port Nicholson, remarks are added for making the port coming from that direction. Between Cape Terawhiti and Wellington Head — W. f N. 12 miles — is the narrowest part of the Straits. It is high water F. & C. here at 81i. Om. ; the flood or northerly stream commences at 4h. Om. and runs until lOh. Om., the strength of the tide varying from one to four knots. Heavy tide ripplings are experienced in the central part of the Strait between these two heads, where there is uneven bottom, the depths varying from 80 to 122 fathoms sand. Running for Port Nicholson from the northward or westward with a fair wind, Cape Terawhiti should be passed at a distance of from two or three miles, and the continuous coast not approached nearer (taking care to avoid the Luna Rock, p. 96), until arrived between Karori Rock and Sinclair Head, when a vessel may haul gradually up towards the latter (taking care to keep Pencarrow Lighthouse well open, to avoid Toms Rock, and the one reported to exist outside it, p. 96), and passing about one mile from the points of land to the eastward of Sinclair Head, until Barret Reef opens out, when she may steer boldly for the southern end of the latter, passing it if necessary half a cable ott" as before described (being careful to avoid the sunken rocks on either side of it, see p. 93). The course from the berth oft' Cape Terawhiti is S.E. by E. | E. seven miles to abreast Sinclair Head, thence or when Palmer Head opens out (when a ship will be clear of the reported rock) N.E. by E. nearly the same distance to Barret Reef. During daylight all the outlying dangers can be seen except the Luna and Toms Rocks, and the rock reported to the south- ward of Toms Rock. Caution. — The tide between Cape Terawhiti and Sinclair Head runs during springs five knots ; hence, it is necessary, particularly with the flood stream, to give the coast a berth of two or three miles, as unless great attention is paid to the steerage, vessels are in danger of being set too close to the detached rocks. Eastward of Sinclair Head, and inside aline between it and Baring Head, the tides are not much felt, and generally there is an eddy with the flood, setting to the eastward along shore towards the entrance. Overfalls exist six and seven miles S. W. of Sinclair Head ; and the heavy ripplings which occur during spring tides are highly dangerous to small coasters, especially at night, unless proper precautions are taken before entering them. Coast Northward of Cape Terawhiti.— From Cape Terawliiti the coast turns abruptly to the N.N.E., and is a rugged clifly shore fronted with straggling rocks ; at one and a half miles off the soundings vary from 25 to 35 fathoms. Oharui Bight lies seven miles from the cape, and in moderate weather boats may land there, the distance by the road to the town of Wellington being only 3^ miles. Porirua Harbour (see Plan), 16 miles from Cape Terawhiti, and 2 miles eastward of Mana Island, is only available for small vessels ; but in fine weather, and with off-shore winds, large vessels may anchor within the line of the outer heads. Nearly in the centre of the entrance, half a mile northward of the south head, is a cluster of rocks, uncovered three feet at high water, abreast wliieh on either side are 4^ fathoms ; within these rocks a bar of shoal water extends from north to south, having nine feet a cable inside the inner rock, and four feet a quarter of a mile within it. The harbour runs to the S.E. one and a half miles from these rocks, and at the distance of one mile narrows to scarcely two cables ; coasters drawing eight feet may enter at high water or three-quarters flood ; when over the shoalest part, which is little more than half a mile above the centre rocks, and only a cable across, the water deepens to 15 feet, half a mile higher up 98 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. to 5, 6, and 7 fathoms ; here the harbour branches off into two arms, one running to the eastward, and the other to the southward. " The best channel is between the south head and the rocks, nearest the latter ; when the reef off the north head opens eastward of the rocks, haul up to the S.E. for the entrance of the harbour, giving the main land to the south a fair berth as the shore is rocky ; opposite side, sand. H.W., F. & C, lOh., rise about five feet." — Harbourmaster, Wellington. The outer anchorage for lar^e vessels is in the bay immediately within the north head ; but if the wind sliould shift to the north-west, it is neces- sary to proceed for the anchorage under Mana Island or run for the strait. Porirua Harbour by land is 12 miles from the town of Wellington, with an excellent road the whole way. The flood or northerly stream begins in the offing at 5h. Om., and the ebb or southerly at llh. 6m. Mana, or Table Island, is 13 miles N.N.E. of Cape Terawhiti. It is flat-topped, 1^ miles long, half a mile wide, and 410 feet high. The northern and western sides are high and precipitous, with scattered rocks extending more than a cable oft" fHiore. On the eastern side the land is sloping. Tlie south-east point is a shingle beach. Mana island lies nearly 1^ miles from the mainland, to which a bar called the Bridge extends from its south-east point, which may be crossed in 21 feet at low Avater, by keeping a quarter of a mile from the point of the island, with deep water in mid-channel. There is generally a heavy tide rippling on the Bridge, and the tides run from one to three knots. Anchorage.— Anchorage will be found under the south-east end of Mana, to the southward of the Bridge, sheltered from north-west winds, one- third of a mile oft" the island point in eight fathoms. "There is good anchorage under Mana Island on the south-east side during north-west gales in a small bight north of the Bridge. With southerly winds a small vessel may shift to leeward of the next shingle point to the north and ride safely; larger vessels may shift over to what is termed the Coalheaver, about 1^ miles to the southward of Porirua harbour, and anchor in from five to eight fathoms water, with the centre of Kapiti in line with the north head of Porirua Bay." — Harbourmaster, Wellington. The Coast Northward of Porirua Harbour for nearly three miles is high and clift'y, with straggling rocks extending off shore fully half a mile — Gibraltar, a high square rock standing close to tlie shore, with a reef outside it, being the northernmost ; hence the coast trends with a slight curve and sandy beach northward for 11 miles to Waikanai, a native settle- ment on the bank of a small river, navigable for large boats at high water. There are from 10 to 14 fathoms one and a half miles off this part of the coast. Kapiti Island, a i^rominent object entering Cook Strait from the westward, is five miles long, nearly parallel with the shore, and 1^ miles wide ; it rises in the centre to a height of 1,780 feet ; the western shoxO is precipitous, but the eastern slopes more gradually towards the beach. Its south end bears from Mana Island N. ^ E. 12 miles. Long Point, its north-east extreme, bears N.W. i N. three miles from Waikanai River, is a low rounding flat shingle point, extending nearly half a mile from tlie foot of the hills, with a small lake in the centre ; close under this point there is shelter for a few small vessels from north-west winds, but they should not lie here with any sign of a south-easter ; several coasters have been thrown on the beach and wrecked by doin^ so. Entry Anchorage (see Plan), at the south-eastern end of Kapiti, is fomied by three small conical-shaped islets, which, together with the reefs extending off them, afford good shelter from south-east winds. Tlie two southernmost islets, Hiko and Mahew, lie nearly one mile eastward of the south-east extreme of Kapiti, and within a cable of each other ; a reef encircles them and extends more than a cable southward of Mahew, the outer islet. Between Hiko and Kapiti there is a channel a cable wide, with a depth of 15 feet. Evans Islet, or the Sugar Loaf, lies little more than a mile to the N. E. of Hiko and Mahew Islets, and three-quarters of a mile from Kapiti, with BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 99 the Passage Rocks between, awash, -VN-ith kelp round them ; there is a passage for large vessels on either side of these rocks ; that between Passage Rocks and Evans Islet is narrow. A reef of rocks above water extends from Evans Islet to the sonthward nearly four cables, with straggling rocks awash at low Avater off its extreme. To enter the anchorage pass between the end of this reef and Mahew Islet, the breadth being nearly one mile : the depth of water within this is from 17 to 12 fathoms ; anchor with the centre of Mahew Islet south, dis- tant four cables, in 12 fathoms, sand and coral, a quarter of a mile from the shore of Kapiti ; inside this the water shoals rather suddenly. " The anchorage is perfectly safe at all times to a properly appointed ship. " — Har- bourmaster, Wellington. Soundings. — Between Kapiti and the mainland there is from 20 to 30 fathoms, clear of dangers, excepting the reefs which extend off the islets ; one mile seaward of the island the soundings vary from 40 to 50 fathoms. Coast North"Ward of Kapiti. — From Waikanai river the coast trends N. | E. , with an almost straight 'sandy beach for 28 miles to the Manawatu River, the Otaki and Oahau Rivers, navigable for large boats at high water, lying between, the former nine and the latter 15 miles from Waikanai ; there are besides several small streams always fordable. Sandhills from 20 to 40 feet hi^h fringe the coast, and the mountain range, which is some six or seven miles inland at Wakanai, recedes eastward as it extends north. Manawatu River may be known from the offing by a remarkable grove of trees on the north side, nearly three miles from the entrance ; it is easier of access than any other river on this coast, the channel being straight; the depth varies after heavy gales or floods. *' The channel is reported to have shifted northward this year. The wreck of the Kate Monaglian being in the centre of the channel inside the bar, where there is live feet at low water springs at shoalest part, masters of vessels are requested to pay par- ticular attention to instructions of pilot as to which side of wreck to pass. " — Notice to Mariners, N. Z. G. It is 250 yards across at the mouth, and a short distance inside becomes exceedingly tortuous in its course, intersecting the Ruahine range. " The pilot is stationed near the heads, on the north side of the entrance, and will board inward bound vessels inside the bar if wanted. There is three to four feet water on the bar at low water springs, rise six feet H.W. F. & C. lOli. Two moveable beacons — the seaward one red, and the landward one black, which can be seen two or three miles, are placed and kept in one lead over the bar. In moderate weather vessels may approach safely within signalling distance. A -white light is shown on a flagstaft'45 feet above the sea, and visible all round seaward 9 to 11 miles. In addition to this light a green li^ht is shown on the seaAvard, and a red light on the landward beacons, Avhen the bar is i)ossible. After getting inside it, and when the Avater deepens, keep the south spit Avell on board till the buoys are seen ; then keep red buoys on starboard side, and black buoys on port ; black and Avhite beacons to be kept in one. In crossing the river from one side to the other by these directions, vessels Avill carry 10 to 12 feet at springs across the flats as far as the toAvn (Foxton). The river is navigable for 30 miles. " — Harbourmaster, Wellington, Rangitiki River, the next river nortliAvard, is 9^ miles from the Manawatu. ("Is navigable only for small vessels draAving four to live feet. A pilot-station Avith the usual signals is established here. " — Harbourmaster, Wellington. ) From Rangitiki River the coast trends north-Avestcrly toAvards Wanga- nui River, 24 miles distant, of the same character as that already described, a sandy beach skirted Avith Ioav sandhills. The small rivers Wangahu and Turakini lie sontliAvard of Wanganui, the former five and the latter eight miles from it. They are about tAventy yards Avide at their mouths, and only navigable for boats, their bars being dry at Ioav Avater. "Wanganui River bears from the north end of Kapiti Island N. by W. 52 miles. It lies in the depth of the great bight between Capes TeraAvhiti and Egmont, about an equal distance from both. The best guide for the entrance is Tauperi (or the Devil's Thumb), a 100 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. remarkable sharp double-peaked hill, 1,860 feet high, about 18 miles inland, bearing N. by E. | E., in a line witli Ruapehu* Mountain. This leads directly for the entrance. When these mountains cannot be seen, the Seven Hummocks are a good guide to the river. These are a remarkable range of hillocks to the northward of Wanganui, eight miles from the coast, extending in an east and west direction for three miles, the easternmost one bearing from the entrance of the river N.W. by N. 12 miles. The Land Guard, a remarkable bluff head about 100 feet high, on the south side of the river, two miles from the south entrance point, is also a prominent object. The north head is a castellated cliff 70 feet high, with a flagstaff and pilot-station. The southern point is of low sandhills. A sandy beach extends two miles southward to the Land Guard. Light. — There is a white fixed light exhibited from the flagstaff on Castle Clifl' (North Head) Wanganui, 65 feet above high water, which in clear weather should be seen 13 miles. Caution, — Masters of vessels are warned that this is not a guiding light to clear any dangers, but is intended solely to enable them to keep their position oft* the port. In fresh westerly winds the bar is one unbroken line of surf. There are eight fathoms in the offing one mile from the entrance, where vessels may anchor in fine weather. *' The bar is from three-quarters to one mile from the entrance, and shifts considerably during the year, according to weather, etc. There is 11 to 14 feet water on the bar at high water springs, rise 6 to 7 feet springs, 3 to 5 feet neaps, H.W. F. & C. lOh. 15m. When inside the heads haul to the southward round the end of South Spit, and steer for Land Guard bluff, when the beacons on Training Walls will be seen. Keep red beacons on starboard, and black beacons on port side. A red light is shown on the lower ends of both Training Walls from sunset to sunrise. (In moderate weather, vessels can approach safely within signalling distance. In fine weather, the pilot will board inward-bound vessels when requested by signal to do so. ) In fine weather, vessels having to -wait for the tides can anchor in from four to ei^ht fathoms from one to two miles off the bar. "Signals. — Two shifting beacons — the inner one highest — are erected on the north head, and bear red flags by day and red lights by night, when the tide serves and the bar is safe, and are to be taken as guides in crossing the bar ; when by day, the two beacons should be kept in one. Particular attention should be paid to the semaphore amis, on account of the curves in the channel inside the bar. Crossing the bar at night, keep the red lights of the beacons in one, and pay particular attention to the green light, which is used like the semaphore arm for guiding vessels inside the bar. It travels on a yard on the outer beacon, and vessels must be steered in the direction in which it is moved. Masters of vessels arriving off the bar at night should burn flash or blue lights, which will be answered by a torch or flare-up light from the pilot-station. Sailing vessels should not attempt to cross the bar at night, as the wind generally dies away or draws oft* the land. *• signals for vessels bound out when OTHERS ARE OUTSIDE WAITING TO COME IN. *' Red flag, half-mast high — Bar is safe for sailing vessels outwards. •'White flag, half-mast high — Bar is not safe for sailing vessels outwards. **FOR STEAMERS TOWING. •• Pendant, with red flag under, at mast-head^-Bar is safe for tomng. ** Pendant, with white flag under, at mast head — Bar is not safe for towing. ** SIGNALLING TO TOWN. ** White flag with blue square in centre, at yard-arm — Vessel on shore or on the bar. •* Pendant at mast-head — Steamers can cross the bar outwards. ** Two pendants at mast-head — Steamers cannot cross the bar outwards, — Harbourmaster. " * Ruapehu, an extinct volcano, is 9,195 feet high. Tongariro, an active volcano» is about seven miles to the northward of Ruapehu. From most points of view seaward they appear as one mountain. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 101 "NIGHT SIGNALS FOR VESSELS IN THE RIVER BOUND OUT. " Green light on Muff— Bar dangerous. ** Red light on bluff— Bar safe. — * Nelson Almanac' " The coast is not dangeroiis. With the prevailing winds (north-west and south-east) an offing can always be gained. With westerly or south- westerly winds a vessel should not get embayed if there is any prospect of bad weather, but wait under Kapiti Island for an opportunity of entering the river. The shore end of the second Cook's Strait] cable from Whakapuaka is landed at Wanganui. Soundings. —Between Kapiti Island and Wanganui River the water shoals ^adually ; there are from 40 to 50 fathoms 10 miles from the shore, until within 10 miles of the latter place, when it decreases to 30 fathoms, and shoals gradually to nine fathoms mthin one mile of the beach. The flood tide runs in five hours, and the ebb out for seven. On the adjacent coast the flood runs to the northward and the ebb to the southward, from one to one and a half knots. Prom "Wanffanui River the coast trends westerly towards Cape Egmont, distant from it 75 miles, and the features of the land become entirely changed ; the sandy beach and low land extending the whole dis- tance from Waikanai noAv give place to perpendicular cliffs from 80 to 100 feet high, comj)osed of blue clay, which the sea washes at high water. The only rivers navigable tor boats along this whole extent of coast are the Waitotara, Wenuakura, and Patea, the former 16 miles and the two latter (within a mile of each other) 26 miles from Wanganui river. A harbour light is exhibited from a lighthouse erected on a cliff 70 feet high on the eastern side of the Patea river. The light is fixed, red, shows all round seaward, is about 133 feet above the sea level, and may be seen five or six miles. Waitotara Point, a low sandy projection, is 14 miles westward of Wanganui, and two miles S.E. of the river of the same name. The clay cliffs commence again immediately to the westward of it, and continue to Waipipi, which is also a low sandy point, the last on the coast, and five miles south-eastward of Patea River. Patea River. — "The flagstaff and pilot-station are on the cliff above mentioned, eastward of river. The bar has shifted very little since the harbour works have been in progiess. There is now 10 to 13 feet on it at high- water springs, when it is H. W. F. & C. at lOh,, rise from five to nine feet ; the flood tide runs in 5h., and the ebb out 7h. The flood stream in offing sets north, and the ebb southward, one to two knots an hour. A rubble and concrete breakwater, 1,100 feet long and 20 feet wide, is being constructed, which keeps the bar and channel straight. A further extension of 900 feet seaward is in contemplation, as also a groin on the west side of the river to deepen and keep the bar clear, as well as to give more shelter to vessels crossing it. The prevailing winds are from west to north-west. The course in over the bar is N.N.E. There are good tideswithnortherlyand poor ones with southerly winds. An iron beacon with a ball marks the end of the breakAvater, and an iron beacon with a flag, low-water mark on the north spit. The \vidtli from the breakwater to the north spit is 139 feet ; depth of water at end of breakwater 23 feet, and along it 17 feet. Vessels should keep the break- water on board 20 to 30 feet until passing the second iron beacon on the east side, then sheer over to the port shore. Two shifting beacons — the inner one highest— are erected »n a sandhill by the flagstaff, on which are shown when tide serves and bar is safe, by day — on outer beacon flag W, on inner flag M, the two to be kept in one when crossing the bar, paying particular attention to the pilot guiding. Steamers can cross the bar at night in moderate weather, when a red light is shown on the outer and a white light on the inner beacon, also a green light to guide. "SIGNALS. " Red flag, half-mast high — Bar safe for sailing-vessels outwards. " Pendant with red flag under at mast-head — Bar is safe for towing. " Pendant at mast-head — Steamers can cross the bar outward. *' Two pendants at mast-head — Steamers cannot cross the bar outwards. 102 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. ** In moderate weather, vessels can approach safely within signalling distance, and can anchor with the flagstaff N. by W. or the light- house N.N.W. in six and seven fatlionis. A good hiioy rope is necessary, as the ground is foul in places. Freshes in the river mostly occur from June to August, and clear the river out thoroughly, but do no damage to shipping. Sailing vessels cannot enter in a heavy fresh without a strong fair wind. The trade of Patea has increased considerably, as many as 39 vessels having crossed the bar in one month. The port is best suited for vessels drawing five to eight feet, but those drawing nine and ten feet can enter at springs. There are two wharves on the west side, which can discharge 60 to 80 tons a day, and others are in course of construction. The river from bar to bridge has an average depth of 15 feet." — Harbourmaster. From hence the coast recedes gradually round Waimate Bight, 23 miles, affording no shelter, the coast being an unbroken line of cliffs averaging one hundred feet high. Five miles westward of the Waimate Pah is the Kaipokonui, a rapid stream in the summer floods, when it is dangerous to cross ; it is not navigable even for canoes at the entrance. About seven miles north-west of Kaipokonui stream is Otumutua point, five miles north-west of tliis point is Opunake Bay. Opunake Bay. — This anchorage is only fitting for steamers and small sailing vessels. Opunake Bay is of horse-shoe shape and about one- third of a mile deep, ^vith high cliffs round the shore. The nortli-west head extends 200 yards seaward of south-east liead. The bay is sheltered from winds between south-east round by east, to north-west. Landing. — The accommodation for landing and shipping at present consists of one cargo boat capable of carrying two tons in moderate weather, worked by the constabulary when required. The boat is worked in the same way as at New Plymouth, with a rope attached to the warping buoy. Small vessels can beach in fine settled weather, when the beach is remarkably smooth. Reefs. — A reef extends from the north-west head half a mile in a southerly and south-westerly direction ; there is also a reef oft' the south-east head in a south-westerly and westerly direction about one-third of a mile. These reefs shelter the bay at low water in bad weather, breaking the sea before it reaches the beach. The channel in to Opunake bay is one third of a mile wide between these reefs, with a depth of 8 to 4 fathoms at low water. The distance fiom head to head at low water is about one third of a mile. There is a sandy beach in the centre of the bay, about 250 yards long. Detached rocks lie under water about half a cable from low- water mark, and nearly 1^ cables from the north-west shore, with four feet on them at low water ; they are well out of the way of the anchorage. Beacons. — Two black beacons are erected on the north-west side of the bay to mark the best anchorage ; the upper beacon is 20 feet and the lower 10 feet high, they are 380 feet apart, and bear from eacli other N.W. \ W. and S.E. | E. When they are m line, a vessel is sufficiently close in to have room to swing. A 2£'/^?Vi? beacon 10 feet high, placed 96 feet S.S.W. f W. from the flagstaff' (at the head of the bay) is intended as a leading mark into the bay. Directions. — A vessel bound for Opunake should keep about two miles off shore im til the flagstaff bears N.N. E. f E. then^teer in on that bearing until the white beacon in front of the flagstaff' is seen ; keep this beacon and flagstaff in line, bearing N.N.E. f E. until the two black beacons on the port hand are in line bearing N.W. \ W. ; then anchor in 4 fathoms stony bottom ; should the wind be strong from south-east or north-west, keep a little to windward, where Avill be found the smoothest water, with nearly a cable swinging room. Sailing vessels of 50 tons or upwards should anchor about three-c[uarters of a mile off the heads in 10 fathoms rocky bottom, on the foUowmg bearings : Otumutua point S.E. by E. ^ E., and the flagstaff N.N.E. \ E. ; and be prepared on the first appearance of strong on-shore \^•inds to proceed to sea. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 103 It is H.W. F. & C, at Opunake, at 91i. 45m. ; range of tide 7 to 10 feet, length of beach between high and low water, springs, 750 feet. Signals. — The following signals are used at Opunake : Stand in with safety. — Four balls horizontal on yard, two on each side of mast. Anchorage in the bay unsafe, but vessel can anchor outside and a boat will be sent off. — Three balls horizontal on yard, two on one side of mast, one on the other. Bay dangerous, keep to sea. — Two balls horizontal on yard, on either side of mast. Night Signals. — IV/iiie light oyer ted. — Wait till daylight; anchorage safe. ^ distant 44 miles. The cape is a low salient point with a sandy entreme, and should be approached with caution, especially at night and in thick weather. From the northward two steep-peaked cliffs of a yellowish colour, with a rounded summit (Mount Tako), aid to point out its position. Mount Tako is 674 feet high, and lies 1^ miles to the south-west of the low extreme of the cape. An encircling dangerous reef of sunken rocks, with some detached and above water, extends nearly a mile N.N.E. of the cape extreme, and continues 1| miles southward on the seaward face of the cape, fully half a mile from the land, outside of which, and three-quarters of a mile to the north-eastward of the cape extreme, is a detached reef, Bowler's Reef. Light. — The light on Cape Campbell is a rez>oimn^ white light, attaining its greatest brilliancy eve^y minute, elevated 155 feet above high water, and in dear weather should be seen from a distance of 19 miles all round seaward between the bearings of N. \ W. and E. by N. \ N. The tower, situated on a knoll at the extremity of the cape, is 73 feet high, and painted with alternate bands of red and white, Vessels from the south bound to Wellington should take a good departure from this cape, avoiding the above- mentioned reefs, as the tides are strong in the straits. Soundings. — The depth of water in the centre of the strait between Capes Campbell and Palliser is 100 fathoms dark sand, decreasing gi'adually BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 107 towards either shore. Advancing in the strait to a position midway between Cape Campbell and Taourakira Head, the depth increases to 250 fathoms. This appears to be a deep hole about five miles in extent, and has generally a heavy tide rippling over it. It must be observed that wherever these ripplings are experienced the water is generally very deep, with an irregular bottom. CliflPord Bay. — From Cape Campbell to the westward for a distance of two miles the coast, which is fringed with rocks, forms a bight, and affords a fair anchorage in seven or eight fathoms about one mile off' shore . with southerly winds. Eleven and a half miles nortli-westward from Cape Campbell is White Bluff, the coast of the bay between being low, with a shingle beach. The Lake Kaiparatehau is four miles from the cape, and just within the beach. Two small rivers empty themselves into tlie bay northward of it. The northernmost, Awatere River, three miles south of the White bluff, is a considerable stream, having live feet on its bar at high water. "White Bluff is a remarkable range of steep white-faced cliffs, 890 feet high, rising boldly from the sea. A mountain range extends from these cliffs to the W.S.W. Cloudy Bay is a deep indentation with a shingle beach between the White Bluff and Port Underwood, a distance of 12 miles, with 12 fathoms across the entrance, and 9 fathoms 1^ miles from the beach, decreasing gradually to the shore. There is good shelter at its head, M'ith all off-shore winds from north round to south-east, out of the strength of the tide, with the advantage of Port Underwood being open in case of the Avind drawing more to the eastward. "W"airau River falls into Cloudy Bay, 5^ miles from the White Bluff and eight miles from Port Underwood. In moderate weather, cargoes can be conveyed by it from the plains and shipped in Cloudy Bay. The river is navigable for cargo-boats six miles from its mouth. At high water there is six feet on the bar. A signal-staff' is erected on the western entrance-point, where a flag is hoisted when boats or small vessels can enter, and lowered half-mast wYien the bar is impassable. Vessels may anchor one mile off" the entrance in five fathoms. ** The river is navigable for vessels drawing not over five feet. There is eight feet on the bar at high water. Two beacons in line, with casks on top — one tuhite, the other red — are the leading marks in over the bar. The pilot attends at the heads at tide time, and guides vessels in by waving a red flag in the direction the vessel is to steer." — Wellington Almanac. K fixed -\\\\\iQi light, 38 feet above the sea level, visible 11 miles, is shown on flagstaff" on west side of the entrance. It is H. W. F. & C. at Wairau River at 6h. Om. , and the stream runs in one hour after. Ordinary springs rise four feet, but with south-easterly winds hve or six feet. The greatest rate of tide at the entrance is 3^ knots. The shore end of the telegraph cable across the Straits from Lyall's Bay is landed in White's Bay, southward of Disaster Point, at the northern end of Cloudy Bay. Port Underwood is a good and spacious harbour, accessible in all weathers, and a frequent port of refuge for vessels unable to enter Port lies at the north end of entrance of Port Nichol- son. Its head is within 1^ miles of the western part of Tory Channel. The land in the immediate neighbourhood is mountainous. Mount Robertson rising over its western side to a height of 3,283 feet, and the Treble Moun- .tain adjoimng it 2,930 feet. The entrance between the mainland and Robertson Point is well marked. A distinct saddle hill rises half a mile east of the point, and the coast suddenly drops between the hill and the higher land to the eastward. Robertson Point has straggling rocks out of water and awash off it, and should not be approached within two cables. Two cables S.S.E. of the north point of Robin Hood Bay — the western entrance point — is a detached rock above water. Tliese are the only dangers. The width at the entrance is one mile, and within, the average depth is nine fathoms. HH Nicholson or to pass through Cook Strait. It li Cloudy Bay, and is 32 miles W. by S. | S. from the 108 BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Tlie harbour rims nearly north and south four miles, and in its upj^er part is divided into two arms by Separation Point, a high and narrow penin- sula two miles long. The western arm is named Minna and the eastern Brenda Bay, each forming a separate and well-sheltered harbour. Anchorage. — There are several snug bays on either side of the port. Bell's Cove, on the eastern shore, one mile above Robertson Point, is a convenient anchorage. It is about four cables broad, and half a mile in depth, with seven fathoms all over. Off its northern point, connected by a ledge, is Turner Island, whose outer extreme is distant from the point three cables, with a reef covered with kelp extending from it more than a cable. The several bays above Bell's Cove also afford excellent anchorage. The first cove on the western side of the port is Ocean Bay, nearly abreast Robertson Point. It has 4^ fathoms within the points. Two miles above it, on the west side of Minna Bay, and abreast SeiDaration Point, is Oyster Cove, a snug anchorage with six fathoms. The Coast from Robertson Point trends N.E. by N. towards Tory Channel and Wellington Head, the latter distant from it 15 miles, and is rugged and cliffy, broken into small bays, with rocks extending off' the points, some nearly half a mile, and many covered at low water. Caution. — A vessel should not approach this coast nearer than one mile, at which distance 40 fathoms will be found ffve miles from Port Underwood. "Welling'ton Head is a bold and prominent headland. Its sea face is a steep and rugged cliff", with a high rock standing close off" it to the southward. The summit immediately over the head rises 2,190 feet above the sea. Tory Channel. — Two miles south-westward of Wellington Head is the eastern entrance to Tory Channel (leading to Queen Charlotte Sound), its northern side being formed by Alapawa Island, which separates it from the Sound. This channel is used with advantage by coasting vessels and the steamers which call regularly at Picton. The entrance between the east and west heads is only a quarter of a mile wide, and the tide during springs attains a rate of five knots. Two peaked rocks extend to the south-east from East Head, and there are also some rocks above water lying a short distance off West Head. The channel, seven miles in length to its junction with Queen Charlotte Sound, maintains an average width of about half a mile, the depth being from 25 to 35 fathoms. There are several coves on either side wdth good anchorage in six to nine fathoms. They generally shoal suddenly within their points, with the bottom composed of such soft mud that a vessel might ground without feeling it, unless the lead is kept going. The first cove, three-quarters of a mile within the entrance on the north side, is rather exposed for an anchorage. The next, nearly a mile above it, is Jackson's Bay, divided into two portions by the White Rocks, which extend off" its middle point (the northern portion is Barret Bay), with good anchorage in seven fathoms, but not inside the outer extreme of the White Rocks. Oyster Harbour, on the south side, 3J miles from the eastern entrance, is the best anchorage in the channel. Vessels may anchor in six fathoms well within it, perfectly sheltered and out of the tide. Three bays succeed Oyster Harbour to the westward — Arrowsmith, Dacre, and Pelham Bays. On the north side of the channel Henderson Bay is immediately opposite Arrowsmith Bay. The western entrance of Tory Channel turns in a north and south direction ; more than half a mile wide, with 30 fathoms water, and entirely free from dangers. Dieffenbach Point, the western point, is a flat cliff extreme, rising gradually to a bare yellow summit, 1,200 feet high. Some sunken rocks lie half a cable off it, so that it should not be approached within a cable. Heaphy Point is the eastern point. Vessels of any size may run through the Tory Channel with a fair wind, by taking advantage of the tide ; but it is not recommended for a large vessel to work through, the channel being so liable to squalls and baffling winds off the high land. The tides, moreover, are strong, and the water is inconveniently deep to drop an anchor, if it should be necessary. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 109 Directions. — Vessels crossing Cook Strait from Port Nicholson should steer for the second pe)est approach to the anchorage is southward of Rangitoto Islands, a group three in number, lying half a mile off shore, extending 2^ miles in a north-east and south-Avest direction. Tides.— The tide sets between Rangitoto and D'Urville Islands at the rate of one to three knots, the flood running northward, ebb southward, at the anchorage a vessel will be nearly out of its influence. Port Hardy, at the northern end of D'Urvtlle Island, lies between Cape Stephens and Nile Head, which bear N.E. and S.W. from each other, distant four miles. Vessels making the port from the eastward should pass northward of Stephens Island, as there are two cluster of rocks in the passage between it and D'Urville Island, the Saddle and Tower Rocks, and the tides are very strong in the passages ; several rocks high above water also extend half a mile north-west of Cape Stephens. Nelson Monument and Victory Isles are in the entrance of Port Hardy, the foi-mer a hi*^li rock one mile to the eastward of Nile Head ; the latter' a cluster of small islands south-eastward of and the same distance from the monument, with the Fleet (a cluster of rocks) extending southward from them to the eastern shore. The passage into the port is on either side of Nelson's Monument, in deep water ; the widest channel is between it and Victory Islands, as a reef 116 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. extends 1^ cables off both Nile and Trafalgar Heads — the outer and inner western entrance points — Avhich narrows the channel on that side. The tides set directly across the entrance, the flood to the westward, the ebb to the eastward ; dne allowance must be made for this in entering ; in bad weather a confused sea gets up here, which renders Port Hardy less desirable as a harbour of refuge for a sailing vessel during a gale than the adjacent ports eastward and westward. When inside Nelson's Monument the port runs S. by W. 2J miles, with an average width of three-quarters of a mile, when one arm takes an easterly direction, and the main branch continues its southerly trend, both for about two miles, with an anchorage in 14 fathoms ; no less depth will be fouiul in any part of the port. Water. — Fresh water may be always procured from the streams in any the coves. Off Stephen's Island the flood or north-westerly stream begins at 5h. 15m., and the ebb or south-easterlv at llh. 15m. Greville or Brooke Harbour is on the western side of D'Urville Island, 62 miles southward of Nile Head. Mount Woore, the highest land of the island, 2,180 feet high, rises over its northern shores; the entrance points lie north and south of each other, one mile apart, and a rock four feet out of Avater lies a quarter of a mile N.W. of the south entrance point ( Rugged Point). The harbour runs S.S E. IJ miles, with a width of nearly one mile; the depth from 7 to 10 fathoms ; an arm then runs to the eastward for the same distance, with from 7 to 15 fathoms, which is nearly closed by tAvo boulder spits projecting from either shore at the entrance ; for large vessels there is no protection from north-west gales From this harbour, the coast of D'Urville Islands trends S. by E. six miles to its south-west extreme, Sjtuvage Point. Current Basin and French Pass. — The entrance lies between Sauvage Point and Hole in the Rock Point on the main land ; Lebrun Peninsula, a short distance within Sauvage Point, extending — with the rocks off it— more than half a mile to the southward, leaves the Avidth of the entrance about three-quarters of a mile, AA'ith nearly in the centre the Pi6ge Rocks, three rocks above Avater, bearing from Sauvage Point S. | E. three- quarters of a mile. The Chicots, three larger rocks aboA'-e Avater a quarter of a mile in extent, lie W. ^ S. 1^ miles from the same point, AA'ith a reef nearly a mile to the north-eastward, between them and the shore of D'Urville Island. Rock Awash. —A rock about 50 yards in extent, between the Chicots and Sauvage Point, bears from the largest of the former E. by N. ^ N. 7 cables from the latter W. by N. | N. 5^ cables, and is just Avithout the line from the high Avater extreme of Lebrun Peninsula and Sauvage Point ; it is steep-to. As it is only visible at Ioav Avater, vessels passing between the Chicot Rocks and D'Urville Island must be careful to avoid it. The channel is deep on either side of Piege Rocks : — Current basin then runs to the N.E. three miles to French Pass, Avith a width of nearly one mile, and a general depth of from 15 to 20 fathoms, rocky and gravel bottom. French Pass is the nanoAV strait betAveen the southern part of D'Urville Island and the main land, affording communication betAveen Admiralty and Blind Bays ; its narroAvest part, betAveen Reef Point on the north, ancl Channel Point on the;30uth, is 540 yards across at high Avater ; but a reef of rocks extending from the former point in a S. by E. direction about 400 yards, leaves only a clear and straight channel of 117 yards betAveen their extreme and the loAV-Avater mark of the south shore, both being perfectly steep-to ; on the extreme of the rocks, Avhicli are only uncovered at low springs, an iron perch is placed, so that vessels passing through at any time of tide can see exactly the breadth of the channel, and may pass as close as 10 yards to the iron perch if necessary. Rock Cod Point, tAvo cables soutlnvard of Channel Point, has sunkeij rocks extending S. by E. 100 yards from it, for Avhich due alloAvauce must lie made, as the tides are stronger there than in the pass ; there is also an aAvl^ward shell bank— the Middle Bank— Avitli eight feet at Ioav Avater . BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 117 before reaching the pass, from the Current basin side ; it is three cables long, in a north-east and south-west direction, and one cable in width, its northern extreme is only two cables from the perch on the reef. Buoy. — There is a white bnoy on the north-feastern edge of the Middle Bank, rendering the navigation of the channel rnnch easier, "This buoy has been re-laid a little to the eastward of its former position, and is now moored in three fathoms at low water springs" — " Wellington Almanac." The distance from the north-eastern edge of the bank to Rock Cod Point is 1^ cables, it follows that the seaman must judge his distance sliould the buoy, from any cause be removed, for the points being so much alike, and the tide so rapid, natural leading marks would be likely to lead into error. On the western side of the pass there is a rocky patch I^ cables N.E. from Reef Point, but it is not in the track of vessels passing through. " A patcli about 100 yards in extent with 8 fathoms mud, lies about in a line between Point Collinet and Reef Point, off the nortli-east entrance to the Pass, a little westward of the fairway and about the place where 53 fathoms is marked on the chart ; it forms an excellent anchoring place for vessels waiting for the tide. " — Capt. McGillivray. Tides.— The tides, instead of setting directly through the narrow channel, set across more in a line from Rock Cod Point to Channel Point, and the contrary, and a tidal irregularity which tliough not of rare occurrence is especially remarkable in this pass, viz,, that the ebb stream running to the eastward conmiences for tAvo hours before actual high water by the shore, the tide at the same time rising in Current Basin and the French Pass ; the extraordinary nature of the bottom, in connection Avitli the narrowness of the channel, is quite sufficient to account for the whirling of the current, the depth varying from 7 to 54 fathoms, without reference to the distance from the shore or rocks.* BLIND BAY— FROM D'URVILLE ISLAND TO MOTUEKA RIVER Blind Bay is in width from D'Urville Island to Separation Point, its north-Avestern extreme, 36 miles, and its depth within these limits is 25 miles. Nelson Haven lies at its head. On its eastern shores is Croisilles Harbour ; on its western are several anchorages, namely, Tonga Roads, Torrent Basin, Astrolabe and Fisherman Roadsteads, and the Rivers Motueka, Motuere, and Waimea. The depth of water in the outer parts of the bay varies from 25 to 28 fatlioms, shoaling gradually to 12, 9, and 5 fathoms within two miles of its head. It is entirely free from danger, and the winds seldom blow home with violence in the upper parts. It is frequently fine and calm weather at Nelson when a strong north-west gale is blowing in Cook Strait. * In offering an opinion on the French Pass as an available channel for shipping, it may be observ-r-d that it is perfectly straight, and sufRciently broad and deep for the largest ships, being twice the width of the entrance to Nelson Haven, and its narrowest part is passed in a few seconds. No sea can get up, and anchorage can be found on either side, but not in the Pass. On the other hand, the chances of hitting the correct time of tide, the possibility of having to anchor, and of the wind failing, and the consequent risk of being carried on the rocks by the current, are disadvantages which the saving of 12 or 15 miles do not compensate for, or warrant the risk. It cannot therefore be recommended for large vessels ; but by coasters it may be, and often is, used with advantage, anchoring in Current Basin, and passing through at slack water, and by this means avoiding a heavy cross sea, which is often met with off the north end of D'Urville and Stephens Islands. With regard to steamers, a vessel that could command a speed of eight knots would generally pass through at any time of tide. As a fishing place this pass is equal, if not superior, to any other part of New Zealand. Boats could load with hapuka, rock cod, and barracouta in an incredibly- short time."— Remarks by Commander Drury, of H.M.S. Pandora, 1855. " The colonial authorities, however, condemn its use as an ordinary passage, and say that, notwithstanding the French Pass is constantly used by the mail and coasting steamers running between Nelson, Picton, and Wellington, they never pass through against the tide always going round D'Urville Island ; and considering the eddying nature of the curi-ents it is dangerous to attempt to do so, as a very slight sheer would ground a vessel in a moment. At slack water with the tide there is no danger to a steam vessel handled with prudence. H.M.S. Brisk steamed through this pass on two occasions, once at slack water and once with the tide."— Remarks by Captain C. W. Hope, H.M.S. Brisk. lis BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT, The land at the head of Blind Bay is low, with some remarkable white cliffs, but on either side it is mountainous. The Castor Peaks, over Croisilles Harboiu*, Mount ^Duppa, and Double Mount, over the eastern side of the bay, are from 3,000 to 4,000 feet high. Mount Rintoul, a remarkable sharp cone 4,720 feet high, lies 15 miles south of Nelson. On tlie western side the land rises gradually from Separation Point, eight miles southward of which two peaks rise to heights of 3,700 feet. A higli and generally snow- capped range extends from them southerly nearly 20 miles, terminating in Mount Arthur, which is 5,800 feet above the sea level. Croisilles Harbour is easily accessible, affords good shelter in all weathers, and is the best eastern port of refuge in Blind Bay for vessels of any size caught in north-west gales. Three small islands lie to the west- ward and and southward of its northern entrance point, at distances of nearly two miles. The westernmost is a high conical island, with rocks extending seaward from it nearly a quarter of a mile, almost awash at high water ; the southernmost is Williams Island. Within these islands is foul ground and shoal water. It will be advisable in entering to give them a berth of half a mile. The entrance between these isles and Cape Souci is nearly two miles wide, with a depth of 16 fathoms. Working in, after passing Williams Island, vessels should not stand northward of a line between it and the inner north entrance point. Drift Roundhead. There is good anchorage in seven fathoms, mud, between this island and the head, the island bearing W. f N., and the head N.E. by N. three-quarters of a mile distant. If desirable vessels may proceed from 1 to li^ miles above the inner north point, Avhere there is excellent anchorage in seven fathoms. Huna- kiwa bay, on the south side is exposed, and not recommended for anchorage. At the head of the south-east arm (Squally Cove), a narrow isthmus, half a mile across, and 560 feet high, separates Croisilles Harbour from Pelorus Sound- Water. — Water may be obtained from a stream on the north shore one mile above the inner north entrance point. Pepin Island, nearly ten miles S.W. of Croisilles Harbour, is close to the mainland, and appears like a point of it, being united at high water by a sandy beach. Vessels running for Nelson on this side of the bay may pass a convenient distance off the land, which appears to be bold and free from dangers. At Whakapuake in the bight to the S. E. of Pepin Island, the shore ends of the cables to Australia and to Wanganui river are laid. Nelson Haven. — The entrance to Nelson Haven is ten miles S.W. of Pepin Islandj at the distance of six miles from the entrance commences the long and remarkable Boulder Bank, whose southern portion forms the natural breakwater to that anchorage. The available space for anchorage in Nelson harbour is limited for vessels of large tonnage, and the approach to it is exceedingly narrow, with strong tides. Pilot. — It is absohitely necessary for a stranger to engage a pilot ; an excellent one employed by Government is stationed at the entrance, and is always ready with his whale boat. Light. — The lighthouse (a white tower) on the Boulder bank, one mile northward of the entrance channel, exhibits a fixed white light, visible from seaward through an arc of 120°, from S. by W. | W. round East to E. by N. easterly (nortli of which it shows red towards the Wainiea banks, see Chart). It is 60 feet above the level of high-water springs, and should be seen in clear weather 12 miles. It is about 10 miles south-westward of Pepin Island, and half a mile N. by E. of the powder magazine, in latitude 41° 15' 4" S., longitude 173° 17' 1" east. *' The lighthouse is not on the Boulder bank as shewn in the Chart, but on the bank or island always three to six feet above high water on the same line of bearing as the Chart shews. The light also shews red between the bearings of E. by N— the south limit of the w/^/^'*? light— to N.E. by E., the approximate position of the outer white buoy. The two beacons on shore for entering the inner harbour are — upper one, white ; lower one, red ; they shew similar lights at night. The light on pilot-house is discontinued. A BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 119 white lio;lit is shewn at night on the beacon off Haul-ashore Point, on its being known that a vessel is coming in. The clump of trees on with a ravine in the mountains does not exist, the trees having disappeared, but a large white house stands where the trees were. It is a difficult mark for a stranger." — New Zealand Gazette. The harbour is between the mainland and the Boulder bank ; the latter is very narrow at high water, and is in one place then covered, Avith a boat channel over ; there are also two patches, which may be called islands, always well out of water. Haul-ashore Island, little more than a cable in extent, is at the southern extreme of the bank, with a single bnsh on its outer end ; the other is a small patch half a mile northward of Haul-ashore Island, Avith a magazine on it. The Arrow Rock, a high sharp rock, lies in the centre of the entrance a short cable south of the edge of the Boulder bank, which latter is marked by a beacon ; between the two is the entrance ledge, with only three feet water on it at low tides ; the passage in is to the northward of this ledge, between it and the beacon, and does not exceed 50 yards in width. Buoys — Buoys mark the channel leading to the entrance, a red buoy surmounted with a white beacon lies off the extreme end of the Waimea sand in 3^ fathoms, low water, the lighthouse bearing E. by N. easterly three-quarters of a mile, and the fairway buoy S. S E. ^ E. , the inner buoy is two cables and the outer one six cables outside the Arrow Rock ; one- third of a cable S.S.W. from the inner buoy is the fairway buoy red with black beacon in 2>\ fathoms The inner edge of the bar is a quarter of a mile outside the outer buoy ; the bar is three cables across, with nine feet on it at low water. Vessels of large tonnage can therefore only cross the bar and enter the harbour at or towards high water, when there is at springs a depth of 21 feet. With a strong north i west wind a vessel would scarcely run for Nelson Haven, but take shelter in Croisilles Harbour until it moderated ; it is not often, however, that this wind blows home with any violence at the head of Blind Bay. Directions for Entering Nelson Haven.— Vessels running into Blind Bay for Nelson with a fair wind should get the eastern shore on board, and make the Boulder Bank from two to three miles northward of the haven, running along its outer edge under easy sail at the distance of a mile, carrying six or seven fathoms water. Outer Anchorage. — There is a good anchorage outside the bar in all moderate weather, with the lighthouse S.E. in five to six fathoms water, distant three-quarters of a mile. Mariners are cautioned not to run out of the white into the red light, but to keep well Avithin the former. The marks for crossing the bar in the deepest part, are a remarkable clump of trees, nearly two miles southward of the harbour entrance on the low land, kept just eastward of Mount Rintpul ; this conieal mountain will be readily recognised unless the weather is thick. These leading marks are a good guide to the more definite ones of the same clump of trees in line with a remarkable ravine in the mountains, bearing S. ^ E. ; with these marks on, and the magazine in line with Green Point (the north extreme of Signal Hill), a vessel is on the outer edge of the bar, and the outer buoy will be on the starboard bow ; pass half a cable eastward of it, and steer for the inner buoy, which is S.E. by E. | E. 4 cables distant ; pass close northward of the inner buoy, when the Arrow Rock will be little more than two cables distant ; the beacon on the edge of the Boulder Bank will then be seen, and also the leading marks throughout the Narrows, which are two large white spar beacons, surmounted with a Ball and Triangle, at the entrance on the main- land, kept in one E.N.E. (The Storehouse door just behind tliem, and the chimney of Stafford's house also in the same line, were the marks for entering before tiie beacons were erected.) "Two beacons have been erected to be kept in one on entering, lower beacon with triangle — Red ; upper beacon with circle— White. By night a red and white light will be exhibited on their respective beacons," — "Nelson Almanac." These marks will lead north- ward of the entrance ledge, passing the beacon on the tail of the Boulder Bank at the distance of & yards ; when the bush on south-east end Haul- ashore Island bears N.W. by W. \ W., or the vessel is midway between it 120 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. and the upper beacon on the starboard shore, haul np sharply N. by E, f E., or keep little more than half a cable off the wharf ends. Anchorage. — Anchor just above the second wharf, with the bush on Haul-ashore Island in a line with the Arrow Kock ; a good anchorage is in this line, and abreast Green Point, in seven fathoms mud at low water, when the body of the town of Nelson will be just open ; it is necessary to moor. The best anchorage for a large vessel is just round Haul-ashore Island, with the beacons E.S.E. in five to six fathoms mud, as there it is still water, and the ship is moored head and stern, there being a mooring buoy for the stern chain. "Two mooring buoys, painted black, are laid down in the harbour." — Nelson Almanac. Small vessels and coasters enter Nelson Haven with ease on the flood tide, and under the skilful guidance of the pilot vessels of 1,000 tons have been conducted to safe anchorage with scarcely less facility. To enter, a vessel must have a wind which will enable her to lay E.N.E, through the narrow channel between Arrow Rock and the Boulder Bank ; after the tail of the latter is passed the tide will take her to a berth. After heavy rain, freshets increase the strength of the tide considerably, thereby rendering the turn in the passage dangerous, the current strikes the vessel on the port bow and would set her on shore if helm is not promptly given, the channel being only half a cable wide abreast of the beacons. Caution. — It must be observed that the preceding directions, though accompanied by the elaborate and clear plan published by the Admiralty, ought not to justify a stranger in attempting to enter the haven without a pilot unless in great emergency. The streams of tide change Oh. I7m. after high and low water at springs: the flood runs .for 7h. 10m., and the ebb 5h. 40in. The tides run rapidly along the eastern shore of the harbour, but by anchoring in the line directed a vessel will be out of the influence of their greatest strength. In consequence of the great range of tide. Nelson haven is one of the few places in New Zealand where a vessel of large tonnage may be beached for repairs. Bolton Hole Anchoragre, four cables westward of Haul-ashore Island, or between the tail of the Boulder bank and the eastern end of the Waimea bank, there is anchorage in six and seven fathoms, sheltered in some measure by the bar outside it ; a good berth is in the line between the buoys, with the south end of Haul-ashore Island in one with Staftbrd's house. Anchorage in "Waimea River. — " The Harbour Master at Nelson has reported that the entitince of Waimea River has of late silted up, at low water only 5 feet instead of 14 feet as formerly. — New Ztaland Gazette, September, 1875. The central and western mouths of "Waimea River are respectively 2^ and 6^ 'miles westward of Nelson, and navigable for coasters. Two miles N.W. of the western mouth commence the White Cliffs, which extend more than three miles along the coas#, 250 feet high, and seen a long distance from seaw^ard. The coast between Nelson Haven and the "White Cliffs is shoal, having 4 J fathoms at a distance of 1\ miles from it ; north-eastward of their southern or highest part, more than two miles off' shore, there is a patch of less than three fathoms. At the north-west end of the cliffs is the Moutere River, which has two entrances two miles apart , it is smaller than the "Waimea. 3^ miles northward is the Motueka River, and two small low islets, with sand flats between, extending nearly one mile off" shore. "MOTUEKA. — Beacons painted ted on starboard side on entering, black on port ; black buoy at entrance. There is steam communication with Nelson." — Nelson Almanac. BLIND BAY.— FROM SEPARATION POINT TO MOTUEKA RIVER. Separation Point, the north-western extreme of Blind Bay, sepa- rating it from Massacre Bay to the westward, is a small cliffy projection connected by a neck with high land rising immediately from it. 1^ miles S.E. of Separation Point is a remarkable Avhite stripe in the cliffs, which can be seen at a long distance, and be advantageously used as a mark for clearing the end of Cape Farewell Spit, BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 121 Awarua Bay, three miles in extent, with sandy Leaches, and from seven, to ten fathoms water, lies immediately sontliward of the white stripe, with anchorage off in ten fathoms in moderate weather : from its southern point, which is rugged and cliffy, the coast, of the same character, extends 2^ miles in a south-easterly direction to Reef Point, the north point of Tonga Roadstead. Capt. Fairchild says : "A dangerous reef runs to the N.W. a long half mile further than shown on chart. It breaks in bad weather. " Tonga Roadstead. — This is a snug anchorage with all Avesterly winds from north to south. The bay is half a mile in depth, with a smooth sandy beach at its head. The small island of Tonga, about two cables in extent, lies off the centre of it. The anchorage is about four cables westward of the island in eight fathoms. There is a passage on either side of Tonga Island. That to the northward is over three cables wide, with eight and nine fathoms ; the southern is half a mile wide, with six to ten fathoms. Vessels entering northward of the island must avoid a reef which extends oft Reef Point over a cable. (See plan.) Torrent Bay (see plan), the next anchorage, is 3| miles south- eastward of Tonga Island. The intermediate coast is cliffy, with small sandy coves. Several rocks extend more than half a mile off shore, and a long reef awash about midway between the two anchorages, with a small islet one mile southward of it. This part of the coast should not be approached within one mile. Torrent Bay is more than half a mile in width between North and Jetty Points. The basin in the southern bight affords good shelter for small vessels in 3 to 3^ fathoms, except in north-east winds. In the outer part of the bay there is good anchorage in six and seven fathoms with off-shore winds. Three torrents discharge themselves into the basin through deep ravines : hence its name. Astrolabe Road (see plan) is a mile southward of Torrent Bay. The anchorage is between Adolphe Point and Adele Island, which is nearly one mile long, and four cables from the shore. Hapuka Reef— with an iron beacon and cage (red) 13 feet high on it — dries two feet at low springs. It lies quarter of a mile eastward of Adolphe Point, with a narrow channel between with C fathoms water. There is also a sunken and dangerous rock, with six feet on it at low Avater, lying in the entrance, a quarter of a mile north of Jules Point, the north-east extreme of Adele Island. The main channel between this rock and Hapuku Reef is four cables wide, with eight fathoms water. There is also a narrow passage between the rock and Jules Point, with the same depth of water. Clearing IMarks. — When on sunken rock, the outer summit of Tonga Island is seen midway between Adolphe Point and Hapuka Reef. It is avoided by keeping the latter reef on board within about a quarter of a mile in entering. The north end of the sandy beach northward of Guilbert Point on the mainland just open of the north-west cliffy extreme of Adele Island clears to the northward of it. Anchorage. — The anchorage is half a mile within the entrance points in mid-channel, in six fathoms, the passage between Adele Island and the mainland being open. This passage is nearly half a mile wide in its narroM^est part, with 12 feet the least depth at low water, so that a small vessel can obtain shelter from all winds on the west side of Adele Island. Astrolabe Roadstead will be found a snug anchorage with all westerly winds from north to south. Tides.— It is H.W. F. & C. in Astrolabe Road at 9h. 10m. ; springs rise 14, neaps 10 feet. The tides are not much felt in Blind Bay, varying from a quarter to one knot along the shores, but with northerly winds a current generally sets to the southward at the rate of nearly one mile an hour. , Fisherman Roads are southward of Adele Island, between it and Fisherman Island, an adjacent rocky islet. It is three cables across the entrance, with good anchorage in 20 feet at low water, midway between the two islands. I 122 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Caution.— From here the Motiieka River is four miles to the S.E., with sandy bays and small coves on the coast between, where shelter may be had for boats ; but large vessels nmning down this side of the bay should keep at least two miles off shore, and when approaching to abreast the White Clitfs increase their distance to three miles. " Riwaka light: a light is exhibited at the store, Riwaka River (about 1^ miles north-westward of Motueka River), about 12 feet above the level of the sea, showing ^r^rt//j/^oints between. Oamaru. — (For description of breakwater, etc., at this important place see page 37). Close northward of Cape Wanbrow is Oamaru, a safe anchor- age with all winds excepting those between N.N.E. to S.8.E. Outer Anchorage. — There are no leading marks for this ; vessels can stand in till within a mile of the breakwater and anchor in 5 and 5^ fathoms. The same remarks as for ships anchoring off' Timaru apply here ; there is a good boat establishment. Light. — A r^^/ light is shewn at the bluff, visible from seaward five to seven miles, on all points from N.N.W. to S. by W. K green light is shewn on the end of the breakwater in fine weather, and when that cannot be done the danger lights are hoisted on a flagstaff' immediately south of the break- water, viz., " Put to sea " or " Keep to sea " — by day, two balls horizontal on yard on eitlier side of mast ; by night, two white lights horizontal, with red light between. Caution. — Masters of vessels in the roadstead will have to exercise judgment as to the practicability of getting tlieir vessels to sea, as these signals have at times to be exhibited during calm weather. It is H.W. F. & C. 2h. 50m., range 5 to 7 feet. Note. — Tlie above is corrected from information received from local sources. When the works are completed revised directions will be necessary. Moeraki Bay. — Look-out Bhiff' {Awa-Mokihi) is the north point of this bay, Whalers Home Point being its southern extreme. The bay is five miles long north and south, and two in depth ; the coast line is fronted with a sandy beach ; a reef nearly three miles long, covered with kelp, extends nearly across its entrance from north to south, 1^ miles distant from the beach, and is a great protection to the bay ; there is anchorage for coasters, though not pi-udent to remain with any symptoms of bad weather from the eastward. Light. — K fxed white light is shewn from the southern point of Moeraki Peninsula, on a white tower 28 feet high. The light is 170 feet above the level of the sea, and is visible as far round as the land allows for 19 miles. Whalers Home Point, the eastern extreme of a cliffy projection, is nearly three miles in length, with sandy coves on its north and south sides, forming good boat harboui's. A small islet (White Islet) and some scattered rocks, under water, covered with kelp, lie half a mile off' its northern part; If miles eastward of its southern extreme is Fish Reef, extending in a north- west and south-east direction one mile, uncovers at low water, and has deep water close outside. From Moeraki Bay a sandy bay extends five miles, the south extreme of which is Vulcan Point. Shoal water extends two miles southward of this point, at the extreme of which is Danger Reef, a sunken rock, marked by kelp. Three remarkable mountain cones rise just southward of Vulcan Point, two or three miles fiom the coast. "Waikouaiti Bay, 17 miles soutlnvard of Whalers Home Point, and 10 miles north of Ota^o Harbour, has a clean sandy beach two miles in extent ; its southern point is Mistaken Islet, close northward of which is the BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT, 149 entrance of a small river. There is anchorage in the bay with ofF-shore winds in five fathoms half a mile off shore. This bay is frequented by small coasters. " On the south head a bright fixed light is exhibited, visible about seven miles in clear weather between the bearings of S.E. ^ E. and W. by S. f S. " — Wellington Almanac. Ahuriri Rocks lie three-quarters of a mile from the shore, and two miles northward of Jones Head, the north point of Waikouaiti Bay ; it has five feet water on it at low water, with two to four fathoms close to. From it Remarkable Clift', near Tairoa Head, bears S. by E. | E., Vulcan Point N, by E. and Harris Bluff S.S.VV. i W. Caution. — Vessels should not approach the coast between Oamaru and Otago Heads (unless bound to Moerald) within 2^ miles, as sunken rocks extend for a considerable distance out. Blue Skin Bay, between Wailcouaiti and Port Chalmers, is nearly five miles in depth ; some rocks, which show, extend otf its northern shores for about half a mile ; otherwise it is clear of dangers, with a depth of 7 to 10 fathoms. Several sandy bights on its southern sides afTord anchorage with oft-shore winds. Soundings off the Coast. — The bank of soundings is well defined ; knowing the latitude, a ship's position may be determined with tolerable accuracy. Northward of Moeraki Bay there is 50 to 60 fathoms sand 30 miles ok, and about 30 fathoms at half that distance, decreasing gradually to 10 fathoms three miles from the shore, wliere the bottom is chiefly gravel and stones. Between Look-out Bluft" and Otago Harbour are the Kelp Reef, Fish and Dan^jer Reefs, and Ahuriri Rock ; all excepting the latter either visible or marked by kelp, and not extending over two miles from the coast. Southward of Moeraki Bay the deep water approaches nearer the coast ; 20 miles off" there is 60 fathoms, sand and coral, and at 30 miles no bottom was found with 400 fathoms line ; at two miles from the coast there is 15 to 18 fathoms, while immediately eastward of Otago Harbour the 100 fathom line of sounding only extends 12 miles from the land, inside that distance it shoals rather rapidly to 30 fathoms ; and 14 fathoms within two miles of the entrance. Otago Harbour (see plan). — The following is almost entirely from the amendment of the **New Zealand Pilot," compiled by the Secretary of the Otago Harbour Board, from data furnished by the Chief Harbourmaster of Otago (Captain William Thomson), 22nd June, 1877 :— " Otago Harbour. — The approach from the southward is well denoted by Cape Saunders, and its remarkable isolated moimtain, 1,410 feet high ; from the northward and eastward by the gap its entrance makes in the land, as also, in hazy weather, by a remarkable bank of dazzling white sand, at the base of the steep cliff's forming its western entrance head. This bank of sand, from a distant offing, is frequently mistaken for breakers on the bar. ** Lights. — A light is exhibited from a lighthouse on Taiaroa Head, at the east side of entrance to Otago Harbour. The light is fixed red, visible from seaward when bearing W. | S., round by south to S.E. It is 196 feet above the sea level, and in clear weather sliould be seen at a distance of 20 miles. The tower is 39 feet high, white, tlie lantern dome being dark green, and forms an excellent beacon oy day as well as by night. In foggy weather a gong is sounded every fifteen seconds. Two leading lights are exhibited from two white towers erected on the sandspit at the west side of entrance to Otago Harbour. They are 300 yards apart S.S.W. and N.N.E. From the upper or inner tower a fixed ^reen light is exhibited 36 feet above sea level ; from the lower or seaward one a fixed white light 26 feet above sea level. These lights may be seen from seaward from S. 41'' E. to S. 34° W. at a distance of six to seven miles. "SIGNALS. "As Otago is a bar harbour, there are times when it would be unsafe for vessels drawing more than 16 feet to attempt to enter. To denote the state of the bar the New Zealand General Signals (page 39) are exhibited from Taiaroa Head, under the care of an efficient signal master. " Tlie Commercial Code of Signal Flags is used as required. "Pilots. — An efficient staff' of pilots is stationed at Taiaroa Head* IfeO BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. They are at all times ready to push out when the bar is passable. They offer their services to the nearest inward-boiincl vessel having a pilot-signal flying, unless another vessel be observed running into danger, in which case every exertion will be made to board and assist the latter vessel ; preference is always given to her Majesty's ships and mail packets. Tlie pilots board vessels within a radius of three miles from Taiaroa Head, unless the sea on the bar renders it unsafe for the boat, which seldom occurs ; if unsafe the pilot places his boat in mid-channel inside the bar, showing the pilot-flag, for which a vessel entering must be steered as soon as the red and Avliite beacon at the pilot station opens out to view. If the wind is strong and northerly, the vessel should run in under easy canvas, to enable the pilot to board in safety, as there is not room to round a vessel to in the channel. On nearing the port, and the wind northerly, if necessary to wait for daylight or the tide, when it is not safe for a pilot to board, stand ott' and on, not bringing the liglithouse to bear eastward of south, and thereby benefit by the northerly current to keep to windward. " Anchorage. — The outer anchorage is safe when there is no easting in the wind. Small vessels anchoring in same should keep near the line of the leading lights, in nine fathoms, about half a mile from the shore ; large vessels about 1^ mile oft", in 15 fathoms, Taiaroa Head Light-liouse bearing about south. " Entrance AND Harbour.— The entrance to the port lies north and south. Taiaroa, its eastern head, is a bold dome-shaped rocky headland, 244 feet high, with a flagstaff on its highest part ; from this head the 'bar extends in a nortli-westerly direction towards Hayward Point, the northern extreme of a bluff precipitous headland, forming the north-west entrance head of the port. Within the entrance a spacious sheet of water extends south-westward a distance of 11 miles ; at its head stands the town of Dunedin. Seven miles within the heads a prominent headland, with two adjacent and lofty islands extending across the harbour, form a natural division, above Avhicli the channels leading to Dunedin become either too shoal or too narrow for the larger class of vessels to proceed farther. Vessels drawing not more than 12 feet are, however, regularly berthed at the wharves at Dunedin ; and in the course of a few months the dredging operations now being carried on by the Harbour Board will enable vessels not drawing more than 14 feet to be berthed there. A deep-water channel, having 18 feet at low water, has been determined and entered upon, and it is estimated that in three years from the commencement of active operations, the largest class of vessels will be able to reach Dunedin.* A mile eastward of the midway islands already referred to is the town of Port Chalmers at the head of Koputai Bay, where there is good anchorage for lar^e vessels in five fathoms. Here the large class of vessels discharge cargo, whicli is conveyed to Dunedin either by the railway or by lighters, t A reference to the plan of this liarbour shows that when within the bar the channel leading to Koputai Bay is deep but narrow, extensive sandbanks filling up the central space of both divisions of the harbour. This channel is well marked by a series of beacons and buoys, but a stranger should not proceed without a pilot beyond the first anchorage Avithin the entrance. "Inner Anchorage. — The inner anchorage, between Howlett Point and the first buoy on the inner bar, is safe in any weather. Vessels anchor- ing below Harrington Point, the nearer they are the sandspit the better ; above the point thej^ should get into the bight a little abreast the old Native Village. Vessels of light draught only can work into the inner anchorage, and when working out on the ebb care must be taken not to stand too close over to Hay wards Point, as it is very deceptive going with the tide and swell whicli set in that direction ; the swell increases as you near the point, and tends to cause the vessel to miss stays, placing her in a critical position ere * The new channel in the upper harbour has been cut through the sand-bank, and has been dredged to a depth of 14 feet at low water. Within six months the communication is to be coinpleced for vessels drawing 18 feet water. The deep water basin now being dredged to the depth of 15 feet at low water will be com- pleted in about eight months. Area of basin, 20 acres ; extent of wharfage. 3,000 feet. A complete system of steam cranes for discharging is established. -Oct., 1880. ' t See page 37 for Graving Dock at Port Chalmers. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 151 slie can he brought up, and "by club-hauling be put on the opposite tack. The bight is dangerous to get into, and the holding ground bad. •' BARS. ** The outer bar extends one mile in a north-Avest direction from Taiaroa Head, composed of hard white sand, and is in parts an extremely narrow ridge, difficult to touch upon with the lead, with a fathom deeper water on either side ; the depth on it varies, being a little deeper after the winter gales (July and August), which blow from south-west. About one mile inside the heads, above Harrington Point, there is an inner bar, but as there is always smooth water on it, it presents no obstacle to navigation. There is now more water on botli bars than fonnerly ; the deepest and best part fot crossing is 2^ cables' length from Taiaroa Heads. The depth of water at present (1880) in the channel across the outer bar is 164 feet at low-water spring tides, and across the inner bar, 27 feet. ''SAILING DIRECTIONS. "The outer bar should not be attempted on the ebb tides, unless with a commanding breeze, as it sets strongly towards Hayward Point. Light south-easterly winds, which are generally accompanied by a light sea-fog, cause a troubled swell on the bar, which is not the case with those from N.E., to which quarter it is more exposed. A strong north-east wind with the ebb tide makes a broken bar, dangerous for boats, but the swell goes down at all times very quickly, particularly with westerly winds. Being off the bar two miles, in 16 fathoms of water, bring the leading lights in one, S. S. W. ; steer on this course across the bar (the crossing of which will be immediately detected by the rapid deepening of the water and its smoothness), until the small fixed red light shown on the red and white beacon at the pilot station (not visible from seaward) opens out ; then haul up for Har- rington Point, the first rocky point half a mile within Taiaroa Head, passing it at half a cable's length, being quite steep-to ; or midway between it and the low dry spit of sand on the opposite shore, continuing a mid-channel course between the buoys on the inner bar, keeping the red on the starboard side and black on the port, passing the lightship on the starboard hand, about 200 feet off. Having passed the lightship (which is moored in 16 feet at low water spring tides, and about 1| cable's length S. W. by S. from the first red beacon, steer right for the bright fixed light tliat is shown in Dowling Bay, but care must be taken to judge the distance in sailing up through the cross channel, in order that the vessel may not run into the bay. The channel upwards to the Dunedin wliarves is well defined with buoys and beacons— the red beacons having bright fixed lights on them. "BUOYS AND BEACONS. " The arrangement of the buoys and beacons marking out the channel in both the lower and upper harbours is, that those painted black mark the port side, and those painted red the starboard. "NORTH CHANNEL "In smooth water, with a commanding breeze, there is an available channel within the bar, between it and Hayward Point, with from 22 to 25 feet at high water. Vessels intending to take it should bring the entrance of the harbour between Harrington Point and the low sandspit opposite it, open on, a S. E. ^ S. bearing, and sail in on this course until abreast of the black buoy that is moored in 19 feet at low water on the western extremity of the bar, passing it about a ship's length off, then haul up for Taiaroa Head until abreast of the first red buoy that is moored in 17 feet at low water, passing it also about a ship's length off ; on rounding this buoy a sharp curve must be made, passing the second red buoy a ship's length off, steering midway between Harrington Point and the Sand Spit, and then proceed as before directed. "Driver Rock is the only danger outside the line of the bar, -with seven feet at low water. It lies N.E. 1^ cables from the north-east extreme of Taiaroa Head, and is out of the track of vessels crossing the bar, but dangerous for small vessels hugging Taiaroa Head on that bearing. "TIDES. "ItisH.W. F. &C., Taiaroa Heads at 2h. 50m.; in Koputai Bay at 3h. 30m. ; at Dunedin at 4h. 30m. The rise of spring tides at the Heads 152 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. varies from 4 to 7, and sometimes 8 feet ; at Port Chalmers, from 3^ to 7 feet ; at Dunediii from 4 to 6^ feet. The greatest strength of the tide is off Harrington Point, where the ebb runs from 2 to 3 knots, the flood some- what less ; on the bar the greatest rate is 2 knots. At Port Chalmers the flood tide has an average duration of 6h. 5ni., the ebb 5h. 35m.; at Dunedin the flood lasts 5h. 12m., the ebb 6h. 42m. " The average interval of slack water at Port Chalmers is 25 minutes ; at Dunedin, 17 minutes. ." The harbour should not be approached in a south-east gale, for these winds which set the heaviest sea in on the coast produce a frightful surf on the bar, breaking in five and six fathoms. * ' The bar has been considered impracticable for shipping about forty- days in the year, and during the winter months occasionally so for a fort- night consecutively." — N.Z. Pilot. ** Only small craft and steamers should venture in at night, without a pilot, unless in case of necessity. " — Marine Department. Coast from Ota^o to Nugget Point.— From Tairoa Head the coast runs 8.S.-E;isterly tor nearly seven miles to Cape Saunders.* " Hydra Rock, northwards of Cape Saunders, is reported to lie in tlie following posi- tion, viz., with Cape Saunders 8. by W. f W., Funnel of Victoria (wreck in Wickliffe Bay S. W. by W. ^ W., Womans Head (most easterly land near Tairoa Head) N.W. ^ N. Its exact position has not been determined. Mari- ners are warned to exercise great caution when near the above position. As far as present information is to be depended on, a vessel will ])e clear inside the most westerly reported position of this danger, so long as Womans Head or East Head is shut in by Kemarkable Cliff point, and will be clear outside the most easterly reported position so long as East Head is brought nothing to the north of N.W. | W." — Wellington Almanac. This bold and remark- able headland is the south-eastern termination of the peninsula which forms the southern side of Otago Harbour. Light on Cape Saunders : A revolving •white light, 210 feet above the sea, is shewn from a white tower 28 feet high, visible between the bearings of S.AV. by W., round by west, and north, to N.E. \ N., attaining its greatest brilliancy once every minute, and may be seen at a distance of about 21 miles in clear weather. From Cape Saunders the land curves away S.AV. by S. towards Quoin Point, a rounded projection 30 miles distant. The intermediate coast forming a deep bight, is moderately high, in some parts thickly wooded. GuU Rock, the outermost of a cluster, is nearly one mile off a cliffy- head five miles S.W. of Cape Saunders. Nearly seven miles westward of Gull Rock, and a mile from the coast, is White Islet, and the same distance off shore, five miles further westward, is the small Green Islet. On the coast midway between these two islets is Black Head, a remarkable rocky head. Immediately within rises the Saddle Hill. From Black Head the coast is low, curving with a shingle and sandy beach for 11 miles to Taieri River, navigable at its entrance for vessels of six to nine feet draught. Its north entrance point projects half a mile east- ward, and is formed by a small island of the same name. The coast now rounds away six miles southward to Quoin Point, with rocky ledges extend- ing half a mile off shore. Cook's Head, a remarkable rock on the beach, is four miles south-westward of Quoin Point. Nugget Point, 22 miles from Quoin Point, the southern extreme of Molyneaux Bay, is a bold projecting headland, the termination of a razor- backed mountain ridge, with three pointed rocky islets nearly half a mile off it. Light. — The lighthouse on the extremity of the point, a white stone tower, 31 feet high, Shows a fixed white "^light, 250 feet above the sea, which in clear weather should be seen 23 miles. Molyneaux Bay. — Anchorage in this bay with off-shore winds, in eight fathoms, about half a mile off the landing-place, and the same distance northward of Reef Point, which is little more than two miles N.N.W. of * About one mile from the north point of WickliiTe Bay, which is midway bet wen Tairoa Head and Cape Saunders, a reef, with less than six feet water on it, was reported in 1868. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 153 Nugget Point, with a reef extending three-quarters of a mile from it. Coal, is found in a cliff on the nortli side of this bay, seven miles from the mouth of the Clutha River. On either side of this river are extensive clumps of wood. Clutha River (Matau), 4^ miles northward of Nugget Point, is a considerable river with deep water, and broad within the entrance. A constant fresh running out at from three to five knots renders the narrow entrance unfit for anything but boats, when it must be taken at or near liigh water. {*' The Clutha during a heavy flood in 1879 opened out a second entrance nearer Coal Point, which continues open still, the result being that the old entrance shoaled considerably, and, the river waters being now divided, both entrances are shallow and very dangerous. " — Harbourmaster, Dunedin, August, 1880.) Current. — Between Cape Saunders and Nugget Point a current of one knot an hour is generally found to set northward. Soundings. — The 100-fathom line of soundings extends 20 miles from the coast, decreasing gradually until two miles oft', where there are 12 fathoms, sand. Large vessels are not recommended to stand in nearer than a league. Coast from Nug-ffet Point to Poveaux Strait.— From Nugget Point tlie coast trends S. W. by S. 14 miles to Long Point ; thence S.W. by W. 11 miles to Chaslands Mistake ; thence W.S.W. 14 miles to Slope Point. Southward from Nugget Point it becomes much broken with occasional islets and reefs (which, in the absence of any refjular anchorage, prove of great benefit as places of refuge to boats engaged m whale and seal fisheries. It is not uncommon for whale boats to make the passage from Stewart Island or the north shores of Foveaux Strait, to Otago, a distance of 140 miles, taking advantage of these boat harbours on the approach of bad weather, which on this coast is of frequent occurrence). Three miles southward of Nugget Point is False Islet, connected with the main by a sandy neck. Catlin River (see plan on sheet chart) is half a mile westward of False Islet, navigable for small vessels ; the bar, on which is a depth of five feet at low water, breaks with a swell from N.E. to south. H. W. F. & C. 2h. 30m. ; springs rise 8, neaps 4 feet ; strength of tide, 2 to 3 knots, ebb and flood. The current flows in for 50 minutes after H.W. The township of Newhaven stands on the north bank of the river, half a mile inside the "bar, where the channel is one third of a cable wide. Two miles and a half from Catlin River is the small islet of Tuawike, close to the shore ; inside is a boat harbour. White Head, a bold cliff, is l| miles southward of it. LiOng" Point {Inktcka), the next headland, is similar to Nugget Point, but without the rock islets off it. Two miles north-eastward of it is Cosgrove Island, inside which there is landing in fine weather ; abreast this part of the coast, two miles off shore, there is 25 fathoms fine sand, and from 50 to 60 fathoms at five miles oft" ; coming from the northward, the influence of the Foveaux Strait tide begins to be felt here. The coast now trends more westerly. Tautuku, a sandy bay, six miles long, sweeps round from Long Point ; at its western extreme is the river of the same name, a rapid stream, with a ibar dry at low water ; there is anchorage off" it in seven to nine fathoms, with westerly and north-west winds, but exposed to south-west ; there is a boat harbour at the eastern end of the bay, sheltered by Long Point. A series of irregular hills with rounded outline, 1,300 feet high, rise over this part of the «oast, diminishing northward both in height and ruggedness. Chasland's Mistake {Makate), a remarkable black cleft cliff, is nearly 11 miles from Long Point, with a high rock standing off shore a mile morth-east of it. Brothers Point, with two rocky islets off" it, is five miles westward of Chasland's Mistake, with a bight between, in the centre of which is a boat harbour, and another close westward of the point itself. I. 154 BKETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Waikawa River, with three fathoms on its bar at low Avater, but a very narrow entrance, and strong freshes always running out, is three miles westward of Brothers Point ; just eastward of its entrance is a white bluff. Small vessels have laid secured to the shore within the river, but exposed to considerable danger from the freshes and swell from southerly gales. From Brothers Point the coast decreases in elevation, and is backed by a range of undulating hills. The tide of Foveaux Strait slackens con- siderably off this part, and there is a longer stream to the north-eastward. Five miies westward of Waikawa River is Slope Point, the southern extreme of the South (Middle) Island of New Zealand ; it is a low treacherous point, the sea breaks for more than one mile oft" it ; a sloping mountain risea to 1,300 feet, seven miles nortlnvard of it. Waipapapa Point, 7i miles westward of Slope Point, is low and sandy ; between Waikawa River and this point the coast is fronted with numerous rocky ledges, which render it imprudent for vessels to approach within a league ; its exposed character and irregular tides render it also unsafe for boats, unless in very line weather. Waipapapa Point, the eastern extreme of Totoes Bay, slopes gradually down to the sea from a mountain summit, 14 miles north-east of it. The sea is said to break lieavily at times five miles off this point, in seven and ten fathoms ; it should therefore be approached with great caution. Mataura River is five miles north-west of Waipapapa Point in the bight of Totoes Bay, with only two feet on the bar at low water. Between Mataura River and Waipapapa Point, the Papanui, a mountain stream, runs into the bay through a line of cliffy heads. From Mataura River to the Bluft" Harbour, 18 miles, the coast is a low sandy beach backed by an extensive plain, the hills terminating at the eastern bank of the river. General Remarks. — From Otago Harbour to Waipapapa Point, which may be considered the north-eastern entrance point of Foveaux Strait (a distance of about 110 miles), there are no dangers more than one mile oft' shore (except oft" Waipapapa Point, see above), and few which do not shew ; neither are there any remarkable features by Avhich the seaman is enabled to ascertain his exact position. Nugget Point, with its lighthouse, and Moly- neux Bay are conspicuous landmarks ; the latter shews as a deep bight from seaward, the land on either side being moderately high. Long Point, Chas- land's Mistake, Brothers, Slope, and Waipapapa Points, though not remark- able, may, with the assistance of the chart, be recognised at the distance of five miles : the water shoaling gradually, within the 100 fathom line, 20 miles from the shore, will enable a vessel to judge her distance at night with tolerable accuracy. FOVEAUX STRAIT, AND SOUTH OR STEWART ISLAND, IN- CLUDING THE TRAPS ROCKS AND SNARES ISLANDS. Variation in 1875. BlnS Harbour - 16° 10' East | The Snares - - 17' 0' East. Foveaux Strait separates the South (Middle) from Stewart Island, and lies in a W.N.W. and E.S.E. direction ; the general Avidth is 15 miles ; from Ruapuke Island to the north-Avest end of Stewart Island, a distance of 30 miles, it has a depth of from 15 to 28 fathoms, sand and shells. The approach from the eastward requires considerable caution on the part of strangers ; the Ruapuke island lyii^p nearly in the centre of the entrance, surrounded in almost every direction by islets, reefs, and tide ripplings ; but there is a clear passage on eitlier side of five miles, with not less than twelve fathoms water ; either may be taken as circumstances render desirable. The northern shore of the Strait, from Bluff Harbour to the Avestern end of Tewaewae Bay, nearly 50 miles, is studded Avith islets and reefs, some of which extend eight miles from the coast, and are not alAA'ays visible ; but AA^est- Avard of Ruapuke island there is a clear navigating Avidth of never less than 10 miles. Current.— A current ahvays sets soutliAvard round the soutli-Avest BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 155 extreme of the >Soutli (Middle) Island ; once round this point, a south-west wind will carry a vessel in a short time into comparatively tine weather, but should a sailing vessel — her fair wind falling before rounding this extreme — be set back by the current, overtaken by a north-west gale, and obliged to bear up for Stewart Island — the wiser course, if the gale proves severe — after passing Saddle Point of Stewart Island, smooth water will be found. Port William always accessible, and anchorage anywhere off the coast between it and Saddle Point. The passage through Foveaux Strait from the eastward cannot be recom- mended for any but steam vessels ; but from the westerly winds so constantly prevailing, the passage from the westward could be accomplished with great rapidity in smooth water, and those ugly dangers, the Trapg Rocks, southward of Stewart Island, be avoided. Solander Island — an excellent landmark to the strait to vessels from the westward — lies 22 miles south of the southward coast of South (Middle) Island, and W. ^ S. 35 miles from the north-west end of Stewart Island : it is nearly one mile long, rises almost perpendicularly from the sea, and has a remarkable peaked summit 1,100 feet high, seen in clear weather 13 or 14 leagues ; adjoining it a smaller islet lies little over one mile west- ward. The only port on the northern shore of Foveaux Strait eligible for ships of burthen is the Bluft" Harbour (Aiuarua) ; its narrow entrance and very strong tides render it difficult of access to sailing vessels. On the Stewart Island shore are several ports always .accessible and safe, where vessels may wait an opportunity of entering Bluff Harbour or New River. Ruapuke Island (see sheet X. ) lies nearly in the centre of eastern entrance of the strait, its north point being in a direct line between the low sandy AVaipapapa Point on South (Middle) Island, and Port William in Stewart Island, from the former S.W. by W. 14 miles, and from the latter 19 miles. It is low, of an irregular shape, 4^ miles long, north and south, and two miles wide, and may be seen 12 or 14 miles ; the central part is 140 feet high, covered with trees of stunted growth ; the north point is a cliffy headland, with a hummock over it 220 feet above the sea. The principal dangers lie off the eastern side of the island. Green Island, 1^ miles round, 190 feet high, has a level outline. It lies one mile east of Observation Head, the eastern cliffy point of Ruapuke; between them is the anchorage. The Seal Rocks, north-eastward of Green Island, are high out of water, the dry part covering a space of two cables ; reefs awash extend from them westward nearly three-quarters of a mile, and south-eastward four cables ; between them and Green Island is a clear passage of three-quarters of a mile, with from 9 to 15 fathoms. A bank, with 3^ fathoms least water, which breaks in heavy weather, lies midway a little northward of a line between them and the north head of Ruapuke. Toby Rock, dangerous, is only awash at very low springs, and not marked by kelp (as most of the dangers here are) ; it lies directly in a line with the north end of Green Island, and the high part of the Seal Rocks, N.N.E. f E., 1^ miles from the latter, and E. by N. | N. 3| miles from the north head of Ruapuke Island. Captain Thomson, Harbour Master, Bluff, reports heavy breakers having been seen in three places, N. Eastward of Toby Rock, with probably not over four or five fathoms— perhaps less — on them. The northernmost breaker bore from Bluff Hill S. 88 East, from Dog Island S. 87 E., from Toby Rock N. 29 E., tAvo miles; until this locality has been surveyed, it should be approached with great caution. Directions and Anchorage. — Vessels from the eastward, intending to anchor at Ruapuke Island, should pass five or six miles southward of Waipapapa Point, abreast of which the island will be generally visible. Green Island and the Seal Rocks will be plainly made out six or seven miles off, when steer direct for the former, which leads clear of all dangers. When within half a mile of Green Island haul round the northern point, giving it a berth of a quarter of a mile in 11 fathoms, and anchor midway between it and Lee Islet— -close off the north-east sandy point LL 156 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. of Riiapuke — half a mile from either in 5^ fathoms sand. Vessels should not go within this, as several rocks and reefs, marked by kelp, extend half a mile from the beach, and break in bad weather. Weather Islet lies half a mile south of the anchorage, midway between Green Island and Observation Head. With Avestcrly or south-westerly winds this anchorage is safe, with smooth water ; with strong southerly winds a swell rolls in. The Seal Rocks and Keefs, with Green Island, protect it in a measure from easterly winds, but with these winds better anchorages can be found in the bays on the west side ; the excellent harbours of Stewart Island being so near, there is no inducement for a vessel to ride out a gale here, unless in actual necessity. From this anchorage there is a passage to sea between Seal Rocks and Ruapuke, passing half a mile from Lee Islet, and between it and the 3^ fathom bank mentioned above. A heavy tide race extends a quarter of a mile off the north head of Ruapuke ; it is otherwise free from danger. Landing. — The landing for boats is close round the Observation Blufl'. Breaksea Isles, two in number, surrounded by rocks, lie 1 mile south of Green Island. Two reefs above water or awash lie a short distance westward and south-westward of them. The three rocky South Islets extend half a mile off the south point of Ruapuke. Kelly Rock (not marked by kelp) only breaks occasionally, and lies nearly a mile S.S.E. of the south extreme of South Islets, and IJ mile E | S. from a remarkable black rock, the easternmost of the Hazelburgli group. Outlying Islets and Rocks. — Between the south and west points of Ruapuke Island is Henrietta Bay, off these points, extending for a dis- tance of four miles in a semicircular form, are Hazelburgli group, Half- passage and Fife Rocks, and Bird Island, Avith several smaller patches inside and among them, which generally break ; vessels unacquainted with thQ locality, should not go within them. Henrietta Bay. — The channel between Hazelburgli group and South Islets appears to be clear, but in hauling into Henrietta Bay the islets at its southern entrance should not be rounded too close, the rocky patch on their north side appearing to extend further north-westward than slioAvn on the chart. There is at the south-east corner of Henrietta Bay a well sheltered landing place. The north-western side of Riiapuke Island is free from dangers, wdth the exception of Tupis Island, close off West Point, and a small islet half-a- mile oft" the west point of Caroline Bay. Caroline Bay, on the north-west side of the island, is 1| miles south- westward of the north head, with a depth of six and seven fathoms ; there is a large kelp patch in the centre with three fathoms inside it. Although Ruapuke Island has so many dangers near it, Toby and Kelly Rocks alone do not show ; a strict look-out, however, is indispensable to ensure the safety of vessels in its vicinity, and, unless intending to anchor, it is recommended not to approach it within four miles, except on its north- west side, and towards the north head, wdiere it. may be safely approached within half that distance. A mile eastward of Toby Rock, the easterly or flood stream commences three hours after it is low water by the shore, or at lOh. Om. F. »& C. ; like . the w^esterly, it is of six hours' duration, running at the rate of one to one- and-a-half knots. Tides. — The flood sets through Foveaux Strait from west to east, and is strongest between Bluff' Harbour and Ruapuke ; it is felt as far as Long Point, 45 miles eastward of that island. Between Ruapuke and Stewart Islands it sets south-eastward. The ebb takes contrary direction. It is H.W. F. & C, in the western entrance of Foveaux Strait, between Stewart Island and Pahia Point, at 121i. 15m. ; the flood stream commences from half an hour to two hours after low water, according to the wdnds, > earliest with those from the westwardi BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 157 At the eastern entrance it is high, water at Ih. Om., the flood stream commencing at lOh. Om., or tliree lionrs after low water. Along the north-east side of Stewart Island the flood or south-easterly stream runs for an hour and twenty minutes after it is high water at Port William, or until 2h. Om., F. & C. The strength varies from a half to 2^ knots ; in the narrow part, between Ruapuke and the Bluff, it is 3 knots. Winds, &c. — The prevailing winds on the southern coasts of New Zea- land are from north-west to south-west ; ordinarily in Foveaux Strait, what would be no more than an ordinary gale or strong breeze a hundred miles at sea, blows through them with increased violence. The contrary, however, occasionally happens, and outside Solander Island it will be a strong gale, when within it, and near the mouth of the strait, the weather is quite moderate. The fall of the barometer indicates a north-west wind, and frequently dirty rainy weather ; these gales blow with great violence, generally for four or five days. Thunder, which is uncommon, is said to be a sign of unusual duration ; it frequently continues to blow very hard after the mercury has risen, Avith a high barometer, the wind then generally veers southward of west. With a strong westerly or north-westerly wind in the straits, it is often south-west on the eastern shores of Stewart Island, while on the western coasts the north-west wind generally draws from N.N.W., or more northerly. A casual north-east or easterly wind, with fine weather, in the eastern entrance, almost certainly turns to north-west as the western entrance is approached. The only wind to be depended upon to carry a vessel through is a soutii-easterly, which may be looked for, during summer, about once in six weeks. In tlie winter season it perhaps occurs twice in that period. It generally lasts from 24 to 48 hours, more than sufficient to carry a vessel round the south-west extreme of the South Island into com-r parativcly fine Aveather. It is frequently a south-Avest Avind, Avitli tine weather, northward of the West Cape, Avliile blowing a north-Avest gale, Avitli dirty Aveather in the strait. The barometer rises before south-east Avinds, Avhich often blow Avith great strength. A thick bank of clouds rising to the south-east, Avith rainy Aveather, and the hills clothed Avitli Avhite mist, are considered as certain indications ; as also the groups betAveen Ruapuke and StcAvart Island raised by refraction ; but on going westAvard, should Solander Island appear dis- torted a Avesterly Avind Avill certainly terminate the easterly. Aspect of Country. — The headland immediately over the entrance of the Bluff harbour forms a conspicuous feature, contrasted Avith the great extent of level land in its vicinity, and may be said to be to the eastern entrance Avhat the Solander Island is to the Avestern, a useful and unmis- takeablc land-mark. It stjinds at the south-east extreme of a narroAV and irregular promontory, forming the Bluft* harbour on its southern side, and the entrance to New River on its northern. From the sunnnit, AA'hich is 855 feet above the sea, there is a full and clear AdcAv of the strait and its islands and reefs. Solander Island can be seen AvestAvard, as also the coast of South Island for 60 miles, as far as Big River. Sixty or 80 miles inland nortliAvard is the southern portion of the Lake Country, Avith lofty ridges 5,000 to 7,000 high. Bluff Harbour (Awarua — see plan) stretches in tAvo arms to the north and east at high water respectively four and five miles. The available space for anchorage, hoAvever, is narroAV and confined, and, for vessels of large tonnage, not extending much above a mile from the entrance. The tides run very strong, during the springs as much as seven knots ; there is also a heavy tide rippling at the entrance, caused by the meeting of the harbour tide Avith that in the strait. The entrance to this harbour (Avhich is noAV much frequented by the mail steamers) has been buoyed, as also has the harbour itself. It is becoming a port of considerable importance. The folloAving observations upon the navigation of Foveaux Strait are by Captain Thomson, Harbour Master at Bluff Harbour : — "Foveaux Strait from the Westward. — Vessels from the Avest- ward, bound to Blufi" Harbour, should endeavour to make the Solander, which is in a very favourable position for a landfall, then steer for the m BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. entrance of Foveaux Strait.* Codfish and Paigged Islands— off N.W. end of Stewart Island — are high and conspicuons, and during hazy weather can often be seen before the still higher main of Stewart Island. Should it be blowing hard from the westward, or night coming on, they should haul close in with the land at Saddle Point — N.E. part of Stewart Island — ; it is easily distinguished by its name, and between it and Port William perfect shelter will be obtained, with smooth water and safe anchorage. The best is abreast of Murray River, from a half to a mile off shore, in from 5 to 12 fatlioms. The only outlying danger is the Newton Rock, about three miles N.W. from Port William, and about a mile from the nearest land ; has only six feet over it, but good anchorage all round. After having made out the land, masters need have no hesitation in taking Foveaux Strait during the heaviest gales, as the above shelter is extensive, and a vessel may either anchor or dodge under the island with perfect safety, with, when clear, Dog Island light in sight. **I would recommend anchoring as safest, giving ample scope of cable on one or both anchors if necessary. There need be no apprehension of the wind coming suddenly on to the land and preventing them from getting their anchors, as it invariably moderates before any change takes place, and seldom blows on to the land with any strength." **In working through Foveaux Strait, a vessel should not stand northward into less than 20 fathoms between Pahia Point and Blufl' Harbour to avoid the reefs in the neighbourhood of Centre Island (see p. 162) ; this leaves a clear Avorking -width of ten miles, but it is not recommended to approach within three miles of White Rocks or Rugged Island at the north-west end of Stewart Island, on account of the heavy westerly swel and tide ripplings met Avith there. Midway Reef in Tewaewae Bay on the north shore must also be avoided ; it lies in a line between the points of the bay, 4| miles from the Western Sand-liill Point, and only breaks ccasionally. " — N.Z. Pilot. " When moderate they should steer for the Bluff, which lies about N.E. ^ E., 15 miles from Saddle Point, and is the hidiest land in that direction, and communicates Avith the Signal Station on tlie hill, from Avhich notice is given to the Pilot Station; Avhen the pilot is on his Avay out, 'M.C.S.'is shoAvn, 'Stand in for the pilot and look out for his signals.' The vessel should then be steered roimd the land from Look-out Point, about tAvo cables' length off, under easy sail till the pilot boat is seen. When blowing fresh, the vessel's Avay should be deadened as much as possible by * bracing hye the yards ' to alloAV the boat to get alongside, as there is not room for a large A^essel to round-to between the sand-spit and the shore. A range of 15 fathoms should be overhauled on each cable, and, if the sea Avill admit, both anchors cock-billed Avhen a mile or tAvo out to avoid delay. "Vessels requiring a pilot should on no accoimt run in for the port without first having communication Avith the Signal Station on Bluft' Hill, or when it is clouded. Avith the station on Starling Point, Avhich opens on a N. by E. bearing; ithe latter should only be done during Avesterly Avinds, on the ebb. On the flood and Avesterly Avinds, vessels should keep Avell to the AvestAvard, but Avithin signalling distance of Bluff Hill Station, and keep working to Avindward until ' M. C. S. ' is shoAvn, otherwise they are liable to get set past the port. "When the Avind is south or south-easterly. Starling Point should be brought to bear about north, Avith a good offing, and steered in for on that bearing till the pilot boat is seen, care being taken to keep a little to the eastAvard or westAvard, to counteract the set of the ebb or flood as the case may be. There are tAVO AA^iite triangular beacons on the north shore Avhich serve this purpose Avhen kept in a line about N. by E. ; but A'essels draAving OA^er 14 feet, Avhich do not take a pilot, should haul up for TcAvacAvae Point, before they come abreast of Starling Point, as the line of beacons above this leads into 2^ fatlioms at Ioav Avater. The northern beacon has a small triangular top. "There is a semaphore on the flagstaff' on Starling Point ; when it is * The light on Centre Island (see page 162) is now at night time the chief guide for making the Strait from the westward. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 159 shown, the vessel's head should be altered in the direction the arm points, and steadied when the arm is dropped. It will not be used for piloting large vessels into harbour, but may be shown should a vessel by any chance be running into danger. "There is a red buoy marking the S.W. end of the sand-spit in six fathoms ; it bears from Dog Island about W.N.W. ; from Starling Point, S. by E. ^ E. ; and from Look-out Point, E. by N. The channel is between it and the shore. **FovEAux Strait from the Eastward.— Vessels coming from the eastward along the coast should pass about three or four miles off Slope Point ; when abreast it Blulf Hill will look like an island (bearing about west) till the low land north of it appears. Waipapapa, 7^ miles west of the Slope, is a low sandy point with detached rocks, and should be passed at the same distance off, as foul ground is said to extend from it two or three miles. The Seal liocks, Toby Rocks, and a dangerous break two miles outside the latter, lie in a line about N.E. by N. ^ N. from Green Island, the break being distant 4ch miles. To clear these dangers Dog Island should not be brought to bear to the north of west till Green Island bears S. by W. ^ W. After passing these, a course may be shaped for any part of the Strait to the westward, or for the Bluff, as hereinafter directed. ' Allowing for the streams of tide which here run east and west (true) about one knot an hour.' — N.Z. Pilot. Vessels requiring a pilot should not run in for the port during the night or when blowing hard between east and south, especially on the ebb, as then there is a heavy ' tide-rip,' and the pilot may not be able to put off*. But on the ffrst of the ffood they may run down, either north or south of Dog Island, till mthin signalling distance of Bluff Hill, or Starling Point Stations, and ascertain whether the pilot can put off" or not ; if not, they may dodge between the Bluff and Stewart Island till moderate or stand across for Port William, which is easily entered at such a time, and by keeping the Bluff" Hill on a N. by E. | E. bearing, they will be led right into it. The 10-feet patch which lies in the entrance of that port is well marked by kelp, and it may also be avoided by keeping close to either the south or north head of the bay. "Vessels passing between Dog Island and the Sand-spit should give the island three-(xuarters of m mile berth, and steer about W. by S., not bringing Look-out Point to bear southward of west till Starling Point bears north ; then, if bound for the Bluff", and 'M.C.S.' is shown, steer in as before directed with southerly winds. " Durin» moderate weather, and the wind between north and south, round easterly, the north passage should be taken, and after passing Waipa- papa, a course steered about W. by N. for the sandy beach about three miles eastward of the harbour, till within half a mile of the shore, when a black buoy will be seen, which marks the N.E. end of the sand spit ; it is moored in ffve fathoms, bearing from Dog Island N. by W. ^ W., from Bluff" Hill Flagstaff", E. by N. f N. The north passage is between this buoy and the shore. While waiting for a pilot keep to the eastward of this buoy, or do not close Bird Island with Dog Island. There are also two white triangular beacons which lead through this channel. These, if seen before the buoy, should be brought in a line about W. by N. , and will lead close to it. When the wind is easterly, and ebb tide, allowance should be made for not getting set to the westward of this. The western beacon has a small triangular top to distinguish it. The northern passage should not be taken by vessels drawing over 15 feet, near low water, nor when there is a heavy swell on. " When the wind is between north and south, round westerly, vessels should beat to the westward, outside of Dog Island, till off Look-out Point ; then follow the directions before given for vessels from the westward. " Vessels coming from the southward, on the east side of Stewart Island, should take the passage between Fancy Group and Half -Passage Rocks. It is clear of hidden dangers, and well defined ; the islands being of moderate height and the rocks large and well above water. The tides set S.E. and N.W. from one to three knots. Bruce Reef, laid down off Port Adventure, is not known to any local men who have been a great many] times 160j BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. over tliis ground, no^* to the Maoris living near, but some say that after heavy- southerly gales it occasionally breaks somewhere in this locality. "The harbour can be taken at any time of tide, with the wind from N.N.E., round easterly, to S.S. W. With all other winds, there is perfectly safe anchorage both south and north of Starling Point, about two cables from the shore, in from six to eight fathoms, good holding ground. Vessel* having only passengers to land need go no farther than tliis. There is a red light shown on Starling Point between sunset and sunrise, 20 feet above sea level. " Masters with a sheet chart of Ruapuke may find good shelter from westerly wind on the east side of that island ; they should haul close round the north end, Avhich will enable tliem to see their position clearly. " Vessels may, in fine weather, drop their anchors or a kedge in any part of Foveaux Strait (where the water is not too deep) to prevent them from being drifted about by the tides. " It is H. W. F. & C. at Bluft' Jetty at Ih. 20m. The current runs in one hour after high, and out one hour after low water. In the middle of the Strait tlie flood stream runs eastward two hours after high water, and the ebb westward two hours after low water. *' The channels are marked by red and black buoys ; when entering red buoys are to be left on the starboard hand and black on the port. "There is an excellent wharf with 20 feet alongside at low water, and no range or swell whatever sets into the harbour. Railway trucks come alongside to load and discharge cargo. ' ' I may here state that among those unacquainted, a needless dread of Foveaux Strait exists, in consequence of the prevalence of westerly gales, but they are not mucli more frequent than in many places on the same parallel of latitude in botli hemispheres, and have this advantage — that they are seldom accompanied by thick weather or fogs, and there are but few straits where such perfect shelter, with ample room and safe anchorage, is- so easy of access, and can be so readily obtained as under Stewart Island. " The local whaling vessels invariably take shelter under Stewart Island,, and when it moderates seem to have no difliculty in getting to the westward to their whaling ground off the Solander. "The light on Centre Island greatly facilitates the navigation of these straits. • * " A floating light, showing * bri;L5ht all round, ' has been placed on the Black Buoy Rock, with the following bearings, from the Light : — Burial Point, S. byE. (2) two cables' lengths; Triangle Rocks (sunk) S.S.E. (f> three-quarters of a cable's length ; Red Light, on the east end of the Jetty, Avest, (3) three cables' lengths. It is njoored in 18 feet at loAV-water spring^ tides, and must be left on the />ori hand when entering. ( ' Vessels drawing- over 12 feet should not come to the south of a line between the Light Vessel and the northern face of the Jetty at low Avater. There is 13 feet close to the vessel at low-water springs.' — * New Zealand Gazette.') "Bluff Harbour. — Two dolphins have been placed on the 'middle spit ' (which lies to the north of the wharf), between the two channels. One is on the extreme east end in 12 feet, surmounted by a cross, painted red and: white, in horizontal bands. The other on the middle of the spit, in four feet, surmounted by a Y-shaped beacon, painted red and white in diagonal bands. These, Avlien kept m line about N.W. by W. f W., lead through the deepest of the channel, in not less than 24 feet, from the red cone buoy with staff and ball, till abreast the lightship. "The sandy knoll on the Admiralty charts about three cables north- east of Starling Point, with two fathoms marked on it, has disappeared ; there is now 3^ fathoms in that position. " The knoll, two cables' leng-th south of Tewaewae Point, marked three fathoms, has shoaled up and extended about 1^ cables to the south ; there is only If to 2 fathoms over the whole area. A chequered buoy, black and Avhite, has been placed on its north-west end, and a red buoy on its south- east, both in three fathoms. When entering by the w^est channel the buoys, must be left on the starboard hand, and on the port when entering by the north channel. "There is not less than three fathoms to the south-east of the knoll. BEETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 161 within a line between the outer red buoy in the west channel and the inner black buoy in the north channel.— THOMAS THOMSON, Harbourmaster. ♦' Blutt; 8tli March, 1880." The best time for a large steamer or a sailing vessel with a fair wind to enter is at high water or first quarter ebb ; but sailing vessels during westerly winds should be at the heads at half flood. No information has been received as to the position of the buoys. The Bluff or western shore must be kept on board within less than two cables by vessels coming from the westward, as an extensive bank with shoal water lies off' the entrance, leaving a passage of one-third of a mile only between its western end and the Bluft' coast, with from five to nine fathoms water. Anchorage off Starling in westerly or northerly winds is safe and convenient ; but with strong southerly winds a vessel should run higher up. Large vessels intending to make any stay should anchor one mile above Starling Point, within 1-^ cables of the western shore, in four fathoms. ^ After passing this point a mid-channel course may be steered between the • two entrance points. There is a patch of rocks in the narrowest part of the channel, more than a cable from the western shore. The line of shoal water on either side is marked by kelp, which, however, during the strength of the tide is run under. The upper anchorage is secure in all winds. Dog" Island lies 2^ miles S.E. by E. from the entrance of Bluff Har- bour. It is low, and three quarters of a mile in extent. Tlie sea breaks heavily for some distance oft" its northern and eastern sides. There are two sunken rocks near Dog Island. One lies a quarter of a mile from the west end of the island, with the lighthouse bearing S.E., and has only two feet on it at low- water springs. The other lies a quarter of a mile from the east end of the island, with the lighthouse bearing W. by S., and is awash at low- water springs. Captain Thomson also reports seeing breakers in several {daces from one to three miles north-eastward of Dog Island. Until this ocality has been surveyed, vessels should approach it with caution. Light.— A lighthouse is erected on Dog Island, showing a revolving' white liglit, attaining its greatest brilliancy every half minute. It is 150 feet above the sea, and in clear weather should be seen 18 miles. The tower is of gray stone, 118 feet high from base to vane. From the Bluff, the coast trends N.W. by W. 8 miles, to Steep Head, with two rocky bights. Steep Head is a black, cliify headland, with a rocky islet off it, and forms the southern entrance point of New River. New River — see plan — [Orete) is accessible in moderate weather, at high water, for vessels drawing 13 to 15 feet water ; but from the exposed and shifting nature of the bar, and channel within, as also the rapid tides, it is essential that a stranger should be guided by the information obtained from the signal station. A semaphore arm on the mast is used. The south or outer entrance point is well marked by Steep Head and Point Islet ; the northern is low and sandy. A shifting bar, with 9 and 10 feet at low and 16 feet at high-water ordinary springs, runs across from Steep Head to an extensive bank of sand, extending from the North Point, which covers at half tide ; the bar is narrow, and the water deepens within to four and five fathoms, till the Bombay Rock — four feet above water — is reached. Directions. — Vessels bound for New River should not approach to within ^ of a mile westward of Point Island, as a sunken rock lies some two cables oft' it in that direction (see chart), tlien steer for a spiral-shaped black buoy outside the bar, in six fathoms, bearing from the north end of the island north, half a mile. As the buoy is approached the leading zvhite beacons will come on, bearing E. | S., keep them in one (leaving the black buoy on the port hand) to cross tlie bar, its breadth is al)Out a cable, inside in four fathoms is a spiral-shaped xvhite buoy marking the south side of the channel ; keep between the white buoy on the starboard, and black on the north side. " A sunken rock— Guiding Star Rock— with five feet on it at low water springs, lies two cables S.W. ^ S. from Bombay Rock. Abreast it a Tvkite buoy is placed, which shoiild be passed on the starboard hand going in. If the buoy be away, do not biing Bombay Rock to bear the northward of N.E., till passed." — Wellington Almanac. m BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. The Bombay Rock is 1^ miles inside Steep Head ; the width of the river here is from three to four cables. The general course is E. ^ N. gradually hauling up N.E. as the rock is approached ; passing north of it, anchorage may be had in three fathoms at low water, a long cable from the northern shore, with the low sand hills of the north entrance point hearing W.N. W. Compared with the Bluff Harbour as a port for shipping, it has the advantage of access to the interior, while the tides are not nearly so strong ; the Bluff, however, is a better port, and being without a bar, is accessible for vessels of any tonnage. Invercargill, on the plains of the Bluff, is eight miles within the entrance of New River, and is rapidly rising in importance. The Coast ^Westward of New River trends in a long sandy beach to the north-west, 15 miles, when it curves round to Howell Point, forming a shallow bay Avithin it, in which, a mile and a half north-west of the point, is the entrance of Jacob's River, the bar of which is nearly dry at low water ; but vessels of seven or eight feet draught enter at high water. There is anchorage in Howell Road one mile off the river's mouth, where vessels may wait for the tide, to enter, but should not lie in southerly or easterly winds. From Howell Point the coast trends W. by S. ^ S. 10 miles to a project- ing rocky point (Wakaputa). Midway between, at the western end of a sandy bay, a small stream runs down, with a boat harbour at its mouth. From Wakaputa, a rocky and indented coast trends north-west six miles to Pallia Point, the eastern extreme of Tewaewae Bay. Dangers. — The northern shore of Foveaux Strait, from New River to Pahia Point, a distance of 25 miles, is fronted with numerous detached reefs and rocks, in some cases as far as eight miles from the coast. Centre Island, which lies nearly at their outer or southern boundary, is a good guide for avoiding them. Centre Island is of triangular shape, moderately high, and three- quarters of a mile long. It lies four miles south-east from Wakaputa Point, and W. I N. 22 miles from the Bluff, and has a sunken rock (the Hapuka) a little more than one mile south-west of its centre. Midway between it and Wakaputa Point are two extensive reefs awash, with a high rock on the east end of the southernmost one. A Jixed white light (seaward of dangers, excepting the Hapuka Rock), 265 feet above the sea, is shown from a white tower 20 feet high, on the southern extremity of Centre Island, as follows, viz. (the bearings are towards the light) : — Whiteixovii. N. 78 W., round north- ward, to S. 82 E. ; AW from S. 82 E. to S. 54 E. (over Pahia Point) ; then obscured to S. 4 E., when again Red to N. 78 W., when it intersects with the White light as above. The White light should be seen in clear weather 22 miles. Its intersection with the red arcs leads southward of the Escape Reefs to the eastward and the Fish Reef to the westward of Centre Island. Vessels should therefore be careful to keep well within the White light when in their vicinity. Fish Reef lies three miles south-westward of Wakaputa Point, and A\ miles W. by N. of Centre Island. Is an extensive patch, and breaks. It has 26 fathoms close outside it. Escape Reefs, the most southerly of the many dangers on this coast, are four miles eastward of Centre Island. They are two detached reefs lying W. by N. and E. by S. of each other, and If miles apart. Each has a solitary rock about 20 feet above the sea. The eastern reef is four miles E. by S. from Centre Island, north 12 miles from the north point of Stewart Island, S. by W. \ W\ 7i miles from Howell Point, and W. f N. 18 miles from the Bluff. N.N.E., about one mile from each of the Escape Reefs, lie two other reefs awash. Pig" Island, a low round island, lies 2\ miles S.W. by S. of Howell Point, with a sunken rock half a mile south-eastward of it, and two reefs awash between it and the shore. Half-way Rocks, two rocks standing well out of the water, nearly three-quarters of a mile apart, in a north-west and south-east direction. The south-easternmost bears N.W\ by W. four miles from Steep Head, and is BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 163 3i miles off the Sandy Beach. A mile inshore of them are two other rocks awash, between which and Half-way Rocks are seven fathoms water. Doubtful Rock only breaks in heavy weather. Its exact position is doubtful, but is placed on the chart bearing from Steej) Head of JNew River W. I N. 7f miles; from Howell Point S.S.E. 5^ miles, and from the southernmost of the Escape Reefs N.E. by E. ^ E. four miles. Caution. — There is deep water among and between many of the above dangers. They should be therefore approached with caution, and avoided in thick weather. Vessels are recommended not to pass within the 20-fathom line on this part of the coast, and to keep three miles southward of the Escape Reefs and Centre Island ; and between Wakaputa and Pahia Points not to approach within four miles. Tewaewae Bay, westward of PahiaPoint, isasquare-shaped bay 7miles deep. Sandhill Point, its western extreme, bears W. ^ S. 15 miles from Pahia Point. Several detached rocks and reefs extend one mile off it, at two miles from the shore 16 and 18 fathoms will be found ; two miles northward of this point is Mussel Beach, a small cove off which there is good anchorage in live fathoms, with all westerly winds, even as far round as south-west, but a heavy swell sets in with the wind in a more southerly quarter. There are two rapid barred rivers in the north-west, and north-east comers of the bay. Mid-bay Reef is treacherous, lying in a direct line between the points of Tewaewae Bay, and four miles from Sand-hill Point ; in moderate weather only occasionally shows, and has 12 fathoms all round ; the sound- ings in the bay range from 15 to 5 fathoms, in southerly and heavy south- west gales it breaks all over. Coast from Tewaewae Bay to Puysegur Point.— From Sandhill Point the coast trends a little southward of west, 24 miles to Green Islets, with a low rocky outline. A constant surf breaks on it. Six miles eastward of Green Islets is Patupo, or Big River ; its mouth is fronted with numerous rocks, inside of which is a small place of refuge for sealing boats — Price's boat harbour — Green Islets, a small cluster of that colour with some rocks, fronting the shore, point out the locality. From Green Islets the coast curves back, trending W :|: S. seven miles to Windsor Point, and N. W. ^ W. three miles to Puysegur Point, the south- west extreme of South Island. One-third of a mile off this latter remark- able low sloping projection lies Marshall's Rock ; it is large, flat-topped, and a conspicuous coast feature. Boats pass inside it in tine weather. STEWART ISLAND Possesses, on its eastern and south-east sides, several excellent ports, afford- ing every facility for shipping. The island is of an irregular triangular shape ; its western or longest side runs in a north and south direction 39 miles, its north-east and south- east sides are 33 and 30 miles long ; its greatest breadth is little over 20 miles, it is mountainous and thickly-wooded, with timber adapted to ship-building and other purposes. An irregular ridge of which Mount Anglem, 3,200 feet above the sea, is the highest, runs in an east and west direction near the north coast of the island ; in the centre between the head of Paterson Inlet on the east side and Mason's Bay on the west, rises a remarkable dome-shaped mountain {Rakeahua), 2,110 feet high, which in clear weather may be seen from nearly all points. The south end of the island is also hilly, though not so high as the north. Finger and Lees, bare granitic ?eaks, rising from the flat land north of Port Pegasus, are very remarkable, 'he coasts are studded with numerous islets and rocks, worn and crumbling from the sea which incessantly breaks on them. Saddle Point is a low projecting point, the end of a spur from Mount Anglem, lying three miles south-west of it. From the Bluff it bears S,W. ^ W. 15 miles. It forms the breaking point of the westerly swell in Foveaux Strait ; after rounding this point, however hard it may be blowing from the westward, shelter, with comparative smooth water, is immediately met with. From Saddle Point the coast trends S.E. ^ E. 8^ miles to tlie entrance of |§^ BKETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Port William ; micbvay between, at the northern end of a sandy bay, is a small stream, the Mnrray Kiver, the entrance to which forms a good boat harbour. A clean sandy beach of 1^ miles in extent, with a small portion of level land within, extends to the south-eastAvard of the river. The best anchorage is off the northern end of the l)each, which is in a measure protected from any north-west swell by a projecting rocky head : a vessel, however, should run for Port William, if the wind veers to north-west and blows hard — as it almost invariably will from that quarter,— though a strong north-west wind in the strait is frequently southward of west on the Stewart Island shore. In moderate- weather anchorage may be had along the whole line of coast between Saddle Point and Port Wilii.im, one mile off shore. Gull Rock, a white rock close to the shore, 3J miles north-west of the west head of Port William, forms in appearance the south-east head of Murray Kiver sandy bay. Newton Rock, a dangerous sunken rock, lies E. J N. one and one-tenth miles from Gull Rock, N.W. | W". two and three-tenth miles from the west head of Port William, and a long mile from the nearest land ; it has six feet on it at loAV water, is not marked by either break or tide ripple, and, lying directly in the track of vessels betAveen Saddle Point and Port William, must be carefully avoided. There is a passage of 10 fathoms betAveen it and the shore, and the same depth close round ; small vessels generally pass inside. Leaving Port William, a N.W. ^ N. course leads half a mile outside ; Avhen Gull Rock bears W.S.W. a vessel may haul up for Saddle Point. E. by S. f S.. aV)out 1| miles from NcAvton Rock, and N. by W. ^ W. 1^ miles from the S.E. extreme of the AA'est head of Port William, is a rocky patch Avitli four fathoms Avater on it. Port "William, (see plan) is an excellent little port, and although ajiparently open for a large vessel to anchor in, it is sheltered from easterly winds by the groups of islands and rocks betAveen it and Paterson's inlet ; and is a perfectly secure haven. It may be knoAvn by tlie bearing of the Bluff, Avliich is N.N.E, 16 miles from its Avest head ; it is also W.S.W. six miles from the most northern of the group of islands immediately off it. Approaching from the nortliAvard, a remarkable Avhite sand patch Avill be observed three miles AvestAA^ard of the entrance, or just soutlnvard of Gull Rock. The position of Port W^illiam, Avith regard to the Bluff Harbour, must ahvays render it a port of value. Schooners engaged in Avhaling and sealing make it their head-quarters, and hauling into the northern head of the port are perfectly land-locked ; large vessels lie further out, Avith the Bluff just shut in Avith the entrance point. Pender Rock, the only danger in running into Port William, is a 10 feet rock, three cables E.S.E. from West Head, Avell marked by a long kelp patch, Avhich also serves to break the SAvell Avith easterly winds. Wood and W^ater may be had in abundance from a bay and river at the southern head of the port. Tavo to three miles off the coast from Port William to Paterson Inlet, lie the groups of islands and rocks above mentioned ; there is a good ship channel of 20 fathoms, one mile Avide, betAveen Bench Island— the southern- most — and the groups nortliAvard of it. The smaller islands are barren craggy rocks, Avith strong tides and heavy ripplings among them ; it is not advisable in Avorking to stand close to them. Fish Rock, little more than one mile eastAvard of the east head of Port William, midAvay betAveen it and the groups of islands Avhich lie off, is 30 feet high, Avith deep Avater clo?e to, and tide ripplings generally round it. Horse Shoe and Half Moon Bays, tAvo small bays immediately soutlnvard of Port William, much frequented by Avhalers, afford good anchorage Avith off-shore Avinds in live and six fathoms. Half Moon Bay, the southernmost, has a rock above Avater nearly in the centre, Avith a patch of nine feet a short distance Avitliin it. N.E. by E., nearly three cables from the southern point of Half Moon Bay (Akers Point), is the Barclay Rock, aAvash at Ioav Avater ; there is a passage for small vessels between it and the shore. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 165 Paterson Inlet (see Plan). — The entrance to this spacious port, four miles south-eastward of Port William, lies between Akers and Anglem Points, nearly north-west and south-east, two miles apart. It runs in a westerly direction for a distjince of ten miles, with a width in some parts of more than a league ; bounded on its northern and southern sides by high irregular land ; a flat valley runs through the island from its head, down which the westerly gales rush with great fury ; ships should seek shelter in one of its numerous cov^es rather than anchor in its open waters. Native Island, one mile southward of Akers Point, is almost con- nected with the ujain land by reefs ; it extends to the soutli-east for three- quarters of a mile, and narrows the entrance of the inlet to about the same width. Anglem Point is the north extreme of a remarkable peninsula, three miles long (which protects the inlet from easterly winds) ; it is almost divided in three places by narrow necks of land ; the middle, known as the Old Neck, is merely a low sandy beach. Directions. — Entering Paterson Inlet from northward pass inside the group otf Port William, on either side of Fish Kock Approaching from southward, take either the Carter Passage between Anglem Point and Bench Island — the southernmost of the group, with two remarkable rocks, the Twins, otf its south-east extreme — or Abbot Passage, between Bench Island and Fancy Group ; if the former. Passage Islet, with a reef extending 1^ cables off its eastern end, will be seen in mid-channel, with a deep water channel half a mile wide on either side of it. Between Bench Island and Fancy Group there is a clear channel one mile wide, with from 20 to 24 fathoms water. A reef awash extends north-west from Anglem Point nearly one-third of a mile, with tide ripplings off it ; there is 9 to 13 fathoms in the entrance between it and Native Island ; on the southern side some rocks, awash or marked by kelp, extend nearly a quarter of a mile off the northern coast of the peninsula. Cooper Island lies one mile inside the narrowest part of the entrance ; it is two miles long east and west, and half a mile wide ; two small islets lie off its south-west end, with two detached rocks awash at low water, a short distance westward of them ; also shoal patches a cable oft' its north-west end marked by kelp. Sydney Cove, a sandy bight on the north side of Cooper Island, affords anchorage in nine fathoms for vessels making a short stay, but not desirable in easterly weather. Glory Cove— (see plan) — the most snug and convenient anchorage in Paterson Inlet, on the south-west side of the peninsula, is two miles south- ward of the east end of Cooper Island ; its entrance is four cables wide, the depth within four to six fathoms, good holding ground. This is an excellent place for a ship requiring relit or repairs ; at a point on the western side vessels may be hove down with facility, there being 18 feet at low water close to the beach. Vessels may pass between the east end of Cooper Island and the peninsula, avoiding a shoal marked by kelp, ottthe peninsula side ; this passage is a quarter of a mile wide, with 16 to 20 fathoms water. South-west Bay, south-westward of Glory Cove, nins in a south- westerly direction three miles, with a width of one mile ; the depth is 12 to 14 fathoms, but anchorage may be had in six fathoms near the head ; live islands lie off its Avestern point, narrowing the entrance to half a mile. For two miles above Cooper Island, the inlet is nearly three miles wide, and with 12 to 16 fathoms water ; several islets and rocky patches extend nearly a quarter of a mile off' shore, marked by keli?. Kaipipi Bay on the north side, four miles above Native Island, is a third of a luile wide, with anchorage in five fathoms. Half a mile within it shoals to four fathoms, and shortly afterwards to 10 feet. Westward of Kaipipi Bay the inlet narrows to one mile, with 12 and 10 fathoms water ; two miles above is an extensive bay on the north shore, which at low water dries within the line of its entrance points ; the main arm runs south-west for 2^ miles farther, with a width of half a mile, and from 10 to 6 fathoms, terminating in a shoal creek, which dries a mile and a jee BRETT S >TEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. hatffrom its head, leaving a narrow boat channel of two to three feet at low water. Port Adventure (see plan) is 10 miles sonthward of Paterson Inlet, the coast between is a succession of bold rocky headlands, with occasional sandy beaches, without slielter. East Head, a projecting headland, the eastern point of Stewart Island, is 2^ miles northward of Port Adventure. Two miles oft" the coast the sound- ings range from 20 to 25 fathoms sand, shoaling gradually. The port is small, and open to the eastward, but affords good shelter in all Avesterly winds ; Entrance Island renders the passage narrow for large vessels to work through. Stirling Head, the northern entrance point, is steep and cliffy, with a small islet {fVehi) close oft* it ; the southern entrance point. Shelter Point — formed by a peninsula— has a detached rock awash, nearly a quarter of a mile oft" it. The best passage between Stirling Head and Entrance Island is scarcely four cables wide, with 14 to 20 fathoms, except a patch of 18 feet W. by S. ^ S. two cables from the north point of the island. The passage southward of Entrance Island is the same width, but lias a rock in its centre, with 20 feet, marked by kelp, with deep water on either side. Inside the heads there is a working width of three-quarters of a mile, with 9 to 13 fathoms ; on the south side, a quarter of a mile oft" shore, are several rocky patches, with nine feet on tliem, marked by kelj), Avith deep water between them. 1^ miles within the entrance the harbour terminates in three coves, in the southernmost of which, Oyster Cove, small vessels might lie in safety with all winds. Weka and Wreck Reefs, off the entrance of Port Adventure, are the principal dangers on this part of the coast. Weka, the northernmost, is a quarter of a mile in extent, detached, and covered, always breaks ; it bears from Weka Islet N.E. by E. | E. 1^ miles, from north end of Entrance Island N.E. ^ N. nearly 1| miles. Wreck Reef is also detached, with a rock just above water ; in bad weather it breaks very heavily ; it is E. by S. 2 miles from the east end of Entrance Island, and N.E. ^ N. 3 miles from the outer Breaksea Islet ; there are 29 to 33 fathoms from one to 1^ miles outside them, and 10 fathoms within half a mile of the south end of Wreck Reef. Eroni Shelter Point the coast turns sharply S.W. by W., with a rugged outline ; a group of craggy islands extends a mile and a half southward from the point, the sea constantly breaking over them with great violence. From their proximity to Port Adventure, and fomiing a barrier to the enormous swell which rolls along the south side of the island, they were named the Breaksea Islands. Bruce Reef. — This serious danger, off the south-east extreme of Stewart Island, is described as two low rocks, three to six feet high, close together, on which the sea breaks heavily, and lies in the direct track of vessels closely rounding Stewart Island proceeding to or from the southern ports of New Zealand. Its position is as follows : — 7 1-lOth miles ... E. by N. f N. ... from Owen Island oft* Lords River 5 1-lOth „ ... E. by N. ^ N. ... ,, the extreme of the Breaksea Isles 8i „ ... E. byS. §S. ... „ Wreck Reef off' Port Adventure 7| ,, ... S.E. f E. *.. „ EastHead,northof Port Adventure Soundings have not been obtained in its neighbourhood. The mariner is therefore warned to keep a vigilant look out. Lords River, 3^ miles south-westward of Shelter Point, may be known by a cluster of rocky islands off its eastern head, the coast between which and the Breaksea Islands forms as a bight. This little harbour, a narrow arm of the sea, runs in a W. by N. direction, and is a snug anchorage for a steamer or a small sailing vessel. The entrance is only two cables wide. It is necessary to haul sharp round westward to secure a good berth, a quarter of a mile inside the western head in six fathoms, sand and gravel. Here a vessel may lie perfectly land-locked. Two cables above this anchor- age are two shoal patches marked by kelp. Four fathoms water may be carried one mile above the heads. Boat navigation extends four miles. Port Pegasus (see plan) may be recognised by three bare granite cones (Fraser Peaks), from 1,000 to 1,430 feet high, over the south arm, one BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 167 mile from the west side of SteAvart Island. The main entrance is 17 miles S. W. by W. from Lord's River. The coast between has an irregular rocky outline, with numerous scattered rocks off it. White Rock, three-quarters of a mile oft" shore, is two miles westward of Lords River. Toetoes Bay, a small sandy cove with a boat harbour at its head, is six miles westward of that river, witli a small islet oft* its eastern cliffy head. Black Rock, 20 feet high, about the size of a small vessel, is 1| miles oft" shore, and 10 miles from the main entrance of Port Pegasus. There are 35 to 37 fathoms, sand, from one to three miles oft" this coast. The port is seven miles in extent north-east and south-west, parallel "with the coast, which gives it a broken appearance, from the many passages in : — three islands in the entrance form the same number of ship channels. The main passage, a half mile wide in its narrowest part, lies between Pearl and Anchorage Islands — the north-east and centre islands — with 20 to 24 fathoms, and no dangers. The southern passage between Noble Island — the south-easternmost — and the mainland, in its narrowest part is not over two cables wide with 15 fathoms. The Northern or Whale Passage, little over a cable across, with a depth of five fathoms — lies between the northern shore and Pearl Island. Between Noble and Anchorage Islands there is only a boat passage. Either of the three ship channels may be taken according to circum- stances, though Broad Passage alone is recommended for a vessel of large size to work through. It trends N.W. by N., the South and Whale passage W.N.W. The port is divided into the north and south arms, conected by a nar- row strait — Acheron Anchorage. Main and Whales Passages lead direct to the north arm, and South Passage to the south. In the north arm the depth is inconvenient for anchoring, being from 20 to 25 fathoms, but 12 fathoms may be had just westward of a small island at the north head of the arm, two miles from the entrance. In the south arm anchorage may be had in 12 to 14 fathoms half a mile within South Passage, between Micrometer Rock and Noble Island. There are several coves within which vessels may anchor in 8 to 10 fathoms. Shipbuilders Cove, on the north shore, has some rocks and shoal patches, marked by kelp. Micrometer Rock is a small rock above water in tlie centre of this arm, with a reef extending nearly a cable northward of it. There are also several small islets scattered about, but no dangers not marked with kelp. Acheron Anchoragfe, a narrow strait two cables wide and 1^ miles long, connecting the north and south arms, is formed by the main land and by Noble and Anchorage Islands ; it affords the most convenient and sheltered anchorage in the port, in 9 and 1 1 fathoms, mud ; three small islets, in the eastern entrance (Steamer Pass) narrow it so much as to render it only fit for a steamer or small sailing vessel from that direction ; this entrance is south of the i«lets, with a depth of 10 to 15 fathoms. This anchorage therefore is not generally available for ships entering by Broad Passage, but those entering by south passage with a leading wind, intending to make any stay, should take advantage of it : the western entrance is clear, and two cables across, where ships may anchor in the broad part, in 11 fathoms, well sheltered. Seal Creek, a deep narrow inlet, penetrates in a northerly and then in a westerly direction from the westerly entrance of Acheron's Anchorage. Water. — Port Pegasus abounds in excellent timber for shipbuilding. Fresh water can be obtained from the streams in any of the coves. "W"ilson Bay trends north and south, four miles south-westward from Port Pegasus and two miles north-east of South Cape ; its shores are skirted with rocks, and exposed, with a depth of 14 to 20 fathoms. The southern end of Stewart Island terminates in a block of land four miles wide, the extreme of which, the south-west cape, three miles westward of South Cape, has sunken rocks half a mile off" it ; the coast is high and bold, with a steep and rugged shore. The Traps, two dangerous reefs, lie south-eastward of the south end of Stewart Island. The north Trap Reef covers a space of 2^ miles, with two rocks near either extremity, three to four feet high, resembling a boat i6d BEETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. bottom up : the centre of the reef bears from South Cape, E. by S. 15J miles, and is 11 miles from the nearest land (between Wilson Bay and Port Pegasus), the depth between being 60 fathoms ; two miles westward of this reef there is 23 fathoms. The soutli Trap Reef is nearly two miles in extent, with portions from four to six feet above high water, and heavy breakers about it ; its centre bears from South Cape S.E. by E., 20 miles. These two reefs bear from each other N. 4 W. and S. l E., about nine miles, with 48 fathoms water between.* Captain Fairchild says: — "They are more dangerous than is generally supposed. In bad weather breakers have been seen eastward of that shewn in chart. Vessels should give them a wide berth, as the tides are strong, and the soundings not reliable." South West Coast.— The south-western side of Stewart Island is fronted by a group of rocky islands ; the most outlying, Wedge Island, one mile long, is six miles from tlie land ; they are all similar in feature, their western faces, steep cliffs, from 300 to 400 feet high, sloping to their east, where boat harbours are generally found. In the passages among these islands the tides run with great velocity, rendering them hazardous to attempt. The northernmost, Moggy Isle, lies five miles N.N.E. from Wedge Island. Port Easy, a confined anchorage in five fathoms, occasionally fre- quented by sealers, lies nine miles northward of South-west Cape ; its entrance, north and soutli, is about a quarter of a mile wide. Two small islets. The Brothers, lie two miles westward of it, and the same distance liorth a rocky cluster of four islands (Boat Group), extend from the coast three miles south-west and serve in some manner to break the sea. Between Port Easy and Mason Bay, 15 miles, there is no shelter ; the coast is irregular, with high rugged cliffs, on which a heavy westerly sea or swell constantly breaks. A deep bight runs in three miles southward of Mason Bay, where boats may obtain shelter by hauling up inside the rocky- ledges at its head. Mason Bay, a peculiar low sandy feature on this wild west coast, has a sandy beach five miles long, with wooded flats at the base of the mountain ranges. There is anchorage in its southern part in three to four fathoms, protected from west and north-west winds by the Ernest Isles, two jutting red clitty faced islands close together, with a boat passage between ; the South Island is connected at low water with the main by a sandy neck. A heavy sea rolls into the bay from the northward, but small vessels can lay here well sheltered ; in case of emergency a large vessel, by getting close to the Ernest Isles, will be in a secure anchorage. Guide Rock, above water, lies half a mile W. by S. from the north end of North Ernest Island, and also a rock nearly awash two cables west- ward of its south-west end. Look-out-for Reef, a dangerous patch, over half a mile in extent, nearly awash, lies N.N.W. 2^ miles from the north end of the same island, with a clear deep channel between. On the same bearing, a little over three miles from this reef, is a shoal, which only breaks occasionally, with 25 fathoms between. Codfish Island lies nine miles N.N.W. of Ernest Island and 4^ miles B.S.W. from the Rugged Isles (off' the north-west extreme of Stewart Island). It is three miles long north-west and south-east, and two miles across, moderately high, level-topped, with a small stony eminence near its centre ; between it and Stewart Island is a passage nearly two miles wide, with seven and eight fathoms ; High Rock lies in its centre. Sealers Bay is a confined anchorage on its north-east side, well sheltered from westerly winds, in six to eight fathoms. The western side is high rugged clitt" rocks and foul ground extends one mile off' it ; two miles off" there is 30 to 36 fathoms, sand and gravel. On the coast of Stewart Island, fronting Sealers Bay is a remarkable * The ordinary north-east sea breezes of the east coast appear to be lost about the South Trap Reef, being met by the N.N.W. wind of the west coast ; for this reason vessels bound either way should give the Traps a wide berth.— Commander B. Drury, H.M.S. Pandora. A shoal called the Boomerang Breaker is reported (1862) as lying about N.W. by N., 3^ miles from the South Trap. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 169 castellated peak. The coast southward of this peak to the north end of Mason's Bay, eight miles, is thickly strewed with rocks, extending one mile off shore, on which there is always a heavy swell, and occasionally blind breakers on the foul ground one league oft*. This treacherous sjiace has been the cause of much loss of life to the early sealers in passing it in their boats. Rug'g'ed Isles extend from the north-west point of Stewart Island, a remarkable cluster of high black craggy rocks. Boats seldom venture inside; heavy tide ripplings extend some distance seaward ; there is 24 to 30 fathoms from half to one mile off them ; sailing vessels should not approach within a league of this part of the coast. Cave Point is E.N.E. 3 J miles from Rugged Islands. The "White Rocks, a detached cluster 20 feet high, with a sunken rock outside them to tlie N.W., lie IJ miles N.N.E. from Cave Point. One league eastward of them is Black Rock Point, the north extreme of Stewart Island, just westward of which is a remarkable white sand patch ; thence the coast trends E. by S. 5 miles to Saddle Point. This portion of the coast has a rugged rocky outline Avith occasional shingle beaches ; Mount Anglem and the lofty ridge westward of it send down their steep spurs to the shore. Tides. — The flood tide coming from the southward strikes the south end of Stewart Island and divides, one part running northward along its western side, then eastward and south-eastward through Foveaux Strait ; the other runs north-east along the south-east end of the island, as far as Port Adven- ture, where they meet again and flow eastward. The ebb takes a contraiy direction, splitting near Port Adventure, running north-west, through the strait, and down the west side of the island, and south-west along the south- east side as far as south-west cape. It is H.W. F. & C. at Ports Pegasus and Adventure at llh. 50m. and Oh. 20m. respectively ; at Port William and Paterson Inlet at Oh. 45m. and 111. 10m. ; and Masons Bay at llh. 10m. : springs rise 8, neaps 6 feet. The tides oft' the coast run from ^ to 1^ knots, inside the group oft" Port William and Paterson Inlet from one to three knots, and in the passage between south-west cape and Long Island, four knots during springs. THE SNARES (see Sheet Chart XI.) Are bold and moderately high, destitute of vegetation, and covered by Cape pigeons ; they lie 62 miles S.S.W. of the south-west end of Stewart Island, and extend 4^ miles in a N.E. by E. and S.W. by W. direction ; they are an excellent landmark (which is not what their name implies) from the west- ward, and recommended as a point of departure in passing south of Stewart Island. The north-east or largest island, over one mile long and half a mile wide, rises on the south side perpendicularly to the height of 470 fee t ; the north- east side is less precipitous. Captain Fairchild says, " On tne north side is a small safe harbour, where vessels of 50 tons could be hauled in with lines, and made fast to the trees, and would lay afloat at all times of tide, in perfect safety. Firewood can be obtained here. There are no outlying dangers. 49 fathoms was found within four cables all round ; the western group can only be landed on in very fine weather. " The western portion consists of four islets, two miles south-westward of the large island. A reef, which breaks, lies in the channel between, which it narrows to about IJ miles. 79 fathoms, coral, was found two miles north and south-east of the large island, deepening seaward in every direction, except in a line towards the Trap Rocks, where it gradually decreases to 40 fathoms one mile from the south reef of the latter. The tides about the group are inconsiderable. WEST COAST OF THE SOUTH ISLAND, FROM THE WESTERN ENTRANCE OF FOVEAUX STRAIT TO CAPE FAREWELL. Variation in 1875. Preservation Inlet - 16° 20' E. 1 Arnott Point - 15' 55' E, Cape Foulwind - 15° 20' E. The remarkable sounds or inlets which penetrate the south-western shores of South Island lie between the parallels of 44° and 46° south latitude. M 170 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Tlie precipitous and iron-bound coast line runs in a N.N.E. and S.S.W. direction ; and tlie whole of these sounds, thirteen in number, are included within a space of little over one hundred miles. Their character and features so much resemble each other that it is desirable to describe them generally before entering into a detailed account. Approaching from seaward there is so much sameness in the appearance of the land that unless a vessel knows her position accurately, it is not easy at a distance to distinguish the entrance of one sound from another ; the smaller inlets at a distance of 4 or 5 miles have more the appearance of ravines between the high and rugged mountains than of entrances to harbours ; in moderately clear weather the coast can be made with confidence, and as the entrances are generally equidistant (about eight miles), and all running in an easterly direction, there would be but little danger to be apprehended from a lee shore ; but a fresh or even a strong westerly wind in the offing frequently dies away within a mile of the coast, leaving a vessel at the mercy of a calm and swell ; more- over, there is always an outset, particularly from the smaller sounds, and frequently a draught of wind down their narrow arms, so that unless with a fresli fair gale, which blows right home and up the sounds, sailing vessels ^^dll generally find it a difficult and tedious operation to fetch inside their entrances. The larger ones are in some measure exempt fi-om these inconveniences ; they generally divide into several arms, penetrating in some instances a dis- tance of 20 miles, with a breadth rarely exceeding one mile, and studded ^vith numerous islets. The smaller soxmds generally run in six or eight miles, with a width of about half a mile, and anchorage is seldom to be found except at their inner extremes. The shores rise almost perpendicularly from the water's edge in the im- mediate neighbourhood of the sounds, covered with trees suitable for all purposes ; among them the red pine, which, although heavier and inferior to the kauri, is Avell adapted for masts, and a vessel requiring spars could pro- cure them of any size, up to a sloop of war's lower mast, with little difficulty ; for this purpose the soutliern inlets are preferable. Soundings can rarely be obtained under 80 or 100 fathoms, and frequently at much greater depths ; and the shores, within a few yards, are quite steep- to. Vessels may frequently warp up by laying out lines to the shore : and when a cove is reached where an anchor may be dropped, it mil generally be necessary to secure to the trees also, to prevent being drifted oS' the steep bank. The flaws or squalls frequently blow with great violence off the high land, or down the gullies, during heavy gales outside. Across the entrance of several a narrow belt of soundings from 30 to 50 fathoms will be found, where, under favourable circumstances, a vessel may drop a kedge, and thus prevent being carried out by the ebb ; the flood is but little felt. At daylight is the best time for leaving these anchorages, when a land wind prevails for a few hours ; indeed, unless the wind is blowing directly in, a vessel will seldom have any difficulty in getting to sea. Near the coast a constant current of nearly one mile an hour sets to the south-west. The prevailing winds on this coast are from north-west to south-west, the former frequently bring rain and thick weather, and as the shore is approached veer northward ; south-west winds are fine and clear ; rain is of very fi-equent occurrence, and often lasts for several days. Excellent fish of several kinds are abundant ; crayfish abound in the southern ports, also several species of ducks, pigeons, &c. The sandflies are of a most virulent kind ; among the thick foliage a short distance from the beach they do not penetrate, and invariably leave vessels at dusk, not to re-appear till the following daylight. "A view of the surrounding country, from the summit of one of the mountains bordering the coast of from 4,000 to 5,000 feet elevation, is perhaps one of the most ^rand and magnificent spectacles it is possible to imagine ; and standing on such an elevation rising over tlie south side of Caswell Sound, Cook s description of this region was forcibly recalled to mind. He says, ' a prospect more rude and craggy is rarely to be met with, for inland appeared nothing but the summits of mountains of a stupendous height, and BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 171 consisting of rocks that are totally barren and naked except -where they arei covered with snow.' We conld only compare the scene around ns as far as the eye could reach, north to Milford-haven, south to Dusky Bay, and east- ward inland for a distance of 60 miles, to a vast sea of mountains, of every possible variety of shape and ruggedness, the clouds and mist floated far beneath us, and the harbour appeared no more than an insignificant stream ; the prospect was most bewildering, and even to a practised eye the possibility of recognising any particular mountain, as a point in the survey from a future station, seemed almost hopeless." — Commander (now Admiral) Richards, H.M.S. Acheron. Preservation Inlet, the southern of this series of remarkable sounds, is at the soutli-west extreme of South Island, 80 miles from Port William, Stewart Island, and the same distance from Bluft" Harbour. Its entrance lies between Puysegur Point and Gulches Head, which are 4^ miles distant N.N.W. and S.S.E. The southern point, Puysegur, is a low sloping pro- jection. Light. — A. flashing whiie light, shewing a flash every 10 seconds, 180 feet above the sea, is shewn from a white tower 40 feet high, on Puysegur Point, at the S.W. extremity of South Island, visible all round seaward for 19 miles. Gulches Head (the dividing point also between Preservation and Chalky Inlets) is rugged and cliffy, with rocks above water two cables off, and a sunken rock, detached and breaking, one-third of a mile south of it. Coal Island, 850 feet high, 2^ miles long north and south, and 1^ miles wide, lies between these points, dividing the entrance, the north or main entrance being 1^ miles wide ; the southern, merely a boat channel or refuge for small vessels, is called Otago Retreat. Balleny Reef lies off the main entrance (its nearest point S.S.W., three-quarters of a mile from Gulches Head), partly awash, is \\ miles in extent south-west and north-east, and breaks heavily ; there is a ship channel between it and Gulches Head, nearly half a mile wide — Broke-adrift Passage — with 7 to 12 fathoms, irregular rocky bottom ; unless with a fair wind, vessels are not recommended to take it, and must then be careful to pass outside the sunken rock, one-third of a mile south of Gulches Head. Table Rock, a flat rock 20 feet hi^h, lies W.S.W. 2^ miles from Gulches Head, and N. W. by W. 4 W. one mile from the outer rock of Balleny Reef, with deep water close-to, and a passage between it and the reef. Approaching from southward or eastward. Preservation Inlet will be readily Known, being the first opening seen. From westward, the high white clifls of Chalky Island, at the entrance of the inlet of that name, and two miles westward of Gulches Head, are an excellent guide ; also Treble Mount, 3,380 feet high, making from westward, with two peaked summits, which rises from the centre of the peninsula separating Preservation from Chalky Inlet, is visible a long distance seaward, and bears from the main entrance N.N.E. 7 miles. Entering Preservation Inlet with a north-west wind it always draws to N.N.W. or even more northerly, so that with the current, which sets out and southward ^^dth considerable strength, a dull sailing vessel will rarely fetch in throiigh the entrance, which lies north-east and south-west. The Balleny Reef should therefore be hugged within less than half a mile — its edge is well defined — and Gulches Head be kept pretty close on board (avoiding the sunken rock off it) ; if Coal Island cannot be weathered, a vessel should not stand far over towards it — where the outset is very strong — but keep to the north shore until as high up as Price's Beach, the first sandy beach one mile above Gulches Head ; off which, in Welcome Road, a vessel may anchor in north-west winds, in eight fathoms, three cables from the beach ; but with south-east winds there is always a swell in the outer part of the inlet, until round Cavern Head, three miles E.N.E. from Gulches Head. Sunken Rfef. — Between Gulches and Cavern Heads a bay runs north- ward 1| miles ; two cables within the line of these heads lies a dangerous reef which does not always break ; it bears from the outer end of Price's Beach E. N. E. one and four tenths miles, from Cavern Head W. by S. ^ S. one mile, and from Spit Islet, a high rugged craggy rock connected with the north shore by a sand spit, S. by W. ^ W. half a mile ; it has 17 fathoms MM 172 BKETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. close-to : entering with a leading wind do not stand inside the line between Gulches and Cavern Heads ; working in the passage is three-quarters of a mile wide between Pinnacle Rock, at the north point of Coal Island, and the reef, which bears from it N. W. ^ N. ; when Spit Island bears north a vessel will be inside it ; the depth in the outer part of the inlet is 20 to 16 fathoms until between Cavern Head and Coal Island, when it increases to forty-live fathoms. Cavern Head is a rugged and broken point, on which the swell always breaks, its summit is saddle-shaped ; several rocks above and below water lie westward of it, and a sunken rock 1^ cables W.S.W. from the extreme ; this headland should not be rounded very close, in working a vessel should hot standjso far northward as to shut in the southernmost Cording Islet with i: Cattle Cove, the first sheltered anchorage, lies one mile northward of Cavern Head ; after rounding this head the passage is between the western bore and Cording Islets, in the narrowest part scarcely four cables wide ; the cove is the third bight above Cavern Head, with a small islet (Single Tree Islet) oft' it ; the anchorage is between this islet and the mainland in 10 to 15 fathoms mud, snug and well sheltered. Cording' Islets, a chain of four islets and some smaller rocks, lie north-eastAvard of Cavern Head ; with channels between them through which vessels may pass if necessary, in working up for Cuttle Cove ; when pass northward of the largest islet, one cable from its northern point, as a sunken rock lies two cables north of that point ; with north-west winds it is recom- mended to work up westward of tlie islets. In standing eastward, between the South Cording Islet and Steep-to Island, the Whale Rock must be avoided ; it is awash, with deep water all round, and bears north a quarter of a mile from the north end of Steep-to Island. Round Islet and "Wood Hen Island, eastward of Cording Islets, have no dangers but what are visible, and may be approached close. Steep-to or Crayfish Island is a quarter of a mile northward of the north-east end of Coal Island, and connected with it by a reef with only three feet at low water ; a rocky head projecting from its western side affords shelter for small vessels unable to work up for Cuttle Cove ; anchor as close as possible under the rocky head, about a cable from the shore, in 10 to 6 fathoms. The reef Avliich connects the two islands is only two cables south of the head ; the water shoals suddenly from 33 fathoms to 10 j this small anchorage does not afford shelter for more than one vessel. Isthmus Sound. — The westernmost arm, above Cording Islets, runs in a northerly direction three miles, w^ith a width of half a mile ; and 45 to 25 fathoms water VAdthin a quarter of a mile of its head ; in its central part no bottom was found with 56 fathoms. Useless Bay rnns parallel with Isthmus Sound, one mile eastward, separated from it by a narrow tongue of land. Colt Head, its southern extreme, is E. N. E. 2| miles from Cavern Head. Revolver Bay is immediately opposite Useless Bay, runs in a southerly direction one mile, with a breadth of one-third, and anchorage in 12 fathoms a quarter of a mile from its head. Long Sound extends 14 miles above Colt Head. Having passed which, steer through Narrow Bend, which runs north-eastward two miles, to Sandy Point, on the eastern shore, round which, in Harries Bay, there is anchorage in 15 fathoms, 1^ cables from the beach. From Harries Bay the sound opens out to one mile wide, and trends north-westward for 2^ miles ; thence again north-eastward, with the same width, to Only Isles, on the eastern shore. Above these it narrows to half a mile, and terminates three miles above in Cascade Basin, with a very narrow entrance, in which there is 8 to 10 fathoms. There is a waterfall at the head of the basin. The soundings in Long Sound, unless close to its shore, are very deep. There is 24 fathoms inside Only Isles, On the western shore, three-quarters of a mile, above Trevaccon Head— a high cliffy projection, two miles above the north-west bend— is a small cove, which runs westward a quarter of a BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 173 mile, and nearly a cable wide, with a depth of four fathoms. A vessel might haul into it and secure herself. South Entrance of Preservation Inlet, between the south end of Coal Island and Puysegur Point, may be used with advantage by small vessels not able to work in on account of the current or from other causes. The entrance is narrow ; between a sunken reef lying in the centre and the point of Coal Island it is not more than two cables wide. To take this channel, hug the point of Coal Island as close as possible — within a ship's length. If not able to lay through, drop anchor as soon as under the lee of it, in eight or nine fathoms, and immediately send a hawser to the rocks on the island shore. If blowing too hard to warp further up, the end of a chain should be carried on shore aud secured to the rocks, when she will lie in perfect safety. In a moderate gale a vessel may warp up by the island shore for half a mile, when good anchorage in four fathoms will be found, in perfectly smooth water. A mile within the entrance a bar of sand extends across, witli only six feet at low water. A vessel over that draught must wait for the tide to proceed higher up. When anchored in one of the snug coves of Preservation Inlet, very little idea can be formed of the weather outside ; a boat should always be sent to Cavern Head to observe it before putting to sea. The ebb tide runs out at about one knot. The flood tide is but little felt ; it runs eastward between Gulches Head and Balleny Reef, and sets across the entrance south-east. Supplies. — A stream of fresh water runs into Cuttle Cove ; wood may be cut in any quantity. Pine spars may also be procured with much facility. Fish are abundant, and at the south entrance may be taken with hook and line in almost incredible quantities. Crayfish abound in most of the coves. Chalky or Dark Cloud Inlet (see Plan, Sheet XI.) lies imme- diately north-west of Preservation Inlet. Its entrance is marked by the white clitfs of Chalky Island, which lies in its centre, also by Mount Treble on its eastern side. Cape Providence, its western entrance point, 300 feet high, lies five miles S.S.E. of West Cape, surrounded by reefs and sunken rocks, Avhich extend from it one mile southward. The main arm runs N. by E. 8^ miles from the south-east point of Chalky Island, Avith a breadth of nearly 1^ miles, when it divides ; Edwardson's Sound continuing the northerly trend six miles further, and Cunaris Sound taking an E.N.E. direction, almost the same distance. The principal anchorages are South Port and North Port, the former on the eastern side, four miles above Gulches Head — the latter on the western, six miles from the S.E. end of Chalky Island. Chalky Island and the Passage Islands, immediately northward, lie in the middle of the entrance, with a wide ship channel on eitiier side. The Eastern Passage, between Gulches Head and Chalky Island, is most convenient for vessels from the southward ; Balleny Reef and Table Rock lie across the entrance ; A'essels may enter either between Gulches Head and Balleny Reef, or between Chalky Island and Table Rock, which lies S. ^ W., nearly two miles from tlie south-east end of Chalky Island ; this passage is by far^ the best ; it has 20 to 25 fathoms water, and is free from dangers ; when inside the point of Chalky Island, the widtli of the channel is 1^ miles, the depth from 60 to 70 fathoms ; the Pinnacle Rock and several scattered rocks under water extend a quarter of a mile oft" the N. W. end of the island. Tlie passage between Chalky and Passage Islands is by no means reconmiended. The Western Passage, between Cape Providence and Chalky Island, is best for vessels from the north-west ; with a wind not northward of north- west they would lay through and fetch South Port. In takin^f this passage, the reefs awash and sunken off Cape Providence are to be avoided ; the former extend south three-quarters of a mile ; the latter S.W. ^ S., one mile from Sugar-loaf Rock at the Cape Extreme ; the cape should be given a berth of 1-^ miles until it bears north, when haul up N.E. between the western shore and the islands for three miles, when Return Channel will open out, between the north end of Passage Islands 174 BRETT'S >^EW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. and the south end of Great Islands — which forms North Port, and is more than half a mile in width — with a depth of 22 fathoms ; the south-east point of Great Island should not be approached under a quarter of a mile to avoid Sunk Rock. From the north end of Passage Islands, South Port "bears east, two miles. Sunk Rock, a pinnacle rock with five feet on it at low water, and five to nine fathoms close round, lies one cable southward of Seal Rock at the south point of Great Island. Landing Bay is immediately within Cape Providence ; temporary anchorage may be had at its entrance, in nine fathoms, if necessary, but it shoals suddenly within. Two miles above this bay, is Breaker Point — the western point of the blind entrance to North Port — off Avhich breakers extend half a mile ; vessels should not stand up Blind Entrance, as there are only a few feet Avater a short distance within. South Port (see plan), on the eastern shore of the inlet runs nearly two miles S.E. by S., with a breadth, when inside, of nearly half a mile ; the entrance four miles above Gulches Head, is rendered very narrow by islets and rocks ; the narrowest part is less than a cable in width, so that vessels can only enter with a leading wind, or tow in during a calm. From the western entrance point, two islets (Garden Isles) extend in a northerly direction four cables, which must be passed to the northward, as there is only a boat channel between them and the south shore ; a rock awash lies in the centre of the entrance a long quarter of a mile N.E. by E. from the north point of outer Garden Island ; from the north-east point of inner Garden Island shoal water extends eastward I^ cables, with only six feet water at its outer extreme, marked by kelp ; and from Reef Point, the eastern entrance point, a reef extends towards this six feet patch ; here is the narrowest part of the channel, when through it about a cable the port opens out to a width of half a mile. Vessels may lay securely in Anchorage Cove, on the port hand, imme- diately within Reef Point, in from 14 to 9 fathoms, 1^ cables from the beach ; wood and water may be obtained with facility ; above Anchorage Cove the port narrows to little over three cables, and the water deepens from 15 fathoms to 30 and 36 fathoms. Vessels intending to anchor in South Port, should pass northward of Garden Islands, and of the rock awash at a convenient distance ; then keep the eastern shore on board within a cable ; on nearing Reef Point, look out for the six feet patch, which bears W. ^ N. from it ; if not seen keep within a cable of Reef Point until past that bearing ; in hauling into Anchorage Bay observe that shoal water extends more than a cable soutliward of it. Entering by the western entrance for South Port when Return Channel is open. Stripe Head with its jib-shaped patch, on the eastern shore will be seen, when steer midway between it and Garden Islands, and as before directed. North Port (see plan), on the western side of Chalky Inlet, 5 miles above Cape Providence, lies between Great Island and the main land, which are con- nected by a bank with only one fathom water from about the centre of the island ; the south entrance to this port becomes in consequence a blind one. Little Island lies across the north entrance to North Port. Shfp Entrance is between its south point and the north end of Great Island ; the channel is narrow, little over half a cable wide, with six and seven fathoms ; the shores on both sides being steep-to ; when a cable within the entrance the port opens out to a width of three cables ; the anchorage is in the centre, two cables from Little Island in 14 fathoms, mud, perfectly land-locked ; the port runs westward three-quarters of a mile, with 15 and 18 fathoms water, when it shoals suddenlj^ to two and one fathoms on the bank which connects Great Island with the main. Between Little Island and the north shore is a boat channel. North Port is easy of access with a leading wind, but the entrance lies in a westerly direction, opposed to prevailing winds, and therefore not so con- venient for sailing vessels as South Port ; for a steamer it is certainly preferable. Edwardson Sound, the northern portion of Chalky Inlet, is bounded BKETT'S 2sEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 175 "by steep and nigged ranges, 3,000 to 4,000 feet high ; the depth in its central parts exceeds 1(X) fathoms ; the shores are steep and free from dangers to the head, which terminates in Lake Cove, with moderate depth for anchoring. CUNARIS Sound, the north-east arm of Chalky Inlet, has equally deep water ; its head terminates in two coves, with 15 to 24 fathoms. Small craft harbour islets on the south shore at the entrance ; in a small cove on their southern side, small vessels may anchor in eight fathoms ; there is 25 to 15 fathoms on the south shore in a shingle hay. "West Cape. — From Cape Providence to South Point, the south entrance head of Dusky Sound, is 13 miles N. by W. ^ W. West Cape lies midway between, and projects about half a mile from the general trend. There are no dangers any distance ofi' this coast, vessels may approach it within one mile. At two miles from the shore there is 40 or 50 fathoms. Dusky Sound lies between Five Fingers Point and South Point, iour miles apart. Approaching from southward, Clialkj^ Island is a good guide to the entrance, also West Cape. From northward Five Fingers Point cannot fail to be recognised. It is the south-west extreme of Resolution Island, which separates Dusky from Breaksea Sound. Several high-pointed rocks off its extreme, when viewed from certain situations, give it the appearance of the fingers of a man's hand. The land about the point is the extreme of a narrow peninsula, lying N.N.E. and S.S.W. for seven miles, of moderate and equal height, covered with wood. Dusky Sound runs E.N.E. 22 miles, studded with numerous islands and rocks, but few dangers that are not visible. Anchor Island, 3^ miles long in the direction of the sound, 1,360 feet high, lies immediately within the entrance, surrounded by a labyrinth of small islets. A small harbour (see plan on sheet chart) on its north side, about the cefttre, attbrds secure anchorage, sheltered from northward by the Petrel Islands, immediately off its entrance. Vessels entering the sound northward of Anchor Island with a strong north wind, and unable to work up for Facile Harbour, might find it convenient ; otherwise it is not recom- mended, on account of the difficulty of leaving with the prevailing winds. The passage is on either side of Petrel Islands. Southern Passage. —A vessel may pass on either side Entry Island, a small island a quarter of a mile south-east of the large Petrel. If northward, the south-west end of large Petrel should be kept close on board, to avoid a sunken rock with 13 feet on it at low water, which lies S. by W. one cable from that point; if southward of Entry Island, it must be passed close, to enable a vessel with a northerly wind to weather a rock above water that lies nearly in the middle of the harbour entrance. This rock may be passed on its south side, if necessary ; having passed it, steer south-easterly for the entrance of the harbour, a quarter of a mile distant, and anchor in 16 fathoms, a cable from the shore : the width of the harbour is about one cable. The passage in, northward of Petrel Islands, is the widest, and with a north wind the best ; these islands are bold-to. South-westerly winds roll a heavy sea into the entrance of Dusky Sound, but smooth water is found a short distance within. The principal anchorages in Dusky Sound (see plans on sheet chart) are, Pickersgill Harbour and Cascade Cove on the south side. Facile Harbour and Duck Cove on the north. Directions.— Entering from southward with a leading wind pass about half a mile from the south entrance point, and keep that shore on boai'd at about the same distance, passing southward of all the islets off Anchor Island. 20 to 30 fathoms will be found at the entrance, and until abreast the outer end of the island, when no bottom is obtained at 80 fathoms. A reef above water, or awash, extends J of a mile oft' the south shore, three miles within South Point, just above two small islets. The first indentation is Shelter Cove, three-quarters of a mile above this reef, only fit for boats. Pickersgill Harbour is 5| miles above South Point, and abreast the west end of Indian Island, which is IJ miles long in the direction of the 176 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Sound, and half a mile from the south shore. Crayfish Island lies across the entrance, with a narrow passage between it and the mainland ; the best channel, a cable Avide, is to the eastward, avoiding a half tide rock a short distance from the main shore, and S.S.E. from the east end of Crayfish Island ; by keeping the island on board, this rock will be cleared, within there is anchorage in 15 fathoms, a cable from the shore. Wood and water may be procured here. Cascade Cove, three-quarters of a mile above Pickersgill harbour, ha» two small islands off its entrance ; S.E. from tlieu- south end, midway between them and the shore, is a rock awash ; the cove one-third of a ,mile wide at entrance, with 26 fathoms, runs IJ miles S.W. | S.; good anchorage may be had in 12 to 15 fathoms for several vessels ; the head terminates m a sandy beach, which dries some distance at low water ; through it flows a considerable stieam ; the cascade is on the east side of the entrance. Immediately above Indian Island are Long and Cooper Islands : these three islands form a chain extending nearly to the head of the sordid, with a navigable channel both north and south of them. Long Isliand is seven miles long, and one wide, tapering at either extreme ; its west end is almost connected with the east end of Indian Island by a chain of islets and rocks with no ship channel between ; Cooper Island is 3^ miles long, with a channel between it and Long Island 2J cables wide, and a depth of 36 fathoms. To sail up the sound south of these islands, after passing Pickersgill Harbour, keep soutlnvard of the two small islands off Cascade Cove ; above these islets the channel in some places is not over two cables wide, the depth ranging from 35 to 70 fathoms ; towards the east end of Long Island the channel widens to nearly three-quarters of a mile, until half way along Cooi^er Island, abreast which is a cove on the southern shore, with a depth too great for anchorage. Above this cove the channel again narrows, and between the east end of Cooper Island and the south shore is not over 120 yards across (nine-fathom passage), "with rocks extending from the island. This" channel would generally be found tedious and difficult for a sailing vessel. Captain Garrard, s.s. Albion, reports a sunken rock about 30 yards- from the mainland in the nine-fathom passage between Cooper's Island and the mainland. Captain Fairchild says: "The Garrard Kock is 114 feet from the mainland, and has only one foot on it at low water. Vessels using this passage should be careful to keep in mid-channel between some rocks above water on the Cooper's Island side and the mainland. Four fathoms will be found in mid-channel. " The sound extends 3^ miles above Cooper Island, with a breadth of half a mile, and terminates in two coves. In the northernmost anchorage may be had in 12 fathoms a cable from the sandy beach at its head, through which flow two large and rapid streams. Facile Harbour,* on the north side of Dusky Soimd, is a deep water anchorage, between Parrot and Pigeon ilslands and the eastern shore, its entrance bears N.E. by N. 4 J miles from Five Fingers Point ; vessels bound southward undoubtedly would get easier to sea, with a northerly or north- west wind from it, than from the ports on the southern side. Between Five Fingers Point and Anchor Island there is a clear working width of IJ miles without dangers, the depth 50 to 90 fathoms ; vessels for Facile Harbour with a leading wind, after rounding Five Fingers Point, should keep the northern shore on board within half a mile until abreast Parrot Island four miles from the point ; when the north end of this island is rounded the entrance of the harbour will bear east, 1| miles ; it lies in the north-east bight of the bay, someAvhat less than a cable in width, with a small islet on either side ; there is safe anchorage within, in from 15 to 33 fathoms, and a snug cove in the north-east corner, where the remains of a large ship still exist. In leaving Facile Harbour, it will often be convenient with westerly winds to pass between Parrot and Pigeon Islands ; the channel is scarcely a cable wide, with a depth of from five to nine fathoms in the "^ See plan of Facile Harbour on Admiralty chart, Foveaux Strait to Awarua River, No. 2,589 ; scale, ??i = 0*25, BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 177 narrowest part ; between Pigeon Island and the mainland tliere is only a boat channel. ("Capt. Fairchild reports a ledge of rocks with about nine feet on it, in centre of entrance to cove, on the N.E. side of Facile Harbour, which is dangerous, as the chart shows five fathoms right across the entrance. ") In the bight northward of Facile Harbour are Cormorant and Goose Coves, the former has an easterly trend, and is a fenug anchorage with moderate depth. Goose Cove is a shallow tidal estuary. Duck Cove, easy of access, and a convenient anchorage under any circumstances, lies on the no^-th side of the sound, 3| miles N.E. ^ N. from the north end of Indian Island, is a quarter of a mile wide at its entrance, and runs N. by W. three quarters of a mile, narrowing towards its head to a cable ; mountains rise on either side to nearly 3,000 feet separated by a valley . at its head, through which a large stream runs into the cove. Anchorage in II fathoms, 1^ cables from a boulder beach on the east shore, half a mile within the entrance. ("Captain Fairchild reports a sunken rock on the eastern side with about six feet on it at low water, one-third of a mile W. by N. from Porpoise Rock. ") Vessels for Duck Cove, entering Dusky Sound by the southern passage, should keep the south shore on board, as before directed, until reaching Indian Island, pass a convenient distance along its north side, and steer N.E., for the entrance where there is 30 fathoms decreasing to 15 and 10 at its head. Entering from the northward, after passing Anchor Island, steer through the channel between its eastern end and the main ; there are no dangers but what are visible. Leave Useless Islands on the port hand, pass mid-channel between them and the south-east point of Anchor Island, avoiding the Seal Rocks awash, which lie S. E. by E. one quarter of a mile from the latter point ; when these are passed steer towards the east end of Indian Island, or S.E. by E. ifntil the sound above opens out, when haul up north-east along the north shore, and as before. H. W. F. & C. lOh. 50m., s^jring rise 10 feet, neaps 6 feet. Close off the outer east point of Duck Cove — a prominent point — is the Porpoise Rock, and E.S.E. from it, three-quarters of a mile, on the north coast of Long Island, is Detention Cove, a small nook, with temporary anchorage in 14 fathoms ; from here the sound runs north-east, with depths of 120 and IGO fathoms ; three miles above Poi-poise Rock is the entrance of the arm Avhich leads into Breaksea Sound ; two small islets lie abreast it off the Long Island shore ; within them is a rock awash ; two miles above, in mid-channel, are Shag Isles, whence the sound continues clear along the north shore of Cooper Island to its head, with an average width of two-thirds of a mile, and very deep water. Acheron Passage, connecting Dusky and Breaksea Sounds, runs N. by W. 8 miles, with width of half a mile, between Resolution Island and the mainland. High, precipitous, wooded mountains rise on either side to heights of 3,000 and 4,000 feet. In the middle of the channel there is 200 fathoms, and so perpendicular are the shores that 80 fathoms were found within a few feet of them. A temporary anchorage in a small sandy bight close Avithin Passage Point, the eastern entrance of the arm, with 13 fathoms, will be found, but open to a long reach of the sound to southward, and exposed to south-west winds ; it is therefore not recommended; Another is on Resolution Island, in a bight 2| miles northward of Passage Point, bearing S.W. by S. from south entrance point of Wet Jacket Sound, with 9 to 12 fathoms ; and a vessel may secure to the trees. "Wet Jacket Sound, about half way through this passage, extends six miles E.N.E., with a width of about one-third of a mile. Anchorage may be obtained at its head in from 18 to 10 fathoms. Occasional Cove, on Resolution Island, near the north entrance of the arm, three miles from Wet Jacket Sound, has anchorage in 16 fathoms (with a hawser to the shore), the entrance of Breaksea Sound is just shut in from it. Outer Coast of Resolution Island trends N.N.E., and is lower than the neighbouring land. Two miles northward of Five Fingers Point, ai 178- BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. quarter of a mile offshore, is a small islet, 70 feet high ; half a mile S.W. J S. of the islet is a smaller rock and reef, and half a mile farther in the same direction, a rock Avhich occasionally breaks. These latter dangers extend more than half a mile from the shore, which should not be approached here \vithin half a league. The coast line is now nearly straight for seven miles to Wood Hen Cove, which only shelters boats ; from it the coast rounds away north-east towards Breaksea Sound. Breaksea Sound. — Breaksea Island, off the entrance to the sound, is three miles round, considerably lower than the land of the main, and 12 miles from Five Fingers Point ; the entrance being narrow, with very high land on either side, is not easily distinguished until within a few miles, when Breaksea Island and the smaller islets on the south side of the entrance will be readily made out ; from seaward also, it is remarkable from the comparatively low land southward, the first craggy mountains north of Five Fingers Point rising over its south side. There is a passage on either side of Breaksea Island ; that northward is the best, being one mile wide and free from dangers. If the south channel is taken, pass between three small islands south of Breaksea Island and Gilbert Islands ; this passage is about half a mile wide. A passage between Break- sea Island and the three small islands is not recommended, a long ree! extends from the south side of the former, rendering it very narrow. Gilbert Islands, two distinct groups, over half a mile apart, extend off the south entrance point, with an apparently deep bight between them, which offers no shelter. The only anchorage between them is Stevens Cove, on the mainland just within the eastern group, to enter which pass between the two easternmost ; it is a small place, with a depth of four fathoms, sufficient only to hold one vessel of moderate tonnage by securing to the trees ; sand flies are so numerous that it is scarcely possible to remain on board during the day. One mile above the eastern Gilbert Island, in the middle of the sound, off the arm leading to Dusky Sound, is Entry Island. From it the sound runs north-east eight miles, when it divides into two arms, one continuing to the north-east six miles farther, the other eastward the same distance ; the depth in both is very great. Half a mile above Entry Island 210 fathoms were obtained, three miles above, under a high cliff on the north shore, no less than 284 fathoms ; in the arms it is scarcely less, until at their very extremes, where alone anchorage may be had. On the south side, 2^ miles above Entry Island, inside the Harbour Islands, which extend for three miles along that shore, is the best anchorage, in 12 fathoms, off" a sandy beach, between the outermost island and the main, with excellent shelter ; it may be entered either southward of the first island, or round the north end of the second island ; the latter is the widest and best passage. Within the islands above this the water is too deep for anchorage, as also in First, Second, and Third Coves, on the north side of the sound. DaggS Sound* is 12 miles, N. by E. from Breaksea Sound ; the coast is steep and clifiy, overlooked by high mountain ranges ; midway between, a slight indentation occurs, and a break in the mountains through which flows Coal River. Between which and Breaksea Sound are some high black rocks, one-third of a mile off shore, also smaller scattered rocks, the same distance ofi' the projecting points. A cluster of rocks extend a quarter of a mile oft' the south entrance point ; one mile north of the north entrance head is a remarkable rocky peninsula point. * A remarkable scene occurred during our stay in this sound. Our anchorage was at the head of the northern arm, a cable's length from the shore, in 12 fathoms : the change of the moon brought a N.W. gale, with heavy rain, and in the course of a few hours no less than fourteen magnificent cascades were pom-ingdown the steep sides of the mountains (upwards of 3,000 feet high), by which we were surrounded, bringing with them trees of considerable size, and all other obstructions met with in their passage. The effect was as if a heavy surf were breaking round the vessel ; the mist, floating as low as om' mast-heads, occasionally obscured everything but the summit of the mountains and the foam below, and produced altogether a scene as grand as it is possible to conceive, which lasted without abating in any degree for two days, when the water alongside, which had been as salt as the ocean, was for a considerable depth below the surface perfectly fresh.— Remark Book of Commander G. H. Richards, H.M.S. Acheron, 1851. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 179 The entrance is one mile wide, decreasing within to four cables ; the trend of the sound is E. by S., nearly five miles, when it branches into two arms, one N. by W. for two miles, the other south-easterly the same distance. In the entrance and for 1| miles within there are from 20 to 30 fathoms, sand, but as soon as the channel narrows, the depth increases to 70 and 90 fathoms. A bank nearly in mid-channel, with four fathoms at low water and deep water all round, lies 2| miles within the north entrance point, half a mile above where the channel begins to narrow, rather on the north shore. There is anchorage at the head of the north arm, in 12 to 18 fathoms, two cables from a stony beach, with streams of fresh water nmning through it. The south-east arm runs two miles in that direction, then north-east, terminating in Jacob's Creek, very narrow, with 8 to 12 fathoms in it. Doubtful Sound lies seven miles N. by E. from Daggs Sound, the intervening coast of the same character as that southward ; its entrance, two miles wide, with hi^h mountains on either side, presenting a wide opening seaward, is clearly distinguished from a long distance. Allround Peak and Mount Groznoz, on its northern side, 4,000 to 5,000 feet high, are very striking ; Nea Islets extend southward from the north entrance head ; three cables off the south entrance point are two remarkable peaked rocks, the Hare's Ears. Doubtful Inlet trends E. by S. ^ S. 17 miles, with three arms on its south side extending three to four miles southward ; on the north side Secretary Island, extending ten miles north and south, and five miles in its wddest part, separates the entrance from Thompson Sound, with which it is connected by a short arm eight miles within the entrance. Nea Islands extend south-eastward one mile from the north head, and con- tract the entrance between them and Hare's Ears Rocks to a little over IJ miles, with a depth of 50 to 60 fathoms ; a reef awash extends a quarter of a mile S.W. by S. from the northern Nea Islet. Two miles within Bauza Island, three miles long, lies in the middle of the channel, with deep water on either side, but Gaol Passage on its south side is best ; its average width is less than half-a-mile. The channel north- ward of Bauza Island, at its eastern end, is not over a cable across, the winds are generally unsteady. From the north-west end of Bauza Island a rocky group— Shelter Islands — extend north-west in two parallel lines, with a passage between 1^ cables wide, and a depth of 12 fathoms ; at the south-east end of the northernmost cluster small craft moor in 10 fathoms between them. The passage between Shelter Islands and the northern shore, and between them and Bauza Island is not recommended for large vessels. One-and-a-half miles above Flurry Head (the east point of Bauza Island), is a small anchorage in Blanket Bay, 1^ miles eastward of which is Common Head, the south-eastern extreme of Secretary Island ; between it and Wood Head, a mile to the south-east, is the passage northward to Thompson's Inlet, three-quarters of a mile across, with two small islets on its eastern shore. One mile south-eastward of Flurry Head is First Arm, running nearly three miles S.W., with a width of three cables, and depth of 30 to 50 fathoms, and anchorage in Snug Cove at its head in 12 fathoms, a quarter of a mile from the beach. Smith Sound, the main branch, continues the E.S.E. trend, averages a width of IJ miles, with no spot where a vessel could anchor. Crooked Arm, four miles above First Arm, runs southward 2^ miles, then turns sharp westward an equal distance, with a high precipice on either side its breadth is half a mile ; in Haul-ashore Cove, at its head, is anchor- age in 12 fathoms, three cables off the beach, through which flow large streams. Above Crooked Arm the sound trends more southward ; its width half a mile. On the north shore, 3^ miles above, is a solitary mountain cone, abreast which, in the centre of the channel, is a small round islet. Immediately above on the north shore is Elizabeth Island, with a channel on either side ; and a mile above Elizabeth Island is Deep Cove, its northern side a steep precipice. The Lyvia River runs into its head. There is no ISO*^ BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. anchorage in it. Rolla Island, a small ronnd islet, lies off its south entrance point. Hence Hall's Arm runs S.S.W. four miles. Its entrance, one mile above Rolla Island, between a steep cliff on the western shore and a cliffy peninsular point on the eastern. N.W. by N. two cables from the latter is a reef awash. The width between the entrance points is a quarter of a mile. Within it opens out to three-quarters, with a long beach of sand and shingle on the eastern shore, a cable off which there is no bottom Avith 70 fathoms. Above this the arm narrows gradually to its head, which is within two miles of an arm of Breaksea Sound. In the main arm there is rarely less depth than 120 fathoms, in the smaller branches 40 to 70 fathoms, and the few anchorages mentioned above are not easily found by sailing vessels. Thompson Sound. — The western shore of Secretary Island, forming the coast line between Doubtful and Thompson Sounds, runs N.N.W. eight miles to Colonial Head, the north extreme of the island and south entrance point of the inlet. The main arm trends south-eastward 10 miles to its junction with Doubtful Inlet, when it turns north-eastward for eight miles, thence south- eastward four miles. The entrance, half a mile wide, is free from dangers, with a depth of 75 fathoms. Open Cove is 1^ miles within on the east shore, with 15 to 20 fathoms in it, but exposed to north-west winds. Two miles southward of Open Cove is a projecting peninsula, with a deep indentation on either side of it. Neck Cove, on the north, with several rocks in it, is open and exposed. Deas Cove (see plan), on its south side, though small, is a secure and sheltered anchorage ; it runs N. by E. for three cables, with a width less than one cable ; the depth is from 6 to 16 fathoms. On the west shore the cliffs are steep-to ; the eastern shore shoals for a short distance off. The anchorage, in 10 fathoms, a cable from the sandy beach at the head, is the only convenient one. H.M.S. Acheron secured also with hawsers to the shore. From Deas Cove the average width is three-quarters of a mile to Com- mon Head ; the depth of water is very great. Hence Bradshaw Sound runs N.E. by E. 8 miles, similar in feature to the outer part. McDonald Island lies close off its north shore 1^ miles from the head ; in the bay immediately westward is anchorage in 10 fathoms a quarter of a mile from the shore. "The anchorage inside McDermott's (query, McDonald) Island is 15 fathoms, is good and well sheltered, but not nearly so large as the charts and directory lead one to suppose." — Capt. Simpson, H.M.S. Blanche. Precipice Cove, the head of the sound above McDonald Island, is bounded by high perpendi- cular cliffs ; very close to its head, which terminates in a river, there is 10 fathoms ; from abreast McDonald Cove, Gaer Arm runs south-eastward four miles, with three low islands at its head, outside which it dries at low water ; anchorage may be had in Shoal Cove at its head, in 14 to 6 fathoms, half a mile from the islands. Nancy Sound is three miles from Thompson Sound, is well denoted l^y Turn Peak, a conspicuous sharp-peaked mountain over its northern side 4,120 feet high, which may be distinguished a lon^ distance seaward, and presents the same appearance from any point. Within five or six miles of the port a remarkable reddish patch will be seen on the high land immediately north- ward of the entrance, also a white patch on the lower parts of the cliffs both north and south of the heads, two ragged islets project seaward from the south entrance point 2 cables; Entrance Islet, a flat-topped rock, 50 feet high, lies off the north entrance point ; the channel southward of this rock is not more tlian three cables wide, with a depth of 30 fathoms ; but this bank does not continue sufficiently far within for anchoring. The trend on entering is E. ^ S. for 1| miles, when it expands to a width of three-quarters of a mile, and runs south-eastward nearly five miles, gradually decreasing in width to 3| cables ; the shores steep-to on either side. A small islet lies close off Bend Point, the upper north point of this arm ; half a mile S. by W. | W. from this islet there is anchorage in 15 fathoms in Heel Cove, a hundred yards from the stony beach ; hence the BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 181 sound turns abruptly N.E. "by E. for two miles, with a width of 3 J cables, and terminates in a stony beach, where anchorage may also be had close to tlie shore ; the soundings in this arm are 70 to 30 fathoms j in the outer arm 130 to 90 fathoms. Charles Sound is four miles N.N.E. of Nancy Sound ; on the coast between are one or two boulder beaches. Turn Peak, midway between it and Nancy Sound, is a good guide to the entrance ; from the points to the northward several scattered rocks extend,; one detached is a quarter of a mile from the shore. The trend for four miles is S. E. , with a width of half a mile ; the depths at the entrance are 38 to 55, increasing within to 110 fathoms. Three miles from the entrance, close to the north shore, is a small islet, with a cove within, exposed ancl too small for anchorage ; there is good landing for boats on the upper side of the islet ; one mile above this the sound divides into two arms, one running E. by N., the other S.S.E., each three miles, with an average width of three cables, and depth 30 to 50 fathoms. Eleanor Island, at the entrance of the eastern arm, has a deep channel on either side. Near the head of the southern arm are two small groups of low islands, with three rocks above water eastward of the first group ; these rocks and islets must be passed on their eastern side ; anchorage may be had above the rocks in 14 to 20 fathoms. Vessels are not recommended to run for Charles Sound ; there is no convenient anchorage, and the sounds on either side are to be preferred. Caswell Sound. — The coast between Charles and Caswell Sounds, a distance of three miles, is extremely rugged ; a ridge of high rocks extends three cables off shore midway between. Unlike any other part of this coast, the water is shoal for a short distance off, with irregular bottom. Twenty to thirty fathoms will be found half a mile off, but vessels should not approach nearer than one mile. The entrance is narrowed by an island off the south head, witli a small reef awash off its north end, to 3^ cables between the reef and the north head. Southward of the island is a boat channel, with a sunken rock in its outer entrance. A narrow belt of comparatively shoal water extends partly across the entrance half a mile outside the island, with 20 to 40 fathoms on it ; immediately within there is no bottom at 120 fathoms. The trend is S.E. J S. for If miles from the north head when it turns eastward and increases to the width of one mile ; 2^ miles within, on the south side is Dog Point, whence the sound runs E.S.E. 2^ miles, narrowing gradually to half a mile. The shores are very steep on either side. Close to the north shore, at the head of this reach is Boat Rock, awash at high water ; a shoal patch of sand extends round this rock, on which, just above the rock a vessel may drop her anchor in four fathoms if necessary, but it is very steep. Hence the sound runs easterly three miles ; the best anchorage is H miles above Boat Eock, in a small bight eastward of a wooded islet, detached from the north shore, in 12 fathoms, but a hawser should be carried to the trees on the east point of the cove, to prevent being driven off the steep bank. The depth above Boat Rock is 80 to 20 fathoms ; at its head is a shallow flat. George Sound. — From Caswell Sound an iron-bound coast, broken by two small bights — Two Thumb and Looking-glass Bays — trends N. N. E. ^ E. for 13 miles, to George Sound. Two Thumb Bay, three miles north of Caswell Sound is a mere indentation ; rocks front the shore for three miles northward to Looking-glass Bay, which extends eastward one mile, a quarter of a mile wide at its entrance, but wider within. The depth is nine to seven fathoms, sand, with a round beach at its head of large boulders. It is open to the westward. The Houseroof, a remarkable rock of that shape a short distance off shore, is 2^ miles northward of Looking-glass Bay. From it the coast trends slightly more to the eastward, broken with shingle beaches, for four miles to George Sound. George Sound runs first S.E. ^ S. seven miles, nearly one mile wide. Twenty-two fathoms were found half a mile off the south head, rapidly deepening within to 106 fathoms. Except two small rocky islets on the 182 BBETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. eastern side, two miles witliin the entrance, and a rock awash one mile within the south head, nearly a cable off shore, the shores are free from danger. This sound is easier of access and egress than most. The width is greater, and the winds generally blow with more steadiness up and down it. Anchorage Cove has good anchorage in 15 fathoms on the north shore, six miles within the entrance. With north-west gales a swell sets in, but by hauling over to the north shore and securing to the trees a vessel will lie in smooth water. Its head is a sandy beach, through which flows a rapid river, with two feet on its bar at low water. One mile above, the sound trends E. S. E three miles, and then sends off two arms south-east and south-west, the latter for three miles and the former 1^, with an islet towards the head of each. At the head of the south-east arm is a small cove, and about 200 feet above the level of the sea is an extensive lake, whose superfluous waters cause a considerable outset in the harbour. The depth of water in these arms is 40 to 14 fathoms. George Sound is surrounded by mountains of the most rugged and precipitous character, nearly 5,000 feet high. Bligh Sound is six miles N.E. by N. from George Sound ; the coast is cliffy, slightly indented, and the same character as that already described. Two remarkable mountains, three miles within the north entrance point. Mount Longsight and Table Mountain, the former 4,600 feet high, will point out the entrance from a long distance seaward in clear weather. This sound has three reaches ; the outer, two miles in width at its entrance, runs S.E. by E. 3| miles, narrowing gradually to two cables at Turn-round or entrance point of the second reach. The depth between the heads is from 30 to 40 fathoms, deepening rapidly within. From Turn- round Point the second reach turns sharply S.S.W., 4^ miles, with a width of half a mile and a depth of 70 to 80 fathoms. On the eastern shore of this reach, three-quarters of a mile from its head, is Amazon Cove, a small craft anchorage ; above it, the Third Arm or Bounty Haven turns shai-p to S. S. E. , carrying a widtli of four cables for 1^ miles to its head, where there is good anchorage in 12 fathoms close to a stony flat, through which flows a con- siderable stream ; wild-looking lofty mountains rise abniptly from either shore. From the narrow bends of this sound, it would be diflicult for sailing vessels. Clio Rock, with nine feet, lies in the second reach half-way between Turn-round and Evening Points ; it is the outer rock of a cluster surrounded by very deep water, 2^ cables from a bluff point on the eastern shore of the sound ; between it and the point are two rocks of similar character, with about six feet over them. From the rock Bare Cone bore W.S.W., Turn-round Point N. by E. | E., Evening Point S. | W. Caution. — Mariners are cautioned that Bligh Sound being similar in its features to the other sounds, in having deep soundings close to steep and precipitious shores, that though the existence of detached rocks is considered quite exceptional, still vessels must use due precaution, as similar dangers to the Clio Rock may exist where the present surveys imply the usual deep water. From Bligh Sound to Milford Sound, a distance of sixteen miles, the coast continues its N.E. by N. trend, broken by Little and Poison Bays — both unfit for anchorage — which are three and eight miles respectively from the former sound, the coast between them projecting to the north-west about one mile from the general trend. Milford Sound, the northernmost of the series now described, though comparatively inconsiderable in extent, yet, in remarkable feature and mag- nificent scenery, far surpasses them all. The mountains by Avhich it is sur- rounded are the highest on the coast (Avith the exception of Mount Cook, 120 miles north-eastward). Pembroke Peak, three miles inland, perpetually snow-capped, rises over its northern side to a height of 6,700 feet; Llawrenny Peaks, a remarkable saddle-backed mountain, attain nearly the same eleva- tion on the southern side ; but the most striking features are the remarkable shaped Mitre, rising abruptly to a height of 5,560 feet immediately over the BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 183 south side of the sound ; and a dome-shaped mountain on the opposite shore, nearly bare of vegetation, which from its peculiar colour resembles a huge mountain of metal ; these Alpine features and its narrow entrance, appa- rently still more contracted by the stupendous cliffs which rise perpendicular as a wall from the water's edge to a height of several thousand feet, invest Milford Sound with a character of solemnity and grandeur which description can barely realise. From seaward, the entrance makes as a bay, of which St. Ann's is the south, and Yates the northern point ; they are five miles apart in a N. | E. direction j near St. Ann's Point is a remarkable jib-shaped white stripe. Brig" Rock, 10 feet above water, three-quarters of a mile outside the line of the points, bears N. by W. distant three miles from St. Ann's ; it is one and three-quarters miles from the shore, with a reef encircling it a dis- tance of two cables. Capt. Fairchild says " it lies 1| miles from the shore, and has some dangerous rocks half a mile to the westward of it, which only break in bad weather. " Anita Bay (see plan on sheet chart). — St. Ann's Point is low and rocky ; Fox Point, with a small islet close off it, lies half a mile south-east of it, and immediately round it, in Anita Bay, there is anchorage in 12 to 18 fathoms, with the islet north, about a cable distant. Here a vessel will be sheltered from north-west mnds, but Avith winds from north a swell rolls round the point. From Anita Bay the sound runs funnel-shaped S.E. i E. 1^ miles, when the narrow entrance is reached, it here barely exceeds a quarter of a mile in width, towering perpendicular cliffs rise on either side, tlie soundings in mid-channel being 60 fathoms ; the sound then trends easterly and S.E. by E. 6^ miles between stupendous cliffy walls, the widths varying from one- third to three-quarters or a mile ; a cable from the highest cliffs on the north shore, near a large waterfall, 214 fathoms mud was obtained. Four miles Avithin the entrance, on the north shore, is Harrison Cove, a confined and deep water anchorage, with a steep and winding valley running down from it to Pembroke Peak. Freshwater Basin (see plan on sheet chart), the head of Milford Sound, terminates in two coves or basins separated by a low tongue of wooded land fronted by a steep-to tidal boulder bank. In the eastern (Fresh- water Basin) H.M.S. Acheron moored in 12 fathoms ; it is only 100 yards wide at its entrance, with a bar of 3^ fathoms at low water, opening out within to the width of a cable ; a magnificent waterfall of 700 feet close to the entrance serves as a guide to it. The western cove is larger, with a gi-eater depth of water inside, but its entrance is shallower. (" The available space for anchorage is decidedly less than is shown on sheet 12 ; and the entrance is shoaler, 3^ fathoms at half tide being the greatest depth in the channel. It is, however, the best to be obtained in this sound. — Captain Simpson, H.M.S. Blanche. Coast Northward of Milford Sound.— From Milford Sound to Yates Point, 5 miles N. by W., the high wooded slopes are fronted by sandy or shingle bays, with straggling rocks extending some distance off' the points. The channel within the Brig Rock has not been examined ; vessels are therefore recommended to pass outside ; 20 fathoms, sand and gravel, will be found half a mile from it. From Yates Point the coast trends N. by E. | E. 12 miles to Kaduku river ; two miles northward of Yate's Point, half a mile off shore, is a patch of detached rocks ; again northward are three deej) sandy bays, the middle one of which is Martin's Bay. Martin's Bay, in 44° 20^ S. The Kaduku or HoUyford River, flowing out of Lake Kakapo, runs into this bay, navigable for small vessels into the lake ; there is a perfectly easy pass of only 1,400 feet above the sea between this and the great lake Wakatipa (the north-western extreme of the Otago goldfields). According to the chart rocks project some distance off the point immediately north of the entrance to the river. From the projecting rocky point of Awarua, three miles north of this river, the coast trends N.N.E. 25 miles to Cascade Point, apparently free 181 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. from dangers, excepting the Seal Rocks, a short distance off shore ahout midway between the two points, and a small rocky islet three miles south- ward of Cascade Point half a mile off a sandy beach. The land immediately over the coast is steep, of moderate height, but backed by lofty rugged ranges ; Barn Bay, six miles southward of Cascade Point, has a reinarkable sharp peak over its south point, off which are two barn-shaped islets. Cascade Point is a steep projecting bluff or line of cliffs of moderate height, bare and striped by numerous falls of Avater, visible after rain a considerable distance seaward. Immediately south of these cliffs near the coast is a remarkable dome-shaped mountain, and inland a snow-capped range of great height, with peaks of every variety of shape and ruggedness. From Cascade Point the projecting point of Jackson Bay is N.E. by E. ■J E., 11 i miles ; it is a remarkable point rising boldly from the sea with a low neck, separating it from higher land, readily recognised from any direction ; the coast between it and Cascade Point is a sandy big|it ; that to the eastward a sandy beach 20 miles in extent, with low land a few miles in from it. Soundings. — There are 48 fathoms, rocky bottom, between Cascade Point and Jackson Bay, four miles off shore ; a heavy swell generally sets on this coast, rendering a cautious apf)roach necessary. Jackson Bay, at the south end of the sandy beach just mentioned, is occasionally visited by whale ships fi-om the facility of gaining or leaving the anchorage, as also for chance supplies ; it affords good protection from southerly or westerly winds, and some shelter even as far round as N. N. W. ; between that and N. E. it is perfectly open. Jackson Point must be given a l)erth of half a mile, as several rocks above water and awash extend nearly that distance from it ; on rounding these rocks a small conical islet, with bushes on the summit, will be seen a short distance from the western shore ; the anchorage is in seven fathoms sand, a short half-mile to the S.E. of it. There is no difficulty in quitting Jackson Bay at the commencement of a north-west gale. It would not then be prudent to remain, as in the event of the wind backing round to the north a vessel would be exposed to great risk. Northerly gales* are generally preceded by a swell setting into the bay. Boats can only land on the beacn in moderate weather. To the north- east of the river, two miles from the anchorage, there is always a surf. With the exception of the roadstead under Cape Foulwind in southerly winds Jackson Bay is the northernmost anchorage on this coast, where shelter can be procured for large vessels. Current. — The current which sets southward nearly one mile an hour along the south-west coast of South Island is not much felt northward of Milf ord Sound. Off Jackson Bay it may be said to cease. Coast North-east of Jackson Bay.— From Jackson Bay the general trend of the coast is N. E. ^ N. for 80 miles, as far as Abut Head. The first 20 miles is a nearly straight sandy beach, with two small rivers towards its northern end. Three conical wooded hills rise out of the low land, inland from this beach. The southernmost— the highest — is two miles from the beach, and bears East six miles from the anchorage in Jackson Bay Taumaki, or Open Bay Islets, a small rocky group lying off the coast three miles from the beach, bear from Jackson Point N.E., 13 miles. They are surrounded by sunken rocks, extending nearly three miles south-west, and one mile westward and north-east. Vessels should pass outside this group. Three miles westward of them there are 17 fathoms, increasing to 30 shortly after passing them to the northward. Several dangerous rocks have been discovered in the neigh- * Northern gales generally commence at N.N.E, with clear weather, veering to north-west, with heavy squalls and thick rain. From this point the gale is most severe, and if disposed to last will back round again to north. A shift to the south- west is generally preceded by a lull with heavj^ rain, and at the latter point again blows hard, but the gale is then of short duration, and soon subsides into a moderate breeze, with fine weather. Gales are not so frequent here in summer, though their directions are much the same. South-west and W.S.W. winds then prevail. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 185 "bourliood of these islands, and as coasting steamers frequently pass inside, caution is required in doing so, until the nature and position of the several dangers have been determined by further examination. Anchorage. — The anchorage under Open Bay Islets, as described by Captain Kerley of the Bruce, is sheltered from all quarters, and may be safely used by any vessel. It is under the east side of the main island, from the northern point of which a reef runs some distance towards the mainland, forming an excellent breakwater to a heavy sea from north and north-east. Another reef to the southward breaks the force of a south and south-west sea. A rapid current ran south past the island wliilst the Bruce remained there ; its rate was estimated at between three and four miles an hour.* Haast Biver runs into the sea between Open Bay Islets and Arnott Point ; its entrance, in about 43° 51' S., is navigable for small vessels. Arnott Point and Mount Cook. — Seven miles from the north end of the long sandy beach is Arnott Point, the first j)rojecting cliffy head- land north of Jackson Baj^ with a high conical hill over it ; the great Southern Alps here send their steep spurs down to the coast ; in clear weather the summit of the snow-capped Mount Cook, distant 50 miles, will be seen rising in two distinct peaks 12,000 and 13,200 feet above the sea, with their base generally enveloped in clouds ; ^lis is the highest mountain in New Zealand, and justly bears the great navigator's name. Coast from Arnott Point to Abut Head.— From Arnott Point the coast is cliffy and almost straight for 15 miles to Tititira Head, with scattered rocks extending off the points about one-third of a mile ; the soundings five miles off shore vary from 60 to 46 fathoms, sand ; on the next 18 miles of coast are three sandy bays, their projecting bluft's having the appearance from seaward of islands lying near the coast ; the northernmost, the most extensive, has a remarkable range of turreted parapet land near the coast, its north bluff being a conspicuous yellow cliff. Mount Cook is only distant 18 miles from this part of tlie coast. Abreast these sandy bays the off shore soundings decrease, varying from 46 to 33 fathoms, dark sand and mud, at the distance of 10 miles. Bruce Bayt lies between Makawiho and Heritanewha Points, and resembles Jackson Bay, though smaller. The anchorage, close under the south head, in three fathoms, with hard speckled sand but apparently good holding ground, is well sheltered from southerly winds. The south head is a bold rocky promontory stretching out a mile and a half in a north-west direction, forming the shelter ; in the adjoining bay southward the same headland affords protection from the only winds to which Bruce Bay is exposed. The vicinity of Bruce Bay to Haast Kiver and the gold diggings in that locality renders it an important place of shelter. From yellow Cliffs (Otorokna Point, about 14 miles north-eastward of Bruce Bay,"^ is by the recent surveys in 43° 24' 50" S. The chart gives 43° 26'. See also remarks on page 187 about coast line) ; the coast is a succession of rocky points and bluffs, with occasional sandy beaches between, to Abut Head. Long Point or Kohuamarua Bluff (nine miles S.W. from Abut Head), tapering to the sea, terminates in a low cliffy extreme. White Head, two miles further north, is a bhiff point of that colour. Abut Head is a strikingly bold headland. Eight miles south-west of it is Okarito Lagoon. Okarito Lagoon, with a river of the same name, is a regular tidal harbour, the sea flowing and ebbing with great velocity. The flood runs in one hour after high water in the oiling. The entrance is practicable for vessels of light draught, there being 14 feet over the bar at high-water springs. The present channel runs north- west and south-east. Vessels entering should keep well over to the south shore until abreast the north spit, and then stand straight across for the opposite side to avoid the current setting upon a middle shingle bank. About a quarter of a mile from the entrance the channel is divided by an island into two branches, the northern navigable for nearly two miles, * The information relating to an anchorage under Open Bay Islets is extracted from the Lyttelton Times. t From the authority of Captain C. W. Hope, H.M.S. Brisk. N 186 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. with four to six feet at low water. The southern arm has the same depth for about one-eighth of a mile. The holditifr ground is very bad. and vessels must not trust to their anchors and cables if moored in the tideway. The coast northward of Okarito for six miles is a low sandy bank covered with coarse grass and flax ; half a mile southward is a high rocky headland from which foul bottom apparently extends some distance north-westward. Coast from Abut Head to the N.E.— From Abut Head to Matungitawau Point, N.N.E. ^ E. 60 miles, the coast is for the greater part low and sandy, falling a little back from a straiglit line, with few remarkable features. The mountain ranges, of moderate elevation, recede from 20 to 30 miles from the coast. Cliffy Head.— N.E. I N. 9 miles from Abut Head, is a clifFy projection about three miles in extent, the intervening coast of low cliffs, fronted by a sandy beach. "W"anffanui River is 7^ miles from Abut Head, with a remarkable hill or headliind, close to the coast, over its south bank ; the entrance is very narrow, and unsafe for vessels of any description ; the South Spit overlaps the mouth and runs a considerable distance northward, where, from the coast being rockbound, a vessel endeAvouring to take the bar, and stranding, would be wrecked. Caution. — The coast between Wanganui and Okarito should be approached with caution, as the rocks from the headlands apparently run a considerable distance seaward. Bold Head {Par amata).— 12 miles N.E. of the Cliffy Head is Bold Head, a bluff point, standing out from the low coast on either side of it ; but lying in a recess of the coast, it forms no prominent object from seaward. Hokitika River (see page 38). — The following is furnished by Capt. Turnbull, Harbourmaster :—" It is H.W. F. & C. at lOli. 20m. ; average rise, spring tides 9 feet, neaps 6 feet. The tides on the coast are influenced by the winds : a northerly wind keeps them up and higher than usual, a S.W. wind cuts the tide short. At the flagstaff' on the south side of the town a semaphore is used to guide vessels ; conical moveable beacons to mark the best channel over the bar are shifted to suit the channel ; they are from 20 to 25 feet high, surmounted with a red flag. The beacons on the south side are covered with a white painted cloth ; a black and white chequered strip one foot wide runs down the centre of the front beacon, the back beacon has a black band across, 18 inches wide. When the channel trends southward, or when beacons are required on the North Spit, they will i)e found on the beach facing the town, painted rai to distinguish them from the houses in the background, and when used are also surmounted with red flags. In addition to these beacons, iron rods are used to mark the dif- ferent spits and banks where required along the channel, surmounted Avith red flags on the starboard hand on entering and white on the port. Strangers should pay every attention to the semaphore arm. A flxed white light, 130 feet above the sea, visible in clear weather sixteen miles, is shown from a white tower on the first terrace north of the town, one mile north of the flagstaff. For the convenience of steamers working the bar at night a red light is shown from the back beacon on the South Spit and a white light from the front one ; these in line lead over the bar in the best water ; it is not advisable for strangers to use them at night. Should the channel trend south and the north beacons be required a red light is used on each beacon to distinguish them from the lights in the town. Ex- tensive harbour works — although only partly finished — have already done much toward its improvement, the tidal area having increased over two- thirds during the last t>velve months. Until the works are finished no per- manent sailing directions can be given. " Hokitika Roadstead is exposed to all winds from north to S.W. The best anchorage is in 1 to 15 fathoms, the flagstaff" bearing about E. by S. Shipmasters would do well to keep close to the bar on tide time and also to windward, thereby saving much valuable time when a chance of to wing-in offers. Before and during northerly gales the current runs southward along the coast, and at times has been found setting off shore ; the change of wind BRETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 187 changes the set to N.E. The N.W. sea is felt at Hokitika long before the wind has veered to that point from N.E. ; a lieavy send home is felt, especi- ally with a falling barometer, whilst the wind is blowing strong from W.N.E. Westerly gales rarelj"- blow home, but send a heavy sea on the coast ; a vessel 50 miles off shore would in all probability experience a hard W.N.W. gale, whilst the wind in-shore would be N. N. E. The off-shore ground is the safest at those times. Much lightning seen to S.W. and west, especially in winter, is a sure sign of stormy weather, with very heavy squalls of hail and rain, especially with a low glass. The coast is clear of known outlying dangers. " A constant heavy westerly swell rolls in on this portion of the coast ; the prevailing gales blow from north-west, south-west, and south-east^ enabling vessels to lay Avell off shore and obtain an offing, but masters of vessels should watch the weather carefully, and if threatening, put to sea in ^ood time. The heaviest break is immediately outside the bar, in 2 fathoms water ; the bar is constantly shifting in direction and varying in depth ; after a heavy fresh, the stream of the river runs straight out to sea, and during an interval of moderate or fine weather the sea piles up either the northern or southern spit. (Fresh directions will be necessary when harbour works are completed.) Anchorage. — The best anchorage off" Hokitika is in 15 fathoms, with the flagstaff" bearing E. S. E. , distant 2^ or 3 miles, veering cable to 60 or 70 fathoms ; this is in good holding ground, and a vessel may here ride in safety except with westerly winds. " A green light is shewn at the north end of the west protection w^all, during tide time at ni^lit, while vessels are passing in or out. It has no connection with the beacon lights. " — N.Z. Gazette, 1880. Teremakau River is midway between Grey and Hokitika Kivers. At the present time it empties itself into the sea by two channels, one running northwards, nearly dry at low water, the other in a south-west direction, with five or six feet water in it. ( " There is a dangerous snag in this channel." — "Nelson Almanac," 1880.) Small vessels drawing four or five feet water could cross the bar without incurring greater risk than at either of the Hokitika or Grey Rivers. It is H.W. F. & C. at Teremakau River at 91i. 5om.; mean rise 9 feet. Grey or Mawhera River,* in 42° 26' S., 171° 12' E. (see page 38), runs in an easterly direction about 12 miles, when it divides, one branch taking a northerly and easterly the other a south-easterly direction, com- municating with the Brunner Lakes, whence there is a pass to the Canter- bury Plains. Grey River has a bar at the entrance, which is constantly shifting, rendering tlie navigation entirely dependent on local pilotage. After a heavy fresh, the channel breaks out straight in a westerly direction, safe and easy of access for vessels drawing eight or nine feet of w^ater. In the al)sence of a fresh the channel makes either north or south, but usually to the north, running for a short distance nearly parallel with the coast line. At such times the entrance is far more dangerous than that of Hokitika, because in erossing the bar the sea takes the vessel on the beam when in the heaviest break, and, unless under command with very small helm, she is in danger of being stranded on the beach before getting in a position to keep away for the entrance of the river, which, although deep, is very narrow. "Recent surveys — as far as completed — only embrace the coast from Jackson's Bay (which is correct on the charts) to Grey River. The wliole of the coast line betw- een these points is more or less out in the charts. It may consequently be inferred that the coast lying north of the Grey is to some extent inaccurate. Mariners are therefore Avarned to exercise great care in approaching, or in coasting the land at night. As an additional incentive to caution, it has several times been reported by the commanders of steamers on the coast that it is necessary to steer half a point westward of the courses indicated by the charts, in shaping a course from Perpen- dicular Point to clear Cape Fooulwind. The above notice — published at the request of Commodore Lambert, will affect sheets 13 and 14." — From the -"Wellington Almanac," 1879. "* From the authority of Captain C. W. Hope, H.M.S Brisk. 18^ BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. The following is supplied by Captain Allardyr, Harbourmaster at the Port of Greymouth : — "General Tide and Bar Signals.— White balls, owing to the often changing of the channel, moveable beacons — painted red, surmounted with red flags during the day — are used when best seen and required for crossing the bar. The back beacon has a broad black band across it. For night work with steamers a red light is kept on each beacon. These kept in one lead over the bar in the best water. In day time due attention must be fixed to the semaphore arm. ** Iron rods surmounted with flags are used on the spit ends when required. The red flag must always be kept to the starboard and AA'hite flag to the port hand in entering. "Two stone groins on the south side of the river are in course of erection. At the end of each is exhibited a green light, from dark till daylight. Vessels must pass northward of them. It is H.W. F. & C. at lOh. 15m. a.m. "There is anchorage with good holding ground in 10 to 15 fathoms water, with flagstatt' bearing E. or E. by N. With good ground tackle vessels may ride out a pretty heavy gale. "Awhile light is shown from the flagstaff*, visible five miles in clear weather. " A stone breakwater is in course of erection on the south side of the river. Wlien completed it is expected that there will be 12 to 13 feet on the bar at low water. " The soundings between Abut and Bold Heads, 15 miles off" shore from the former, is 49 fathoms. At 12 miles from the latter, 25 fathoms dark sand ; proceeding northward there are 53 to 22 fathoms six miles off shore until abreast Teremakau River, between which and the Grey, at the same distance oft", are 20 to 17 fathoms. Matungi-Ta"wau Point, four miles N.N.AV. \ W. from Grey River, is a remarbable double bluft' of limestone cliffs, of moderate height, with a sandy cove between. Hence the coast trends N. ^ E. , with cliffy shores and scattered rocks extending in some parts half a mile off sliore. The Paparoa Mountains, a snowy range, in places over 6,000 feet high, four leagues inland, runs parallel with the coast to Cape Foulwind ; nearer the coast is a lower range, remarkable by its irregular outline. Perpendicular Point, and Ti-Miko Cliffs, 16 miles northward of Matungi-Tawau Point, is a bold projection rising abruptly from the sea ; this and the lower range of mountains render this part of the coast very striking. ( ' ' Brighton — Woodpecker Bay — is 20 miles southward of Cape Foulwind. Height, and times of high Avater, same as at Westport. A small river discharges into the bay, used by vessels of light draught in fine weather at spring tides. The Commercial Code is used at the signal station. The bay is exposed from N. to S.S.W., and a heavy sea rolls home with strong winds between those points. " — Nelson Almanac). The next projecting point, a saddle-shaped summit, is 10 miles north- ward, the Five Fingers Rocks standing half a mile off the coast, which is here formed of low terrace land. The highest peak of the snowy range, 6,500 feet high, is 15 miles eastward of this point. Robertson Point, five miles N.N.E. ^ E. from the Five Fin^'ers Rocks, is the termination of the cliffs ; a small river (Browning River) is just northward of it ; here the high land recedes, and the country is low and thickly wooded, with a sandy coastline to Cape Foulwind, distant 10 miles. ("Charleston— Constant Bay— is 11 miles southward of Cape Foulwind, just south of Robertson Point. Range of tide and time of high water same as at Westport. The Commercial Code is used at the flagstaff. The bay is exposed to all winds from S.W. to N.N.W., and a heaAy sea gets up with strong winds from any of these points. Waitakari (or Nile) River is one mile northward of Constant Bay, and is in some measure sheltered by Robertson Point from the S.AV. There is six to seven feet water at the entrance during spring tides. It is seldom used, but is perfectly safe when once inside." — Nelson Almanac, 1880). The Soundings at six miles off", between Matungi-Tawau Point and this cape, vary from 30 to 50 fathoms sand. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 189 Cape Poulwind {Tauranga) is remarkable "by three rocks (the Steeples) which lie off it, also by the coast turning sharply eastward from it. The cape is a low cliffy point, well wooded, rising within to the base of the mountains southward. The coast, 2\ miles southward of the cape, is fronted by rocky islets, within which, in the small sandy bay of Tauranga (Penguin Bay) the sealing boats land. Under Cape Foulwind vessels may find shelter in southerly winds. Light. — A revolving white light, showing a flash every half minute, 190 feet above the sea, and visible 19 miles in clear weather all round sea- ward where the land permits, is shown from a white tower 53 feet high, on Cape Foulwind, and is a good guide for vessels approaching this part of the coast or the Buller. The steeples, three conical rocks, visible 10 or 12 miles, show prominently from southward ; they occupy a space of 1^ miles, and bear N. \ W. from the cape, the northern extreme being 1\ miles from it. Several Emaller rocks awash are scattered within and about them ; the narrow channel between them and the cape is rocky, and not fit for strangers or sailing vessels ; it is seldom taken by the coasting steamers ; the deepest water is between the mid-channel rock (itself or the break always visible) and the cape. Cpast from Cape Poulwind to Rocks Point.— From Cape Foulwind the coast recedes eastward, and forms an extensive bight, of which Kocks Point, N. by E., 54 miles from the Cape, is the nortliern limit ; the depth of the bight from a straight line between the two points is five leagues. Falcon Rock is considered not to exist in the position formerly given, ■ — midway between the Steeples and entrance of Buller liiver ; — the rock sben was probably one of the known outlying dangers a few hundred yards E. by N. from the northern Steeple. It is important that all craft trading to the West Coast rivers should be provided with good hawsers and a spare anchor. Buller or Kawatiri River (see page 38).— The following is supplied by Captain Leech, Harbour Master, Westport, through the Secretary Marine Department :— *' The flagstaff* is in 41° 46' S. and 171" 42' E. The bar bears from the outer or northern Steeple E. f N., distant 5J miles, and the same distance from Cape Foulwind, both of which shelter the roadstead and bar from the south-westerly winds and swell prevalent on this coast. Masters of vessels should be guided by the signals and by the semaphore arm on flagstaff", as a strong current is sometimes felt across the entrance and on the bar, especially with a westerly sea or swell. During the day at tide time a red flag is shown on the leading beacon, which kept in a line with the flagstaff' leads over the bar in the deepest water ; when the river is fairly entered two triangular-shaped white beacons bearing S.E. will be seen, which lead up river in the deepest water to the Stone Groin (where the front beacon stands) one and one-tenth miles inside the bar. During the night at tide-time a red light is shown on the leading beacon, which kept on with the bright light on the flagstaff (the harbour light) leads over the bar, when two red lights on the beacons within will be seen bearing about south-east. Before reaching the Groin two green lights will be seen bearing south-east by south-southerly, which lead up river to the upper wharf, on which the front beacon is placed, surmounted by a circle, the back beacon by a triangle, both painted white ; they mark the channel by day, leading up river from mid-channel, off" the S.W. end of Stone Groin. The Buller is subject to heavy floods which generally occur between October and February inclusive ; only steamers with good power should attempt entering during those periods ; the force of current is met about a mile inside the bar, increasing as the river is ascended. A red flag is shown at the flagstaff in addition to the balls during thick or dirty weather, when the bar is considered safe. The roadstead is open to all winds between N.N.E. and S.W. (west about). The holding ground is good at the anchorage, i.e., with the flagstaff" bearing from south-east by east to south south-east. Masters can choose their own depth according to circumstances, but for riding out a S.W. gale (which is sometimes done) the depth should not exceed ten fathoms. Anchoring in the 190 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. south-Avestern portion of the roadstead nejir the Steeples is not recommended, as the holding-ground is bad. Theflagstaffshoiildbekeptin siglitincaselt might be necessary to communicate with vessels at any time. Sailing vessels should not hang on too long with the wind from seaward, and should get tinder weigh if possible on the ebb, as the flood tide sets on the Steeples. It is H.W. F. and C. on the bar at lOh. 25m. ; springs rise nine feet six inches ; neaps Ave feet six inches. The average depth last year on the bar was nearly thirteen feet at high water springs ; at neaps nearly eleven feet ; the maximum is about fourteen feet at springs, and twelve feet at neaps. With suitable vessels tlie bar is worked without difliculty in favourable weather during the night. The bar changes with floods and westerly gales, the former sending it straight out to the north-west, the latter causing it to trend northward as far as N.N. W. ^ N. During those chanties the depth is not much altered ; as a rule it is deeper after a flood, provided it has not been too heavy." The valley of the Buller forms an extensive gap between the high mountains which bound it, running in a south-easterly direction several miles, and is remarkable from seaward. These snowy ranges extend parallel with the coast three to four leagues nearly to Cape Farewell. From the Buller River the coast, low and wooded, fronted by a naiTOW sandy beach, and intersected by small streams, trends north-east andN.N.E. 23 miles ; nearly in the depth of the bight, the beach is succeeded by a remarkable line of clifl's, which extend 12 miles, with two conspicuous white blufls, visible a long distance from seaward, near their northern extreme. "Ngakawa (chart Nga-kuhu) River is 18 miles north-eastward of the Buller, with 7 to 10 feet on its bar at higli water spring tides ; the rise of tide and time of high water being the same as at Westport. Leading beacons, painted white, mark the channel over tlie bar, and are surmounted by r^/fliigs, when it is safe to enter. The river is navigable for vessels of light draught for only three-quarters of a mile from its mouth. Here a coal seam of good quality crops out on the south bank. The bar is sheltered from southerly winds by Cape Foul wind, but is exposed to all winds from S.W. to N.N.W. Owing to the flatness of the beach, the sea breaks a long way out in bad Weather." — Wellington Almanac, 1879. A railroad is now open for traffic between Westport and Ngakawa, 18§ miles long. Wanganui River is 2^ miles northward of tlie bluffs, at the commence- ment of a sandy beach, which runs in a straight line 14 miles N.N.W. ^ W., Witli three small rivers, INIahana, Karamea, and Parara, near its central part, and a fourth, the Kollahai, at its northern extreme ; near whicli the cliff's again occur, and the coast trends N. by W. | W., 11 miles to Rocks Point, indented by small sandy bays with rocky projections between. •' Mokihinui River, 22 miles N.E. by N. f N. from the Buller ; has 10 to 12 feet on the bar at high water springs. Rise and time of liigh water the same as Westport ; it is exposed to winds from S.W. to N.N.W. There is a coal mine a sliort distance up it. " Karamea River, 35 miles N. by E. f E. of the Buller, has 10 to 12 feet on its bar at liigh water springs ; the rise and time of high water being about the same as AVestport. There is no signal station here. With S.W. and westerly winds there is a heavy sea, which breaks a long way off", owing to the flatness of tlie beach. "The entrance of Wanganui River is well marked by the northern extremity of the high land which forms its south head, as also by the white bluff's. The bar, exceedingly well sheltered from the S.W. by a long reef which extends from the south head westward, is straight, with 11 to 13 feet on it at high water springs. The south side of the river, straight and rock- bound, runs E.S.E. about | of a mile, then trends N.E. and northerly. The north side is a sandy beach. The river is navigable two miles from the entrance for vessels drawing six feet. Shelter can be obtained inside during floods for small vessels. There are no signal stations at either of these rivers." — Wellington Almanac, 1879. Heaphy, or Wakapoai River, whose entrance between two high bluff's sloping to the sea is remarkable, lies 4^ miles south of Rocks Point. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 191 Soundings. — The depth across the entrance of this bight, from Cape Foulwind to abreast the white bluti's, is 30 to 40 fathoms ; it then deepens ; five miles off the cliffy shore, between KoUahai River and Rocks Point, there are no soundings at 50 to 60 fathoms. Rocks Point, with numerous scattered rocks extending half a mile offshore in its neighbourhood, is a bold projection; hence the coast rounds away N.N.E. towards Cape Farewell, 37 miles. Kiourangi Point, with a reef extending from it a short distance south- west, is 11 miles N.N.E. of Rocks Point, with on its northern face a remark- able white stripe, a good sea-mark, visible a long distance. A dangerous rocky shoal (see small plan) extending f of a mile parallel with the coast, and ^ a mile wide, with 3J fatlioms on its shoalest part near the southern end at low water, lies with its S.W. extreme N.W. by N. 4^ miles from Kiourangi Point, and the same distance ofi' the coast abreast, with deep water round it. In heavy weather the sea breaks heavily for a considerable distance, (See footnote below — Stewart Breakers.) A sandy beach now extends northward 13 miles, with occasional cliffy proiections. Towards its north-east extreme is a white patch of sand, just within high-water mark. A shoal bank extends half a mile off its southern end. The entrance of Wanganui Inlet is eight miles north-eastward, with cliffy points intervening. Stewart Breaker. — A sunken rock has been reported, lying eight miles oft" nearly midway between Cape Farewell and Rocks Point. It was seen breaking heavily, after a south-west gale. The following bearings were taken near the breakers : — Cape Farewell high land N.E. by E., Rocks Point South. The remarkable landslip north of Kiourangi Point S.S.E. This position, from whicli breakers extended S.W. 2^ miles, places the danger approximately in 40° 39' S., and 172° 13' W.* "Wanganui Inlet. — The entrance shows distinctly from seaward. The points arc high, sloping gradually to the sea, with higher land behind. The south head, after sloping, rises again in a cone from the water's edge, as a yellowish cliffy projection. Mount Burnett, or Knuckle Hill, with its double sunmiit, bears E.S.E. six miles from the entrance. The bar stretches across from the heads. It has six feet at low water, and may be crossed at high water by vessels drawing 10 to 12 feet. The deepest channel is close along tlie southern shore. When inside the water deepens to three and four fathoms. The inlet runs S.W. by S, little over one mile, then separates into two arms, north-east and south-west, or parallel with the coast. The north-east arm almost dries at low water. Anchorage in four fathoms one mile within the entrance close on the southern shore. To enter, moderate weather and a leading wind is necessary. South-west winds blow down the southern arm, and generally right out of the harbour. The bar has not been closely examined, but vessels of the above draught have crossed it. The Coast to Cape Farewell from Wanganui Inlet trends N.E. iN. eight miles. Curious Cliff, 3^ miles south-westward from Cape Farewell, is a remarkable piece of table land, its northern end having fallen away. Close in-shore off it is a small x>erforated rock, Archway Islet. Several scattered rocks lie off the adjacent coast. From soutliward, the land about Cape Farewell has a hummocky appear- ance, of moderate height, tlie extreme falling down in broken cliffs, where it joins Farewell Spit. At the proper navigating distance, three miles off, the soundings are 36 to 40 fathoms. When Cape Farewell bears south three miles, an E. by N. ^ N. course * This position is about 6 miles N. J W. of the place where the Stewart Breakers are laid down in the Admiralty Chai't, Sheet VII., corrected to 1876, which latter position is that j?iven of the Kiourangi Shoal (see above) by Captain Johnson, Stewart Breakers (chart) and Kiourangi Shoal (Johnson) are therefore identical : but as the cross bearings given in the text (" New Zealand Pilot," 1875) seem to indicate accurate observation, and, as no "Gazette" notice to mariners can be found on the subject, it is obvious that caution will have to be exercised when in this neighbourhood. 192 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. leads nearly four miles outside Farewell Spit, in 29 to 34 fathoms, fine gray- sand ; the higli sand mound, near the centre of the spit, will be seen in pass- ing at this distance, as also the lighthouse, and from aloft, the bushes on its eastern high- water extreme. South-west winds on this part of the coast generally veer westward, and draw into Cook Strait after passing Cape Farewell. For clearing the end of Farewell Spit see pp. 122-3. On the outer coast of Cape Farewell it is H.W. F. & C. at9h. Om. ; the Hood stream commences at 6h. Om., and runs south-west, parallel with the coast as far as Wangauui Inlet at from ^ to tAVO knots. OUTLYING ISLANDS SOUTH AND EAST OF NEW ZEALAND, VIZ., AUCKLAND, CAMPBELL, ANTIPODES, BOUNTY, AND THE CHATHAM ISLANDS. AUCKLAND ISLANDS. Variation in 1875. Auckland Islands - 17° iO' East | Chatham Islands - 15° 0' East. The Auckland Islands, southward of New Zealand, lie between 50° 30' and 51° S., and 165° 55' and 166° 15' E., consist of one large and several smaller islands, separated by narrow channels, and extend 30 miles north and south, by nearly 15 miles in breadth. Their height ranges from 950 feet at Hooker Hills in the north to 2,000 feet at Adams Island on the south. The east side of the main island is deeply indented, but the western side is unbroken, having no opening but the narrow channel between it and Adams Island, fit only for small steam vessels, the coast line backed by hills from 600 to 1,500 feet high.* Depots of provisions have been established by the Colonial Government for the''D(5ne1fror*sIiip-Wrecked people at the following places : south side of Erebus Cove ; sandy bay on Enderby Island ; Saddle or Norman Inlet ; and at Carnley Harbour. Abundance of fish, mostly rojcj^cod, may be caught by hook and line from the shore, generally in places Avliere there is seaweed. There is a large bed of cockles at the head of Laurie Harbour (Port Ross), the shells of which are from 1^ to 2 inches in diameter. They are about two inches below the surface at low Avater. Rabbits and a number of cattle were on Enderby Island when visited by H.M.S. Cossack in 1873. /^ The climate, though boisterous and subject to much rain, is healthy. [ The temperature is equable, th e^snow never lying more than three days on Vthe ground, except on the sumnut ot the hills. r- The Avinds are violent and of long duration ; the gales are mostly from / the north-west, but sometimes from the eastward, and unusually strong. I They commence at North with a falling barometer, veer gradually to West ^and W.S.W., and at times blow most violently ; when the barometer begins to rise the gale ceases at South or S.S.E. The Avhiiling season is in April and May. Bristow Rock is an ofF-lying danger northward of Enderby Island directly in the track of vessels rounding the north end of the group, on which the sea sometimes breaks violently, with probably not over five or six feet water on it. The position given by H.M.S. Fantome in 1852 is : — From the north-east end of Auckland Island the rock bore N. by E. — Mount Eden being also in line— from the highest part or centre of Enderby Island N. by W. J W". ; and from the north-east point of Enderby Island N.N.W. i W., which would place it about 3 J miles from Enderby Island, a position which was only considered approximate. H.M.S. Cossack, in 1873, from tAvo different sets of bearings, places the rock a little over 24 miles from the north extreme of Enderby Island, and for the present this position is given on the chart ; but three days afterAvards The excellent description of these islands given in the "Ncav Zealand Pilot," is of necessity left out. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 193 the Cossack steamed along the north shore of the ishind, at a distance of about 1^ miles between it and the rock, when nothing was seen of it, which fully accounts for its not being seen by several other ships j it is therefore necessary to exercise great caution in this locality. The tide rips off the north point of Enderby Island extend at times to a distance of 12 miles to; the N.E., and to a stranger have an alarming appear- ance. The flood sets N.N.E., the ebb to the southward. North-west Cape is a remarkable bold high headland, with a rocky islet and a conical rock off it j eastward of the cape is a dark looking pro- montory, Black Head, The West Coast is one continuous perpendicular wall from 200 to 800 feet high. Disappointment Island, small in extent, high, rocky, and inacces- ble, with its outlying rocks, lies off the middle of a bij'ht two miles from shore, and appears from the northward like three sugar loaf mountains. A strong current sets between the islands and the main ; the passage — with 40 fathoms in it — is unsafe even in fine weather. Port Ross*, at the north-eastern end of the group, between Enderby and Ewing Islands, is one mile wide and runs nearly seven miles to the south-westward, narrowing to a tliird of a mile at its head, with from 20 fathoms water at the entrance to 3^ fathoms at its inner part. Its shores are indented with several bays. Enderby Island, the north-eastern of the group, is 2^ miles east and west, of no great elevation, and well supplied with water. Between it and the main coast is Rose Island, separated by narrow boat channels, through which the tide sets strongly, the sea occasionally breaking right across. Sandy Bay, on the south side of Enderby Island, Ig miles from its east extreme, is a temporary anchorage, protected from all winds except those from the south-eastward ; holding ground is tenacious clay. Deas Head, three-quarters of a mile S.W. of Rose Island, is formed of basaltic columns 300 feet high, which are highly magnetic. Terror Cove is three-quarters of a mile southward of Deas Head. Erebus Cove is south of Terror Cove, separated by a projecting point. On its southern shore the beach is good for landing, the shore level and suitable for wharfage, etc. Vessels may lie in these coves nearly land-locked. Water and wood are in abundance : winged game, etc., plentiful. Tides.— It is H.W., F. and C, in Terror Cove at 12h.; springs rise about three feet, with an irregular movement near high water for about an hour. Shoe Island, in the middle of the harbour, off Terror Cove, is a cable in length, bold, highly magnetic, and steep-to. Laurie Harbour, at the head of Port Ross, is two miles long W.S.W. and E. N. E. , with an average breadth of four cables. Shallow water and weeds extend eastward a lon^' quarter of a mile from the point which separates the harbour from Erebus Cove, to which a berth should be given. It is entirely landlocked ; there is a lar^e stream at its head ; the land birds are excellent eatingj especially the haw'ks. DuNDAS AND Green Islets, two small islets 1^ miles apart, connected by a reef, lie If miles south-east of Ewing Island on the south side of entrance to Port Ross. TJie reef, covered in part at high water, generally shows by the breakers which extend a mile north-eastward of tlie low outer islet. This danger should be carefully avoided, as in thick weather a vessel might be in the breakers without seeing the land. Adams Island, the southernmost of the Auckland group, 2,000 feet high, faces the south end of Auckland or main Island, forming between a channel the breadth of the islands, called Adams Strait or Carnley Harbour. Its western entrance is very narrow, not over 100 yards wide, with a rocky ridge of 3^ fathoms (at half ebb) across it, deepening suddenly seaward to 13 fathoms, causing a dangerous rip, inside the water is smooth, it is only fit for small steamers ; there is a large whirlpool in the narrowest part. North Arm and Musgrave Harbour.— The eastern entrance to Adams * See plan on Admiralty Chart, No. 1114, 194 BKETT'S JJEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Strait, five miles N.E. of South Cape of Adams Island, is formed by two bluff points ; tlience the strait runs westward four miles to the entrance of an irregular inlet which continues northward and nortli-west to Musgrave Harbour, and to the North Arm ; the latter, a fine basin with room for several vessels, its head about five miles from mouth of inlet. The water in the strait and inlet is deep, but with anchorage in the harbours in four fatlioms clay. In bad weather the wind comes down over the high land in severe squalls and whirlwinds, dangerous for boats under sail. Musgrave Inlet, on the east side of Auckland Island, is five miles deep westward and W.S.W. to its head. Its entrance is on the nortli side of a point, with a large black fiat rock ott" it, 10 feet above water. Under the round bluff' head, on the south side, is a nine-fathom patch marked by kelp, two miles witliin a bank runs straight across the inlet with six fathoms within 50 yards of the south side, increasing to eight fathoms the same distance from the north side, marked by kelp ; at the head of the inlet is anchorage in 12 to 7 fathoms, landlocked, the breadth across being two cables. Hanfield Inlet, south-west of Musgi-ave Inlet, has two arms ; it is open to the north-east, but the wind rarely blows from this quarter. There is a magnificent waterfall in the southern arm. •Smith Harbour, north of Musgrave Inlet, runs westward and then southward, forming a good harbour for a steamer or small vessel, landlocked and safe, with from nine to tln-ee fathoms. A fine stream of water runs into it. North wjird of Smith Harbour are Norman, Griffith, Granger, and Chambres Inlets, all more or less open to the eastward. CAMPBELL ISLAND. » Variation in 1874. 18* 35' East. Campbell Island is 30 miles round, mountainous, and has several good harbours. Perseverance Harbour.* — The entrance is half a mile wide, it runs westward three miles, then south-westward to its head. The shores, are steep and rise abruptly to 800 and 900 feet. Lyall Hill, on its north side, is 1,500 feet high. Sudden and violent ruslies of wind is a characteristic Ehenomenon of all the islands about this latitude. The inner part of this arbour is completely landlocked, with room for a large number of ships. The shores are free from danger excepting Shoal Point, on the south shore, at the turn to the inner part of the harbour. Water is abundant. Geese and duck were seen at tlie head of the harbour, but no pigs, in 1874. Shoal Point is in lat. 42° 33' 26" S., long. 169" 8' 41" east. Tides. — It is H.W. F. & C. in Perseverance Harbour at 12h. ; spring* rise 3^ feet. Off the west side of the island are three large rocks, the north-west one is 300 feet high; close to it, soutliward, is another 200 feet, much smaller; the two other high rocks are each alx)ut 300 feet high. Oft" the south-west point of the island is a larger rock or islet 600 feet high ; inside these are a number of smaller rocks, one very conspicuous north-westward of south-west islet, resembling a cloaked figure on a pedestal. Monument Harbour is an indentation in the land near it ; no outlying dangers were seen from two miles off" them. Tlie south part of the island is much higher than the north ; the south- west point is higli, ending in a bluff' 300 feet high, with an islet off" it. North of Erebus Point half a mile is a dark perpendicular bluff", 300 feet high, the easternmost point of the island. Hence the land falls back to the north-east point, with a conspicuous rock off" it. The north point is perpen- dicular, 400 feet high. * See Admiralty plan :— South of Perseverance Harbour ; and sketch of Camp- bell Island on sheet No. 1.114. '* The position of Observatory Point, Perseverance Harbour, is 169° 11' E. by chart IIU ; chart 788 places it 10 miles too far East."— H.M.S. Nymphe, 1878. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 195 There is a depot of provisions in Perseverance Harbour, the position of which is marked by a white staff. North Harbour or Penguin Bay is on the east side of Campbell Island, with Cossack Rock, a small round island, off the north point of entrance. It extends Avestward three miles, increasing in width towards the head, terminating in two creeks. At the head of the bay is a considerable stream of water. Penguin Bay is easier of access than Port Perseverance. Easterly winds seldom blow there. Anchorage in all parts of the bay in 5^ to 8^ fathoms. The bays on the west side (Boat and Monument Harbours of the plan) afford no shelter. ANTIPODES ISLANDS. Variation in 1875. 17° 25' East. Antipodes Islands, an isolated group of several rocky islands, extend north and soutli four or five miles, are placed in (largest island 1,000 feet high) 49" 42' S., 178" 43' E. Sixty fathoms were found half a cable off its eastern shore. Landing appears impracticable. BOUNTY ISLANDS. Variation in 1875. 17* 0' E. Bounty Islands, a small cluster of rocky islets, variously stated at from thirteen to twenty-four in number, cover a space 3^ miles east and west, by li north and south. The western, the largest, covers about 8 or 10 acres, and may be seen 20 miles. Ten miles south of the eastern islet are 75 fathoms fine white sand ; 18 miles E.S.E, of this position, 104 fathoms, fine brimstone coloured sand ; 2^ miles N.N.W. of the group are 83 fathoms, sand and shells ; 8 miles off 95 fathoms, fine sand of brimstone colour. Caution. — Sunken rocks southward of the OToup bear from its western extreme S. ^ W., from the eastern extreme S. W. ^ S., distant 3^ miles, or 2 eight-tenths miles otF shore, are exceedingly dangerous ; great care should be taken approaching in thick weather, as they sometimes do not break for five or ten minutes. The eastern islet, which is one of the highest, is 280 feet high. Lat. 47° 46' S., long. 178" 56^ 44" E. CHATHAM ISLANDS, Variation in 1875. Point Munnings, 15' 0' E. Between tlie parallels of 43" 25' and 44" 20' S., and the meridians of 176° 10 and 177" 15' W., 365 miles eastward of Cape Palliser, Cook Strait, New Zealand, consists of three islands— the largest, Chatham Island {fVnr^: /Caiiri)% Pitt Island ( Ratigi-haute)', tlie third and smallest, liangatira ; and several detached small islets and rocks.* Chatham Island (Ware Kauri) is of irregular formation, nearly the form of a liorseshoe, extending W.S. W. and E.N.E. about 38 miles, and from north to south 25 miles, with its coast line deeply indented by large bays. The land in the northern part is said to be higlily productive, equally fit for grain or cattle. Here are also several lakes with sloping hills, usually one to two miles round. There are some also on the west coast. The largest, at the head of Waitangi Bay, is six miles round. ^Admiralty Chart, No. 1,417, Chatham Islands, Waitangi. Hutt, and Kangaroa Ports. 196 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. The Coast. — Waitangi or Petre Bay, on the south-west side of the island, is 13 miles -wide between the points, whence the coast falls back 10 miles in a semicircular form. The land is undulating, of small elevation, rising to the north-west into detached hills. Except the Waka-kaiwa, two hillocks at the south-west point of the island, no hills are visible in that direction. The land rises gradually from the rocky shore, the top a level or undulating surface. The northern point of Port Waitangi is a red bluff. Three miles north- ward is another similar bluff, with a sandy beach backed by low hills between. From the northern bluff' the beach is again sandy for some miles, then rocky to the north-west point of the island, indented by four small bays, open to the south-eastward. The north side of the island forms several wide open bays. Westward the shore is Hat, the headlands running out in long wooded tongues of land. Ten miles from the north-west point is a group of irregular hills. Maunga- nui terminates in a rocky precipice, from the foot of which runs out a spit with a level beach, which forms the western termination of a bay with a sandy beach, whose eastern boundary, 10 miles distant, is a hilly promon- tory. In the middle of this bay four needle-shaped rocks lie about a cable oft* shore. Eastward of the promontory (Cape Young) the shore runs 15 miles east- ward, with a broad beach and rocks along the shore, uncovered at low water. Kangaroa or Skirmish Bay is near the east end of tlie island, with rocks — sunken and above water — off its points, and partly obstructing its entrance. Lure Reef lies half a mile northward of its west point. The E. end of the island is rocky. Reefs extend a long way eastward from Wakuru Islet, which is connected to the main rocks. From the islet the east coast trends southward, and forms a bay two miles long, with a sandy beach. Rocks, visible at low water, lie scattered along shore. With easterly winds heavy breakers extend several miles off. The southern point of this bay is rocky, thence a long deep bay extends to the south-east end of the island, which is a hilly promontory covered with wood, off which rocks extend nearly two miles north-eastward. The anchorages on this side of the island are about six miles from the north-east extremity, where a boat can land at all times ; and near the south-east extreme. Easterly winds often set in suddenly. The southern coast is abrupt and precipitous, with a level summit. Mata-Ketaki or Mount Paterson is the westernmost of a chain of hills of pyramidal and irregular shape, notover 800 feet high, at the N.W. end of the island ; their extreme end forms a perpendicular clitf 100 feet high, but separated from the sea by a flat beach 1^ or 2 miles in breadth. Near the head of Wangaroa or Port Hutt is a small hill, called Emo- kawa or Iwa-kawa, three miles from which is Mount Dieffenbach, the most regular and apparently the highest pyramid. Ware-Kauri rises two miles from the northern shore, and 15 from the west end of the island. Rangi-Tutahi or Sisters (placed on the chart about 14 miles northward of Point Alison, and 11 miles north-westward of Cape Young) are two small rocky flat-topped islands near each other, 100 feet high. A line of breakers runs off about five miles to the North- West Reef. The following is from the description by Capt. C. W. Hope, H.M.S. Brisk, 1865 ; he describes the chart of these islands as imperfect and erro- neous, especially as regards the southern portion.* Cuba Channel- — The coast from Alison to Somes Points appears fringed with rock, and should not be approached within one mile. The break on West Reef is seen eight or ten miles from the mast head ; when nearer patches of the reef are visible. The reef seems to be correctly {daced on the chart, but to extend farther north-west from the dry part than aid down. The channel is three miles wide between the reef and Somes Point, through which at half speed no bottom was found, with 10 fathoms, and no indications of dangers. Petre Bay. — The only anchorages recommended in Petre Bay are * See Admiralty chart of the Chatham Islands, No. 1,417. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 197 Wanfflxroa or Port Hutt, and Port Waitangi. Nothing was seen of th& Heapliy Shoal ; it was stated that it had no existence. There was a heavy swell rnnning, but no appearance of any break otf this shore, except on the Jenny lleef. Wangaroa or Port Hutt is sheltered from all winds, but very confined, and as with strong west and south-west winds there is a heavy sea at the entrance, a vessel should anchor as far in as possible. The entrance may be easily recognised by the view on the chart.* When the hummock on Mount Iwa-Kawa opens eastward of Maunganui (as in sketch) the harbour is open, and the white beach at its head will be seen. There are likewise sandy beaches at the head of the two bays eastward of Wangaroa, therefore care must be taken not to mistake between them. The break on the rocks on either side of the entrance marks the dangers ; keep midway between and steer straight in N. W. by W. A patch of kelp stretches partly across the entrance from Napper Reef ; there is deep water where it lies, the Brisk passed through it. The reef off Gordon Point must be avoided ; the outer edge of the kelp there marks tlie deep water. The Brisk anchored inside Gordon and Evans Points in five fathoms^ coarse sand and shells, with the centre of the little cove behind Evans Point bearing N. E. A large vessel should moor if intending to stay any time. Tide.— It is H.W. F. & C. at Port Hutt at 6h. 50m. ; rise, 6 feet. Water. — A stream of excellent water at the north-west corner of the harbour. Port Waitangi is the principal place in the Chatham Islands. The Resident Magistrate nves here. Fresh meat, poultry, vegetables, and pota»- toes may be obtained in abundance. The lakes abound with wild ducks ; there are curlcAV, plover, and pigeons, with abundance of Avild pigs. The anchorage at Port Waitangi is not safe for large vessels during westerly gales. Vessels drawing not over 12 or 13 feet may ride out south- west gales by anchoring close in, with Hanson Point bearing S. W. or S.W. by W., in a measure sheltered from the heavy sea, but a rolling swell will try their cables. With a gale from north-west this is decidedly a dangerous anchorage. A shoal with five fathoms on it is said to lie IJ miles northward of the anchor- age ; the exact spot is uncertain. It is known to the natives, who go there to fish. The Coast south-eastward from Durham Point to Eveque Point, i» high, bold, and apparently clear of danger. Ev§que Point has a remarkable hill with a cleft rock on the top like a bishop's mitre. Pitt Strait. — The Brisk passed about 1^ miles northward of the Sentry Reef, which appears correctly placed, but smaller than laid doM'n on the chart. It is under water, but the sea breaks violently on it. There is said to be a rock some little distance off shore, two or three miles westward of Cape Fourni^r, but out of the ordinary track of vessels passing through Pitt Strait, nothing was seen of it. With the exception of this rock and Sentry Reef, Pitt Strait is stated to be free from danger. The rocks off the west and south-west sides of Pitt Island are high and steep. Pitt Island and its surrounding islets and rocks are most incorrectly laid down on the chart ; with the exception of Sentry Reef, the entire chart south of Capes Eveque and Fournier is erroneous. The north end of Pitt Island bears S.E. by S., 9 miles from Cape Fournier. f The north end of the island forms a bay 1^ miles wide and half a mile deep, with good anchorage in southerly winds. From the centre of this bay Evdque Point bore W. f N. and Cape Fournier N.W. by N.; assuming these two capes to be correctly laid down, this part of the bay would be in 44° 13' S., 172° 29' W., which agreed with the observations at noon. (Note on Imray's chart 1878 : "Surveyed by Mr. S. P. Smith of the N. Z. Survey Department, 1858. A few reefs have been added from the Admiralty chart 1417. There has not been a hydrographical survey of the islands. The long» depends upon Gordon Point, Wangaroa being in 176° 39' 50" W., as deter- * See Plan of Port Hutt, and view on Chart, No. 1,417. t Captain C. W. Hope, H.M.S. Brisk, 1867. 198 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. mined by the U.S. transit of Venus party in December, 1874." This chart places the above position of the bay in 44° 14' S. and 176° 12' W.) On the east side of Pitt Ishind is an anchorage much frequented by wlialers, where vessels may ride well sheltered from westerly gales ; on the west side there is good anchorage with northerly and easterly winds in a bay behind a high precipitous island called the " Castle," — probably The Fort of the present chart— it occupies more nearly the position of The Outposts Islets as now laid down ; this latter, a remarkable sharp-pointed rock, is fur- ther to the S.W. ; and the extreme rock of this grou]i — the Sail Rock — lies ■considerably south-west of its position on the chart. This group of rocks is very remarkable : the *' Castle " is fiat-topped with perpendicular precipitous sides, 300 or 400 feet high. Supplies. — Abundance of fresh meat, potatoes, and vegetables may be obtained at Pitt Island, also poultry, milk, and butter. Bertier Rock. — On leaving the north end of Pitt Island, the Brisk steered N.N.E., which took her four or five miles northward of Bertier Rock fEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 203 apparently but seven or eight feet water over them. Lat. 27° 11' S., long. 160" 13' W. Orne Bank, with 16 fathoms water over it, is placed on the chart in lat. 2r 40' S., long. 157° 45' W. Maria Theresa Reef is placed on the chart in 35° 20' S., 151° 10' W. Beveridge Reef, or Lagoon Reef, a very dangerous shoal, no part of which appears above water, but the sea breaks oyer it in many places. On the inside of the reef appeared to be deep water. It is about 10 miles north and south, and 8 miles east and west. On the west side, near the S.W. point, there appeared to be an opening. Some portion of it appears to have become an island, a coral island being reported in the exact position, in length three miles, width about 2^ miles.* TONGA OR FRIENDY ISLANDS. The Tonga Archipelago, composed of at least one hundred islands and Islets, lies between 18° and 22° S., and 174° and 176° W. Tonga-tabu, Vavu, and Eooa, are 15 to 20 miles in length. Seven others, namely, Lette, Tofoa, Kao, Namuka, Lefuka, Eoa, and Haano, are live to seven miles in their greatest extent. The rest are much smaller. Many are only banks of sand or coral, with tufts of trees. Toffoa, Kao, Lette, and the two rocks of Honga Hapai" and Honga Tonga can be seen 15 or 20 leagues. Eooa, Namuka, and Vavu are of moderate height. Tonga-tabu and the remander are very low. v The climate of Tonga is humid, the heat oppressive ; much rain falls.^ The trade-winds are by no means constant, and westerly winds occasionally J blow in every season. Scarcely a season passes without hurricanes, chiefly in February and MarcliTHut they liaVe also taken place in November and December. They begin at N.W., veer Eastward, and end at S.E.,the wind frequently changing, almost immediately, from one point to its opposite. They are local in their effects, and fall chiefly upon Hapai and Vavu. If the fury of the storm be felt at Vavu, Tonf^a generally escapes, and vice versii ; but Hapai generally suffers, situated as it is between the two places. S.E. and E.S.E. winds prevail in the vicinity of Tonga-tabu; but in February, March, and April, they frequently blow from W. and N.W., often for several days together, accompanied by showers of rain and violent ^usts. A heavy swell from S.W. is almost continual, and keeps up a strong surf on the southern coast of that island. Earthquakes are rather frequent. TONGA-TABU GROUP. The principal and southernmost group. Eooa, or Bua, lies to the S. E. of Tonga-tabu, with a channel of three leagues between. English Road, on the north-west part of the island, is in ■21° 20' 30" S., 174° 52' W. It is about 10 leagues in circuit, and 600 feet high ; rocky and barren. Catto is two miles oft" the south end of Eooa. Tonga-tabu, 36 miles in length from east to west, and eight miles in width, is of the form of an irregular crescent, whose concavity faces the north, deeply indented by a lagoon of five miles broad and three deep. Reefs of coral extend six or eight miles off the island on all its north part, * Doubtful Reefs.— On June 26th, 18i2, the ship Thomas Dickenson, Captain Harans, passed a low reef, apparently level with the sea, about two ships' lengths in extent, N.E. and. S.W. ; being dusk, could not determine exactly. Lat. 21° 3/ S., long. 168° 54' 30" W. A reef, announced by the "San Francisco Herald" as in 21° i2' .S., long. 167° io' W., may be the same. Another report by a whaler places a reef in 21" iO' S., long. 167° 45' W. Thompson Reef is reported to lie about 200 miles E.S.E. of Tonga-tabu. Captain Thompson, of the Acis, stated that he saw the sea breaking heavily on it, and that it extended N.E. and S.W. about 3 miles. From good observations it was placed in at. 22' 47' S., long, 171° 18' 30" (1851). 00 204 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. and form different channels, witli a useful roadstead. Many islets are on them, the greater part covered with trees. One of them, Eoa-Tehi (Eouaigee or Eooajii), on an isolated reef, has a surface of a league in circuit. All the rest of Tonga-talm, from its eastern point round south to the western, is totally different, the belt of coral rarely extending more than a cable's length off. The island is nearly a dead level, with the exception of a few hillocks 30 or 40 to 60 feet high. Fresh water is rare, but, by digging to a trifling depth, brackish water is generally obtained. The products of Tonga-tabu are cocoanut oil, arrowroot, tapioca, cotton, and coffee, the latter in small quantities, altliough the island is admirably suited for both cotton and coffee. The principal articles in request by the natives are clothing, cotton-prints, etc. , for Avhich they pay in silver or oil, yams, pork, and poultry. The demand for European gootls is, however, not increasing. The ox, horse, ass, sheep, pig, goat, and rabbit have been imported. Birds are numerous, including pigeons, ducks, fowls, turkeys, etc. Several European vegetables are grown, besides bananas, yams, oranges, pineapples, sugar-cane, sweet potatoes, etc. There is a safe road in the northern part of the island, formed to the S.E. by the coast of Tonga-tabu, and to the E, and E.N.E. by two small islands, Panghai-motu and Hoolaiva. This harbour is a well-determined position. Pangbai-motu is in 21° 7' S., 175° 15' W. The variation 10° E. H.W. F. i& C, 6h. 58m.; the tide rises 4ft. 9in. at springs, and 3ft. 6in. at neaps ; the flood running S.E., the ebb returning to the same direction. This road or harbour has tAVO entrances, one from the east, the other from the north. The first between the coast of Tonga-tal)u and a chain of islets and reefs. The length of the passage is three leagues east and Avest, and li miles broad, reckoning at a small island lying precisely in the opening of the road. This entrance is preferable to the northern one, and is called the Astrolabe channel. Directions. — Ships running for Tonga-tabu should make the island of Eooa, and, if toward evening, should keep off and on during the night, not losing sight of it, as tliere a current sets to the westward. At daylight bear up for the island of Eooajii (marked " Pilots" on chart) which leave on your starboard hand, keeping towards the reef surrounding Tonga. As you draw in, keep close to the reef on the port hand, for the passage cannot be seen until close-to. With a good look-out at the mast-head, and keeping the port reef close on board, it will be seen on the starboard bow. In the narrowest part of the passage is a sunken rock, which is avoided bj' keeping the port reef close on board. After passing this there is a clear passage up to the anchorage, in 16 fathoms, about a mile from the sliore, abreast of a flagstaff, on which is generally a flag. Caution. — A good mast-head look-out is required. The pilot seldom comes out until past the narrowest part of the passage, and then he is not required. It is H.W. F. & C. at 8h.; the rise of tide is 8^ feet, with easterly winds. "'The North Passage, N.E. of Atataa Island. — The following is adapted from the chart : — "The entrance to the northern passage is over five miles north-eastward of Atataa, between the outlying reefs and patches. The passage appears broad and straight, and lies in about a S. by W". and N. by E. direction, some four miles, when the Juno Shoal, with 2f fathoms on it, ratlier on the eastern side of the fairway, and nearly four miles east- ward of Atataa, nmst be left to the eastward ; thence to the anchorage as before." It is distinguished by the church, built on the only rising ground near. Anchorage in 14 fathoms is had, Avith the church south, and Panga'i- motu jvist shutting in Avitli the distant mainland E. by N. The north passage is to be preferred in going out." The lauding is awkward, as a reef extends a quarter of a mile from the shore. Biit just eastAvard of the cliurch a cut has been made, Avhich admits a boat to approach the shore at high Avater. A pilot Avill come off" on a signal being made." Admiral D'Urville gives the folloAving : — "The Fafaa Keef extends nearly a mile to the Avest. Up to this the depth A^aries from 18 to 10 fathoms; BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 205 but as soon as you reach the line joining Malinoa and Holoa the bottom has patches of coral, some of which have not more than 3^ fathoms on them, perhaps less. The mouth of the pass is between the N. E. extreme of the Atataa Reef and a bank of detached reefs more to the east, about three miles N.E. I N. from Atataa, and not over 1,600 yards wide. It is safe throuohout, and easily made. In leaving the anchorage of Panghai-motu to reach this passage, steer hrst for the point of the Fafaa lieef, and from this to N.N.W. for four miles. You will then see the two reefs, taking care to keep close to the wind. Tlie channel is hardly half a mile long ; then, steering to N.W., you will soon be clear of the breakers to the north of Tongatabu. " H.M.S. Dido, in 1873, passed within a quarter of a mile of a reef on which the sea Avas breaking heavily, about three miles N, by W. from the north extreme of the main reef, on the north side of Tonga-tabu. In this part of the group, allowance must be made for the current, which sets strongly to the westward. Pilots can be obtained at Euaigee Island, four miles N.E. of East Point, Tonga-tabu.* North Star Reef, a dangerous outlying coral bank, lies N. 54° E., 17 miles from Ton^a-tabu, or, according to Lieut. Raper, in 19° 20' S., 173° 45' W. Two small islands, Hunga Tonga and Hunga Hapai, lie between Tonga- tabu and Namuka, each about 1^ miles in circuit, 150 feet high, and may be seen 15 leagues. NAMUKA GROUP. Namuka is composed of a steep, rugged, coral rock, 9 to 10 feet high, except where there are two sandy beaches, with coral reefs to seaward. In the centre of the island is a salt-water lake ; yams, plantains, bread-fruit and cocoanuts. To the north and east of Namuka a vast number of small islands lie scattered at unequal distances, in j,'eneral as high as Namuka, but only from two to three miles to half a mile in length, some less. Most of them are clothed Avith trees. '*The Falcon observed breakers bearing S.S.W. | W. 4 to 5 miles on what was supposed to be the Culebras Reef, Avitli Honga bearing S. ^ E., and the top of Kao seen over the eastern part of Tofoa N. by E. ^ E. ; the position of the breakers was ascertained to be in 20° 19' S., 175° 24' W. The top of Kao in line with the centre of Tofoa, Avould lead on or very close to the reef. "Caution. — As the Friendly Islands are not yet siuveyed, and the position of many of the otf-lying dangers still remains doubtful, more than ordinary care is necessary. " The reef sounded on by the Falcon in 19° 18' S., 174° 15' \V., is the same as that seen by the Eugenie 25 miles N.N.E. f E. from N.E. point of Haano ; and may also be the Disney Shoal, marked on chart 20 miles farther westward " (Query — Chart shews Disney Shoal 33 miles to eastcoard.)— Hyd. Notices. The Culebras Rank lies Avestward of Namuka Islands, but not in the position assigned to it ; according to La Perouse it is six miles in extent, N. by W. and S. by E. The Hapai Group is composed of four larger and numerous smaller islands, connected by coral reefs. Cook named them Haano, Eoa, Lefouka, and Hoolaiva. These islands are A'ery Ioav ; the reefs do not extend more than a quarter of a mile on the eastern side of the northernmost islands. In rounding Haano, the northernmost, give the N.W. point a berth of half a mile, to aA^oid a reef oft* it From the point N.N.E. | E., 6 miles, lies a bank Avith only three fathoms on it. The Esk passed about half a mile north of the six- fathom patch S.S.W. from Loohooga Island ; it appeared to consist of a series of irregular patches of coral, of about a mile in extent, f * H.M.S. Barracouta, 1876 : Breakers were seen on the N.W. side of Tongatabu in 20° 54' S., 175° 28' W. t H.M.S. Barracouta, 1876— The shoal marked six fathoms lying S.W. by W. J W. from Loohooga extends two miles farther to the S.S.W. il fathoms were obtained with the island bearing N. 20° E. ^^ 206^ BRETT'S NEW ZExVLAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. After passing south of Mangone Island the islands of Lefuka, Foua, and Haano appear as one long, low line of land, broken by gaps j Lefuka anchor- age is westward of the second gap from the northward. Lifuka is about seven miles long, and some two or three broad. Its East side exposed to the trade wind, has a reef running to a considerable breadth from it, on which the sea breaks with great violence. A continua- tion of this reef joins Lifuka to Eoa, not above half a mile distant. No good water can be got. Near its South end, on the West side, is an artificial mount 40 feet high, and 50 feet in diameter at its summit. Great caution should be used in sailing in and out of this part of the group. " The anchorage of Lifuka in 19° 48' 12", 174° 20' W., is by no means a good one, being much exposed to the bad weather and high seas from the westward, the outstanding reefs affording but little or no shelter from the A'iolent gales from that quarter, which frequently occur, particularly in February and March. "—Captain Worth, R.N. Hoolaiva, connected to Lifuka by a coral reef partly dry at low water, has also an artificial mount. The East side has a reef like Lifuka, the West side has a bending at the North part, where there seemed to be anchorage. The Kotoo Group niay be almost considered a portion of the Hapai Group, being more or less connected by coral reefs. Cook says they are separated by a channel seven or eight miles broad, but which is narrowed by a reef. The two islands forming the North end of this channel are Neeneva to the East, and Foutou.-i, or Footooha, to the West. The largest island is Kotoo, scarcely two miles lon^, and about the same breadtli ; a coral reef surrounds it. Its N.W. extremity is as low as Hapai. Around it are eight other islands, as shown on the charts. Tofoa, or Toofoa, an active volcanic island, lies N.W. of Kotoo, in lat. 19° 45' S., long 175° 3' W., 2,800 feet high, and about five miles in diameter. EZao is a vast conical rock 5,000 feet high, N. Eastward of Tofoa. Is in 19° 42 S., 175" W. VAVU GROUP. The northermost cluster and one of the most important, lies 70 miles N.N.E. of the Hapai' Group, but in the intervening space are coral shoals. The local pilots say there is a continuous line of soundings between the Hapai and Vavu Groups, and that the sea has been known to break heavily in 20 fathoms. The Disney Shoal, (see caution p. 205) a veiy dangerous reef, lies some 45 miles to the S.E. of Vavu. Captain Disney obtained soundings in nine fathoms, sand and coral rock, deepening to 40 fathoms ; but, from appearances, there was much less water than tliis. Lat 19° 15' S., long. 173° 40' W. This would make it N.E. 40 miles from the N.E. point of Haano. Until further examination is made, caution should he used. The Campion Shoal (1860) lies to the East of a sandy islet South of Vavu, in 19° 4' S., 173° 52' W., extending four miles to the S. W. (Chart gives 19° 8' S ; also the Accou Jago shoal in 19° S., 173° 52' W.) The Home Shoal in 19° 4' S., long. 174° 45' W. (PD) S.S.W. of the i^eak of Lette, is ])robably that seen by Captain Montgomerie, in H.M.S. Blanche. He describes it as a rock a few feet above Avater ; but, owing to the thickness of the weather, the correct position could not be ascertained. Lat. 19° 17' S., long. 174° 45 W.' (approximate).* Vavau is the principal island of the group. Port Refuge (from Sir E. Home) on the West side approached from the West, has a remarkable appearance. It is highest towards tlie North, sloping gradually to the South. The whole is a group of numerous islands with abrupt sides. The extreme point North is of moderate height. South * H.M.S. Sapphire, 1878, reports :— Passed within three miles of the reef marked P.D., in 19' 18' s., 17i' 59' W. ; within 4^ miles of the rock reported 27 feet high (in 19' 21' S., 174' 51' W.), and over the reported position of the Home Shoal ; in no case was there any appearance of a reef, or of discoloured water. A reef awash is well known to the natives, about the place marked " reported dangers." BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 207 of it is a bold head of considerable height. Two others like it to the south- ward are islands. Towards the northern end of Vavu is a remarkable piece of table land, the highest, from which the land slopes off, all south- ward of it being islands of re|?ular form, and low. The entrance is South of the highest head before mentioned. The South head is the North extreme of a larger island. When standing in with the North head on the port hand, two remarkable round fiat-topped rocky islands will be seen ; they cannot be mistaken. Between the northernmost of the two and the main is a detached rock. Passing between these small islands, a rocky point will be seen upon the left, bearing S. 83° E. ; after rounding which, at a cable's length, a higher point, covered with trees, will appear also on the left, bearing N. 47° E. The passage appears narrow. Southward and eastward the land is composed of numerous islands with several openings to the sea, and between some, breakers extend quite across ; the eye guided us in. A lumpisli hill covered with trees will soon open, and a small low green island which is left on the ri^ht hand. We anchored under this hill in 30 fathoms, sand, with a sandy point N.E., and the hill North. The village, Neafu, is on a rising ground, with a hill at its back, rendered conspicuous by the large boat-houses on the beach. From the anchorage to the village the water is deep, the shoalest being live fathoms, but the bottom is bad. The usual anchorage above Sandy Point is secure ; the bottom is sand. The chief product of the island is cocoanut oil, a little sugar-cane and cotton bein^ grown. Yams, sweet potatoes, taro, bananas, pineapples, cabbages, and onions, were under cultivation. Lieut. Creak, K.N., says :— To round Sandy Point, keep the Talau shore close on board till past the reef, which generally shows plainly. The lon^titude of Sandy Point was 174° 1' W. Talau was found to be 440 feet high. The village of Neafu is in 18° 38' 20" S., 173° 55' W. We cannot here describe the coral reefs and islets which extend to the southward of Vavu. They reach to lat. 20° S. Lette Island lies to the West of the Vavu Group. The peak, 1,790 feet high, is in the centre of the island, from whicli the hill falls with a gradual slope to the sea. It is six or seven miles in circuit, and can be seen 20 leagues off. It is in 18°50"S., 174° 37' W. by the chart.* (A line of breakers, a considerable distance west of the islands, was seen by Sir E. Home). Amargura or Fanoualie, the northernmost of the group, is formed of two hilLs (the N.E. the highest), connected by a low space, surrounded by rocky cliffs, except in two places on the west side. It is in 18° 2' S., long. 174° 18' W. There is said to be a dangerous reef about four miles west from it. In August, 1847, Amargura was destroyed by the eruption of its crater ; banks were also said to liave been raised above the level of the sea eastward of Tonga-tabu. Toku i'* a small low island, 11 miles S.E. of Amargura, in about IS'* 10' S., long. 174° 8' W. Tonga is unquestionably extremely fertile : it produces coffee, cotton, arrowroot, tapioca, copra, fungus, beche-de-mer, the candle nut ; also pearl and turtle shell, but not in large quantities; ginger, cinnamon, »&c., and some woods valuable for dyeing. The native cloth or tappa is extensively made. Their houses are sometimes extremely handsome both in the shape and in the decorative style of the coloured sinnett ties within. South-westward of Tonga-tabu is a cluster of reefs and an island, apparently a prolongation of the line of land composing the Tonga Archi- pelago, which, as it is subject to earthquakes, may assume a dangerous character should the depth of water be lessened through this agency. Pylstaart Island does not belong to any particular group. It is m 22° 25' S., 176° 4' W., 700 feet high, covered with trees (cocoanut among the number) ; three miles long, and without anchorage. * A small island 200 yards long was passed by H.M.S. Sapphire, 1878, in 19° 11' S., 174° 49' W., S. 17° W. 23 miles from Lett6 Island ; it ejected white smoke, and was covered with sulphur. ^09h BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Pelorus Reel lies 37 miles S. by W. from Pylstaart Island, which is in si<,'ht from it. It is about a quarter of a, mile in length, witli not over one or two fatlioms on its western end, at the extremity of wliich breakers were visible. Position by chart, 22° 59' S.. 176° 19' W. Midway between Pelorus Heef and Pylstaart is a bank of 22 fathoms. Seymour Bank, of six and a-half and seven fathoms, very steep-to, in 21° 43' S., 176° 42' W. It may be that this is a growing coral reef, therefore the utmost caution is requisite, as the lead may not be of much use in nearing it. La Ranee Banks- — Three-and-a-quarter fathoms, then 12, 22, and 19 fathonis, were found on a bank which api^eared to extend four miles in a north and south direction. When La Ranee crossed the west part of this bank, the look-out man reported a large bank about nine miles to the N.W., with the sea breaking over it ; a lagoon was observed at its N.E, end. A third shoal bank was also seen about two miles northward of La Ranee, with apparently less water on it than on that which was sounded over ; lastly a fourth bank was observed about 11 miles to the southward, which iippeared to have a greater depth. The position of the depth of 3| fathoms -was determined to be in 24° 18' S., 176° 1' W. McCloud Bank, of 17 fathoms, is placed in 25° 12' S., 178° 30' W. Ono Islands, a group of several small islands, the highest 370 feet high, the largest three miles long and If miles broad. A chain of coral reefs, seven miles long, N.E. by N. and S.W. by S., surrounds tlie group, the centre of Avhich is in 20° 39' S., 178° 40' W. No anchorage. Bereghis Reef, 10 miles to the S.W. of the isLands, is 2^ miles long N.E. and S.W., and two miles wide, awash, and always breaking. Mikhseloff and Simonoff Island, two small islands about 90 feet high, sontli of the Ono Islands, separated by a channel six miles wide. The first 1^ mile long and ^ mile broad. They are surroimded by a reef at the distance of a mile. SimonofF is in 21° 3' S. 178° 46' W. Calinon Reef, described by the Tongese as two or three feet above the sea, abt)ut a quarter of a mile in extent, no vegetation, and risen lately from the effects of an earthquake ; and as the natives are seldom mistaken on such points, they may l)e trusted. It is in about 20° 21' S., 179° 24' W., or 35 miles north-westward of Ono. The natives also say there is another bank more westward, in the direction of Fiji, longer than the above, and not above the level of the sea. Minerva Reefs- — Two reefs whose character and position were accurately established by Captain Denham, R.N.. in the Herald, 1854. The northern reef has a passage, a cable wide with a depth of 15 fathoms, on its N.W. side into smooth water Avithin. Two cables off the entrance is a depth of 55 fathoms. The northern reef is circular, about three and a-half miles in diameter, enclosing a space with from three fatlioms at three cal)les from the edge of the reef to 15 and 17 fathonis in the centre. The southern reef resembles the figure 8 in shape, and encloses two separate lagoons. Its greatest length is E.N.E. and W.S.W. five miles, with a breadth of two miles. There is an entrance into the easternmost lagoon— Herald Bight — on its N.W. side, and off it a sheltered anchorage during the S.E. trade. This entrance is a mile wide between the reefs, but patches of 9 to 12 feet extend three-quarters across from the northern side. The navigable passage, two cables Avide with 15 fathoms, lies southward of these. Inside is a circular space of smooth Avater, one and a-half mile in diameter. Two sunken dangers lie within half a-mile of the entrance, three cables from the southern shore of the lagoon ; a third lies two cables S.S.E. from the innermost; and one and a-half cable from the reef. Northern Reef, observation spot on N.E. side of reef, 23° 37' 19" S., 1 78° 49' 39" W. Southern Reef, Herald Bight, on south side of entrance, 23° 56' 22° S., 179° 4' 57" W. H.W., F. & C, 8h.; rise 6 feet. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 209. KEEMADEC ISLANDS. A scattered group of islands to the N.E. of New Zealand, very badly placed on the charts, in West longitude. Raoul or Sunday Island, the northernmost, of triangular form, four leagues in circuit, is a steep, rugged mountain, 1627 feet high ; the rocks rise like basaltic columns. Captain Denham, H.M.S. Herald, says it oflers three anchorages, according to the winds ; that water, vegetables, and poultry, could be pro- cured by the whalers. Observation spot in West bay is in 29° 15' 30" S., 177° 54' 52" W. H. W., F. & C, 6h ; rise 5 feet. Macauley Island, a small round if^land, very steep, is about three miles in circuit and about 750 feet high ; half-a-cable ofi* its S.E, point is a smaU rock, lat. 30° 16' S , long. 178° 32' W. Curtis Island is composed of two rocks of moderate height ; the largest, double the size of the other, is half a mile long, about 500 leet high. The channel between is 400 yards wide. It may be taken as in 30° 36' S., 178° 37' W. L'Bsperance Rock (Brind's or French Rock) is 577 feet high, of small extent, placed by D'Entrecasteaux in 31° 27' 30", 179° 5' W. The Havre Rock was seen by a whaler about four leagues N.W. of it. It was again reported by a whaling captain (with the two following) as 10 miles N. N. W. f rohi French or Esperance Rock. It is awash, and breaks heavily in bad weather. The second reef lies 45 miles E.N.E. from the Esperance Rock, said to have 12 feet water on it ; no breakers Avere discovered ; 31° 14' S., 178° 8' AV. The third was found to be in 31° 28' S., 178° 10' E., bearing W. 133 miles from Esperance Rock. Heavy breakers with much wind. Another reef, which may l)e the same as the preceding, is marked on the French chart in 30° 55' S., 178° 5' E. Between the southern extremity of the Friendly Islands and New Caledonia there are several islands and reported reefs. Conway Shoal (or Rapids Reef) lies in 21° 44' 48" S., 174° 37' 45" E. As ascertained by Captain Denham, the sand islet on it is five feet above water. Some mould was landed, and some cocoanuts planted in the hope they might make a beacon for this fearful reef.* (In 1867 none of these remained). Hunter Island is a volcanic block 974 feet high, at its base half a mile north and south by one-third of a mile across. From its abrupt wooded slopes jets of sulphurous vapour issue ; it is not in other respects active as a volcano. There are 40 fathoms within lialf a cable of its base, black sand, and no outlying dangers, thougli eddies extend nearly two miles off its north- western side. It is in 22° 24' 2" S., and 172° 5' 15'' E. Matthew Island, 465 feet high, is small, and can be seen 11 or 12 leagues. It is in 22° 20' 12" S., 171° 20' 30" E. La Brillante Shoal, a very dangerous reef, appears to be a round mass of coral about 150 feet in diameter, the more dangerous as the sea did not break on it when discovered, although there was a heavy swell. Two sound- ings in 20 and 23 fathoms were obtained ; but it was thought there was not over 62 to 10 feet on it, as the sea was quite yellow. Its position was taken * The Olosenffu and the Edith or Somme Reef in about above position were searched for in vain by H.M.S. Alacrity, and positions sailed over by Captain T, McKay, and are believed not to exist. Another, the Vibilia Reef, placed in 31" SCX S., 178° 20' E,, may probably be included in this category. The Isabelle reported dangers in the following positions, in 22° 5' S., 179° 15' W. in 22° S., 177' 46' E. ; and in 22' 38' S., 174° 53' K. (a horseshoe reef). The Atalanta, Admiral Ronssiu, passed three miles north of the first, 6 miles north of the second, and two miles north-west of the third, but saw no indications of any danger. Sprague Reef is said to have been discovered by the Mercator in 21° 52' S., 178° 36' E. Captain McKay passed over this position in October, 1880, and saw nothing of it. In January, 1872, La Ranee passed near a patch of discoloured water which appeared to extend north and south six miles. The estimated depth was 8 to 11 fathoms ; it was placed by observation 24° 11' S., 172° 54' E. The schooner Melanie, 1870. reports a rock of reddish colour, about three feet out of water in 21° 26' S., 170° 57' E. The Kreimhilda one in 24° 50' S., 175* 20 E. 21© BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. to be 23° 13' 52" S., 169" 55' 38" E. It was seen by the Creole, October, 1859, placing it in 23° 14' S., 170° 6' E. The shoal part, not more than two cables' lengths in circnit, with not over six feet water on it. It was also seen, the sea breaking fearfully on it, in October, 1869, by a Norwegian barque, very near the surface of the sea — perhaps only two or three feet water on it — as the tops were occasionally seen, extending about half a mile, and seen from the niast-liead plainly' several hours, the weather being very calm. Hound tlie reef the water had a yellowish colour. No bottom with 95 fathoms within a mile of it. Walpole Island is a narrow table surface, coral structure, rising 229 feet above the base of its perpendicular cliffs. It lies north and south IJ miles, and a qiiarter of a mile in breadth ; very difficult of access and uninhabited. The southern extreme in 22° 38' 7" S., and 168° 56' 45" E. It is free from outlying dangers ; there are 180 fathoms half a mile off its southern extreme. O'Neill Bank, of 13 fathoms, lies 10 miles north of Walpole Island. Durand Reef is in 22° 2' 25" S., 168° 39' 34" E. It covers six to nine feet, and breaks occasionally ; its 9 feet ridge forms a circle of two-thirds of a mile diameter. The lead will not warn approach to Durand Shoal, as there are 210 fathoms coral grit within half a mile of its breakers. Norfolk Island is a beautiful island and is occupied by the descend- ants of the interesting community from Pitcairn Island, who, 194 in number, were brought thence in 1856, The head-quarters of the Melanesian Mission are also established here in the north-west part of the island. Norfolk Island, the principal, is N.W. | W., 425 miles from North Cape, New Zealand. It is nearly 5 miles long, and about 2^ miles wide. Its greatest elevation is the double summit of Alount Pitt, 1,050 feet high, on the northwest corner of the island. Its sea front is high and precipitous, the cliffs being 200 and 250 feet high. There is no anchorage round the island sheltered from on-shore winds. With Avinds from the north-west round by north to about east the anchorage in Sydney Bay is safe ; with westerly winds round l)y south to south-east, in Cascade Bay, on the north side of the island ; with all others winds, off' Anson's Bay, near the north-west part of the islands, but here the water is deeper. Aboiit 10 or 12 fathoms may be had in the two former, but local traders go closer in, and are in the habit of shifting from one anchorage to the other according to circumstances. Approaching Sydney Bay anchorage, if it is safe or the landing practicable, a red fl.ag is hoisted on the Hagstaft", westward of the settlement. One of the residents will usually act as pilot to the best anchoring ground, which is in some parts rocky. Many ancliors have been lost here. A stout buoy rope, with chain on the crown of anchor, and well buoyed, is necessary. Always endeavour to weigh on the weather tide, and with not more sail than is necessary to avoid trippin<^ the anchor, which might then hook a rock or another anchor. Similarly in coming to, endeavour to veer at once enough chain to avoid dragging the anchor. Should the anchorage not be safe, or the landing not practicable, a blue Hag will be hoisted, when a vessel will usually proceed to Cascade Bay, and generally find smooth and safe anchorage. Strangers should not land in their own boats. The residents are skilful boatmen, and have good whaleboats. At Sydney Bay, even in fine Aveather, blind rollers occasionally come in, and break heavily outside the pier, and would overend any ordinary boat. Sydney Bay, between Nepean Island and Point Ross, lies at the south side of the island. At low water a coral reef uncovers fi-om 100 to 700 yards. Philip Island is about 1^ miles long, Avith an average breadth of three-fourths of a mile. It bears S, 20° E. 3^ miles from the landing-place at Sydney Bay. Its highest part, a peak on its south side, is 200 to 300 feet less than that of Mount Pitt. It is everyAvhere precipitous. Half a mile south of it there is a rock above water. Rabbits abound on this island. Nepean Island, 50 feet high and a quarter of a mile long, lies half a mile off the main island, south-eastAvard of Sydney Bay. There is a narroAV passage betAveen, Avith numbers of detached rocky banks. The channel has BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 211 a depth of four and five fathoms. N.E. by N. of Nepean Island, for a considerable distance, is a bank of sand and mud.* Point Ross, the southernmost point of Norfolk Island, is the south- west point of Sydney Bay. Eastward of it to the bottom of the bay rocky banks extend a long distance off the shore, on which the sea breaks in a south-west gale or heavy surf. The tide flows F. & C, at Tfh., rise five to seven feet. The flood runs to the westward and south-westward, and ebb to the contrary. The tide makes two hours sooner on the Norfolk Island shore than in the stream and over towards Philip Island. NEW CALEDONIA AND THE LOYALTY ISLANDS Belong to France. A penal settlement is established in the former. The progress of the colony lias been slow. Cotton and sugar are grown in small quantities. Gold is worked in the valley of Diahot liiver, on the northern 5 art of the island, and may stimulate its opening up. The necessaries of few Caledonia are mostly imported from New Zealand and Australia. A monthly line of steamers run between Noumea and Sydney ; there is frequent intercourse with Auckland. New Caledonia is about 72 leagues in length in a N. W. and S.E. direction and 10 in breadth. Throughout its extent are two parallel ranges of mountains seimrated by a central valley, but imited here and there by transverse plateaux. The eastern chain has a regular and even outline, with a few prominent peaks to serve as landmarks. Their average height is about 2,500 feet, visible 50 or 60 miles off, commencing at Cape Coronation, the S.E. point; at Cape Colnett, in the N.E., it begins to decrease in elevation, ter- minating at the low N.E. point. The western chain is higher and more irregular than the eastern, rising into points 2,500 to 3,600 high. Extensive coral reefs surround its shores and islets. From the northern extremity of the island, in lat. 20° S., an immense reef, with many groups of islands, extends north-westward to lat. 19" 36', but have not been entirely examined. Still farther north is a group of islets, in 17° 44' S., the Huon Islets. The Isle of Pines, or Kunio, lies to the south-east of the south point of New Caledonia, the interval of 25 miles between filled with coral reefs, with deep and safe passages between. The south-east extremity of the group is in 22° 46' S., 167° 35' 30" E. The south-west point of New Caledonia is Uen Island. A line of coral reefs extends from it to 23° 1' S., 167° 2' E., 35 miles, leaving a wide gulf between it and the Isle of Pines reefs. The Climate of the group is like that of all tropical regions. The year is divided into two seasons, winter from December until April, vari- able winds, rains, and hurricanes ; the other eight months the fine season, with regular winds from E.S.E. and fine weather, and at times squalls from S.W. to S. The western side, however, participates in the moonsoons of the Australian coast, and in July, August, and September, westerly and south-westerly winds are more prevalent. Humcanes are most frequent in January and February, more violent to the north. Their southern limit is somewhere between Kanala and the Isle of Pines, for at the latter place they are not known. They are much dreaded in the northern ports, and loss is considered certain if the ship is not in a landlocked harbour, the reefs being then no shelter from the sea. 'The Currents generally are from S.E. to N.W., outside the reefs j within they are subject to the tides and directions of the channels. The Isle of Pines, the south-easternmost end of New Caledonia, is 11 J miles from north-Avest to south-east, but the latter part is a separate island, divided by a narrow channel. It is difficult to give a clear description of of the island Avithout a reference to the chart. The peak Ngao, on the S.W. part of the island, is conical, 880 feet high, visible 30 miles off", and from the S.W. shows double. It is in 22° 39' 20" S., 167° 29' E. South-east of it is a * A sharp pinnacle rock with 12 feet water on it lies tiue south of west end of Nepean Island three-quarters of a mile, on which the .Mar^- Hamilton was wrecked. 2lS^ BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. secure port called Vao. About three miles south of it is Alcniene Island, which shelters another anchorage to the west of it. On the north side is the Gadji Anchorage, protected by the barrier reef ; on the Ave^t side is Uamceo Bay, Avitli Victoria Harbour. South-cast of the Isle of Pines is the Nokan- hui Keef, with a narrow channel inside it. From the eastward lia\dng made the Ngao Peak out, steer for the sand islets Ana or Ami, on the south-east side of the Nokanhui Reef, Avhicli lie about four miles from the south point of the Isle of Pines ; the southernmost is at tlie south point of the reef. Having rounded this islet (not close-to, as the bank reaches off to the south-east), when it is on Avith the north-east side of the Lesser Isle of Pines, keep W.N.W. till the sumndt of the peak bears N. 16° E., when Alcm^ne Islet (covered witli pine trees) will be to the right of the peak. Great caution must be used in approaching the Alcml^ne Passage, which is west of the island, as many coral patches lie in its entrance, only to be avoided by the eye. The channel is 1^ miles Avide between the island and a cluster of coral patches, wliich separate it from the Nokue Passage. The mark is Duroc Islet (small, with pine trees), immediately under the Nga Peak, in one with its east summit N. f E. This will carry through in G to 10 fathoms, and clear of t)ie reefs which extend half a mile westward of Alcmene, which must be strictly guarded against. When the north-west portion of the islet bears S.E., bear to the E.N.E. and anchor as far in as needful, north of the island. With a good knowledge of the channels a vessel may keep on towards the peak ancl Duroc Islet till within half a mile of the latter, when an easterly course two miles leads to a more shel- tered anchora«je. Port Vao, anclior with the Mission Station N.N.W. in four fathoms. Neither of these anchorages can be considered safe, they are open from south to north-west ; the squalls or gales from south-west are sometimes very violent. Besides this the tide is rapid ; the flood sets west, the ebb to eastward. Althougli an indifferent port, it is a useful place for obtaining supplies. Water is readily got at the brook. Tlie Nokue Passage is more open and deeper (17 to 25 fathoms). On its north-west side is an isolated shoal and islet, Infernal Islet. It may be entered by bringing the Nga Peak to bear N.E. I N. The Nokanhui Channel, between the south-east reef and tlie Isle of Pines, is in its narrowest part two-thirds of a mile wide, least depth six and seven fathoms. The tides run slowly through it, but with the westerly flood there is a tremendous sea in it with south-west winds ; with the south-east winds there is no swell, but the current is so violent that it needs a very fresh breeze to enable a ship to clear it. It is therefore not recom- mended. The Torch Bank lies about eight miles south-eastward of Ami Islet (chart), and 17^ miles S.E. by E. from the Peak, which bearing Avill be a guide for it. The depth obtained was 20 fathoms, coral bottom. From the latter fact the depths are probably less and decreasing. Pine Islet (Gie), the northernmost of a cluster off the north end of the Isle of Pines, stands in the entrance to an anchorage to the east, and others on the Avest side of the island. Gadji Anchorage, on the north-east side of the Isle of Pines protected from seaAvard by the Barrier Reef, near tAvo miles ofi' shore, has 10 to 20 fathoms all over it. There is an entrance to the south-east, and another from the north, keeping the Peak 8. S.E. ^ E., betAveen Pine Islet and the coral reefs and sand-banks of the Barrier Reef to the eastAvard. The entrance and anchorage is free, as far as is knoAvn, from coral patches. Umoeo Bay, or Port Victoria, on the Avest side of the island, is surrounded by the low coral reefs, forming an area of about six miles by four miles, Avith several entrances. It is an exposed place to the prevalent Avind. The Botany Isles are small islets scattered over the line of reefs which extend from the Isle of Pines to Cape Queen Charlotte, the south-east extremity of Ncav Caledonia. These reefs have scA^eral channels through them for which the chart must be the best and only guide, except the eye. The Avidest and deepest is the Sarcelle (or Teal) Passage, nearly midAvay between the tAvo islands, over tA\'0 miles Avide in its narroAvest part, Avith 30 to 40 fathoms water. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 213 Cape Queen Charlotte, is the bluff south-east termination of New Caledonia, beyond which is some low land and a i^rojectino- reef, which forms the port of Goro (see plan) — or Cascades — entered from the South through two passes through the reef, well sheltered from the swell, but open to the wind. The coast runs from it S.W. six miles to Cape Ndua, the bluff south point of New Caledonia. About midway is Wooded Port, a land-locked basin, entered by a narrow passage througli the reef. The Havannah Passage passes along the south-east end of New Cale- donia, the fairway through being with Cape Ndua S. W. by W. On its south side is Kie Island, Avhich, with Amere Island, are the only ones covered with the remarkable pines on the southern reefs, and Avill serve as marks for them. On the north side, and projecting from the eastern reef of Point Goro, is a bank of 4f fathoms, which adds to the violence of the currents. At times, during an hour at the change of spring tides, they form a bore where the whole passage is barred by a continuous line of breakers. It would not be prudent to attempt it at this period, but a short time after- wards the streams resume their ordinary condition. Roche du Var is a dangerous sunken rock, having only six feet water, in 22° 14' 25" S., 167° 9' E., 7^ miles N.N.E. JE. from the entrance to Havannah Passage. From the rock a peak on the mainland is (in line with the south extreme of Nau Island) W.S.W., Cape Ndua S. 42° W. The area soutli of Cape Ndua is strewed with coral reefs, which require an inspection of the chart. On tAVO of them are islands, Nuare, low and bushy, four miles S.W. by S. of Kie Island, and south by east five miles from Cape Ndua. The other, Ugo, is 2^ miles S. by E. ^ E. (chart) from Cape Ndua. No written description will enable a ship to avoid these reefs. Praslin or Prony Bay lies westward of Cape Ndua, and north-eastward of Uen Island. It has been tlioroughly examined, is very extensive, and has abundance of fish. There is good depth and holding ground throughout Many rivers enter this bay, forming cascades. Half a mile east south-east- ward of Pine Point (which is opposite the north-eastern part of Nau Island) is a patch with three feet on it at low water. It is H.W. F. &. C. at 8h. lOm. Woodin Passage between Uen Island and the main is safe and clear throughout, no detached dangers (see the three foot patch oft" Pine Point), and 10 to 20 fathoms close to the shores. It is about 14 miles long, its east entrance is taken with la Peak, a rugged mountain 1,624 feet high at the south-west point of New Caledonia, bearing W. ^ N. From its west entrance there is a comparatively clear passage to sea through the Bulari Passage, 20 miles to the south-west, or to Noumea, or the Port de France westward. The best passage from the north end of Uen Island to Port Noumea is Tareti Passage passing north of Tarcti Island or sandbank, which is some eight miles westward, and soutli of Nakae shoals. These, together Avith four northern banks on the south side of the channel, ahvays show above water. From abreast of Four Northern Banks steer to pass between Mando and Maitre Islands. Tareti Passage is preferable to Porcupine Island Passage northward of it, as Oliver Bank and Provident Shoal are not always visible.* Several good anchorages exist between the western entrance of Woodin Passage and Noumea, where a vessel could anchor for the night, or to aAvait a change of wind or tide. The first is Uie Bay, with gf>od holding gTOund and a stream on its northern side, but toAvards its head the bottom becomes rocky. N'go Bay, tAvo miles to the north-Avest, is a small port, Avell sheltered but sometimes difficult to leave for a sailing vessel. Tareti Island is seven miles south by east from Mount D'Or, Avith anchorage a mile from its north-east side on sand bottom. Anchorage is also found on the east or Avest sides of Porcupine Islet. Uen Island, or Waima, aboA^e spoken of, is 4 J miles from north to south, high, rugged, deeply indented on its eastern side by Port Kute, clear * H.M.S. Renard, 1878, reports : —Iron caged beacons have been placed on the following. A'iz.— the h fathom patch (Moziman's Shoal), eastward of Pine Point the end of reef of the point westward of Cape Ndua ; and on Hydrography shoal. HI^ BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. and deep when once inside, the entrance to which is on the sonthern side, past several rocky patches. The Great Ileef extends 35 miles S.S. Eastward of Uen Island. Its S.E. point is in 23" 1' S. by 167° 3' E. (An over-fall of discoloured water sweeps round it, one to three miles off. — Chart). There is very deep water close up to it. Hence its western face trends N.W. by W. for 85 miles to Port St. Vincent, gradually nearing the land from 15 miles abreast Uen Island to three miles off Port St. Vincent, and fronting the most important portion of New Caledonia, the French settlements near Bulari and Dumbea Bays. Mount D'Or, 2,543 feet high, is an excellent guide to the passages in its vicinity, and is the most remarkable landmark on this part of the coast ; it bears from la Peak, at the N.W. entrance of Woodin Channel, W.N.W. 11 miles. It has a rounded top, surmounted by two small pinnacles close together, in some positions shewing as one. Its upper part is bare, of a reddish colour, unlike any other mounttiin in this part. It is detached from the interior chain, which is higher and more irregular. A cascade, 70 feet high, falls into the sea from its side. Bulari Bay (or Moiare) is westward of Mount D'Or. Its western side is formed by the peninsula which separates it from Noumea or Port de France. It is open to the South between S.W. and S.E., and is 13 or 14 miles within the barrier reef. Immediately on the North flank of Mount D'Or are some coal deposits. This part is bounded on the S. E, by a steep rock point, N.W. of w^hich, half a mile, are some shoals. Within these latter, near to the shore, is good anchorage. The S.E. point of the bay is formed by three or four islands (connected by shoal water), which stretch out 2h, miles from the foot of the mount, and must have a good berth in rounding. A mile W.N.W. of this is Cale- ■donienne Shoal, of nine feet, but steep-to ; it lies 1^ miles from the cascade before mentioned. The south-western part of the bay is filled with mud banks. Ngea Island forms the S.W. limit of the bay. Between this island and Duces Peninsula is Port Ngea, entered from the southward only, with a shoal of 13 feet in its mouth. The Bulari Passages through the barrier reef lie with the summit -of Mount D'Or, N. by E. i E. 17 miles in about. latitude 22° 31'. The reef here runs about N.N. W. instead of its usual trend of W.N.W. on either side. They may also be recognized by a small islet on the outer reef and another, Amcd^e Islet, within the reef, with its lighthouse. The Lighthouse on Amcdee Islet is a round iron tower, painted in red and white bands, 175 feet high, in 22° 28' 44" S., 166° 27' 40" E. The light is brilliant and fixed, elevated 150 feet above the sea level, visible all round for 20 miles. Amcdde Islet is of sand, covered with low bushes ; within the banier reef its lighthouse serves as a grand mark for the Bulari Passages. In approaching the Bulari Passages in clear weather, the light may be seen from an elevation of forty feet at a distance of twenty-two miles. It is recommended that the light should be made between N.N.E. and E. by N., on account of the proximity of the reef either side of these bearings : — To enter the north-westernmost of the passages (the one recommended by the pilots), which is some 200 yards wide, and two miles S. 38° W. from the lighthouse, bring the latter to bear N. 38 E,, and steer for it, until within the points of the reefs, when keep a little to the eastward to avoid the point of the great reef on the western side, after passing which steer to pass about a cable on either side of a detached reef which lies one mile N. by E. from the entrance ; thence steer northw^ard between the Thisbe Shoal with If fathoms on it — marked by a perch — on the south-west end of the *' Four Western Banks," and N.W. by N. ^ N. If miles from the lighthouse ; and a shoal about a mile westward of it. From this position Mount Ndoi on the south end of I^ucos Peninsula will bear about N. | W. distant eight miles, and kept on this bearing leads well clear of the shoal which extends one mile eastward from Maitre Island. When the north end of the latter bears about W. by N., course may be altered to about N. W. ^ W., between it and the shoal BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 215 which extends | mile W.S. Westward from the extreme of Duces Peniusuhi. observing that Mount D'Or must not he shut in over the south extreme of the peninsula until the projecting point on the west side of the peninsula abreast the S. E. end of Brun Island o])ens of the white rocks at Pontillon Point to the southward of it, bearing N. | W., which clears the shoal to the westward. A course may now be steered towards the middle of Du Bonzet Island, and round the north-west end of De Brun Island through the south (Little) entrance into the port. Capt. H. Wilson says that the pilots nse only the above northern passage, where the tides set straight through ; that the Lournois Slioai which divides the southern passages is much larger than as laid down, and that the irregular direction of the tides, and the dark colour of the water on the Lournois Shoal combine to make them anything but safe. Noumea lies on the west side of the Ducos Peninsula, within Du Bouzet Island. The water supply is good, boats can fill at the Government wharf. One of the first objects seen in approaching is the semaphore for signalling the approach of vessels, situated at the back of the town. There is a wharf Avhere vessels drawing up to 23 feet can lie, also a jetty. Provisions are dear. The harbour is formed by the east end of Du Bouzet Island, which shelters a space 1^ miles long by half a mile wide, with a depth of five to eight fathoms all over. The southern 'entrance is between the south-east point of Du Bouzet, and a small island, Debrun, to the south of it ; the latter connected with the shore by shoal water. The north-east point, too, of Du Bouzet, has a sort of bar, with 19 feet water between it and the main.* Du Bouzet Island, or He Nou, is 2f miles long from W.N.W. to E.N.E. It is narrow, and consists of a series of hills, of which two close together stand on its north-west end. The next eastward to these is Mount Jo, used as a mark for the entrance through the reef. The Koadstead lies between the north side of the island and a projection from Ducos Peninsula, a space three miles long, east and west, by a mile wide, with deep water all over, and shores bold-to. At its eastern end is a sort of bar above mentioned. Capt. De Montravel says : — What struck us was the splendour of the harbour, formed by a peninsula, Avhich presents in its cleft several creeks, of themselves fit to receive ships, and by an island which runs parallel to the shore, and is separated from it by a channel three miles in length, and about a mile in breadth. This channel, which offers anchorage in any part, shel- tered from all winds, is divided into two parts by a bar at its narrowest part, without intercepting the communication from one to the other, by ships drawing less than 16 feet. It possesses the invaluable advantage of having two outlets, the one to the east, the other to the west, of the island, which serves it as a defence towards the sea. There is complete security and convenient ingress and egress with all winds. The Dumbea or Jitema Passage, through the great reef, lies abreast of Port Noumea, and is a safe and excellent entrance, 13 miles W.N.W. of the Bulari Passage, the Great Abore Reef being straight and continuous between them. The opening, nearly three-quarters of a mile wide, in 22° 21 i' S., 166° 16^' E., is free from danger; the depth is from 50 fathoms in the entrance to 13 and 14 on its inner sides, and close to the reef, but on the south side, a small coral patch projects 200 yards, on which the depth suddenly diminishes from 20 to 6^ fathoms, and is useful for anchoring in case of calm, or being drifted out of the course by the current! The current is almost always to the west from half to one mile per hour, modified by strong breezes from the southern quarter, during which it runs N.W\ and N.N.W., two miles an hour, which makes it more danger- ous as there is no anchorage on the north side. It is best to keep on the south side of the pass at one or two cables' lengths from the reef. Dumbea Passage is distinguished from others by two wooded islets (on one of which, Ndu, is a beacon), one bearing N.N.E., the other N.E. from * The port itself has five to seven fathoms in it : the roadstead— north of Du Bouzet Island— from seven to nine fathoms. H.M.S. Nymph in 1878 reports 16 feet water in this passage (pass between the red and black buoy) ; that a red buoy is placed on the north end of the 2^ fathom shoal abreast Bayonnaise Cove, which is being filled up, and that the point northward has been produced southward about one cable. 216 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. the middle of the entrance, each distant four miles from the pass, and 2^ miles apart. There are no others of the same sort within the reef in this portion of the harrier. Tlie northernmost, Senez or Te Ndn, can he seen two or three miles outside. Its stands on a coral hank, in the N.W. of which is an entrance for boats. The other islet, Laregnere or Nge, is smaller, not very remarkable, and cannot be seen very far. Monnt D'Or bears from the passage N. 72° E. Also the double peak of Mount Kogi (3,537 feet) to the N.W. of Mount D'Or, in one with the little Mount lo, on the west end of Du Bouzet Island, bearing N.E. ^ N., or Freycinet Island (not very clearly distinguishable by a stranger, but lies to the N.W. of Du Bouzet Island). A small, round, and wooded dark islet should bear N.N.E. f E., which bearing leads up to the north entrance, between the dangers within the reef. The hrst is a coral patch lying on with the first leading mark or N.E, of the middle of the entrance ; it should be left to starboard, passing nearer to the pyramid on Te Ndu on the port hand. The next a reef east two miles from the pyramid, nearly awash, but seldom shows, and therefore the more dangerous. The next, the Prony Keef, JN.E. ^ E. three miles from the pyramid, must also be left to port. These reefs aie best seen and avoided by a look-out from aloft. It is H.W., F. & C, in Port Noumea at 8h. 25m. ; springs rise four feet. DUMBEA Bay is to the northward of Port Noumea, and separated from Port Laguerre to the westward by a mass of high land, remarkable from two high summits, whose southern face nins N.N.W. and S.S E. They are called Gere, 1,266 feet high, and stand on the Mestro Peninsula. On the western side of the bay is a creek or harbour with anchorage, at the head of which is a spring, which was foimd to be abundant after a long drought. Port Laguerre lies westward of Mestro Peninsula, sheltered from the S. W. by Jeanne d'Arc Islet (Te Ndii). From the south point of this a coral bank projects three-quarters of a mile to the S E., does not alwaj's break, but is marked by the colour of the water. Its outer extremity is due south of the point which separates the mouths of the two rivers which enter the bay from the N.E. and N.W. The port is a mile in diameter, with good anchorage all over. The best in the triangle formed by tlie three points of the two rivers in 5^ fathoms. Some coal deposits, which at some time may become important, lie up the river, running into Port Laguerre to the westward This bay is readily arrived at by the Noumea Passage carefully conning from the mast-head. Uitoe Passage, in latitude 22'' 10' S., is 14 miles N.W. ^ W. from the Dumbea Passage. The coast within, north-westward of Port Laguene, is lower ; the high lands lie some distance inland. A sharp-pointed conical hill, the Titema Summit (1,174 feet) brought in one with the table- topped Mu Mountain (4,000 feet), N.E. f E., leads through the passage, which is quite clear, and has 14 fathoms water. H.M.S. Nymph, 1878, says : — *' Pilots report three fathoms Tipon the leading mark Mbou Island N.E. ^ E., east end Matthew Isle N. ^ W., about a quarter of a mile beyond turning point " Port Uitoe, a basin sheltered by a line of low islands, lies westward of the Karikate Peak, a conical peak 768 feet high, and affords a large and well-slieltered anchorage. Port St. Vincent is the next important place to the northwest. Mathieu Island, in its south-west part, lies westward of Port Uitoe, with a hill on its west side, which falls nearly perpendicularly into the sea. Between this bluff and some islets is the southern entrance from the Uitoe Passage. The port is chiefly sheltered by three islands, which lie N.N.W. and S.S.E. eight miles, with channels between. The southernmost is Hugon, 3i miles long, steep-to on its east and west sides ; its northern, the shortest, is fronted by a coral and sandy strand. There are some springs 800 yards southward from its north point. Ducos Island is the largest. Its eastern point is a peninsula, joined by a low sandy neck, which forms excellent well- BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 217 sheltered bays on each side of it. That to the south-east is protected partly by Hugon Island. There is a shallow passage between these two islands. The bay on the north side nearly a mile deep, and 750 yards wide, with a depth of live to three fathoms, makes an excellent land-locked basin, where a vessel can heave down at all seasons. Off its entrance is Marceau Island. High water, 5h. 50m. ; rise, 4^ feet. Between the north-west point of Ducos Island and the steep eastern end of the rugged Le Predour Island is the principal entrance to the port (Ducos Passage) not more than one-third of a mile in width, but with deep water. Within tliis the harbour extends eastward along the nortli side of Ducos Island ; but its area near the land, and also in the Gulf of 8t. Denis east- ward, is shoal water. The chart must furnish further instruction. The St. Vincent Passage, through the outer reef, S.W. by W. from Ducos Passage, is wide and deep, and may be known by a sandy islet. (Tenia), covered with shrubs, which stands on the outer reef at a mile north- west from the passage. It is subject to a ground swell. The entrance is ia 22° 2' S., 165° 59' E.* Uarai Passage, in 21° 51^' S., 165" 43' E., may be known by a sandy islet, with some bushes on the reef, about a mile from the south side. A mountain, with a table summit sloping to the South, bearing north, leads up to it. When made out, steer through towards Le Bris Island, like a large hill on the main, leaving it to st«'irboard, and on to the Port, which runs N.W. by N. for about four miles, and a width of 1^ miles, with a depth of from 14 aijreast Le Bris Island to 3 fathoms 1^ miles from its head, inside Avliich it shoals. The anchorage is oft' a bight on its east side. 'Two buoys are marked on the chart olF the edge of the entrance reef on the western side, and a beacon on the extreme of the reef extending southward from Le Bris Island. There is also a passage within the reef to Port St. Vincent. There is another opening through the reef three miles south-eastward of the Uarai Passage. The Burai Passage, in lat 21° 39' S., may be known by a long, low, sandy island inside the reef. The pass is very broad, and in a deep recess of the reef, which here approaches to about two miles of the coast. The pass runs north and south. There is good anchorage within, the best to the south-east, where there is a fine river.t There is a beche-de-mer establish- ment to the north-west. It is a fine anchorage at all seasons. The bight is about three miles deep. Cape Goulvain, in lat. 21° 33' S., is a prominent headland. The reef here is close to the mahiland. Contrarietes Island, a sandbank covered with bushes, is about 12 miles bej'oiid Cape Goulvain. The reef here runs somewhat oil' the land. Seven and a half miles bevond this island is Moueo Passage, in 21° 24' S., 164° 57 E. The entrance lies W. by S. and E. by N., thence gradually turning northward. This bight is five miles deep, with anchorage at its head in five or six fathoms, mud, about three-quarters of a mile northward of Grimoult Island, ott" the north side of which is a 9-feet patch. Puembut Passage, in 21° 14' S., a mile broad, has a reef in its centre, southward of which is the best channel. Inside the channel extends three miles north-eastward, and eight miles northward between the reefs, where it joins the Kon(^ Passage. Anchorage in three fathoms under the western side of an island a mile south-westward of Puembut River, eight miles up the channel, which is a mile wide up to this point, with least depth 4J fathoms. Kone Passage, eight miles to the northward of Puembut Passage, about half a mile Avide in its entrance, extends five miles nortliAvard, with anchorage at its head. Duroc Pass is in lat. 21° S. Pouaco Village is six miles from the entrance ; 2^ miles south-eastward of it is a good anchorage. * Captain H. Wilson says that on Pouen Island, about two miles north-west of the passage, sheep can be procured. t Cai)tain H. Wilson reports that oranjjros are being extensively grown here— information may be obtained at Noumea. There is an inside passage from Noumea to Port Burai, used by local coasters. P BEETT S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH TACIFIC PILOT. Alliance Cut, the next entrance northwavd, in 20° 57', h very narrow. Between lats. 20° 45^^' S. and 20° 41' are two passages tlirongh the reef, that northward, the Koumac Passage ; the southward, the Deverd Passage — which runs east and west toward Cape Deverd, remarkahle for a pointed summit. Tliere is ancliorage under the north side of this lieadland, and a clear wide cliannel to it eight miles long from Deverd entrance. Great Koumac Reef extends from Koumac Passage, 23 miles north-west- ward without an opening, and with lofty mountains abreast it. In 20° 23^' S. is the Gazelle Passage, leading into Nehoue Bay. Cape Tonerre, E. f N. 10 miles from this entrance, is ahout 350 feet high.'^ Behind it is a plateau with two summits, forming a well-marked table-land 800 or 1,000 feet high. (See chart for approach to Nehoud Bay). The best anchorage in Nehoue Bay is in its southern part, in five fathoms, at two cables eastward of the largest islet lying off tlie northern end of Cape Tonerre Peninsula, and two cables northward of a reef under water, which is always visible. Tanle Bay, two miles wide, is separated from Nehoue Bay by Boh Island ; its anchorage is sheltered from the soutlnvard by Tanle Island, lying westward of Boh Island. Bonn'mahame Reef, westward of Tanl^ Island, forms the southern side of the entrance, and must be carefully avoided. The anchorage, in four fathoms, is northward of 01)servatory Hill at the eastern end of Tanle Island, and affords security in the worst weather. It is high water at Tanle at 8h. 4m. ; springs rise five feet. From Tanle Bay the high land of Boume Peninsula extends for 4^- miles north- westAvard to Poume Point. Its highest point is 1,468 feet high. Poume Pass, in lat. 20° 15' S., seven miles westward of Poume Point, 1^ mile wide, may be entered by keeping that point or the i)ointed summit just northAvard of it, east by north. Great care is required in entering this passage, as the tide runs strongly. Flood E. by S. 2 knots ; ebb W. by N. Within the reef the tide runs three knots, flood southward, ebb north- ward. Banare Bay lies five miles northward, with islands and anchorages in it. Off it lies Neba Island, two miles long, north-west and south-east, moderately high. Tliere is ancliorage half a mile off its western side in eight or nine fathoms sand. Two miles south of its south-east extremity is a two fathom patch, another of four fathoms lies north-west three miles from its north- west end, midway between it and the Yande Island. Yande or Yendi Pass about a mile wide, in 20° 5' S., 163° 47' E., is entered "by keeping the summit of Yande Island (1,070 feet) north-east. Great caution must be used on account of the tides, which at time of change produce a sort of bore. Flood runs eastward and ebb westward three knots. Eight miles eastward of Yande lies Paaba Island, five miles long, north and south, Avith islets extending three miles off' its north-west side. The Belep Jsles to the northward, consist of five islands and some rocks. D'Entrecasteaux Reof — An immense range of dangers extends for 150 miles north-west of the north extreme of New Caledonia, probably separated into distinct portions. This dangerous and extensive reef, occupying a space of nearly 1,000 square miles, is an invisible coral reef, with only a few laige rocks or stones on its margin ; one of these on its north-west end is nearly 20 feet high. It has two openings on its wes- tern face, and one (?) on its eastern. This reef encloses four small islands, of about two or three miles in circuit, viz.. North, Middle, and South Huon, With Surprise Island on its south extreme. North Huon Island, in 18° 2' S., has a safe anchorage from easterly Avinds ; but should be carefully approached, having many coral patches two or three miles W.N.W. from it, which is the chaimel. The landing is good, on a steep sandy beach. It abounds with turtle and fish, but no Avater. Middle Huon is safe of approach, but the anchorage is bad, and its fringe reef is dangerous for boats to cross. It is in 18° 18' 37", and abounds with turtle, fish and landrail. South Huon is still more dangerous of approach for boats than INIiddle Huon. It is about south four miles from Middle Huon. Surprise Island is S.S.E. 26 miles from Middle Huon. It was found that the west face of the reef forms two deep bights. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 219 The north-west extreme may he known hy several rocks 15 to 50 feet out of the Avater. Captain D'Urville determined tlie position of the north extreme as follows :— North-east point. 17° 59' 6" S., 162° 55' 14" E. ; the north-west point, 17' 52' 40" S., 162° 41' 47" E. The North-east Coast of New Caledonia trends in a general direc- tion for 210 miles. It has not been fully surveyed. It possesses the same dangerous character as the other side from its barren reefs, is a lee shore from the prevalent trade wind, and the northeru portion is liable to cyclones, to which the portions south of lat. 21^-° do not appear to be liable. In navi- gating Avithinthe reefs a man aloft should be kept on the look-out for dan- gers. The depth between the reef and the shore varies from 49 to 22 fathoms. Queen Charlotte Foreland, the south-east extreme, is fringed with the coral reef, and may be saiil to be limited to the north by the little harbour of late, an indilferent anchorage ; it is a good place for heaving a vessel down, and has plenty of fresh water. Kuebiini, eight miles south-eastward, is entered between the islands Nau and Nea. The anchorage, in 11 fathoms, is only suitable for large vessels as a stopjung-place : care must be exercised in entering to avoid a danger lyiiig in the channel. A dangerous 2^-fathom patch lies a ndle N.N.E. from Kuebiini entrance Southward of late Passage the reef with 4S fathoms on it is three miles •off the shore. North of late Passage the reef is shallower and awash in places for 2h miles ; northward of this, between 22° 5' and 22° 1', the least depth is 3^ fathoms. Thence to 21° 18' S., the reef continues at a distance of seven miles oft" shore, with many openings through it. Cape Coronation is ten miles from late Passage in 22' 2' S. North of Cape Coronation is the small river Unia. Point Uinn^, or Rencontre Bay, in 21° 59' S , may be known l)y a large red vertical patch on the iiank of the hill to the north. The anchorage is good. The land northward is irregular, and of a reddish tint. On the northern side of Uinne Bay the land is 1,184 feet liigh; three miles northward of it is Kuakue Bay, one mile wide and one mile deep. Two patches of 2 and H fathoms lie 1^ miles northward of its entrance. "There is good anchorage in the head of this bay in 15 fathoms. Hence N. Avestward are numerous passages through the reef, for wdiich see Chart, Kundio liiver in 21° 46V S. has an anchorage oft' its mouth sheltered from the eastward by reefs. Between this river and Tupeti Island, six miles to the N.W., reefs extend to a distance of .3^ miles from the shore, with a passage on either side of them, best understood from the chart. Tupeti Island is of a pyramidal form detached from the coast. Port Bouquet extends 5?. miles northward from Tupeti Island, to Nemmini Peninsula, 1,184 feet high, sheltered from the eastward by two reefs, with, in its centre, Nenou Island, 1^ miles long, E. by N. and AY. l>y S. 'Tupeti Pass is two miles wide, with a dangerous sunken rock exactly in its centre. To enter southward of this rock, bring the southern extreme of Nemmini Peninsula S. 18^° W. or the summit of Tupeti Island S. 25° E.; the northern of these courses will lead to the northern entrance of Port Bouquet, close round Nemmini Peninsula ; and the southern will lead up to the southern entrance of the port, Avhich passes close round the northern side of Tupeti Island ; the central passage crosses the line of reefs north-east of the east end of Nenou Island. Tchio Pass, 1^ miles wide, in 21° 31|' S., is entered by bringing Bouata- .mh-6 Rock, a high black rock covered Avith pines, to bear S. 30° W. Within, the reefs flood runs north-west, ebb south-east. Nekete Bay. 20 miles beyond Port Bouquet, its entrance is tAvo miles wide between the coast and a small island, Nani, on its northern side. It has good anchorage. The Nekete Pass, half a mile wide, is entered by Iceeping Nani Island bearing S. 31° W. Off the north end of Nani Island a reef extends nearly a mile, forming the eastern side of Lavaissiere Bay, 1-^- miles in diameter, Avith good anchorage in its southern part in 10 or 15 fathoms. Its entrance is only tAvo cables Avide, Avith a depth of 12 to 24 fathoms. Hence to Cape Dumoulin, pp 220 BEETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 6^ miles, the shore has a. line of reefs, the Bogota Reefs, running parallel ■svith it at a distance of a mile. For tlie otf-lyiiig patches see chart. Port Kanala, of which Cape Dumoulin forms the eastern entrance- point, is probably the largest port on tlie east coast. The exterior reef is 4^ miles off shore at Kanala; there are several entrances through it. The liar- "bour, 1:^ miles -wide at its entrance, extends five miles S.S.E., with several good anchorages at its head. Port Kuaua, westward of Cape Bej^at, which is five miles from Cap& Dumoulin, is a j^ood harbour, divideil into inner and outer. There is a difficulty in entering witli ordinary winds. Cape Bocagk, in 21° 13' S., is composed of high j)ei-pendicular hills, visible at a great distance. It is one of the most projecting and distinctly marked points on the east coast of New Caledonia. One-tree Island stands on the Barrier Reef to the south-east of the- Uaihi Pass, which is three miles broad and abreast Gape Bocage. Tliere are several other passes hereabout. Cape Tuho is in 20" 48' S., oil" wliich is the wide Ti-ouaka Passage ; the reef approaching the shore on each side. To the westM'ard it runs out suddenly again to a distance of 10 miles off the shore. Yengen, or lenghene. — For three miles before reaching Yengen (from One-tree Pass, the principal entrance) the coast assumes an extraordinary- appearance, bordered by a range of perpendicular black rocks, nearly 1,000 feet high, rising into points as sharp as needles. Toward Yengen this range breaks into detached rocks (the ToAvers of Notre Dame), only one of whicb stands on the north side of the harbour, of Avhich it is in fact the North Head. The entrance gradually shoals from 17 fathoms to 4. The inner anchorage is not so well sheltered as to be safe. Two large rivers enter the harbour. Cape Colnett is readily known by the waterfalls to the north of it j the land is the highest in New Caledonia, the loftiest summit, Mount Douit^ being over it. Tliere is a sand islet off the cape Avith a deep water channel inside. The outer reef, which is entirely interrupted at Yengen, at Cape Colnett again ap]iears near to land, and gradually increases in distance from it to the north. There are several passages (as shown by the chart), and IT miles beyond Cape Colnett is that of Pouebo or Puessepo, which has a southerly direction. Balade is 9^ miles beyond Pouebo. One necessary observation in making out the place is, that from Yengen there is no sandy beach visible from outside the outer reef until you come to Balade, from wliich they extend to the west. The Balade Passage is half a mile Avide. At tAA'o or three miles, further Avest is a second passage, not very Avell knoAvn. From Balade Pass, to the anchorage the distance is four miles ; the best position is Avith the "blockhouse bearing S. by W., and the old fort kept at a little distance to the left of the church. A moss Pass, three miles AvestAvard of Balade Pass, is about three- qnarters of a mile Avide ; its entrance is found by bringing the summit of Paon Island to bear S. 69° W., and Avhen up Avitli the entrance, rounding the reef at a cable distance until the Blockhouse bears S. 29° E. Both passes- require great caution on account of the currents. The flood running into- these passages divides into tAvo streams Avhen Avithin the entrances. AVater is easily procured at the mission, and is good. There are two- species of fish, the one red, the other like a sardine — are very poisonous. It is best to consult the natives before using any caught here. It is H.W., F. & C.J at 6h. 15m.; spring range from 3 feet 6 inches to 4 feet 3 inches. The Diahot River, 80 miles long, enters the sea in Harcourt Bay, 10 miles AvestAvard of Balade, from Avhicli it is reached by a good channel, and is of increasing interest on account of the recent discoA^eries of gold on its "banks. The navigable portion extends from Pam Isle at the entrance ta Bonde, a distance of 25 miles. At its mouth the river is three-quarters of a mile Avide, gradually decreasing till at Bonde it is 125 yards Avide. Thirteen miles np are the mines of ISIouendine or Manghine. The navigable portion of the river consists of deep channels, separated by moving sandbanks. In the eastern part of Harcourt Bay is excellent anchorage, near Pam BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 221 Isle, on its eastern or western sides. The bottom is of white sand, and good holding ground. Bahibio Ishmd, off the N.W. point of New Caledonia, is not very well known. There are some channels within the reef leading to the N.W. through De Varenne Strait, and round the north end of the island to the •openings through the reef on its eastern side. There is considerable trade between New Caledonia and Auckland, whose timber, potatoes, etc., are largely imported. Situated on the edge of ihe tropics its productions will naturally be varied when cultivated to any •extent, including sugar, coffee, oranges, etc. THE LOYALTY ISLANDS may be considered part of the New Caledonia Group, running parallel with the trend of that island, at a distance of 50 to 60 miles, and consist of three principal islands, Mare, Lifu, and Uea ; between the former two are live smaller islets. Mare, or Britannia Island.— Cape Coster, the N.E. point, is in 21° 29' S., 108° 6' E. The eastern side of the island runs nearly north and south 12 miles, a steep cliff, witli a narrow beach. Cape Koussin, on the north coast, is separated from Cape Coster by an extensive bay. The northern side of the island is a deep bay, having Cape Mackau at its west extremity. Cape Coster is a peninsula, surrounded by breakers at a short •distance. Off Cape Mackau is a small island, Molard Island, about three miles in circuit. The anchorage is on the north side between Cape Roussin and Mackau, to the westward of some perpendicular white cliffs. Off the north shore of Mare Island there are several coral patches and knolls, with apparently two to five fatlioms water over them, lying about three-tj^uarters of a mile from the beach, with the church bearing S. W. by S. Tandine or Undine Bay appears to afford the only anchorage on the west side of Mare Island ; the bay, about two miles across, recedes to the north-eastward from Castle I'oiiit, and when well open a large white house will be seen north of a grove of cocoanut trees. North-westward, besides Molard Island, are three other small islands, Hamelin, Laine, and Vauvilliers. East of these is a fourth, Boucher Isle, or Teka, eight or ten miles in circuit.* Lifu, or Chabrol, the island next to the N.W., is a coral island, 100 to 250 feet high, level at the top, with perpendicular cliffs, steep-to, €xcept at some of the points, off which ledges extend. Its S.E. point. Cape Pines, is a projecting promontory, crowned with a mass of pine trees. At five or six miles north-east of it, and beyond Point Daussy, is a large and deep bay, Chateaubriand Bay, exposed to the prevalent winds. At Cape Bernardin, the nortli-east point, the coast trends westward, perpendicular and wild-looking to Cape Escarpe, the north point ; W.S. Westward of it, six miles, and 2^ off Aime-Martin Point is a dangerous reef, a mile in length and half a mile broad. Tlie west coast of Lifu is nearly perpendicular in most parts. Wide or Sandal Baj' is a considerable inlet on the north-west coast. It lies between Lefebvre and Aime-Martin Points, 10 miles apart. At 1^ or two miles eastward of the south point is a high, perpendicular reddish cliff, covered with pine trees ; on the space between these capes is the dangerous Selter Bank, about two miles off shore, between one of these capes and the high hill on the nortli side, over Morne Bay. In beating into Sandal Bay do not pass beyond the line of this hill in one with the white sandy beach near the north-west part of the bay. In its south-east part, near the sandy beach of Kyjah or Caidja, is a small detached islet, near which is a bank deep * H.M S. Renard, 1878. reports :— Tiprer (Teka) Island is in 167° 57^' E., or about 5' East of the position on chart. Malard Island and Markau Point (N.W. point of Mar<^') are also a corresponding distance too far East (and probably the whole position of MarC'). From hydrographical notes by the Commodore in 1875 Tiga is placed 6' too far east on chart, and Mare 4^' too far west. Otf the north shore of Mar6 is a number of patches with apparently two to five fathoms on them. 222 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. enoiigli to anchor on if necessary, with Cape Lcfe"bvi-e bearing S. 80° ^y. Morue Bay, or Uacho, is a slight indentation in the north-east part of the hay. Nearly in its centre is a large black rock on the beach— the Tower. There is anchorage either to the east or west of this rock. The eastern anchorage is, with the Bluff" (Le Morne) S. 84° W., and Tower Eock N. 26" W. The western anchorage is only lit for small vessels. No part of the l)ay is safe during the hurricane months, from Decembei* till the end of March. Fresh water is very scarce. Uea, or Halgan, separated from Lifu by a channel 20 miles broad,, is a narrow belt of raised coral, extending 23 miles from S. by W. to N. by E., with a breadth in the middle of 14 miles, and at the north and south parts seven or eight miles. Towards the west a chain of islets, the Pleiades, extend in a circle from the north to the south end of the island, encircling a lagoon of 12 or 15 miles in diameter. Bishop Sound, in which are several ancliorages reached by the passages between these coral islets. The village- of Idgawee and a mission station are on the south-east side of this bay ; the village of Achir is on the north-east side. It is the only one of the Loyalty Group which affords safe shelter. The Northern Passages.— The tirst islet of the Pleiades resembles a mined tower. There is is no passage on either side of this. The next islet is called La Baleine (Whale) or Isenay. Between AVhale and Turtle islets is the Whale Pass, narrow, but deep, and running to S.S.E. The Bull Entrance, the great N. W. Pass, is between the fifth (Pine) and the followinj^ islet (Olo), nearly a mile wide, with 12 fathoms water, in a S.E. byE. direction. The southern entrances are in some degree preferable, from the vdn^ being more favourable. The Styx Passage is taken l)y approaching (not too near) the south point of Mouli or Badeneu Island, and then steering, at three-quarters or one mile off' shore, to W. Ijy N. for two miles, when the^ entrance will be found between the third and fourth islet. It is broad and safe, running to N. and N. by E. The broad pass of Ancmata is further west. From tliis entrance to the Catholic mission there is a clear passage. The church may be seen from afar. The best anchorage is near Eaiaoue, or Sandalwood Wells, in 4^ fathoms, with the chief's house S.S.E. Uea is the most fertile of the group ; poultry and pigs may be procured, but good water is scarce. The Beaupre Islands lie some six leagues north-westward of the north-west part of Uea. They consist of several small low islands, covered with cocoa-nut trees, and surrounded by a coral reef, which extends from the islands some distance to the north-west and north. The Astrolabe Reefs are some 30 miles north-westward from Beau- pre Islands, and 60 miles from the nearest point of New Caledonia, lying in a nearly east and W. direction Tlie southernmost of them may be about live or six miles long. At the north extremity is a sandy islet, nearly level with the Avater. The northernmost of these reefs is four leagues distant from the other, and about the same in length (chart). The north point is in lat. 19^ 14' 20", long. 165° 26' 24" E. They are ])laced iiv the chart betAveeiL the parallels of 19-49 and 19-57 S., and 165-16 and 165-50 E. Petrie Beef is about 5^ miles long, north and south, and three miles broad. On the north-west side is an opening, about two miles wide, leading" into a lagoon with apparently deep water. On its west and soutli-east sides are sand banks 20 to 25 feet. Off' the north extremity a strong tide rip was observed, the stream setting to the north-east. The north point of Petrie Pteef is placed in 18° 31' S., 164° 26' E. THE LOW ARCHIPELAGO, OR PAUMOTU GROUP. This gTOupis too extensive to come within the scope of tliiswork, and as Tahiti has tirst to be visited (see page 223) tlie necessary information, pilot, &:c., can be obtained there. The chief trade is in copra, beche-de-mer,, turtle, &c. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 223 SOCIETY ISLANDS (FRENCH). Tlie ports open to foreign commerce at Tahiti and its dependencies are Papiete and Toanoa at Tahiti, and Papetoai at Moorea or Eimco. Foreign ships arc authorised to proceed from i^apiete or Toanoa to Papetoai, and vice versa, for the purpose of ejecting their hinding. No foreign-ooing ship may, unless by special permission or a case of necessity, anchor in any of the ports of the islands subject to the French Protectorate besides those mentioned above. TJie coasting trade is exclusively reserved to vessels carrying the French or the Protectoral (Tahitian) flag. At Papiete licenses are issued to foreign vessels to load oranges for exportation in other ports of Tahiti and iNloorea. Practically the coasting trade is carried on by Tahitian vessels. Exports — Cotton, copra, cocoa-nut oil, pearl shells, fungus and oranges. The year may be thus divided : — 1. The season ot south-east winds. May to August. 2. Of easterly winds, from September to November, and part of December, Avhich is the finest season of the year. 3. The bad or rainy season, from tiie middle of December to March or April. The south-east trade-winds, on reaching Tahiti, are divided into two "brandies by the peninsula of Taiarapu and the mountains, of which that passing to the north east blows regularly, but that which continues along the soutli-west is impeded by the island of Eimeo, and deflected by it towards Tahiti, reaching it as a south-west, or west, or even as a north- west wind, according to the force of the trade. This must be taken into consideration in making Papiete. The extent of the zone of calms, caused by the mountains, varies ia different parts of the day, and with the strength of the breeze. The Tides are inconsiderable. Maitea, or Osnaburgh Island, the easternmost of the group, is 1,597 feet high, round, and not over seven miles iu extent. Its north side is remarkaljly steep. On the south side the declivity is more gradual. Near the east end are two remarkable rocks, and a reef runs oil" eastward half a league. It is in 17° 53', 148° 5' E. Tahiti, 32 miles long from north-west to south-east, is an elongated range of higli land, interrupted by an isthmus three miles broad. The land rises to a considerable height on both extremities of the island. The loftiest mountain, in the northern peninsula, Orohena, is 7,339 feet high. Outside the low belt ot land at the foot of the mountains, a coral reef encircles the island at tiie distance of two or three miles, and within this are several excellent harbours, bnt the best and only one used is Matavai Bay on the north side. Point Venus is the northern point of Tahiti. There is a small church and a fort on tlio point ; the coral reef extends one-third of a mile off. The Lighthouse is a square white tower, 72 feet high ; from it is shown a fixed 'tvhite light, 82 feet above the sea, visible 15 miles. Artemise Bank lies E § S. , nine miles, from Venus Point light. From the South or S.E., on opening the light, a vessel should not steer West of North until the light bears S. W. by W. \ W., when she maj^ alter course to West, passing northward of all dangers. A good day mark is Eimeo open of Point Venus. Matavai Bay lies westward of Point Venus. West of the point is the Dolphin Bank, separated from it l)y a very narrow channel ; this bank has only 13 feet on it in places. The S.W. limit of the bay at Tahara, or West Bluff, surmounted by One Tree Hill, is a mile from Point Venus. Some detaclied spots lie off the West Blutl", and northward of Dolphin Bank, with 18 and 20 feet water on them. One, Banana Keef ; another Pooreo Reef. Papawa Harbour, one mile long E. and W., is a mile AV.S.W. of West Bluff, formed seaward by the line of shore reef, just level with the water. Outside it the water is unfathomable. The village lines the shore. Toanoa Harbour adjoins it on the West, its entrance formed by an opening in the outer reef. 2^ BEETT'S new ZEALAND AND SOUTH TACIFIC PILOT. In clear weather the mountains of Otaheite may he seen 90 miles. The Sorts most frequented arc on the north side, and may be approached without ifFiculty -when the trade wind is blowing Sometimes in the winter months the trade wind is interrupted by breezes from N.AV. and W., and at others calm and unsettled weather prevail. At such times avoid getting into the "bay between Otaheite and Tiarrabou (the lesser jieninsula), especially on the S.W. side of the island ; the swell rolls in heavily on the shore, and there is no anchorage. Matavai Bay may be considered a safe anchorage from April to December ; during the rest of the year the trade is liable to interruptions from westerly winds, which blow directly into Matavai, and occasion a high sea. The anchorage is protected by Point Venus and the Dolphin Shoal. Between it and Point Venus is a channel 50 yards wide, with 17 to 10 fathoms close to the reet ; and by anchoring a boat on the edge of the shoal a vessel may enter with perfect safety, provided the breeze be fair. It is, however, better to pass southward of the bank, and haul round towards the ancliorage, taking care not to get to leeward, so as to bring the north-cast blufi'of One-tree Hill to bear southward of south-east, as there are coral banks in that direction. Anchor in 8^ or 9 fathoms, mud, taking care of the reef that lies oft' the shore. Westward of Matavai are three good harbours, Papawa, Toanoa, and Papiete, the latter the largest and most frequented. The entrances to all are extremely narroAv ; a stranger should take a proper pilot. Toanoa, four miles west of Matavai, may be known by a remarkable rugged mountain, seen through a deep valley when abreast it. The channel into Toanoa is 330 yards wide ; off the eastern side of the passage is a rock, which sometimes breaks, lying north-Mest 60 fathoms from the breakers, and another on the inner side of the opposite reef ; neither, however, narrow the channel much, and are only dangerous if the wind breaks the ship off, or in rounding the reefs closely. With a fine Avind keep mid-channel, and clewing all up, allow the ship to shoot into a berth, two cables from the shore, in 13 or 14 fathoms. Here she must wait till the wind falls, and then warp or tow into the inner harbour. Further information cannot here l)e given. Papiete is two miles westward of Toanoa. The entrance, only 320 feet in the clear, has a bar with 4^ fathoms on it. The current here sets out strong, in blowing weather the sea breaks quite across. A pilot is necessary for this port, and boats should be ready to tow or run out kedges as required, whether the pilot advises or not. By night the entrance is marked by two ted lights in one, bearing E.S.E. (These lights cannot be depended on.) After the entrance is passed, steer S. by E f E., until the first rock on the inside, bearing S.E. by S., | of a mile from the eastern dry reef is passed ; then haul towards tlie missionary church, and beat up the anchorage Isetween that shore, which may be approached within half a cable, and the reefs which extend from the Low Island towards the south-west. There is a flagstaft" on its south point. These reefs will be seen, and may be ap- proached as close as convenient, Another rock lies S. i W., 2,000 feet from the entrance ; but with the trade wind this will be weathered. Papiete is subject to calms and hot weather, being rather to leeward. The tides in these harbours are irregular. It is generally high water half an hour after noon every day, and low water at six in the morning, but only varies about a foot. The patent slip at Papiete will take a vessel of GOOtons, the heaving down quay being adapted to careening vessels of a far larger size. Fresh water of a good quality can be got free of charge at the watering quay. Fresh pro- visions, stores, and supplies of various kinds can be procured, but the price is large. A vessel from the east finding that the eastern breeze does not reach Papiete should bear toAvards Moorea, and then approach Papiete on a south- cast course. Otherwise this failure of the wind nn'glit be dangerous in causing the ship to be drifted on to the reef. If the east or north-east Avind is well established, it may be better to enter by the Tau-Noa channel to the north-east, but under the pilot's direction. In leaving it is better to pass BRETT'S yEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 225 north of Moorea, to get in the true trade, and to avoid the cahns and UllCd'tnill Ijl'GGZGS , The N.E. reef extends from \\ mile E. by E. \ N. of Point Venus, 10 niilcs to the first valley eastward of it. This reef is detached, and parallel to the coast, except near its centre, where it trends N. N. E. for a quarter of a mile. The channel between this and the reef southward is abreast this valley (Hapaina), and two miles wide. To avoid this reef a ship from the eastward, when within ten miles of Port Venus, ought not to bring that point westward of W.S.W. Between the reef and shore the passavater (4i fathoms) on which the sea breaks in bad weather. It is the only danger outside the shore reefs. Nafanua Bank commences 1^ miles north of the eastern end of Taema Bank, and extends E. by N. ^ N. three miles to the south-west end of Anuu Island, from a quarter to half a mile wide, and from 8 to 26 fathoms water, irregular bottom. Steamers from the northward should use the channel between Anuu Island (and these banks) and Tutuila, it being half a mile wide and clear of danger. Breaker Point, W. by N. ^ N. , leads through. Taema Bank should be avoided, even in fine Aveather, by vessels drawing over 12 feet. Whale and Grampus Rocks are the only hidden dangers inside the entrance. Whale Rock, 100 feet in diameter, has eight feet on it at low tide, with 18 to 25 fathoms around it. A black cask buoy is placed 60 feet east of the rock in 23 fathoms. The sea only breaks in bad weather, others wise it is not easilj^ seen. There is a passage, one cable wide, between the rock and Blunt Point, with from 25 to 30 fathoms water. Granipus Rock, N.N.E. ^ E., three cables from Whale Rock, is 60 feet in diameter,- with. eight feet on it at low tide, and 23 to 25 fathoms water in the clianncl. A red cask buoy is placed 60 feet southward of the roc;k in 25 fathoms. A sunken rock N.N. W. I W., 4^ cables from Grami3us Rock, is well marked by the break on it. The Pilot lives on Anuu, and if tlie signal is made will board the vessel in the channel, or abreast the island outside. Supplies. — Wood and water can be had. Fruits, such as bananas, oranges, pine-apples, cocoa-nuts, and plaintains, are plentiful. Yams, taro, and bread-fruit can be procured in small quantities. Directions. — Having entered midway between Anuu and Red Point, keep Tower Rock a little on the starboard bow until up witli Breaker Point ; then haul in, giving the point a berth of one cable, when bearing E.N.E., steer N.N.W. ^ W. 2^ cables until Blunt Point bears west, when the northern side of Whale Rock will be in line with it, and distant 1^ cable ; then steer N.W. I N., keeping the village of Leloaloa a little on starboard bow, avoiding the reef off Goat Island, until the inner bay is open W. J S., thence in mid-channel. Good anchorage anywhere in the inner harbour, in 6 to 25 fathoms, blue mud and sand, excellent holding ground. Under IS fathoms the harbour becomes narrow for large ships to swing at single anchor. Sailing vessels experience no difficulty entering, as the trades blow directly in. A good working ship may beat out against the trades, but it is generally preferable to go out with the land breeze, from 21i. to 5h. or 6h, a.m.; the only difficulty is the liability of losing it before getting sufficiently clear of Breaker Point to allow a vessel to wait for the trade wind. The surf always breaks heavily on Breaker Point and on the reef outside of Point Distress ; if a vessel loses the wind before getting clear of these points she had better anchor at once. From November to May, westerly winds are frequent, then sailing vessels can get out without difficult}-. Tides rise 3 feet 4 inches at springs, and 2 feet at neaps ; H. W., F. & C, at 6h. 20m. "230 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. The villajje of Pago-Pa.iro is at tlie head of the harhour.* Leone Bay, on the S.W. side of the ishind, 12 miles from Paj;o-Pag:o, is open to the south ; Avlien the trades hlow steadily it is smooth and safe. There are no outlying or hivhicli is a reef, five miles long, and beyond and between it and Great Passage Island Reef is a passage, reported full of shoals. Eleven miles S.S.E. of Kombelau Point is Nemena or Direction Island, surrounded in every direction by outlying reefs. * ' In going westward from Savu Savu Bay, small sailing vessels gain time by passing through a break in Direction Island Reef abreast the island, as follows : steer in ajjproaching the lon^ reef with right extreme of Direction Island just open of left extreme of Makongai, pass a few yards from Direc- tion Island, and take the most westerly of three breaks in the Avest side of the barrier." — H.M.S. Alacrity. From Direction Island the reef trends W. by N. ; at 10 and 20 miles respectively are the Nandi and Buia Passages, and some others. Is'andi Passage has from 12 to 16 fathoms ; one or two rocks, distinguishable by the eye, lie in the way. Buia Passage has about the same depth, and with care is tit for a large shij). Nandi Bay is five miles N.E. of the south point of Vanua-Levu. On its shores and on the River Nandi are some of the best plantations. Beyond Buia Point, the S.W. point of Vanua-Levu, the passage through the reef becomes more intricate ; and opposite Rabe-Rabe Island it is quite narrow, but with sufficient water for any vessel. Buia Passage is nearly opposite So Levu, where the anchorage is by no means good or safe. Trading vessels prefer anchoring oft" Ragi-Ragi, or Cocoanut Point, six miles further westward. Within the sea reef the current is often very strong, governed by the strength of the wind and the force of the sea breaking over. The rise is five feet. Mbua, or Sandalwood Bay, though much filled with large reefs, offers ample space for anchorage, and is formed by Lecumba Point on the East, and that of Diniba-Dimba on the West. The land immediately sur- BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 241 rounding it is low, but a few miles back rises in high peaks. That of Corobato is 2,000 feet high. The tide mns 1^ to 2 knots, the flood to the westward, and ebb to the eastward. The channel to Sandalwood Bay is wide and clear, and the chart, with mast-head pilotage, a sufficient guide. There is excellent anchorage in the bay with any required depth, and as tlie land is low, rising gradually to the neighbouring hills, it would be found a good refuge in a hurricane, and free from the devastating squalls which are whirled from the high land of Ovalau and other harbours, and which occasion such danger to shipping. Tliese hurri- canes are generally experienced in January, February, and March, the last the most dangerous month. To reach the anchorage in Sandalwood Bay, off Mbua River, round La- kumbi Point, at the distance of three cables, bring it to bear S.S.W., and keep this bearing on until Seseleka Peak bears N.W. by W. ^ W. In this position there are six fathoms soft mud. Across Sandalwood Bay to Mbua the soundings decrease gradually from 14 fathoms at the entrance. The river is marked by stakes, and has two to three feet on the bar, deepening to 1^ fathoms to tlie town, a mile from the entrance. H.M.S. Pearl, going from Sandalwood Bay to Levuka, after passing half a mile outside Cocoanut Point, steered S.E. by E. f E. for the westernmost Buia Passage, in which there .are several sunken patclies contracting it to about one cable. Several openings were seen through the reef. There is said to be a better passage further eastward. Yadua Island lies west of Sandalwood Bay, the whole interval be- tween foul ground. Porpoise Harbour lies to the southward ; 1^ miles deep and one mile wide, open to the south-east, but protected by a double reef. The entrance is on the east side. North of Dimba-Dimba Point is a high peak. Beyond this is Ruku-Ruku Bay, Avith a reef across its mouth, leavin*^ only a narrow ship channel. Ivaca Peak, on the north side, is 1,563 feet high. The Island of Yangaga is immediately opposite this peak. Monkey-face Passage lies between them. Yangaga Island is 600 feet high ; there are turtles in the season. Viedrala, Tavea, and Galea are rocky islands, from 50 to 150 feet high. On the Monkey- face Passage side the land rises very abruptly from the sea. In crossing Ruku-liuku Bay, bring Seseleka Peak S ^ E. until abreast Sleepy Point. After rounding Nai Viiaka, many reefs will be seen, including one in the centre of jNIonkey-face Passage, but leaving navigable channels with 13 fathoms for steam or fair wind. Naloa Bay is a wide oj)ening, protected on the north by two or three small islets. Off Yangaga Island the outer edge of the Great Sea Reef is 16 miles distant. Running east and west it takes a more southerly direction toward Round Island, hereafter described. There are several small openings, very dangerous, if practicable, and within are many sunken coral patches. The islands on the coast from Naloa Bay to Muthuata, 25 miles, are low. The town of Mhattuua is in an open valley close to high-water mark. Immediately off it lies the high island of Muthuata, which protects the harbour from the north wind, and is about a mile long. Twelve miles north of it is Kie Island, within the barrier reef. The land on this part of the coast rises abruptly from the water in peaks 2,000 feet and upwards. Sixteen miles eastward is the island of Male. Opposite to it is the Mali Passage, and 13 miles further is the last opening on the north coast through the outer reef to the ship channel within, the Sau Sau passage 33 miles from Udu Point. There is one tolerably good harbour in the interval, Tibethe, and several towns around the bay. Sau Sau Passage, broad and deep, may be recognized from seaward by Drua Drua Island, Kavcva Island, Monk Rock, and two rocks nearer the outer edge of the reef, which appear like vessels under sail. Kia Island, 22 miles westward of Sau Sau Passage, on a projection of the reef 12 miles from the main land, forms a good mark for this part, and in clear weather can be seen 35 miles. H.M.S. Pearl passed in tlnough Sau Sau Channel, skhted the reef at a distance of about two cables, in 12 to 13 242 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. fathom, as far as Sau Sau Island. Good anchorage was obtained in 10 fathoms, with Sau Sau Island N. hj^ E i E. ; Kia Island W. i N. ; and Mali Island S.AV. by S. Mali Island has a small island near its west end, Voro Voro, joined to it at low tide. Off the north end of Mali, about mid-channel, is a shoal, with apparently less than three fathoms over it. From the north-east end of Voro Voro a spit extends one cable northward. Ndreketi River.— Off its month are extensive mud banks, falling gradually into deep water ; it is reported that a vessel of 90 tons had passed through into the river, whose entrance is 300 yards wide, wath a depth of from two to three fathoms in the deepest part, which is narrowed by mud banks. 4^ fathoms were obtained 4^ miles within its mouth. The north shore of Vanua-Levu ap])cars to be well peopled. Between the eastern and western groups, southward of Vanua Levu, is a range of islands. Koro is one of the most fruitful islands of the gi'oup. It produces cotton, oil, and turtle shell. It lies about 30 miles north-east of Ovalau Island, is 11 miles long north-east and south-west, six miles broad, and 2,000 feet high. The south point, about 150 feet high, is much lower than the rest of the land. A reef, which breaks heavily, fringes its east and south sides, and ends in an elbow, H miles south-west of South Point. There appeared to be no fringing reef off its western shore for live miles north of South Point. Thence to North-west Point, 2^ miles, are several reefs from a half to three-quarters of a mile from the shore. There is anchorage in 15 fathoms, coral, between the reefs off the village of Cavalailai, about 1^ miles southward of North-west Point. Southward of the anchorage are two reefs extending westward ; northward of the anchorage is a shoal, with a sand bank above water, and a reef, partly above Avatcr, lies half a mile to the north-west. There are several villages on the west side of the island. The north- west side has a fringe reef. Numerous detached shoals lie from a half to two miles from the shore, 1)etween North-west Point and Nabuna Village, three miles north-east of it, between which are several passages for small, vessels, leading to a reported good anchorage two miles eastward of North-west Point. The Alacrity anchored in seven fathoms, sand and mud, good hold- ing ground, off Nabuna village. Eastward of Nabuna the fringe reef in some places extends nearly three-quarters of a mile from the shore, and a mile westward of North-east Point detached reefs lie nearly two miles from the shore A spit, which breaks heavily, extends If miles N. ^ E. from North- east Point. On the east side, from North-east Point to Nagaiduma, four miles southward, the reef does not appear to extend over a quarter of a mile offshore; but off Nagaiduma are detached reefs three-quarters and 1^ miles from the coast. A little southward of Nagaiduma is a passage leading to an anchorage in six fathoms, mud, close to the shore near the plantation. South- ward of Nagaiduma the fringe reef appears to extend about a mile from the shore. There is said to be anchorage near East Point, about three miles from Nagaiduma. Horse-shoe Reef, Thacku-Momo, is 11 miles north-west of Nairai, in 17° 39' S., 179° 16' E., awash at half ebb, Avith but one narrow opening to a basin of 12 fathoms depth. The distance between this reef and the northern elbow of that bounding Narai Island is 7^ miles. Narai Island, 31 miles E.S.E. of Ovalati, lies north and south, 4 miles long, and 3 miles broad, surrounded by a reef which extends 5 miles from the west end, and from the north and south extremes 4 miles. An opening, leading into sheltered anchorage, 3 miles in extent, and 10 to 15 fathoms water, lies with Needle Peak N.N.E., but in going in keep a mast- head look out for 9 ft. patches. Needle Peak, 1,078 feet high, rises in the northern part of the island, H.W. F. & C. 5h. 53m. ; rise 4 feet 7 inches. There is a passage and harbour between the island and Mothea Reef Avhich stretches off towards the south. Cobu Rock, 30 feet high, is a good mark for the passage when it bears east. It lies a mile south of south point of Nairai. In the harbour of Venemole, on the west side, known by two small islets joined to Nairai by the reef, which forms a protection against north BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 24S winds, vessels of any dranght may anchor in 15 fathoms, good bottom, from a quarter to half a mile olf shore. Further southward is a 3-fathom bank, the only danger inside the reef towards the Cobu Kock or S. W. passage. A mile north is Venemole Bay, which is quite shallow. Between the western reef and the island is a good ship channel, leading to the large Bay of Corobamba, on whose eastern side is safe anchorage in 13 fathoms, white sandy bottom. The reef extends to the south, and passes between Cobu and Nairai to the south-west. The only danger is a small patch lying E.S.E. a mile from the south end of the island, and a mile north of Colni Kock. The town of Corobamba lies at the bottom of the bay. The Cobu Rock is enclosed by Motliea Reef, which here spreads to the width of about three miles, and extends 4 miles further south, where it forms a rounded point. Goa, Angua, is 8J miles south-west of Nairai, and 27 miles south-eastward of Oyalau, extends south-east and north-west, 11^ miles, is 6 miles broad, and is surrounded by a barrier reef, ranging 3^ miles off its western point. There are three closely connected, intricate, ship entrances on the north- western side, leading into a sheltered roadstead having 20 fathoms water, and spreading over 16 square miles. The leading mark for the best entrance is the peak of the island (2,345 feet high), bearing E. ^ N. H.W., F. & C. at 6h. 7m.; rise 5 feet. MuMBOLiTHE Reef is 4^ miles south from the extreme of the reef of Angua. It lies nearly north and south, 1| mile long, and half a mile broad, with no opening. The centre of the basin is in 18° 13' S., and 179° 18' E. There are 190 fathoms water at a cable off. It always shows heavy breakers.* Batiki is surrounded by a reef, which offers no protection for vessels, and only passages for boats. The island is 750 feet high, dome shaiied. The reefs extend one-third of a mile from its shore. Moala is of triangular form, about 18 or 20 miles in circuit, and about 2,000 feet high. An opening through the reef on the west side, leads to an. inferior harbour. The reef on tlie north side of Mouala resembles that o£ Totoua, being a collection of sunken and detached patches. The reef on the N.E. extends 2^ miles. After passing it there is a deep indentation in the island, with a broad passage through the reef, leading to a safe and fine harbour ; tlie passage is sufficiently wide for a vessel to beat out, which m seldom necessary, as several passages through the reef westward are safe with a leading wind. The island attbrds wood, water, and some provisions. Tlie TovA Reef, or Navatu, the on/y danger in the vicinity, about equi-distant from Totoya, Moala, and Vanua-Vatu, is one of the most dangerous outlying reefs in the group, a mile in diameter, and nearly circular ; the two former islands are in sight from it, but the latter being low was not seen. At low water it is quite dry. At liigh water it is entirely covered, and always breaks. Its centre is in 18° 39' 31" S., 179° 33' W. High water, 6h. 8m.; rise 4ft. t Vanua Vatu, 1^ miles long N.W. and S.E., 310 feet high, in 18° 22' S., 179° 24' W., lies 18 miles N.N.E. of Tova Reef, surrounded by a reef which joins the shore in some places, and off its north end extends one mile, horn-shaped, where boats can cross at half tide. Small craft are said to anchor here close to the reef in east winds ; it is not recommended. Copra. TOTOYA, in 18° 59' S., and 179° 53' W., is circular, six miles in diameter, and 1,248 feet high, is surrounded by a barrier reef of triangular form, the elbows of which are two miles off the S.W., the N.W., and the eastern projections of the island. A capacious ship entrance through the reef on the western side may be foimd by bringing the southernmost peak (1,159) feet) to bear E. ^ H., leads into a basin of smooth Avater to the southward, two miles long by one mile broad, perfectly sheltered, Avith good holding ground, in 25 fathoms Avater. Wood, vegetables, poultry, and pigs. H.W., F. & C, 6h. 37m.; rise, 4^ ft. '^ Sunken rocks have been reported to lie between Gau and Moola, in lat. 18° 24' S., long. 179^ 34' E. Metcoi-e Reef, awash, reported on French authority as lying in lat. 18° 22' S., lon^. 178' 53' E., is very doubtful, H.M.S. Pearl having passed over the assigned position without seeing any signs of shoal water. t The rock placed in 18" 32' S., 179° 25' W., Avas searched for in vain by H.M.S, Alacrity. 244 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Matuku is the southernmost of the Fiji Islands, in 19° 9' S., 179° 44' E. On its western side is Carr's Harbour, stated to be one of the best in the group. The island lies north and south 4^ miles, and 1^ to 3^ miles broad, bounded by a reef awash at low water, projecting one mile off the south-eastern and northern points, but not over half a mile from the general coast line. On the western side of the reef, with the central peak €ast, is a channel one-eighth of a mile wide, with 30 fathoms water, leading into a basin having 16 fathoms water, with swinging room for two or three frigates, and a shore well adapted for coaling, if ever deemed desirable as a depot for passing steamers. Wood, water, vegetables, poultry, and pigs can be obtained. H.W., F. & C, 6h. 18m.; rise, 5 ft. The Island of Viti-Levu, the largest of the group, is about 80 miles long by 55 broad. Its principal settlements are near Eewa, between Bau and Tova Peak, at Raki Kaki, on the north coast ; I3a, on the north- west coast ; Nandi, on the west coast ; and Sarua River and Suva, on the south coast. At Ndronga the natives have much interfered with the settle- ment. Mbau, a small island on the east end of Viti-Levu, about a mile in circuit, almost entirely occupied by the native town. The bay in which it lies is well sheltered by extensive coral sea reefs. The approach is much obstructed by reefs, and (the water being shallow) is impassable for an armed vessel. There is anchorage here or at Viwa to the north. The channel south of Ovalau is intricate from the island of Moturiki, but lit for ships of considerable draught. Captain Powell, R.N., says tlie anchorage at Bau should be ap- proached in the morning, and left in the afternoon, as the muddy water near the most difficult places requires the sun to be in a proper position to point out the reefs. This extensive sheet of water is surrounded by patches, some partially dry a low water, others never uncover. The outer sea reef, six or seven miles distant, effectually breaks the ocean swell, and the inner reefs prevent any sea from getting up. From Mbau Roads it is 12 or 14 miles to the town of Rewa ; it is neces- sary to take high water to cross the manv patches between the roads and mouthof the river. —Caj) tain W. C. Hope, R.N., 1868. VlWA is a small island of moderate height. H. M.S. Pearl reached Mbau Roads by Moturiki channel, which is south of Moturiki Island. Cagalai Islet, N. 35° E., leads westward of the reefs which stretch S.W. by W., 1^ miles from Leleuvia Islet ; when clear a course S. by W. will lead to the entrance between the reefs at INIbau. From the centre of the eastern and widest channel the west extreme of Leleuvia Islet just overlaps the east extreme of Cagalai Islet, N. by E. ^ E. This channel is j>enerally used, but there are other passages to the eastward. Two small slioals were seen from aloft in the outer part of Mbau Roads, one near the east side of the eastern channel, the other just outside one of the central passages. The islets of Tailau, Viwa, and Mbau may be seen six miles off. Bear- ings of these objects should be taken to determine the vessel's position. The reefs are all covered. In cloudy weather, or when the sun is ahead, it is difficult to distinguish them, and it is better to anchor until the weather clears, or to get a local pilot. A stranger should on no account attempt to reach Mbau unless the reefs can be clearly made out from aloft. Anchorage in Mbau Roads in live fathoms, with Tailau Island N.W. f N.; south extreme of ViAva Island W.S.W.; Mbau Island, S.S.W. The inner part of INIbau Roads is apparently filling up with mud. Rewa River was ascended to its source by Mr. Macdonald, surgeon to H.M.S. Herald, in 1856. The mountain district is about 36 miles from the mouth. The country through which it passes is thickly populated and well cultivated. Tliere are numerous platations on the river. On either side are extensive flats of deep black loam, fit for sugar and root crops. In the delta of the Rewa the Kambia branch is about three cables wide ; from the delta to Navuso village, 1^ cables. The river is navigable for ships' "boats having steam power to Vunidrala village, 44 miles from the entrance. The Wai-ui-mala branch is very shallow, and full of rapids. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 245 The harbour of Kewa, formed by two small islands Nulailau and Miika- laii, with their attached reefs, has three passages into it. The two soutliern ones are safe, though narrow ; tlie northern is much obstructed by coral lumps. The port is a secure one. The anchorage, off the island of Nukulau, is about three miles from the mouth of Peale's River, and six from the town of Rewa, which is situated on a low piece of laud, which the river, passing^ on each side of it, lias formed into an island. Nukulau, a low sandy island, covered with wood, on the eastern side has an extensive reef ; the western side is clear, and may be approached closely. The best anchorage is in 12 fathoms, mud, with the oiiter island barely shut in with Nukulau, two cables' lengths from tlie shore. The strongest breezes blow from south to south-west. The south passajje is entered by leaving the two small islets on the starboard hand ; the other more to the eastward, by passing between the two islets, and hauling round the northern one. For quitting the anchorage the best passage is the southern one. The ■weather point of the reef projects more than the lee one, and makes the water smooth in the passage. A remarkable liunmiock to the westward, on with the north passage islets, leads into the east passage clear of a patch. The flood tide appears to set to the westward within the reefs. During^ the summer months there is a breeze off the land in the morning. Suva. — Ten miles west of Rewa Roads is Suva Harbour, an excellent one, spacious, free from shoals, well sheltered, and with good holding ground, easy of ingress and egress, with an abundance of wood and water. The entrance to it through the reef is narrow and deep. *' Suva Harbour forms a basin IJ miles north and south, and three miles- across. There is a round island near the western shore northward of Park Point. Shoal water extends from the western sea reefs towards Park Point, and encircles round island, extending thence to the next point at the head of the bay. ' ' Suva Point is low, and cannot be seen from the anchorage. A ledge of rocks extends off Factory Point, and a spit which extends N.N.E. from the eastern sea reef seldom shows even from the mast head, on account of the discoloured water discharged by the three rivers into the harbour. Caution is therefore necessary in rounding the spit. The sand-bank which lies about a mile N.W. by W. i W. from the storehouse breaks slightly at low water. " The small island Namuka, three miles south-west of Park Point, is- visible 10 miles, and indicates the entrance. The factory on Factory Point can be seen 10 or 11 miles. A peculiar yam-shaped mountain stands a little west of the entrance ; inland, farther westward, is a high mountain, with three pointed peaks. " To enter, bring Bega Island to bear south-west by south, and steer north-east by north, wdiich leads up to the entrance. Tlie passage l)etween the reefs is about three cables wide, and appears to be clear of dangers. Steer N. by E. until a large store-house with a flagstaff in front bears E. by S. i S., then for the store-house between the spit extending from the eastern reef and a sand-bank in the northern part of the harbour, and thence to the anchorage. *' The anchorage is good and easy of access, there is room for several vessels in 8 to 15 fathoms. The Pearl anchored in 10 fathoms, with the flagstaff S.E. by E. ^ E., and the left extreme of Bega Island S.W. by S. Inside this the water shoals rapidly, but farther southward, off the factory bluff*, a berth in seven or eight fathoms, soft mud, can be obtained. There is said to be good anchorage near the round island northward of Park Point. " It is said to be H.W. F. & C. at 6h., spring rise, six feet." — Lieut. Hoskyn, H.M.S. Pearl, 1874. Namuka Island, three miles to the south-west of the entrance of Suva Harbour, and inside the shore reef, is small, and covered with trees. A short distance south-west of the Island is an opening through the reef, with apparently deep water, leading to Namuka Harbour. A small river emx^ties into the harbour, at the head of which is a villa<,'e. South-west of Suva, ofl' the south coast of Viti-Levu, are the islands of Bega and Namuka, surrounded by reefs. Bega, the largest, is live miles long by tliree miles wide. It rises into 2^ BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. two very prominent peaks 1,289 feet high. On its north side is Sawaii Harbour, two miles deep and one mile wide, with a narrow entrance. It lias good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms, mnd. On its west side is Elliott's Harbour, not so deep as the former, but more open at the entrance, and surrounded by equally high land. On the left of the entrance is a white sand beach. There are two small islands near Bega, one to the south named Stuarts, the other to the east, Elizabeth. The reef which surrounds Bega Island extends 12 miles to the south-west of that island ; its south-west edge is 6, and its west 5^ miles from Nanuka (query Yamthu) a\ hich is within the same reef as Bega. The reef on the north-west side was found to contain many ship passages. North of it is Bird Island, and the reef off this part of Vitu-Levu nearly joins that of Bega. To the north and north-west of it are "Whippy and Granby Harbours, which afford good shelter. Navua Anchorage, eastward of the entrance to Navua River, has good holding ground in sand and mud, but is of small extent inside the western spit. When the east extreme of Bega bears 8. 1° E., steer to the north-west, and keep close round the south extreme of Nuku Wakaia Reef until the vessel is inside a spit which extends N. by E. from Navua Reef ; then steer westward, and anchor in six fathoms, with Navua Point in line with the centre of Namuka, S. W, ^ S. ; the east extreme of Bega S. ^ E. ; the break on Western Reef, S.E. by E. Navua Point is low. The entrance to the river is westward of the point. There are several shoal spots in the west and south-west part of the anchor- age ; also a dangerous one of six feet water, 100 yards outside the fringing shore reef, and 340 yards north-west from the berth recommended. The channel between Bega Island and Navua Reefs, about two miles wide near Storm Island, appears to be clear of dangers ; several tide rips and much discoloured water were observed when the Pearl passed through, Imt no soundings were obtained with a hand lead. At high tide the water breaks on the northern Bega Reefs, and the shore reefs can only be known by a slight ripple. Between Navua and Sarua, 13 miles westward of it, the shore reef extends two to three miles from the coast, with a passage inside used by small vessels. Red Blurt' is 23 miles W. by S. from Navua anchorage, and seven miles from Granby Harbour. The coast thence continues high for about 12 miles "westward, tlien gradually lower for six miles, till near some conspicuous sand hills which slope down to the sea, terminating in a point about 80 feet high. Sarua Harbour. — In proceeding eastward, after passing Granby Harbour, the island in Sarua Harbour, composed of two hills of moderate height, with a low gap between, will be seen clear of the main. On its east side is an opening in the reef leading into Sarua Harbour, sheltered by the sea reefs, and anchorage in 15 fathoms, with the low gap in the island W. ^ N. A few miles east of Sarua Harbour is a large opening in the reef, with a small sand islet on its eastern side. Siga Toka River is 16 miles W. by N. from Red Bluff; the Avater is much discoloured a considerable distance from its mouth, and has the appear- ance of shoal ground, particularly when the sun shines on it. Ndronga Harbour lies five miles W. by N. ^ N. from the sand-hills already mentioned. Inside the shore reefs on either side of the harbour are two small islands, Kaba and Ya-nu-ca, by which the harbour may be known. Kaba Island, on the western side, is 40 to 60 feet high, thicklj^ wooded. Ya-nu-ca Island, on the east side, is 60 to 70 feet high, thickly wooded at the south part ; a long, low, sandy point extends from its north side. The "best landing places are at the east and west extremes of the beach, or, when the tide is sufficiently high, in the creeks. At low water a part of the reefs is exposed. There are heavy breakers on both sides of the entrance, j)articularly on the western reefs. The course between the reefs is N. 1° E. A dangerous coral spit, having 9 to 15 feet water, which breaks at low tide, extends eastward from the ell)OW of the western reef into the channel, contracting it to two cables. The eastern reefs are steep-to. Tlie water shoals gradually from 15 fathoms a short distance inside the reefs to the anchorage in five and six fathoms, farther in the soundings quickly decrease to four and three fathoms. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 247 AVitli on-sliore winds heavy rollers set in ; the bottom is hard sand ; the outer reers atlbrd but little protection. The Pearl anchored in five fathoms ■with the extreme of Kaba Island S.W. by W. and W.N.W. ; and Cuvu Villaj^e E. by N. : a better berth would be half a cable eastward. Between Ndronga Harbour and Likuri Island, six miles westward, are two openings in the reef, one reported navigable, with anchorage inside. Likuri Island is low and covered with cocoa-nut trees ; just westward of the island is an opening in the reefs, with anchorage inside. Tuva liiver dis- charges into it ; boats can ascend the Tuva six miles. The route inside the Barrier lleef, which surrounds the greater part of Viti Levu, may be safely taken in clear Aveather, when the sun is well above the horizon and astern ; the vessel should be conned from the mast-head. There are but few sharp turnings, none that offer any difficulty to a handy steamer. The jnlots are accustomed to small vessels only, and navigate entirely by the eye ; it is necessary to take a new pilot for eacli part of the coast. The Navula Passage is 15 miles north-west of Ndronga Harbour, and about six cables wide, with apparently no dangers near nud-channel. The course through is north-east by east. From the Pearl's mast-head several small shoals of 6 to 12 feet were seen off the eastern reef. A shoal spit extends E.N.E. half a cable from the inner edge of the western reef. A break was seen about a mile north of the eastern extremity of the western reef. The sea breaks heavily on the outer parts of the reef. A reef with a stone above water lies S. 88° E. 7 miles from the north extremity of Malolo Island. Nandi Bay. — After clearing Navula Passage, the course, to Nandi Bay, inside the reefs, is N. by E. ^ E., tlie west extremity of the mainland being kept on the starboard bow. When lakuilau Island (low and sandj'-, with a few cocoanut trees), opens, steer to keep it just clear on the star- board bow. As soon as lakuilau is passed steer between its fringing reef and a, small breaking reef 1^ miles N. ^ E. from it. A small coral lies just north- ward of the fringing reef of lakuilau. No soundings were obtained by the Pearl until nearly halfway through, when 7 fathoms were struck, they then gradually decreased to 4 fathoms on the mud fiats off Nandi River. An extensive shoal is situated in tlie eastern part of Nandi Bay, but there is a good passage of 5 fathoms between it and the outer one lying to the westward. Vessels may anchor off the plantation of Vunda in 3| fathoms. The soundings decrease gradually from 8 to 4 fathoms, stiff mud, good holdin"- ground. Malolo Island, off the western end of Viti Levu, consists of Malolo and Malolo-Lailai, separated by a narrow and rocky interval. Northward of Malolo is a group of small islets, the Underwood Group. North-west of Malolo are the Hudson Isles. The great sea reef does not appear between tliem and the southern islands of the Asaua grouj). North- ward of Vunda, on the coast of the main island, is the Ba Passage. The town of Ba is 14 miles further on. The land close to the shore is low. Ten miles further on is the town of Dongaloa, on the coast. Here the high lands approach nearer the shore. Spieden, Waldron, Linthieum, Smith, Henry, Reynolds, and Bateman Islets, are low, sandy, and wooded. Vunda is a sand-bank without trees. Vanderford is a little larger bank, with a small clump of trees on the north end. Inner Channel.— Passing nortlnvard from Nandi Bay, a berth of half a mile should be given to Vie Tonga Point ; a course nortii-east by north should then be steered until the island northward of the point is approached when the course Avill be N.N. E. A shoal lying N.N.W., 1| mile from Vie Tonga Point, is the south-eastern one of a number extending as far as the eye can see from aloft ; tlie sea breaks over many parts of it. The first island north of Vie Tonga Point is skirted by a reef extending- a quarter of a mile off shore. The passage here is about a mile wide. The supposed position of a shoal three quarters of a mile N.N.E. from the last- mentioned island was passed over by the Pearl. Ba Passage is narrowed by the reefs extending off the two islands 248 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. (Votia and one of the soutlnvartl) "wliicli form the passage. The conrse through is E.N.E., with five to seven fathoms; the shoals coukl be clearly seen from the mast-head. Off the point on the mainland sonth of Votia Island two small wooded islets appeared to form part of the point ; the outer one bears south from Votia. There is another passage half a mile wide on the west side of Votia Island, fringed by a reef to a considerable extent. From Ba Passage the course is N.N.E. till abreast of Cilau Point, off which a reef extends northward one-quarter of a mile, with a lump of stones above water three cables farther north, and a cable beyond is a dangerous patch, with apparently four feet Avatcr. On the inner of the two Tabooa Keefs is a sandy island, Malebu, with stunted cocoanut trees. The ship channel between Malebii lieefs and those off Cilau Point, is very narrow at the turning, but presents no difficulty to steam or to a fair Avind, provided the reefs can be seen from aloft. From Cilau Point to Ba are so many sunken dangers that the channel should not be attempted unless the sun is in a position favourable for seeing the reefs. Anchorage can always be obtained off this part, but the anchorages on the north coast of Viti-Levu are indifferent, and should be avoided during the hurricane season. East of Ba Point a mud flat extends two or three miles off shore ; the lead will guide in approaching it, but the water shoals quickly from six fathoms. Between the Hats and the barrier reef there appeared to be no danger. After rounding the flats alter course for the anchorage off Ba Kiver; when the entrance bears S. 1° E. steer for it and anchor in six fathoms with Dongaloa Island N.E. by E. f E. The water from the river reaches the anchorage at half ebb. Two remarkable hummocks on the outer range of hills, on the west side of Viti-Levu, S. ^ W., lead to the entrance of Ba Kiver, which is difficult to recognise from seaward. It is only navigable for vessels of light draught. Dongaloa consists of a reef Avith a number of sand-banks on it awash at high Avater neaps, and extending much farther Avest than Avas formerly sup- posed. There are a fcAV sunken patches near the soutli side of the reefs. From the anchorage off Ba RiA^er steer off shore a little to clear the mud fiats. Off the third point eastAvard from Dongaloa a reef extends under water li cables. BetAveen this point and Vatia Island is a small island 80 feet high, covered Avith trees, having a bight Avitli shalloAV Avater to the westAvard. The channel betAveen the mainland and the barrier reef is ^ to 1^ miles Avide, apparently clear of dangers. Vatia Island, 600 feet high, until close-to, appears like a part of the mainland. A reef aAvash at low Avater extends north from it. EastAvard of Vatia, betAveen it and the long reef that extends off shore from TaAnia RiA'er, are a number of sunken patches. After rounding Tavua Beef, steer soutliAvard betAveen the latter and the barrier reef for the anchorage off Tavua River. Anchor in nine fathoms, Avith the mouth of the river S. ^ W. , about a mile from the nearest shore. The Island of Malaki adjoins the northernmost point of Viti-LeA^i, is 800 feet high, and is diAdded from the main island by a narroAV strait, off it is a passage through the sea reef. Some plantations are established on this part of the coast, Avhich is named Raki-Raki. Charybdis Reef. — An extensive reef just aAvash, crescent-shaped, in a N.E. and S.W. direction. Its centre lies W. by N. ^ N. about nine miles from the north point of Annan Island, and about the same distance N. by E. from the anchorage of Raki-Raki. Inner Channel. — From Tavua anchorage steer toAvards the barrier reef and along its southern side, passing north of a breaking reef, tAvo miles north-east of Tavua. The channel — nortliAvard of Malaki Islands, and of the three small islands AvestAvard of it— appears clear of hidden dangers ; A^essels should keep midAvay betAveen the outer reefs and those extending from these islands. The channel abreast Tovu-Leilei, the first island Avest of Malaki, is tAvo cables Avide. From a distance this part of the passage appears almost blocked by the reef. A little north of the fairway, abreast Malaki, is a patch of 2^ or 3 fathoms, and a reef extends three-quarters of a cable from the north side of BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 249 Malaki : tlie passage north of this island is 1^ cables wide, narrowed by numerous detached knolls near the south edge of Barrier Reef. It is better to keep near the island reefs, as they are steep-to. Anchorage off the west end of Nananu-ira Island in 11 fathoms, mud, ^ood holding ground, with its south point S. 55° E. ; the water shoals quickly inside this. There are several sunken reefs westward of the anchorage ; a good look-out should be kept from aloft. southern point of Viti Levu Bay, which is five miles deep and one mile "broad. From this anchorage the inshore passage leads to Nagilo-gilo Head, the Off the centre of Viti Levu Bay is a six-foot patch, Avhich breaks with moderate breezes ; the best passage is westward of it, as the ground is clear of dangers in-shore round the bay till close to the beach ; when past the patch steer S.E. ^ E.; seaward are said to be an immense number of reefs. There are several bights in this part of the coast, with secure anchorage for small craft. From the southward Nananu Passage may be made out by bringing Nagilo-gilo Head to bear S.E., and steer N.W. till the islands are approached. Three to five miles S. E. of Nagilo-gilo Head is a small island skirted by a reef, pass just outside it, then bring the island in line with Nagilo-gilo Head N.W., and steer S.E.; this mark leads clear of dangers till two miles from the fringe reef north of Tova Peak. Then haul out so as to clear the reef, and round it at three cables distant. Steer E.S.E. until Tova Peak bears W.S.W., when alter course for the north part of Ovalau Island bearing about E. ^ S., passing through a labyrinth of shoals. Pass south- ward of Naingani, oft* whose south side a reef extends 1^ cables southward. There are two shoals three-quarters of a mile westward of the same island. Wakaia, Mokungai, and Mokundraga, lie N.E. of Ovalau (from which they are visible), sepirated by a strait of ten miles ; they are within the same reef. Wakaia is the southernmost. There are several openings through the reef near Wakaia, on its eastern side, not recommended except for small vessels. The entrance on the S.W. side, leading to Flying Fish Harbour, is quite narrow. On the N.W. point of the island is a stone landing place, and near it a flagstaff'. On the west side of Mokungai, the island next northward, is a small harbour, formed partly by reefs and partly by the little Island of Mokundraga. Wakaia is 596 feet and Mokungai 876 feet high. Wakaia is well stocked with cattle, etc. The reefs extend from these islands with few interruptions to the south .shore of Vjinua-Levu ; just Avestward of Mokungai is the Mokungai Passage, difficult at times from the tides ; the flood runs North and East, the ebb the reverse. The Daveta Loboni Passage, on the N.E. side of the reef siin-ounding Mokungai Island, is contracted to three-quarters of a cable in width by three sunken coral knolls with apparently not over 12 feet on them. "This part of the group is daufjerous in dark nights and uncertain weather, no anchorage nor shelter being within reach, nor can any of the passages between the long belt of reefs which extend from the south of Yanua-Levu to the south side of Viti-Levu, an extent of 60 or 80 miles, and which forms a lee shore, be attempted at night, these difficulties being increased by the uncertain set of the currents, which are often strong. It is necessary, indeed indispensable, that to sail amongst the reefs and shoals of these islands, with any degree of safety, the day should be clear, the sun bright and behind the ship, and the time of low water chosen, if possible, when they can always be distinctly seen, and with care avoided ; when the sun is ahead of the ship, or the day becomes dull, she should be at once anchored, as the shoals can no longer be distinguished ; this remark of course attends vessels navigating inside the different sea reefs, for without them there is no anchorage.'' — Captain Worth, R.N., H.M.S. Calypso. The Island of Ovalau, eight miles north and south, by seven miles east and west, is high and rugged throughout. Its harbours are formed by jreefs. That of Levuka, on its east side, is safe, good holding giound, and «asy of access ; vessels can always procure wood and water. R 250 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Tlie Peak of Andulang is 2,070 feet high ; the highest, Dille-Ovalaii,. about 200 feet higher. The harbour of Levuka (says Captain Worth) is the most convenient and central ancliorage in tlie group, with its entrance so clear and attainable that no accident can happen with common caution, and is the only harbour where water can be easily obtained. The anchorage is sheltered by a reef parallel with the shore, distant from it nearly half a mile, which keeps the water always smooth. Harbour Lights.— The Hj^hts are Jtxed; the inner (upper) light w/ii/^, visible 10 miles, is placed on a hill behind the town ; and the outer (lower) one red, visible five miles. The beacons from which the lights are exhibited are painted 7u/itye, each with a nrd diamond ; position, 17° 40' 45" S. ; 178° 49' E. The lights by ni^ht, and the beacons by day, in line, lead through the middle of the south entrance passage into the harbour. They are E, i N. and W. ^^., 73 yards apart. (" Tniere is a red beacon on the north end of the south reef, on the southern side of the south entrance."— Captain McKay.) A cas/: beacon, chequered black and white, has been erected on the centre of the reef in Lev\ika harbour, abreast of the south entrance. A chequered buoy has been placed on a patch about a cable in extent, having 10 feet on it at low water, situated 1h cables S.E. by from Observation Point. A red buoy has been placed on a seven-feet patch in the north entrance, Waitovu Passage, to Levuka harbour, four cables S. E. by S. from the soutli-west extreme of the reef forming the north side of the entrance ; and a chequered buoy on a nine-feet patch \% cables S.E. f S. from the south-west extreme of the reef. The best passage is north of chequered buoy. * Off Waitovu there are several small shallow patches of coral about one cable from the shore. H.W. F. & C, Levuka harbour, at 6h.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 1\ feet. A coral patch off the rivulet Mbu-re-ta lies W. by S. f S., two-thirds of a mile from the entrance of tlie rivulet, or E. by N. a mile from north point of Moturiki. MOTURIKI is almost in contact with Ovalau, south of it. The reef surrounds both ; there is no passage between. A large square rock lies midway between, Laudolib. Moturiki is three miles long and one broad. Two small islands, Leluvia and Thangala, lie south of it. Between these and Moturiki is the entrance to the bay of Ban, the Moturiki Passage. Two sunken patches were seen by H.M.S. Brisk lying from about N. by W. to N.N.W., half a mile from Leleuvia Island; caution is therefore necessary when passing through the Moturiki Passage. Moturiki Passage is of considerable importance \\ miles long by half a mile wide. Some remarks on its navigation are given on page 244. An east by south course leads through, when Black Peak, on Viti-Levu, can be seen, it is a good leading mark. The tide sets strongly through, the flood west- ward, or in, the ebb eastward or out. There is safe anchorage either under Leluvia or Moturiki on their west side in 7 to 12 fathoms ; a good harbour exists on the Moturiki side by entering through a narrow channel before reaching Thangala Island. It may be known by a large rock on the reef. After getting through the reef there is anchorage in 7 to 10 fathoms, sand. Vatu-Lele, lies south of Viti-Levu, it is well wooded. The north part is 70 feet high, it slopes gradually to a low point at its south end. There is a narrow shore reef on its western side, but off the eastern shore a reef extends two or three miles, forming a bow. Seven miles east by south from its south point is a dangerous reef awash extending 300 yards north and south, by 150 yards east and west. Wilkes calls it the Flying Fish Shoal. Kandavu, the south-westernmost of the Fiji Islands, is 25 miles long, and mountainous throughout its whole length, except a small part at its * A coral head with 31 fathoms lies S 41° E. 6^ cables from Oblervation Point. Clearing Marks : The beacon on half-tide rock in line with right extreme of Ovalau, N.N.W. \ W., clears the Horses Heads and patches offNasova. The buoys in north entrance are not to be depended on. The chequered buoy has been washed away; the red buoy has drifted three-quarters of a cable southward.— H.M.S. Barracouta,. 1876. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 251 centre near Malatta Bay. It is well covered witli pine timber. Tavuki Bay, on its north side, is in 19° 3' S., 178° 6' E., by H.M.S. Harrier. On its west end is Buke Levu, or Monnt Wasliington, .3,800 feet high, in the form of a cone, the sides descendinj^ with a direct inclination from the summit to the sea. Tavuki, or Tabuca Bay, Capt. Hope, R.N., of H.M.S. Brisk, says that Tavuki is an anchorage not to be recommended ; the bay is full of coral patches of various depths, and subject to sudden gusts of wind from the high land. Malatta Bay is small and offers safety to a few vessels for temporary anchorage. The island is here nearly divided into two by a low and narrow isthmus. An extensive reef faces tlie north-west part of the island, rounding out to the westward from the north-west point, nortli of Malatta Bay, and then southward, joining the shore again north of Tavuki (chart), as this is ordinarily on the lee side when the water would be smooth, it is doubly dangerous. Nortliward of the north-west point of the island is the only detached reef off its northern face. Off Cape Bligh, its east end, is the island Ono, 80 feet high ; between it and Kandavu is a good and well-protected liarbour. To the north is a cluster of eleven small islands, all situated in the Great Astrolabe Beef. From Ono this reef trends nearly north. Its east side is quite unbroken, and extends in a sweep round Oumbenga, joining Kandavu. (According to the chart it continues its southerly and south-westerly trend past the east extreme of Kandavu.) On its west it is much broken, and has several safe i)assages through to the group At the north end of the reef is a clear passage through it. The water within is very deep, and whales were seen inside. The reef is not only dangerous from its extent, but from the strong currents, generally to the eastward, which prevail here. Ngaloa or Galoa Bay lies in the centre of the eastern side of Kandavu. The following is by Lieut. Hosken, H.M.S. Pearl. A dip in the land, just north-east of a remarkable gap in Kandavu Hills, which almost divides the island, will point out the position of the bay, if Ngaloa Island, which divides it into two portions, cannot be made out. The latter being under high land, often cannot be seen till within six or eight miles of the entrance. Ngaloa Harbour is protected from seaward by the fringe reefs. Ngaloa Island, If miles in extent, is in the north-west part of the harbour, forming to the north-eastward Nortli Bay, to the westward Inner Harbour, and on its south-west side Outer Anchorage. North Bay is about two miles east and west, and one mile broad, with 19 to 20 fathoms near the centre, sand and coral. Inner Harbour is about half a mile in extent, with 4^ to 6 fathoms, mud. Outer Anchorage has 16 to 20 fathoms, mud. On the west side of Outer Anchorage a mud flat, fringed by a reef, dries 400 yards from the Kandavu shore, having six fathoms close to the edge in some parts, with patches of two and three fathoms at three-quarters of a cable, and six to nine fathoms nearly three cables from the reef. Wood Shoal, with rocks awash at low water, lies on the south-east side of Outer Anchorage, bearing S.E. | S. 4^ cables from south point of Ngaloa Island. The Main Channel into Ngaloa Harbour, formed by Esk Reef on the north and Pearl Reef on the south side, is three cables broad, with 40 fathoms near the centre. At the inner entrance of Main Channel, and N.W. ^ N., two cables from the north-west end of Pearl Reef, lies McGregor Patch, diy at low water, marked by a white buoy on its south side.* Between McGregor Patch and the east extreme of Ngaloa Island are several spots of two and three fathoms, with six to eight fathoms close-to. The leading * Additional buoys and beacons in entrance and harbour :— Entrance : A red, buoy on south edge of Esk Keef, a red buoy on north edge of Macgregor Patch, a hlack buoy on north edge of Pearl Reef, a red buoy with black and red perch on south edge of Macgregor Patch. Harbour : One iron beacon with triangle, red and white in horizontal bands on east edge of Wood Shoal, a red buoy on west edge of Wood Shoal, a red buoy on the l|-fathom patch, which lies W. | N. five cables from outer beacon off Ngaloa Island. The buoy off the outer beacon has been removed. The present lights on the beacons give a dim light. New ones are ordered.— H.M.S. Barracouta, 1876. •252 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. mark through main channel from seaward is the "beacon on the southern hummock of Ngaloa in line with the beacon on Kanclavu, bearing W. ^ N. Boat Channel, on the east side of Esk Reef, is 300 yards long and 50 yards broad, with 3| to 4f fathoms. Schooner Channel, an opening in the fringe reef one quarter of a mile eastward of Boat Channel, is 150 yards broad, with 10 to 12 fathoms near the centre. On the north-east side of the inner entrance of Schooner Channel is a patch of I ^ to 3 fathoms. The left extreme of Anda Tavie Ishvnd, N.N.W. | W., leads westward of this patch. H.W. F. «& C. in Ngaloa Harbour at Ch 38m.; springs rise 5 feet 3 inches, neaps 4 feet 5 inches. The buoys in Ngaloa harbour are indifferently moored, and not to l)e dej^ended on, the beacons are temporary structures. From the eastern part of Ngaloa Bay on the south-east side of Kandavu Island, a fringe reef extends north-eastward about four miles, when it stretches oft" in a long prong abruptly southward, off the outer end of which the high peak of Nf,'aloa Island bears S. 81° W., 8^ miles ; thence, after a break one mile wide, the reef trends north-easterly toMards Koro-Levu harbour, which is 10 miles eastward of Ngaloa Bay. An E. by N. course from off the entrance to Ngaloa harbour Avill lead clear of all reefs on the south side of Kandavu Island. From the east extreme of Kanda\ii the reef takes a more northerly direction for nine miles, to abreast the north-east point of Ono Island, from which the reef stretches off eastward nearly five miles ; thence it continues to abreast of North Rock 13 miles northward, where a prong of Astrolabe Reef forms a prominent elboAv, If miles eastward from North Rock. From this elbow to the north extreme of Astrolabe Reef is about 2f miles in a north-westerly direction. During the visit of the Pearl tlie sea broke heavily over the eastern edge of Astrolabe Reef ; but over the long north part there was only a slight ripple, and that not seen until within a mile of it, rendering this part of the Astrolabe Reef dangerous at night. North Rock, about eight feet high, is situated in a lagoon 1^ miles within the north extremity of Astrolabe Reef. The northern portion of the top of the rock is white. A deep landlocked harbour, Ninderi, is on the north side of Kandavu Island, six miles from its east point. Along the north shore of Kandavu a barrier reef is reported two miles off the land. Ono Island, tnree miles northward of the east end of Kandavu Island, is 400 feet high. The anchorage, Babia, south of Ono Island, is said to be good. The entrance is from the westward. Yasawa, or Leeward, Group, the westernmost range of the Fiji Group. VoMO, the south-easternmost of this group, is famous for its turtles, which abound from December to March. The southern half of the island lias a high, narrow, almost perpendicular bluff ; the northern half is sand, covered with bushes, resorted to by pigeons. It is two miles in circuit ; off its north-west end is a detached rock, Castle Rock. There is anchorage, but not w^ell protected, for a small vessel. Twelve miles west from Vomo is a group of small islands, Davis, Knox, and Totten Islands. The interval between is occupied by a continuous line of reefs. Waia. — North-west of Vomo is Waia, the highest and most broken of of the Yasawa Group, its peak being 1,641 feet high. Connected with it southward are Waia-lailai and Waia-lailai-thake. Vaviti, north of Waia, the largest of the group, is 954 feet high. There is no anchorage. This and the islands northward have passages l)etween them, and are little incommoded by coral reefs. Southward of Vaviti are the small islands of Eld, Foxe, Agate, and Sinclair. Yasawa, the northernmost of the group, is narrow, and about 10 miles long. Towards its southern end is a peak Tau-tha-kc, 781 feet high. The southern bight is well protected, except from the north-west, by the small island of Ovawo, and two small islets. Between Yasawa and Vaviti are a number of smaller islands, with clear passages between. Off its north point are several small islets. BiVA, the westernmost of the group, lies 12 miles west from the south point of Vaviti. It is a long, low island, with two smaller ones connected BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 253 with it, covered with cocoanut trees, surrounded by a reef, which extends three miles south of it. It afibrds no anchorage. Eight miles north of it is the Porpoise Shoal. AWAKALO, or Round Island, though separated by a clear channel from the Yasawa Group, is the only islet iu its neighbourhood. It is 500 feet high, dropping at each end. An extensive patch lies to the eastward. Off the Yasawa Group to the westward lie the extensive Ethel Reefs. See chart. " Winds and Weather.— In the Lau or Eastern Group, between May and November, 1S78, the wind blew strongest and with most persistence from S.E. by E. and E.S.E., occasionally risin^j to the force of a moderate gale in September and October. Very little rain fell. Strong easterly winds are generally accompanied by haze, which, however, permits of breaking reefs being seen three to four miles off. The barometer was highest for strong E. S.E. winds and lowest for north-west winds. After two or three days calm or light winds with westing in them, the south-east winds some- times set in with a squall, from south or S. by W. quickly veering. ** Current. — No current worthy of mention was observed, except in the lagoon passages, where it was nearly always tidal ; and in the neigh- bourhood of reefs, where it is jjrobably not regular nor exceeds half a knot an hour. During strong south-easterly winds there is a surface drift, but it ceases when the winil moderates. In the summer months there is as much probability of an easterly as of a westerly set. In the lagoon passages the tide runs as much as two knots an hour." — From H.M.S. Alacrity, 1879. North of Fiji, and eastward of the New Hebrides, lie a number of scat- tered islets and shoals, between 10° and 20° S. , and which do not belong to any of the large archipelagoes. North of them are the Ellice Islands. Isabella Shoal, 16 fathoms, coral bottom, is in 12° 25' S., 177" 15' W. It extends east and west as far as the eye can reach. The Bayonnaise Bank, soundings 16 fathoms, coral, in 12° 9' S., 179"* 44' W. Rotumah is about four or five miles from north to south. The south end terminates in a low point, with a conical hill. Two islets lie two miles from the north end. Atangota Island, near the east point, is in 12° 32' S., 177" 13' E. Captain Hope, R. N. , gives the following account of the two roadsteads on the north side : — Lee Harbour, so called, is an open bay, 1^ miles from the west end of the island ; is well marked by a high wooded bluff, 600 feet high, on its western side, with a red sandstone face to the water's edge. No fresh water, landing difficult. The Brisk anchored in 15 fathoms, with east point of bay N.E. ^ E., and centre of Emery Island W. by N. ^ N. Emery Island, the easternmost of a chain of islets lying north-west of Rotumah, is higli. There is a clear channel between these islets and Rotumah North-east Roadstead is five miles eastward of Lee Harbour, at the north-east point of the island, close westward of two islets off the point. The Basilisk anchored in 9^ fathoms, with Outer Islet N.E. by E., Emery Island W. J N. in smooth water, with a strong trade blowing ; the ship was watered in bulk from good wells and a smootli sandy beach. When the trade wind may be depentled on north-east roadstead is to be preferred to Lee Bay, in making which avoid closing the eastern point, as off it is an extensive reef. There is also anchorage with north and west winds off a village at south- east end of island. It is said to be one of the best islantls in South Pacific for cocoanuts. From Auckland to Rotumah, it is best to go to the east of Fiji. Eagleston Reef, 40 miles east of Rotumah, a shoal of unknown extent, in about 12° 30' S., 178° 0' E. Louisa Bank is said to be in 11° 45' S., 175° 52' E. Hamond Reef, in 15° 32' S., 175° 20^ E., is probably the same as Under- wood's Reef, placed in 15° 42' S., 175° 18' E. Carter's Reef, stated to be in 15° 42' S., 176° 28' E. Also a dangerous reef in 15' 40' S., 175° 58' E.. breaks with heavy swell ; depth 7^ fathoms. A reef is said to be in 18° 10' S., 175° 10' E. 254 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Charlotte Bank, of 15 fathoms, in 11° 15' S., 173° 12' E. The Pandora reef is in 12° 11' S., 172° 7' E. Fataka, or Mitre Island, two miles long, nortli-west and south- east, steep, and covered with wood, in 11° 56' S., 170° 20' E. Anouda, or Cherry Island, is placed ii° 37' S., 169° 40' 30". Its nortli end is 350 feet high. A rock lies 300 yards off the north end, and a bank of 19 to 12^ fathoms extends 4 miles in a north-westerly direction. It has anchorage on it, coarse white sand. From the sonth-west side of the island another spit extends off*. A mile from its southern end is a rock a few feet above water, joined to tlie shore by a rocky bank. A quarter of a mile out- side tliis is an apparently isolated sunken rock, Strathmore Shoal. — Reported with 4 to 5 fathoms over it. 150 yards in extent, in about 11^ 9' S., 170'' 42' E. (Is not marked on chart.) Tucopia, or Barwell Island, is 3 miles in diameter, in 12° 21' S., 168" 43' E. About 3,000 feet high. DETACHED ISLANDS AND SHOALS BETWEEN THE EQUATOR AND LATITUDE 10° S. Following the previous plan, in this belt of latitude we commence to the westward of the Marquesiis Islands. Caroline, or Thornton Island, is 7 to 8 miles long N.N.E. and S.S.W., and 2 to 3 miles wide, well covered with cocoanut and other trees, visible 16 to 20 miles. It consists of many islets, encircling a lagoon. The reef on the windward side breaks, except at the north-east point, to a distance of a mile, on the south side H mile ; and is dangerous to approach at night. The reef is close to the islets on the west side, and no breakers were seen off the north-west point. " An entrance to the north-east, anchorage inside, patchy ; trade, shell." — Captain Murray. Its latest assigned position is 9° 54' S., 150° 6' W. Vostock Island and Flint Island have been described on page 226. Maiden Island, 30 feet high, visildc seven miles. The reefs off the "windward or north-east and south-east end stretch seawards some distance ; the north-east is the most dangerous point. Landing on the east side is rarely possible. The west side is quite safe, the reefs off the north-west and south-west ends only extend a few cables. The Guano Company have laid down moorings and buoys, and run out stages as far as possible, so as to give every facility. 100 yards from the shore, the depth was 70 fathoms white coral. There is no fresh water, no cocoanuts. ^\ hen the sun is north of the line, during the period of E. and E. S. E. winds, the northern side of the island is practicable, as well as the south-west side ; when the sun is south of the line, during the period of the true north-east trade, the south side is practicable. The loading of guano is carried on at all times, except during a few davs at full and change of the moon. The tide rises 1^ feet, lat. 4° 1' S., long. 154° 57' W. Starbuck Island.— It has been very vaguely placed on the charts, and to this cause probably is owing the many wrecks which have taken place on it. No anchorage ; landing difficult : the guano establishment in food order, but deserted. It is low, and not visible over seven miles, t is four miles long east and west, H miles wide, and surrounded by a narrow, steep reef nearly half a mile ofi* shore, qxcept off" the east side, where it extends furtlier. Th*? north and north-west sides are the only practicable parts for landing. It had been visited for guano, then abandoned, but subsequently revisited by the company working Maiden Island. Near the north-west point, quite close to the shore, the depth is 15 fathoms, 85 yards further out is 130 fathoms and upwards. Lieutenant Chauviniere considers *'the approach to these low islands (Maiden and Starbuck) especially from the eastward, must be made with great caution, owing to much of the shore being awash, and to the prolongation of the reefs in that direction. The current also is very strong ; between Maiden and Starbuck it ran to the BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 255 westward 32 miles in 24 hours ; in the vicinity of the latter island it has been •estimated at 43, 51, and even 56 miles W.S.W. in 24 hours." Lat. 5° 36' S., long. 155° 57' W. Tongarewa or Penrhyn Island, 50 feet high, nine miles long N.N.E. and S.S.W. (the chart makes it twelve miles long N.N.W. and S.S.E.), and about five miles wide, with an extensive lagoon, and a boat entrance into it. On the N.W. side a continuous village, with cocoanut :groves throughout its extent. ** Good anchorage in lagoon, one entrance on N.E. side near north extreme, and two for going out on S.W. side. Anchorage all over lagoon in 20 to 2 fathoms. Always found wind North •of East, say E.N. E."— Captain Murray. H.M.S. Falcon, 1867, "On the N.E. side, near the northern extreme, IS a clear opening into the lagoon, in Avhich the least water found was two fathoms." Pead shell and beche-de-mer abound. Wilkes makes the N.N.W. point in lat. 8" 55^' S., long 158° 7' W., South end, lat. 5° 6^' S., long. 158' 2' W. Jarvis Island, a small coral island, triangular in shape. If miles East and West, and a mile North and South, 10 or 12 feet above the sea, without a tree or shrub, and very dangerous. L.at. 0° 22' S., long. 159° 54' W. It has been occupied by the Phoenix Guano Company, who placed men "On it for the purpose of working the guano beds. THE TOKOLAU, OR UNION GROUP, 'Consists of three clusters of islets. The islets of each cluster are connected by a reef. Fakaafo, or Bowditch Island, is of triangular shape, with the apex .South. From North to South it is eight miles lon^, and in width from its West point four miles. On its S.W. and North pomts it is of considerable elevation. On the East side there are extensive groves of cocoanut trees. There is no entrance for a vessel to the lagoon, which appears to have but little depth. North extreme, lat. 9° 20' S., long. 171° 4' ^Y^ Nukunono is seven miles north and south, and five miles east and west, of triangular form, with the apex north. It has a lagoon with islets in it ; the north-west side is a bare reef awash, and breaks heavily. Cocoa- nut and other trees on it. Lat. 9° 5' S., long. 171° 38' W. Atafu is a lagoon island three nnles east and west, and 2^ miles north .and south. There is no passage into the lagoon ; the sea breaks heavily on the reef. The islets are 8 or 10 feet above the water, and covered with •cocoanut and other trees. " No anchorage at this group ; lie off and on while taking in cargo. Fair trade in copra." — Capt. Murray. ELLICE'S GROUP Extends south-east by south and north-west by north 360 miles, and 'Consists of nine clusters of islands, between 5h° and ITS., and 176° and 180* E. H.M.S. Basilisk remarks — "When hove-to off the EUice Groiip, ihere was always so strong an e(iuatorial current to the west, that it was with difficulty the ship could be kept near the land. With the exception of JSpeiden or Lynn Island we fouiul the position of the EUice and Mitchell Islands tolerably correct. They are aU low and flat, the tops of the cocoanut trees being 60 to 80 feet above tlie water. " Sophia Island, is described as a small wooded island, 2 to 3 miles in •circuit ; seen 18 to 20 miles off. A bank is reported 4 miles north-east of it, Avitli fi-om 15 to 12 fathoms, or less. H.M.S. Rosario made Sophia Island in 10° 46' S., 179° 31' E. Meek Shoal, a coral reef seen by Mr. J. Meek, to the West of the ^ Stuart Reef, said to be 15 miles long, E. by S. and W. by N., and three miles ■broad; a small part above water ; 8° 55' S., 170° 15' W. Its existence in the position .assigned was disproved by the U.S.S. Narragansett in 1872. She passed completely «,cross the bank, and found no bottom at 100 fathoms. 25^ . BKETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. last position. No breakers. 10" 40' S., 179° 8' E. These require re- examination. Nukulaelae, or Mitcliell Group, "a cluster of eleven or twelve islets, situated on a coral reef which surrounds a shoal laillage near south-west end. — Ohlson." South end in 7° 32' S., 178° 4(3' E. Nui, Netherland or Beg Island in 7°,13' S., 177° 14' E. (Captain Ohlson makes it 8' east of this). H.M.S. Basilisk describes it as follows : — "The reef is crescent shaped; the islets, six or seven in number, on its circumference. The. north-Avest and south-west horns are joined by a long connecting reef, through which there is no passage ; the village on the south-west islet. Boats find a difficulty in landing." "Good island foi: BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 257': trade ; aiicliomge imsafe and very close in, off a large stone, at village on. west side. " — Ohlson. Nutou or Speiden Island is abont 2^ miles long by l^ broad, densely covered -Nvitn cocoannt trees. A narrow shore reef extends round the island. A small quantity of brackish water. The village is on the west side ; pigs and fowls are plentiful ; lat. 6" 8' S., long. 177° 22' E. Grand Cocal Shoal.— According to H.M.S. Basilisk (1872)— ** After' a careful search for Grand Cocal Island, in clear favourable weather, passing over the position assigned, it could not be found. But at St. Auf^istine Island an English sailor, resident there, stated that as an island it did not; exist ; but there was an extensive shoal, three or four miles in circumference, between St. Augustine and Hudson Islands, with live to seven fathoms, water, which breaks in heavy weather, and that he had frequently sailed over this shoal and seen the bottom. " Nanomaga, or Hudson Island (probably the Grand Cocal of Maurelle) low, and encompassed by reefs, 1^ miles long, north and south, and nearly a mile wide cast and west, can be seen 8 or 10 miles otf. The. reefs extending from its north and south points, nearly half a mile break heavily, the mean of reported positions 6" 12' S., 176° 16^' E. Nanomea, Angfustine, the northernmost of the Ellice group. '* A coral reef of crescent form, Avith two islets on the north-west and south-east horns, a tliird small islet lies between them. Reefs, half a mile in extent, run oft' the south-east and north-west extremes. The village is on the eastern side of the south-east islet. Position of centre, 5° 36 ^ S., 176° 10' E.* Paanopa, or Ocean Island, is high in the centre ; has no harbours or anchoratjes, and is steep-to all round, clear of liidden dangers. It is about 10 or 11 miles in circuit. Cocoanuts and fowls may be obtained. The island can be seen 25 miles. Position, by Captain Cheyne, 0°48'S, 169° 49' E. M. Dutaillis, 0° 52' S., 168° 24' E. Mattoetee (Motu-iti ?) or Kennedy's Island, is stated to be in 8° 36' S., 167° 5' E. ; position requires contirmation.f Marex Keef or Island, another doubtful position, in 8° 25' S., 165° 32' E., announced in the * ' China Mail, " otherwise unsupported. Pieasant Island, by Capt. Cheyne, is in 0° 25' S. 167° 5' E. It is 15 miles in circuit, low, and covered with cocoannt trees. Captain Simpson makes it in 0^ 35' S. A fringing reef projects about 200 yards all round the island. It has no harbour or anchorage, is steep-to on all sides, and clear of liidden dangers. "Usual trade — Copra, fruit, pigs, yams. Natives friendly.. Strong westerly current. " — Capt. Murray. GILBERT ARCHIPELAGO. Krusenstern separates them into three groups, the Kingsmill Islands, consisting of Bishop or Drummond Island and their subordinates ; the Simp* son Group, Woodle, Henderville, and Hopper ; and the Scarborough Range, Marshall, Knoy, Matthew Islands, &c. 'riiese names seem appropriate, and have been for years acknowledged. The group consists of fifteen or sixteen islands. The highest land of the group is not more than 20 feet above the sea. Many of the islands of this group aftbrd anchorage on their lee side on sand banks ; in some of them the lee or Avestern reef is wanting. The islands are fast wearing away by the action of the sea during westerly gales. Great numbers of fish are taken in wears on the coral flats. Turtle are taken in the season on the beaches ; and sheU-fish, with the sea-slug or beche-de-mer, are obtained by diving. There is not much to induce general trading vessels to come here ; they possess but little in the way of refreshment, and there is neither wood nor water in any quantity. They possess many good harbours, * Reported Islands westward of Ellice Islands.— Jesus Island (?) was discovered by Mendana m the year 1565, placing it in lat, 6° 15', and 160 Spanish leagues from the Baxas di Candelaria. Krusenstern places il, in the list of his doubtful positions, in lat. 6* 45' S., long. 171° 30' E. Nameless Island (?) is another doubtful position, lat. 2° 50' S., long. 170° 18' E. t The position given in Admiralty chart was sailed over by Capt. McKay in 1875> and searched for for two days 30 miles on each side, without any indication of it. 258 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. a rare advantage in low coral islands. From October to April is the winter, especially distingnislied by the frequency of rains. Variable winds from nortliAvard and westward prevail at this season, and the violent gales from south-west are typhoon like. These storms last three or four days, veering gradually round to the north. The leeward sides of the islands receive most damage. From May till September the weather is tine, with clear skies, and occasional showers ; during this time the Avind blows constantly from the eastward. The following account begins with the southernmost of the archipelago, and proceeds northward. Anirai, Arore or Kurd's Island, the southernmost of the group, is low and well wooded. It may be seen 10 miles. Its length is six or seven miles, its breadth 1 or 1^ miles. It cannot be reached except on the west. The south point is terminated by a breaker which extends three cables' length. The sea breaks heavily on the shore to the east. At the north point of the island there is a bank of sand, with some rocks interspersed, on which there are but 3^ fathoms. It is all the more dangerous because the sea does not always break on it. Its extent is about four miles, and its direction is determined by the angles comprised between N.N.E. and E.N.E., of which the north point is the sunnnit. The west point of this island forms an extensive bay, where the Avhalers anchor. Fish, poultry, cocoanuts, «&c., are easily procured. South point, 2° 41' S., 177° 1' E. *'Six miles S.E. and N.W. Anchorage in tAvo places off villages to leeward. Natives friendly ; trade — cloth, &c.; copra. A reef runs a good two miles otf N.W. end. Note. — Most of the Kingsmills are subject to drought, and the yield of copra is uncertain. " — Ohlson. Nukunau, or Byron Island, a low flat island, the S.W. side, is estimated to be four leagues in length. The position is given as lat. 1° 25', long. 176° 40' E. "I make it to be 10 miles west of position on chart. Anchorage oft' lee side in several places in 10 fathoms. Natives troublesome. A little copra. " — Ohlson. Peru, or Francis Island.— The south jwint is in 1° 20' S., (about) 176° ir E. About 10 miles long, north-west and south-east. A little copra. The reef is near the land, except on the west side, when spit extends 2 to 3 miles to the westward ; best anchorage to north-west of spit, in 10 fathoms. — Ohlson. .Onoatoa, Onutu, or Clerk Island, is in 1°50' S., 175° 39' E. ** Little trade, but natives friendly. Pass eastward, round north-west end, and anchor U miles from it, in 10 fathoms, 1^ cables oft' reef." — Ohlson. Tamana, is in 2° 35' S., 176° 7' E. Very little trade. Taputeouea or Bishop or Drummond Island. — The U.S. exploring sliips Peacock and Flying Fish, April, 1841, here encountered the regular north-east trades. It is 1° 20' S., 174° 57' E. 30 miles long, north- Avest and south-east, and varies in width from half to three-cjuarters of a mile. Thinly covered with cocoanut and pandanus trees. On its west side the reefs and sand-banks extend otf some distance, gradually increasing from the north-west point to the south-east, where they are as much as 6^ miles in width. This reef is interrupted in many places, and there is good anchorage oft' the town of Utiroa, towards the nojrth-east end, near a small sand-bank, usually bare. Taputucoa. — "(Natives ti-eacherous.) No one should go to leeward of this island (or Nanouti) if avoidable ; pass eastward, and round the north- west point, and anchor about 4 miles from it, in 10 to 4 fathoms. Very little trade. "—Ohlson. Captain Hudson found a bank, on which he anchored in 15 fathoms water, at a distance of four miles from the island. There is neither wood nor water to be obtained at this island, and no inducement to visit it, except to trade for cocoanuts. Good whaling ground exists in the vicinity, and the American wlialemen are in the hal)it of cruising in this neighbourhood. Those who visit these people ought to keep a constant guard against treachery. All intercourse BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 259 with them should therefore he conducted with great caution, especially in ships weakly manned. Nanouti, or Sydenham Island. — "Not safe to go inside lagoon. In settled weatlier ancliorage off south-west side in 4 fathoms, opposite an islet with a store on it. Strangers leaving this anchorage sliould steer 12 miles west by south before attempting to haul to the northward on account of the reefs, which have no break on them ; great caution is therefore necessary. The north-west horn of the reef can be crossed in not under 5 fathoms, some 5 miles off shore. Very little trade."— Ohlson. In 0° 36' S., 174° 24' E. Is of coral formation, and a mere ledge of land, with a lagoon, reef, and a bank on its lee or south-west side. It is 19 miles long, north-west and south-east, and its width including lagoon and reef, 8^ miles. On the south-west and north-west portions is a coral bank, 1 to 1^ miles beyond the reef, on which there are 10 fathoms Avater. The island is partially covered with cocoanut, pandanus, and other trees ; the islets of which it is formed are nearly continuous, connected by the usual reef. Nanouki, or HenderviUe Island, inO°Il'N., 173° 39' E., is 6^ miles long, east and west, 5^ miles wide at the east, diminishing to 2 miles at the west end. This island affords neither wood, water, nor refreshments. Kuria, or Woodle Island, in 0° 14' N., 173° 27' E., is 5 miles north-west and south-east, and its greatest width, at its south-east end, 2^ miles. The north-west position has two small lagoons, used as fishponds by tlie chiefs. A reef extends to the north-west nearly 3 miles. It has no outer reef, and may be approached very closely. It affords neither wood, water nor refreshments. "Kuria and Aranahu belong to Apamama. No trade for strangers." — Ohlson. Apamama, or Hopper Island, in 0° 27' N., 173° 57' E., is five feet above the surface of the ocean, 10 miles lon^ north-west and south-east, and five miles in width north and south. There is anchorage on the west side, in an opening between the reef and the north-west point of the island, which is about two miles wide. The soundings vary from two to five fathoms ; across it, in some places, the bottom is broken coral, in others coral sand. The entrance to tlic lagoon althougli feasible, should not be attempted through this passage ; but there is a good passage into it on the soutli-east side of the island, a mile wide. A small quantity of fresh water may be had by digging on the beaches ; wood and refreshments not procurable for shipping. " An entrance to lagoon on south-west side, with 4^ fathoms, is narrow and intricate. A wider entrance at north-west end has only 3^ fathoms. Anchorage all over lagoon in seven and eight fathoms. All the lagoons are more or less full of patches. This is the best island for copra." — Olilson. Maiana, or Hall Island. — The north-east and south-east parts are continuous land, whilst to the south-west and nortli-west it consists of a reef and a bank, in some places awasli, with a sand-spit in its lagoon. The western sides of tiie islands are, therefore, very dangerous, and should be approached with caution, as the sea seldom breaks on them, and the dis- colouration of the water is not at all times to be observed. It affords neither refreshment, wood, nor water. It is nine miles in length, and south-east and north-west, in 0° 57' N., 173^4' E. On its west side, on some of the banks, there is anchorage in 10 to 15 fathoms. ** No entrance to lagoon. Anchorage off north-west end in 10 fathoms. Strangers recj[uire to he very careful as numerous patches lie for miles off" south-west side. Always pass eastward of island, and round north-west point. Water usually not clear. Natives generally fighting." — Ohlson. Tarawa or Knoy Island is 20 miles long north-west and south-east, inl°29'N., 173°5'E. The land is continuous and wooded, with the ex- ception of four gaps, where the reef is bare. The south side is 12 miles long east and Avest. On this part, near the west end, are three hummocks (which appear like islands in the distance), and several small sand-banks, connected by the same reef. The island has its lagoon, but it has the appearance of an extensive bay. The reef on the Avest side being a sunken one, on Avhich is found five fathoms. 260 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Maraki, or Matthew Island, 2° 0' N., 173° 25' E., is a laf?oon island without entrance. It is live miles long, N. by E. and S. by W., and 2^ miles wide at its base, of triangnlar shape, Apaiang, or Charlotte Island, in V 52' N., 173" 2' E. Is a lagoon island, consisting of a string of coral islets, within a reef, which is six or seven feet above the water. The reef has a blutf front, much worn by the sea. Its length north-east and south-west is 16 miles ; its average breadth five miles. The north-west and west side is a continuous reef, four or five feet above the water's ec]ge, on which are many islets. About the centre of the reef, on the south-Avest side, is a ship's channel into the lagoon, half a mile wide. Near its entrance is a small islet, which stands alone, and is a good mark for the entrance. * ' Narrow entrance to lagoon on south-west side ; one mile south-east of One-tree Islet. Anchorage good under lee of land to north-east. Three shoal patches opposite entrance. Luffing close round weather side of entrance, a north course (good) clears to the eastward. On no account go in on the ebb. There is also anchorage outside, close in to entrance. "—Ohlson. Makin or Pitt Island and Butaritari or Touching Island. — The largest is called by the natives Taritari (Bataritari — Touching Island), and tJie smallest Makin (Pitt Island). The southern part of Taritari is in 3" 8' N., 172° 48' E. This island is triangular, witli its apex south, and its sides 14 miles in length. The south-east is a continuous grove of cocoanut and pandanus. On the two other sides is a reef, awash, excepting the north- west point, in which there is a small inlet. Makin is much smaller, being but SIX miles long ; it varies in width from half a mile to a mile. Its northern point lies in 3° 21' N., 172" 57' E. The entrance into the lagoon has 4^ fathoms of Avater, and is one-third of a mile wide. (Bataritari or Pitt Island: " Fine passage into lagoon, with five fathoms on south-west side, one mile from south-west point. Best anchorage on south-east side'of lagoon, opposite large house, in six fathoms. Lagoon patchy. Copra sold for cash."" — Ohlson.) "Tamona, north of line, does not exist." — Ohlson. Currents. — "Among the Kingsmill Group run strong to the westward from one np to four knots, and very strong between the islets. Between the Kingsmill and Marshall Girroups it trends gradually more to the north, and then between 4° and 8" N. the counter current runs to the east. Ships should work to the east between these parallels. AVinds. — "The south-east trade crosses the Line all the year through at the Kingsmills, but they are liable to heavy westerly squalls (and from all quarters) in the hurricane season— Deceml^er, January, and Febmary. In tlie Marsliall's in the northern winter the north-east tratles reach as far south as the north end of Kingsmills ; in the northern summer the south- east trades have been steady tis far north as I have been — i.e., to 8" N. All through the year the wind at the Kingsmills varies from E.S.E. to E.N.E., changing to N.E. as you go north. There is no calm belt, but between the two groups some very squally weather. In the northern winter the north- east trade is steady and fresh up to half a gale in the Marshalls. In their summer the south-east trades reaches them for five or six months, which is their fine- weather season for drying copra." — Ohlson. MARSHALL ARCHIPELAGO. This extensive collection of islands lies between 4° 45' N. to 12' 0' N., and is separated from the Gilbert Islands by a channel 50 leagues broad. Two lines or chains of islands, lying nearly parallel to each other, and ninning north-west and south-east, are included under the naine Marshall Islands. Tlie more eastern is the Ratak, and the western is the Ralik. Each chain numbers fifteen low coraline islands, several of which are 'very small, without lagoons; but the greater number are fully formed atolls, some of them of immense size. The Ratak Chain, the westernmost, contains fifteen islands in the following order from the south, viz. :— Mili, Maejuro, Ahrno, Aurh, BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 261 Maloelab, Urikub, Wotje, Likieb, Jemo, Ailuk, Me jit, Utirik, Taka, Bikar, and Taoiigi. Mill, or Mulgrave Islands, appear to form a chain of atolls. Td- getlier tliey form a sort of quadrilateral figure, on the east side of which is a double belt of islands. These islands are almost all connected with each other at low water. In general the whole chain is very steep-to on the out- side, and only increases on the side of the interior lagoon, where it is less disturbed by the sea, and where the coral banks are in course of formation. The space enclosed by these islands is a real sea, navigable for every description of vessels. The bottom, generally at the depth of 22 to 27 fathoms, rises now and then nearer the surface, and shows in white patches, which thus indicate the dangers, and also point out the points where the anchor may be dropped. These banks, bestrewed with rocks, are neverthe- less dangerous to anchors and moorings. To take the best position attention ought to be paid to the tide, and it ought to be chosen, if possible, at low water. The passage for large ships is between Barr and Tokoeoa Islands, the first to the East, the other to the West of the entrance To reach the anchorage with winds from the eastern quarter, the only point for attention is to take up such a position as will allow you to range as near as possible to the pitch of the eastern reef, and rounding the bank attached to Barr Island as near as you please ; it is shown by the whitish Avater ; by this means you will avoid a small patch to the S.E., over which the flood runs H knots. This patch is, until half tide, indicated by veiy strong ripplings, and is nearly awash at low water. In general it is better to enter or leave with the tide, unless the breeze is fair, and sufficient to overcome the current. Mill — "Entrance to lagoon on north side, anchorage in lagoon on its west side in 10 fathoms ; also along outside to leeward. Same trade as Jalutt. "— Ohlson. Bouguenieu is the first islet West of Tokoeoa. Position of the anchorage, 6° 14' N., 171" 56' E. Captain Wilkes says they are in lat.. 5'' 59' 15", lon^. 172° 2' 3.3" (probably the S.E. part of the island), but his account will not coincide with that given above. Majuro, or Arrowsmith Island. — The length, W.N.W. and E.S.E., is 18 miles, the breadth li miles. It is of the usual coral formation, with a lagoon. It is a magnificent island, with forests of bread-fruit and pandanus. Cocoanuts abound, and bananas seem to be plentiful. " Over 20 miles E. and W., entrance to lagoon on north side, large opening, n four-fathom bank faces entrance. Anchorage in lagoon under islets on N.E. side, and in S.E. corner in from 14 to 3 fathoms, good. Same trade as Jalutt."— Ohlson. The S.E. point is in 7° 5' N., 171° 24' E. Ahrno, or Daniel Island and Pedder Island, West of the foregoing. The broad and open channel separating them isFordyce Passage. The N.E, point (of Daniel Island) is in T 30' N., 171° 52' E. The S. W. point (of Pedder Island) r 11' N. and 171° 40' E. ''Principal entrance to lagoon in bay on N.E. side, to eastward of a remarkable high islet, 4| fathoms in channel, which breaks occasionally. Anchorage in lagoon in S.E. corner under small islet in seven or eight fathoms. Good anchorage outside off S.W. end. See chart. Sanje trade as Jalutt." — Ohlson. Aurh, or Traversey Isl.ands. — This group is 13 miles long N.AV. and S.E., and six miles broad. On the surrounding reef are thirty-two islands, the N.W. of which is Pigen. Stobual Island, at the N.E. end, has a very pleasant aspect. The anchoring place in 8° 19' N., 171° 12' E. Aurh is at the S.E. end of the atoll. "Entrance to lagoon (which is very clear of patches) at S.W. end, have to work in, good anchorage. Station in S.E. corner." (See Elmore Islands), — ;MuVray. Maloelab (Kaven), Calvert, or AraktcheetF Islands. —This group is 30 miles long N.W. and S.E., and 11^ miles broad. The whole cluster consists 262 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. af sixty-four islands. Kaven or Araktclieef, to tlie N.W., the lar, 144° 30' E. "Wolea or Ulie Islands are a group of 22 islands. The southern point of liaour, the easternmost, lies in 7° 20' N., 143° 53' E. This group does not exceed six miles in extent. The fatiguing uniformity of the coral islands has at least this advantage : that one description serves for all. But the Wolea Group dillers from the others in this respect. Its figure is very irregular; it has two projecting angles to the north, and a deep indentation between them. Acconling to the usual hypothesis of fonnation, this figure cannot be explained but by supposing that two independent groups were formed at the same time in this part. The channel of 12 yards between the islands of Angaligarail and Farailes seems to mark their separation. The reef, which extends thence to the south-east, reunites abreast of Motogozeu to the reef running from Raour Island, tlms completing the eastern group. At the same time a depth of 4J fathoms, and the reef extending east and north-east from Felalis, marks the direction of the prolonged reef, which would in time reach to Farailes, ^nd form tlie western group. Wolea or Ouleai occupies the north-east angle of the group, and is of an irregular triangular form, three-quarters of a mile in diameter. Its north extreme is in 7° 22' N., 143° 58' E. Palliou Island extends from its south-east extremity nearly true south, and is nearly connected with Raour Island, the south-easternmost of the ^roup, the two togetlier being 1^ miles- in length. On the west side of Raour are four or five artificial harbours, such as had not been seen in any other part of the Carolines. A jetty of large stoiles ran out for 100 yards into the sea, and at each side of its extremity auother line of stones, projecting at an angle of about 60°, so that the whole has something the form of an anchor. From the south end of Raour the reef projects nearly half a mile. Between it and Tangoilap Island, two miles to the W.N.W., is Motogozeu Islet, very small, and, like all the rest, surrounded by a reef, so that the anchorage in the eastern group has two entrances, one on each side of Motogozeu. Felalisse or Falalis Island, the south-west portion of the group, lies tw^o miles south-west of Tagoilap. Between it and Motogozeu there are some detached patches. The reef runs to the north-west three-quarters of a mile from Felalisse, leaving a navigable opening into the lagoon betAveen it and Falulap or Faluellap, a small islet, one of a group which extends N.N.W. and N. If miles to Oulemeray, the north-west island of the group. Thence the chain is continued through Seliape and some smaller islands E.S.E. to Parailesse, between which and Langaligaraile is the very narrow but navigable channel before alluded to, forming a northern entrance to the lagoon. Eauripik or Eourypyg, two islets, with a lagoon in G° 40' N., 143° 10' E. They produce nothing but cocoanuts. 270 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. Sorol or Philip Islands, two small islands ; the easternmost is the largest, and is iive miles from the other. They are placed in 8' 6* N., 140* 52* E. Fads or Tromelin Island, a small low island in 9° 47' N., 140' 38' E. This island is the only one of the Carolines that has no lagoon ; it is formed of madroporic rocks, 30 feet high, against which the sea beats immediately. It is 2§ miles in circuit. No anchorage in any part. Ulithi or Mackenzie Islands (native name, Ouluthy) — The gronp is. of great extent, and consists of low coral islands, covered with cocoanut trees, and connected by coral reefs, forming a large lagoon inside, with many good passages through the reef leading into it. The two small islands on the eastern group. Ear and Khilap or Hielap,. are connected by a reef to each other and to others beyond. From them a shoal extends 15 miles to the S.E. The western group, ei^ht leagues in extent from North to South, i» formed of a great number of small islands, Mogmog, Troilem, Falalep, etc., united by reefs. The two groups are separated by a cliannel eight mile* broad. The S.W. point of the eastern group, which may be taken as tlie centre or all the islands, is in 9" 56' N., 139*50' E.; and Mogmog, the northernmost of the western group, is in 10° 6' N., 139* 45' E. Captain Wilkes makes the East extremity in 10' 8' N., 139' 55' E. Sap or Yap (chart, Gouapp), is frequently made by ships taking the eastern passage to China. It is estimated to extend from North to South about 3i leagues; the North end lies in gMO'N.; South end, 9°30'N.; 138" 8' E. The southernmost land is low, but rises to the northward into hills. The island abounds in cocoanut trees. On the southern and western, sides the reef is dangerous, and extends W.S.W., two leagues from the S.W. end of the island. It is steep-to, and some of the black rocks appear just above water near its extremity. It has an excellent harbour on the S.E. side, formed in an angle of the coast, by reefs. The entrance, through the reef, is about 200 yards wide, and can easily be made out from the mast- head when standing along the reef. Inside the channel widens, and trends more northward. The anchorage at the head of the harbour, off the village of Tomal, is perfectly safe, the holding ground good, and depth moderate. The South part of the island is low, but rises into hills towards the centre, which is moderately high. It is visilde eight or nine leagues, and makes in three hummocks. This is now a depot island for the collection of copra for the trading vessels. Hunter Reef, a narrow coral reef. Captain Hunter had 16 fathom* water on it, and saw the bottom distinctly. It extends nearly north and south, and is about seven leagues N. by E. of Yap ; 9° 57' N., 138" 13' E. Neoli or the Matelotas Islands. — The south islet is in 8° 17' N.,, 137° 33' E. From this to the north-east islet, which is in 8° 35' N., 137' 40*^ E., the reef on the eastern side, is at some distance from the south islet, in detached patches, and does not break with westerly winds. The reef extends six miles northward from the north-east islet ; its north extreme is- in 8° 41' N. The western islet lies south-west by west from the north-east one, and is also surrounded by dangerous reefs. Their extent to the west and north-west has not been ascertained, but they probably connect the islets. There is a passage on the north-west side of the south islet leading to tlie lagoon, but the anchorage inside, if any, would be very unsafe. This^ is a most dangerous group, and should have a good berth in passing, particularly in hazy weather, or dark nights, as the islet cannot be seen, above 10 or 11 miles in clear daylight, and strong currents often prevail in their vicinity. The southern islet is safe to approach on the south side, as no hidden dangers exist. Elivi Island is marked on Imray's chart in 9' 50' N., 138" 15' E. Carolines. — "June, July, and August is the wet season, with squally^ weather. Went from Gouapp back to the Marshalls in these months, and. had light westerly winds and counter current in 4° and 5" N., but southward of this calms and westerly currents. Visited nine of these islands, all similar to the Marshalls, lagoon anchorages. A good trade with copra. At. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 271 Gouapp and Panapa (the only two high islands) the copra is collected by- small vessels ready for tlie large ones. Gouapp will ^ive 120 tons of copra^ per month. There is a good deal of trade with the China market.'' — Murray. In tins short account of the Pacific Islands it has been thought the better plan to omit all notice of the character of the natives, Avho, speaking^ generally, are never reliable. It is now well understood that they may be found and described as "friendly" by one vessel, while a succeeding one (owing perliaps to some occurrence in the interval) may meet a case of "massacre" or "cutting-out." THE CORAL SEA, ETC. The region it embraces is a very important one, and retxnires an amount of detail which this volume will not admit of. TheCoral Sea is comprised between the n Qilh-ca stcoast of Aiisti'alia on the we'sTUnd New Caledonia on the east ; nortliward' by llie""Eoiusiade Archipelago and J\ ew"ljluinea, and southward by the tropic or the parallel of 25* S. The navigation is of a dangerous character without due caution. The surveys of Captain Denham, R.N., have, however, given us the true character of many of the reefs. Beginning southward — Cato Islet and Bank, a dry sandbank, 19 feet above high water, small, with little vegetation, and innumerable birds around it, is in 23" 15' 8., 155* 33' E. Captain Denliam erected a cone-shaped beacon 12 feet high on it. A bank with 10 to 30 fathoms extends five miles from all sides but the south. Hutchinson lieef, or rock, lies oil" its east side. H.W., F. & C, 8h.; rise, 6 feet. * WiiECK Reef is the central part of a chain of reefs, extending nearly east and west 20 miles. Bird Islet, on the east extreme of these reefs, is in 22* 10' 30" S., 155* 28' 40" E., and 12 feet above high water. Wreck Reef has a sandbank on it, one-third of a mile in circuit, four feet above ordinary high-water level, in 22° 11' 20" S., 155° 19' E. On its north and north-west sides is anchorage in 18 to 25 fathoms, coral sand, at one to two cables' length from the reef. This chain consists of many distinct reefs, of ditierent sizes ; the six principal are from 4 to 8 or 10 miles in circuit, separated by channels from one to three miles wide.t Kenn Reef consists of four separate reefs, which form a curved chain, extending N.E. by E. ^ E. 6'J^ miles from its south-western extreme to its eastern projection, thence nearly N.N.W. ^ W. 10 miles to its nortli-western extreme ; the western side thus forming a bay, on a bank of soundings in 5 to 37 fathoms, coral sand and rock, extending north-westward eight miles from the bight, outside which the depth suddenly increases to no bottom in 250 fathoms. The south-easternmost and largest reef, dries at half-tide, and always breaks, is of trian<^ular shape, extending from its eastern projection — on which is a high rect stone — 8.W. by W. 4 miles, and N.W. 2^ miles. The south-east and north-east sides of this reef are slightly embayed ; the former was found by Captain Denham so strewed with wrecks as would suggest a lighthouse being erected on the reef, if it were lit to sustain such a structure and party. The western side is broken and irregular, with a five to seven fathoms inlet trending half a mile to eastward, and three-quarters of a mile northward into the shallow lagoon enclosed by the reef. There are three sli«^htly vegetated sand cays on the south-easternmost Kenn Reef, nearly in line N.E. by E. and S.W. by W., and 1^ miles apart from each other. The central and largest does not exceed 150 yards in length, nor 5^ feet above high water, in 21" 15' 44" S., 155' 48' 45" E. Cap- tain Denham built a beacon on this cay from pieces of wreck found on it. Frederick Reef, is 8^ miles from north to south, awash on the south and east sides. Observatory Cay, on its south end, 5 feet above high water, * Among the doubtful tlie following announcements may be placed :— Australia Itccf cannot be seen far off, as the sea is very smooth around it sometimes. It was not seen in the Herald, when 200 to 400 fathoms were found. Lat. 22* 45', long. loG* G'. William IV. Island is placed on some charts in 24° 18' S., 154' 47' E., but it appears improbable. t Cams or Mid-day lieef in 21* 58' S„ 154* 20' E. A sounding of 220 fathoms, no bottom, having been found on the spot, it must be either Saumarez or Wreck Keef. -'272 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH TACIFIC PILOT. is in 21° 1' 46" S., 154° 24' 27" E. H.W. F. & C, 81i ; rise, G feet. The southern portion encloses Anchorage Sound. Anchorage Sonne! is nearly 2^ miles AVicle between the north point of the southern Frederick Reef and Kidge Rock, and 2^ miles deep, with regular soundings in 10 to 17 fathoms, coral sand, affording excellent anchorage, sheltered from the sea eastward, between N.N.E; and 8.S.W., without any- sunken danger up to within half a mile of the bight, near Observatory Cay. Saumarez Reef, an extensive bank or reef, separated from the pro- jection of the Great Barrier Reef of Australia (Swain Reef) by a channel 30 miles broad, is 23 miles long north-east and south-Avest, and from three- quarters to a quarter qf a mile broad. The north-east cay (8 feet high) is in 21° 38' ir S., 154° 40/41" E. David Reef (?) in 19° 20' S., 151° 0' E., according to the chart, but there is no bottom with 230 fathoms on the spot. Horse-shoe Shoal. — Its northern extreme is in 20° 5' S., 151° 50', the convex side southward extending 15 miles to the South and East, is perhaps a part of the Great Barrier Reef, more to the westward, as Captain Denham found a depth of 200 to 250 fathoms, sand, on the position. Kelso Bank in 24° 12' S., 159° 27' E.; on the North end 25 to 13 -fathoms were found. It was sailed over for two hours in a N. N. W. direction, the bottom bein<^ distinctly seen the greater part of the time, with large stones covered with seaweed. Capel Bank reported from 32 to 40 fathoms, in 25° 18' S., 159° 20' E. • It probably exists, and there may be others in tliis neighbourhood. Bellona, Booby, Chesterfield, and Bampton Reefs.— A long line of reefs extending over tlirce degrees of latitnde, between 19° and 21° 55' S., 158° 15' and 159° 35' E. The northern part is Bam])ton Reef and Chesterfield Reef, the centre is Booby, Minerva, and Ball Iteefs, and the , southern is Claudine and Bellona Reefs. They have been but incompletely examined, especially on their eastern face. South Bellona Reefs, two in number, awash at half tide, with a . detached sand cay N. by W. 1§ miles from the North extreme of the eastern reef. The West point of the western reef lies in 21° 52' 22" S., 159° 25' 30" E., whence it extends E. h N. 4J miles, and is one mile to half a mile broad. The eastern reef, se]iarated from the western reef by a 7 -fathom channel half a mile wide, is five miles long N.E. and S.W., and H to 1 miles broad. It encloses a lagoon with four fathoms water between the coral patches in it, but appears to have no entrance. The northern extreme of this reef is rendered conspicuous by Nigger Head Rock — a black block of coral six feet square, and two feet above high water level. TJie Sand Cav, N. by W. ^ W. If miles from Nigger Head Rock, in 21° 47' 20" S., 159° 34'"21"E., always shoAvs brightly, and, being five feet above high-water level, it may afford temporary refuge to the crew of a vessel wrecked on the adjacent reefs, where there is no footing at high water. Middle Bkllona Reefs, two in number, E. ^ S. and W. ^ N. from each other, with a navigable opening between them. The western reef uncovers at half tide, and encloses a small lagoon, is 1^ miles long N.E. and S.W., and one mile broad at the centre. Observatory Cay, the northern of these two reef points, in 21° 24' 18" S., 158° 52' 11" E., is a bright coral sand- bank, half a mile long east and west, and seven feet above high-water level ; is the resort of birds, turtle, and whale near the reef. Captain Denham erected on it a barrel-post beacon. Western Breaker, W. by S. ^ S. oj miles from Observatory Cay, is a square cluster of rocks just below the surface, half a mile in extent. The sea breaks on it at long intervals. It is the more dangerous from its lying so far from the main reefs, and in the track 'Of passing vessels; it should therefore be approached Avitli due caution. Booby Reef, N.W. extreme in 20° 57' S., 158° 31' 53" E., is six miles Ion" N.W. by W. \ W. and S.E. by E. i E., and about one mile broad, with some sunken patches close off its south-east end. With the exception of some black coral rocks, always four to six feet out of the water on its southern part, it is awash at half tide. • Brett's new Zealand and south pacific pilot. 273 N.W. Bellona Keep, the S.E. end, lies N. hj W. six miles from the IS'.W. point of Booby Reef, is five miles long N.W. by N. and S.E. by S., and one mile broad', its N.W. point in 20° 47' 36" S., 158° 28' 8" E. It is awash at half tide. Miller Reef was found to be in 20° 51' S., 158° 2' E., two miles N.W. and S.E. and one cable wide. Neap tides rose eighteen inches. The position is open to doubt. Chesterfield Reefs and Islets, three long narrow barriers extend- ing from 19° 59' S., 158° 30' E., north-westward 27 miles, to 19° 37' 23" S., 158° 13' 20" E. The south elbow is well marked by Loop Islet, 12 feet above high-water level, just witliin the reef, two-thirds of a mile northward of the outer edge of the elbow. Anchorage Islet, one of the windward of the group, ■with smooth and secure anchorage westward of it, is the southern of two islets on the eastern barrier, 38 feet above high-water level, and N. by W. i W. five miles from Loop Islet. These islets and the dry sand ridges on the reef render it a natuial breakwater from the eastward. The remaining live isles are Passage and Long Isles, and three small islets between them. Avon Islets.— The southern lies in 19° 32' S., 158° 15' E., each 170 jards in diameter and 17 feet high ; each islet fringed by a reef ; no sheltered anchorage. Bampton Reef is the western edge of a bank of soundings extending to the Chesterfield Reefs, the eastern limits have not been surveyed. It forms a narrow barrier, trending from its sonth point N. by E. 22 miles, when, after a turn of three miles eastward, it extends north by west seven miles to its north elbow in 19° 1' S., 158° 27' E. Here and there are clusters of reef-stones and an occasional solitary rock six feet high. H. W. F. &, C. at S^h., rise five and six feet.* Brown Reef, a break reported in 17° 38' S., 154° 43' E. It had every appearance of. a shoal, and should be guarded against. t Mellish Reef and Cay, a low sandy islet, eight feet above the water, half a mile long. A similar bank lies five miles northward. A ))eacon was erected on it by Captain Denham, 40 feet high. It is in 17° 24' 39" S., 155° 52' 45" E., about 5^ miles long north and south, with deep water close round, t Westward of New Caledonia appears to be a series of detached shoals, which run in a direction somewhat parallel to it. More dangers may be found in the same line. Those hitherto announced are : Grimes Shoal, placed on chart in 23° 53' Sn 161° 10' E., described as having 70 fathoms least water on it. Hamond Island, said to be in 22° 30' S., 162° 51', E. A rock, doubtful, in 24° S., 160° 15' E. Tamar Reef.— A dangerous shoal, in 21* 21' S., 161° 36' E., reported to extend a long distance to the N.W^, but was sought for ineffectually by the Herald, when no bottom was found at 200 fathoms. Fairway Reef, lying nearly midway between the Bellona Shoals and New Caledonia, about 1| miles in circuit, awash at half tide, the rise being three feet. 21° 0' S., 161° 45' E. Nereus Shoal, in about 20° 5' S., 160° 30' E., is said to have two fathoms water on it. The Australian Packet, 1874, places it in 20° 10' S., 160° 5' E. (Chart gives 20° 5', 160° 3'.) New Shoal, very imperfectly laid down on the chart, is said to be in 20' 55' S., 160° 28' E. It is covered, but there is a heavy break on it. The Ephemy reports standing within 100 yards of a shoal, with appa- rently three to four feet on it, extending E.S.E. and W.N. W., in 21° 38' S., 162" E. No break seen, sea smooth. * Small whaling vessels which occasionally make the Bamptons their head quarters, anclior at the Chesterfield group. t John Wesley Island ^lleported in 19" 16' S., 155° E., volcanic, on fire all over : shoal water to the S.S.W. There is the greatest doubt as to this, but it must be inserted. A sounding of 230 fathoms no bottom has been taken in the locality. J Young Reef, in the same latitude, but said to be in long. 155' 20', is probably the same. 274 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. MiDDLETON Eeef.— An extensive reef, covered at high water. Its west elbow is in 29" 28' S., 159° 4' E. Elizabeth Reef, within two cables' lengths of it, has 14 fatlioms, hard rocky ground : at a quarter of a mile off it was 25 fathoms. The bank of soundings to 100 fathoms, on coral grit, extends H niiles off. This dan- ferous reef lies 350 miles from Australia. It is oval shaped, nearly five miles ong east and west, and 2^ miles broad. The edges of the reef, with the exception of a few rocks, are covered at high water. The entrance to the lagoon, on the north-east side, is in 29° 55' S., 159° 6' E. A Life-Boat, moored in the lagoon for the pnrpose of succouring those wrecked on the reef, is provided with necessary articles for making a voyage to Australia, including provisions, medical stores, cliart, compass, &c. Six casks of fresh water (each containing 15 gallons), are fitted as ballast as well as for use. It is requested that the followinf' instructions be observed, viz. : — That shipwrecked mariners write a detailed account of their disaster, with the names of the survivors and those lost, also tlie jdace they intend to make for ; this document is to be placed in the nun buoy, and left floating at the moorings. Navigators visiting the boat are requested to leave a report of their visit, with such intelligence as they may wish to communicate. If bound to an adjacent port they are requested to forward any reports that may be found in the nun buoy. H.W. F. & C. at about 9h. ; rise at springs, 9 feet.* Lord Howe's Island.— Mount Gower, on its southern end, is 2,834 feet high, in 31" 36' 8., 159° 5' E. It is 5^ miles long, M.N.W. and S.S.E., and from one-third of a mile to 1| miles broad. The eastern side consists of several bays ; and the greater portion of tiie west side is fronted by coral reefs, between which and tlie shore are shallow lagoons, with not more than sufficient depth of water for boats, or other small craft drawing about five feet water. Off' the north end are the Admiralty Islets, a small group, distant about IJ miles. Nearer the shore are several other islets. This group is surrounded by a bank of soundings, extending three to five miles off the west side, and seven to ten miles off" its other parts. Although there appears to be a proper depth of water at a convenient distance from the island, the anchorage cannot be considered good in conse- quence of foul ground, and of sudden and violent shifting gales. Sailing vessels should anchor in such a position as to clear the land on either tack, should the wind set in. Captain Denham's spot of observation at Middle Beach, North East Bay, i^in lat. 31° 31' 38" S., long. 159° 5' 18" E.+ Pigs, poultry, and vegetables are procurable, and fish may be caught in abundance round the island. The island being covered with wood, a ])len- tiful supply of fuel and trees fit for timber may be obtained. Water is most plentiful at the south end, and may be obtained all through the year at other parts of the island. H.W. F. &,C. at 8h. 30m. ; rise, six feet. Ball Pyramid, in 31' 45' S., 159° IS; E., lies S.E. by E., 12 miles from Lord Howe's Island, is a remarkable peak, rising abniptly to the height of 4,810 feet from a rocky islet. AVheatsheaf and Observation Rocks lie half a mile westward of it ; the former 185 feet, and the latter (northward of the Wheatsheaf) is 54 feet high. Two-and-a-half miles soutli-eastward of the pyramid is another rock, 20 feet liidi. It is surrounded by a bank of sound- ings, extending one to two-and-a-lialf miles westward, and five to seven miles in other directions. * The following reported dangers may be considered not to exist :-Favourite Shoal in 26"^ G', IGO* 0'. Lady Nelson Shoal, in 30* 18' S., 161* 6' E. Foster Tyans Shoal, in 31" 56' S., IGO" 0' K., or about 30 miles E.S.E. of Balls Pyramid ; a shoal, in 31' 19' S., 160' 42' W. ; and Middleton Island (or Sir Charles Middleton's Island), said to be very high, in 27° 58', 159* 30' t "Anchorage at Lord Howe's Island is safe in all vrinds, except N.E. and S. W. The anchorage is west and east of the island. The trade with this island appears to be on the increase." BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 275 AUSTRALIA, ETC. It is only possible to give directions for one or two of the ports, with which the New Zealand trade is concerned, beginning with Port Stephens, as it might be used with advantage as a harbour of shelter when that of Newcastle is dangerous. Sugarloaf Point Lighthouse is in 32' 26' S., 152* 33' E. A revolving bright light is shown from it, attaininaf its greatest brilliancy every half minute. It is 258. feet above the sea, visible 22 miles. A lower .Axed green light, visible tlireemile, is also shown bet ween the bearings of South and S.E. by E. i E., covering Seal Rocks and adjacent dangers, but not Edith Breaker, wliichlies S.S.W. i W., three miles from Sugar-Loaf Point. Vessels should keep out of the range of the green light in rounding the point. Port Stephens, from the offing of the port, makes in conical detached hiUs Yacaaba Head, on the north side of entrance, will be readily distinguished ; as also Toonieree Head, on the south side, the norrhernmost of four conical hills. The light- house on Stephens Point so clearly marks the entrance, as to prevent any mistake, by day or night. Stephens Point is a low rocky projection on the South side of entrance, sloping- from a hiimmocky summit, and fronted by rocky ground. The Lighthouse on Stephens Point, in 32* 45' S., 152* 13' E., a white circular stone tower 60 feet high, on a knoll 66 feet above the level of the sea, shows a flash white and red light ulternately, every minute, visible 17 miles from seaward, between the bearings of N.E. and S. W. by S., with the exception of a slight interruption by the islands otf the entrance. The light affords a good guide for vessels seeking shelter in Fly Road, between Stephens Point and Toomereo Head ; it is also a leading mark for entering between Toomeree and Yacaaba Heads, as it does not shut in until it bears S. by E. i E. A light is also exhibited on Nelson Head on the South side of the harbour, a mile westward of Toomeree Head. It shows white seaward, is eclijjsed over the entrance shoal, is red within after the shoal is passed and when Nelson Head can be steered for, and again ivhite when Nelson Head is passed ; it can then be used as a guide for anchoring or proceeding further into Port Stephens ; visible nine miles. Yacaaba, or North Head, a peaked hill of 810 feet high, with a steep descent to the sea on all sides, except at its junction with the mainland, with which it is con- nected by a very narrow and low strip. TooMEKEE, or South Head, also rises abruptly to a height of 440 feet, with three equally conspicious bills southward, all separated by low land. From Toomeree Head a spit extends N.N.W. 3J cables, at its extremity the least depth is 2\ fathoms, immediately deepening to four and live fathoms. A groimd swell generally rolls on this spit, and frequently breaks on a nine-feet patch close within the extremity. Off the entrance to Point Stephens are three islands ; the northernmost and largest, Cabbage Tree Island, lies one mile north-eastward of Yacaaba Head, and partly shelters Providence Bay. northward of the Head, where vessels may ride securely during a southerly or westerly wind. The anchorage, however, in Fly Road, between Toomeree Head and Stephens Point, is more safe should the wind veer east- ward, as the port is under their lee. The entrance to Port Stephens lies N.N.W. 2^ miles from the lighthouse and W. i N. from Booudelbah Isle, the southernmost of those off Yacaaba Head ; it is two- thirds of a mile wide, the fairway channel is two-thirds over towards Yacaaba Head; nearer or farther according to the direction of the wind. Approaching from southward, give the islet which'lies close off the East extreme of Stephens Point, a berth of nearly half a mile, to avoid the rocky ground which extends a cable's length from it. The mai'k to keep without Toomeree spit is Mount Stephen open of Toomeree, ;S. by E. i E., leading across the eastern tail of the Entrance Bank in 27 feet. At night, vessels seeking shelter in Nelson Bay can run for the harbour light (white) until the revolving light on Point Stephens is lost sight of, when alter course to N.N.W. until the harbour light is lost sight of and again made out I'ed ; a course can then be shaped for it, and when the head is passed the ivfiite light will re-appear. Nelson Head may be passed within half a cable, if necessary, in 10 fathoms ot water. There is a telegraph station at Nelson Bay, as also at the lighthouse outside. Newcastle Harbour lies somewhat embayed between Norah Head and Moma Point, S. by W. ^ W. 24 miles and N.E. by E. 18 miles from the entrance. The coast is free from outlying dangers, with 13 to 22 fathoms two and three miles from the shore. Nobby Head, connected with the mainland south-westward, by a breakwater half a mile long, is the southern head and rounding point of Newcastle Harbour, and lies in 32* 55' 20" S., 151' 49' 8" E. It rises abruptly to the height of 92 feet above high water mark : the summit is surmounted by a white lighthouse. Light.— Nobby Head lighthouse exhibits a,. fixed xohite light 115 feet above high water, visible 17 or 18 miles, between the bearings of N. by E. i E. and S.W. by W,, being shut in westward of the latter bearing by Morna Point. The signal station on Nobby Head has two signal masts, bearing N.W. by N. and S.E. by S., which kept in line clears the north-eastern edge of the Oyster Bank. The commercial code and local harbour signals are both used, the lai ter to show the state of the tide, and whether it is prudent or otherwise to approach ihe harbour. Vessels approaching, when able to read the signals exhibited must pay strict attention to their instructions, as it is impossible to get in against strong south, or south- westerly winds; serious consequences are likely to befall a vessel attempting to entei^in detiance of these instructions. A south-east gale renders access to Newcastle Harbour difficult and dangerous. 276 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH- PACIFIC PILOT. Old Signal Hill, on which is the pilot's look-out station, rises abruptly at the south-west end of the breakwater. The two beacons on Old Signal Hill kept in line clear the Oyster Bank. Masters of vessels are particularly cautioned not to approach too close to the port without having been first boarded by a pilot, and to cause the usual signal to be made, of hoisting a union jack at the fore. Vessels requiring a pilot during the night should keep well to windward of Nobby Head, and burn a blue or flash-light, which will be answered by the watch at the pilot look-out station, on Old Signal Hill. Whenever the pilot is outside and in a good position, he will burn a blue light, when the vessel requiring a pilot should take the bearing and steer in that direction, ■showing a light for the pilot's guidaKce. RocKy spits and foul ground project two cables length from Old Signal Hill and from the next blulf south-westward ; the Outer Ledges extend from Nobby Head one-third of a mile -eastward, having their outer extremity in line with the signal ' station and the highest obelisk on the hill above the town, S.W. i W. A rocky spit also extends a cable's length north-eastward from Nobby Head, in line with the head and signal station. Entrance to Newcastle Harbour.— Haul-round Sand, the south-east spit of Pirate Point, forms the north line of Newcastle Harbour, and the Oyster Bank or North-west Sands bound the entrance of the harbour on the north-west side, the deep water, or four-fathom channel, being hei'e little more than one cable wide. The outer I'ccl or fairway buoy is moored in four fathoms, with the two obelisks on the high land above the town nearly in line, the lighthouse beai'ingE.S.E. distant If cables' length. Two leading lights are shown from the obelisks on the hill over the town. A white light over a red light at night kept in line, S.W. h S, leads in mid-channel clear of the 13-foot rock off the Boulder Point on the north-west side of the breakwater, and up to the black buoy off the Government boat-shed. By day the red and white towers in which the lights are placed answer as leading marks, the red tower being the upper one. This port should never be attempted without a pilot. Vessels with the signals flying arc promptly attended on bj both pilot and tug steamer. N. by W. h W. a quarter of a mile from Nobby Head lighthouse, on the north side ,of the channel, is a green wreck buoy. Many vessels have been lost, resulting nearly in every case through an endeavour to enter during south-cast and easterly gales, ' which are always accompanied with incessant rains, causing strong freshets in the .rivers. They raise a moiintainous breaking sea at the entrance of the harbour, in a , line from the outer end of the reef off Nobby Head (Big Ben) across to the eastward of the Oyster Bank. This mass of breaking sea would of itself be sufficient to over- whelm ordinary -sized vessels ; but when, in addition a freshet of six or seven knots sets out of the river against this heavy easterly roll, to attempt to enter is almost ■certain destruction. It is, therefore, to be impressed on seamen, during a hard east or south-east gale, with rain that has lasted more than 24 hours, not to attempt to , enter Newcastle, but either to keep.to sea or make for Port Stephens. There are two lifeboats stationed at the port. Coal.— There are steam cranes and loading shoots where vessels can load to 44 and 17 feet draught ; above that, they must haul out to moorings in the Horseshoe, and complete to any draught under 22 feet by lighter's. Steam tugs are employed 'constantly bringing vessels in and out, and moving them in the harbour. A patent slip at Stockton, on the north shore of the harbour, is capable of taking up ships of •^00 to 1,000 tons. PORT JACKSON. Approaching Port Jackson from eastward, the northern of the two Sydney 1 Heads will, in clear weather, be first seen (iiauig^higher than the adjacenicoAgt) ; as the port is neared, the lighthouse and signal staTton-oTI fK£rOtrtW"South Head, and 'the bold, perpendicular profile of the North Head. Outer South Head, on which are the signal tower, semaphore and flagstaff, is a precipitous px-oiection of the const, 300 feet above the sea. Light.— The Outer South Head lighthouse is a white circular stone building, 76 feet high, near the edge of the cliff, a quarter of a mile southAvard of the signal •station, in 33" 51' 15" S., 151' 18' 15" E. It exliibits a white light, revolving every li minute, 344 feet above the level of high watei", visible 25 miles seaward, between the bearings of N. by W. and S. by W. i W. From the Outer South Head, the clifiy coast line trends N.N.W. ^ W. one mile to Inner South Head, which forms the rounding point on the southern eide of the ■cn t rfin CG The Gap, midway between the Outer and Inner South Head lighthouses, is so remarkable that it has in a dark night even been mistaken for the entrance. Inner South Head.— From Gap Bluff the ridge descends to the Inner South Head, €0 feet above high water, with a lighthouse on its extremity. Light.— The Inner South Head lighthouse, intended for actual guidance into the harbour, after the lofty outer lighthouse has shown proximity, is a dwarf tower painted red and white in vertical stripes, 30 feet high. It shows a fixed white light 90 feet above high water, visible 15 miles from the eastward, between the bearings of N.W. by N. and S.W, \ W. The light suddenly opens out from Gap Bluff upon the former bearing, if coming from southward, when abreast of, and b\ miles off Botany Bay Heads. South Reef, a ledge of rocks extending a cable's length northward from the base -of Inner South Head. > The Outer North Head is a table, perpendicular, cliff, N. by E. i E., IJ miles from BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 277 the South Head signal station. Inner North Head, W, i N. nearly three-quarters of a mile from the Outer head forms the north side of the entrance. Entrance of Port Jackson.— The narrowest part is between the Inner Heads, three-quarters of a mile across N. by E. ^ E. and S. by W. ^ W. The entrance is clear of dangers, soundings regular, the depth in mid-channel 17 fathoms sand. Middle Head, W.N.VV., two-thirds of a mile from Inner South Head, is a precipitous, whitish blutf facing the entrance. The sea breaks violently on it iu easterly gales. Two obelisks, each 30 feet high have been erected on the western shore, facing the entrance ; that nearest the sea is at the edge of the coast, immediately south- ward of Middle Head ; the western and upper obelisk on the wooded slope, bears W. ^ S. from the former. These two kept in line give the leading mark for clearing the south reef and the northern edge of the Bar and Flats. (Mark A.) The Bar and Flats and Sow and Pigs, which extend across the mouth of the harbour, admit vessels of 20 feet draught at low water spring tides, or 25 feet at high water, in fine weather. The nucleus of this bar, a group of rocks, showing at half tide, is marked by an iron beaoon rod, surmounted oy an open hooped baU. nearly midway between the shores on either side. The Sow and Pigs light-vessel, painted red, is moored in 21 feet water, half a cable's length north-westward of the outer or north extremity of the Sow and Pigg Shoals and one cable from the beacon. The light-vessel shows a red flag by day, and two yfxerf tt'/irife lights, placed vertically 6i feet apart upon mast by night; the upper light 26 feet above the water is visible from the north-eastward in clear weather 6 miles. The Western Channel across the Bar and Flats on the western side of the Sow and Pigs Shoals carries 21 feet at low water, over a sandy bottom. The light-vessel is situated so as to render this the available night channel, which may bo taken without a pilot in moderate and clear weather by anyone who has studied the plan and directions. Leading marks for clearing the shoals on either side of the Western Channel :-^ Bradley Point on the north side of the harbour, in lino with Elizabeth House, an imposing white square building, with a round dome, S.W. by S., clears the 16-feet patch on the northern edge of the Bar and Flats and the Sow and Pig Shoals, on their western sides. (Mark C.) The spire of a chapel at Wooloomooloo kept a little open of Bradley Point S.S.W. J W. leads through the west channel and clear of the shoal water off George head. (Mark D.) Watson Bay, south of the Inner South Head (the pilot station) has smooth anchorage in six to seven fathoms ; outward-bound vessels frequently anchor here to wait for a fair wind. Eastern Channel, with equally deep, and much smoother water, is but half the distance as compared with the Western Channel. The outer narrows (where the soundings quickly decrease from eight to four fathoms) between the south reef and the north-easternmost 16-feet patch of the Sow and Pigs Shoals, is nearly a quarter of a mile wide ; the leading marks for, and through the centre of the channel are the two eastern obelisks of white stone, half a mile apart, one on Green Point, the other on Vaucluse Point, in one S. \ E. (Mark B.) St. James Church spire— the only spire which makes out in Sydney— its breadth open of Bi-adley Point, bearing S.W. h W., leads clear of the south-eastern 17-feet elbow of the Sow and Pigs Shoals. (Mark F.) The Outer South Head Lighthouse, its breadth open to the southward of the red and white chequered obelisk, upon the wooded slope near Watson Bay, S.E. by E. i E., shows tliat the south-western, or inner edge of the Bar and Flats have been pa^ed. (Mark E.) Port Jackson, above the Bar and Flats, is so free from dangers, and clearly represented on the plan, that there will be no difficulty in proceeding toward the city. If a vessel bound to Port Jackson should be uncertain of her latitude, and fall in with land either southward or northward, in blowing weather, she may find shelter either in Botany Bay, 10 miles southward, or Broken Bay, 16 miles northward of Port Jackson ; and it is of the utmost consequence that such vessels as may happen to be in bad condition, and unable to keep otr shore, should be aware of these useful placea of refuge. Vessels approaching in the night, with southerly or westerly winds, should keep the sea until daylight ; but with winds from northward or eastward and favourable weather, they may safely enter. Coming from southward, if the weather be dark or thick, preserve a good offlng until the Sydney Heads or Outer South Head Light is seen, in order to clear the pro- jection of the coast about Botany Bay, where it is comparatively low, and where the current sometimes sets S.W. towards the shore. BASS STRAIT. Bass Strait separates Australia from Tasmania. On the south side is a group of islands, of which Flinders or Great Island is the principal. N.W. of this is a small cluster, the Kent Group ; on the eastern of which. Deal Island, is a conspicioua lighthouse. The light is 880 feet above the sea, revolves once in a minute, and has been seen 37 miles off, but being so elevated, is frequently obscured by fogs. The northern side of the strait is well marked by night, by a fixed hght, on the south extreme of Wilson Promontory. The channel between Kent Group and Wilson Promontory has several dangerous rocks in it. Southward of the Kent Group is another channel, which also requires caution, as 278 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. there ai-e two reefs between them and the north end of Flinders or Great Island, the Beagle Reef just awash. 3 miles E. f S. from Endeavour Iteef, and in a line with it and Wright Rock. Endeavour Reef is 2h miles from Wright Rock. These and a sunken rock, a mile East of Craggy Island, are the chief dangers in this channel. The extremes are marked north and south by Wright Rockland Craggy Island, "between which ships should not pass. Wright Rock, 209 feet hight, is small and conspicious. Craggy Island is small and clitfy, but free from danger. Banks Strait is south of Flinders Island Group, It is believed not to have any dangers, except near the land. By night its navigation is facilitated by the revolving light on Swan Island (see below). The y/>crf ^j'/y/i^ on Goose Island, the westermost of the Chappell Islands, marks the N. W. entrance. A light is proposed at Eddystone Point, the N.E. cape of Tasmania (see below) The winds are comnionly favourable for making a passage westward, through Bass Strait, and along the south coast, in the months of January, February, and March. The following observations by Captain Flinders may be acceptable :— The first remark is, that the three months when this passage is most easy to be made, are precisely those in which it is unsafe, if not impracticable, to go through Torres Sttait : and the second, that it will generally be of no avail for a' ship to be in Bass Strait bef6re the middle of December, and if it be the middle of January it will be preferable. Ships from the north-eastward may take a departure from Cape Howe ; but from thence should not steer westward of S.S.W. until in .39* 30' S., on account of the danger from S.E. winds upon Long Beach. Having reached 39* 30', steer about W. by S., leaving the Sisters, Craggy Islet, and Wright Rock to the southward. Deal, the easternmost island of Kent Group, marked by the lighthouse in 39' 29' S., 147° 22' E., seen 10 or 12 leagues in tine weather, will come in sight ahead ; and in passing three or four miles on its south side the other islands of the group will be seen, and are to be passed in the same way ; as are Curtis Island and Sugar-loaf Rocks, which will then be in sight. From Curtis Isles to the North end of King Island, with its bright fixed light at night, the course is nearly W. by S., i2 leagues, with nothing in the way ; but it is better to steer live or six leagues northward of King Island, if the winds permit. In case of foul winds, which, if the weather be thick or rainy, may be expected to fix at S.W. and blow strong, there are many places where a ship may anchor to wait a change ; the following appear most convenient :— 1st. West Cove in Erith. Island, Kent Group. 2nd. Hamilton Road, at east end of Preservation Island, between Swan Island and Goose Island li«hthouscs. 3rd. On the south side of the largest Swan Island (with its lighthouse) for small vessels, or under Waterhouse Island westward. 1th. Port Dalrymple. 5th. Port Sorel (accessible only to small vessels). Gth._ Various places among the Hunter Group, 7th. Sea Elephant Bay, east side of King island (fresh water), or under N.E. end of island, if the wind be S.W. 8th. Western Port, under Grant Island, anchoring as soon as ship is sheltered. A fair wind onward through the Strait will take a ship out of this port. 9th. Port Phillip. Commanders of iron ships, especially of those newly built, are cautioned as to the necessity of ascertaining the errors of their cojnpasses on approachmg the Australian coast. Northerly or N.N.E. winds are as a rule followed by West and S.W. winds. The very variable weather and sudden changes of wind met with in this Strait render caution necessary, both in taking up any anchorage that is not well sheltered, and in quitting it so soon as the wind blows in from seaward. The Island of Tasmania is 170 miles long and 160 broad. The north coast foi-ms the south side of Bass Strait, and lies generally in smooth water, the prevailing winds being off the land. Its navigation is represented to be free from dangers to within a mile of the shore, and of the islands which lie off.it ; except in the neighbourhood of Port Dalrymple. Eddystone Point (on which it is proposed to erect a lighthouse), on the N.E. coast of Tasmania, in 40° 59' S., 148° 22' E., projects a mile from the line of coast, with dry and sunken rocks, a mile off the point. Swan Island Lighthouse.— On the N.E. extreme of the largest Swan isle, in 40'. 43' S., 148° 8' PI, is a round tower 71 feet high, the upper part painted 7'crf, the lower white. It exhibits a light revolving every minute 110 feet above the level of the sea, visible in clear weather 14 miles. . There is a tolerable anchoi-age on the south-east side of the largest Swan isle, in 6 or 7 fathoms, a quarter of a mile off the South point of a sandy bay, where vessels may wait for tide, or a short time with north-west winds ; but there is a better anchorage otf the mouth of Little Muscle River south-eastward, where a vessel can more easily get under way in south-east or easterly winds. Salamander Rock, with 10 feet water over it, lies E. by S. i S., 12^ miles from Swan Island Lighthouse, in 40° 50' S., 148' 21' E. Harry Rock, with three fathoms water over it, lies N. W. by W. | W,, three miles from the lighthouse. Port Dalrymple, the principal harbour on the north coast of Tasmania, forms the entrance of Tamar River. Coming alongshore from eastward. Ninth Islet, and afterward Stony Head, with Tenth Islet off it, show the vicinity of the port : and Low Head, with the conspicuous red and white lighthouse on it, will be seen in the bight to the S.S.W. It exhibits a bright light revolving once in 100 seconds. The entrance between Low Head and French Point, which lies S. by W. % W. 1| miles from the head, is difficult of access, on account of the reefs and banks BRETT'S yEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 279 which extend a considerable distance from the western side of the entrance; stranfjers should therefore avoid that side, and endeavour to enter by Low Head. The greater part of these shoals (and those within) are coA'ered at half tide, so that with the flood, or even a little before, is the best time to entei', as almost the whole of the danglers are then visible. Hebe lleef, the outermost danger off the entrance, lies West 2J miles from Low Head Lighthouse. Middle Ground, the most formidable shoal in the entrance, is a rocky patch between W. by S. and S.W. 4 and Gi cables' length from the lighthouse, with 9 to 12 feet on one spot at low water springs. The north extreme of Low Head in one with the first black cliffy projection eastward of it, or the flagstaff on Low Head open to the northward of the lighthouse, clears its northern edge ; its south-west edge is marked by a block buoy, S.W. ^ W., six cables from the lighthouse. East Channel, between the Middle Ground and the shoal which borders the west side of Low Head, is one-third of a mile wide in the outer part, not safe for strangers without a pilot. West Channel, the main entrance formed by the Middle Ground to the north- east, and Yellow Keef to the south west, is nearly two cables wide, with depths of 22 to 10 fathoms ; it is i-ecommended as being the safer channel. When within six miles of the entrance, bring the lighthouse on Low Point E. by S. until the two towei'S on Lagoon Beach are visible; then bring them in line E.S.E., and steer in. The two towers in the line lead three cables north -castw^ard of Hebe Reef, and through the West Channel, midway between the white buoy of Yellow lieef on the starboard, and the black buoy of Middle Ground on the port hand. Having cleared the West Channel, proceed for good anchorage in six or eight fathoms, abreast Lagoon Beach, taking care to avoid the spit which projects from Barrel Rock Beacon, and, if a vessel of great draught, the 3-fathom bank immediately southward of it. Pilots may always be obtained off Port Dairy mple, when the weather will admit of their going off ; and should the weather be too bad, the boat will be lying in mid-channel, with the flag flying. Launeeston is situated at the head of Tamar River, 35 miles from the sea. "Vessels of 17 or 18 feet draught can go within half a mile of the town, below the bar. A steam tug, maintained by the Marine Board, is available for towing vessels, at moderate rates. Derwent River has two approaches, from the S.W., through D'Entrecasteaux Channel, and by Storm Bay, between the northern part of Bruny Island and Tasman Peninsula, 12 miles eastward of it ; the latter is much to be preferred. From the westward through stormy Bay, give Tasman Head, the south point of Bruny Island a good berth, to avoid Friar Rocks. Proceeding northward past Fluted Cape, steer so as to pass on the west side of Iron Pot Lighthouse, the upper part of which is painted red, the lower white. It shows n fixed light at G5 feet elevation. In approach- ing the Derwent the genei-ally strong prevailing westerly winds make it desirable to keep within a mile of Bruny Island. Having entered Derwent River between Cape Delasorte and Iron Pot Lighthouse, keep the western shore aboard, steering N. by W. i W. and N. by E. up to a quarter of a mile off Dead Tree Point, thence N.W . for Sullivan Cove, the usual anchorage off Hobart Town, where vessels may come to as convenient; but one anchor should be laid out well to the S.E. for the conveni- ence of getting under way. From the middle of the entrance the cove extends W. by S. a little over two cables to the steamship pier, on which is a red light. There are no dangers, so that vessels may work in or out without a pilot, tacking about a quarter of a mile offshore, and may anchor any where, on muddy bottom. Hobart Town, the capital of Tasmania, is situated at the foot of Mount Wel- lington, on the Derwent, 12 miles from its mouth. The harbour is easy of access, well sheltered, with sulflcieut depth of water for vessels of the largest tonnage ; ample dock and wharf accommodation for loading, discharge, and repairs of ships. There are three flrst-class patent slips available for vessels of considerable size. Fort Mulgrave, at which is a signal-station, is one cable south-westward of the southern entrance point of Sullivan Cove, 85 feet above the sea. The flagstaff is in iT 53' 32" S., 147° 21' 20" E. H.W. F. & C. 8h. 15m. ; spring rise 4^ feet, and neaps 3^ feet. The tides are exceedingly irregular. The flood is barely perceptible between Iron Pot Islet and Kelly Point, but runs stronger under Mount Louis, thence at the rate of half a knot. Between Macquarie and Montagu Points the ebb runs south \\ knots at half tide ; off Battery Point it runs S. by E. sweeping south-eastward round Sandy Bay, at tho rate of three-quarters of a knot, and thence to half a knot towards the entrance. THE COAST OF VICTORIA. Cape Schanck and Light.— On the north side of Bass Strait, 89 miles N.W. by W. \ W. from the extremity of Wilson Promontory, is Cape Schanck, on whicn. stands a lighthouse, showing a bright flxed light, varied by a bright flash every two minutes, elevated 238 feet, and visible 25 miles. The cape is the southern extremity of the peninsula which separates Western Port from Port Phillip, 16 miles to the north-westward. Port Phillip is situated at the head of an extensive bight between Cape Otway and Wilson Promontory, 130 miles eastward of the cape. In approaching the port from the westward, the entrance is not easily distinguished until Nepean Point, the 280 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. eastern entrance head, bears N.N.E., when Shortland Bluff, on which the highest and leading lighthouses are erected, shows out, and the estuary becomes visible. If Bar won Head is previously seen, the entrance of Port Phillip is easily found. Port Phillip extends 32 miles north and south, and is 18 miles wide, exclusive of an arm which trends IG miles in a W.S. W. direction to Geelon^. The entrance is less than two miles wide, and nearly one-half of it is occupied by rocks and shoals. Point Lonsdale, the western head of the entrance to Port Phillip, is low, and juts out from a dark rocky cliff. It is not so high nor so well marked as Nepean Point, the eastern head, but can be easily distinguished by a light and look-out house, a telegraph station, a tidal flagstaff, and a red beacon, near its south-eastern extremity. Lonsdale Iteef, the greater part of which dries at low water, projects a quarter of a mile south-eastward from Point Lonsdale, and is about one cable broad. The Light on Point Lonsdale, visible 10 miles, is a fixed {/rcen and red light. The green light is visible seaward when bearing about N. by W. to N.W. i W., and the red. towards Nepean Point, and the harbour when bearing N.W, i W. to W. by S. "Vessels having the gy-ecn light in sight will be outside, and M,ith the red in sight, inside the Lonsdale and Lightning Rocks, which bear S.E. i E. distant respectively nearly two-thirds of a mile and one one-tenth mile from the light. The blending of the two colours, when seen from a vessel, will show that she is in the vicinity of, or in a line with, these dangers ; great caution will therefore be necessary before these colours begin to blend. Pilots.— There is a most efflcient pilot establishment at Port Phillip Heads. The pilot vessels cruise outside, borrowing on either shore according to the weather. They carry a red and ivhite flag in horizontal stripes, and at night, a bright Light at the foremast-head, and show a flash every half -hour. Tidal Signals are shown at Point Lonsdale, denoting the quarter of the tide wnth reference to the stream. The period of slack water is very limited. The stream turns from two to three hours after nigh and low water by the tide. The Flood, during the first quarter, is denoted by a blue flag half mast. „ „ second quarter „ at mast-head. „ „ third quarter ., red flag half mast. „ „ fourth quarter „ at mast-head. Ebb.— The same as above, with ball below the flag. Nepean Point.— The eastern entrance head has a ivhite beacon on its extremity. Nepean Reef projects west two cables from Nepean Point to Nepean Rock, a small islet, on which is a 7'cd cone-shaped beacon ; thence a continuation of the reef and several pinnacle rocks outside it, extend 3i cables further westward to Corsair Rock, 150 feet N.N.E. of which is a small detached rock, with 10 feet water on it, Nepean Reef dries at low water out to the islet, the remainder has from one to three feet water. Corsair Rock, the outer end of Nepean Reef, 20 feet in diameter, with 11 feet ■water over it, and four to six fathoms close to ; lies with the red beacon on rocky- islet in line with the white beacon on Nepean Point, bearing east, the red beacon distant 3^ cables. Entrance.- The navigable channel is a little less than one mile in width between the reefs that project from Lonsdale and Nepean Points. Lonsdale and Lightning Rocks, with three fathoms over them, are the shoalest heads of a rocky bank, with 5i to 7 fathoms on it, extending I^ miles S.E. by E. from Point Lonsdale, and stretch- ing completely across the entrance. Outside the bank there arc 9 to 15, and inside 10 to 29 fathoms. This inequality, with tide streams at times running Ave to seven knots, causes the well-known Race, or '* Rip," between Port Phillip Heads, which during, or immediately after, a south- westerly gale, breaks so furiously as to be dangerous to small vessels, Vessels drawing less than 14 feet may, in day time, pass between Lonsdale Reef and Rock, by keeping Swan Point iust open east of Shortland Bluff, bearing N. K. Swan Beacon touching the cliff at Shortland Bluff. N.E. i N., leads half a cable east- ward of Lonsdale H ock. The two lighthouses on Shortland Bluff in line, N.E. by N., lead in the fairway through the entrance into Port Phillip. The Lightning Rocks are cleared northward and southward by keeping Point Lonsdale mast open on either side of Point Lonsdale telegraph house, which is white, with a slate roof ; the red obelisk on Shortland Bluff touching the east side of the high lighthouse, nearly N.E. by N., clears them to the westward. The Coi'sair Rock, off Nepean Point, is cleared by keeping the low lighthouse on Shortland Bluff in line with the east end of the light-keepers' houses, near the high lighthouse N.N.E. i E., until the white beacon on Point Nepean is well open north- ■ward of the red beacon, going in, or well open southward, going out. Shortland Bluff, on which are two lighthouses and a red obelisk, with the town- ship of Queenscliff in their rear, is the S.E. extreme of a peninsula projecting nearly two miles north-eastAvard from the coast. Lights.— The high lighthouse on Shortland Bluff, N.E. 5 E., 2J miles from Point Lonsdale, is 68 feet nigh, built of blue stone. It exhibits a fixed xchite light, 130 feet above the sea level, visible from seaward, on any bearing betwt-en about east, by N.E, and north, 17 miles ; when close in with Lonsdale land it will only be seen when bearing between N.E. by E. and north, and when within the heads trom N.E. by E. round by north and west, to S.W. by W. The low lighthouse tower, painted white, stands S.W. by S. 352 yards from the high lighthouse, and at 90 feet above high water level exhibits a fixed 7-ed and ichite light, snowing white when bearing from about N.E. by E. to N.E., red from. N.E. to N.N.E., and white from N.N.E. round by north to W. by N. The wfiitc light should be seen in clear weather H miles, the red 10 miles. BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACFIIC PILOT. 281 Vessels entering between Port Phillip heads should keep the red light in sight, and steer in with it bearing N.E. by N., and in line with the high white, light. The change of colour from red to white indicates an approach to the Lonsdale Reef on the west, and Nepean reef on the east side of the entrance. The xvhite light between the bearings of N.E. by E. and N.E, shows over the dangers extending from Point Lonsdale. Between the bearings of N.N.E. to W. by N. the white light shows over the Corsair Hock to a line from the low lighthouse along the north side of and through the South Channel, passing southward of Pope's Eye red buoy, along the black buoys, and northward of the white buoys, which niark the north and south sides of the channel, so that vessels during the night, with liglit winds or adverse tide streams, will be aided by a bearing of the light. N.N.E. half a mile from the high light, Queenscliff Jetty projects about 130 yards froni the shore, and has a fixed green light at its end, visible four miles ; this is a life-boat station. Swan Island, low, is separated from the north-east point of Shortland Penin- sula by a shallow opening 100 yards wide, communicating with Swan Pay westward. From this opening the south side of Swan Island trends E.N.E. IJ mile, thence the eastern end sweeps three-quarters of a mile northward, round Swan Point, to the north-east extreme of the island. Swan Beacon, which, when touching the clitT at Shortland Bluff, leads clear of Lonsdale Rock, inwhite-witha red top. near the south- east extreme of the island, the high lighthouse on Shortland Blutt" bearing nearly S.W. tf S., a little less than two miles. To clear the edge of the bank otf the island and the 7-feet rock on it, keep Lonsdale lighthouse open of Shortland Bluff. SvvAX Spit Lighthouse, a wooden building on piles, on the south-eastern edge of the bank just noticed, bears E.S.E , two-thirds of a mile from Swan Beacon. It is painted red, and exhibits fixed red and white lights, visible eight miles, showing, xvhitc when bearing from about E.N.E. to N.E. h E , red from N.E. i E. to N.E. J N., white from N.E. J N. to N by W. i W., and red from N. by W. ^ W. round by west to S. \ W. The red light in sight between N.E. i E., and N.E. J N., indicate^ the entrance to the west channel between No. I black buoy and the white perch on the Royal George Shoal. A gong is sounded every 10 minutes in thick or foggy weather. Vessels should not approach near to the Swan Spit Lighthouse. It is impossible to give in extenso the directions for the interior of Port Phillip. The above will take a vessel in in case of necessity. Directions.— Vessels steering for Port Phillip from the southward and east- ward usually make the land about Cape Schanck, 17 miles south-eastward of the entrance. The cape has a round white lighthouse on its highest part, which exhibits a fixed and flashing light, visible in clear weather 23 miles. Having passed Cape Schanck, keep a good oftlng in proceeding towards the lieads until they open out Shortland Bluff lighthouses, which the Intervening land of Nepean Point pi-events being seen before the high fixed light bears N. A W., and the low light N. i E. ; in proceeding, to bring the two lights in line, the low light will change its colour from white to red on a N.N.E, bearing. To ensure passing outside the Lightning Rock, the lighthouse on Point Lonsdale should not be brought westward of north-west Uiitil the two lighthouses on Short- land Blutf are in line. Cautiox not to Heave-to.— At night a vessel should keep a good offing, and on no account be hove-to when waiting for daylight near Port Phillip Heads. Several vessels that have done so have drifted into danger. Causes of Wreck at the Heads.— A careful inquiry has shown that in nearly every case they have taken place in consequence of the vessel either attempting to enter the heads at night without a pilot, or against a strong ebb stream. The mariner must not suppose because he has a fine fair wind outside the heads he can always force his vessel against the ebb. To this error is attributable the loss of several vessels. The wind, although fresh outside, frequently falls light just as the vessel gets into the tide ripple between the heads, when she becomes unmanageable ; and, even with a strong breeze, vessels often sheer athwart the tide, which here- abouts foi'ins a series of strong irregular eddies. To Enter the Heads with the Flood. —Should a pilot not have been taken on board outside the heads, and the last quarter ebb signal be up, or the flood stream be made, steer to bring the high lighthouse on Shortland Blutf to bear N.E. by N., in line with the low lighthouse ; and with a fresh fair wind and flood stream steer so as to keep the two lighthouses in line, until the red beacon on the rocky islet off Point Nepean is open to the southward of that point. With a scant or light eastei'ly wind and flood stream. Swan Island beacon must be kept open of Shortland Bluff, so as to avoid Lonsdale Rock. At Night.— The passage through the heads should not be attempted at night, except with steam or a commanding fair wind. Anchorage.- Having entered and cleared the dangers which lie between the heads, a vessel may proceed north-eastward for the anchorage off Shortland Bluff. Strangers entering from stress of weather should not attempt to proceed above this without a pilot. Off Shortland Bluff. —If necessary to anchor off Shortland Bluff, steer north- eastward from the entrance, keeping Swan Spit light open of Shortland Bluff, to avoid the Victory Shoal ; if of heavy draught, anchor on the south-east side of the fairway, which is shown jn the day time by Swan Spit lighthouse being just open v/est of No. 2 white perch buoy ; at night by Swan Spit light changing from VQd tQ wJdte, N.E. 5 N. T 282 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. WINDS-HURRICANES-CUKRENTS. The following necessarily short description is mainly from Findlay :— Even small areas of land have a very marked effect on the regularity of the trade winds. The aggregation of minute spots in the coral groups, as in the Low Archi- pelago or the Caroline Islands, is sufficient, apparently, not only to intercept their regiilar course, but even to reverse it, as the winds frequently blow in opposition, not only in a partial manner, but for considerable periods, and over a very great extent. The Pacific Ocean may be divided into three belts— the inner and exti-a tropical zones— in the former of which the trade winds are dominant ; in the latter the anti- trade or passage winds, fi-om the westward, the " brave west winds," as they have been called, are permanent. General.—'' The trade winds are separated into those /that blow from the porth -east and SQiUth-east. which meet and neutralize each other /near the Equator ; with a neutral line'"bf calms and varying Wtntis,"K'!i'OWli SS the / .'doldrums. The belt of calms follows the sun in his annual co.urse. The whole I system of wind ancrcalmbeTtSTntrre northward from May till August; they then V remain almost stationary till the approach of winter, when they commence to go Niouthward. and proceed in that direction from December till February or March" It has been considered that the trade winds blow regularly over the entire breadth of the Pacific, but this is incorrect, and in tl^e So uth Pacific especially there is a great variation from this. The south-east trade'in factisonly felt with certainty over that portion where there is no land, or between the meridians of the Galapagos and the Low Archipelago— not one-half its extent. In the North Pacific, on the contrary, the north-east trade blows as far as the Marianas, where the regular monsoons supersede it. In the western parts of the South Pacific there are also regular monsoons, though of a less decided character. The south-east trade is only constant among the arcliipelagoes between tlie Paumotu's and Australia, between March and October ; during the rest of the year they are interrupted by westerly winds, calms, storms, and rains. The extent of the trade winds in latitude is usually considered to be from 30^ S. to 30' N., but this statement must be received with gri-eat limitations. It sometimes occurs that the two trade winds meet each other without any intervening space of variables or calms. In crossing the equatorial belt, a direct north or south course as far as practicable is the best, being traversed with the least distance. In the anti-trades, or extra trqpicalwinds, in the southern hemisphere, as far as the antarctic clrcleT^rom the southern edge of the south-east trade, w^gatetly winds will be found with more or less force and irregularity at all seasons, remembering that, like other winds they t^owtowards the sun, that is frequently s outhward of west in the winter, and moreTTofniward or west in the summer of the southern" Hemisphere. The South-East Trade Wind. Many singular anomalies are observed in its course over the islands. At the Mar q[uesas, J^t. 10* S., it. is. tole^'ablv regular. Among tlie island of the Low Archi- pelagCrr'SSpeSTSny f i"6m October or ^Tbvember to March, the easterly windfalls, and heavy squalls come from the opposite direction, and more frequently by night than by day. The nati:^es say that their sej'cre stornis come from N.W. That the (South-westerly gales of higher latitudes approach "the archipelago, is shown b^ the heavy sea which frequently sets in on the lee side against the regular wind, making it most dangerous to land on those sides. i^ Captain Cook, at Tahiti, found fresh gales from S.W. for two or three days at a time, and sometimes, though seldom, from N.W. When variable they were alway.a .accompanied by a swell froju SvW., which also came in when it was calm. The conclusion he arrived at was, that as the trade wind did not extend further south than lat. 20°, and beyond that he generally found a westerly gale blowing, this westerly wind, when it becomes stronger, will drive back the easterly wind, and C encroach on its usual limits. At the Samoan Group these variations assume the character of the cyclone or revolving storiii, ahd'comniit great devastation. That the paraUeKQf_20'' is about the southern limit, is apparent at the Tonga Group. Here the trade wind fehy no means constant, but westerly whids occasion- ally blow in every season. They are peculiarly prevalent durtngr February, March, and April, often blowing for several days together. The heavy swell from S.W. is also almost continual. This season of variable winds is that'bt'lmi*ficaheS,"aSlS the case with the Samoan Group and Cook's Islands. At the F iji Gro up the trade wind prevails from April till November. From November till April northerly winds are often experienced. February and March heavy gales are frequent. When the sun is in south declination, the northern edge of the trades advances to the southward^. ~ Witliin the tropics, whenever large groups of islands are found, the trades are subject to great variation, both in direction and force. The Western Part of the Pacific Ocean. This portion seems to have a different system of wands from those prevalent to the eastward, from the extension of the monsoons of the India and (^hina seas. The west monsoon blows steadily, strongly and regularly, along the north side of New "Guinea, at New Britain, New Ireland, and all contiguous islands south of the Equator so far eastward as Malayta, and the northern part of the New Hebrides, and gradually decreasing in constancy and continuation, hence far eastward to the Society Islands and Marquesas. The limits in latitude appear similar to the Indian Ocean, from 1° N. to 15° S.; occasionally to 19° S,; the perjgd from the beginning of JAUuary until the end of March. Brett's new Zealand and south pacific pilot. 283 The westgrliinonsoon in the Pacific, as in tlie Indian Ocean, is attended with cloudy, overcast weMKer, 'squalls and heavy rains. Some of these squalls are very severe, requiring all sail to be taken in when crossing the wind; even when running, close reefs will be found enough. Several experienced near New Ireland and New Guinea, which generally gave warning, and coiflmenced at W.S.W., blowing furiously the first hour, and continuing in a strong gale, veering to north-west for five or six hours. At the Solomon Archipelago it commences in December or January. In some years these months are tolerably fine. During February and March strong winds with severe squalls and heavy rains may be expected. April generally is a fine month, with variable winds. In May there is much fine weather. The south-east monsoon sets in strongly in June, with heavy rains and squalls, and continues so until the end of August. In all these months, nevertheless, there are considerable intervals of fine weather. In September the strength of the monsoon is spent, and the weather is moderate until the return of the north-wester. Farther eastward, about the meridian of Rotumah, the westerly monsoon is less constant, beginning generally in January, and blowing strongly about seventeen or eighteen days consecutively, then declining ; and the easterly wind returning in a fresh breeze for nearly the same period; the westerly wind again intervenes, usually commencing with a gale, and always continuing in a strong breeze, with squalls and rain ; the easterly and westerly winds thus alternating until the end of March, when the south-east trade sets in steadily. Proceeding still farther eastward, the westerly monsoon gradually becomes less constant, and finally disappears about the meridian of the Marjjuesas. From the early part of October to April the coast in the vicinituQf,port,.Jftckson is subject to tolerably regularsjia and laiid^reezes. the former from nortH-easf.lhe latter from the westward.- TEe sea breeze generally begins at 10 a.m., and subsides after sunset ; the land wind about midnight, and continues until 8 a.m. The excep- tions to this rule are north and south winds, which occasionally prevail, as do also the N.W, hot winds ; these latter, after blowing from 12 to 72 hours, are usually suc- ceeded by sudden violent gusts from S.S.K. to S.S.W., which generally settle into a gale from those quarters, accompanied with rain. The greatest vigilance is frequently insufficient to prepare for the suddenness with which these gusts overtake vessels. From April to October, and between the equinoxes, the wind prevails strong, between north-west and south-west, with fine clear weather, and occasional gales from north or south, with rain. Except during equinoctial gales, the wind rarely blows on shore with sufficient violence to endanger the safety of a well appointed vessel ; but in the spring equinox, when these gales set in from south-east to east, accompanied with dense rain and a high barometer, they blow with great fury from 24 to 48 hours, and finish with a long slowly declining gale from south to south-west.* Ea sterly ga les, which appear to be regular in the number as well as the periods of their Tisits during the year, are the winds of all others most dreaded. June, July, and sometimes August, are the months in which New South Wales is visited by them in their full violence. During these months, with the wind un- steady, cloudy unsettled weather and occasional rain, an easterly gale, lasting two or three days, may be looked for. They generally come with li^ht winds from the northward, accompanied with rain sometimes lasting twenty-tour hours, and an overcast, murky sky ; settling at the N.E., they freshen gradually to a gale. The barometer is not in any way afFocted by their approach or continuance, standing steadily at from 30*12 to 30'18 throughout their duration. On the South Coast of Australia similar weather and the same dangerous easterly gales may beTooked for betweeii Cape Howe and Wilson Promontory.' The prevafl- mg wind, however, on this coast, from the northward, both in summer and winter, generally commences early in the day, and after lasting two or three days suddenly terminates with a thunder storm from west or south-west, indicated by the fall of the barometer, which remains low until the storm is quite over, although there may be intervals of fine weather for two or three days. In the spring and autumn south- west or sea breezes are felt. Of the easterly gales Wilson Promontory appears to be the boundary, as they very seldom occur on the coast to the westward. Westward of Cape Howe south-westerly breezes generally prevail during Octo- ber, November, and December ; in January, February, and March from the opposite direction. In the vicinity of Bass Strait N.E. winds blow during the hot summer '' Storm Signals on the Coast of New South Wales. —The existence of gales which are likely to endanger shipping will be signalled at the principal telegraph stations on the coast of New South Wales in the following manner, viz. : — The signal masts will support two yards, which are to cross each other at right angles, in the direction of the cardinal points of the compass, the yard-arms denoting, respectively, North East, South and West ; midway between North and East will indicate N.E., &c. A violent squall will be represented by a conspicuous diamond-shaped signal. A heavy sea will be represented by a drum-shaped signal. Gale, with clear weather, will be represented by a diamond-shaped signal over a drum. Gale, with thick weather and rain, will be represented by a diamond-shaped figure with a drum over it. The direction from which a gale is blowing will be indicated by the particular yard-arm between which and the mast-head the geometiical signal is suspended. Place where gale or squall is blowing will be shown by hoisting the numerical flags already in use at Sydney, Newcastle, and other coast stations. Gales that are general over a large portion of the coast will be indicated by the geometrieal figures, without the mast-head flags. Asi ^ f-Jf <^ ^ 3S4 months, lasting four or five days, changing: suddenly to the S. W. They are generally accompanied by a thick mist, but in the winter -witn a clearer sky. Westerly winds prevail for nine months of the year. Hurricanes. From lat. 10^^.Jo the souihsaai tropic, hurricanes are likely to be experienced from Novemo^ unliP^lLpril, more prevalent near the New Hebrides and New Caledonia than the Fiji group and Friendly Islands. In fact, the liability to hurri- canes appear in exact ratio to that of the S.W. monsoon, or rather to the meridians in which the westerly monsoon blows, differing in latitude ; the monsoon seldom extending beyond lat. 17° or 18° S ; indeed, at times 13° S. is the limit, whereas hurri- canes are experienced as far as the tropics, and more often and severely felt near the islands than well clear of the land. Years sometimes intervene without a ship encoim- tering one. Near the Friendly Islands (and perhaps elsewhere) storms occasionally happen of extreme violence, blowing from one point, and producing similar effects to hurricanes. In November, 1835, eight or ten ships, English and American, encoun- tered one of these near Tonga-tabu and Eoa, from S.S.E., the heavy part of Avhich lasted about eight hours, causing more or less damage to all ; one or two were dis- masted. It did great damage at Tonga-tabu, and was felt very severely at the Hapai Islands and Vavao. Still farther north the Nassau encountered it in 16' N., in the- shape of a heavy gale. At all these places the wind was from the southward, S.S.E. by the ships. In the tropical regions of the South Pacific, from the eguator to 25' S., there is no doubt that true hurricane storms (cyclones) occur of as greaTYtOlSnce at least as those in the North Pacific ; they appear to come from the eastward amongst the islands, and to curve to the Southward and S.E. The following are a few notes. The seasons at which they prevail seem also to be the same as those of the Mauritius and Bourbon. At Viti-Levu (Fiji Group) in February. 1811, a well-defined circular storm (cyclone) tolerably observed, seems to have moved to the southward, and, though it lasted four days, was not felt at Tonga, 8' or 10° to the S.E. of it. At Apia Harbour (Navigators' Islands). 14° S., December, 1840, a true hurricane storm (cyclone) of great violence, with a fall of four inches of the mercury (by a / damaged barometer) was observed, moving from the north, southward ; four years j previous another, also well defined, moving from N.E., south-eastward, the change \ of wind being from S.E. to N.W. The space between the Samoan (Navigators') \ Islands is said expressly to be subject to violent hurricanes, and that scarcely a year vpasses without some of the Friendly Islands suffering from them. At the Kingsmill Group, on the eqtiator, violent storms, which appear to be typhoon-like, are experienced. At New Zealand there is no doubt that true rotary hurricanes (cyclones) some- times occur, and of considerable violence. In the U.S. Exploring Expedition, vol. ii., p. 381, is a very good account of one which occurred February, 29, 1840, at the Ba^ of Islands, saia to have been the severest which the missionaries had ex- perienced there. It was felt at other stations, with all the veerings, calm centre, etc., )f a true tropical hurricane (cyclone), its course being to the south- Avestward. t Tempestuous weather is equally common in the latitudes of 20' and 23° in the South Sea, as in the oceans of Europe. Along the coasts and adjacent seas the winter begins in the month of June, and lasts till October or November, its greatest violence being past in August or September. The following concise account of two hurricanes is supplied by Capt. J..Mackay. It is to be regretted that more of the same sort is not availab'e :— '•HuRRicAXE OF 21ST DECEMBER, 1879.— The Captains of the mission vessel Jubilee and of the cutter Thistle state that it was felt in the neighbourhood of Wallis Island a day before it reached Fiji. The first winds were felt from east, shifting to north-east and north, giving a south-westerly dii-ection for its track. The barometer fell to about 28'80. On the following day it Avas felt at the Yasawa Group, and on the west side of Viti Lcvu, accompanied by a tidal wave, but was not felt on Vanua Levu. At Yasawa it began at E.N.E., ending in the north-west quarter. At Suva, on the south side of Yiti Levu, the heaviest blow Avas from the westward. At Kandavu it Avas not felt ; but at Ono, north Avard, it was felt slightly. The island of Matuku Avas devastated by it, but the central islands of the group AA'ere not touched. By this it appears that the radius of the storm Avas exceedingly limited, that it came from the nortliAA'ard and eastAvard, and that it recurA-ed at the south-Avest extreme of the Fiji Group, passing over the south- Avest part of Viti Levu." ** Hurricane in Neav Herbides. end of February, 1877.— Capt. Mackay Avas at anchor in the Daphne inside the Maskelyne Island, off the south part of Malicollo. At 8 a.m., barometer 29.70, AAind east, blowing hard, with rain and squalls ; 10 a.m. Avind E.N.E., bar. falling; noon, wind north-east, barometer falling; 2 p.m., Avind north, increasing, barometer falling ; 3 p,m„ wind north-Avest, barometer stationary (minimum) 29*10. Wind uniform strength, two anchors doAvn. all gear from aloft on deck, topmasts housed. Sixty miles to the N.W., at Male, in Boagainoille Strait, at 8 a.m., the Dauntless had the Avind at west, blowing very hard ; topmasts housed, etc. It blcAv Aery hard for an hour or tAvo and then died a\va.j (she Avas evidently just on the northern liimit). At Lepers Island, about GO miles north-eastward of the Dauntless, the Pacific, at 11 a,m. had the wind about north, A'cering Avestward ; had to cut aAvay masts. At 2 p.m., as the wind left him. At Havannah Harbour it Avas * "Tonga is within the cycle of hurricanes, but the violen ce of their visij ation has ^cegsgd," — as reported from a lecture by Rev. S. Baker, Auckland7 29111 TictoTjer, i8§o^'°*^ " " t It is said to have passed between the Bay of Islands and the River Thames at the rate of about 340 miles in thirty six hours, or say, ten miles an hour. Commodore Wilkes suggests that this may have been the same as that which occurred at the Fiji Group, which is very probable. / BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 5285 felt more slightly from E.N.E., north-about to N. W. This storm also appears to have been of very limited extent, and to have re-curved to the south-ward and east- ward, about the position of the Daphne, which was nearly in the same parallel as the one at Fiji ; and in both cases re-cm*ving round to the different Groups." Notes of a Hurricane Experi]LNced in Fiji in January, 1875, by Captain Cox (now Harbour Master at Lcvuka), have been kindly forwarded by him, from which the following is compiled, viz.:— "From the 1st to the 4th January, winds westerly and northerly, barometer steady at 29*90 to 29*80. January 6th left Rotumah for Fiji, a heavy N.W. swell, wind northerly, barometer 29*85 to 29*75 (beginning to fall) ; January 6th, wind north, barometer fell to 29*55 : January 7th (hurricane), 8 a.m., wind N. by E., barometer 29*50; at 10 a.m., wind N.N.E., barometer 29*43 ; anchored at Waia (Yasawa Gi'oup) in 12 fathoms, two anchors with 65 fathoms of chain, and one anchor with 75 fathoms of 6-inch hawser and an extra warp: noon, barometer 29*26,; 1 p.m., wind N. to N.N.E., barometer 29*20; 4 p.m., wind N.N.E.. barometer 29*0; 5.30 p.m., wind N.N.E., barometer 28*78; 6 p.m.. wind N.N.E., barometer 28*63 ; 6.45 p.m., windN.N.E., barometer 2857 ; 7 p.m., wind changed to south, barometer at its minimum 28*55 and vibrating ; 7*30 p.m., wind S.W. ; 8 p.m. wind S.W. by W., barometer 28*70, blowing a hurricane, had to go about the deck on all fours, ggtends of chains on deck in case of drifting on to shoi-e reef ; 9 p.m., wind S.W. byWr;"f CAffiir gale, "baron>eter 28*90 : midnight, S.W. strong ^ale, barometer 29*10. From this time it gradually moderated, the wind continuing at S.W., the barometer rising until on the morning of the 10th, when the weather was flne and clear, the bar. steady at 29.95, and the vessel resmncd her voyage. By the above it appears as if this storm had from the steadiness of the wind at N.N.E. advanced on Waia from the W.N.W. but that from the change in the wind its centre must have passed a little southward, and on to the south-east bv the the southern part of Viti Levu, much as the one described by Captain Mackajr. By these two accounts it looks as if the south-west extreme of Fiji lies in the south-western bend of the re-curve. ' " - —'— A Few Short Directions Now Follow.— It is usually considered that the centre of the storm bears eight points from the direction of the Avind, and Dove's tables and the usual directions are given for this ; but the latest investigations shoAv that in certain positions the centre may be 10 or even 12 points from the direction of the wind. Captain Bedfoi-d, in his valuable "Hand Book," says, " At a consider- able distance from the centre, and before the barometer has fallen much, the centre may be as much as 12 points from the direction of the wind." And remarks : " Every strong wind or gale met with must not be treated as a cyclone ; the barometer , must in these cases be closely watched, and a decided fall of at least half an inch be experienced from the normal average, before arriving at the conclusion that the vessel is within the influence of a cvclone. In this case the safe proceeding is to hcave'to^ and carefully watch for the shifting of the Avind, and the marked changes of the barometer • when the position of centre and probable direction of path can bo determined with some precision, a decided fall of the barometer should take place before the centre is assumed to bear eight points from the direction of the wind. The rule (Southern Hemisphere) then is, first, to face the wind and take the eighth point to the left for the beai-ing of centre ; next, to discover on which side of the storm's path the vessel is ; if on the right hand side (looking in the direction towards which the storm is advancing) the wind Avill veer S.. S.W., W., N.W., or with the hands of a watch : while if she is on the left hand side the wind will change S., S.E., E., N.E., or against the hands of a watch. The advisability of heaving a vessel to on the first approach of a storm cannot bo too strongly urged. Although a cyclone may be made use of by the experienced seaman when making a passage, and where sea room will admit, a vessel may be frequently able to run out of the direct influence of the coming stonn. Yet, as a general rule, it is advisable to heave-to on the tack on which she will come up as the wind shifts ; therefore on the right hand semicircle, heave-to on starboard tack ; and if on left hand semicircle, on the port tack. (Reid's rule was : Heavc-to on starboard tack in Northern Hemisphere, and port tack in the Southern. Run with wind on starboard quarter in Northern, and on port quarter in Southern Hemisphere). If, with the ship hove-to, the wind continues steady in direction and increasing in violence with a rapidly falling barometer, it may be persuincd that the ship IS in the direct path of the storm's centre, and it will be necessary to run before the wind. If unable, for Avant of room, to do this, her position becomes one of great danger, and every precaution should be taken for the passage of the centre OA^er the ship. In all cases Avithin the tropics they commence to the east, and travel west, including apoint or tAVO towards the Pole, and as they advance to curve away more from the Equator till they move to the S.E. (in South Hemisphere). Storm Wave— The long rolling swell generally precedes the storm's path (see account of 3rcl Hurricane above), and thus indicates its approach many hours, if not a day before it is encountered. Another jioint remains to be noticed— the surface current in a hurricane has been known to drift a ship ten miles an hour, and for nearly two days a ship has been drifted at the rate of fiA'c miles an hour." In an article in the ' Nautical Magazine' for September, 1880, on " The Heaving-to Tack," the writer (J. K. Laughton), says : " All this may be shortly stated thus : On the right hand side the Avind shifts to the right, and you should lie-to on starboard tack ; on the left hand side the Avind shifts to the left, and you should lie-to on port tack. Or still more shortly : Right, right, starboard ; Left, left, port." This short rule can be easily remembered. In conclusion a short rhyme (as in the case of the rule of the road) may be found useful, viz.: For centre, first, the wind you face ; Eight points to left shovy^s centre's place. 286 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. And next, when on storm's right hand track, The wind is always found to hack. Then to storm's left, it's very clear, (^ The wind is always bound to veer. And finally it may be stated that in the Southern Hemisphere the wind blows round the c^ntvG, ^.with the hands of a watch ; in the Northern Hemisphere the reverse ; and that inboth Hemispheres the wind is always West on the side nearest the Equator. THE CURRENTS OF THE SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN. Next to a knowledge of the prevailing winds, that of the currents is the most important to the navigator. By the combined action of these two phenomena, and their effects are frequently coincident, a passage may be made in a much shorter period, though by a circuitous route. Currents have been distinguished as of two classes— the drift current and tho stream current. The drift current is the mere eflfect of a constant or very prevalent wind on the surface Avater, impelling it to leeward until it meets with some obstacle which stops it, and occasions an accimiulation, and consequently stream of current. The stream current is thus formed by the accumulated waters of a drift current. It is more limited, but it may be of any bulk, depth, or velocity. There is much greater uncertainty in ascertaining the rate of currents by the means ordinarily employed than is usually considered. It is pretty certain that much error of dead reckoning, now attributed to current, would be properly placed to other accounts. Without great care in the navigating, an exact estimate of their rate and direction cannot be made. Bad steerage, the heave of the sea, imperfection in the log or glass, uncertainty of the leeway, all tend to invalidate the estimate formed. The imperfection of observations for longitude, the errors in the rates of chrono- meters not ascertained but at long intervals, all tend to throw discredit on allow- ances for current. There is one source of error which, until recent times, has passed unregarded by most— the local attraction of a ship on her compass. The current streams of the Pacific arc not generally so strongly marked as they are in the Atlantic. The surface drifts may not be very deep, but may overlay a more powerful current moving in a very different direction ; and therefore the surface motion may not give any just notion of its real nature. Violent winds have the effect of disturbing the strata, the lower and cooler Kortions rising to the surface, occasioning veins of differing temperatures. This ecomes more manifest when the storm waves reach a shelving coast, and the deeper lying portions become thus lifted to the surface. A shoal may have cooler water over it from the fact of the lower strata of a current being diverted npxcard by its shelving sides, particularly after any great disturbance of the surface. In the Pacific, therefore, little dependence can be placed on the thermometer as a safeguard or warning of approach to shoals. THE EQUATORIAL CURRENTS. / Captain Duperrey, who has devoted much labour to the elucidation of the I currents, places the southern limit of the equatorial current, beyond the influence of \ the continent, at lat. 26° S., and its northern border at lat. 24° N., or (partially) occupying a zone of 50° in breadth. It is more than probable that these latitudes may vary at the different seasons. In the southern part of the Low Archipelago, Captain Beechey found it running strongly to the south. Beyond the Fl,ji Islands to the westward, a S.W. current prevails fW^ilkes). Between the Society and Navigator's Islands Wilkes considered that no current exists. The distance is about 2,000 miles, and in his passage, which occupied fourteen days, his drift only amounted to 43 miles, in a N. 9° W. direction. Around the Samoan Group a current appeared to revolve : for on its southern side it set continually eastward, while on its northern side it set to the west. The current is weaker near the shores, and is not fully developed imtil at some distance from the islands. A knowledge of its existence is of importance to the navigator, as advantage may be taken of the easterly direction of that part south of the islands in beating to windward. After leaving the Fiji Group Wilkes did not experience any current until he reached 8° South. He then experienced currents for three or four days, which amounted to no more than 20 or 30 miles in a S. by W. direction. Approaching the western end of this southei-n equatoi-ial current, that is, to the west of the Fiji Archipelago, we find that the currents vary considerably in their direction, and are frequently very violent. A portion of this has been called Rossell's Drift, to the N.W., off the New Hebrides, New Caledonia, etc. But it can scarcely deserve the name of a permanent current. On the eastern side of the reefs extending to the N.W. of New Caledonia, D'Urville found the current setting to the N.N. W., 34 miles a day, in Jime, 1827. "Southward of New Georgia and Bougainville Islands, throughout the S,E, BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. 287 monsoon, from May until October, in 183G and 1810, the current ran strongly to the S.E. against a strong wind and heavy swell, although at the same time on the north side of these islands, it was running strongly to the westward. Oft' the north side of New Ireland, where a westerly current prevails, changes to the eastward occm* for ten or twelve days at all seasons,"— Nautical Magazine, 1812. Between September and March westerly winds are regular at the Solomon Islands, and, according to M. Dutaillis, after they have set in, a very strong current runs invariably to the E.N.E. or N.N.E. between them and Santa Cruz, etc., some- times forty miles per day. Captain LeMignon found the current, in April, 1846, between Mitre Island and San Christoval to run at the rate of 24 or 25 miles a day to the east. South of the Solomon Islands they ran to the South 45 miles a day, and also 30 to 45 miles to the east. The weather, it should be stated, was very bad, and the winds violent and irregular. Between the Fiji Islands and the New Hebrides D'Urville found the current setting to the west 40 miles per day throughout his passage. Between New Zealand and Ton^a Wilkes found theicui'rents variable ; their general etfeot was a drift of 108 miles, in a direction S. 88' W. On this route he passed the Kermadeo Islands. THE EQUATORIAL COUNTER CURRENT. In the current systems we find a body of water moving with more or less regularity to the eastward, bounded to the northand south by currents moving in the opposite direction. This counter current has been traced, with considerable cei'tainty, nearly across the entire breadth of the Pacific. Capt. Liitke remarks :— Between 10* and 2° S., for four days, during which the trade wmd was constant and equal, a tolerably strong westerly current set to the W. by N., seventeen miles in twenty-four hours. In T S., the trade wind was lost, and the current shifted also to the East, then to N.E., and again to S.E., but more to this last quarter as far as 8° or 10° north latitude, where the N.E. trade stopped it. Its mean ettect was E. 6° S. 12i miles in 24 hours. In approaching the Island of Ualan we found a S.E. cur rent jn lat. 8°, and long. 163° E. West of this meridian the easterly current Hid not GTC6ii"d t(5 ward the North beyond the parallel of 7°, land toward the South in general beyond that of 5^°. Between these parallels, and as far as 152° E., in the course of more than three weeks (in January), we did not once have westerly currents, but always to the East, inclining to the South in the eastern and more to the North in the western half. Its mean effect, during these three weeks, was 8.3 miles in the twenty-four hours to the E. by N. We had no sooner passed to the north of 6r N. 152" E., than we got into a strong p.nr^p.nt \(\ \h^j^^^ , which did not leave us afterwards. Captain Duperrey, between lat. 2' and 6TT. ,~and 7° to 10' E. of Ualan, had currents to the S.E. and N.E., but, on approaching this last island, they were still more to the S.W. ; again, between the equator and 8^° N., and long. 148° E. and 137° E. he again found them easterly. To the north of this eastern current, within the limits of these easterly winds we always found a constant curx-ent to the west, inclining in some parts towards the north, in others to the south. Captain Wilkes says :— " On our route to the northwai-d we crossed a stream setting to the westward, which extends as far west as the Kingsmill Group, between lat. 2" S. and 3° N., after leaving which we encountered another, setting with equal velocity to the east, between lat. 4° and 9° N. This last tropical counter current was traced by us between the same parallels nearly across the Pacific, from the long, of 170° E. to the long, of 138° W." At the Gilbert Archipelago, during the violent gales from S.W., which prevail from October to April, trunks of large trees are thrown upon the west sides of the islands, together with large lumps of resin, similar to that found in the soil of New Zealand. These observations will demonstrate that between 4° and 10° N, which limits may be subject to some fluctuation, there is a current running to the eastward, or against the usual course of the inter-tropical winds and the drift of the ocean on either side of it. The Australian Current. The southern edge of the south equatorial stream, striking the coasts of Now Caledonia, the New Hebrides, &c., trends away to the N. W. : so, in like manner, the portion South of this reaching the Australian coast, is deflected and runs to the south\v_ard, a warm stream, off the coast of Australia. This course it pursues until irBntJounters the cold antarctic drift to the north-east, which thus again deflects it and becomes incSrtJorated with it. The following remarks are from Admiral Krusenstern's treatise :— Although the winds blow throughout the year either from south-east or south- west, the current constantly runs to the south, with the velocity of -one or two miles an hour, at the distance of from four to twenty leagues from land. Beyond these limits there is no current found, and very close to the land, particularly in the bays, we have a curren t to the nor th, but which does not exceed a quarter, or at most a mile, an hoilr: Art the y6llTTr-east and southern part of Australia tlie current is very violent, and bears to the south, and near Cape Howe its direction draws mox-e towards the east. In ranging along this part of the coast to go southward it will be well to keep at the distance of 40 or 50 miles from land so as not to fear the gales from seaward which will bo met with in the course of the current which runs to the south. On the contrary, if a vessel is making way for the north, she ought not 288 BRETT'S NEW ZEALAND AND SOUTH PACIFIC PILOT. to leave the coast more than 10 miles ; but this navigation demands much caution, to guard against gales from seaward. The barometer will then be the best guide ; it I'ises on this part of the coast with south-east winds, and falls with those from north-west ; north-east or south-west winds do not equally influence the barometer. According to Lieut, Jeffries, the cuiTcnts from 28" to the southern part of Van Diemen's Land, during summer, that is, from August or September until April or May, run south by west with a rate of l\ miles ; always provided that the distance froni the coast does not exceed seven leagues ; if it is greater than this and as far as 20 leagues off, they run to north by west, with a rate of 3i miles an hour. In winter the opposite of what has just been stated takes place. This belt does not exceed 300 miles in breadth ; beyond, or to the east of which, the current sets to the northward 10 miles per day. Captain Wilkes, in his remarks on the currents, also has the following :— Before making the coast of New South Wales, the temperature of the water rose to 73°, and on a subsequent occasion co 75°, and we experienced a stream that sets southward parallel to the coast of New South Wales. Tliis current, like the Gulf Stream, is variable in breadth and stx'cngth, and at certain seasons of the year runs with great rapidity. The occurrence of this stream renders it advisable that vessels bound to Sydney should make their landfall northward of the harbour. There is no difliculty in tracing the connection of this stream with that which we found setting to the south-west near the Fiji Gi'oup. This stream is analogous to our Gulf Stream, although much less remarkable, and is at times found to extend south of Tasmania, the distance to which it prevails depending on the strength of the polar current which opposes it. It more frequently turns into Bass's Straits, after ' which it is lost in the sea to the west of Tasmania, or mingles with the polar current. In the space between Australia and New Zealand ; to the westward is the southerly warm curreiit just described. To the south this warm current is pressed upward by the northerly cold antarctic current. On the New Zealand coast this current is felt as far northward as Cook Strait, while to the northward of the islands the warm equatorial and the cool polar currents by turns gain ascendency. This syst-m develops one feature, that of a central space in which no current (except those dependent on the wind) is to be found. It is called by the whalemen the middle (jro^md, and has been exceedingly productive to the New Zealand and "Australian whale fishery. The following may be given here respecting the currents around New Zealand : —Wilkes considered that the antarctic drift strikes the southern part of the islands, and forms currents on either side of the range, which, however, are not constant. That branch which flows on the western side appeared to be strongest, and it is felt as far north as Cook Strait. The current which flows on the eastern side forms an eddy to the north of the islands. PASSAGES. The following account of passages between Auckland and Fiji (kindly furnished by Captain J. Mackay) may prove useful :— *• Of 18 consecutive voyages, seven wer^^ made leaving the coast of New Zealand with N.E. winds, which veered eastward as northing was made, Anally settling at from E.S.E, to E.N.E.; fresh breeze and occasional rain squalls, and carried to Fiji. "Six were made leaving New Zealand coast with strong S.E. winds, veering to east and north ; when north-east, the sky becomes overcast and wind light ; when north, lieavy rain, and shifts in a few hours to north-west in a heavy squall, immedi- ately followed by clear weather, and, invariably a fresh bi-eeze. This shift was generally between the parallels of 25° and 30* S. " Three voyages were made leaving the New Zealand coast with strong westerly winds, which, as northing was made, backed into N,N,W,, blowing steadily from that direction for some days ; Avhen 28° or 26* S. is attained it generally goes back south. This peculiar deflection from the usual i-otary movement is prevalent from March till July, or when strong westerly winds prevail on this coast. " Two trips were made with strong S.E, winds on leaving New Zealand, carrying them right through to Fiji ; but this is the exception. •' The above applies throughout the year, and is not confined to any particular season, further than that during the winter months of 1879, strong westerly winds prevailed within about 300 miles of the coast, and that during this year, 1880, they were extremely rare ; the prevailing winds being E.S,E, to E,N.E, The above passages have been made between the meridians of 176° E. and ISO*, and averaged slightly under eight days each." ADDENDUM. Captain Fairchild says :—" Bull Rock, near Portland Island (New Zealand), dries one foot at low water. The chart shows eight feet on it. The next rock in- side the Bull Rock dries two feet at low water, the chart showing six on it." Printed by H, Bbett, "Evening Star" Office, Wyndham-street, Auckland, N.Z. APPENDIX. NAUTICAL ALMANAC FOR 1881, 1882, 1883, ni. JANUARY, 1881, AT APPARENT NOON THE SUN'S Apparent Declination. Var. in hour. Equation of Time to be added to Apparent Time. ^ So Sat. Sun, Mon. Tiies. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat.. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sim. Mon. S 22 58 277 22 53 3T 22 47 11-2 22 40 52-2 22 34 6-3 22 26 53-6 22 19 14-4 22 11 9-0 22 2 37-5 21 53 40-2 21 44 17-4 21 34 29-3 21 24 lG-3 21 13 38-5 21 2 38-4 20 51 10-1 20 39 20-1 20 27 6-6 20 14 29-8 20 1 30-3 19 48 8-2 19 34 23-9 19 20 17-8 19 5 50-2 18 51 1-6 18 35 52-3 18 20 22-6 18 4 33T 17 48 24-2 17 31 56-2 17 15 9-6 12-95 14-09 15-23 16-35 17-47 18-58 19-68 20-77 21-85 22-92 23-98 25-02 26-06 27-08 28-09 29-09 30-07 31-05 32-01 32-95 33-88 34-80 35-70 36-59 37-46 38-31 39-15 39-97 40-77 41-55 42-32 m s s ' // 3 59-45 1.180 16 18-2 4 27-61 1.165 16 18-2 4 55-38 1.148 16 18-2 5 22-73 1-130 16 18-2 5 49-64 1-111 16 18-1 6 16 06 1-090 16 18-1 6 41-98 1069 16 181 7 7-37 1-046 16 18-1 7 32-21 1-023 16 18-0 7 56-47 0-998 16 18-0 8 20-13 0-973 16 18-0 8 43-17 0-947 16 17-9 9 5-58 0-920 16 17 -8 9 27-34 0-892 16 17 8 9 48-42 0-864 16 17-7 10 8-82 0-835 16 17-6 10 28-51 0-806 16 17-6 10 47-49 0-776 16 17-5 11 5-75 0-745 16 17-4 11 23-27 0-714 16 17-3 11 40-04 0-683 16 17-2 11 5607 0-652 16 17-1 12 11-33 0-620 16 16-9 12 25-8.i 0-588 16 16-8 12 39-55 0-555 16 16-7 12 52-49 0-523 16 16-6 13 4-64 0-489 16 16-4 13 15-98 0-456 16 16-3 13 26-52 0-422 16 16-2 13 36-23 0-387 16 16-0 13 45-11 0-353 16 15-9 h m 1 0-6 1 59.2 2 53-6 3 44-4 4 32-8 5 19-8 6 6-5 6 53-6 7 41-5 8 30-4 9 19-9 10 9-5 10 68-3 11 45-8 12 31-7 13 15-9 13 58-9 14 41-2 15 23-7 16 7-3 16 52-9 17 41-7 18 34-5 19 31-6 20 32-5 21 35-5 22 38-3 23 38-9 36-2 1 30-2 000 -^o Eojeot^QO FEBRUAEY, 1881. ;~ ;3 e © «0 -* -M OS bubs Tues. 1 S 16 58 4-9 43-06 13 53-16 0-318 16 15-7 1 2 21-4 P<10 05CO Wed. 2 16 40 42-5 43-80 14 0-38 0-283 16 15-6 3 10-8 _. 0^ (v^ ►>_ ry^ Thur. 3 16 23 2-7 44-51 14 6-76 0-248 16 15-4 3 59-2 Frid. 4 16 5 6-0 45-21 14 12-30 0-214 16 15-3 4 47-6 ^ ^ ^-^ t^ 4^J -^^U Sat. 5 15 46 52-7 45-89 14 17-02 0-179 16 15-1 5 36-4 Sun. 6 15 28 23-4 46 55 14 20-91 0-145 16 15-0 6 25-7 '.'.'. I * ; Mon. 7 15 9 38-4 47-19 14 23-98 0-111 16 14-8 7 15-4 Tues. 8 14 50 38-2 47-82 14 26-24 0-077 16 14-6 8 5-0 Wed. 9 14 31 23-2 48-43 14 27-70 0-044 16 14-5 8 54-1 .- : : : : : Thur. 10 14 11 53-7 49-02 14 28-35 0-011 16 14-3 9 42-0 Frid. 11 13 52 101 49-60 14 28-22 0-0-22 16 14-1 10 28-5 ^ Sat. 12 13 32 13 50-16 14 27-31 0-054 16 13-9 11 13-4 x^ - - ' I I Sun. 13 13 12 2-6 50-70 14 25-65 0-085 16 13-7 11 57-1 W g « 1; Mon, 14 12 51 39-4 51-23 14 23-23 0-116 16 13-5 12 40-1 «sl§ Tues. 15 12 31 3-8 51-74 14 20-08 0-146 16 13-3 13 23-0 : : Wed. 16 12 10 16-1 52-23 14 16-21 0-176 16 13-1 14 6-6 fe c^l^g © Thur. 17 11 49 16-8 52-71 14 11-64 0-205 16 12-9 14 51-7 Frid. 18 11 28 6-2 53-17 14 6-38 0-233 16 12-7 15 39-2 ^ "^^sl.^ Sat. 19 11 6 44-7 53-61 14 0-46 0-260 16 12-4 16 29-9 w •3 pj C <^ Sun. 20 10 45 12-7 54-04 13 53-88 0-287 16 12-2 17 24-2 02 < Mon. 21 10 23 30-6 54-45 13 46-68 0-313 16 12-0 18 21-8 Tues. 22 10 1 38-9 54-85 13 38-86 0-338 16 11-8 19 21-7 Wed. 23 9 39 37-9 55-23 13 30-44 0-363 16 11-5 20 22-3 "^253 £5 SJS Thur. 24 9 17 28-1 55-59 13 21-44 0-387 16 11-3 21 21 9 Frid. 25 8 55 9-8 55-93 13 11-86 0-411 16 11-0 22 19-3 t: >> Sat. 26 8 32 43-6 56-25 13 1-72 0-434 16 10-8 23 14-1 cS c^ Sun. 27 8 10 9-8 56-56 12 51-03 0-456 16 10-6 ^ t t t t-i " Mon. 28 7 47 28-9 56-84 12 39-81 0-478 16 10-3 6-5 1 1 IV. MAECH, 1881. 1 1 AT APPARENT NOON. Equation of Time to i ^ SI s be added 1 ■•f S« i 1 THE SUN'S to 1 «« subt. from o 1 Apparent Declination. Var- in I hour. Apparent Time. l ^ g .fiooooo •==2hS , ,/ II m s s 1 II h m "■^ Tubs. 1 S 7 24 41-3 57-11 12 28-07 0-500 16 10-1 57-3 • • Wed. 2 7 1 47-5 57-36 12 15-82 0-521 16 9-8 1 47-2 Thur. 3 6 38 47'8 57-60 12 3-08 0-541 16 9-6 2 36-9 . Frid. ' i 6 15 42-6 57-82 11 49-87 0-560 16 9-4 3 26*8 i • • Sat. 5 5 52 32'3 58-02 11 36-21 0-579 16 9-1 4 17-2 Sun. 6 5 29 17-4 58-21 11 22-10 0-597 16 8-9 5 7-8 . Mon. 7 5 5 58-2 58-39 11 7-57 0-614 16 8-6 5 58-3 I ; ; I • • Tues. 8 4 42 35-1 58-54 10 52-64 0-630 16 8-3 6 47-9 N Wed. 9 4 19 8-5 58-68 10 37-33 0-646 16 8-1 7 36-4 X ^ Thur. 10 3 55 38-7 58-80 10 21-65 0-660 16 7-8 8 23-3 H 1 -t; '• • • Frid. 11 3 32 6-2 58-90 10 5-64 0-674 16 7-6 9 8-8 fc I§1§ Sat. 12 3 8 31-3 59-00 9 49-30 0-687 16 7-3 9 52-9 Sun. 13 2 44 51-3 59-08 9 32-66 0-699 16 7-1 10 36*3 m 51*1 ii Mon. 14 2 21 157 59-14 9 15-74 0-710 16 6-8 11 19-6 W Tues. 15 1 57 357 59-19 8 58-57 0-720 16 6-5 12 3-5 xn < .5 s S Wed. 16 1 33 547 59-23 8 41-18 0-729 16 6-3 \L 48-9 p<© Thur. 17 1 10 13-0 59-25 8 23-58 0-737 16 6-0 13 36-4 <5ai Frid. 18 19 46 31-0 S 22 49-0 59-25 59-25 8 5-80 7 47-86 0-744 0-750 16 57 16 5-4 14 26-9 15 20-5 Sat. Sun. 20 NO 527 59-23 7 29-80 0-755 16 5-2 16 17-1 ^ISgJgJ ^JS Mon. 21 24 337 59-19 7 11-64 0-759 16 4-9 17 15-8 Tues. 22 48 13-6 59-13 6 53-39 0-762 16 4-6 18 15-0 x^ • A Wed. 23 1 11 521 59-07 6 35-07 0-764 16 4-3 19 13-2 2 . ► J S : Thur. 24 1 35 28-9 58-99 6 16-72 0-765 16 4-0 20 9-5 1 " ' ' ^ Frid. 25 1 59 3-5 58-89 5 58-34 0-766 16 3-7 21 3-4 Sat. 26 2 22 35-5 58-78 5 39-95 0-766 16 3-5 21 55-2 Sun. 27 2 46 47 58-65 5 21-58 0-765 16 3-2 22 45-5 Mon. 28 3 9 30-6 58-50 5 3-23 0-764 16 2-9 2:? 35-2 Tues. 29 3 32 52-8 58-34 4 44-9i 0-761 16 2-6 Wed. 30 3 56 10-9 58-16 4 26-68 0-759 16 2-3 24-8 Thur. 31 4 19 24-6 57-97 4 8-51 0*755 16 2-1 1 15-1 APE XL, 1881. Frid. 1 N 4 42 33-6 5777 3 50-44 0-751 16 1-8 2 6-0 Sat. 2 5 5 37-5 57-55 3 32-47 0-746 1« 1-5 2 57-4 Sun. 3 5 28 35-9 57-31 3 14-63 0740 16 1-3 3 48-8 ^Z%^^ Mon. 4 5 51 28-5 57-06 2 56 -93 0-734 16 1-0 4 39-6 Tues. 5 6 14 14-9 56-80 2 39-39 0-727 16 0-7 5 29-0 -^"§5?^^ ji~¥> Apparent Declination. Var. in I hour. Apparent Time. 1 1 ^1 o ' // // m s s ' // h m pG Oq ,H y~< Sun. 1 N15 12 15-1 45-12 3 3-42 0-302 15 53-9 2 30-3 . . : . : Mon. 2 15 30 10-4 i 44-49 3 10-41 0-280 15 53-7 3 20-7 ^ Tues. 3 15 47 50-4 43-84 3 16-87 0-258 15 53-5 4 9-4 i .... Wed. 4 16 5 14-6 4318 3 22-78 0-235 15 53-3 4 56-0 .... Thur. 5 16 22 22-8 42-50 3 28-16 0-213 15 53-0 5 40-8 Frid. 6 16 39 14-7 41-81 3 33-00 0190 15 52-8 6 24-2 W .... Sat. 7 16 55 49-9 41-11 3 37-29 0167 15 52-6 7 6-8 w . : : : S^ln. 8 17 12 8-2 40-40 3 41-02 0-144 15 52-4 7 49-5 H Mdn. 9 17 28 9-2 39-68 3 44-21 0-121 15 52-2 8 33-3 f^ h .J. • Tues. 10 17 43 52-7 38-94 3 46-84 0-098 15 52-0 9 191 o ^ • s • Wed. 11 17 59 18-4 38-20 3 48-91 0-074 15 51-8 10 8-0 03 Thur. 12 18 14 26-1 37-44 3 50-41 0-051 15 51-6 11 0-7 W Frid. 13 18 29 15-4 36-67 3 51-34 0-027 15 51-4 11 57-4 M O'^O'g SS Sat. 14 18 43 46-1 35-89 3 51-70 003 15 51-2 12 57-5 ■.^ Sun. 15 18 57 57-9 35-09 3 51-48 0-021 15 51-0 13 59-2 w P.S Mon. 16 19 11 50-6 34-29 3 50-69 0-045 15 50-8 15 0-5 Ph ^^^5^; > ^ Sun. 22 20 28 9-8 29 24 3 33-93 0-186 15 49-6 •20 13-3 ^ t t t d • Mon. 23 20 39 41-0 28-36 3 29-19 0-209 15 49-5 21 1-3 S 1^ Tues. 24 20 50 50-9 27-47 3 23-91 0-231 15 49-3 21 50-2 Wed. 25 21 1 39-4 26-57 3 18-11 0-252 15 49-1 22 40-2 Thur. 26 21 12 6-1 25-66 3 11-81 0-273 15 49-0 23 31-2 Frid. 27 21 22 10-9 24-7 1 3 5-01 0-293 15 48-8 \ •» Sat. 28 21 31 53-6 23-81 2 57-74 0-312 15 48-6 22-6 S^m. 29 21 41 13-9 22-88 2 50-01 0-381 15 48-5 1 13-5 Mon. 30 21 50 11-7 21-93 2 41-85 0-349 15 48-4 2 2-9 Tues. 31 21 58 46-7 20-98 2 33-27 0-366 15 48-2 2 50-4 JU^ [E, 1881. Wed. 1 N22 6 58-8 20-02 2 24-29 0-382 15 48-1 3 35-9 Thur. 2 22 14 47-7 19-05 2 14-93 0-398 15 48-0 4 19-5 '^•^S^l !0 Frid. 3 22 22 13-4 18-08 2 5-21 0-412 15 47-9 5 1-9 E osiooM Sat. 4 22 29 15-6 17-10 1 55-15 0-426 15 47-7 5 43-9 Stm. 5 23 35 54-2 16-11 1 44-77 0-439 15 47-6 6 26-2 .c JO 00 C5 II II m s s / // h m Frid. 1 N23 5 50-1 10-45 3 35-69 0-482 15 46-0 3 41-2 .... Sat. 2 23 1 27-2 11-46 3 47-12 0-470 15 46-0 4 22-7 i Sun. 3 22 56 40-2 12-46 3 58-24 0-457 15 46-0 5 5-0 Mon. 4 22 51 29-2 13-45 4 9-05 0-443 15 46-0 5 49-2 . • . . Tues. 5 22 45 54-4 14-44 4 19-51 0-428 15 46-0 36-1 Wed. 6 22 39 55-9 15-43 4 29-61 0-413 15 46-0 7 26-8 .... Thur. 7 22 33 33-9 16-40 4 39-33 0-397 15 46-0 8 21-9 w . • . . Frid. 8 22 26 48-5 17-37 4 48-66 0-380 15 46-1 9 21-3 s Sat. 9 22 19 39-9 18-34 4 57-58 0-363 15 46-1 10 23-6 H t •-. - . . Sun. 10 22 12 8-2 19-30 5 6-07 0-345 15 46-1 11 26-9 Eq ^ ■■^:: ■ * Mon. 11 22 4 13-7 20-25 5 14-13 0-326 15 46-2 12 28-7 O lgs§ Tues. 12 21 55 56-4 21-19 5 21-74 0-.^07 15 46-2 13 27-5 xn *|5l %% Wed. 13 21.47 16-6 22-13 5 28-88 0-288 15 46-3 14 23-1 W Thur. 14 21 38 14-4 23-06 5 35-56 0-268 15 46 3 15 15-7 < Ills .^g> Frid. 15 21 28 49-9 23-98 5 41-76 0-248 15 46-4 IS 6-2 gp, Sat. 16 21 19 3-5 24-89 5 47-47 0-227 15 46-4 16 55-6 «<^^/5 Ahc r :: :; Stin. 28 9 34 57-8 53-18 1 1-07 0-731 15 52-7 2 30-3 p! Mon. 29 9 13 37-0 53-55 43-35 0-746 15 52-9 3 16-9 < < Tues, 30 8 52 7-5 53-90 25-28 0-760 15 53-1 4 6-5 Wed. 31 8 30 29-6 54-25 6-87 0-774 15 53-4 4 59-3 1 ■ 1 1 1 VII. SEPTEMBER, 1881. -i ^' AT APPARENT Equation 3 C/3 t s NOON of Time to o 1 o 1 ^ THE SUN'S be 1) c O 7 *3 subt. from if o 1 'o 1 Apparent Dedination. Var. in I hour. Apparent Time. iJ ^ m "1 .C(M500eO_ JJOON ' // II m s s • II h m . . . . t fH Thur. 1 N 8 8 43-6 54-58 11-86 0-787 15 53-6 5 55-3 • • Frid. 2 7 46 49-8 54-90 30-90 0-799 15 53-9 6 53-6 . Sat. 3 7 24 48-6 55-20 50-23 0-811 15 54-1 7 53-0 !?; . Sun. 4 7 2 40-3 55-49 1 9-83 0-822 15 54-3 8 52-0 O i * * Mon. 5 6 40 25-1 55-77 1 29-69 0-832 15 54-6 9 49-5 %'^ % Tues. 6 6 18 3-5 56-03 1 49-78 0-841 15 54-8 10 45-2 . . Wed. 7 5 55 35-6 56-29 2 10-08 0-850 15 55-1 11 39-2 w ^^Vrt" • " Thur. 8 5 33 1-8 56-53 2 30-58 0-858 15 55-3 12 32-0 w Frid. 9 6 10 22-4 56-75 2 51-24 0-864 15 55-6 13 24-3 H c o Sat. 10 4 47 37-7 56-97 3 12-04 0-869 15 55-8 14 16-7 fe "u 2 Sun. 11 4 24 47-9 57-18 3 32-95 1 0-873 15 56-1 15 9-2 O t^'^^t Mon. 12 4 1 53-3 57-37 3 63-96 0-877 15 66-3 16 1-9 m 1^ 3 8 «-5 l< Tues. 13 3 38 64-3 57-54 4 15-03 ! 0-879 15 56-6 16 54-2 H Wed. 14 15 3 15 51-3 2 52 44-5 57-70 57-85 4 36-16 1 0-881 4 57-31 1 0-882 15 56-8 15 57-1 17 45-6 18 35-6 < Thur. ""^ Frid. 16 2 29 34-4 57-99 6 18-48 1 0-882 15 57-3 19 23-6 -*^;2!S5^ coco Sat. 17 2 6 21-2 58-11 5 39-63 0-881 15 57-6 20 9-7 rl Sim. 18 1 43 5-3 58-21 6 0-76 0-880 15 67-8 20 64-1 u u Mon. 19 1 19 47-0 58-30 6 21-85 0-878 15 58-1 21 37-1 Tues. 20 56 26-8 58-38 6 42-88 0-875 15 58-4 22 19-3 s , . ^ .. s . Wed. 21 33 4-9 58-44 7 3-83 0-871 15 58-6 23 1-5 o s : s t « J Thur. 22. N 9 41-7 58-49 7 24-68 : 0-866 15 58-9 23 44-4 & & Frid. 23 S 13 42-4 68-52 7 45-41 1 0-861 15 59-2 •;<• * m M Sat. 24 37 7-1 58-53 8 6-00 0-855 15 59-4 28-6 Stm. 25 1 32-0 58-53 8 26-45 0-848 15 59-7 1 15-0 Mon. 26 1 23 56-7 58-52 8 46-72 0-841 16 0-0 2 4-1 Tues. 27 1 47 21-0 58-49 9 6-81 0-833 16 0-3 2 56-1 Wed. 28 2 10 44-4 58-45 9 26-69 0-824 16 0-6 3 50-8 Thur. 29 2 34 6-5 58-39 9 46-35 0-814 16 0-8 4 47-6 Frid. 30 2 57 27-0 68-31 10 5-76 0-804 16 1-1 5 45-2 OCTOBER, 1881. Sat. 1 S 3 20 45-6 58-23 10 24-92 0*793 16 1-4 6 42-5 Sun. 2 3 44 1-9 58-12 10 43-81 0-781 16 1-7 7 38-5 'pa>r^'^ Mon. 3 4 7 15-5 58-00 11 2-40 0-768 16 2-0 8 32-9 ^'^^'v^^ Tues. 4 4 30 26-1 57-87 11 20-67 0-754 16 2-3 9 25-9 Wed. 5 4 53 33-3 57-73 11 38-60 0-739 16 2-5 10 18-1 •^- 'rHrn;:; .-,w...w Thur. 6 5 16 36-9 57 -57 11 56-16 0'724 16 2-8 11 10-0 Frid. 7 5 39 36-5 57-39 12 13-33 0-707 16 3-1 12 2-3 '.'.'.'. '.'.', Sat. 8 6 2 31-8 57-20 12 30-09 0-689 16 3-4 12 65-3 , Sun. 9 6 25 22-3 57-00 12 46-40 0-670 16 3-7 13 48-9 V, Mon. 10 6 48 7*9 56-79 13 2-25 0'650 16 3-9 14 42-7 O '. \ \ '. : : : Tues. 11 7 10 48-1 56'55 13 17-61 0-629 16 4-2 15 35-7 o Wed. 12 7 33 22-5 56-31 13 32-46 0-608 16 4-5 16 27-3 Thur. 13 7 55 50-8 56-04 13 46-78 0-585 16 4-7 17 16-8 w 'i "i • \ .- Frid. 14 8 18 12-6 55-76 14 0-55 0-562 16 5-0 18 4-0 w Sat. 15 8 40 27-5 55-47 14 13-76 0-538 16 5-3 18 49-1 H fllgS Stm. 16 9 2 35-1 55-16 14 26-39 0-514 16 6-5 19 32-5 § o ^ S S • '. \ Mon. 17 9 24 35-0 54-83 14 38-12 0-488 16 6-8 20 14-9 «!!? O 4) O Tues. 18 9 46 26-8 54-48 14 49-83 0-462 16 6-1 20 57-0 SSm Wed. 19 10 8 10-1 54-12 15 0-61 0-436 16 6-3 21 39-6 tA a *? ^ s •GO'S Thur. 20 10 29 44-6 53-74 15 10-74 0-408 16 6-6 22 23-6 m P^^ ^<^ Frid. 21 10 51 97 53-35 15 20-21 0-381 16 6-9 23 9-7 <) Sat. 22 11 12 25-2 52-93 15 29-01 0-352 16 7-1 23 58-6 W Sun. 23 11 33 30-5 52-50 15 37-12 0-324 16 7-4 * » Ph Mon. 24 11 54 25-3 52-06 15 44-54 0-294 16 7-7 50-7 *-;:g5S ^S53 Tues. 25 12 15 9-2 51-59 15 51-24 0-264 16 7-9 1 45-6 Wed. 26 12 35 41-7 51-11 15 57-23 0-234 16 8-2 2 42-7 g ^ Thur. 27 12 56 2-4 50-61 16 2-49 0-204 16 8-5 3 40-7 Frid. 28 13 16 11-0 50-10 16 7-02 0-173 16 8-7 4 38-0 Sat. 29 13 36 7-0 49-56 16 10-81 0-142 16 9-0 5 33-7 Sun. 30 13 55 50-0 49-01 16 13-85 0-111 16 9-2 6 27-4 Mon. 31 14 15 19-6 48-45 16 16-13 0-079 16 9-5 7 19-3 VIII, NOVEMBEE, 1881, . Equation . "■^ 4) .;C AT APPARENT of Time to 3 ii ^i i O NOON be K 1 ^% 1 1 THE SUN'S subt. from 1 "s Var. in added to 1 ^ Apparent Apparent i ^ S"^ -«>r'»' ^ Q fi Declination. I hour. Time. > ^s O jttswi o / // II m s S \ > II h m ^rHiH Tues. 1 S 14 34 35-4 47-86 16 17-64 0-047 16 9-8 8 10*0 : : : : Wed. 2 14 53 36-9 47-26 16 18-37 0-014 16 10-0 9 0*4 Thur. 3 15 12 23-9 46-65 16 18-30 0-020 16 10-3 9 51*1 g I'rid. i 15 30 55-9 46-01 16 17-43 0-053 16 10-5 10 42*8 o ^ I I ; Sat. 5 15 49 12-5 45-36 16 15-74 0-088 16 10-7 11 35*7 o Sun. 6 16 7 13-4 44-70 16 13-21 0-123 16 11-0 12 29*4 Men. 7 16 24 58-1 44-02 16 9-85 0-158 16 11-2 13 23*3 ^ Tues. 8 16 42 26-4 43-33 16 5-64 0-193 16 11-4 14 16-3 W Wed. 9 16 59 377 42-61 16 0-57 0-229 16 11-7 15 7-5 H Thur. 10 17 16 31-7 41-88 15 54-64 0-265 16 11-9 15 56-3 § II Frid. 11 17 33 8-0 41-13 15 47-85 0-301 16 12-1 16 42-6 Sat. 12 17 49 26-1 40-37 15 40-20 0-337 16 12-3 17 26-8 m 3 e ®;?3 aS Sun, 13 18 5 257 39-59 15 31-68 0-373 16 12-5 18 9-4 f^^;2;6H <^ Mon. 14 18 21 6-3 18 36 27-6 38-79 37-98 15 22-30 0-409 16 12-7 18 51-2 CO < Tues. 15 15 12"05 0-445 16 12-9 19 33*1 Wed. 16 18 51 29-2 37-15 15 0-95 0-480 16 13-1 20 16-0 M Thur. 17 19 6 107 36-30 14 49-00 0-516 16 13-3 21 0-9 P^ '"SSS^ SS Frid. 18 19 20 31-6 35-44 It 36-19 0-551 16 13-5 21 48-6 &i u Sat. 19 19 34 31-6 34-56 14 22-54 0-586 16 13-7 22 39-7 ^ % Sun. 20 19 48 10-3 33-66 14 8-06 0-620 16 13-9 23 34-5 s . g Mon. 21 20 1 27-4 32-75 13 52-77 0-654 16 14-1 i — = 1 :: Tues. 22 20 14 22-5 31-83 13 36-68 0-687 16 14-3 32-3 % >• o Wed. 23 20 26 55-2 30-89 13 19-80 0719 16 14-5 1 31*8 "A ^ Thur. 24 20 39 5-1 29-93 13 2-15 0-751 16 14-7 2 31*1 Frid. 25 20 50 52-0 28-96 12 43-76 0-781 16 14-8 3 28*8 Sat. 26 21 2 15-4 27-98 12 24-64 0-811 16 15-0 4 21*0 Sun. 27 21 13 15-1 26-99 12 4-82 0-840 16 15-2 5 16*6 Mon. 28 21 23 50-8 25-98 11 44-31 0-869 16 15-4 6 7*2 Tues. 29 21 34 2-0 24-95 11 23-13 0-896 16 15-5 6 56*8 Wed. 30 21 43 48-5 23-92 11 1-29 0-923 16 15-7 7 46*1 D ECEMBEE, 1881. Thur. 1 S 21 53 10-1 22-87 10 38-82 0-949 16 15*9 8 36*1 Frid. 2 22 2 6*4 21-81 10 15-74 0-974 16 16-0 9 27-2 Sat. 3 22 10 37*2 20-75 9 52-05 0-999 16 16-2 10 19-6 Sun. 4 22 18 42-3 19-67 9 27-78 1-023 16 16-3 11 12-8 iH -* Mon. 5 22 26 21-4 18-58 9 2-95 1-046 16 16-4 12 5-9 J5>fl00j-j00 •^S^J:^ Tues. 6 22 33 34.2 17-48 8 37-59 1-068 16 16-6 12 57-9 Wed. 7 22 40 20-6 16-38 8 11-71 1-089 16 16*7 13 48-0 ; ; ; ; Thur. 8 22 46 40-3 15 26 7 45-34 1-109 16 16*8 14 35*7 Frid. 9 22 52 33-1 14-14 7 18-50 1-128 16 16*9 15 21-0 ;^ Sat. 10 22 57 58-9 13-01 6 51-22 1*145 16 17*0 16 4-2 O : : : : Sun. 11 23 2 57-4 11-86 6 23-54 1-161 16 17-1 16 46-1 o Mon. 12 23 7 28-4 10-72 5 55-48 1-177 16 17-2 17 27-5 n . !L. Tues. 13 23 11 31-8 9-56 5 27-06 1-191 16 17*3 18 9-2 W g :b :.^ Wed. 14 23 15 7-5 8-41 4 58-32 1-204 16 17*4 18 52*2 Moon ; Quart Moon t Quarx Thur. 15 23 18 15-3 7-24 4 29-28 1-215 16 17*5 19 37-6 Frid. 16 23 20 o5-l 6-07 3 59-99 1-225 16 17*5 20 26 2 © (B Sat. 17 23 23 6-8 4-90 3 30-47 1-234 16 17 6 21 18-8 § §)§) Sun. 18 23 24 50-4 3-73 3 0-76 1-241 16 177 22 15-2 S5=^g f-c Mon. 19 23 26 57 2-55 2 30-89 1-247 16 177 23 14-8 CQ ;3 c ©vS <^ Tues. 20 23 26 52-8 1-37 2 0-91 1-251 16 17*8 * * Wed. 21 23 27 11-5 0-19 1 30-86 1-253 16 17*9 15*8 < Thur. 22 23 27 2-0 0-99 1 0-78 1-253 16 17*9 1 16*4 w Frid. 23 23 26 24-2 2-16 30-70 1-252 16 18 2' 14*7 £ '"SSS^ 0;- rHi-l(M O.'^' Frid. 20 20 4 34-1 3274 11 19 95 728 16 17-2 55-2 tit Sat. 21 19 51 17 33-67 11 37-03 0-695 16 17 1 1 51-4 $ t i ' § - Sun. 21 19 37 377 34 59 11 53-33 0-663 16 17-0 2 45-4 C3 " ' ' g ' Mon. 23 19 23 36-7 35 49 12 8 84 629 16 16-9 3 37-7 c3 ^ Tue3. 24 19 9 14-4 36 37 12 23-54. 0-595 16 16-8 4 29-2 Wed. 25 18 54 31-0 37-24 12 37-42 561 16 16-7 5 20-5 Thur. 26 18 39 27-1 38 09 12 50-48 0-527 16 16 6 6 121 Frid. 27 18 24 2-9 38-92 13 2-72 0-493 16 16 5 7 4-0 Sat. 28 18 8 18-9 3974 13 1412 0-458 16 16-4 7 56-1 Sun. 29 17 52 15-5 4054 13 24-69 0-423 16 16-2 8 47-6 Mon. 30 17 35 53-0 41-33 13 34 43 e-388 16 16-1 9 38-0 Tues. 31 17 19 11-8 42-10 13 43 33 354 16 15 9 10 26-6 FEBETJ AK Y, 1882. Wed. 1 S 17 2 12-4 42*85 13 51-40 0-319 16 15-8 11 13-3 Thur. 2 16 44 55-1 43-59 13 58-64 285 16 15-7 11 58-0 Frid. 3 16 27 20-2 44«31 14 506 0-250 16 15 5 12 410 Sat. 4 16 9 28 -3 45 01 14 10-66 0-216 16 15-3 13 22 8 ^t-O'^OS •^js::!: Sun. 5 15 51 19-7 45-70 14 15 45 0-183 16 15-2 14 4-0 t-.1r-l Mon 6 15 32 54 8 46 37 14 19-43 149 16 15-0 14 45-5 .... Tues. 7 15 14 13-9 47-03 14 22-62 116 16 14 8 15 27-9 ■ • * Wed 8 14 55 17-5 47-66 14 25 01 084 16 14 6 16 12-0 o o Thur. 9 14 36 6-0 48-29 14 26-63 0*052 16 14-5 16 68-7 Frid. 10 14 16 39-8 48-89 14 27-49 0-020 16 14-3 17 48-5 Sat. 11 13 56 59 -3 49-48 14 27 59 0-011 16 14-1 18 41-6 g Sun. 12 13 37 4-9 50-05 14 26-94 0-042 16 13-9 19 37-9 Mon. 13 13 16 57*0 50-60 14 25-56 0-073 16 13-7 20 3fi-4 w ■^ "b Tu^s. 14 12 56 36-1 51-13 14 23*45 0103 16 13-5 21 35-9 w ^1^1 Wed. 15 12 36 2-6 51-65 14 20 62 0-133 16 13 3 22 34-9 H Thur. 16 12 15 16-9 52-15 14 17-07 0-163 16 13-1 23 32-6 fe Frid. 17 11 54 19-5 52-63 14 12-82 0192 16 12-8 * ■>:• o «a Sat. 18 11 33 10-9 53-08 14 7-87 0-220 16 12-6 28-7 bc.^ Sun. 19 11 11 51-5 53-52 14 2-24 0-249 16 12 4 1 23-4 K -BeS.b p.© Mon. 20 10 50 217 53-95 13 55-92 0-277 16 12-2 2 17 3 CO i^^';^,^ ^PL, Tues. 21 10 28 41-9 54-36 13 48-94 0-304 16 12 3 10-8 <1 Wed. 22 10 6 52-5 54-75 13 41-31 0-331 16 11-8 4 4-3 W Thur. 23 9 44 54 5512 13 33-03 0-358 16 11-5 4 57-8 ^ Frid. 24 9 22 46-8 55-47 13 24-12 0-384 16 11-3 5 51 1 '^^^^ CC t~- Sat. 25 9 313 55-81 13 14-61 0409 16 11-1 6 43-6 >^ b" Sun. 26 8 38 7*8 56-14 13 4'50 0-433 16 10-9 7 34 7 o3 a Mon 27 8 15 36-8 56-44 12 53-82 0*456 16 10 6 8 23-9 S - ' - Tues. 28 7 62 687 66-73 12 42-59 0-479 16 10 4 9 11-0 !"■" r XI. MAECH, 1882. APEIL, 1882. ■i .c AT APPARENT Equation u CO gjj 1 § NOON of Time to o i ^ t V THE SUN'S be added to .2 o s o snbt. from 1 Apparent Declination. Var. in I hour. Apparent Time. i c^ ^1 h m . 12 39-5 . 9 27-7 . 17 2 1 33-1 ^M^OS ,, / // „ m g s , II h m Wed. 1 S 7 30 13-9 57 00 12 30-82 501 16 10-2 9 56-1 .... . . . Thur. 2 7 7 22-0 57 26 12 18-53 0-623 16 9-9 10 39-5 i Fiid. 3 6 44 25-4 57-50 12 5 74 0-543 16 9-7 11 21-7 .... Sat. 4 6 21 22fi 57-73 11 52-48 0-562 16 9-4 12 3-2 Suit. 5 5 58 14 5 67-94 11 38-76 0-580 16 9-2 12 44 8 ^ Mon. 6 6 35 1-5 58-14 11 24 62 0-598 16 8-9 13 270 .... . . . Tues. 7 5 11 44-0 58-32 11 10-07 0-614 16 8-7 14 10-7 w .... . . . Wed. 8 4 48 22 3 58-48 10 55-14 0-630 16 8-4 14 56-5 w Thur. 9 4 24 56 8 58-63 10 39-84 0-644 16 8-1 15 44-7 H . ?» b Frid. 10 4 1 27-9 58-77 10 24-21 0-658 16 7-9 10 35-7 fa ■■tci^ Sat. 11 3 37 55 9 58-89 10 8*26 0-670 16 7-6 17 29-4 O gegS Sun. li 3 14 21-2 58 99 9 52 03 0-682 16 7-3 18 25-1 l^t © fij O Mon. 13 2 50 44-2 59 08 9 35-52 693 16 7-1 19 21-9 Site So Tues. 14 2 27 5-3 59-16 9 18-76 0-703 16 68 20 18-9 Full Last Ne-vv Firs •<^-< Wed. 15 2 3 24-7 59-21 9 177 0-712 16 6-5 21 15-3 < Thur. 10 1 39 43 59-25 8 44-57 721 16 6-2 22 10-8 W Frid. 17 1 16 0-6 69-27 8 27-16 0-729 16 6-0 23 5-6 ^ Sat. 18 52 17 8 59-28 8 9-57 0-736 16 5-7 Sun. 19 28 35 59-27 7 51-82 0-743 16 5-4 0-1 •^r^<^(0 Mon. 20 SO 4 52 6 59-25 7 33-92 749 16 5-2 54-6 Tues. 21 NO 18 49-0 59-21 7 15-89 0-754 16 4-9 1 49-6 g . 2 . . Wed. 22 42 29 5 59-15 6 57-75 0-758 16 4-6 2 44-9 S — " S3 - -^ Thur. 23 1 6 8-4 59-08 6 39-51 0-762 16 4-3 3 40-2 ^ ^ Frid. 24 1 29 45 4 59 00 6 21 19 0-765 16 41 4 34-8 Sat 25 1 53 20-2 58-90 6 2-81 767 16 3-8 5 27-9 Sn7i 26 2 16 52 4 58-78 5 44-;^8 0-768 10 3-5 6 18-7 Mon. 27 2 40 21-5 58-65 6 25 93 769 16 3-3 7 7-1 Tues. 28 3 3 47-4 58-50 5 7-48 0-769 16 3-0 7 53-1 Wed. 29 3 27 9-6 58 34 4 49-04 768 10 2-7 8 37-1 Thur. 30 3 50 27 8 £8-17 4 30-64 765 16 2-4 9 19-6 Frid. 31 4 13 41-7 57 98 4 12-30 0-762 16 2-2 10 1-3 Rat. 1 Sun. 2 Mon. 3 Tues. 4 Wed. 5 Thur. 6 Frid. 7 Sat. 8 Sun. 9 Mon. 10 Tues. 11 Wed 12 Thur. 13 Frid. 14 Sat. 15 Sun. 16 Mon. 17 Tues. 18 Wed. 19 Thur. 20 Frid. 21 Sat. 22 Sun. 23 Mon. 24 Tues. 25 Wed. 26 Thur. 27 Frid. 28 Sat. 29 Sun. 30 36 50-9 59 55 '1 22 54*J 45 47 2 8 34-5 31 16-5 53 49-9 16 17 4 38 37 6 50 3 22 55-0 44 51-4 6 39-1 28 17-8 49 47 2 11 69 32 16'5 53 15 7 14 4-2 34 41-5 55 7-4 15 21-5 35 23-5 55 13 1 14 49-9 34 13-6 53 23-9 12 20 4 31 2-9 49 31-0 57-78 57-66 57-34 57-09 56-84 66 57 66-29 65-99 65 09 55 36 55-02 54-67 54-30 53-92 53-52 6311 62-68 52 24 51-79 61-32 60-83 50- .34 49 83 49-30 48-76 48-21 47-64 47-06 46-47 45-87 3 5404 3 35-88 3 17-85 2 59 96 2 42 25 2 24-73 2 7-43 1 60 30 1 33-55 1 17-02 1 0-78 44-85 59 24 13-98 93 15-48 29 65 43 42 56-80 1 9-76 1 22-31 1 34 43 1 46 12 1 57-36 2 814 2 18-46 2 28-30 2 37 '66 2 46-51 2 54-86 0-769 754 0-748 0-742 0-734 0-725 0-716 0-706 0-695 683 0-670 0-657 0-643 029 0-014 0-698 0-582 0-500 0-549 0-531 0-514 0-496 0-478 0-459 0-440 0-420 0-400 0-379 0-368 0-337 15 59-7 15 59-4 15 59-1 16 58-9 15 58-6 16 68 3 15 58-0 15 57-8 15 57-5 15 67-2 15 57-0 15 56-7 15 56-5 15 56-2 15 66-0 15 55-7 16 55-5 15 55-2 15 55 '0 16 64-8 15 54-6 15 54-3 10 42-9 11 25-2 12 8-8 12 54-3 13 42-2 14 32-7 15 25-6 16 20-2 17 15-7 18 11-1 19 5-8 19 69-6 20 52-7 21 45-5 22 38-8 23 33-1 n ■>:• 28-4 1 24-0 2 20-8 3 10-0 4 9-2 4 59-8 6 47-5 32-0 7 15-8 7 57-8 8 39-4 9 21-3 10 4-4 ;»0 00 05 00 O o W H fa ^ so t- - ?.. fa^;?f*( be be -no A<1 XII. MAY, 1882 Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. IVIon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. AT APPARENT NOON THE SUN'S Apparent Declination. Var. in : hour. Equation of Time to be subt. from added to Apparent Time. N15 15 15 l(j 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 7 44-5 25 43-0 43 26-3 54-0 18 5-9 .35 1-7 51 41-0 8 3-5 24 9-0 39 57-2 55 27-7 10 40-3 25 34-6 40 10-3 54 27-2 8 25-0 22 3-3 35 22-0 48 20-8 59-3 13 17-3 25 14-7 36 51-0 48 6-1 58 59-8 9 31-7 19 41-8 29 29-7 38 55-3 47 58-5 58 33-9 45-25 44-62 43-98 43-33 42-66 41-98 41-29 40-58 39-87 39-14 38-40 37-64 36-87 36-10 35-31 34-50 33-09 32-86 32-03 31-18 30-32 29-45 28-57 27 68 26-78 25-87 21-96 24-03 23-10 22 16 21-21 s 2-68 9-97 16-71 22-90 28-53 33-58 3 38-06 3 41-95 3 45-26 3 47-97 3 50-08 3 51-60 3 52-53 3 52-83 3 52-61 3 51-78 3 50-37 3 48-39 3 45-87 3 42-80 3 39-20 3 35-09 3 30-47 3 25-35 3 19-74 3 13-66 3 7-11 3 0-10 2 52-65 2 41-76 2 36-45 s 0-315 0-292 0-269 0-246 0-223 0-199 0174 0-150 0-125 0-100 0-076 0051 0-026 002 0-023 0-047 0-071 0-094 0-116 139 0-161 ! 0-182 0-203 0-224 0-244 0-263 i 0-282 I 0-301 i 0-320 0-338 0-355 15 54-1 J 5 53-8 15 53-6 15 53-4 15 53-1 15 52-9 15 52-7 15 52-5 15 52-2 15 52-0 15 51-8 15 51-6 15 51-4 15 51-2 15 51-0 15 50 8 15 50-6 15 50 4 15 50-2 15 50-0 15 49-9 15 49-7 15 49-5 15 49-4 15 49-2 15 49-1 15 48-9 15 48-8 15 48-6 15 48-5 15 48-3 h 10 49-5 11 37-1 12 27-4 13 20-5 14 15-5 15 11-4 16 7-2 17 1-8 17 55-0 18 47-0 19 38-3 20 29-6 21 21-7 22 15-2 23 10-2 6-1 1 2-1 1 56-9 2 49-5 3 39-2 4 26-1 5 10-5 5 53-2 6 34-8 7 16-3 7 58-6 8 42-6 9 29-0 10 18-4 11 10-9 JUNE, 1882. 00 1- top SPSS o * o •S O 4) g P. Thur. 1 Frid. 2 Sat. 3 Sun. 4 Mon. 5 Tubs. Wed. 7 Thur. a Frid. 9 Sat. 10 Sun. n Mon. 12 Tues. 13 Wed. 14 Thur. 15 Frid. 16 Sat. 17 Sun. 18 Mon. 19 Tues. 20 Wed. 21 Thur. 22 Frid. 23 Sat. 24 Sun. 25 Mon. 26 Tues. 27 Wed. 28 Thur. 29 Frid. 30 N22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 4 56-5 12 51-1 20 22-5 27 30-5 31 15-0 40 35-8 46 32-8 52 5-7 57 14-6 1 59-3 6 19-6 10 15-6 13 47-0 16 53-9 19 36-1 21 53-6 23 46-5 25 14-6 26 18-0 26 56-5 27 10-2 26 59-1 26 23-2 26 22-6 •23 57-3 22 7-2 19 52-5 17 13-3 14 9-5 10 41-4 ^ I 20-25 19-29 18-32 17-34 16-36 15-37 14-37 13-37 12-37 11-35 10-34 9-32 8-30 7-27 6-24 5-22 4-19 3-16 2-12 1-OS 0-05 0-98 2-01 3-04 4-07 5-10 6-12 7-15 8-16 9-18 2 27-72 2 18-00 2 9-09 1 59-20 1 48-96 1 38-37 1 27-16 1 16-24 1 4-73 52-94 40-91 28-65 16-18 3-54 9-24 22-14 35-13 48-18 1 1-26 1 14-35 1 27-42 1 40-45 1 53-41 2 6-27 2 19-02 2 31-63 2 44-08 2 56-35 S 8-43 3 20-29 0-372 0-388 0-404 0-419 0-434 0-448 0-461 0-474 0-485 0-496 0-506 0-515 0-523 0-530 0-535 0-539 0-542 0-544 0-545 0-545 0-544 6-541 0-538 0-534 0-528 0-522 0-515 0-507 0-499 0-489 15 48-2 15 48-1 15 47-9 15 47-8 15 47-7 15 47-6 15 47-4 15 47-3 15 47-2 15 47-1 15 47-0 15 46-9 15 46-8 15 16-7 15 46-7 15 46-6 15 46-5 15 46 4 15 46-4 15 46-3 15 46-3 15 46-2 15 46-2 15 46-2 15 46-2 15 16-1 15 46-1 15 46-1 15 46-1 15 46-0 12 6-2 13 3-2 14 0-5 14 5e-9 15 51-5 16 44-2 17 35-6 18 26-2 19 17-0 20 8-7 21 1-7 21 56-0 22 51-1 23 45-9 39-3 1 30-4 2 18-8 3 4-6 3 48-2 4 30-3 5 11-7 5 53-3 6 36-0 7 20-6 8 8-0 8 58-7 9 52-7 10 49-4 11 47-6 _ 00 ifl to !0 00 00 J-00«o fcctc ^<1 XIII. JULY, 1882. ^ § AT APPARENT Equation 3 ^S> 1 NOON of Time to O X 1 •£ THE SUN'S be added 1 .2 OPh >> >> to Apparent .s W-T3 e. Apparent Var. ^00JO>Cip p Declination. in I hour. Time. > ^^ ^«-" ■ J505-Hgq(M J iccccoi // m s s ' // h m Sat. 1 N23 6 48-9 10-19 3 31-91 0-479 15 46-0 12 45-9 .... ... Sun. 2 23 2 32-2 11-20 3 43-28 0-468 15 46-0 13 42-9 i i Mon. 3 22 57 51-4 12-20 3 54-37 0-456 15 46-0 14 38-1 .... . . . Tues. 1 22 52 46-5 13-20 4 5-18 0-444 15 46-0 15 31-4 ■ ' * • • • . Wed. 5 22 47 17-6 14-20 4 15-68 0-431 15 46-0 16 23-3 Thur. 6 22 41 24-9 15-19 4 25-86 0-417 15 46-0 17 14-6 .... Frid. 7 22 35 8-5 16-17 4 35-71 0-403 li 46-1 18 6-0 w • ■ • - Sat. 8 22 28 28-6 17-15 4 45-20 0-388 15 46-1 18 58-2 W Sun. 9 22 21 25-3 18-12 4 54-32 0-372 15 46-1 19 51-3 E-i !:. -S • • • Mon. 10 22 13 58-8 19-09 5 3-06 0-356 15 46-1 20 45-2 Eq ^ --t • • • • Tues. 11 22 6 9-2 20-04 5 11-39 0-338 15 46-1 21 39-2 O Quar Moon Qua, Moon Wed. 12 21 57 56-8 20-99 5 19-29 0-m 15 46-2 22 32-3 M Thur. 13 21 49 21-8 21-93 5 26-75 0-301 15 46-2 23 23-7 w -III Frid. U 21 40 24-4 22-85 5 33-74 0-281 15 46 3 Sat. 15 21 31 4-9 23-77 5 40-24 0-260 15 46-3 12-9 a3 P<*S Sun. 16 21 21 23-3 24-69 5 46-24 0-239 15 46-4 59-6 ^2.^^ ^<^ Mon. 17 21 11 20-0 25-59 26-48 5 51-72 0-217 0-195 15.46-4 1 44-1 Tues. 18 21 55-2 5 56-67 15 46-5 2 26-8 ~~ Wed. 19 20 50 9-1 27-36 6 1-06 0-171 15 46-6 3 8-4 Thur. 20 20 39 1-9 28-23 6 4-89 0-148 15 46-7 3 49-7 '^:!\^^ "2S3 Frid. 21 20 27 33-9 29-09 6 8-16 0-124 15 46-7 4 31-5 >> >> Sat. 22 20 15 45-4 29-94 6 10-84 0-099 15 .46-8 5 14-7 1— 1 » » » ,—(.. ^ fl •> •■ - p3 ' - Sun. 23 20 3 36-6 30-79 6 12-93 0-075 15 46-9 6 0-0 ^ t-s Mon. 24 19 51 7-7 31-62 6 14-43 0-050 15 47-0 6 48-1 Tues. 25 19 38 190 32-43 6 15-33 0-0-25 15 47-1 7 39-4 Wed. 26 19 25 10-9 33-24 6 15-62 0-000 15 47-2 8 33-9 Thur. 27 19 11 43-5 34-04 6 15-31 0-026 15 47-3 9 30-9 Frid. 28 18 57 57-1 34-82 6 14-38 0-051 15 47-4 10 29-3 Sat. 29 18 43 52-0 35-60 6 12-84 0-077 15 47-6 11 27-6 Sun. 30 18 29 28-4 36-36 6 10-69 0-102 15 47-7 12 24-9 Mon. 31 18 14 46-6 37-11 6 7-93 0-127 15 47-8 13 20-7 AUGUST, 1882. Tues. 1 N17 59 46-9 37-86 6 4-57 0-152 15 47-9 14 15-0 Wed. 2 17 44 29-5 38-59 6 0-62 0-177 15 48-1 15 8-4 opoo^ I^hur. 3 17 28 54-6 39-31 5 56-07 0-202 15 48-2 16 1-3 C CO o-* oo Frid. 4 17 13 2-5 40-02 5 50-93 0-226 15 48-3 16 54-4 r;«D«*20» -^SS Sat. 5 16 56 53-6 40-71 5 45-22 0-250 15 48-4 17 48-0 1— 1 i-t C>)C4 Sim. 6 16 40 28-2 41-40 5 38-94 0-274 15 48-6 18 41-9 .... Mon. 7 16 23 46-5 42-07 5 32-09 0-297 15 48-7 19 35-6 .... Tues. 8 16 6 48-8 42-73 5 24-67 0-321 15 48-9 20 28-6 i Wed. 9 15 49 35-5 43-37 5 16-68 0-345 15 49-0 21 20-0 . . Thur. 10 15 32 7-0 44-00 5 8-13 0-368 15 49-2 22 9-3 .... ' Frid. 11 15 14 23-5 44-62 4 59-02 0-391 15 49-3 22 56-4 ^ Sat. 12 14 56 25-3 45-22 4 49-36 0-414 15 49-5 23 41-4 : ! : : Sun. 13 14 38 12-9 45-81 4 39-15 0-437 15 49-7 * s w w Mon. U 14 19 46-4 46-39 4 28-38 0-460 15 49-8 24-6 Tues. 15 14 1 6-3 46-95 4 17-07 0-482 15 50-0 1 6-6 l=!"Hrt Wed. 16 13 42 12-8 47-50 4 5-23 0-504 15 50-2 1 48-0 rC^ Thur. 17 13 23 6-3 48-04 3 52-86 0-526 15 50-4 2 29-5 o S^g Frid. 18 13 3 47-1 48-56 3 39-97 0-548 15 50-6 3 11-9 w l.l Sat. 19 12 44 15-6 49-06 3 26-58 0-569 15 50-8 3 55-8 w ll Sun. 20 12 24 32-0 49-56 3 12-68 0-589 15 51-0 4 41-9 Mon. 21 12 4 36-7 50-04 2 58-30 0-609 15 51-2 5 30-6 Tues. 22 11 44 30-0 50-51 2 43-45 0-628 15 51-4 6 22-2 Wed. 23 11 24 12-2 50-96 2 28-14 0-647 15 51-6 7 16-4 Thur. 21 11 3 43-7 51-41 2 12-37 0-666 15 51-8 8 12-6 "^^^^ 2§5 Frid. 25 10 43 4-7 51-84 1 56-16 0-684 15 52-0 9 9-9 Sat. 26 10 2i 15-6 52-25 1 39-53 0-701 15 52-2 10 7-2 to M SU71. 27 10 1 16-7 52-65 1 22-50 0-718 15 52-5 11 3-9 §1 "" - " S) .. Mon. 28 9 40 8-2 53-05 1 5-08 0-733 15 52-7 11 59-7 S ' ' " E3 " Tues, 29 9 18 50-5 53-42 47-30 0-748 15 52-9 12 54-9 < -< Wed. 30 8 57 23-9 53-79 29-18 0-762 15 53-1 13 49-9 Thur. 31 8 35 48-5 54-15 10-73 0-775 15 53-3 14 44-9 XIV SEPTEMBER, 1882. ■i ■S AT APPARENT Equation s ^i 4) § NOON of Time tc , w e .2 5^ i 1 THE SUN'S be 1 2^ subt. from "V r y '^ o it o Apparent Var. Apparent n' i Q Q Declination. in I hour Time. > JS»HO^t^ J^iHt- / // /, m s s ' // h m Frid. 1 N 8 14 4-8 54-49 8-01 0-787 15 53-6 15 40-3 : : : : • .' Sat. 2 7 52 13-0 54-82 27-03 0-798 15 53-8 16 35-7 . Sun. 3 7 30 13-4 55-14 46-31 0-808 15 54-0 17 30-8 52; Mon. 4 7 8 6-5 55-44 1 5-82 0-818 15 54-3 18 21-8 : .- : : • • Tues. 5 6 45 52-4 55-73 1 25-56 0-827 15 54-5 19 17-0 Wed. 6 6 23 31-6 56-00 1 45-50 0-835 15 54-7 20 6-9 r- . S Thur. 7 6 1 4-4 56-26 2 5-63 0-842 15 55-0 20 54-5 W Quarti Moon. ' Quart Moon • • Frid. 8 5 38 31-1 56-51 2 25-94 0-849 15 55-2 21 39-8 w Sat. 9 5 15 52-1 56-74 2 46-40 0-856 15 55-5 22 23-3 H © Sun. 10 4 53 7-7 56-95 3 7-01 0-861 15 55-7 23 5-6 fe Mon. 11 4 30 18-3 57-16 3 27-74 0-866 15 55-9 23 47.1 "^^?»=:i §^.5? Tues. 12 4 7 24-2 57-35 3 48-58 0-870 15 56-2 w ^P Wed. 13 3 44 25-7 57-52 4 9-52 0-874 15 56-5 28-7 Ui <1?H Thur. 11 3 21 23-2 57-68 4 30-53 0-876 15 56-7 1 10-8 m Frid. 15 2 58 17-1 57-82 4 51-59 0-879 15 57-0 1 54-2 < — Sat. 16 2 35 7-7 57-95 5 12-70 0-880 15 57-2 2 39-3 W fVI to Sun. 17 2 11 55-3 58-07 5 33-^3 0-881 15 57-5 3 26-6 ^ ^s?g^ ss Mon. 18 1 48 40-2 58-17 5 54-97 0-881 15 57-8 4 16-3 u u Tues. 19 1 25 22-9 58-26 6 16-10 0-880 15 58-1 5 8-1 %. ^ Wed. 20 1 2 3-7 58-34 6 37-19 0-878 15 58-3 6 1-8 £ ► .. « Thur. 21 38 42-8 58-40 6 58-23 0-875 15 58-6 6 56-6 « — - -2 *■ Frid. 22 N 15 20-7 58-44 7 19-20 0-872 15 58-9 7 51-9 §• p< Sat 23 SO 8 2-3 58-47 7 40-09 0-868 15 59-1 8 17-1 m JB Sun. 24 31 25-9 58-49 8 0-87 0-863 15 59-4 9 42-2 Mon. 25 54 49-7 58-49 8 21-52 0-857 15 59-7 10 37-2 Tues. 26 1 18 13-5 58-49 8 42-01 0-850 16 0-0 11 32-5 Wed. 27 1 41 37-0 58-46 9 2-31 0-841 16 0-2 12 28-4 Thur. 28 2 4 59-8 58-43 9 22-10 0-832 16 0-5 13 25-2 Frid. 29 2 28 21-6 58-38 9 42-25 0-822 16 0-8 14 22-6 Sat. 30 2 51 42-1 58-32 10 1-84 0-810 16 1-1 15 19-9 OCTOBER, 1882. Sun. 1 S 3 15 0-9 58-24 10 21-14 0-798 16 1-3 16 16-2 Mon. 2 3 38 17-7 58-15 10 40-13 0-784 16 1-6 17 10-6 -♦*-*»C50 Tues. 3 4 1 32-2 58-05 10 58-79 0-770 16 1-9 18 2-4 '}^'^7X?X Wed. 4 4 24 43-9 57-93 11 17-10 0-755 16 2-1 18 51-3 r"Mrr\ f^J j5W5t^ Thur. 5 4 47 52-6 57-79 11 35-03 0-739 1 16 2-4 19 37-6 -'.HrHF.* Frid. 6 5 10 57-8 57-64 11 52-58 0-723 16 2-7 20 21-7 Sat. 7 5 33 59-1 57-47 12 9-73 0-706 16 3-0 21 4-2 Sun. 8 5 56 56-2 57-28 12 26-45 0-687 16 3-2 21 45-9 Mon. 9 6 19 48-6 57-08 12 42-72 0-669 16 3-5 22 27-4 ^* Tues. 10 6 42 36-1 56-87 12 58-54 1 0-649 1 16 3-8 23 9-5 Wed. 11 7 5 18-2 56-63 13 13-88 ' 0-629 16 4-1 23 52-7 § Thur. 12 7 27 51-5 56-39 ]3 28-73 0-608 16 4-3 Frid. 13 7 50 24-7 56-12 13 43-07 0-587 16 4-6 37-6 H .- • ^ • Sat. 11 8 12 48-4 55-84 13 56-89 0-564 16 4-9 1 24-5 w s ^ Sun. 15 8 35 5-1 55-54 14 10-16 0-541 16 5-2 2 13-5 C-i IScrt Mon. 16 8 57 14-5 55-23 14 22-88 0-518 16 5-4 3 4-5 fe l§l§ Tues. 17 9 19 16-2 54-90 14 35-03 0-494 16 5-7 3 57-0 ^^?l ■^^S^ © Wed. 18 9 41 9-7 54-55 14 46-60 0-470 16 6-0 4 50-2 in Sa Thur. 19 10 2 54-7 54-19 14 57-57 0-444 16 6-3 5 J3-7 1 Frid. 20 10 24 30-9 53-81 15 7-93 0-419 16 6-5 6 36-9 CO 5;ls;s Sat. 21 10 45 57-7 53-41 15 17-67 0-393 16 6-8 7 29-9 < Sun. 22 11 7 14-8 53-00 15 26-77 0-266 16 7-1 8 22-8 W , Mon. 23 11 28 21-8 52-57 15 35-22 0-?38 16 7-4 9 16-2 ew Tues. 24 11 49 18-4 52-13 15 42-99 0-309 16 7-6 10 10-6 ec--j2«S «=^;:3 Wed. 25 12 10 4-1 51-67 15 50-06 0-280 16 7-9 11 6-4 rH i-H > a >, Apparent Apparent i ^ S'S Q ft Dechnation. I hour. Time. > ^% ■c«S§3 -^SS o ' n // m s s h m Wed. 1 S 14 29 49-2 48-01 16 18-56 0-054 16 9-7 17 32-4 ; : . . : : Thur. 2 14 48 54-4 47-42 16 19-45 0-020 16 9-9 18 17-9 . P'rid. 3 15 7 45-3 46-81 16 19-52 0-014 16 10-1 19 1-3 g .... . Sat. 4 15 26 21-4 46-19 16 18-76 0-049 16 10-4 19 43-3 8 • • - • • • Sun, 5 15 44 42-2 45-54 16 17-15 0-085 16 10-6 20 24-8 b ..s • Mon. 6 16 2 47-4 44-88 16 14-70 0-120 16 10-8 21 6-6 , , Tues. 7 16 20 36-6 44-21 16 11-41 0-155 16 11-1 21 49-4 H ■^rt^ ■ • • Wed. 8 16 38 9-4 43-51 16 7-26 0-191 16 11-3 22 33-9 W «slg Thur. 9 16 55 25-2 42-80 16 2-25 0-226 16 11-5 23 20-5 H ^i!l QJ Frid. 10 17 12 23-8 42-07 15 56-39 0-262 16 11-8 fe Sat. 11 17 29 4-6 41-32 15 49-67 0-298 16 12-0 9-5 O New FuU Srm. 12 17 45 27-4 40-56 15 42-11 0-333 16 12-2 1 0-6 02 <^ Mon. 13 18 1 31-7 39-79 15 33-70 0-368 16 12-4 1 53-3 W Tues. 14 15 18 17 17-1 18 32 43-1 38-99 38-18 15 24-45 15 14-37 0-403 0-437 16 12-7 16 12-9 2 46-8 3 40-2 % Wed. Thur. 16 18 47 49-5 37-35 15 3-46 0-471 16 13-1 4 33-0 £ (M Oto'^ lO—* Frid. 17 19 2 35-7 36-50 14 51-74 0-505 16 13-3 5 24-9 ^SS^o5 - - § :; Tues. 21 19 58 12-1 32-96 13 56-82 0-638 16 14-1 8 52-3 « ^- Wed. 22 20 11 12-2 32-04 13 41-12 0-670 16 14-3 9 47-4 1 1 Thur. 23 20 23 50-0 31-10 13 24-64 0-703 16 14-5 10 44-3 Jz; 525 Frid. 24 20 36 5-2 30-16 13 7-39 0-735 16 14-7 11 42-5 Sat. 25 20 47 57-5 29-19 12 49-37 0-766 16 14-8 12 40-8 Fun, 26 20 59 26-4 28-21 12 30-60 0-797 16 15-0 13 37-7 Mon. 27 21 10 31-7 27-22 12 11-09 0-828 16 15-2 14 32-0 Tues. 28 21 21 13-2 26-22 11 50-85 0-858 16 15-3 15 23-0 Wed. 29 21 31 30-4 25-20 11 29-89 0-887 16 15-5 16 10-8 Thur. 30 21 41 23-0 24-17 11 8-24 0-916 16 15-7 16 55-8 D ECEIV IBE E, 1882. Frid. 1 S 21 50 50-8 23-13 10 45-92 0-944 16 15-8 17 38-9 Sat. 2 21 59 53-4 22-08 10 22-94 0-971 16 15-9 18 20-7 >*'xieor-i Sun. 3 22 8 30-7 21-02 9 59-33 0-997 16 16-1 19 2-3 E ^£3^:3 Mon. 4 22 16 42-2 19-94 9 35-10 1-022 16 16-2 19 44-5 (j " * " "^ ' Thur. 28 23 16 56-8 7-74 1 49-48 1-223 16 18-2 15 32-7 S 81 o p Apparent Decimation. Var. in r hour. ^oS:;SS?^ J3 05t- o , ,/ II m s s , n h m : : Mon. 1 3 23 50-0 12-39 3 45-10 1.182 16 18-2 18 21-8 Tues. 2 22 55 38-9 13-53 4 13-32 1.169 16 18-2 19 6.0 Wed. 3 22 50 0-4 14-67 4 41-20 1.154 16 18-2 19 52-4 i - '. 1 Thur. i 22 43 54-6 15-81 5 8-72 1-139 16 18-2 20 41-5 Frid. 5 22 37 21-7 16-93 5 35-85 1-121 16 18-1 21 3:^-4 Sat. 6 22 30 21-9 18 05 6 2-55 1-103 16 18-1 22 27-5 r^ : . Sun. 7 22 22 55-4 19-16 6 28-80 1-083 16 181 23 23-0 liX'^ Mon. 8 22 15 2-4 20-25 6 54-55 1-062 16 18-1 Tues. 9 22 6 43-3 21-34 7 19-78 1-040 16 18-0 18-8 I Wed. 10 21 57 58-2 22-41 7 44-46 1-016 16 18-0 1 14-0 00 Thur. 11 21 48 47-4 23-48 8 8-56 0-991 16 17-9 2 7-9 Frid. 12 21 39 11-3 21-53 8 3205 0-965 16 17-9 3 0-6 s III3I ^ Sat. 13 21 29 10-1 25-57 8 54-90 0-939 16 17-8 3 52-5 Sun. 14 21 18 44-0 26-60 9 17-10 0-911 16 17 8 4 44 2 ^< Mon. 15 21 7 53-3 27-61 9 38-61 0-882 16 17-7 5 36-3 Tues. 16 20 58 38-5 28-61 9 59-42 0-852 16 17-6 6 29-5 - Wed. 17 20 44 59-8 29-60 10 19-52 0-823 16 17-6 7 23-8 Thur. 18 20 32 57-5 30-58 10 38-90 0-792 16 17-5 8 19-1 -^•"ISS^^ S85 Frid. 19 20 20 31-9 31-54 10 57-53 0-760 16 17-4 9 14-6 >, § Sat. 20 20 7 43-5 32-49 11 15-40 0-729 16 17-3 10 9-3 ^3 Sun. 21 19 54 32-5 33-42 11 32-51 0-697 16 17-2 11 2-3 7i t t t " 53 ' Mon. 22 19 40 59-2 34-34 11 48-85 0-665 16 17-1 11 52-9 i Tues. 23 19 27 4-0 35-25 12 4-41 0-632 16 17-0 12 40-9 ^ Wed. 21 19 12 47-3 36-14 12 19-18 0-599 16 16-9 13 26-5 Thur. 25 18 58 9-5 37-01 12 33-16 0-566 16 16-8 14 10-3 Frid. 26 18 43 10-9 37-87 12 46-34 0-533 16 16-7 14 52-7 Sat. 27 18 27 51-8 38-71 12 58-72 0-499 16 16-5 15 34-7 Sun. 28 18 12 12-6 39-54 13 10-31 0-466 16 16-4 16 16-9 Mon. 29 17 56 13-7 40-36 13 21-09 0-4:^3 16 16-3 17 0-0 Tues. 30 17 39 55-1 41-15 13 31-07 0-399 10 16-1 17 44-8 Wed. 31 17 23 18-4 41-93 13 40-25 0-366 16 16-0 18 31-8 F] iBEU AE Y, 18 83. Thur. 1 S17 6 22-8 42-69 13 48-63 333 16 15-8 19 21-3 Frid. 2 16 49 9-1 43-44 13 56-21 0-299 16 15-7 20 13-3 Sat. 3 16 31 37-7 44-17 14 2-98 0-266 16 15-5 21 7-4 ""t-cnlii Sun. 4 16 13 49-0 44-88 14 8-96 0-232 16 15-3 22 2-8 -c^Sa ^"^^ Mon. 5 15 55 43-5 45-57 14 14-13 C-199 16 15-2 22 58-7 Tues. 6 15 37 21-6 46 24 14 18-50 0-165 16 15-0 23 54-2 : : : • : Wed. 7 15 18 43-8 46-90 14 22-07 0-132 16 14-8 Thur. 8 14 59 50-5 47-54 14 24-84 0-099 16 14-7 49-1 . Frid. 9 14 40 42-0 48-16 14 26-80 0-065 16 14-5 1 43-2 ^ : : : Sat. 10 14 21 19-0 48-76 14 27-96 0-032 16 14-3 2 36-9 8 Sun. 11 14 1 41-7 49-34 14 28-34 0-001 16 14-1 3 30-8 Mon. 12 13 41 50-6 49-91 14 27-93 0-033 16 13-9 4 25-1 Tues. 13 13 21 46T 50-46 14 26-74 0-066 16 13-8 5 20-1 w t ■ Wed. 14 13 1 28-7 50-99 14 24-78 0-097 16 13-6 6 15-4 § §!§ Thur. 15 12 40 587 51-50 14 22-07 0-129 16 13-4 7 10-7 ' Frid. 16 12 20 16-6 52-00 14 18-61 0-159 16 13-2 8 5-0 Sat. 17 11 59 22-8 5^48 14 14-42 0-180 16 13-0 8 57-7 5 Sun. 18 11 38 17-7 52-94 14 9-52 0-219 16 12-8 9 48-3 •Jj Mon. 19 11 17 1-7 53-39 14 3-91 0-248 16 12-6 10 36-5 W «^r^ ^ P< Tues. 20 10 55 35-1 53-82 13 57-62 0-276 16 12-3 11 22-4 m ^«ifM P^< Wed. 21 10 33 58-5 54-23 13 50-66 0-304 16 12-1 12 6-6 < Thur. 22 10 12 12-1 54-63 13 43-05 0-330 16 11-9 12 49-4 a Frid. 23 9 50 16-3 55-01 13 34-82 0-356 16 11-7 13 31-6 fu Sat. 24 9 28 11-6 55-37 13 25-97 0-381 16 11-4 14 13-7 '^^^ =^SJ Sun. 25 9 5 58-4 55-72 13 16-53 0-405 16 11-2 14 56 4 1 t: Mon. 26 8 43 36-9 56-06 13 6-53 0-428 16 11-0 15 403 Tues. 27 8 21 7-6 56-38 12 55-97 0-451 16 10-7 16 25-9 1 § . Wed. 28 7 68 30-9 56-68 12 44-89 0-472 16 10-5 17 13-4 1 XIX. MARCH, 1883. Thuv. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. AT APPARENT NOON. THE SUN'S Apparent Declination. Var- in I hour, Equation ^ of Time to be added i 1 E .2 to c O subt. from Apparent 3 C/3 Time. > OCL, si S 7 35 47-1 7 12 56-8 6 50 0-2 6 26 57 -8 6 3 49-9 5 40 37-0 5 17 19-6 4 53 57-9 4 30 32-5 4 7 3-6 3 43 31-8 3 19 57-4 2 56 20-8 2 32 42-3 2 9 2-4 1 45 21-4 1 21 39-7 57 57-6 34 15-6 S 10 33-9 NO 13 7-1 36 47-1 1 25-7 1 24 2-5 1 47 37-3 2 11 9-8 2 34 39-5 2 58 6-1 3 21 29-4 3 44 48-9 4 8 4-3 56-96 57-23 57-48 57-71 57-93 58-13 58-31 58-48 58-63 58-76 58-88 58-98 59-06 59-13 59-19 59-22 59-25 59-25 59-24 59-22 59-19 59-14 59-07 58-99 58-90 58-80 58-67 58-54 58-39 58-23 68-05 12 33-30 0-493 12 21-21 i 0-513 12 8-66 ' 0-532 11 55-65 i 0-551 11 42-20 0-569 11 28-33 I 0-586 11 14-06 1 0-603 10 59-40 0-619 10 44-36 0-634 10 28-96 0-649 10 13-22 0-663 9 57-16 0-676 9 40-79 0-688 9 24-12 0-700 9 7-19 0-711 8 50-00 0-721 8 32-58 0-730 8 14-94 0-739 7 57-11 0-746 7 39-12 0-753 7 20-98 0-758 7 2-72 0-763 6 44-36 0-766 6 25-93 0-769 6 7-45 0-771 5 48-94 0-771 5 30-43 0-771 5 11-94 0-709 4 53-50 0-767 4 35-12 0-764 4 16-83 0-760 16 10-2 16 10-0 16 9-7 16 9-5 16 9-2 16 9-0 16 8-7 16 8-4 16 8-2 16 7-9 16 7-7 16 7-4 16 6-6 16 6-4 16 6-1 16 5-8 16 5-6 16 5-3 16 5-0 16 4-8 16 4-5 16 4-2 16 3-9 16 3-7 16 3-4 16 3-1 16 2-8 16 2-5 16 2-2 h m 18 3-1 18 54-7 19 48-0 20 42-2 21 37-0 22 31-8 23 26-7 21 1 17-2 2 13-4 3 10-4 4 7-7 5 4-8 6 0-6 6 54-4 7 45-7 8 34-3 9 20-5 10 4-8 10 47-7 11 29-9 12 11-9 12 54 5 13 38-0 14 22-9 15 9-6 15 57-9 16 47*9 17 39-2 18 313 Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. I^hur. Frid. Sat. Sun Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Frid. Sat. Sttn. Mon. APEIL, 1883. N 4 4 5 5 31 15-3 54 21-5 17 22-5 40 18-0 3 7-6 25 51-0 48 27-8 10 57-6 33 20-1 55 34-9 17 41-7 39 40-1 1 29 8 23 10-5 44 41-7 6 3-2 27 14-6 48 15-7 9 6-0 29 45-4 50 13-4 10 29-8 30 34-2 50 26-4 10 6-0 29 32-7 48 46-2 7 46-2 26 32-3 45 4-3 57-86 57-65 I 57-42 ! 57-19 56-94 i 56-67 1 56-39 I 56-«9 I 55-78 I 55-45 55-11 54-75 54-38 54-00 53-60 53-19 52-76 62-32 51-87 51-40 50-92 50-43 49-93 49-41 48-88 48-34 47-78 47-21 46-63 46-03 3 68-64 3 40-58 3 22-66 3 4-90 2 47-31 2 29-92 2 12-73 1 55-76 1 39-03 1 22-54 1 6-32 50-37 34 70 19-33 4-28 10-44 24-81 38-82 52-45 1 5-67 1 18-48 1 30-85 1 42-78 1 54-24 2 5-22 2 15-70 2 25-67 2 35-13 2 44-06 2 52-45 0-755 0-750 0-743 0-736 0-729 0-720 0-712 0-702 0-692 0-681 0-670 0-659 0-647 0-634 0-621 0-606 0-591 0-576 0-559 0-542 0-525 0-506 0-487 0-467 0-447 0-426 0-405 0-383 0-361 0-338 19 23-9 20 16-8 21 10-1 22 3-9 22 58-8 23 55-0 16 0-0 62-8 15 59-7 1 51-9 15 59-5 2 51-3 15 59-2 3 50-0 15 58-9 4 46-6 15 58 7 5 40-3 15 58-4 6S0-7 15 58-1 7 18-2 15 57-9 8 3-3 15 57-6 8 46-5 15 57-4 9 28-7 15 57-1 10 10-6 15 56-9 10 52-9 15 56 6 11 36-1 15 56-3 12 20-7 15 56-1 13 7-0 15 55-8 13 55-0 15 55-6 14 44-6 15 55-3 15 35-2 15 55-1 16 26-4 15 54-8 17 17-7 15 64-6 18 8-9 15 54-3 19 0-1 E «0 'H Ah •J*< A< cqcoeo "M tCbO ^o o ti ^<3 i-i JUNE, 1883. Frid. 1 Sat. 2 Stm. 3 Mon. 4 Tues. 5 Wed. 6 Thur. 7 Frid. 8 Sat. 9 Sun. 10 Mon. 11 Tues. 12 Wed. 13 Thur. 14 Frid. 15 Sat. 16 Sun. 17 Mon. 18 Tues. 19 Wed. 20 Thur. 21 Frid. 22 Sat. 23 Sun. 24 Mon. 25 Tues. 26 Wed. 27 Thur. 28 Frid. 29 Sat. 30 N22 22 2 57-1 20-49 2 29-04 0-374 15 48-2 10 57-3 19-52 2 19-85 0-391 15 48-1 18 34-2 18-55 2 10-25 0-408 15 47-9 25 47-8 17-58 2 0-27 0-423 15 47-8 32 37-9 16-60 1 49-93 0-438 15 47-7 39 4-4 15-61 1 39-25 0-451 15 47-5 45 7-1 14-61 1 28-27 0-463 15 47*4 50 45-8 13-61 1 17-01 0-475 15 47-3 56 0-5 12-61 1 5-49 0-485 15 47-2 51-0 11-60 53-74 0-494 15 47-1 5 17-3 10-59 41-77 0-502 15 47-0 9 19-1 9-57 29-62 0-510 15 46-9 12 56-5 8-55 17-29 0-517 15 4t)-9 16 9-3 7-52 4-82 0-522 15 46-8 18 57-5 6-49 7-78 0-527 15 46-7 21 21-0 5-46 20-48 0-531 15 46-6 23 19-8 4-44 33-27 0-534 15 40-6 24 53-9 3-40 46-13 0-537 15 46-5 26 3-2 2-37 59-03 0-53S 15 46-4 26 47-7 1-34 1 11-95 0-539 15 46*4 27 7-4 0-31 1 24-88 0-539 15 46-3 27 2-4 0-73 1 37-80 0-537 15 46-3 28 32-5 1-76 1 50-67 0-535 15 46-2 25 37-9 2-79 ^ 3-49 0-532 15 46-2 24 18-4 3-83 2 16-22 0-529 15 46-1 22 34-2 4-86 2 28-86 0-524 15 46-1 20 25-3 5-89 2 41-38 0-519 15 46-1 17 51-7 6-91 2 53-77 0-513 15 46-0 14 53-5 7-93 3 5-99 0-505 15 d6-0 11 30-9 8-95 3 18-03 0-497 15 46-0 21 16-8 22 14-5 23 14-0 «n«o«ooo 14-0 12-9 2-1 51-6 38-1 12-3 6 5-1 6 47-3 7 29-8 8 13-4 8 58-5 9 45-6 10 34-7 11 25-6 12 17*7 13 10*2 14 2-3 14 53-7 15 44-4 16 34-6 17 25-1 18 16-4 19 9-4 20 4-4 21 1-4 O • O w * w ■< ©■*: ^ e ■<*(MOt- a a o pop bCbtjtD '3S •-9 XXI. JULY, 1888. -i .a AT APPARENT Equation ^?; ^ •£ o NOON THE SUN'S of Time to be added to Apparent 1 1 .i3 -a .i. H S3 £■5 ^OMOS-d o Apparent Var. Q P Declination. in I hour. Time. > ^:^ J5 2 '^=4 JiVii-t 1 II II m s s ' II h m Sun. 1 N23 7 43-8 9-97 3 29-87 0-489 15 46-0 21 59-7 '• • Mon. 2 23 3 32-5 10-98 3 41-48 0-478 15 46-0 22 58-2 . Tues. 3 22 58 57-0 11-98 3 52-82 0-467 15 46-0 23 55-3 g Wed. 4 22 53 57-4 12-98 4 3-88 0-454 15 46-0 i Thur. 5 22 48 34 13-97 4 14-62 0-441 15 46-0 50-0 Frid. 6 22 42 46-8 14-96 4 25-03 0-426 15 46-0 1 41-5 Sat. 7 22 36 35-9 15-94 4 35-07 0-410 15 46-0 2 30-0 w • .* Sun. 8 22 30 1-6 16-91 4 44-73 0-394 15 46-0 3 15-9 w Mon. 9 22 23 4-0 17-88 4 53-98 0-376 15 46-1 3 59-9 Eh • h . ;;.. . Tues. 10 22 15 43-2 18-85 5 2-80 0-359 15 46-1 4 42-7 ^ •| -s Wed. 11 22 7 59-4 19-80 5 11-19 0-340 15 46-1 5 25-3 S « fl fe Tliur. 12 21 59 52-8 20-75 5 19-12 0-320 15 46-2 6 8-4 zn Frid. 13 21 51 23-6 21-68 5 26-57 0-300 15 46-2 6 52-6 W ^^^^ s % Sat. 14 21 42 32-0 22-61 5 33-54 0-280 15 46 3 7 38-6 cc ©•5 s « If Sun. 15 21 33 18-2 23-53 5 40-01 0-259 15 46-3 8 26-5 < Mon. 16 21 23 42-4 24-44 5 45-97 0-237 15 46-4 9 16-6 j^f^fc.^ <^ Tues. Wed. 17 18 21 13 44-8 21 3 25-6 25-35 26-25 5 51-40 5 56-31 0-215 0-193 15 46-5 10 8-4 15 46-5 11 1-2 Thur. 19 20 52 45-0 27-13 6 0-67 0-170 15 46-6 11 54-4 Frid. 20 20 41 43-3 28-00 6 4-48 0-U7 15 46-7 12 47-3 -^^i^s^ S5S Sat. 21 20 30 20-8 28-87 6 7-74 0-124 15 46-8 13 39-5 >, >, Sun. 22 20 18 37-5 '29-73 6 10-44 0-101 15 46-8 14 31-0 3 •• * •• •g : Mon. 23 20 6 33-8 30-58 6 12-58 0-078 15 46-9 15 22-3 i-j ^ Tues. 24 19 54 9-8 31-42 6 14-16 0-054 15 47-0 16 13-9 Wed. 25 19 41 25-8 32-24 6 15-17 0-030 15 47-1 17 6-4 Thur. 26 19 28 22-1 33-06 6 15-61 O-O06 15 47-2 18 0-3 Frid. 27 19 14 59-0 33-86 6 15-48 0-017 15 47-3 18 55-6 Sat. 28 19 1 16-6 34-66 6 14-78 0-041 15 47-4 19 52-2 Sun. 29 18 47 15-4 35-44 6 13-51 0-065 15 47'5 20 49-2 Mon. 30 18 32 55-5 36-21 6 11-65 0-090 15 47-6 21 45-6 Tues. 31 18 18 17"3 36-96 6 9-20 0-115 15 47-7 22 40-2 AUGUST, 1883. Wed. 1 N18 3 21-2 37-71 6 6-15 0-139 15 47-8 23 32-4 Thur. 2 17 48 7-3 38-44 6 2-51 0-164 15 48-0 * * m 26-2 29 3 53 9 31.9 Frid. 3 17 32 36-1 39-16 5 58-27 0-190 15 48-1 21-9 Sat. 4 17 16 47-8 39-86 5 53-41 0-215 15 48-2 1 9-0 jSMMOt^ .fJC^O) Sim. 5 17 42-6 40-56 5 47-95 0-240 15 48-4 1 54-0 i-lr-l r-< 0>«tH Mon. 6 16 44 21-0 41-24 5 41-88 0-265 15 48-5 2 37-6 . . Tues. 7 16 27 43-3 41-90 5 35-21 0-291 15 48-7 3 20-5 • • Wed. 8 16 10 49-6 42-56 5 27-93 0-316 15 48-8 4 3-5 ^ Thur. 9 15 53 40-4 43-20 5 20-05 0-341 15 49-0 4 47-1 .... , , Frid. 10 15 36 15-9 43-83 5 11-08 0-365 15 49-1 5 32-0 .... - • Sat. 11 15 18 36-5 44-44 5 2-53 0-389 15 49-3 6 18-6 § Sun. 12 15 42-5 45-05 4 52-89 0-414 15 49-5 7 7-0 I : : : . , Mon. 13 14 42 34-1 45-64 4 42-68 0-437 15 49-6 7 57-4 w Tues. 14 14 24 11-8 46-22 4 31-90 0-461 15 49-8 8 49-2 s |3 ^ Wed. 15 14 5 35-7 46-78 4 20-57 0-483 15 50-0 9 42-1 H Moon t Quart Moon ; Quart Thur. 16 13 46 46-3 47-33 4 8-70 0-506 15 50-2 10 35-4 fe Frid. 17 13 27 43-7 47-87 3 56-30 0-528 15 50-4 11 28-7 « 03 Sat. 18 13 8 28-3 48-40 3 43-38 0-549 15 50-6 12 21-7 m mSi Sun. 19 12 49 0-5 48-91 3 29-95 0-570 15 50-7 13 14-6 W %t^% g'E! Mon. 20 12 29 20-4 49-42 3 16-04 0-589 15 50-9 14 7-7 "A^^^ p-3 Tues. 21 12 9 28-3 49-91 3 1-66 0-609 15 51-1 15 1-4 Wed. 22 11 49 24-6 50-39 2 4i-83 0-627 15 51-3 15 56-0 Thur. 23 11 29 9-5 50-86 2 31-57 0-614 15 51-5 16 51-7 Frid. 24 11 8 43-4 51-31 2 15-00 0-661 15 51-7 17 48-2 (MOOO-H °°^ Sat. 25 10 48 6-6 51-75 1 59-82 0-678 15 51-9 18 44-8 i-H.-i(M Sun. 26 10 27 19-4 52-18 1 43-36 0-694 15 52-1 19 40-7 ■S » Mon. 27 10 6 22-2 52-59 1 26-53 0-709 15 52-3 20 34-9 Si -^ - -^ a Tues, 28 9 45 15-2 52-99 1 9-33 0-724 15 52-6 21 27-0 pj " " " 5 " Wed. 29 9 23 58-9 53-37 51-79 o-7:« 15 52-8 22 16-6 < < Thur. 30 9 2 33-6 53-74 33-90 0-752 15 53-0 23 3-9 Frid. 31 8 40 59-6 54-09 15-69 0-765 15 53-2 23 49-3 XXII. SEPTEMBER, 1883. ■i ,5 AT APPARENT Equation = Y^i 2 NOON of Time to W 5 5^ ^ .a THE SUN'S be a S .2 OfS (4-1 u-i subt. from '5 r-i 2 Apparent Var. Apparent "6 i-H cci •«*< 10 >ra Q Q Declination. I hour. Time. > s XIM'-OCSOl>. J-500J 1 s / // N 8 19 17-2 54-43 m s 2-84 s 0-778 1 II 15 53-4 h m ■H 1-HrH Sat. : : : : • • • Sun. 2 7 57 26-8 54-76 21-66 0-790 15 53-7 33-3 . Mon. 3 7 35 28-7 55-07 40-77 0-802 15 53-9 1 16-5 ^ , Tues. 4 7 13 23-3 55-37 1 0-15 0-813 15 54-1 1 59-5 • • Wed. 5 6 51 10-9 55-66 1 19-77 0-823 15 54-4 2 12-8 Thiir. 6 6 28 51-8 55-93 1 39-61 0-832 15 54-6 3 27-1 ■1 s • Frid. 7 6 6 26-4 56-19 1 59-73 0-841 15 54-9 4 12-6 W pgl§ Sat. 8 5 43 51-9 56-43 2 20-03 0-850 15 55-1 4 59-6 W Sun. 9 5 21 17-7 ! 56-66 2 40-52 0-857 15 55-4 5 48-2 H %^m~ (B © Mon. 10 4 58 35-2 1 56-88 3 1-18 0-864 15 55-6 6 38-3 ^ O'S Tucs. 11 4 35 47-7 57-08 3 21-98 0-870 15 55-9 7 29-5 ^1=^^^ Wed. 12 4 12 55-6 57-26 3 42-92 0-875 15 56-2 8 21.6 xn «•= s c S ^^ 'J^hur. 13 3 49 59-1 57-44 4 3-98 0-879 15 56-4 9 14-2 W <;k Frid. 14 15 3 26 58-5 3 3 54-2 57-60 57-75 4 25-13 4 46-35 0-883 0-885 15 56-7 15 56-9 10 7-1 11 0-4 < Sat. - ■ Sun. 16 2 40 46-5 57-89 5 7-62 0-887 15 57-2 11 54-4 £ '^^'SS?.^ '"^ Mon. 17 2 17 35-7 58-01 5 28-92 0-887 15 57-5 12 49-3 Tues. 18 1 54 22-0 58-12 5 50-21 0-886 15 57-7 13 45-4 1 1 Wed. 19 1 31 5-8 58-22 6 11-47 0-885 15 58-0 14 42-8 Thur. 20 1 7 47-4 58-30 6 32-67 0-882 15 58-3 15 40-9 s .,..., , s . Frid. 21 44 27-2 58-38 6 53-79 0-878 15 58-5 16 39-0 oj s s J r ^ t Sat. 22 N 21 5-3 58-44 7 14-81 0-873 15 58-8 17 36-2 1 1 Sun. 23 S 2 17-7 58-48 7 35-70 0-868 15 59-1 18 31-4 Mon. 24 25 41-6 58-51 7 56-45 0-861 15 59-3 19 24-1 Tues. 25 49 6-0 58-52 8 17-04 0-854 15 59-6 20 14-0 Wed. 26 1 12 30-5 58-52 8 37-45 0-846 15 59-9 21 1-5 Thur. 27 1 35 54-8 58-50 8 57-66 0-838 16 0-1 21 46-9 Frid. 28 1 59 18-5 58-47 9 17-66 0-829 16 0-4 22 30-8 Sat. 29 2 22 41-3 58-42 9 37-43 0-818 16 0-7 23 13-9 Sun. 30 2 46 2-8 58-36 9 66-94 0-807 16 0-9 23 56-8 OCTOBER, 1883. Mon. 1 s 3 9 22-6 58-28 10 16-18 0-796 16 1-2 ^- ^ Tues. 2 3 32 40-4 58-19 10 35-13 0-783 16 1-5 40-0 OT^'Ooo Wed. 3 3 55 55-7 58-08 10 53-78 0-770 16 1-8 1 23-9 Ecs«222^ Thur. 4 4 19 8-3 57-96 11 12-11 0-756 16 2-0 2 8-9 ,r- ,v, 00 ^ ^ r. to .r> OS Frid. 5 4 42 17-7 57-82 11 30-09 0-742 16 2-3 2 55-2 -N-*--. Sat. 6 5 5 23-7 57-67 11 47-72 0-727 16 2-6 3 42-7 Sun. 7 5 28 25-7 57-50 12 4-97 0-711 16 2-9 4 31-4 : : : : : : : Mon. 8 5 51 23-5 57-31 12 21-83 0-694 16 3-2 5 21-0 Tues. 9 6 14 16-7 57-11 12 38-28 0-676 16 3-4 6 11-2 !^* Wed. 10 6 37 4-8 56-89 12 54-3«) 1 0-658 16 3-7 7 1-9 • * : Thur. 11 6 59 47-6 56-66 13 9-88 1 0-640 16 4-0 7 53-0 Frid. 12 7 22 24-6 56-41 13 25-00 0-620 16 4-3 8 44-7 ^ Sat. 13 7 44 55-5 56-15 13 39-63 0-599 16 4-6 9 37-5 W ri^ Sun. It 8 7 19-9 55-87 13 53-75 0-577 16 4-9 10 31-6 W Mon. 15 8 29 37-4 55-58 14 7-34 0-555 16 5-1 11 27-6 c^ Irtsg Tues. 16 8 51 47-8 55-27 14 20-38 0-531 16 5-4 12 25-6 fa l§i§ Wed. 17 9 13 50-6 51-95 14 32-84 0-507 16 5-7 13 25-3 ^|6?^ III Thur. 18 9 35 45-6 54-62 14 44-70 0-481 16 5-9 14 25-9 f/J •w'^ Frid. 19 9 57 32-3 54-26 14 55-94 0-455 16 6-2 15 25-9 W Cd ^ S Sat. 20 10 19 10-3 53-90 15 6-53 0-428 16 6-5 16 23-9 m <^^^ Sicn. 21 10 40 39-3 53-51 15 16-46 0-400 16 6-7 17 19-0 < Mon. 22 11 1 58-9 53-11 15 25-71 0-.371 16 7-0 18 10-8 ^ Tues. 23 11 23 8-7 52-69 15 31-27 0-.U2 16 7-3 18 59-5 Oh Wed. 24 11 44 8-2 52-26 15 42-12 0-312 16 7-5 19 45-5 =°;2§5^ "js^ Thur. 25 12 4 57-1 51-81 15 49-26 0-282 16 7-8 20 29-7 Frid. 26 12 25 34-9 51-34 15 55-66 0-251 16 8-0 21 12-7 s 1 Sat. 27 12 46 1-2 50-85 16 1-32 0-220 16 8-3 21 55-4 Sun. 28 13 6 15-7 50-35 16 6-23 0-189 16 8-5 22 38-2 Mon 29 13 26 17-9 49-83 16 10-37 0-156 16 8-8 23 21-8 Tues. 30 13 46 7-4 49-29 16 13-73 0-124 16 9-1 * * Wed. 31 14 43-9 48-74 16 16-32 0-091 16 9-3 6-5 xxiri. NOVEMBER, 1883. . Equation ^ ^ z ^ 1 AT APPARENT NOON of Time to be o S o ^ 1 1 THE SUN'S subt. from G O .s .3 Ofi, "s added to J? ^ Apparent Var. Apparent S Si Q fi Dechnation. I hour. Time. > ^^ ^^ _____ £:C^^r.<«> ^C5^ / // // m .s s 1 h m Thur. 1 S14 25 '6'7 4816 16 18-11 0-058 16' 9-6 52-4 • " • • • • J'rid. 2 14 44 15-6 47-57 16 19-11 0-025 16 9-8 1 39-7 . Sat. 3 15 3 10-1 46-96 16 19-31 0-009 16 10-1 2 27-9 '^ .... ^ SU7l. i 15 21 49-9 46-31 16 18-70 0-042 16 10-3 3 16-9 1 IVIon. 5 15 40 14-5 45-70 16 17-28 0-076 16 10-5 4 6-1 Tues. 6 15 58 23-5 45-04 16 15-06 0-110 16 10-8 4 55-4 .2 -b • , Wed. 7 16 16 16-4 44-36 16 12-02 0-144 16 11-0 5 41-8 W - 'Irt Thur. 8 16 33 53-0 43-67 16 8-16 0-178 16 11-3 6 34-3 w SSeo Frid. 9 16 51 12-6 42-96 16 3-48 0-212 16 11-5 7 24-5 H © a) Sat. 10 17 8 15-0 42-23 15 57-98 0-246 IG 11-7 8 16-0 p^ •r o Sun. 11 17 24 59-8 41-49 15 51-65 0-281 16 12-0 9 9-4 o ^=!"S^ Men. 12 17 41 26-5 40-73 15 44-49 0-316 16 12-2 10 5-3 M Tues. 13 17 57 34-8 39-95 15 36-49 0-351 16 12-4 11 3-9 ^ Wed. 14 15 18 13 24-3 18 28 54-6 39-16 38-36 15 27-64 15 17-94 0-386 0-422 16 12-6 16 12-9 12 4-8 13 6-8 % Thur. Frid. 16 18 44 5-4 37-54 15 7-39 0-457 16 13-1 14 8-0 ^ co«o Sat. 17 18 58 56-3 36-70 14 56-00 0-493 16 13-3 15 6-8 di ""^^Is^gJ ss Sun. 18 19 13 26-9 35-85 14 43-75 0-528 16 13-5 16 2-1 §5 o Mon. 19 19 27 36-8 34-98 14 30-66 0-563 16 13-7 16 53-6 $ a Tues. 20 19 41 25-7 34-09 14 K-73 0-598 13 13-8 17 41-9 a . _ i . Wed. 21 19 54 53-2 33-19 14 1-97 0-632 16 14-0 18 27-4 « ' V' « . Thur. 22 20 7 58-9 32-27 13 46-39 0-666 16 14-2 19 11-1 p P Frid. 23 20 20 42-4 31-31 13 30-00 0-700 16 14-4 19 53-9 ^ "A Sat. 24 20 33 3-4 30-40 13 12-81 0-733 16 14-6 20 36-5 Sun. 25 20 45 1-5 29-44 12 54-84 0-765 16 14-7 21 19-7 Man. 26 20 56 36-4 28-46 12 36-09 0-797 16 14-9 22 3-9 Tues. 27 21 7 47-8 27-48 12 16-60 0-828 16 15*1 22 49-5 Wed. 28 21 18 35-3 26-48 11 56-37 0-858 16 15-3 23 36-5 Thur. 29 21 28 58-6 25-46 11 35-43 0-887 16 15-4 -:■;- * Frid. 30 21 38 57-4 24-44 11 13-80 0-915 16 15-6 24-8 DECE]\ IBER, 1883. Sat. 1 S 21 48 31-5 23-40 10 51-51 0-942 16 15-7 1 14-0 Stin. 2 21 57 40-5 22-35 10 28-58 0-968 16 15-9 2 36 OlWTWt-. Mon. 3 22 6 24-1 21-28 10 5-03 0-993 16 16-0 2 53-0 Ssooooooj Tues. 4 22 14 42-0 20-21 9 40-90 1-017 16 16-2 3 42-0 ^ ^^ "•' Wed. 5 22 22 340 19-12 9 16-22 1-040 16 16-3 4 30-6 -^S^Ii^S"-' -C^M Thur. 6 22 29 59.9 18-03 8 51-00 1-061 16 16-5 5 19-2 Frid. 7 22 36 59-5 16-93 8 25-28 1-081 16 16-6 6 8-3 Sat. 8 22 43 32-4 15 81 7 59-09 1-101 16 16-7 6 58-7 Sun. 9 22 49 38-4 14-69 7 32-45 1-119 16 16-8 7 51-2 ^* Mon. 10 22 55 17-4 13-56 7 5-39 1-136 16 17-0 8 46-3 O 1 ; ; ; ; ; Tues. 11 23 29-2 12-42 6 37-94 1-152 16 17-1 9 44-4 o Wed. 12 23 5 13-7 11-28 6 10-11 1-167 16 17-2 10 44-9 g 5:1s: Thur. 13 23 9 30-6 10-13 5 41-93 1-181 16 17-3 11 46-5 s : : Frid. 14 23 13 19-9 8-98 5 13-44 1-193 16 17-4 12 47-6 ffl «flb« Sat. 15 23 16 41-5 7-82 4 44-66 1-205 16 17-5 13 46-2 H sgiB Sun. 16 23 19 35-1 6-65 4 15-61 1-215 16 17-5 14 41-3 o j|o>^ 0) o Mon. 17 23 22 0-7 5-48 3 46-34 1-224 16 17 6 15 32-8 S)§) Tues. 18 23 23 58-2 4-31 3 16-86 1-232 16 17-7 16 20-9 •£^a Wed. 19 23 25 27-5 3-13 2 47-21 1-238 16 17 7 17 6-5 CO l< Thur. 20 23 26 28-0 1-95 2 17-42 1-244 16 17 8 17 50-4 Frid. 21 23 27 1-3 0-78 1 47-52 1-247 16 17-9 18 33-5 < Sat. 22 23 27 5-8 0-40 1 17-55 1-250 16 17-9 19 16-6 W Sun. 23 23 26 41-9 1-59 47-54 1-250 16 18 20 0-3 ^ ^?2SS . ^;^/i^l£r^^t^ y^aaZLe<. ^^Wy^^,'^^<^ ' ( ^^^iiZ 4/^^^*^^ ^Z'^^yi^ A (P^^i^ j/'>nf^^^ ^^^^ ^ ;^6^yi^^C«^Cd^ p{a^ 3> ^ ^>f^ ^ ^/ . ^yfzS:^ ^^^.r^*^/ ^^je.y^ SEarehoti^emen AND IMPORTERS, QUEeW StMkET, AUCKLAND. SILK ST., CRIPPLEGATR Auckland Resident Partners: C. C. MCMILLAN AND FREDK. LARKINS. PACIFIC MAIL STEAMSHIP C°' [Established 1852.] CAPITAL - - - £4,000,000. TTNITED STATES AND ROYAL MAIL STEAMERS, ^ under contract with the New SOUTH Wales and New Zealand Governments. "ZEALANDIA," 3,000 tons, H. Chevalier, Commander. *'CITY OF NEW YORK," 3,500 tons, W. B. Cobb, Commander. "AUSTRALIA," 3,000 tons, W. Cargill, Commander, " CITY OF SYDNEY," 3,500 tons, H. Dearborn, Commander. Via P.M.S.S. Co. to San Francisco (via Honolulu), in connection with all Overland Railways in the United States and Canada to New York or any part of the American Continent, and all lines of Steamers crossing the Atlantic, for Great Britain and Europe. Leaving Auckland every fourth Tuesday. The passage to San Francisco is made in 2H days ; overland to New York, 7 days ; and Atlantic passage (by Steamer taking Mails) to Liverpool, in 8^ days ; total, 37 days. First Class. — Through to England, from £68. Upper Saloon Berth, £2 extra. Sleeping Car, Overland, £4 lis. 8d. (double berths). Steerage through to England, «£37 IDs. First Class Tickets, good for nine months, should passengers wish to stop at Honolulu, or any American cities, m route. Return Tickets to Sydney, Honolulu, or San Francisco, good for six months, issued at twenty per cent, discount on the Saloon Fare. - -The Steamers of this Line, built in Watertight Compartments, are the strongest, largest, and fastest in the Pacific. The Saloons are large, luxuriously furnished, specially well lighted and ventilated, and take up the whole width of the ship amidships ; State Rooms on saloon, spar, and hurricane decks. The principal ones are mid- ships, and forward of the engines, where least noise and motion are felt, and all are replete with every comfort, having double berths, and all latest improvements. Ladies' Cabins and Bath Rooms. Gentlemen's Smoking and Bath Rooms, Barber's Shop, Piano, Library, etc., are provided. Average Temperature, New Zealand to San Francisco, 66 deg.; highest, 88 deg. in Saloon, while crossing the Equator. ^ CHARLES CLARK & CO. - - - - LONDON. GILCHRIST, WATT & CO. - - - - SYDNEY. S. A. BEARDSLEY - - - AUCKLAND. E. & A. ISAACS, JKerchants, (Auctioneers, AND SHIPPING AGENTS Vr Importers of every description of BRITISH, AMERICAN, AND CONTINENTAL MERCHANDIZE. oeeeoooeooe AUCKLAND, N.Z. Bonded Goods Stored at Lowest Rates. SOUTH BRITISH o:p isT^ETW z-jsij^Xjj^isrjo. In 50,000 Shares of £20 each. Unlimited Liability of Large Body of Shareholders, Resident throughout the Coloay. Paid-up Capital £100,000. Reserve Fund £70,000. BANKERS COLONIAL BANK OF NEW ZEALAND. SOLICITORS MESSRS. JACKSON & RUSSELL. HEAD OFFICE - - AUCKLAND. FIRE AND MARINE Insurance effected at Lowest Current Rates. Claims payable at any of the Company's Branches or Agencies. BRANCHES AND AGENXIES. Managers. ADELAIDE .. L. A. Jessop, Esq., Exchange. BRISBANE ... . W. M. Lloyd, Esq., Queen-street. CHRISTCHURCH J. D. Macpherson, Esq. Hereford-street DUNEDIN A. S. Murray, Esq., Liverpool-street. GREYMOUTH Messrs. Nancarrow and Co., Werita-street. HOKITIKA F. A. Learmonth, Esq., Revel-street. INVERCARGILL Messrs. Cargills, Gibbs and Co., Esk-street. LEVUKA Messrs. J. C. Smith and Co. LONDON Messrs. Scales and Rogers, 9, Fenchurch-street. MELBOURNE C. R. Parsons, Esq., Market Buildings. NAPIER Edward Lyndon, Esq., Browning-street, NELSON Messrs. Sclanders and Co., Hardy-street. OAMARU W. J. Smith, Esq., Thames-street. SYDNEY Messrs. M. Metcalfe and Co., 9, Bridge-street. SAN FRANCISCO (for Cali- ) { Messrs. W. J. Callingham and Co., fomia and Pacific Coast) ) ( 213, Sansome-street. TARANAKI ... ... L. H. Cholwill, Esq., Devon-street WANGANUI Morton Jones, Esq., Victoria Avenue. WELLINGTON 'Alfred Boardman, Esq., Lambton Quay. And Sub- Agencies throughout New Zealand and Australian Colonies. MUTUAL LIFE ASSOCIATION OF AUSTRALASIA. [ESTABLISHED 1869.] Head OflBlce for New Zealand : No. 7, QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAND. INDEFEASIBLE POLICIES, LOW RATES OF PREMIUM, ECONOMICAL MANAGEMENT AND UNDOUBTED SECURITY Are leading features in this the SECOND OLDEST MUTUAL LIFE OFFICE IN THESE COLONIES, And the First to Free Assurance from Restriqtions. /i j -^<^^ Vfif ♦* WILLIAM T. J. BELL, ' "^ OBIfEBAL AOENT FOB NEW ZEALAND. NORWICH UNION FIRE INSURANCE SOCIETY. [INSTITUTED 1797.] Insurances effected at Lowest current rates, W. T. J. BELL, AGENT. Il"Y".A.lsr, BELL & CO., WINE AND SPIRIT MERCHANTS. — *— ^ Agents for Robert Porter & Co.'s Ale and Stout, Bull Dog Brand, &c. ♦ No. 7, Queen Street, AUCKLAND. 6. W. OWEN & CO., IMPORTERS AND SHIPPING AGENTS. J) AGENTS: HAURAKI SAWMILLS, THAMES RIVER. AND HUiA SAWMILLS. MANUKAU HEADS. i^iug G. W. OWEN & CQ., QUEEN STREET WHARF, AUCKLAND, NEW ZEALAND HAVE ON SAL E — LARGE STOCKS OF Teas, in chests, half-chests and boxes Sugars, of various grades Flour — Adelaide, Oamaru, Christchurch, and Auckland-ground Oats, Barley, Maize, Bran, Sharps, &c. General Groceries, Dried Fruit, Jams Oilmen's Stores Confectionery, Salmon, Lobsters Sardines, Codfish, Salt, Soda, Acids Tobacco, Cigars, Vestas, Rice, &c., &c.*, &c. Hams and Bacon, Cheese and Butter Biscuit, Split Peas, Soap, Patent Medicines &c., &c., &c.' STONE BROTHERS. i A, SHIPPING AND COMMISSION AGENTS, Queen Street, AUCKLAND, NEW ZEALAND. J^Jips or ©ootis consignjti to tfjeit care taiU meet taii^ t^tx^ attention. New Zealand and South Sea Island Produce PURCHASED^ and Goods of every description INDENTED on the most favourable terms. Agents for the Sale of KAURI TIMBER— Balk, Sawn and Dressed TASMANIAN PRODUCE of every description NEWCASTLE COALS GREYMOUTH COALS ADELAIDE FLOUR (Harrison & Duffield's) SOUTHERN FLOUR (Anderson & Co/s and Wood's) BYCROFT & CO.'S (CHty Mills) FLOUR and BISCUITS .OATS, MAIZE, and all kinds of Grain xOWEN & GRAHAM, AUCKLAND, N.Z., AND 23, GREAT ST. HELEN'S, LONDON. **^ Advances made on all Island and Colonial Produce on the most favourable terms. "®* -o*<»- AGENTS FOR Shaw, Savill & Co.'s Line of Passenger Ships. ALSO FOR THE SALE OF Ashby's Fine Bitter Pale Ale, in bulk and bottle W. Edmonds, jun., & Co.'s "Pig" Stout Blood, Wolfe & Co.'s Bottled Stout and Ale B. & E. Perrier's Champagne Richards & Muller's Cognac and Claret Thom & Cameron's Rob Roy Whisky R. Leitchwood & Co.'s Perfumery, etc. DUNDEE GOODS OF ALL DESCRIPTIONS. o Begrular Importations of Goods specially suitable for the Island Trade. FINEST BRANDS OF KEROSENE AL WA YS ON HAND. 1^ o o z < ■p-l D O U ^^ ' ^ o M ♦*^ ■Wt. d o M H I o O (D CO s a> a 00- o CM CO 22 o bJ X < III P>^ o o o c_:) CO H :e> X isr G- AND COMMISSION AGENT, CUSTOMHIOUSE STREET, AUCKLAND. ROYAL MAIL HOTEL, VICTORIA AND ELLIOTT STREETS, IN THE VICINITY OF THE THEATRE, AUCKLAND. ROYAL MAIL HOTEL. First-class Hotel Accommodation Well-furnislied Bed-Eooms Well-furnished Sitting Rooms Well-furnished Dining Rooms Cold Water Bath Rooms Hot Water Bath Rooms Powerful Shower Bath Rooms Commercial Gentlemen's Stock Rooms Heavy Luggage Rooms. ROYAL MAIL TARIFF. s. d. Restaurant, per day 7 Coffee Room do 8 6 Private Room do 10 6 To Gentlemen Lunching in the City J. C. soKcits a trial to this Department. J. CODLING, "'"' PROPRIETOR. W. W. ROBINSON, (Late G. "Waller), 98, Queen Street, Auckland, WHOLESALE AND RE TALL TOBACCONLST. o VANITY FAIR AND EXCELSIOR CIGARETTES, &c. Billiard Requisites.— Cricket Materials by the best Makers* ]]Kaijana anti (^Elanilla ^ifiats. MEERSCHAUM AND G.B.D. PIPES. SOLE AGENT FOR THE CELEBRATED CLUB HOUSE CIGARS. WILLIAM LEYS, BOOKBINDEK, PAPER KULER, ACCOUNT BOOK MANUFACTURER AND NUMERICAL PRINTER. TO THE PUBLIC— Merchants' Ledgers, Cash Books, Day Books, &c., &c. Ruled to any pattern required ; Bound in all styles. Solicitors' Law Books neatly Bound ; Brief Papers Ruled to pattern. Home Magazines Bound up in all kinds of material. " London Society," " ComhiU, " Argosy," " Macmillan's," *' Leisure Hour,"' " Sunday at Home," *" Family Herald," "London Journal," "Good Words," "Quiver," in yearly and half-yearly volumes. Music and other Books Bound to order. WYNDHAM STREET, A FEW DOORS ABOVE " EVENING STAR " OFFICE. Visitors are req^tested to try a PAIR OF PHILLIPS'S 13s. 6d. TROUSERS TO MEASURE. MARVELLOUS VALUE. 170 QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAND. R. ARTHUR, Esiaie, Land, House, and General Auctioneer, COMMISSION AGENT, ETC., Queen Street, Auckland. R, A, CONFINES HIS ATTENTION EXCLUSIVELY TO AGENCY BUSINESS. [Established 1859. II ROYAL STANDARD CARRIAGE AND SPRING FACTORY, ESTABLISHED 1855. -§<=*- ALEXANDER MACKIE, IPE/OIPE/IETOE., (§urham §treet ^est, AUCKLAND. B'Y" j^Li^i^oin^Tn^dziB isnrr a? o HIS EXCELLENCY THE GOVEENOR, ETC., ETC., ETC. -r-i-TK;£:^(ft:jS?2nr3 — HEMUS & HANNA, .A.TTai^J-,JLI>rJD. NAUTICAL INSTRUMENTS. T. PEACO C K, Mathematical and Nautical Instrument Maker, shortland street, auckland, OPPOSITE THE POST OFFICE Spectacles, Telescopes, Binocular Marine Glasses, Aneroid Barometers, Sextants, Quadrants. ALL KINDS OF INSTRUMENTS IN STOCK ^instruments (JHfficimtIg Sacpaireli antJ ^lijusteti. BY SPECIAL APPOINTMENT TO His Excellency *^^^^^^^^\ *^® G-overnor. THOMAS BARNETT, Maker and Purveyor of the Celebrated STEAM MADE CAMBRIDGE SAUSAGE AND WARWICKSHIRE PORK PIE, QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAND. HENDRY & DACRE, GRAIN, PRODUCE, AND Commission Merchants, Queen Street, Auckland. M. NICCOL, SBIIIP, CTTSTO^ynS, AND Commission Agent, LOWER QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAND. HUNTER & NOLAN, WOOL, STOCK, AND STATION SALESMEN, AUCKLAND. > ^*m < STOCK LANDED, AND GOOD PADDOCKS PROVIDED. Arrangements are now complete for the holding of REGULAR AUCTION SALES of Stock, Cattle, Sheep, etc., throughout the Country Districts, in addition to the Regular Sales held at their old-established Yards in Auckland. g W. H. FENTON, I AND 82, QUEEN STREET, Opposite "Herald" Office, Auckland, ^ HATS AND CAPS OF EVERY DESGRIPTION MADE TO ORDER. GEORdE LEAHY. Dock Iron Works, customhouse street west, Ship and Engine Smith. iSutltrers* Iron SEorft, Safe, ©oors, etc. Iron Gates and Tomb Railings Made to Order on the most reasonable terms. QABEIEL LEWIS, JLTJOTIOlTEiEiK, AND COMMISSION AGENT, Queen Stkeet, Auckland. "Liberal Advances made against Merchandize consigned for Sale. E. Porter & Co., FURNISHING AND BUILDERS' IRONMONaERS, ^ S^ H H a o o o 5 H' > ? •• i^ Kj « o W w tr^ ^ ^ W W 02 fw Iron anb §M JHerchant0, C^ QUEEN AND HIGH STREETS, AUCKLAND. ESTABLISHED 1837.] [ESTABLISHED 1837. Ii|^ Mum §mk 0f l^ttstmlia, LIMITED. .Paid-up Capital - . - - £1,500,000 Reserve Funds . . _ - 816,500 £2,316,500 Reserve Liability of Proprietors - - 3,000,000 Total Capital and Reserve Funds - - £5,316,500 1 BANK BUILDINGS, LOTHBURY, LONDON. EANKERS : Bank of England, and Messrs. Glynn, Mills, Currie & Co CTolonial lEstablisiijments. Inspector and General Manager : JOHN F. McMULLEN, Esq. Chief Officer for New Zealand : JOSEPH PALMER, Esq. Assistant Inspectors : F. M. INNES, Esq. ; J. F. McMULLEN, Jux., Esq. VICTORIA,— Melhonvne, Geelong, Portland, Ballarat, Sandhurst, Stawell, o><- The Office is furnished with the Largest Assortment of MODERN JOBBING TYPE, INCLUDING THE NEWEST 6E|li^Ii & l^mewaE |i:0UjeItle INIERCANTILE PRINTING of every description executed on the shortest notice. Country Orders, received by Post, carefully attended to. Highway Notices, Rate Books, Assessment Books, printed to order on receipt of specimen. An Extensive Assortment of ELEGANT TYPE for ^fjcatrical attH 5Jjohj printing. Show Cards, Programmes, &c., in Bronze, Gold, and other Colours. Sole Proprietor of the Advertising Boards and Hoardings throughout the City and Suburbs. THE "AUCKLAND STAR," (Published Daily), WEEKLY CIRCULATION 37,500. Subscription : 30s. per Annum, payable in advance. 7/ie ''STAR" has the Largest Country Circulation of any Daily Paper Published in Auckland. THE BEST ADVERTISING MEDIUM IN NEW ZEALAND. ARTHUR H. NATHAN, SHIPPING AND COMMISSION AGENT, QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAND. L0ND3 CORRESPONDENT - - L. A. NATHAN 9 n^sTE'VsT BI^OA^ZD STI^IBET, E.G. ALSO REPRESENTED IN ^Mlt^ ^i^rh, ^mx Jffs^Vimw, ^Enbiii, @(hina. CONSIGNMENTS OF VESSELS OR MERCHANDIZE WILL HAVE EVERY CARE AND ATTENTION. And Orders for the PURCHASE of NEW ZEALAND AND ISLAND PEODUCE WILL HAVE PROMPT DESPATCH, BRET T'S AND PROVINCIAL HANDBOOK For 1881 CAREFULLY PREPARED CALENDARS and TIDE TABLES for all the Ports in New Zealand. LATEST STATISTICAL INFORMATION, and a detailed Description of tlie Provincial Districts of Auckland, together with a valuable Map, prepared by A. & K. Johnston, Edinburgh, Geographers and Engravers to the Queen, &c., &c., &c. PRICE OME SHILLING. HITCHENS'S CELEBRATED BLOOD RESTORER Is the Greatest Triumph of Modern Times. No MORE PHYSICAL DEGENERATION, if the Laws of Health are observed, ordinary care exercised, and Blood Restorer freely taken. KITCHENS' CELEBRATED BLOOD RESTORER is a certain cure for the Langour, Lassitude, and Disease which attend the Heat and Drought of semi- tropical and tropical climates. FEVERS, which so quicklv fasten on the debilitated system, may easily be kept away by the timely use of this MOST WONDERFUL REMEDY. In fact, by its use the Most Malignant of Tropical Fevers have been ejected from the human system, and by its aid Dying, Fever-stricken Men have been, as it were, Raised from the Dead. A NEVER-FAILING REMEDY for all Skin Diseases, Rheumatism in all its forms, such as Gout, Neuralgia, Sciatica, and Lumbago ; likewise cures Chronic Dysentery, and is a valuable remedy as a Family Medicine for Purifying and Cleansing the Blood. o No Bottles arc Genuine unless Bearing the Proprietor's Signature. Sold by the leading Chemists in the Colony. WALTER FEAZEE, (Late Master Ship Fcmglen), MARINE SURVEYOR. Office : W. & J. PRATER, Shortland Street, Auckland. G. L E N D R U M, Livery and Bait Stables. Buggies, Drags, and Saddle Horses on Hire. Horses Bought and Sold on Commission. QUEEN AND DURHAM STREETS, Auckland, N.Z. Orders by Post or Telegram punctually attended to. Terms moderate. WM. TENNANT, UMBRELLA AND PARASOL MANUFACTURER, No. 4, Lennox's Buildings, Upper Queen St7-eet, Auckland, N.Z., late of Grey Street. Importer of all kinds of Umbrella Ma- terials. Re-Co vERiNG and Repairs promptly done, in the best manner. Al Umbrella Depot, 4, Lennox's Buildings, Upper Queen St., ESTABLISHED 1869. [Established 1861.] HILL & HUDSON, CHEMISTS AND DRUGGISTS, 57, VICTORIA STREET, AUCKLAND. Manufacturers of NEW ZEALAND BAKING POWDER, particularly adapted for shipboard, making good Bread and light Pastry. Price 2s. Gd. and Is, 6d. per Tin. J". -A.. I^ O IST ID, WHOLESALE AND RETAIL HOMCEOPATHIC CHEMIST, 99, Queen Street, Auckland, AND 4, THE PAVEMENT, BRIXTON RISE, LONDON. COFFEE! SPICE! TEA! BROWN, BARRETT & CO., COFFEE. -Our Best Brands— the Excelsior and Standard— have sustained their good name for many years, and are appreciated by all who try them. PEPPER AND SPICES.— We guarantee as BEST QUALITY and free from adulteration. TEAS.— We iuiport dii-ect both CHINA and ASSAM, and can give the best value. BROWN, BAREETT & CO., AUCKLAND STEAM COFFEE MILLS, ELLIOTT STREET. CHASVIPTALOUP & COOPER COMMERCIAL LAW AND GENERAL STATIONERS, Booksellers and News Agents. British and Foreign l^agazines and (Newspapers supplied to ord^r, IMPORTERS OP Educational Works, School Requisites, Photo Albums Scrap Albums Pocket Photo Cases. Letter Cases Pocket Books. Purses, Leather and Pearl Card Cases Writing Desks, &c.. &c. WATER COLORS (CAKK AND MOIST), DRAWING PAPERS, AND ARTISTS' MATERIAL. C. & C. are ordering Goods by every Mail, and will procure to order any Books or other Publications from England, America or Australia. STOREKEEPERS SUPPLIED. 80, Queen Street, Auclzland. [Established 1870.] The Aiicldand Iron Works, DURHAM STREET WEST, (Next Hunter & Nolan's, and Opijosite Buckland's Sale Fards.) Improved Patent Portable Smoke- Consuming Oven and Wrought Iron Range Maker, &c. DEFERRED PAYMENTS TAKEN. H.H. SMITH Trade HIark:!®i: \AUC !■ S MITH S :kland^ V/rought.Iron Fireplace, 35s. upwards. Improved Patent Portable Imi:>rovt,(i Patent Port- .Side Ovens, 45s. upwards. able Ovens, 32s up. Wrought-Iron Improved Ship's Stoves, ;^5 I OS. upwards. CITY FLOUR MILL, SHORTLAND STREET, AUCKLAND. MESSRS. J. BYCROFT & CO. Have always on Hand VERY SUPERIOR FLOUR, AT THE LOWEST CURRENT RATES. MESSRS. J. BYCROFT & CO. teg to intimate to the Shipping community that they are Manufacturers of superior CABIN BREAD, NAVY BREAD, and SALOON BISCUITS which are allowed to be the best in the market. Also Fancy Biscuits of every description. Masters and Owners of Vessels throughout the Colonies requiring supplies will find it to their adA^antage to communicate with Messrs. J. B. & Co. ALL ORDERS FOR SHIPMENT PROMPTLY ATTENDED TO. BANK OF NEW ZEALAND, Incorporated by Act of the General Assembly. CAPITAL, £1,000,000. RESERVE FUND, ^6555,000.. Directors : Hon. James Williamson, President. Hon. F. Whitaker. I C. J. Stone, Esq. I S. Browning, Esq. W. I. Taylor, Esq. | J. C. Firth, Esq. | J. L. Campbell, EsQi Auditors : G. B. Owen, Esq. | . K. Taylor, Esq. General Manager : Inspector : David L. Murdoch, Esq. John Murray, Esq. Solicitors : Messrs. Whitaker & Russell. London Office— 1, Queen Victoria Street, Mansion House, London, E.G. Branches and Agencies in New Zealand : Grahamstown, Gisborne, Hamilton, Ngaruawahia, Cambridge, Te Awamutu,, Coromandel, Tauranga, Russell, Opotiki, Wangarei. Mangawhare, DargaviUe, New Plymouth, Carlyle (Patea), Raleigh (Waitara), Hawera, Normanby, Waverley, Halcombe, Wellington, Te Aro, Wanganui, Greytown, Marton^ Foxton, Masterton, Carterton, Featherston, Hutt, Bull, Palmerston North, Sanson, Napier, Waipawa, Wairoa, Waipukurau, Nelson, Blenheim, Picton, Kaikoura, Christchurch, Timai'u, Lyttelton, Kaiapoi, Temuka, Akaroa, Amberley, Ashburton, Geraldine, Rangiora, Southbridge, Waimate, Oxford, Leeston,. Rakaia, Dunedin, North Dunedin, Oamai-u, Tokomairiro, Invercargill, . Riverton, Queenstown, Alexandra, Naseby, Lawrence, Waitahuna, Outram, Mosgiel, Waikouaiti, Cromwell, Mataura, Wyndham, Gore, Arrow, Roxburgh, Palmerston, Clutha Ferry, Tapanui, Winton, Port Chalmers, Hokitika, Greymouth, . Westport, Charleston, Ross, Stafford, Reefton, Kumara. In Australia : Melbourne Branch— 15, Queen Street. Sydney Branch— 131, Pitt Street with Sub-branch at 538, George Street. Newcastle Branch— N.S.W. In Fiji : Levuka. The Bank of New Zealand has Agents in every part of G-reat Britain and) Ireland ; also throughout Australia and Tasmania. FOBEIGN AGENTS: India, Ceylon, Mauritius, China, Singapore, and Jojoan..— Oriental Bank Corporation. Batavia, eic— Chartered Bank of India, Australia, and China. Nevj Foi'A-.— ^Messrs. Drexel, Morgan, and Co., Bank of Montreal. Boston, ?7.S.— Messrs. Blake Brothers. Philadelphia, ?7.S.— Messrs. Drexel and Co. Canada.— B&nk. of British North America, Bank of Monti-eal. California —Bank of California, Bank of British Columbia, Bank of British. North America, Anglo-Californian Bank. Honohdu. — Messrs. Bishop and Co. Valparaiso.— Ba.nco Nacional de Cliile. Mexico, Peru, and the United States of Columbia.— 'London Bank of Mexico- and South America. South Africa. -Bank of Africa, Standard Bank of British South Africa. ^Ze^anfZ?'ia.— Credit Lyonnais. The Bank of New Zealand are Bankers to the General Government of New Zealand. Drafts are issued and Credits granted at any Office in New Zealand upon any other Branch or Agency of the Bank or upon its British or Foreign agents. Bills upon any part of the Colony, or wherever the Bank is represented in'^ Australia, or elsewhere, are negotiated, and Moneys Collected for Constituents. Current Rates of Interest given in the Colony for Deposits, and every descrip- tion of Banking business within the Colony, or between New Zealand and Australia,. Great Britain, India, China, California, etc., transacted on favourable terms. LOAN AND MERCANTILE AGENCY COMPANY (Limited). CaDital (Subscribed) - £3,000,0001 In 120,000 Shares, of £25 each. Reserve Fund - - - £160,000. Home Directors Emanuel Boiitcher, Esq. A. J. Mundella, Esq. E. W. Stafford, Esq. Thomas Russell, Esq. Falconer Larkworthy, Esq. Robert Porter, Esq. Colonial Directors: J. Logan Campbell, Esq. J. C. Firth, Esq. G. Burgoyne Owen, Esq. C. J. Stone, Esq. D. Limond Murdoch, Esq. .L.C. Hon. J. Williamson, M. BANKERS : THE BANK OF NEW ZEALAND Managing Director, London - - Falconer Larkworthy, Esq» Managing Director, Colonies - - D. Limond Murdoch, Esq. Secretary for London - - - Henry Moncrieff" Paul, Esq* Secretary for Colonies .... Frederick Battley, Esq, Head Oflfice : No. 1, Queen Victoria Street, Mansion House^ London, B C Colonial Ofl3.ces In New Zealand .' Auckland, Christclmrch, Dunedin, Invercargill, Wellington, Wanganui, Napier, Blenheim, Timaru, and Oamaru. In Melbourne : David Elder, Esq., Manager, 46, William Street. In Sydney : E. B. Holt, Esq., Agent, 1, Queen-street. In LeVUka (Fiji J: J- M. Butt, Esq., Agent. And the Managers and Agents of the Bank of New Zealand act as Agents for the Company in all other parts of New Zealand, and in Newcastle. N.S.W. The Company Makes Advances in the Colony on the Stations and Stocks of Runholders and on the Growing Clips of Wool ; and receives the consignment of Wool and other Produce for sale in London. STODDARD'S TEMPERANCE FAMILY & COMMERCIAL HOTEL, MANCHESTER STREET, Near Railway Station, CHRISTCHURCH. This Commodious Hotel, which is now complete, is admitted to be THE GRANDEST AND LARGEST TEMPERANCE HOTEL in NEW ZEALAND— fitted up with all the LATEST IMPROVE- MENTS with a view to comfort of visitors. SUITES OF ROOMS FOR FAMILIES. HOT, COLD, & SHOWER BATHS. EARLY BREAKFAST FOR TRAVELLERS BY FIRST TRAIN. Lunch fkom 12 to 2. Dinnee at 6. GRILLED STEAKS AND CHOPS TO ORDER AT ANY HOUR. ]^"CLOSE AT 12 MIDNKGHT. TERMS MODERATE. THE WONDERFUL RESULTS FROM y^fAU/^Ax ri9 y^^^^^ /■/y-^/^- d^aiC^//y?r in the treatment of Pulmonary and Kronchitic complaints verifies Dr. McCall Anderson's state- ment (page i8o, Clinical Lectures — Galloping Consumption) " That such, then, are the kind of cases which should be brought under the notice of those who. in these days of scepticism, are inclined to sneer at the efficacy of drugs." The Hvpophosphites have made their way with the public and the profession against determined prejudice, and are now fully adopted as being indispensable in treating Tuberculous Consumption and Lung Complaints generally. The Curative effect of the EUCALYP.TUS, OR BLUE GUM, on Bronchial Mucous Membranes has been lately established upon the crucial test of experience, and the combination of Eucalyptus with the Hypophosphitcs has proved to be eminently EFFICACIOUS in actual practice. Many sufferers from Chest Affections have testified to the marked improvement, the reparative action, and the vigorous freedom imparted to the Lungs, after commencing the use of this LUNG-HEALING REMEDY. A trial of this preparation will prove to be atjjonce a source of improved health and intense gratification to desponding sufferers. Under its mfluence the expectoration comes freely from the chest, and gradually lessens in quantity, the cough also decreases, and soon ceases, the appetite increases, weakening night sweats are checked, and a vital reparative action would appear to be taking place in the diseased lung tissues. The patient also gains in weight whilst taking the SYRUP OF EUCALYPTUS WITH HYPOPHOSPHITES OF LIME AND QUININE. Sold in Bottles at 3s. M. each. THIE Prepared at QUEEN-STREET, AUCKLAND. MESSRS. SHARLAND & CO., FAMILY&DISPENSING CHEMISTS, WHOLESALE DRUGGISTS, APO THE CARIES' HALL, Opposite the Post Office, Auckland. PEESCRIPTIONS ACCUEATELY DISPENSED, MEDICINE CHESTS FITTED UP. DRUGS, CHEMICALS, AND PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS ; PATENT AND FAMILY MEDICINES: HOMCEOPATHIC MEDICINES ; MEDICATED LOZENGES; NURSERr AND TOILET REQUISITES, ETC. MEDICINES DESPATCHED TO ALL PARTS OF THE COLONY. THE NEW ZEALAND COCKROACH EXTERMINATOR.-This will effectually clear ships of these troublesome insects. NOBEL'S PATENT DYNAMITE To Contractors, Miners, Quarrymen, and Others. E. PORTER & CO. (Sole Agents for the North I stand for the above Dynamite BEG to call attention to the REDUCTION in the PRICE of NOBEL'S BEST, or No. 1 DYNAMITE, which is now being, sold at j^" Two Shillings and Sixi)ence Ur lb.. With Liberal Discount to the Trade and Large Buyers. Also to its great strength as compared with other explosives. After- repeated trials by the largest contractors in the Australasian Colonies the results prove beyond dispute that " NOBEL'S " DYNAMITE is- the most j^owerful and economical, being fully Fifteen Per Cent, stronger than the Australian-made Dynamite and Lithofracteur. NOBEL'S DYNAMITE 75 Unequalled for the folloioing purposes : — Mining, Quarrying, Blasting (in hard or soft, wet or dry rock), Tunnelling, Breaking up of Wrecks and Sunken Rocks, Splitting Tree-stumps, Boulders, etc., etc. No Danger from Tamping. Its SAFETY has been completely demonstrated by the absence of accidents, either in transit, in storeage, or in any legitimate use. It is insensible to heavy shocks, a percussion cap being required to develop its giant power. Printed Instructions for using issued with every package. Necessary Double Tape Fuze and Caps always in Stock. Price Reduced. Twenty Tons of the aToove Just Landed. E. PORTER # CO. Hardware Merchants, Auckland. STEAMSHIP COMPANY OF ZEALAND NEW LIMITED. REGULAR STEAM COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AUSTRALIA, NEW ZEALAND AND COASTAL PORTS. Under Contract with the New Zealand Govern- ment for the Conveyance of Inter-Colonial and Inter-Provincial Mails, FLEET OF STEAMERS. Gross Rtg. I.H.P. ROTOMAHANA 1727 2000 WAKATIPU 1796 1250 TE ANAU 1652 1500 ARAWATA 1098 1250 RINGAROOMA 1096 1250 ROTORUA 926 900 HERO 985 750 ALBION 806 800 TARARUA 828 750 PENGUIN 749 HAWEA 720 WANAKA 493 TAIAROA 460 LADYBIRD 421 WAITAKI 412 WELLINGTON 174 MAORI 383 BEAUTIFUL STAR... 176 Gross Reg. I.H.P. 900 850 600 500 450 450 300 400 150 mi #ffet 4 JAMES MILLS, Managing Director. LONDON OFFICE .. 18, W A LB ROOK, B.C. [ESTABLISHED [8S4-.1 W. PHILLIPPS & SON, IMPOETEKS OF PAPEEHANGINGS AND PANEL DECORATIONS. Ho I .o Co •+0 CO o Scrims and Hessians, Silvered, Polished & Rough Plate, Sheet, Ornamental, and Silver Fluted Glass. GLAZIERS' DIAMONDS, ©lass SijaUes, pi}otograpi)ers' ©lass, 33at!)S ant( ©isi}es. White Lead, Zinc White, Oils, Turps, Paints, Colours, Varnishes, Brushes, Gold and Silver Leaf, and Bronzes. TRADE IRONMONGERF AND TOOLS, AND EVERY DESCRIITION OF PAINTERS' MATERIALS. Gilt, Stained, and Veneered (Picture Frame, Room, and Cornice) MOULDINGS. Oak, Velvet, Ivory, and other Fancy Frames. 2 Co S3 OIL PAINTING-a Oleographs, Chromographs, Photographs, Engravings, Prints, Scraps, etc. Photo and Scrap Albums. , Artists' Canvas, Paper, Colours, Brushes, etc. Mounts and Mounting Boards. Sole Agents in Northern Island for Maxo & Co., ENCAUSTIC TILE MANUFACTURERS. Nos. 95 & 97, QUEEN STREET, AUCKLAHD ; AND POLLEN STREET, SHORTLAND. (ESTABLISHED 1861.) SADDLER, ETC., TO HIS EXCELLENCY BY APPOINTMENT THE GOVERNOR. :55 J. WISEMAN, 113, Queen-street, Auckland, New Zealand, supplies all kinds of Saddlery and Harness suitable for the Colonies. Also Portmanteaus, Valises, Gaiters (over 20 varieties), Havresacks, School Bags, Knife Sheaths, &c. J. W.'s Station Saddles for £3 10s. Have a very extensive assortment. His Pack Saddles for hilly countries cannot be surpassed. During the late war in New Zealand they gave such satisfaction that the British Government adopted them for the Abyssinian campaign. They are now used as Army Saddles, and acknowledged to be the best invented. J. W. has for many years supplied all kinds of Saddlery, Har- ness, &c., for the different Islands in the South Pacific. A liberal Discount allowed to wholesale buyers. [Established 1853.] EDWAED WATTE, WHOLESALE, RETAIL, AND MANUFACTURING STATIONER, PUBLISHER AND BOOKSELLEE, QUEEN STEEET, AUCKLAND. N,jB. — All the Best English, American and Atts- tralian Newspapers, Magazines and Reviews are received regularly by Mail steamers and forwarded to subscriber's. NOREIE'S EPITOME, AINSLEY'S GUIDE, NAUTICAL ALMANACS ALWAYS ON HAND.